initial commit of ebook 37814HEADmain

41 files changed, 23319 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/37814-8.txt b/37814-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf5422f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6973 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Story of Magellan and The Discovery of
+the Philippines, by Hezekiah Butterworth
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Story of Magellan and The Discovery of the Philippines
+
+Author: Hezekiah Butterworth
+
+Illustrator: Frank T. Merrill
+
+Release Date: October 21, 2011 [EBook #37814]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE STORY OF MAGELLAN ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Charlene Taylor, Eric Skeet, Marilynda
+Fraser-Cunliffe and the Online Distributed Proofreading
+Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was made using scans
+of public domain works from the University of Michigan
+Digital Libraries.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Transcriber's Notes:
+(1) Typos, punctuation, and spelling errors have been corrected.
+(2) Footnotes are marked [A], and placed at the end of the paragraph.
+
+
+
+
+THE STORY OF MAGELLAN AND THE DISCOVERY OF THE PHILIPPINES
+
+BY HEZEKIAH BUTTERWORTH.
+
+Uniform edition. Each, 12mo, cloth, $1.50.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+=The Story of Magellan.= A Tale of the Discovery of the Philippines.
+Illustrated by F. T. Merrill and Others.
+
+=The Treasure Ship.= A Story of Sir William Phipps and the Inter-Charter
+Period in Massachusetts. Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst and Others.
+
+=The Pilot of the Mayflower.= Illustrated by H. Winthrop Peirce and
+Others.
+
+=True to his Home.= A Tale of the Boyhood of Franklin. Illustrated by H.
+Winthrop Peirce.
+
+=The Wampum Belt:= _or, The Fairest Page of History._ A Tale of William
+Penn's Treaty with the Indians. With 6 full-page Illustrations.
+
+=The Knight of Liberty.= A Tale of the Fortunes of Lafayette. With 6
+full-page Illustrations.
+
+=The Patriot Schoolmaster.= A Tale of the Minutemen and the Sons of
+Liberty. With 6 full-page Illustrations by H. Winthrop Peirce.
+
+=In the Boyhood of Lincoln.= A Story of the Black Hawk War and the
+Tunker Schoolmaster. With 12 Illustrations and colored Frontispiece.
+
+=The Boys of Greenway Court.= A Story of the Early Years of Washington.
+With 10 full-page Illustrations.
+
+=The Log School-House on the Columbia.= With 13 full-page Illustrations
+by J. Carter Beard, E. J. Austen, and Others.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.
+
+
+[Illustration: Magellan planting the Cross in the Philippine Islands.]
+
+
+
+
+      THE STORY OF MAGELLAN
+               AND
+ THE DISCOVERY OF THE PHILIPPINES
+
+               BY
+
+      HEZEKIAH BUTTERWORTH
+
+    AUTHOR OF
+    THE TREASURE SHIP, THE PILOT OF THE MAYFLOWER,
+    TRUE TO HIS HOME, THE WAMPUM BELT,
+    IN THE BOYHOOD OF LINCOLN, ETC.
+
+    _ILLUSTRATED BY FRANK T. MERRILL
+    AND OTHERS_
+
+    [Illustration: Publishers' logo]
+
+    NEW YORK
+    D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
+    1899
+
+   COPYRIGHT, 1899,
+
+   BY D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.
+
+
+      "Fired by thy fame,[A] and with his King in ire
+      To match thy deed, shall Magalhaes aspire.
+
+      "Along the regions of the burning zone,
+      To deepest South he dares the course unknown.
+
+      "A land of giants shall his eyes behold,
+      Of camel strength, surpassing human mould.
+
+      "Beneath the Southern star's gold gleam he braves
+      And stems the whirl of land-surrounded waves.
+
+      "Forever movèd to the hero's fame,
+      Those foaming straits shall bear his deathless name."
+                                                CAMOËNS.
+
+          [A] Vasco da Gama.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+I have been asked to write a story of Ferdinand Magellan, the value of
+whose discoveries has received a new interpretation in the development
+of the South Temperate Zone of America, and in the ceding of the
+Philippine Islands to the United States. The works of Lord Stanley and
+of Guillemard furnish comprehensive histories of the intrepid discoverer
+of the South Pacific Ocean and the Philippine Islands; but there would
+seem to be room for a short, picturesque story of Magellan's adventures,
+such as might be read by family lamps and in schools.
+
+To attempt to write such a story is more than a pleasure, for the study
+of Magellan reveals a character high above his age; a man unselfish and
+true, who was filled with a passion for discovery, and who sought the
+welfare of humanity and the glory of the Cross rather than wealth or
+fame. Among great discoverers he has left a character well-nigh ideal.
+The incidents of his life are not only honorable, but usually have the
+color of chivalry.
+
+His voyages, as pictured by his companion Pigafetta, the historian, give
+us our first view of the interesting native inhabitants of the South
+Temperate Zone and of the Pacific archipelagoes, and his adventures with
+the giants of Patagonia and with the natives of the Ladrone Islands,
+read almost like stories of Sinbad the Sailor. The simple record of his
+adventures is in itself a storybook.
+
+Magellan, from his usually high and unselfish character, as well as for
+the lasting influence of what he did as shown in the new developments of
+civilization, merits a place among household heroes; and it is in this
+purpose and spirit I have undertaken a simple sympathetic interpretation
+of his most noble and fruitful life. I have tried to put into the form
+of a story the events whose harvests now appear after nearly four
+hundred years, and to picture truthfully a beautiful and inspiring
+character. To the narrative of his lone lantern I have added some tales
+of the Philippines.
+
+                                                      H. BUTTERWORTH.
+
+    28 WORCESTER STREET, BOSTON, MASS.
+
+
+
+
+                              CONTENTS.
+
+
+    CHAPTER                                                  PAGE
+
+    I.--A STRANGE ROYAL ORDER                                   1
+
+    II.--FRIENDS WITH A PURPOSE                                 9
+
+    III.--PRINCE HENRY THE NAVIGATOR AND VASCO DA GAMA         15
+
+    IV.--THE ENTHUSIASTS CARRY THEIR PLANS TO THE KING         24
+
+    V.--ABOUT THE HAPPY ITALIAN WHO WISHED TO SEE THE
+    WORLD.--BEAUTIFUL SEVILLE!                                 38
+
+    VI.--ENEMIES.--ESTEBAN GORMEZ                              43
+
+    VII.--"MAROONED"                                           52
+
+    VIII.--"THE WONDERS OF NEW LANDS."--PIGAFETTA'S TALES OF
+    HIS ADVENTURES WITH MAGELLAN.--THE STORY OF "THE
+    FOUNTAIN TREE."--"ST ELMO'S FIRE"                          60
+
+    IX.--PINEAPPLES, POTATOES, VERY OLD PEOPLE                 70
+
+    X.--THE FIRST GIANT.--THE ISLANDS OF GEESE AND
+    GOSLINGS.--THE DANCING GIANTS                              76
+
+    XI.--CAPTURING A GIANT.--MAGELLAN'S DECISION               84
+
+    XII.--THE MUTINY AT PORT JULIAN.--THE STRAITS.--1519       91
+
+    XIII.--"THE ADMIRAL WAS MAD!"                              99
+
+    XIV.--THE PACIFIC.--THE DEATH OF THE GIANTS               103
+
+    XV.--WELCOME TO THE PHILIPPINES!                          108
+
+    XVI.--THE VISIT OF THE KING.--PIGAFETTA VISITS THE KING   116
+
+    XVII.--EASTER SUNDAY.--MAGELLAN PLANTS THE CROSS          122
+
+    XVIII.--CHRISTIANITY AND TRADE ESTABLISHED.--THE
+    BAPTISM OF THE QUEEN                                      129
+
+    XIX.--HALCYON DAYS                                        136
+
+    XX.--THE DEATH OF MAGELLAN                                139
+
+    XXI.--THE SPICE ISLANDS.--WONDERFUL BIRDS.--CLOVES,
+    CINNAMON, NUTMEGS, GINGER.--THE SHIPS OVERLOADED          144
+
+    XXII.--MESQUITA IN PRISON                                 157
+
+    XXIII.--STRANGE STORIES.--THE WISE OLD WOMEN.--THE
+    WALKING LEAVES.--THE HAUNTED SANDALWOOD TREES.--THE
+    EMPEROR OF CHINA.--THE LITTLE BOY AND THE GIANT BIRD      161
+
+    XXIV.--THE LOST DAY                                       173
+
+    XXV.--IN THE CHURCH OF OUR LADY OF VICTORY.--PIGAFETTA    176
+
+    SUPPLEMENTAL                                              182
+
+
+
+
+                LIST OF FULL-PAGE ILLUSTRATIONS.
+
+
+                                                            FACING
+                                                             PAGE
+
+    Magellan planting the Cross in the Philippine Islands _Frontispiece_
+
+    Lisbon, from the south bank of the Tagus                    4
+
+    Ferdinand Magellan                                          6
+
+    "He is a renegade. His arms must come down!"               18
+
+    Barcelona                                                  34
+
+    Night after night the ships followed Magellan's lantern    55
+
+    Interior of the Alcázar of Seville                         60
+
+    The dancing giant                                          80
+
+    Mount Mayon, on the Island of Luzon                       125
+
+    The death of Magellan                                     142
+
+    Pigafetta presenting the history of the voyage to the
+    King of Spain                                             179
+
+    Map of the Philippine Islands                             187
+
+    Native houses in Manila                                   190
+
+    Hong Kong                                                 202
+
+    Iloilo                                                    206
+
+    Boats on the River Pasig                                  218
+
+
+
+
+               THE STORY OF MAGELLAN.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+A STRANGE ROYAL ORDER.
+
+
+I am to tell the story of a man who had faith in himself.
+
+The clouds and the ocean bear his name. Lord Stanley has called him "the
+greatest of ancient and modern navigators."
+
+That was a strange royal order, indeed, which Dom Manoel, King of
+Portugal, issued in the early part of the fifteenth century. It was in
+effect: "Go to the house of Hernando de Magallanes, in Sabrosa, and tear
+from it the coat of arms. Hernando de Magallanes (Ferdinand Magellan)
+has transferred his allegiance to the King of Spain."
+
+The people of the mountain district must have been very much astonished
+when the cavaliers, if such they were, appeared to execute this order.
+
+As the arms were torn away from the ancient house, we may imagine the
+alcalde of the place inquiring:
+
+"What has our townsman done? Did he not serve our country well in the
+East?"
+
+"He is a renegade!" answers the commander.
+
+"But he carried his plans for discovery to our own King first before he
+went to the court of Spain."
+
+"Say no more! Spain is reaping the fruits of his brain, and under his
+lead is planting her colonies in the new seas, to the detriment of our
+country and the shame of the throne. His arms must come down. Portugal
+rejects his name forever!"
+
+The officers of the King tore down the arms. They thought they had
+consigned the name for which the arms stood to oblivion. As the Jewish
+hierarchy said of Spinoza: "Let his name be cast out under the whole
+heavens!" That name rose again.
+
+Years passed and a nephew of Magellan inherited one of the family
+estates. He was stoned in the streets on account of his name. This man
+fled in exile from Portugal to Brazil. He died there, and said: "Let no
+heir or descendant of mine ever restore the arms of my family."
+
+In his will he wrote:
+
+"I desire that the arms of my family (Magellan) should remain forever
+obliterated, as was done by order of my Lord and King, _as a punishment
+for the crime_ of Ferdinand Magellan, because he entered the service of
+Castile to the injury of our kingdom."
+
+It is the history of this same Ferdinand Magellan, whom Portugal and
+his own family sought to crush out from the world, that we are now about
+to trace.
+
+Following his highest inspiration, he shut his eyes to the present, and
+followed the light of the star of destiny in his soul. His discovery
+seems to open to the West the doors of China.
+
+He was filled from boyhood with a passion for finding unknown lands and
+waters; he was haunted by ideals and visions of noble exploits for the
+good of mankind. His own country, Portugal, would not listen to his
+projects at the time that he offered them to the court; so, like
+Columbus, Vespucci, and Cabot, he sought the favor of another country.
+Nothing could stand before the high purpose of his soul. "If not by
+Portugal, then by Spain," he said to an intimate friend; meaning that,
+if his own country denied him the favor of giving him an opportunity for
+exploration, he would present his cause to the court of Spain, which he
+did.
+
+This man, whose real name was Fernao de Magalhaes, was born about the
+year 1480, at Sabrosa, in Portugal, a wintry district where the hardy
+soil and the "gloomy grandeur" of the mountain scenery produced men of
+strong bodies and lofty spirit. He belonged to a noble family, "one of
+the noblest in the kingdom." His boyhood was passed in the sierras. He
+had a love of works of geography and travel, and he dreamed even then
+of sunny zones, undiscovered waters, and unknown regions of the world.
+Henry the Navigator and his school of pilots, astronomers, and
+explorers, had left the country full of the spirit of new discoveries
+which yet lived.
+
+He went to the capital of Portugal to be educated, and was made a page
+to the Queen. He was yet a boy when Columbus returned, bringing the
+enthralling news of a new world. Spain was filled with excitement at the
+event; her cities rang with jubilees by day and flared with torches at
+night. Portugal caught the new spirit of her late King, Henry the
+Navigator, and was ambitious to rival the discoveries of Spain. She had
+already established herself in the glowing realms of India.
+
+In 1509 Magellan went to the West Indies in the service of the
+Portuguese Government. He joined the expedition that discovered the
+Spice Islands of Banda, and it became his conviction that these islands
+could be reached by a new ocean way.
+
+A great vision arose in his mind. It was a suggestion that never left
+him until he saw its fulfillment in an unexpected way on seas of which
+he never had dreamed.
+
+This view was that he could sail around the world and reach the Spice
+Islands by the way of the West.
+
+[Illustration: Lisbon, from the south bank of the Tagus.]
+
+In the service of the King against the Moors in one of the Portuguese
+wars, he received a wound which healed, but left him lame for life. He,
+like other officers, sent in his claim for the pension due to such
+service. He received answer from the parsimonious King (Dom Manoel):
+
+"Your claim is not good. Your wound has healed."
+
+He was wounded more deeply by this insult than he could have been by any
+poisoned dart from the Moors. That he should have been refused the
+recognition of those who had shed blood in his country's cause rankled
+in his heart, especially as he saw his comrades paraded in honor and
+pensioned for lesser disabilities. He left Portugal, as an exile, and
+went to Spain.
+
+Here the high aspirations of the lame soldier met with recognition, and
+it was this service that caused the Portuguese King to issue the strange
+order which has introduced the young and high-spirited grandee to the
+readers of this story.
+
+If he had faults--as far as history records he had no vices--his high
+aim overcame them. He had caught the spirit of Portuguese Henry the
+Navigator, and his soul had glowed when the fame of Columbus first
+thrilled Spain. He had learned the history of Vasco da Gama, whose name
+was the glory of Portugal. He had educated himself for action.
+
+[Illustration: Ferdinand Magellan. After a painting by Velasquez.]
+
+It was the age of opportunity. He saw it; he could not know the way,
+but he knew the guide that was in him. As a son of the Church, which he
+then was, he consecrated all he had to her glory. What was fame, what
+was wealth, what was anything to becoming a benefactor of the world, and
+living forever in the heart of all mankind?
+
+So his deserted house crumbed in Sabrosa, and his coat of arms did not
+there reappear until centuries had followed the course of his genius,
+and the whole world came to know his worth.
+
+In view of recent events his character becomes one of the most
+interesting of past history.
+
+After nearly four hundred years that cast-out name rises like a star!
+
+Why, in the view of to-day, was that name cast out?
+
+Because Magellan saw his duty in a larger life than in the restrictions
+of a provincial court. The lesson has its significance. He who sinks
+self and policy, and follows his highest duty and enters the widest
+field, will in the final judgment of man receive the noblest and best
+reward.
+
+We love a lover of mankind, and it strengthens faith and hope to follow
+the keel of such a sailor on any sea.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+FRIENDS WITH A PURPOSE.
+
+
+Souls kindle kindred souls, and the inspirations of friendship commonly
+form a part of the early history of beneficent lives.
+
+One of Magellan's early friends was Francisco Serrao, who sailed with
+him for Malacca, a great mart of merchandise in the East. It was to him
+that Magellan wrote that he would meet him again in the East, "if not by
+the way of Portugal, by that of Spain;" words of signal import, which we
+have already quoted.
+
+Serrao had a very curious, romantic, and pathetic history. He lived in
+the times of the Portuguese Viceroys of India. He was made captain of a
+ship which sought to explore the Spice Islands, which were then held to
+be the paradise of the East. Cloves and nutmegs then were luxuries, and
+when brought to Portugal bore the flavor of the sun lands of the far-off
+mysterious seas.
+
+At Banda ships were loaded with spices. On sailing there Serrao suffered
+shipwreck and was cast upon a reef and found refuge on a deserted
+island. The place was a resort of pirates or wreckers. Some pirates
+sighted the wreck of the ship and sought to plunder the wreckage.
+
+"We have no ship, and the island is without food or water," said Serrao
+to his men. "Hide under the rock and obey me, and we will soon have a
+ship and water and food."
+
+The men hid among the caverns of the reef. The pirates landed, and left
+their ship for the wreckage.
+
+Serrao rushed through the surf, followed by his men, and boarded the
+pirates' vessel.
+
+The wreckers were filled with terror when they saw what would be their
+fate if left there, and they begged to be taken on board, and were
+received by Serrao as prisoners.
+
+Serrao traded for many years among the Spice Islands and was advanced to
+high positions, but was poisoned at last, as is supposed, by an intrigue
+of the King of Tidor.
+
+One of the most inspiring of Magellan's friends was Ruy Faleiro, who had
+wonderful instincts and a wide vision, but who became a madman. Faleiro
+was a Portuguese who, like Magellan, was out of favor with the court. He
+was an astronomer, a geographer, and an astrologer. He had a fiery and
+impulsive temper, but with it a passion for discovery, and so was drawn
+into Magellan's heart by gravitation. The two journeyed together,
+studied together, and started at about the same time for Spain. At
+Seville they met in a club of famous discoverers, students, and
+refugees.
+
+They had one vision in common, that there was a short route to the
+Moluccas by the way of the West. The route was not what they dreamed it
+to be; but there was a new way to the Spice Islands by the West and
+East, a way that probably no voyager from Europe had ever seen, and
+their vision was decisive of one of the greatest events--the
+circumnavigation of the world. The angle of vision was not true in their
+private meetings, nor had Magellan's been before they met; but another
+angle leading from it was true, and would cause a change of the
+conception of the world when poor Ruy Faleiro's brain was losing its
+hold on such entrancing hopes.
+
+"We can reach Molucca by a short voyage to the West," said Ruy Faleiro.
+
+"I am sure that I can do this, if I can have an expedition such as the
+King of Spain can give me," said Magellan.
+
+"You must never communicate this secret to any man," said Ruy.
+
+"I will never mention the subject to any but you," said Magellan, "until
+we can act together."
+
+The vision of finding the East by a short passage to the West, involved
+so great a prospect of human progress and glory that it would not let
+Magellan rest at any time. It haunted him wherever he went. He began to
+talk about it under restraint, and friends came to see what was on his
+mind and to take advantage of it.
+
+[Illustration: The earliest map of the world. By Hecatæus of Miletus
+(sixth century B.C.). Probably copied in part from Anaximander, inventor
+of map drawing.]
+
+The fiery Ruy Faleiro, when he found that his friend had opened their
+confidential secret, partly broke friendship with him. Magellan could
+only acknowledge his error, and say that he never meant in his heart to
+betray the secrets of his friend, the cosmographer.
+
+Faleiro dreamed on, but his mind weakened.
+
+The popular legend about this unhappy man was, that being an astrologer
+he cast his own horoscope, and found that the expedition that he hoped
+to command would be lost, and so feigned madness. This is only a story.
+
+Faleiro died in Seville about 1523.
+
+It would be interesting to know if he lived to hear of the great
+discovery of his old friend Magellan, and if he joined in the general
+rejoicing over it. It is probable that he lived to see the strange ways
+by which his countryman had been led, not over a short passage, but over
+far-distant seas. His was a pitiable fate; but his name merits honorable
+mention among men, who, like Miranda in South America, have inspired
+great deeds which they themselves could not accomplish.
+
+Men of vision and men of action are essential to each other; for many
+men can see what only a few others can perform.
+
+Magellan married Beatriz Barbosa about the year 1518. He was the father
+of one son. His wife died shortly after hearing the news of his great
+discovery of the Pacific and the new way to the East.
+
+He was now prepared to go to Charles V, King of Spain, son of the
+demented Queen Joanna, the daughter of Isabella, and to lay before him a
+plan of opening a short way to the East by sailing West. This purpose
+more and more absorbed his soul--he himself was nothing, discovery was
+everything. The frown of Portugal no longer cast any deep shadow over
+his life; it was his mission to _find_. He heard in the acclaim of
+Columbus a prophecy of what his own name would one day be.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+PRINCE HENRY THE NAVIGATOR AND VASCO DA GAMA.
+
+
+All things follow suggestion and inspiration, and the discovery of the
+Western World owes much to the heart and brain of Prince Henry, called
+the Navigator. Although the son of a King, he felt that he was more than
+that--a son of Humanity. He took up his residence far from the pomp of
+courts on the bleak, bare, solitary promontory of Sagres, the sharp
+angle of Western Europe. Here he could see the sun go down on the
+western sea, day by day. Some inward genius like a haunting spirit
+seemed to beckon his thoughts toward the West.
+
+In view of his abode on a tall headland were the ruins of a Druidical
+temple, where Strabo tells us the gods used to assemble at night under
+the moon and stars. So the place was called the Sacrum Promontorium, and
+it was in this region that Prince Henry schooled his soul in navigation
+and sought to inspire all adventurers upon the sea. "Farther" was his
+motto, and "Farther yet!" In his solitude he called to him a company of
+restless spirits with a passion for discovery, and said to them all,
+"Farther," and "Farther yet!"
+
+The night of the dark ages was passing, and in the new dawn of
+civilization, Prince Henry had visions of new ways to India, the
+magnificent; the land of gold, gems, and spices, where the sun shone on
+gardens of palms and seas of glory.
+
+There were no lighthouses then on the African coast; there were no sea
+charts, and the compass was but little known. But there were eternal
+stars, and under them were the living instincts that awaken genius.
+
+Prince Henry the Navigator was the fourth son of King Joao I, or John
+the Great, and of Queen Philippa, of the Roses. He was a great-grandson
+of Edward III, of England.
+
+Prince Henry's motto was "_Talent de bien faire_"--"talent of good
+faculty." The motto furnishes in brief a history of his life.
+
+The first fruit of Prince Henry's geographical studies was the discovery
+of the islands of Madeira; but there were islands beyond Madeira, and
+his restless spirit cried out in the night: "Farther!" and "Farther
+yet!"
+
+Cape Bojador, farther "than the farthest point of the earth," rose just
+before the supposed regions of sea monsters, fire, and darkness. Prince
+John sent a navigator there, and found serene seas.
+
+[Illustration: PROGRESS OF PORTUGUESE DISCOVERY]
+
+"Farther!"
+
+In 1446 the Prince obtained a charter of the Canary Islands. His ships
+next discovered the Azores. But there were lands and islands and seas
+"farther yet."
+
+[Illustration: Prince Henry the Navigator. From a drawing by Allegra
+Eggleston, in The Story of Columbus.]
+
+Prince Henry died in 1463, about thirty years before the triumph of
+Columbus.
+
+He was the father of modern discovery, the spirit of which rested not
+until the map of the whole world could be drawn. He was buried in a
+splendid tomb, and the pupils of his school of cosmography and
+navigation continued to penetrate the ocean farther and farther to the
+South and West. Vasco da Gama opened the ocean ways to India, and the
+two great navigators, Columbus and Magellan, owed much to the spirit of
+the Prince who left courts that he might found a school amid the sea
+desolations of St. Vincent, in order to inspire young sailors to venture
+always "Farther!" and "Farther yet!"
+
+[Illustration: "He is a renegade. His arms must come down!" (See page
+2.)]
+
+We must here tell you something of Vasco da Gama, in order that you may
+better understand the plan and purpose of Magellan.
+
+Take your map of the world. Before the passage to India was discovered
+by sailing around the Cape of Good Hope, Africa, the trade between Asia
+and Europe was carried on in this manner: There was a great commercial
+city on the southern coast of Arabia (Arabia Felix) called Alda, or Port
+Alda. It was a city of merchants. To this port came the ships from the
+East--China, Japan, India--laden with gold, silk, and spices. The
+merchants of Alda carried these goods to the Port of Suez on the Red
+Sea. Thence the merchandise was conveyed on camels to the Nile and to
+Alexandria, Egypt, and thence by ships to the ports of the
+Mediterranean.
+
+Vasco da Gama discovered a new way to India by doubling the Cape of Good
+Hope, and when he returned from that voyage all Europe rang with his
+praise. His discovery of the way to India from the Mediterranean by
+rounding Africa was one of the most momentous ever made. Vasco da Gama
+holds rank with Columbus in the unveiling of the mysteries of the ocean
+world.
+
+King John the Navigator had heard such wonderful tales of India that he
+wished to find a way there by water. He accordingly sent one Bartholomeu
+Diaz on an expedition with this end in view. Diaz did not find India,
+but he found a cape on the southernmost point of Africa, which he
+doubled.
+
+So fearful were the tempests there that he called it the Cape of Storms.
+
+But King John saw that the islands of India lay in that direction, and
+he exclaimed in delight on hearing Diaz's narrative of the tempestuous
+place:
+
+"'Tis the Cape of Good Hope!" This gave the cape its name.
+
+A Jewish astrologer told Dom Manoel, King of Portugal, that the riches
+of India could yet be found by way of the sea. Of such a discovery the
+new King dreamed. Who should he get to undertake a voyage with such a
+purpose?
+
+One day, as he sat in his halls among his courtiers and grandees
+studying maps, a man of about thirty years, who had a noble bearing,
+entered an outer apartment. A sword hung by his side.
+
+The King, who had been thinking of his great mariners, lifted his face
+and said:
+
+"Thank God! I have found my man. Bring to me Vasco da Gama."
+
+He it was that stood in the outer hall.
+
+"Vasco," said the King, "I know your soul. For the glory of Portugal you
+must find India by the way of the sea!"
+
+"I am at your service, sire, while life shall last."
+
+"Depart in all haste."
+
+It was March, 1497. Vasco da Gama raised his sails and departed from
+Lisbon.
+
+[Illustration: Vasco da Gama.]
+
+He passed the "Cape of Good Hope," and met with many adventures, the
+narratives of which would fill a book.
+
+He crossed the India Ocean, blown pleasantly on by the trade winds.
+
+One day a loud cry arose:
+
+"Land! land!"
+
+The pilot came running to Vasco da Gama, and fell at his feet.
+
+"Captain, behold India!"
+
+The shores of India rose in the burning light of the tropic seas. Vasco
+da Gama saw them and fell upon his knees.
+
+Mountain rose above mountain, and hill over hill; then green palms and
+shining beaches came into view like scenes of enchantment.
+
+"That is Cananor," said the Moorish pilot; "the great city of Calicat is
+twelve leagues distant."
+
+They sailed over those twelve leagues of clear resplendent waters and
+came to Calicat, or Malabar. That day of discovery was Portugal's
+glory.
+
+[Illustration: PORTUGUESE INDIES]
+
+Calicat was a merchant city of the East, and one of the most famous of
+India. Here came Arabian and Egyptian merchants. It was a Mohammedan
+city, and the princes of Calicat encouraged trade between the Arabs and
+Hindoos. The city was now to become an emporium for the Western World.
+
+After many adventures in Malabar, Vasco da Gama cruised along the coast
+of India. Everything was wonderful, and the wonders grew.
+
+In September, 1499, he returned, and was received like a sovereign by
+the Portuguese King. His arrival was a holiday, the glory of which has
+lived in all Portuguese holidays until now.
+
+He was given titles of distinction. He was made a Viceroy of India.
+
+Twenty years after these events Magellan was destined to discover
+_another_ way to India.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE ENTHUSIASTS CARRY THEIR PLANS TO THE KING.
+
+
+Magellan, full of his project of finding a short way to the rich spicery
+by sailing West, now sought the favor of the Spanish court. Gold has
+ever been the royal want, and nobles have always had open ears to
+schemes that promised to fill the public treasury.
+
+Magellan's interesting friend Francisco Serrao, who had remained in the
+Indian possessions of the Portuguese, after Magellan's return, had
+discovered resources of the tropical seas of the Orient that were almost
+boundless. He had written to Magellan:
+
+"If you would become rich return to the Moluccas."
+
+This letter would be a sufficient passport to the nobles who had the ear
+of the King. He showed the letter to the King's ministers.
+
+He thought that the point of South America turned _westward_, as the
+Cape of Good Hope toward the East. He had an imaginary map in his mind
+of an ocean world whose shape had no real existence, but that answered
+well as a theory.
+
+Magellan had brought a globe from Portugal on which he had drawn the
+undiscovered world as he thought it existed. The strait which he had
+hoped to find was omitted on this globe in his drawings that no
+navigator might anticipate his discovery.
+
+Some of the ministers listened to the project with indifference, a few
+with ridicule; but as a rule Magellan appealed to willing ears. The
+ministers as a body agreed to commend the enterprise to the King. The
+Haros of Antwerp, the Rothschilds of the time, favored the expedition.
+So Magellan and Faleiro made out a petition of formal proposals which
+they desired to present to the King, and awaited the opportunity.
+
+That opportunity soon came. Charles V, son of Joanna, who was passing
+her days in solitude and grief on account of the loss of her husband,
+was on his way to Aragon. He was Emperor of Germany and King of Spain.
+He was a youth now; having been born in Ghent, February 24, 1500. He
+came to the throne of Spain in 1516, as the disordered intellect of his
+mother made her incapable of reigning. He was elected German Emperor in
+1519.
+
+[Illustration: Charles V. After a painting by Titian.]
+
+In his youth he had been dissolute. Seeing the responsibilities that he
+owed to the world and the age, he suddenly received new moral impulses
+and conquered himself, and his moral life was followed by a religious
+disposition. He received from the Pope the title of Roman Emperor. His
+powerful intellect subdued a great part of continental Europe to his
+will; but he became weary of the cares of state, retired from the
+world, and ended his life as a religious recluse.
+
+The young King entered Spain in triumph, but amid the glare of
+receptions his ears were not dull to projects for acquiring gold.
+
+Magellan and Faleiro, under the commendation of the ministry, were soon
+able to lay their project before the young grandson of the great
+Isabella. He received them in the spirit that Isabella had met Columbus.
+He approved their plans, and charged them to make preparations for the
+expedition.
+
+Charles entered Zaragoza in May, 1518, a youth of eighteen, and Magellan
+and Faleiro followed the royal train on its triumphal march in the
+blooming days of the year. They were happy men, and their glowing
+visions added to the joy of the court on its journey amid singing
+nightingales and pealing bells.
+
+The royal name signed to Magellan's commission was "Juana," who had been
+the favorite daughter of Queen Isabella, who had signed the commission
+of Columbus.[A] This royal daughter of Aragon and Castile was born at
+Toledo, November 6, 1479. She was in the bloom of her girlhood when the
+news of the return of Columbus thrilled Spain.
+
+    [A] Donna Juana and Don Carlos, her son, by the grace of God, Queen
+    and King of Castile, Leon, Aragon, the two Sicilies, and Jerusalem, of
+    Navarra, Granada, Toledo, Valencia, Galicia, the Mallorcas, Seville,
+    Sardinia, Cordova, Corsica, Murcia, Jaen, the Algarves, of Aljazira,
+    Gibraltar, of the Canary Isles, of the Indies, isles and mainland of
+    the Ocean-sea, Counts of Barcelona, Lords of Biscay and Molina, Dukes
+    of Athens and Neopatria, Counts of Roussillon and Cerdana, Marquises
+    of Euristan and Gociano, Archdukes of Austria, Dukes of Bergona and
+    Brabant, Counts of Flanders and Tirol, etc.
+
+She was a girl of ardent affections; a lover of music; not beautiful,
+but charming in manner; and at the age of eighteen was betrothed to
+Philip of the Low Countries, called Philip the Handsome.
+
+The wedding of this daughter of Isabella was to be celebrated in
+Flanders by fêtes of unusual splendor. A fleet of one hundred and thirty
+vessels prepared to bear the bride to her handsome Prince. The ships
+were under the command of the chivalrous admiral of Castile.
+
+Juana took leave of her mother at the end of August, 1496, and embarked
+at the port of Laredo. A more interesting bride under more joyous
+circumstances had seldom gone forth to meet a bridegroom.
+
+The sails covered the sea under the flags of the glory of Spain. They
+drifted away amid music and shoutings, but the salvos of the guns had
+hardly died away before terrible storms arose. The fleet was shattered,
+and many of the vessels were lost.
+
+The young bride herself arrived in Flanders safely, and her marriage
+with the archduke followed at Lille.
+
+When Queen Isabella heard of the birth of Charles, she recalled that it
+fell on the day of Matthias, and exclaimed, "_Sors cecidit super
+Mathiam_"--"the lot fell upon Matthias."
+
+She predicted that the infant would become the King of Spain.
+
+[Illustration: Ferdinand and Isabella. From a coin.]
+
+Philip and Juana were summoned to Spain to meet the people over whom it
+then seemed probable that they would soon be called to reign. They
+entered France in 1501, attended by Flemish nobles, and wherever they
+went was a holiday. There were weeks of splendid fêtes in honor of the
+progress.
+
+When Ferdinand and Isabella heard of the arrival of Philip and Juana in
+Spain they hastened to Toledo to meet them. Here Philip and his Queen
+received the allegiance of the Cortes.
+
+But Philip was a gay Prince, and he loved the dissipations of Flanders
+more than his wife or the interests of his prospective Spanish
+possessions. So he left his wife, and returned to Flanders.
+
+The conduct of the handsome Prince drove Juana mad. She loved him so
+fondly that she thought only of him, and sat in silence day after day
+with her eyes fixed on the ground, as an historian says, "equally
+regardless of herself, her future subjects, and her afflicted parents."
+
+She subsequently joined Philip at Burgos. Here Philip died of fever
+after overexertion at a game of ball. Juana never left his bedside, or
+shed a tear. Her grief obliterated nearly all things in life, and she
+was dumb. Her only happiness now, except in music, was to be with his
+dead body.
+
+She removed her husband's remains to Santa Clara.
+
+The body was placed on a magnificent car, and was accompanied in the
+long way to the tomb by a train of nobles and priests. Juana never left
+it. She would not allow it to be moved by day. She said:
+
+"A widow who has lost the sun of her soul should never expose herself to
+the light of day!"
+
+Wherever the procession halted, she ordered new funeral ceremonies. She
+forbade nuns to approach the body. Finding the coffin had been carried
+to a nunnery at a stage of the journey, she had it removed to the open
+fields, where she watched by it, and caused the embalmed body to be
+revealed to her by torches. She had a tomb made for the remains in sight
+of her palace windows in Santa Clara, and she watched over it in silence
+for forty-seven years, taking little interest in any other thing.
+
+But as she survived Ferdinand and Isabella, her name for a time was
+affixed to royal commissions, and so Magellan sailed in the service of
+Charles under the signature of Juana, who was silently watching over her
+husband's tomb, in the hope that the Prince would one day rise again.
+
+We relate this narrative to give a view of the events of the period, and
+for the same reason we must speak of another eminent person who acted in
+the place of the Queen in her unhappy state of mind.
+
+[Illustration: Cardinal Ximenes. After a painting by Velasquez.]
+
+This was the great political genius of the time, the virtuous and
+benevolent Cardinal Ximenes, statesman, archbishop, the heart of the
+people and the conscience of the Church. He was born of a humble family
+in Castile in 1487. He was educated in Rome. His character and learning
+were such that Queen Isabella chose him for her confessor, and made him
+Archbishop of Toledo, with the approval of the Pope.
+
+On the death of Philip in 1505, he was made regent for Juana. Ferdinand
+named Ximenes regent of Spain on his deathbed, until Charles V should
+return from Flanders to Spain.
+
+The regency of Ximenes was one of honor and glory. He himself lived
+humbly and simply amid all his associations of pomp and power.
+
+He maintained thirty poor persons daily at his own cost, and gave half
+of his income to charity. He excited the jealousy of Charles V at last,
+and lost his power in consequence. He lived to extreme age, and left a
+character that Spain has ever loved to hold in honor.
+
+Such was the political condition of Spain in the early days of
+Magellan.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+ABOUT THE HAPPY ITALIAN WHO WISHED TO SEE THE WORLD.--BEAUTIFUL SEVILLE!
+
+
+We should have known but little of the adventures of Magellan, but for
+Antonia Pigafetta, Chevalier, and Knight of Rhodes.
+
+He was a young Italian of a susceptible heart and happy imagination.
+
+He came wandering to Barcelona, Spain, in the generation that remembered
+Columbus, and the splendid scenes that welcomed the return of Columbus
+on the field of Sante Fé. He must have heard the enthralling description
+of those golden days--he could not be a Columbus; but, if he could win
+the good will of Magellan, he might go after Columbus and see what no
+Europeans had seen.
+
+So he wandered the streets of Barcelona and heard the tales of the
+events that occurred when the "Viceroy of the Isles" was received there
+by Isabella.
+
+What days those had been! The march of Columbus through Spain to meet
+Isabella at Sante Fé, was such as had a demigod appeared on earth.
+Spain was thrilled. The world knew no night. The trumpets of heralds
+rent the air, and men's hearts swelled high at the tales of the golden
+empires that Colon had added to Aragon and Castile. Alas! they did not
+know that there are riches which do not enrich, and that it is only the
+gold that does good that ennobles.
+
+As Columbus approached with his glittering cavaliers songs rent the air,
+whose words have been interpreted--
+
+      "Thy name, O Fernando!
+        Through all earth shall be sounded,
+      Columbus has triumphed,
+        His foes are confounded!"
+
+or
+
+      "Thy name, Isabella,
+        Through all earth shall be sounded,
+      Columbus has triumphed,
+        His foes are confounded!"
+
+To Aragon and Castile Columbus had "given a new world." Peals of golden
+horns shook the delighted cities, where balconies overflowed with
+flowers.
+
+[Illustration: Barcelona.]
+
+His reception at Barcelona by the King and Queen had been made
+inconceivably splendid:
+
+                          "That was a glorious day
+      That dawned on Barcelona. Banners filled
+      The thronging towers, the old bells rung, and blasts
+      Of lordly trumpets seemed to reach the sky
+      Cerulean. All Spain had gathered there,
+      And waited there his coming; Castilian knights,
+      Gay cavaliers, hidalgos young, and e'en the old
+      Puissant grandees of far Aragon,
+      With glittering mail and waving plumes and all
+      The peasant multitude with bannerets
+      And charms and flowers.
+                          "Beneath pavilions
+      Of brocades of gold, the Court had met.
+      The dual crowns of Leon old and proud Castile
+      There waited him, the peasant mariner.
+                          "The heralds waited
+      Near the open gates; the minstrels young and fair
+      Upon the tapestries and arrased walls,
+      And everywhere from all the happy provinces
+      The wandering troubadours.
+                          "Afar was heard
+      A cry, a long acclaim. Afar was seen
+      A proud and stately steed with nodding plumes,
+      Bridled with gold, whose rider stately rode,
+      And still afar a long and sinuous train
+      Of silvery cavaliers. A shout arose,
+      And all the city, all the vales and hills,
+      With acclamations rung.
+                          "He came, the Genoese,
+      With reverent look and calm and lofty mien,
+      And saw the wondering eyes and heard the cries,
+      And trumpet peals, as one who followed still
+      Some Guide unseen.
+                          "Before his steed
+      Crowned Indians marched with lowly faces,
+      And wondered at the new world that they saw;
+      Gay parrots screamed from their gold-circled arms,
+      And from their crests swept airy plumes. The sun
+      Shone full in splendor on the scene, and here
+      The old and new world met!"
+
+The young Italian Chevalier, Pigafetta, Knight of Rhodes, visited the
+scenes that his own countryman had made immortal by his voyage.
+
+He thought of the plumed Indians and of the birds of splendid plumage
+that Columbus had brought back.
+
+He heard much of Magellan, the "new Columbus." Why might he not go out
+upon unknown seas with him and discover new races, and bring back with
+him tropic spices, birds, and flowers?
+
+He journeyed to Seville and there met Magellan. He entered into the
+dreams of the new navigator. He asked Magellan to let him sail with him.
+
+"Why do you wish to enter upon such a hazardous undertaking?"
+
+"I am desirous of seeing the wonderful things of the ocean!"
+
+Magellan saw it was so. The Spaniards might distrust him, the Portuguese
+be jealous of him, but here was a man who would have no race
+prejudices--a man after his own heart, whom he could trust.
+
+"You wish to see the wonders of the ocean world?" he asked.
+
+"Yes, and I can write, and whatever I may do, and wherever I may go, I
+will always be true to you--the heart of Pigafetta will always be loyal
+to the Admiral!"
+
+"My Italian Chevalier, you may embark with me to see the wonders of the
+ocean world. You shall follow my lantern."
+
+From that hour the young Italian lived in anticipation. What new lands
+would he see, what palm islands, what gigantic men and strange birds,
+and inhabitants of the sea?
+
+The young Knight of Rhodes had spoken truly, whatever light might fail,
+his heart would ever be true to the Admiral.
+
+So the Knight embarked with the rude crew to follow, in the silences of
+uncharted seas, the lantern of Magellan.
+
+He composed on the voyage a narrative for Villiers de l'Isle Adams,
+Grand Master of Rhodes. By this narrative we are still able to follow in
+fancy the lantern of Magellan through the straits that now bear the name
+of Magellan, to the newly discovered Pacific, and around the world.
+
+His character was as spirited as Magellan's was noble.
+
+We will sail with him in our voyage around the world, for _he_ went all
+the way and bore the news of Magellan's triumphs to Seville again.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Beautiful Seville! We must glance at the city here. She was the pride of
+Spain in those times when Spain dazzled the world. The Hispal of the
+Phoenicians, the Hispales of the Roman conquest, and the Seville of the
+Moors! Her glory had arisen in the twilight of history, and had grown
+with the advancement of the race.
+
+She was indeed beautiful at the time when Magellan was preparing for the
+sea. The Moorish period had passed leaving her rich in arts and
+treasures, and splendid architecture.
+
+Situated on the banks of the Guadalquivir, circular in shape and
+surrounded with more than a hundred Moorish towers, and about ten miles
+in circumference, she rivaled the cities of Europe and of the Orient.
+
+The great cathedral was being completed at that time, a mountain of art,
+arising from its plain of marble. It was four hundred and thirty-one
+feet long, and three hundred and fifteen feet wide, with solemn and
+grand arches lighted by the finest windows in Spain, perhaps the most
+enchanting lights through which the sun ever shone. The altars were
+enriched by the wealth of discovery.
+
+[Illustration: The Giralda.]
+
+Over this mountain of gold, marbles, and gems gleamed the Giralda, or
+weather vane, in the form of a statue, three hundred and fifty feet
+high.
+
+Seville at this time was a city of churches. To these, sailors resorted
+while waiting for an expedition to complete its preparations for the
+sea, for most of them were good Catholics, and such as hoped for God's
+favor in the enterprise upon which they were about to enter.
+
+Here, too, was the old Moorish palace, the Alcázar, with its delicate
+lacework like the walls of the Alhambra, but richer in color. In this
+palace was the Hall of the Ambassadors, one of the most enchanting
+apartments ever created by the genius of man.
+
+In the latter dream of Moorish fancy have passed aching hearts, as well
+as those filled with wonder and delight. Here Pedro the Cruel received
+one of the kings of Granada, and murdered him with his own hand, to rob
+him of the jewels that adorned his person.
+
+The tales of Pedro the Cruel haunted the city at this time.
+
+We are told that this monarch used to go about the city in disguise.
+
+One night he went out thus to serenade a beautiful lady. As he
+approached the balcony with his guitar where the lady lived, he saw
+another man there, who had come for the same purpose. The rival musician
+filled him with rage, and the King rushed upon him and struck him down
+and killed him.
+
+He fled away. He reasoned that as he was in disguise no one could know
+him.
+
+There was an old woman who kept a bakery across the way from the house
+where the noble lady lived. She was looking out of her window at the
+time of the murder. She saw the act, and got a view of the terrible face
+of the royal musician as he was fleeing away.
+
+"That was the King himself," said the old bake woman. "By my soul, that
+was the King!"
+
+The next day the news of the murder filled the city. The murdered man
+was a person of rank and importance. The people were alarmed and
+indignant.
+
+"Who did the deed?" was a question that arose to every lip.
+
+The King, cruel as he was, did not wish to be suspected of being a
+street assassin. So he issued a proclamation in this form:
+
+"Unless the alcalde (judge) of Seville shall discover the murderer of
+the gallant musician within three days, the alcalde shall lose his
+head."
+
+The city judge began to make great exertions to discover the murderer.
+
+The old bake woman came to him and said:
+
+"I know who did the deed. But silence, silence! I saw it with my own
+eyes, but we must be still. It was the King himself!"
+
+The alcalde dared not accuse the King, and yet he must save his own
+head. What was he to do?
+
+He made an image of the King. He then went to the palace.
+
+"O King! I have found the murderer. I have brought him here to receive
+sentence."
+
+The King was glad that a suspected person had been found, so that the
+public thought might be directed to the suspect.
+
+"What shall be done with him?" asked the alcalde.
+
+"What! He who would slay a musician about to serenade a noble lady?"
+
+"Yes, your Majesty."
+
+"What shall be done with him? I condemn him to death. Bring him before
+me."
+
+The alcalde brought in the image of the King, and uncovered it.
+
+The King beheld himself.
+
+"I will save _your_ head," said the King, and the alcalde went
+thoughtfully away.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+ENEMIES.--ESTEBAN GORMEZ.
+
+
+No man living could better know what he needed for such a stupendous and
+unprecedented undertaking than Magellan, who had already been to the
+spicery of the Orient in the service of Albuquerque, the Portuguese
+Viceroy. Under the royal sanction, the dockyards of Seville were at his
+command. He repaired to Seville, and was there looked upon as one
+destined to harvest the wealth of the Indies.
+
+But as soon as it became known in Portugal that Magellan was to lead a
+new expedition of discovery, the mistake that the King had made in
+rejecting the proposal of the lame soldier, to whom he had refused
+pension honors, became apparent. The court saw what this rejected man of
+positive purpose and invaluable knowledge of navigation might
+accomplish. Should his dreams be prophetic and his projects prove
+successful, the glory would go to Spain, and the King would be held
+responsible for another mistake like that which his predecessor had made
+in the case of Columbus.
+
+What must the court of Portugal do? The hammers were flying in Seville
+on the ships loading for the voyage. Magellan was making up his crews.
+Spain had faith in him, and he had faith in himself; never a man had
+more.
+
+Portugal must prevent the expedition. The Crown must appeal to Magellan
+to withdraw from it. The King must ask young King Charles to dismiss
+Magellan as an act of royal courtesy. If these efforts were not
+successful, it was argued that the expedition must be arrested by force,
+or Magellan must be murdered by secret spies of the court.
+
+The fleet preparing was to consist of five ships with ample equipment.
+These were named the Trinidad, the San Antonio, of one hundred and
+twenty Spanish tons each; the Concepcion, of ninety Spanish tons; the
+Victoria, of eighty-five tons; and the Santiago, of seventy-five. The
+Victoria, the ship of destiny, was to circumnavigate the globe.
+
+And now while the hammers were at work, the dull King of Portugal began
+to arouse himself to arrest the plan, and the court, seeing his spirit,
+acted with him.
+
+In the bright days in Zaragoza Magellan had been warned that he was in
+danger of being assassinated. But he did not take alarm. As his project
+rose into public view at Seville he must have known that he was
+surrounded by spies, but he did not heed them; he kept right on,
+marching forward as it were after the inspiration that had taken
+possession of his soul.
+
+[Illustration: BEHAIM'S GLOBE. 1492.]
+
+There was an India House in Seville, composed of merchants, and these
+were favorable to the expedition. In Spain everything favored Magellan.
+
+Aluaro da Costa was the Portuguese minister to the court of Spain. He
+plotted against Magellan, and sought an interview with young Charles in
+order to induce him to eliminate the Portuguese from the expedition.
+Charles was about to become a brother-in-law to Dom Manoel, and Aluaro
+da Costa could appeal to the King in this cause in many ways.
+
+Full of diplomacy and craft, he met the King who had to weigh the
+prospect of gold and glory against this personal argument. Gold
+outweighed the family considerations, for Charles in his young days was
+a man of powerful ambitions.
+
+Aluaro da Costa wrote to Dom Manoel a graphic account of this interview.
+It shows how politic ministers of state were in those days. We can not
+give the reader a clearer view of some of the obstacles against which
+Magellan had to contend in those perilous days in Spain than by citing
+Aluaro's account to Dom Manoel of his interview with young Charles V in
+his intrigue against Magellan:
+
+"SIRE: Concerning Ferdinand Magellan's affair, how much I have done and
+how I have labored, God knows, as I have written you at length; and now
+I have spoken upon the subject very strongly to the King, putting
+before him all the inconveniences that in this case may arise, and also
+representing to him what an ugly matter it was, and how unusual for one
+King to receive the subjects of another King, his friend, contrary to
+his wish, a thing unheard of among cavaliers, and accounted both
+ill-judged and ill-seeming. Yet I had just put your Highness and your
+Highness's possessions at his service in Valladolid at the moment that,
+he was harboring these persons against your will. I begged him to
+consider that this was not the time to offend your Highness, the more so
+in an affair which was of so little importance and so uncertain; and
+that he would have plenty of subjects of his own and men to make
+discoveries when the time came, without availing himself of those
+malcontents of your Highness, whom your Highness could not fail to
+believe likely to labor more for your disservice than for anything else;
+also that his Highness had had until now so much to do in discovering
+his own kingdoms and dominions, and in settling them, that he ought not
+to turn his attention to these new affairs, from which dissensions and
+other matters, which may well be dispensed with, may result.
+
+"I also presented to him the bad appearance that this would have at the
+very moment of the marriage--the ratification of friendship and
+affection. And also that it seemed to me that your Highness would much
+regret to learn that these men asked leave of him to return,[A] and that
+he did not grant it, the which are two faults--the receiving them
+contrary to your desire, and the retaining them contrary to their own.
+And I begged of him, both for his own and for your Highness's sake, that
+he would do one of two things: either permit them to go, or put off the
+affair for this year, by which he would not lose much; and means might
+be taken whereby he might be obliged, and your Highness might not be
+offended, as you would be were this scheme carried out.
+
+    [A] This statement there is every reason to believe was a pure
+    fiction of Da Costa.
+
+"He was so surprised, sire, at what I told him, that I also was
+surprised; but he replied to me with the best words in the world, saying
+that on no account did he wish to offend your Highness, and many other
+good words; and he suggested that I should speak to the Cardinal, and
+confide the whole matter to him.
+
+"May the Lord increase the life and dominions of your Highness to his
+holy service. From Saragoca, Tuesday night, the 28th day of September.
+
+          "I kiss the hands of your Highness,
+                                              "ALUARO DA COSTA."
+
+Court intrigue against Magellan did not avail. There was one thing
+statecraft could do. It could set spies on Magellan on board his own
+ships. This it succeeded in doing.
+
+There was in Spain at this time a Portuguese adventurer and navigator by
+the name of Estevan or Esteban Gormez--Stephen Gormez.
+
+He was a student of navigation, and was restless to follow the examples
+of Columbus and Vasco da Gama. He had applied to the court of
+Spain--probably to Cardinal Ximenes, for a commission to go on a voyage
+of discovery and he had received a favorable answer, and was preparing
+to embark, when Magellan appeared at court and promised to find the
+Spice Islands by way of South America.
+
+Magellan's scheme was so much larger and definite than that of Gormez
+that the court canceled its favors to the lesser plans, and Gormez had
+to abandon his prospects of sailing under the royal favors of Spain.
+
+The eyes of Spain were now fixed on Magellan.
+
+"I will find a way to the Spice Islands by South America or by the
+West," said Magellan to the ministers of the King, "or you may have my
+head."
+
+These were bold words. Magellan had not only been to the Spice Islands,
+but he had gone out on the very voyage that discovered some of them. He
+had behaved heroically on the voyage. So his application to the court
+superseded the plan of Gormez and the latter sunk out of sight.
+
+In his despondency at the failure of his plans, Gormez came to Magellan.
+
+"My countryman," said Gormez, "your schemes have supplanted mine and
+turned my ships into air. I was the first to plan a voyage to the
+Moluccas out of the wake of hurricanes and monsoons. I do not feel that
+I have been treated rightly. Something surely is due to me."
+
+Magellan was a man of generous impulses. He saw that Gormez had a case
+for moral appeal.
+
+"My friend," said he, "you shall have a place in my expedition."
+
+He could but think that the inspiration and knowledge of navigation of
+his countryman would be useful to him, and he pitied him for his
+disappointment, knowing how he himself would feel were his plans to be
+set aside.
+
+So Gormez, the Portuguese, was made the pilot of the Antonio.
+
+Magellan, had he reflected, must have seen that this man would carry
+with him envy and jealousy, passions that are poisons. But Estefano, or
+Esteban, or Stephen Gormez, took his place at the pilot house of the
+Antonio to follow the lantern of Magellan, but the hurt in his heart at
+being superseded never healed.
+
+On the ships also was one Juan de Carthagena, captain of the Concepcion,
+a spy, and one of the "malapots" of the expedition. He was called the
+_veedor_, or inspector. He inspected Magellan, and Magellan inspected
+him, as we shall see.
+
+And now the flags arose in the clear air, and the joyful fleet cleared
+the Guadalquivir and leaped into the arms of the open sea, amid the
+acclamations of gay grandees and a happy people.
+
+It was September 20th when the anchors were lifted, of which probably
+one was destined to come back in triumph after an immortal voyage that
+encompassed the earth, and gave to Spain a new ocean.
+
+And the King of Portugal ordered the coat of arms to be torn down from
+the house of Magellan, as we have pictured at the beginning of our
+narrative.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+"MAROONED."
+
+
+The expedition moved down its western way, over the track of Columbus.
+It had left poor Ruy Faleiro behind--he who had seen the progress of it
+all in the fitful light of a disordered vision. He had not relinquished
+his own high aims. He hoped to follow Magellan with an expedition of his
+own.
+
+The ships were furnished with "castles," fore and aft; they carried gay
+pennons and were richly stored. The artillery comprised sixty-two
+culverins and smaller ordnance. Five thousand or more pounds of powder
+were shut up in the magazines, and a large provision was made for
+trading with the natives--looking glasses for women, velvets, knives,
+and ivory ornaments, and twenty thousand bells.
+
+Magellan's ship bore a lantern, swung high in the air amid the thickly
+corded rigging, which the other ships were to keep in view in the night.
+What a history had this lantern! It gleamed out on the night track of a
+new world, a pillar of fire that encompassed the earth as in the orbit
+of a star.
+
+The fleet had fifteen days of good weather and passed Cape Verde
+Islands, running along the African coast.
+
+But the fleet carried with it disloyal hearts. The Portuguese prejudice
+against Magellan sailed with it. The Spanish sailors distrusted the
+loyalty of Magellan to Spain.
+
+The commander was a man of great heart, chivalrous, and noble, but he
+could be firm when there arose an occasion for it.
+
+After leaving Teneriffe Magellan altered his course.
+
+Juan de Carthagena, captain of the San Antonio, "the inspector" and a
+spy, demanded of Magellan why he had done so.
+
+"Sir," said Magellan, "you are to follow my flag by day and my lantern
+by night, and to ask me no further questions."
+
+Carthagena demanded that Magellan should report his plans to him.
+Finding that the Admiral was bent on conducting his own expedition, he
+began to act sullenly, and to disobey orders.
+
+Again the captain of the San Antonio demanded of Magellan that he should
+communicate his orders in regard to the course of steerage to him. He
+did this by virtue of his office as inspector. He showed a very haughty
+and disloyal spirit, and if this were not to be checked, the success of
+the expedition would be imperilled. He was abetted by Pedro Sanches, a
+priest. Magellan saw treason already brewing, and he determined to stamp
+it out at once.
+
+He went to Carthagena, and laid his hands on him.
+
+"Captain, you are my prisoner."
+
+The astonished captain cried out to his men:
+
+"Unhand me--seize Magellan!"
+
+Carthagena had been a priest, and he had great personal influence, but
+the men did not obey him.
+
+"Lead him to the stocks and secure him there," ordered Magellan.
+
+The order was obeyed. The fallen inspector was committed to the charge
+of the Captain of the Victoria, and another officer was given charge of
+the San Antonio.
+
+"When we reach land Juan de Carthagena shall be marooned," was the
+sentence imposed upon the inspector. A like sentence was imposed upon
+Sanches.
+
+It touched the hearts of the crews to hear this sentence. What would
+become of the two priests, were it to be executed? Would they fall prey
+to the natives, or perhaps win the hearts of the people and be made
+chiefs among them?
+
+There was a pilot on board the ship who sympathized with the mutineers,
+but who had close lips, Esteban Gormez, of whom we have spoken. Were the
+two mutineers to be marooned he would be glad to rescue them.
+
+[Illustration: Night after night the ships followed Magellan's
+lantern.]
+
+He had been discontented since the day that his own plans for an
+expedition had been superseded by those of Magellan.
+
+His discontentment had grown. He became critical as the fleet sailed on.
+Every day reminded him of what he might have done, if he could have only
+secured the opportunity.
+
+A disloyal heart in any enterprise is a very perilous influence. A
+wooden horse in Troy is more dangerous than an army outside.
+
+Magellan in Gormez had a subtle foe, and that foe was his own
+countryman.
+
+This man probably could not brook to see his rival add the domains of
+the sea to the crowns of Juana and of Charles, though he himself had
+sought to do the same thing. Magnanimous he could not be. Discovery for
+the sake of discovery had little meaning for him, but only discovery for
+his own advancement and glory.
+
+He became jealous of Mesquita, Magellan's cousin, now master of the
+Antonio, who is thought to have advised severe measures to suppress
+conspiracy.
+
+Night after night he sat down under the moon and stars, and brooded over
+his fancied neglect, and dreamed. Night after night the ships followed
+the lantern of Magellan, and the wonders of the sea grew; but to him it
+were better that no discoveries should be made than that such
+achievements were to go to the glory of Spain through the pilotage of
+Magellan.
+
+Discontent grows; jealousy grows as one broods over fancied wrongs, and
+sees the prospects of a rival's success. So it was with Gormez. In his
+heart he did not wish the expedition to succeed. He was ambitious to
+lead such an enterprise himself, which he also did, at last, sailing
+along Massachusetts Bay and giving it its first name.
+
+When Gormez had heard that the two disloyal men were to be marooned, his
+feelings rose against Magellan. That they deserved their sentence he
+well knew, but they were opposed to Magellan, as was his own heart. He
+would have been glad to have saved them from the execution of their
+sentence, but he did not know how to do it.
+
+"I will rescue them if ever I can," he thought. "This expedition is not
+for the glory of Portugal."
+
+The ships sailed on, bearing the two conspirators to some place where
+they could be marooned.
+
+Let us turn from this dark scene to one of a more hopeful spirit.
+
+One day, as we may picture the scene, the sea lay unruffled like a
+mirror. The ships drifted near each other, and night came on after a
+sudden twilight, and the stars seemed like liquid lights shot forth or
+let down from some ethereal fountain. The Southern Cross shone so
+clearly as to uplift the eyes of the sailors. The ships were becalmed.
+
+Boats began to ply between the ships, and the officers of the Trinity,
+Santiago, Victoria, and Concepcion assembled under the awning of the San
+Antonio, Mesquita's ship, of one hundred and twenty tons.
+
+Mesquita, as we have said, was a cousin of Magellan, and so the Antonio
+seemed a friendly ship.
+
+Magellan sat down by his cousin. The lantern was going out; its force
+was spent.
+
+"We must get a new kind of lantern," said Magellan to his cousin, "and a
+code of signal lights. We need a lantern that is something more steady
+and durable than a faggot of wood."
+
+"I have here a new farol," he continued, the men listening with intent
+ears. "Here it is, and I wonder, my sailors, how far your eyes will
+follow it."
+
+"All loyal hearts will follow it," said Mesquita, "wherever it may go."
+
+Gormez frowned. His heart was bitter.
+
+There rose up an officer named Del Cano, and stood hat in hand. All eyes
+were fixed upon him.
+
+"May it please you, Admiral," he said, "to receive a word from me. I
+will follow the new farol wherever it may lead me. I have ceased to
+count my own life in this cause."
+
+Gormez frowned again.
+
+"Del Cano," said the Admiral, "I believe in you. You have a true heart.
+If I should fall see that this farol goes back to Spain!"
+
+Del Cano bowed.
+
+[Illustration: Arms granted to Sebastian Del Cano, Captain of the
+Victoria, the first vessel that circumnavigated the globe.]
+
+Magellan showed the new lantern to the officers. It was made of beaten
+reeds that had been soaked in water, and dried in the sun. It would hold
+light long, and carry it strongly and steadily.
+
+"All the ships must have these new farols," said he, "and I must teach
+you how to signal by them."
+
+He stood up. The moon was rising, and the dusky, purple air became
+luminous.
+
+He held the farol in his hand.
+
+"Two lights," he said, "shall mean for the ship to tack.
+
+"Three lights that the sails shall be lowered. Four, that they shall
+stop.
+
+"Five lights, or more, that we have discovered land, when the flagship
+shall discharge a bombard. Follow my lantern always; you can trust it
+wherever it may fare. My farol shall be my star!"
+
+The men sat there long. There sprung up a breeze at last, and the sea
+began to ripple in the moon.
+
+Most expeditions that have made successful achievements have carried men
+of great hope. Such a man was Del Cano. He was loyal to the heart of
+Magellan; and happy is any leader who has such a companion, whose steel
+rings true.
+
+Magellan hung out the farol. The sails were spread, and the fleet passed
+on over the solitary ocean.
+
+Whither?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+"THE WONDERS OF NEW LANDS."--PIGAFETTA'S TALES OF HIS ADVENTURES WITH
+MAGELLAN.--THE STORY OF "THE FOUNTAIN TREE."--"ST. ELMO'S FIRE."
+
+
+The ships moved on, bearing the hopeful Del Cano, the frowning Gormez,
+the two prisoners, and the happy Italian Pigafetta.
+
+Our next chapters will be a series of wonder tales which reveal the
+South Temperate Zone and its inhabitants as they appeared to the young
+and susceptible Italian, Pigafetta, nearly four hundred years ago.
+
+Pigafetta, as we have shown, desired to accompany Magellan that he might
+"see the wonders of the new lands." He saw them indeed, and he painted
+them with his pen so vividly that they will always live. We get our
+first views of the strange inhabitants of the Southern regions of the
+New World from him. We are to follow his narratives, as printed for the
+Hakluyt Society, London, making some omissions, and changing its form in
+part, hoping thereby to render the text more clear. We closely follow
+the spirit of events. Pigafetta addresses his narrative "To the very
+illustrious and very excellent Lord Philip de Villiers Lisleaden, Grand
+Master of Rhodes," of whom we have spoken.
+
+[Illustration: Interior of the Alcázar of Seville.]
+
+He says, by way of introduction:
+
+"Finding myself in Spain in the year of the nativity of our Lord, 1519,
+at the court of the most serene King of the Romans (Charles V), and
+learning there of the great and awful things of the ocean world, I
+desired to make a voyage to unknown seas, and to see with my own eyes
+some of the wonderful things of which I had heard.
+
+"I heard that there was in the city of Seville an armada (armade) of
+five ships, which were ready to perform a long voyage in order to find
+the shortest way to the Islands of Moluco (Molucca) from whence came the
+spices. The Captain General of this armada was Ferdinand de Magagleanes
+(Magellan), a Portuguese gentleman, who had made several voyages on the
+ocean. He was an honorable man. So I set out from Barcelona, where the
+Emperor was, and traveled by land to the said city of Seville, and
+secured a place in the expedition.
+
+"The Captain General published ordinances for the guidance of the
+voyage.
+
+"He willed that the vessel on which he himself was should go before the
+other vessels, and that the others should keep in sight of it. Therefore
+he hung by night over the deck a torch or faggot of burning wood which
+he called a farol (lantern), which burned all night, so that the ships
+might not lose sight of his own.
+
+"He arranged to set other lights as signals in the night. When he wished
+to make a tack on account of a change of weather he set two lights.
+Three lights signified "faster." Four lights signified to stop and turn.
+When he discovered a rock or land, it was to be signalled by other
+lights.
+
+"He ordered that three watches should be kept at night.
+
+"On Monday, St. Lawrence Day, August 10th, the five ships with the crews
+to the number of two hundred and thirty-seven[A] set sail from the noble
+city of Seville, amid the firing of artillery and came to the end of the
+river Guadalcavir (Guadalquivir). We stopped near the Cape St. Vinconet
+to make further provisions for the voyage.
+
+    [A] The number was larger, about 270.
+
+"We went to hear mass on shore. There the Captain commanded that all the
+men should confess before going any further.
+
+"On Tuesday, September 20th, we set sail from St. Lucar.
+
+"We came to Canaria (Canaries)."
+
+This account repeats in a different way a part of the facts we have
+given.
+
+Here the young Italian relates his first story, which is substantially
+as follows:
+
+
+THE FOUNTAIN TREE.
+
+"Among the isles of the Canaria there is one which is very wonderful.
+There is not to be found a single drop of water which flows from any
+fountain or river.
+
+"But in this rainless land at the hour of midday, every day, there
+descends a cloud from the sky which envelops a large tree which grows on
+this island.
+
+"The cloud falls upon the leaves of the tree, when a great abundance of
+water distills from the leaves. The tree flows, and soon at the foot of
+it there gathers a fountain.
+
+"The people of the island come to drink of the water. The animals and
+the birds refresh themselves there."
+
+The story is true so far as relates to the fountain tree. But that a
+cloud comes down from Heaven at midday to refresh it, is not an exact
+statement of the manner in which this tree furnishes water to the
+sterile island. The young Italian writer describes the tree as he saw
+it, and as it seemed to be. The tree that supplies water as from a
+natural fountain may still be found.
+
+With such a tree to begin his researches on the sea, Pigafetta must have
+been impatient to proceed along the marvelous ocean way. All the world
+was to him as he saw it; he seldom stopped to inquire if appearances
+were true.
+
+With men like Del Cano on board, who had ears for a marvelous story, his
+life in the early part of the voyage must have been a very happy one.
+Wonder followed wonder....
+
+"Monday, the 3d of October," says the interesting Italian, "we set sail
+making the course auster, which the Levantine mariners call siroc
+(southeast) entering into the ocean sea. We passed Cape Verde and
+navigated by the coast of Guinea of Ethiopia, where there is a mountain
+called Sierra Leona. A rain fell, and the storm lasted sixty days."
+
+They came to waters full of sharks, which had terrible teeth, and which
+ate all the people whom they found in the sea, alive or dead. These were
+caught by a hook of iron.
+
+
+ST. ELMO'S FIRE.
+
+Here good St. Anseline met the ships; in the fancy of the mariners of
+the time, this airy saint appeared to favored ships in the night, and
+fair weather always followed the saintly apparition. He came in a robe
+of fire, and stood and shone on the top of the high masts or on the
+spars. The sailors hailed him with joy, as one sent from Heaven. Happy
+was the ship on the tropic sea upon whose rigging the form of good St.
+Anseline appeared in the night, and especially in the night of cloud
+and storm!
+
+To the joy of all the ships good St. Anseline came down one night to the
+fleet of Magellan. The poetical Italian tells the story in this way:
+
+"During these storms, the body of St. Anseline appeared to us several
+times.
+
+"One night among others he came when it was very dark on account of bad
+weather. He came in the form of a fire lighted at the summit of the main
+mast, and remained there near two hours and a half.
+
+"This comforted us greatly, for we were in tears, looking for the hour
+when we should perish.
+
+"When the holy light was going away from us it shed forth so great a
+brilliancy in our eyes that we were like people blinded for near a
+quarter of an hour. We called out for mercy.
+
+"Nobody expected to escape from the storm.
+
+"It is to be noted that all and as many times as the light which
+represents St. Anseline shows itself upon a vessel which is in a storm
+at sea, that vessel never is lost.
+
+"As soon as this light had departed the sea grew calmer and the wings of
+divers kinds of birds appeared."
+
+Beneficent St. Anseline who manifested his presence by illuminations in
+the mast and spars in equatorial waters! The beautiful illusion has long
+been explained and dispelled. It is but an electric fire at the end of
+atmospheric disturbances. But it is usually a correct prophecy of fair
+skies and smooth seas. It is now called St. Elmo's Fire.
+
+If ever there was an expedition that the saint of the mariners might
+favor it would seem to be this.
+
+One can almost envy the pious Italian his imagination in the clearing
+tropic night.
+
+His next wonders were the sea birds, of which there were flocks and
+clouds, and with them appeared flying fish.
+
+The ships were now off the coasts of Brazil and stopped at Verzim.
+
+The people of the Brazilian Verzim were accustomed to paint themselves
+"by fire." We do not clearly understand how this painting "by fire" was
+done. The art of scorching has perished with them. But besides these
+indelible marks, the men had three holes in their lower lips, and hung
+in them, after the manner of earrings, small round ornamental stones,
+about a finger in length. The men did not shave, for they _plucked out_
+their beard.
+
+Their only clothing was a circle of parrot feathers. How _terribly_ gay
+they must have looked! And yet such customs were hardly more ridiculous
+than those of later times, and more civilized countries--earrings,
+beauty patches, plume, and snuffboxes.
+
+It was the land of parrots. The most beautiful and intelligent parrots
+still come from Brazil. Columbus saw parrots in "clouds" over the
+islands of the Antilles.
+
+Parrots were not expensive in these equatorial forests at this time.
+"The natives," says Pigafetta, "give eight or ten parrots for a looking
+glass," and as a looking glass would multiply the picture of parrots
+indefinitely the Verzimans must have thought the exchange a marvelous
+bargain.
+
+If Brazilian parrots were cheap and so charming as likely to become an
+embarrassment of riches, so were the little cat monkeys which delighted
+the men. These little creatures, which looked like miniature lions,
+still delight the visitors to the coast of Brazil, but they shiver up
+when brought to the northern atmospheres and piteously cry for the home
+lands of the sun again.
+
+Very curious birds began to excite the surprise of the voyagers, among
+such as had a "beak like a spoon," and "no tongue."
+
+The markets of the new land displayed another commodity far more
+surprising than birds or animals, young slaves, which were offered for
+sale by their own families. So a family who had many children was rich.
+It cost a hatchet to buy one of these, and for a hatchet and a knife one
+might buy _two_.
+
+The people made bread of the "marrow of trees," and carried victuals in
+baskets on their heads.
+
+Masses were said for the crews on shore, and the natives knelt down with
+the men.
+
+The people were so pleased with their visitors that they built a common
+house for them.
+
+A pleasing illusion had made the sailors most welcome here.
+
+It had not rained in Verzim for two months when the expedition landed.
+The people were looking to the heavens for mercy day by day. But the
+copper sun rose as often in a clear sky.
+
+At last Magellan's sails appeared in the burning air. The sight of the
+sails was followed by that of clouds.
+
+The people thought that the fleet had brought the clouds with them.
+
+"They come from Heaven," said they of the adventurers.
+
+So when they were exhorted to accept Christianity, they at once fell
+down before the uplifted crosses and believed the teachings of the sea
+heroes who could command the clouds and bring rain to the parched land.
+
+They thought the ships were gods and the small boats the children of
+such beings, and when the latter approached the ships they imagined that
+they were children come home to their fathers or mothers.
+
+The ships remained in this delightful country of Verzim thirteen weeks.
+Pigafetta and Del Cano must have thought that life here was ideal. What
+scenes would follow?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+PINEAPPLES, POTATOES, VERY OLD PEOPLE.
+
+
+Other things were there on the wonderful Brazilian coast. There the
+mariners traded in them and were refreshed with a delicious fruit,
+called pique--pineapples.
+
+They came to the knowledge here of a nutritious ground fruit called
+battate. "This," says our Italian, "has the taste of a chestnut and is
+the length of a shuttle." These ground fruits were potatoes.
+
+The people here seem to have been very liberal in trading.
+
+They would give six fowls for a knife--well they might do so, as they
+used stone implements.
+
+They gave _two_ geese for a comb--here they were both generous and wise.
+
+They gave as great a quantity of fish as ten men could eat for a pair of
+scissors.
+
+And for a bell, they gave a whole basket full of potatoes (battate).
+
+Marvelous indeed as was this same country of Verzim, it also abounded
+in the conditions and atmospheres of long life.
+
+"Some of these people," says our Italian chronicler, "live to be a
+hundred or a hundred and twenty, or a hundred and forty or more. They
+wear little clothing."
+
+Which speaks well for pineapples, potatoes, and easy dress.
+
+"They sleep on cotton nets, which are fastened on large timbers, and
+stretch from one end of the house to another."
+
+It is good to sleep in ample ventilation. We do not wonder that many of
+the people passed a hundred years.
+
+The boats of these people were as simple as their open houses.
+
+"These are not made with iron instruments, for there are none, but with
+stones."
+
+The canoes were dug out of one long tree--some giant growth of the
+forest which would convey from thirty to forty men. The paddles for
+these canoes resembled shovels. The rowers were usually black men.
+
+The people ate human flesh, but only at feasts of triumph. They then
+served up their enemies.
+
+Pigafetta draws the following grewsome picture:
+
+"They do not eat up the whole body of a man whom they take prisoner;
+they eat him bit by bit, and for fear that he should be spoiled, they
+cut him up into pieces, which they set to dry before the chimney. They
+eat this day by day, so as to keep in mind the memory of their enemy."
+
+This was indeed the sweet food of revenge, and as barbarous as it seems,
+the spirit of revenge secretly cherished is hardly less unworthy when it
+finds expression in words that are bitter, if not carnal.
+
+The region abounded with bright birds, yet with all these delights, and
+pineapples and potatoes, there fell great rains. So there were shadows
+in the sunlands.
+
+We can fancy Pigafetta relating his discoveries on the shore to a
+susceptible spirit, like Del Cano, and writing an account of them day by
+day in his immortal journal.
+
+These strange adventures by sea and on land which so greatly interested
+the Italian Knight Pigafetta, our historian, do not seem to have greatly
+impressed the mind of Magellan. The lands had been sighted before. His
+whole soul was bent on one purpose--not on rediscovery, but on
+discovery. He was sailing now where other keels had been. It was his
+purpose to find new ways for the world to follow over unknown seas. His
+heart could find no full satisfaction but in water courses that sails
+had never swept; a new way to the Moluccas that no ship had ever broken.
+
+Notwithstanding the friendly spirit and liberal patronage of the
+Emperor, he still stood against the world. He represented a cast-out
+name. His own countrymen, on his own ships in the long delays on the
+voyage to unknown seas, were plotting against him.
+
+Let us recall in fancy a night scene as the ships lay on the waters of
+the meridional world. Magellan sits alone in one of the castles of the
+ship and looks out on the phosphorescent sea. The stars above him shine
+in a clear splendor, and are reflected in the sea. The sky seems to be
+in the waters; the waters are a mirror of the sky. Among the clear stars
+the Southern Cross, always vivid, here rises high. Magellan lifts to it
+his eye, and feels the religious inspiration of the suggestion. He is a
+son of the Church, and he holds that all discoveries are to be made for
+the glory of the Cross.
+
+On the distant shores palms rise in armies in the dusky air. The shores
+are silent. When arose the tall people that inhabited them?
+
+Magellan dreams: he wonders at himself, at his inward commission; at his
+cast-out name and great opportunity.
+
+One of his trusty friends comes to him; he is a Spaniard and his
+disquieting words break the serenity of the scene.
+
+"Captain General, it hurts my soul to say it, but there is disloyalty on
+the ships--it is everywhere."
+
+"I seem to feel the atmospheres of it," said Magellan. "Why should it
+be? The sea and the sky promise us success. Who are disloyal?"
+
+"Captain General, they are your own countrymen!"
+
+"And why do they plot treason under the Cross of discovery?"
+
+"Captain General, if the ocean open new ways before you, and you should
+achieve all of which you dream, they will have little share in the
+glory; you are facing stormy waters and perils unknown, not for
+Portugal, but for Spain."
+
+"Not for Spain alone, nor for Portugal, but for the glory of the Cross,
+and the good of all the world. A divine will leads me, and sustains me,
+and directs me. I am not seeking gold or fame or any personal advantage;
+my soul goes forth to reveal the wonders and the benevolence of
+Providence to the heart of the whole world. I go alone, and feel the
+loneliness of my lot. I left all that I had to make this expedition. It
+is my purpose to discover unknown seas. Joy, rapture, and recompense
+would come to me, beyond wealth or fame, could my eyes be the first to
+see a new ocean world, and to carry back the knowledge of it to all
+nations. What happiness would it be to me to ride on uncharted tides! My
+friend, you are loyal to me?"
+
+"Captain General, I am loyal, and the Spanish sailors are loyal; it is
+your own men who plot in dark corners to bring your plans to naught."
+
+In the shadow of one of the tall castles of another ship sit a band of
+idle men. They are Portuguese.
+
+One of them, who seems to lead the minds of the others, is whittling,
+and after a long silence says:
+
+"We do not know where we are going, and wherever we are going, we are
+Portuguese and are slaves to Spain."
+
+"Ay, ay," returned an old Portuguese sailor, "and when we go back again,
+should that ever be, the profit to us will be little at the India
+House."
+
+"Right," answered a number of voices, and one ventured to say:
+
+"Magellan, after all, may be mad, like his old companion, the
+astronomer. Both came from the same place in Portugal."
+
+Some of the officers had schemes of their own.
+
+But the ships crept on and on, along the Brazilian coast, where the flag
+of Spain and the farol guided them in the track of the Admiral they
+followed. Night after night the lantern of the flagship gleamed in the
+air, moving toward cooler waters under the Southern Cross.
+
+And in Magellan's heart was a single purpose, and he anticipated the joy
+of a great discovery, as a revelation that would answer the prophetic
+light that shone like a star in his own spiritual vision. On, and on!
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+THE FIRST GIANT.--THE ISLANDS OF GEESE AND GOSLINGS.--THE DANCING
+GIANTS.
+
+
+The narrative of Pigafetta, the Knight of Rhodes, has much curious lore
+in regard to giants. At a place on the coast, formerly called Cape St.
+Mary, the first of these giants appeared.
+
+He was a leader of a tribe "who ate human flesh." The lively Knight of
+Rhodes informs us that this man, who towered above his fellows, "had a
+voice like a bull."
+
+He came to one of the captains' ships and asked--of course in sign
+language; for a man may have a "voice like a bull" and yet fail to be
+understood in cannibal tongues--if he might come on board the ship and
+bring his fellows with him.
+
+He left a quantity of goods on the shore. While he was negotiating at
+the ships, his people on the shore, who seem to have been unusually wise
+and prudent, began to remove the stores of goods from exposure to danger
+to a kind of castle at some distance.
+
+The officers of the ships grew inpatient when they saw the tempting
+goods being thus removed. So they landed a hundred men to recover the
+goods, which they seemed to have deemed theirs after the "right of
+discovery."
+
+The men began to run after the provident natives, when they became
+greatly surprised. The natives seemed to _fly_ over the ground, and
+leave them behind at a humiliating distance.
+
+"They did more in one step than we could do at a bound," says Pigafetta,
+Knight of Rhodes.
+
+The giant people here showed that there was need to approach them with
+caution. Some time before, these "Canibali" had captured a Spanish sea
+captain and sixty men, who had landed and pastured inland to make
+discoveries. They ate them all--a fearful feast!
+
+Our voyagers probably had no desire to go too far inland in view of such
+a warning; so they returned and proceeded on their course toward the
+antarctic pole.
+
+They discovered two small islands, which had more agreeable inhabitants
+than the land of Cape St. Mary. "These islands," says our good Knight
+Pigafetta, "were full of geese and goslings and sea wolves." He adds:
+"We loaded five ships with them for an hour."
+
+The Knight has also left us the following curious picture of the birds,
+which must have been very much surprised at being so rudely disturbed:
+
+"The geese are black, and have feathers all over the body of the same
+size and shape; and they do not fly but live on fish, and they were so
+fat that we did not pluck them, but skinned them. They have beaks like
+that of a crow.
+
+"The sea wolves of these islands are of many colors and of the size and
+thickness of a calf, and have a head like a calf, and ears small and
+round. They have teeth but no legs, but feet joining close to the body,
+which resemble a human hand. They have small nails to their feet, and
+skin between the fingers like geese.
+
+"If these animals could run they would be very bad and cruel, but they
+do not stir from the waters, and swim and live upon fish."
+
+This seems to be a very admirable description of a sea wolf, O Knight of
+Rhodes!
+
+A great storm came down upon the ships here. But, marvelous to relate,
+the fiery body of good St. Anselmo or Anseline "appeared to us, and
+immediately the storm ceased."
+
+The fleet sailed away again and came to Port St. Julian, the true land
+of the giants, of which place our Knight has some very interesting
+stories to tell.
+
+[Illustration: The world according to the Ptolemy of 1548.]
+
+The fleet entered the Port of St. Julian. It was winter, and for a long
+time no human beings appeared.
+
+Suddenly one day a most extraordinary sight met the eyes of some of the
+adventurers. Our Knight's description of this being is very vivid. He
+says:
+
+"One day, without any one's expecting it, we saw a giant who was on the
+shore of the sea, quite naked, and was dancing and leaping and singing,
+and, while singing, he put sand and dust on his head." The Captain of
+one of the ships, who first saw this extraordinary creature, said to one
+of the sailors:
+
+"Go and meet him. He dances and sings as a sign of friendship. You must
+do the same. Beckon him to me."
+
+The Captain himself was on a little island.
+
+The scene that followed must have been comical indeed.
+
+The giant danced and sung and sprinkled his head with sand. The sailor
+did the same, danced and sang, and the two approached each other.
+
+So the giant was made to think that he was among friends. The sailor led
+him on to the island, where he met the Captain.
+
+But the lively giant now began to be afraid in the presence of a new
+people. He seemed to wish to ask them who they were and whence they
+came. Then an answer to this question came to him. He looked up to the
+sky and pointed upward with one finger, saying by signs:
+
+"Did you come down from Heaven?"
+
+"He was so tall," says our descriptive Knight, "that the tallest of us
+only came up to his waist." He was probably hardly taller than many of
+his race. Falkner, in his account of Patagonia (1774), says that he saw
+men there seven feet and a half high.
+
+Of this dancing giant our historian gives a further description in
+lively and interesting colors:
+
+"He had a large face painted red all around, and around his eyes were
+rings of yellow, and he had two hearts painted on his cheeks. He had but
+little hair on the top of his head, which was painted white.
+
+"When he was brought before the Captain, he had thrown over him the
+skin of a certain beast, which skin was very carefully sewed."
+
+[Illustration: The dancing giant.]
+
+The skin was that of a guanaco, a kind of llama.
+
+Our historian thus describes the guanaco:
+
+"This beast has its head and ears of the size of a mule, and the neck
+and body of the fashion of a camel, the legs of a deer, and the tail of
+a horse, and it neighs like a horse. There are great numbers of these
+animals in the same place."
+
+Patagonia is the land of these strange animals, which are still found
+there, and are hunted by Indians who lie upon the ground with drawn
+bows. The animal has great curiosity, and he draws near this living
+snare and is killed. When tame he is an interesting companion, but if
+angered he suddenly emits a great quantity of offensive liquid from his
+nose, like a half bucket of water, which he throws upon the offender. He
+is the South American camel.
+
+This giant when he made himself ready to meet the adventurers had shoes
+of leather or skins, and carried a bow made of the "gut of a beast" and
+a bundle of cane arrows feathered, at the end of which were small white
+stones.
+
+"The Captain caused food and drink to be given to him.
+
+"Then the crew began to show him some of the presents they had brought,
+among them a looking-glass."
+
+When the giant saw himself in the glass he was filled with wonder. It
+was as though his own ghost had appeared to him. There were men behind
+him curious to see how he would be affected. He leaped back with such
+force as to tumble them over. They were but pigmies to him.
+
+The Captain now gave the giant two bells, a mirror, a comb, and beads,
+and sent him back to the shore.
+
+One of the giants of the country saw him coming back, ran to the
+habitation of the giants, and summoned the giant people to the shore to
+meet him. They came, almost naked, leaping and singing, and pointing
+upward to Heaven. What a sight it must have been!
+
+The women were laden with goods. The sailors beckoned them to the ships
+to trade.
+
+Queerly enough, the women brought with them a baby or little guanaco,
+which they led by a string. Our historian learned that when these giants
+wished to capture the old guanacos or camels they fastened one of the
+little guanacos to a bush, and the old ones came to the bush to play
+with it, and so became an easy prey.
+
+"Six days afterward, our people going to cut wood," writes the Knight,
+"saw another giant, who raised his hands toward Heaven.
+
+"When the Captain General came to know of it, he sent to fetch him with
+his ship's boat, and brought him to one of the little islands in the
+port. This giant was of a better disposition than the other, and was a
+gracious and amiable person, he loved to dance and leap. When he leaped,
+he caused the earth to sink to a palm's depth at the place where his
+feet touched."
+
+The good giant remained for a time with the adventurers. They gave him
+the name of John. They learned him to pronounce the name of Jesus.
+
+"Say Pater Noster," said they.
+
+"Pater Noster," said the giant.
+
+"Say Ave Maria," said the men.
+
+"Ave Maria," said the susceptible giant.
+
+They made him presents when he went away, among them some of the many
+tinkling bells.
+
+"We must capture some of these people," said the Captain, "and take them
+to Spain for wonders."
+
+So the explorers began to study how to secure some interesting specimens
+of these tall people, to excite the wonder of the people of Spain.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+CAPTURING A GIANT.--MAGELLAN'S DECISION.
+
+
+The attempts to capture wild giants greatly interested Pigafetta.
+
+Our historian says that it was "done by gentle and cunning means, for
+otherwise they would have done a hurt to some of our men."
+
+One day some sailors saw four giants hidden in some bushes, and they
+were unarmed. They brought these into the power of the Captain. Two of
+them were young, and such as would excite admiration anywhere for their
+noble development.
+
+They gave these two lusty young Herculeses as many knives, mirrors,
+bells, and trinkets as they could hold in their hands, and while the
+delighted youths were thus abounding in riches, the Captain said:
+
+"Now show them the iron fetters."
+
+The two youths could but wonder at these when they were brought.
+
+The Captain ordered that the fetters be presented to them.
+
+But their hands were already full. What could they do with them? Where
+could they put them?
+
+The Captain signified to them that he would ornament their feet with the
+fetters. To this they consented.
+
+So the fetters were put on the feet of each of them, like necklaces or
+rings, but when the young giants saw a blacksmith bring a hammer and
+rivet the fetters, they began to be distrustful and presently greatly
+agitated. They tried to walk, but they could not move.
+
+Our historian thus describes their fury when they saw that they were
+helplessly bound:
+
+"Nevertheless when they saw the trick which had been played on them they
+began to be enraged, and to foam like bulls, crying out to the _devil_
+to help them." We do not see why our Knight should have taken this view
+of the case; we would think that two human beings who had been so
+treacherously deceived, might have been regarded as appealing to the
+Deity of justice.
+
+"The hands of the other two giants were bound," says the original
+narrative, "but it was with great difficulty; then the Captain sent them
+back on shore, with nine of his men to conduct them, and to bring the
+wife of one of those who had remained in irons, because he regretted her
+greatly." This last touch gives us a very favorable view of this young
+giant.
+
+But on being conducted away, one of the two giants who were to be
+liberated, untied his hands and escaped. As soon as he found that he was
+free, his feet were picked up nimbly indeed. He flew, as it were, his
+long strides leaving his late captors far behind him. He had no heart to
+trust Europeans again. He rushed to his native town, but he found only
+the women there, who must have been greatly alarmed; the men had gone to
+hunt.
+
+He rushed after the hunters to tell them how his companions had been
+betrayed.
+
+What became of the other giant whose hands were bound? He struggled,
+too, to break the cords, seeing which, one of the men struck him on the
+head. He became quiet when he saw that he was helpless, and led the men
+to the giant's town where the women and children were.
+
+The men concluded to pass the night there, as it was near night and
+everything there looked harmless and inviting.
+
+But during the night the other giant who had gone to meet the hunters
+returned with his companions. These saw the bruised head of the giant
+who had also been bound, and warned the women who began to run. We are
+told that the youngest "ran faster than the biggest" and that the men
+"ran faster than horses," at which we can not wonder. The fleeing giant
+shot one of the men from the ships, and he was buried there on shore.
+The poor giant in irons who had lamented for his wife probably never
+saw the giantess again.
+
+The methods of treating sickness in the town of the giants were curious.
+For an emetic one ran a stick down his throat. For a headache, one cut a
+gash on the forehead, not unlike the old method of bleeding. The
+philosophy of this latter treatment was interesting--blood did not
+remain with pain, and pain departed with blood--quite true; white people
+have advanced theories as conclusive.
+
+"When one of them dies," says our Knight, "ten devils appear and dance
+around the dead man." One of the poor giants who was forced to remain on
+board said he had seen devils with horns, and hair that fell to their
+feet, who spouted fire. There seems to be the color of the European
+imagination in this statement.
+
+The giants lived on raw meat, thistles, and sweet root, and one of them
+drank a "bucket of water" at a time.
+
+The expedition remained at St. Julian five months, and acquired much
+information about the country from the captive giants with whom they
+learned to talk by sign language.
+
+They here set up a cross on a mountain and took possession of the
+country in the name of the King of Spain. They called the signal
+elevation where they planted the cross the Mount of Christ.
+
+The primitive people of the shores of Brazil and Patagonia delighted in
+exciting the wonder of their visitors. Many of these people who thought
+that the Europeans had come down from the sky, where they conceived all
+life must be wonderful indeed, liked to show them some of the feats that
+the people of the earth could do. The people who came down from the sky
+they reasoned had great wisdom in sailing the seas, but they were not
+giants. They could trail a lantern along the sea in the night air in
+some unaccountable way, but they did not know how to run with flying
+feet on the land or how to wing arrows with unerring aim into the sky
+and sea.
+
+One day there came from a company of the primitive people, a champion in
+an art of which the Europeans could have never heard. They had seen
+these people run, leap, and vault with almost magic power, but they had
+never seen one who could make a tube of himself.
+
+This new champion approached the men in the usual way, inviting
+attention. He carried in his hand an arrow which was a cubit and a half
+long.
+
+He tilted it, opened his great mouth to receive it, dropped it into his
+throat, when, amid muscular contortions, it began to descend. The
+sailors watched him with amazement as it went down. It disappeared at
+last, having, as we are told, descended to the "bottom of his stomach."
+It seemed to cause him no pain.
+
+Presently the quiver began to appear again. The long arrow slowly rose
+out of the human tube which the man had made of himself, and dropped
+into his hand at last, the whole being performed by muscular movement.
+
+He must have been delighted at the sensation which this mental control
+over the muscles of digestion had produced. It was less strange that the
+arrow should have gone down than that it should have come up again.
+
+Such feats as these entertained the sailors from time to time when they
+were on shore. Pigafetta was now seeing the "wonders of the world"
+indeed.
+
+Magellan's mind was given to the more serious problems of the voyage.
+
+The Antarctic pole star now rose to his view. It was cold. Magellan saw
+that the voyage would be likely to last long.
+
+Not only the Portuguese came to distrust him, but some of the Spanish
+sailors caught the infection of the deleterious atmosphere. They
+reasoned differently from the Portuguese.
+
+"The Admiral is a native of Portugal," said they, "and though the
+Portuguese court rejected him, he will be sure in the end to be true to
+his own people and King. He will never allow the glory of his
+discoveries to go to Spain."
+
+Some of them came to him to say that the wind blew cold, that the sea
+was full of perils, that nothing but disaster could come by pushing on
+into the sea where they were tending.
+
+"Turn south," said they.
+
+The answer of Magellan was royal and loyal. We give it in what, from
+what was reported of it, must be in his own thought, and very nearly his
+own words.
+
+"Comrades, my course was laid down by Cæsar (the King) himself.
+I--will--not--depart--from--it--in--any--degree. I will open to Cæsar an
+unknown world."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+THE MUTINY AT PORT JULIAN.--THE STRAITS.--1519.
+
+
+Days of mutiny came in the cold waters.
+
+The spirit of disloyalty that had found expression in the inspector
+broke out anew at Port St. Julian. It spread through the officers and
+crews of three of the ships. These caused to be published the resolution
+that they would sail no farther.
+
+"You are leading us to destruction," said the mutineers.
+
+Luis de Mendoza, Captain of the Victoria, the treasurer of the
+expedition, was a leader of the mutiny. Another disturbing spirit was
+Gasper de Queixada, Captain of the Concepcion.
+
+Magellan, of the kind heart, had, as we have seen, the resolution to
+meet emergencies. This expedition was his life. It must not be opposed,
+hindered, or thwarted. He lived in his purpose. He must stamp out the
+mutiny. He no more used gentle and courteous words. He thundered his
+will.
+
+One day Ambrosia Fernandez, his constable, came to him, and said:
+
+"Three crews are ready to mutiny, to force you to go back."
+
+Magellan saw that he must make the leaders of these ships his prisoners,
+or that he would become theirs.
+
+"Constable," he said, "pick out sixty trusty men and arm them well. Go
+with them on board the treasurer's ship, and arrest Mendoza and lay him
+dead on the deck."
+
+The fleet was moored in line. It was flood tide, and Mendoza's ship rode
+astern of Magellan's, and the ship of Queixada, ahead.
+
+Magellan prepared his own crew to face the consequences of a tragedy
+should one occur. He ordered his hawser to be attached to the cable, and
+called his crew to arms.
+
+When the flood tide was at its height, Fernandez, the constable,
+prepared to execute his order.
+
+He appeared before the ship of the mutinous Mendoza, and asked to be
+received on board.
+
+"Back to your own ship," said the mutineer. "I command the Victoria."
+
+"But we are few against many," said the constable, "and I have a message
+from the Admiral which I must deliver."
+
+He was helped on board the Victoria.
+
+His feet had no sooner touched the deck than he seized Mendoza.
+
+"I arrest you in the name of the Emperor."
+
+The armed men that the constable had left on the boat rushed on board.
+
+The crew of the Victoria, stood aghast. They saw the power of the
+Admiral's mind.
+
+Magellan brought his ship alongside the Victoria.
+
+He led his armed crew on board the Victoria, and halted before a
+terrible scene. Mendoza had been stabbed by the constable, and the crew
+of the Victoria plead for mercy, and promised to be loyal to the
+Admiral.
+
+In this hour of tragedy and terror Magellan bore his ship around to
+Queixada's, and made the officers and crew of the Concepcion his
+prisoners. The leaders of the mutiny were executed. It was a necessity.
+
+Magellan caused also the sentence he had imposed on the inspector and
+his accomplice to be carried out here.
+
+Carthagena and Sanches were led from their prison to the shore.
+
+As the sails were being lifted to depart, they were marooned--left with
+some provisions, among which were some bottles of wine, on the desert
+shore.
+
+There were hearts that pitied them as the ships sailed away. There was
+_one_ who plotted to rescue them. It was Gormez.
+
+They left them some biscuits with the bottles of wine.
+
+"It is the last bread they will ever eat," said their companions.
+
+"And the last wine that they will ever drink," said a loyal priest on
+board.
+
+But there was one on board that shook his head.
+
+If he could have his will the two would eat bread and drink wine again
+in the convents of beautiful Seville.
+
+The execution of the disloyal Spaniards again awakened the jealousy of
+Gormez. He probably began to plan about this time to separate the
+Antonio from the expedition, and lead her back to Spain. His heart was
+with the inspector and friar far away on the desolate shore.
+
+The ships sailed away, and the marooned priests saw them disappear.
+
+"They were cast aside for opposing a madman," reasoned Gormez. "Magellan
+is no fit leader of an expedition. If I had full command of the Antonio,
+I would rescue the inspector, if I were to find him alive."
+
+But he could not take the Antonio back while Mesquita, Magellan's loyal
+cousin, was in command. Had he breathed a breath of disloyalty in the
+presence of this Portuguese, he might have himself been deposed from his
+position and marooned, as had been the inspector and the friar.
+
+A dark plot began to form in the pilot's mind. If he could incite the
+crew against Mesquita in some hour of peril, he might cause him to be
+imprisoned on his own ship, and then he could succeed to the command,
+and take the Antonio back to Spain.
+
+And he would also endeavor to rescue the inspector and the friend of the
+inspector who had been marooned. If he could rescue them and take them
+back with him to Spain, they would be powerful witnesses for him against
+Magellan.
+
+Gormez now waited his opportunity. A jealous man seeks for a principle
+of life to ease his conscience and justify evil deeds. Gormez had two
+principles to sustain him in his disloyalty. The one was that he could
+lead a better expedition, and the other the merciful rescue of his two
+companions who had been marooned for the same opinions that he had from
+the first carried in his heart. So calling treachery, loyalty and
+sympathy, he awaited an hour favorable to his plan.
+
+If he could return to Spain he would offer his services to Portugal or
+to Spain to lead an expedition to the Spice Islands that should be
+conducted in some more promising way than by the winter seas.
+
+As the ships sailed on into the clouds and cold, the sailors were filled
+with apprehension. But the farol still shone at night like a star in the
+changing atmosphere. They had expected that the extremity of South
+America would point West, but this was not the case. Whither were they
+tending?
+
+It was the middle of October. The water grew colder and the land became
+more desolate. Suddenly a bay appeared and the continent seemed to part.
+The sea poured its tides to the East amid towering mountains, and a
+strait appeared, which now bears the name of Magellan.
+
+The soul of the Admiral thrilled. It was the fulfillment of his visions.
+He called the opening to the swift channel Cape Virgins, as he
+discovered it on the day on which the Church commemorated the martyrdom
+of the "eleven thousand virgins."
+
+His lone lantern entered the straits. The way was toward the East.
+
+Magellan sent the ship Antonio, which was commanded by his cousin Alvaro
+de Mesquita, to explore the bay, of which ship Gormez still held the
+position of pilot. The mutineer's hour had come.
+
+The pilot entered the bay, but presently a powerful tide carried the
+ship back, and beyond the sight of the flag and the lantern of Magellan.
+
+The jealous Portuguese had seen enough to know that great perils were
+before the fleet or that a glory like to that of Columbus was now likely
+to fall to the lot of Magellan. He determined to be revenged upon the
+Admiral for supplanting him in accepting the favors of the King.
+
+He called the crew secretly about him.
+
+"You are rushing on to ruin," he said. "I can take you back to Spain.
+Put Mesquita in irons, and let us return. Mesquita advised Magellan to
+execute our comrades!"
+
+The crew, overcome by the perils of the situation, obeyed the pilot.
+
+Mesquita was placed in irons, and the pilot bore the Antonio away from
+the wintry seas, and turned her prow toward Spain.
+
+But untrue as the sailors were to Magellan, he was true to them. He
+delayed the expedition for their return, and sent out the Victoria in
+search of them. The Victoria's crew planted signal standards, under
+which were letters.
+
+Now perhaps for the first time Magellan was master of the expedition. He
+supposed at first that the Antonio had become lost in the terrible
+tides, but he still suspected treachery.
+
+As the fleet entered the straits, the hills at night blazed with fires.
+The explorers thought these fires were volcanoes. They were signal fires
+kindled by the natives. Magellan gave the place the name of "Tierra del
+Fuego"--the "Land of Fire," a name that it still bears.
+
+The water ran icy cold. Peaks of crystal towered above the straits, and
+the sublimities of mountain desolations everywhere appeared. So amid
+awful chasms of the sea, now white with snows, now dark with shadows,
+the little fleet glided on, the farol in the air at night, and all eyes
+strained with wonder to see what new disclosure this strait would
+bring.
+
+What must have been the reflection of Magellan as the mysteries of the
+new world lifted before his eyes?
+
+Joy is the compensation of suffering, and if his happiness was as great
+as his trials had been, he must have indeed known thrilling moments. He
+had dared, and he had achieved.
+
+He wondered at the fate of the Antonio, as the days went by. He indeed
+thought her lost, but yet hoped that she might appear.
+
+"She has deserted us," ventured a loyal officer.
+
+"No," reasoned the Admiral. "Mesquita would never desert me."
+
+He was right. There were many true hearts that made the voyage like Del
+Cano's, but no heart was truer to Magellan than Mesquita's; and true
+hearts know and love each other.
+
+The ships glided on slowly, without the Antonio. They had two new
+passengers in the giants whose lives must have been filled with wonder
+on ship-board.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+"THE ADMIRAL WAS MAD!"
+
+
+Grave as was the act of treachery that the jealousy of Gormez led him to
+commit, he was true to the two marooned priests who had opposed the
+daring schemes of Magellan.
+
+"We must not leave them to perish," he said.
+
+So with Mesquita in irons he steered his ship toward the lonely islands
+where the crew had passed the winter.
+
+They found Carthagena and his brother monk still living, and never could
+two men have been more glad to escape from exile. To live among naked
+giants, whom they could not civilize, must have become a horror to them.
+But their lives had been spared, though their biscuits and wine, we
+fancy, were gone.
+
+"The Admiral has gone mad," said the men who had come to rescue them.
+"He knows not the way to the Moluccas, nor to anywhere."
+
+The marooned men asked them where they were now going.
+
+"To Spain," was the answer. "We have come to rescue you. Our Captain has
+never forgotten you. He will need you as witnesses. You must testify
+that the Admiral is mad."
+
+They were ready to testify that.
+
+The ship sailed back to Spain.
+
+The tales that they carried back to beautiful Seville caused a great
+disappointment in Spain. They must have stricken the heart of the wife
+of Magellan.
+
+Gormez related there that the Admiral had become mad; that he had
+marooned the two priests whom they had brought back as witnesses of the
+truth of what he asserted; that Magellan had sailed into winter seas,
+and quite lost his reason, and knew not where he was going.
+
+Then he told a terrible story of the execution of the mutinous
+Spaniards, friends of the King, at St. Julian. He said:
+
+"His cousin, Mesquita, our captain, advised these crimes, and so we put
+him in irons, and have brought him back to receive justice in Spain."
+
+Mesquita protested his innocence and tried to gain credence for his
+case. But no one cared to listen to him. The court and the popular
+feeling were against him. He was consigned to a prison. It was useless
+for him to protest, and to say that Magellan had made a great discovery;
+that he had found straits which were leading to the South Sea, and which
+were likely to prove that the ocean that Balboa had beheld was
+continuous.
+
+He was placed in a lonely dungeon, and there brooded over his wrongs and
+dreamed.
+
+He had one hope; it was that Magellan would return triumphant, a second
+Columbus or Vasco da Gama. If that day were to come, he would be
+released, and the court would honor him, and he would be hailed as a
+hero.
+
+"I have been made a prisoner by treachery," he said to a few men. "I
+believe that the day of my vindication will one day dawn."
+
+Cardinal Ximenes died. Juana still watched by the tomb of her husband,
+and took no interest in the world. Charles V was entering upon his
+career as a conqueror who was to subdue the Roman world to his will.
+
+As for Magellan in Spain he was to be but little more remembered now.
+Spain believed the story of the jealous Gormez, and the mariners of
+Seville said:
+
+"The Admiral was mad!"
+
+In the common view the mad Admiral had gone down in Antarctic seas. Like
+Faleiro, his friend, who had been sent to the mad house, it was thought
+that his brain had become unsettled, and that his bright visions had
+failed.
+
+The two mutineers ate bread and drank wine again in the convent bowers
+of Seville.
+
+Gormez had schemes of his own. He desired the authority of the throne to
+make an expedition to the Spice Islands, which he believed he could find
+by sailing West. Strangely enough, as we have said, this jealous,
+treacherous man was afterward made a pilot in an expedition that visited
+Florida, Cape Cod, and Massachusetts Bay. But he did not find the way to
+the Spice Islands on the voyage.
+
+Mesquita, still believing in the success of the expedition of Magellan,
+said to a few whom he could reach:
+
+"Magellan is not mad. He executed those who had planned to murder him.
+He had to put to death these men for the sake of the expedition. He will
+return again!"
+
+Few believed his story, and fewer his prophecy.
+
+Still there were some who hoped that the prisoner's prophecy might prove
+true. Columbus was deemed mad, and quelled a mutiny, but he returned
+again. Vasco da Gama faced doubt and destruction, but he returned again.
+There were not wanting some who asked, "Will Magellan ever return
+again?" Such usually received the answer, "The Admiral was mad!"
+
+The poor wife of Magellan, who had hoped much from him for the sake of
+her child, as well as for Spain, heard these reports in an agony of
+grief. But she still hoped. She must have believed in her husband's
+destiny.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+THE PACIFIC.--THE DEATH OF THE GIANTS.
+
+
+The four ships glided along the wonderful straits which Magellan named
+the "Virgins," but which will always bear his own name. The scenery
+continued wild and fierce, and in some places overawing and sublime;
+they sailed amid domes of crystal and almost under the roofs of a broken
+world. They still moved slowly--the scenery growing more and more
+wonderful.
+
+The air grew bright again. The ships were in the sea. They had entered a
+sea broad and glorious, but which Magellan could have hardly dreamed to
+be nearly ten thousand miles long, and more than that wide! Its waters
+were placid--an ocean plain. Columbus had heard of this vast sea, and
+Balboa had seen it from the peak of Darien.
+
+All the joy that Magellan had anticipated in his visions of years now
+burst upon him.
+
+"The Pacific!"
+
+This was the name that came to him as he surveyed the new ocean world.
+He was the discoverer of the South Pacific, which was continuous with
+the ocean discovered by Balboa. What did it contain? Whither might he
+sail over the new serenity of waters?
+
+His soul had stood against his own country; his name had been cast out
+by his countrymen. But in the splendors of the sunset sea he had found
+his faith to be reality. It is said that the sailors wept when they
+beheld the Pacific.
+
+We may fancy the joy of Del Cano.
+
+We may imagine how the heart of Pigafetta, the young Italian, which had
+always been true to the Admiral, must have overflowed with delight when
+the Pacific opened before his eyes! There is a strong heart beat in the
+happiness of one who has been true to a successful man in the hour of
+his need.
+
+He may have sung the song that cheered Columbus and his men--the
+mariners' hymn to the Virgin:
+
+    "Gentle Star of Ocean!
+      Portal of the sky!
+    Ever Virgin Mother
+      Of the Lord most high!"
+
+"Wednesday, the 20th of November, 1520," says the original narrative,
+"we came forth out of the same strait, and entered the Pacific Sea."
+
+The ships sailed on into the calm mystery of the ocean, the soul of
+Magellan glowing. But though the Admiral had risen superior to so many
+obstacles, there were others to be met. The sea was indeed placid and
+full of promise, but starvation now stared him in the face, and after
+the spectre of Treason had departed that of Famine appeared.
+
+Day after day the sun arose on the same serenity of sea. One month
+passed, and still there spread before the ships the same infinite ocean.
+Another month passed, and another, and twenty days more.
+
+How did the crews live on this long voyage of silence and calms?
+
+The narrative says: "We only ate old biscuit reduced to powder, and full
+of grubs, and we drank water that had turned yellow and smelled."
+
+But a more perilous diet had to be followed.
+
+They ate the "ox hides that were under the main yard." To eat these
+hides they had to soak them for some days in the sea, and then cook them
+on embers.
+
+They ate sawdust; then the vermin on the ships.
+
+A worse condition came. The gums of the men swelled from such food, so
+that many of them could not eat at all, and nineteen died. Beside those
+who died, twenty-five fell ill of "divers sicknesses."
+
+Kind-hearted Pigafetta, who was always true to the Portuguese Admiral,
+formed an intimacy with the poor young giant, presumably with the giant
+whose wife had been left behind. This giant was imprisoned on the
+flagship of Magellan.
+
+One day the giant said to him, helplessly:
+
+"Capac."
+
+Our Italian understood that this must be the Patagonian word for bread.
+So he wrote it down, and the giant saw that he was interested in the
+meaning of his native words.
+
+So the young giant began to teach the young Italian.
+
+"Her-dem" meant a chief.
+
+"Holi" meant water.
+
+"Ohone," a storm.
+
+"Setebos," the Unseen Power.
+
+They studied together for a time, and shared each other's good will.
+
+One day the Italian drew a cross on paper. The young giant raised it to
+his lips and kissed it, as he had seen Pigafetta kiss the sign of the
+Cross.
+
+But he said by signs: "Do not make the Cross again, else Setebos will
+enter into you and kill you."
+
+The meaning of the cross was explained to him.
+
+The poor giant fell ill at last, amid all the misery.
+
+"Bring me the Cross," he said by signs.
+
+He kissed it again.
+
+He knew that he would soon die.
+
+"Make me a Christian," he said.
+
+They named him "Paul," and baptized him.
+
+One day found him dead, and they cast his great frame into the sea. He
+was probably the first convert to the faith among Patagonians, and his
+so-called conversion was the heart's cry in helplessness.
+
+The other giant may have lived to see the days of famine, when men
+shrank and death threatened all. Then he, too, famished and died, and
+found a grave in the sea. Another account, makes this giant die on the
+Antonio before that ship went back to St. Julian.
+
+Two islands only appeared in the months of steady sailing. They were
+uninhabited except by birds. The sky in all this time brought no storm.
+
+In these days of ocean solitude, hunger, and death, Magellan was sure
+always of the faith of two true hearts--the susceptible Italian and Del
+Cano.
+
+Magellan dreamed of the fate of Mesquita in these strange experiences,
+and Mesquita in his lonely prison thought continually of him. Would
+Magellan ever return? the latter must have asked daily.
+
+If so, his prison doors might swing open. He had no other hope, but this
+hope was a star. Magellan's wife must have shared this hope with the
+prisoner.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+WELCOME TO THE PHILIPPINES!
+
+
+On Wednesday, March 6th, Magellan sighted islands. His lantern had
+crossed the Pacific Ocean. Here he hoped to find food. He approached the
+shores eagerly. So hungry were the crews that one of the sick men begged
+that if any of the natives were killed human flesh might be brought him.
+
+But the natives here were not only wild men, they were robbers; they
+sought to kill the voyagers and to steal everything. Hence, Magellan
+called the islands the Ladrones (robbers).
+
+The robbers threw stones at the famishing mariners as the ships turned
+away in search of more hospitable shores. The women were dressed in
+bark.
+
+The ships moved on into unknown seas.
+
+On Saturday, March 16, 1521, a notable sight appeared in the dawn of the
+morning. It was a high bluff, some three hundred leagues distant from
+the Thieves' Islands. The island was named Zamal, now called Samar.
+
+Magellan saw another island near. It was inhabited by a friendly
+people. He determined to land there for the sake of security, as he
+could there gather sea food and care for the sick. He planted his tents
+there, and provided the sick with fresh meat.
+
+Where was he?
+
+Here surely was a new archipelago which had found no place on a map.
+March 16, 1521, was to be a notable date of the world.
+
+He had discovered the Philippine Islands, though they were not then
+known by that name. They were the door to China from the West--this he
+could hardly have known.
+
+The islands as now known consist of Luzon, fifty-one thousand three
+hundred square miles in extent; and Mendanao, more than twenty-five
+thousand miles in extent. The islands lying between Luzon and Mendanao
+are called the Bissayas, of which Samar has an area of thirteen thousand
+and twenty miles. Magellan visited Mendanao and then sailed for Zebu, a
+small island where the first Spanish settlement was made, before Manila,
+which was founded in 1581.
+
+This archipelago was a new world of wonder. The small islands are now
+computed to number fourteen hundred. Magellan never knew the extent of
+his discovery.
+
+Here he was to find the happiest days of his life, after the serene but
+famishing voyage.
+
+The people here were to receive him with open arms; to feast him; to
+raise his expectations and to bow down before the Cross. We must
+describe in detail--thanks to the Italian who was true to the heart of
+the Admiral--this golden age of the troubled life of Magellan.
+
+After all the struggle for so many years against many overwhelming
+oppositions, Magellan now rose into the vantage ground of success, and
+fulfilled the vision which had illumined his soul in his darkest hours.
+
+Every man has a right to his record, and whatever might happen now, his
+record no power could destroy; he had discovered the Pacific Ocean, and
+a new way around the world. Whatever might be his fate, the world must
+follow his lantern.
+
+On the 18th of March, 1521, after dinner on shore, the Admiral saw a
+boat coming out from a near island toward his ship. There were men in
+it.
+
+"Let no one move or speak," said Magellan.
+
+The crews awaited the coming of the strangers in the blazing sunlight of
+the tropic sea. The Indians landed, led by a chief.
+
+They were friends. They signified by signs their joy at seeing them.
+Magellan feasted the Indians and gave them presents.
+
+When these people saw the good disposition of the Captain, they gave him
+palm wine and figs "more than a foot long." On leaving they promised to
+return with fruits.
+
+Pigafetta, our Italian Chevalier, vividly describes the scenes that
+followed between Magellan and the friendly people of the
+newly-discovered islands, which we call the Philippines, but which were
+not so named at that time.
+
+He tells us in a wonderfully interesting narrative a translation of
+which we closely follow:
+
+"That people became very familiar and friendly, and explained many
+things in their language, and told the names of some islands which they
+beheld. The island where they dwelt was called Zuluam, and it was not
+large. As they were sufficiently agreeable and conversible the crews had
+great pleasure with them. The Captain seeing that they were of this good
+spirit, conducted them to the ship and showed them specimens of all his
+goods--that he most desired--cloves, cinnamon, pepper, ginger, nutmeg,
+mace, and gold.
+
+"He also had shots fired with his artillery, at which they were so much
+afraid that they wished to jump from the ship into the sea. They made
+signs that the things which the Captain had shown them grew there.
+
+"When they wished to go they took leave of the Captain and of the crew
+with very good manners and gracefulness, promising to come back.
+
+"The island where the ships had moored was named Humunu; but because
+the men found there two springs of very fresh water it was named the
+Watering Place of Good Signs. There was much white coral there, and
+large trees which bear fruit smaller than an almond, and which are like
+pines. There were also many palm trees both good and bad. In this place
+there were many circumjacent islands, on which account the archipelago
+was named St. Lazarus. This region and archipelago is in ten degrees
+north latitude, and a hundred and sixty-one degrees longitude from the
+line of demarcation.
+
+"Friday, the 22d of March, the above-mentioned people, who had promised
+to return, came about midday with two boats laden with the said fruit,
+cochi, sweet oranges, a vessel of palm wine, and a cock, to give us to
+understand that they had poultry in their country." The Italian thus
+describes the habits of the people:
+
+"The lord of these people was old, and had his face painted, and had
+gold rings suspended to his ears, which they name 'schione,' and the
+others had many bracelets and rings of gold on their arms, with a
+wrapper of linen round their head. We remained at this place eight days;
+the Captain went there every day to see his sick men, whom he had placed
+on this island to refresh them; and he gave them himself every day the
+water of this said fruit, the cocho, which comforted them much."
+
+Pigafetta tells us that near this isle is another where there is a kind
+of people "who wear holes in their ears so large that they can pass
+their arms through them"--a very remarkable statement--"and these people
+go naked, except that round their middles they wear cloth made of the
+bark of trees. But there are some of the more remarkable of them who
+wear cotton stuff, and at the end of it there is some work of silk done
+with a needle. These people are tawny, fat, and painted, and they anoint
+themselves with the oil of cocoanuts and sesame to preserve them from
+the sun and the wind. Their hair is very black and long, reaching to the
+waist, and they carry small daggers and knives, ornamented with gold."
+
+Pigafetta fell into the sea here, and he gives a vivid account of the
+personal accident:
+
+"The Monday of Passion week, the 25th of March, and feast of our Lady,
+in the afternoon, and being ready to depart from this place, I went to
+the side of our ship to fish, and putting my feet on a spar to go down
+to the storeroom, my feet slipped, because it had rained, and I fell
+into the sea, without any one seeing me; and being near drowning, by
+luck I found at my left hand the sheet of the large sail which was in
+the sea, I caught hold of it and began to cry out till some came to help
+and pick me up with the boat. I was assisted not by my merits, but by
+the mercy and grace of the Fountain of Pity. That same day we took the
+course between west and southwest, and passed amid four small islands;
+that it to say, Cenalo, Huinanghar, Ibusson, and Abarien."
+
+The Italian describes in an interesting way the visit of the King of one
+of the islands to the ships. He says of this first visit of a Philippine
+King to the Europeans:
+
+"Thursday, the 28th of March, having seen the night before fire upon an
+island, at the morning we came to anchor at this island, where we saw a
+small boat which they call boloto, with eight men inside, which
+approached the ship of the Captain General. Then a slave of the
+Captain's, who was from Sumatra, otherwise named Traprobana, spoke from
+afar to these people, who understood his talk, and came near to the side
+of the ship, but they withdrew immediately, and would not enter the ship
+from fear of us.
+
+"So the Captain, seeing that they would not trust to us, showed them a
+red cap and other things, which he had tied and placed on a little
+plank, and the people in the boat took them immediately and joyously,
+and then returned to advise their King. Two hours afterward, or
+thereabout, we saw come two long boats, which they call ballanghai, full
+of men.
+
+"In the largest of them was their King sitting under an awning of mats;
+when they were near the ship of the Captain General, the said slave
+spoke to the King, who understood him well, because in these countries
+the kings know more languages than the common people. Then the King
+ordered some of his people to go to the Captain's ship, while he would
+not move from his boat, which was near enough to us.
+
+"This was done, and when his people returned to the boat, he went away
+at once. The Captain made a good entertainment to the men who came to
+his ship, and gave them all sorts of things, on which account the King
+wished to give the Captain a rather large bar of solid gold, and a chest
+full of ginger. However, the Captain thanked him very much, but would
+not accept the present. After that, when it was late, he went with the
+ships near to the houses and abode of the King."
+
+The Captain in refusing the offer of gold and ginger from his guest,
+showed indeed a true sense of hospitality. The incident pictures the
+life of Magellan. He obeyed his moral sense and his heart was true. He
+was a Portuguese gentleman of the old type, and presented an example
+worthy of imitation in any age.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+THE VISIT OF THE KING.--PIGAFETTA VISITS THE KING.
+
+
+They were ready to meet the King now, when all was so friendly and
+promising. The good soul of Pigafetta felt that these islands of fruits
+and spiceries were indeed an earthly paradise. He alone had not been
+sick in all of the long monotonous voyage across the Pacific. His
+strength had never abated and his faith in the Admiral had never
+faltered.
+
+Night after night he had watched the lantern swinging in the unknown
+air, and had said his prayers. He had had ever a cheering word to say to
+the Admiral on all occasions. His heart was true to the lantern, the
+stars, the Admiral, and the Divine Power which he believed was leading
+him.
+
+He was now in the sea gardens of palms and spices. He thus continues his
+narrative (we follow in part the translation of the Hakluyt Society in
+the work of Lord Stanley Alderley).
+
+He tells us that on "the next day, which was Good Friday, the Captain
+sent on shore a slave, who was an interpreter, to the King to beg him to
+give him for money some provisions for his ships, sending him word that
+he had not come to his country as an enemy, but as a friend. The King on
+hearing this came with seven or eight men in a boat, and entered the
+ship, and embraced the Captain, and gave him three China dishes covered
+with leaves full of rice, and two _dorades_, which are rather large
+fish. The Captain gave this King a robe of red and yellow cloth, made in
+the Turkish fashion, and a very fine red cap, and to his people he gave
+knives and mirrors. After that refreshments were served up to them. The
+Captain told the King, through the interpreter, that he wished to be
+with him, as _cassi cassi_; that is to say, brothers. To which the King
+answered that he desired to be the same toward him. After that the
+Captain showed him cloths of different colors, linen, coral, and much
+other merchandise, and all the artillery, of which he had some pieces
+fired before him, at which the King was much astonished; after that the
+Captain had one of his soldiers armed with white armor, and placed him
+in the midst of three comrades, who struck him with swords and daggers.
+
+"The King thought this very strange, and the Captain told him, through
+the interpreter, that a man thus in white armor was worth many common
+men; he answered that it was true; he was further informed that there
+were in each ship two hundred like that man.
+
+"After that the Captain showed him a great number of swords, cuirasses,
+and helmets, and made two of the men play with their swords before the
+King; he then showed him the sea chart and the ship compass, and
+informed him how he had found a strait, and of the time which he had
+spent on the voyage; also of the time he had been without seeing any
+land, at which the King was astonished. At the end the Captain asked if
+he would be pleased that two of his people should go with him to the
+places where they lived to see some of the things of his country. This
+the King granted, and I went with another."
+
+The Italian was again in his element, and he gives a graphic account of
+his visit to the natives:
+
+"When I had landed, the King raised his hands to the sky, and turned to
+us two, and we did the same as he did; after that he took me by the
+hand, and one of his principal people took my companion, and led us
+under a place covered with canes, where there was a ballanghai; that is
+to say, a boat, eighty feet long or thereabouts, resembling a fusta. We
+sat with the King upon its stern, always conversing with him by signs,
+and his people stood up around us, with their swords, spears, and
+bucklers. Then the King ordered to be brought a dish of pig's flesh and
+wine. Their fashion of drinking is in this wise: they first raise their
+hands to Heaven, then take the drinking vessel in their right hand, and
+extend the left hand closed toward the people. This the King did, and
+presented to me his fist, so that I thought that he wanted to strike me;
+I did the same thing toward him; so with this ceremony, and other signs
+of friendship, we banqueted, and afterward supped with him."
+
+The Italian was a pious man, but he says:
+
+"I ate flesh on Good Friday, not being able to do otherwise, and before
+the hour of supper, I gave several things to the King, which I had
+brought. There I wrote down several things as they name them in their
+language, and when the King and the others saw me write, and I told them
+their manner of speech, they were all astonished.
+
+"When the hour for supper had come, they brought two large China dishes,
+one of which was full of rice, and the other of pig's flesh, with its
+broth and sauce. We supped with the same signs and ceremonies, and then
+went to the King's palace, which was made and built like a hay grange,
+covered with fig and palm leaves."
+
+Here the two found delightful hospitality; the house was "built on great
+timbers high above the ground, and it was necessary to go up steps and
+ladders to it. Then the King made us sit on a cane mat, with our legs
+doubled as was the custom; after half an hour there was brought a dish
+of fish roast in pieces, and ginger fresh gathered that moment and some
+wine. The eldest son of the King, who was a Prince, came where we were,
+and the King told him to sit down near us, which he did; then two dishes
+were brought, one of fish, with its sauce, and the other of rice, and
+this was done for us to eat with the Prince. My companion enjoyed the
+food and drank so much that he got drunk. They use for candles or
+torches the gum of a tree which is named anime, wrapped up in leaves of
+palms or fig trees. The King made a sign that he wished to go to rest,
+and left us with the Prince, with whom we slept on a cane mat, with some
+cushions and pillows of leaves. Next morning the King came and took me
+by the hand, and so we went to the place where we had supped, to
+breakfast, but the boat came to fetch us. The King, before we went away,
+was very gay, and kissed our hands, and we kissed his. There came with
+us a brother of his, the King of another island, accompanied by three
+men. The Captain General detained him to dine with us, and we gave him
+several things."
+
+"The King abounded in gold, and was a grand figure. In the island
+belonging to the King who came to the ship there are mines of gold,
+which they find in pieces as big as a walnut or an egg, by seeking in
+the ground. All the vessels which he makes use of are made of it, and
+also some parts of his house, which was well fitted up according to the
+custom of the country, and he was the handsomest man that we saw among
+these nations. He had very black hair coming down to his shoulders, with
+a silk cloth on his head, and two large gold rings hanging from his
+ears; he had a cloth of cotton worked with silk, which covered him from
+the waist to the knees; at his side he wore a dagger, with a long handle
+which was all of gold, his sheath was of carved wood. Besides he carried
+upon him scents of storax and benzoin. He was tawny and painted all
+over."
+
+An island where nuggets of gold as big as eggs could be found must have
+offered a tempting place of residence.
+
+But Magellan's first thought was for the good of the souls of this
+hospitable people.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+EASTER SUNDAY.--MAGELLAN PLANTS THE CROSS.
+
+
+Now begins the dawn of Christianity in the Philippines. Magellan was a
+deeply religious man, and Pigafetta was a Christian Knight. Magellan saw
+the significance of his marvelous voyage, and his soul glowed with
+gratitude to Heaven.
+
+Easter Sunday approached. Magellan had made preparations to plant a
+cross on a mountain overlooking the sea.
+
+Easter Sunday fell on the last day of March. "The Captain," to follow
+the Italian's narrative in part, "sent the Chaplain ashore early to say
+mass, and the interpreter went with him to tell the King that they were
+not coming on shore to dine with him, but only to hear the mass.
+
+"When it was time for saying mass the Captain went ashore with fifty
+men, not with their arms, but only with their swords, and dressed as
+well as each one was able to dress, and before the boats reached the
+shore our ships fired six cannon shots as a sign of peace.
+
+"At our landing the two Kings of the islands were there, and received
+the Captain in a friendly manner, and placed him between them, and then
+we went to the place prepared for saying mass, which was not far from
+the shore."
+
+The ceremonies that followed were dramatic. "Before the mass began the
+Captain threw a quantity of musk-rose water on those two Kings," is the
+picture drawn by the Italian, "and when the offertory of the mass came,
+the two Kings went to kiss the Cross like us, but they offered nothing,
+and at the elevation of the body of our Lord they were kneeling like us,
+and adored our Lord with joined hands. The ships fired all their
+artillery at the elevation of the body of our Lord."
+
+The scene that followed discloses the religious nature of Magellan and
+his joy in what was ennobling.
+
+He caused a great cross to be lifted, "with the nails and crown, to
+which the Kings made reverence." He told the Kings that he wished to
+place it in their country for their profit, "because if there came
+afterward any ships from Spain to those islands, on seeing this cross,
+they would know that we had been there, and therefore they would not
+cause them any displeasure to their persons nor their goods; and if they
+took any of their people, on showing them this sign, they would at once
+let them go."
+
+[Illustration: Mount Mayon, on the Island of Luzun.]
+
+The Captain continued his address to the Kings in the same spirit. He
+told them that it was necessary that this cross "should be placed on the
+summit of the highest mountain in their country, so that seeing it every
+day and night they might adore it." He further told them that if they
+did thus, "neither thunder, lightning, nor the tempest could do them
+hurt." This he believed to be true. The Kings "thanked the Captain, and
+said they would do it willingly." The Captain asked them how they
+worshiped. They answered that "they did not perform any other adoration,
+but only joined their hands, looking up to Heaven, and that they called
+their God Aba. Hearing this, the Captain was very joyful; on seeing
+that, the first King raised his hands to the sky and said that he wished
+it were possible for him to be able to show the affection which he felt
+toward him."
+
+The elevation of the Cross followed.
+
+"After dinner we all returned in our dress coats, and we went together
+with the two Kings to the middle of the highest mountain we could find,
+and there the Cross was planted."
+
+Important information followed.
+
+"After the two Kings and the Captain rested themselves, and, while
+conversing, I asked where was the best port for obtaining victuals. They
+replied that there were three; that is to say, Ceylon, Zubu, and
+Calaghan; but that Zubu was the largest and of the most traffic. Then
+the Kings offered to give him pilots to go to those ports, for which he
+thanked them, and deliberated to go there, for his ill-fortune would
+have it so. After the cross had been planted on the mountain, each one
+said the Paternoster and Ave Maria, and adored it, and the Kings did the
+like. Then he went down below to where their boats were. There the kings
+had brought some of the fruit called cocos and other things to make a
+collation and to refresh us."
+
+The fleet sailed away soon after Easter Monday, the Captain having
+secured native pilots from the Kings. One of the Kings volunteered to
+act himself as pilot, and this service was accepted.
+
+Pigafetta describes the use of betel:
+
+"This kind of people are gentle, and go naked, and are painted. They
+wear a piece of cloth made from a tree, like a linen cloth, round their
+body to cover their natural parts; they are great drinkers. The women
+are dressed in tree cloth from their waists downward; their hair is
+black, and reaches down to the ground; they wear certain gold rings in
+their ears. These people chew most of their time a fruit which they call
+areca (betel), which is something of the shape of a pear; they cut it in
+four quarters, and after they have chewed it for a long time they spit
+it out, from which afterward they have their mouths very red. They find
+themselves the better from the use of this fruit because it refreshes
+them much, for this country is very hot, so that they could not live
+without it."
+
+The use of the areca, or betel nut, is still common in all the
+Philippine Islands.
+
+The fleet next went to Maestral, "passing through five islands--Ceylon,
+Bohol, Canighan, Baibai, and Satighan. In the Island of Satighan was a
+kind of bird called barbarstigly, which was as large as an eagle. Of
+these we killed only one," says our narrator, "because it was late. We
+ate it, and it had the taste of a fowl. There were also in this island
+doves, tortoises, parrots, and certain black birds as large as a fowl,
+with a long tail. They lay eggs as large as those of a goose. These they
+put a good length under the sand in the sun, where they were hatched by
+the great heat, which the heated sand gives out; and when these birds
+were hatched they pushed up the sand and came out. These eggs are good
+to eat.
+
+"From this island of Mazzubua to that of Satighan there are twenty
+leagues, and on leaving Satighan we went by the west; but the King of
+Mazzubua could not follow us; therefore we waited for him near three
+islands; that is to say, Polo, Ticobon, and Pozzon. When the King
+arrived he was much astonished at our navigation; the Captain General
+bade him come on board his ship with some of his principal people, at
+which they were much pleased. Thus we went to Zubu, which is fifteen
+leagues off from Satighan."
+
+The story of the Italian here, which we so freely use, leaves in the
+mind a picture of the first voyage among the Philippines. The habits of
+the people in these same islands are not greatly changed, but we hardly
+find there now as tractable kings as were those to whom Magellan left
+the Cross.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+CHRISTIANITY AND TRADE ESTABLISHED.--THE BAPTISM OF THE QUEEN.
+
+
+On April 9th they entered the Port of Zubu, on approaching which they
+saw houses in the trees. The Captain hung out his flags in the clear
+sunny air. He caused his artillery to be fired, which greatly alarmed
+the natives. He then sent an interpreter to the King.
+
+The interpreter found the people in terror at the thunder of the guns.
+He assured the King that the salute had been made in his honor. Then the
+interpreter said:
+
+"My master is the greatest King in all the world. We are sailing at his
+command to discover the Spice Islands. But we have heard of your fame,
+and the fame of your country, and have come to visit you."
+
+"You are welcome," said the King, "but you must pay me tribute."
+
+"My master," said the interpreter, "is the greatest of all Kings, and we
+can pay tribute to no one."
+
+The King feasted them, and they entered into negotiations of peace with
+the King of Zubu.
+
+At Zubu Magellan turned missionary with no common zeal.
+
+He told the native princes that his visit was for the sake of peace.
+
+We are told that the "Captain General sat in a chair of red velvet, and
+near him were the principal men of the ships sitting in leather chairs,
+and the others sat on the ground on mats.
+
+"The Captain," says the narrative, "spoke at length on the subject of
+peace, and prayed God to confirm it in Heaven. These people replied that
+they had never heard such words as these which the Captain had spoken to
+them, and they took great pleasure in hearing them. The Captain, seeing
+then that those people listened willingly to what was said to them, and
+that they gave good answers, began to say a great many good things to
+induce them to become Christians.
+
+"He told them how God had made Heaven and earth and all other things in
+the world, and that he had commanded that every one should render honor
+and obedience to his father and mother, and that whoever did otherwise
+was condemned to eternal fire."
+
+His teaching bore immediate fruit.
+
+"The people heard these things willingly, and besought the Captain to
+leave them two men to teach and show them the Christian faith, and they
+would entertain them well with great honor. To this the Captain answered
+that for the moment he could not leave any of his people, but that if
+they wished to be Christians that his priest would baptize them, and
+that another time he would bring priests and teachers to teach them the
+faith."
+
+His manner of teaching reveals his heart:
+
+"The people told him that they wished to consult their King in regard to
+becoming Christians." The friends of the Captain "wept for the joy which
+they felt at the good-will of these people, and the Captain told them
+not to become Christians 'from fear of us, or to please us, but that if
+they wished to become Christian they must do it willingly, and for the
+love of God, for even though they should not become Christian, no
+displeasure would be done them, but those who became Christian would be
+more loved and better treated than the others.' Then they all cried out
+with one voice that they did not wish to become Christians from fear,
+nor from complaisance, but of their free will."
+
+Here the true character of the man again appears--few Christian
+explorers ever made so noble a record. His sincerity won the hearts of
+the natives:
+
+"At last they said they did not know what more to answer to so many good
+and beautiful words which he spoke to them, but that they placed
+themselves in his hands, and that he should do with them as with his
+own servants."
+
+The next scene is ideal:
+
+"Then the Captain, with tears in his eyes, embraced them, and, taking
+the hand of the Prince and that of the King, said to him that by the
+faith he had in God, and to his master the Emperor, and by the habit of
+St. James which he wore, he promised them to cause them to have
+perpetual peace with the King of Spain, at which the Prince and the
+others promised him the same."
+
+It is a pleasure to follow such a narrative as Pigafetta here writes in
+illustration of the character of a true Christian Knight. Compare this
+narrative with the history of Pizarro, Cortes, and De Soto. Magellan was
+a Las Casas, a Marquette, a La Salle.
+
+The next incident told by Pigafetta has as fine a touch as a portrayal
+of character. It relates to a message which Magellan sent to the King,
+with a present.
+
+"When we came to the town we found the King of Zubu at his palace,
+sitting on the ground on a mat made of palm, with many people about him.
+
+"He had a very heavy chain around his neck, and two gold rings hung in
+his ears with precious stones.
+
+"He was eating tortoise eggs in two china dishes, and he had four
+vessels full of palm wine, which he drank with a cane pipe. We made our
+obeisance, and presented to him what the Captain had sent him, and told
+him, through the interpreter that the present _was not as a return for
+his present which he had sent to the Captain, but for the affection
+which he bore him_. This done, his people told him all the good words
+and explanations of peace and religion which he had spoken to them."
+
+We now behold Magellan in a new attitude, as a missionary teacher, a
+John the Baptist in the wilderness. Pigafetta thus describes the scene:
+
+"On Sunday morning, the fourteenth day of April, we went on shore, forty
+men, of whom two were armed, who marched before us, following the
+standard of our King Emperor. When we landed the ships discharged all
+their artillery, and from fear of it the people ran away in all
+directions.
+
+"Magellan and the King embraced one another, and then joyously we went
+near the scaffolding, where the Captain General and the King sat on two
+chairs, one covered with red, the other with violet velvet. The
+principal men sat on cushions, and others on mats, after the fashion of
+the country.
+
+"Then the Captain began to speak to the King through the interpreter to
+incite him to the faith of Jesus Christ, and told him that if he wished
+to be a good Christian, as he had said the day before, that he must burn
+all the idols of his country, and, instead of them, place a cross, and
+that every one should worship it every day on their knees, and their
+hands joined to Heaven; and he showed him how he ought every day to make
+the sign of the Cross.
+
+"To that the King and all his people answered that they would obey the
+commands of the Captain and do all that he told them. The Captain took
+the King by the hand, and they walked about on the scaffolding, and when
+he was baptized he said that he would name him Don Charles, as the
+Emperor his sovereign was named; and he named the Prince Don Fernand,
+after the brother of the Emperor, and the King of Mazzava, Jehan; to the
+Moor he gave the name of Christopher, and to the others each a name of
+his fancy. Thus, before mass, there were fifty men baptized."
+
+The baptism of the Queen followed.
+
+"Our Chaplain and some of us went on shore to baptize the Queen. She
+came with forty ladies, and we conducted them onto the scaffolding; then
+made her sit down on a cushion, and her women around her, until the
+priest was ready. During that time they showed her an image of our Lady,
+of wood, holding her little child, which was very well made, and a
+cross. When she saw it, she had a greater desire to be a Christian, and,
+asking for baptism, she was baptized and named Jehanne, like the mother
+of the Emperor. The wife of the Prince, daughter of this Queen, had the
+name of Catherine, the Queen of Mazzava Isabella, and to the others each
+their name.
+
+"That day we baptised eight hundred persons of men, women, and
+children. The Queen was young and handsome, covered with a black and
+white sheet; she had the mouth and nails very red, and wore on her head
+a large hat made of leaves of palm, with a crown over it made of the
+same leaves, like that of the Pope. After that she begged us to give her
+the little wooden boy to put in the place of the idols. This we did, and
+she went away. In the evening the King and Queen, with several of their
+people, came to the sea beach, where the Captain had some of the large
+artillery fired, in which they took great pleasure. The Captain and the
+King called one another brother."
+
+The "little boy" spoken of was an image of the infant Christ. The figure
+was preserved until the year 1598, when the Spaniards sent missionaries
+to the place who gave it a place in a shrine and named a city for it.
+
+The naming of the Queen at her baptism for poor Juana, or "Crazy Jane,"
+the incapable mother of Charles V, who was watching beside her dead
+husband in Granada, and who had signed the commission of Magellan by
+proxy, completes a tale of missionary work in a somewhat ideal way. If
+these people did not maintain their faith, the work reveals the
+intention of Magellan, and shows the nobility of character of the
+Christian Knight.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+HALCYON DAYS.
+
+
+These were indeed days of joy. The glory of them grew. All the
+inhabitants of the island came to be baptized. Magellan went on shore
+daily to hear mass.
+
+It was Pigafetta who gave to the Queen the image of the infant Christ,
+which became historical.
+
+On one of the occasions that Magellan went on shore to hear mass he met
+the Queen, who appeared in a veil of silk and gold. He sprinkled over
+her some rose water and musk, and noticed that she cherished the image
+of the infant Christ.
+
+"You do well," said he. "Put it in the place where your idols were; it
+will keep in your mind the Son of God."
+
+"I will cherish it forever," said the veiled Queen.
+
+She seems to have kept her word.
+
+The joy of these scenes reached their height, when the King of Seba
+swore fealty to the King of Spain.
+
+The scene of the conclusion of this ceremony was knightly indeed, and
+again reveals the heart of Magellan.
+
+He, seeing a good spirit, of the King of Seba, resolved to swear fealty
+of eternal friendship to him. Only a Christian Knight would have dreamed
+of such a thing.
+
+"I swear," he said, "by the image of our Lady, the Virgin, by the love
+of my Emperor, and by the insignia, on my heart, that I will ever be
+faithful to you, O King of Seba!"
+
+Here the true character of the statesman as well as teacher appeared.
+History records few acts more noble. Magellan sought the good of
+mankind.
+
+There was one officer on the ships whose soul, like that of Pigafetta's,
+must have been in all these benevolent efforts.
+
+The expedition was tarrying long, seeking the glory of the Cross rather
+than the gold and spices. There were impatient hearts in Seville.
+
+Mesquita in his still prison, with the world against him, dreamed of
+Magellan, Del Cano, and the Italian historian. The half world separated
+them now.
+
+In his dreams Mesquita saw the fleet coming back again, and he heard the
+shouting of the people and the ringing of the bells. The star of hope in
+his heart did not fail.
+
+"Padre," he said, "the day of my vindication will come."
+
+But the seasons came and went, and the light changed color in the window
+of his cell, and the birds sang their notes in the trees in spring and
+left their empty nests to silence in the retreating summer. The great
+Cathedral grew, and the achievement of Charles had begun to excite the
+world.
+
+We now come to the tragedy of this wonderful expedition; to the tempest
+that rose out of the calm. The transition from these ideal scenes to
+what is to follow is sudden indeed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+THE DEATH OF MAGELLAN.
+
+
+Magellan, as we have shown, had sought not wealth, nor glory, but the
+good of the world in his life. He was ever ready to put his own interest
+aside in the service of that which was best for others. He had sought
+welfare and not wealth, service and not self, and his life was about to
+end in the unselfish spirit in which it had lived.
+
+On Friday, April 26, 1520, Zula, one of the great chiefs of the Island
+of Matan, sent to Magellan one of his sons and two goats as a present.
+He had promised his service to the King of Spain, but this surrender of
+royalty had been opposed by another chief named Silapalapa. This chief
+had declared with native spirit that Matan would never submit to the
+Spanish King.
+
+"But I can overthrow Silapalapa," ran the Matan chief's message, "if I
+can have your help. Send me a boatload of men. Let them come to-morrow
+night."
+
+Magellan received the message and the presents in a friendly feeling,
+and resolved to follow the chief's lead.
+
+"I will not send another on this expedition so full of peril," he
+thought. "I will lead it myself."
+
+So he set out from Zubu to Matan at midnight, with sixty men, in
+corselets and helmets. He took with him the Christian King, and the
+chief men of his new adherents.
+
+The boats moved silently over the tropic waters under the moon and
+stars. Magellan had become a happy man. He could not doubt that he was
+on his way to new victories. Pigafetta, the Italian, always true to the
+Admiral, was with him.
+
+The expedition arrived at Matan just before the dawn of the morning.
+
+The mellow nature of Magellan came back to him on this short night
+journey. He had no wish to slaughter men.
+
+So he spoke to a Moorish merchant.
+
+"Go to the natives," he said, "and tell them if they will recognize a
+Christian King as their sovereign I will become their friend. If not,
+that they must feel our lances."
+
+The Moorish ambassador was landed, and met the chiefs.
+
+"Go tell your master," they said, "that if he has lances, so have we,
+and our lances are hardened by fire."
+
+At the red dawn of the morning, the Admiral gave the order to
+disembark, and forty-nine men leaped into the water. They faced a fierce
+army, some fifteen hundred in number.
+
+Magellan divided his followers into two bands. The musketeers and cross
+bowmen began the attack. But the firing was not effective. The black
+army moved down upon them like a cloud, throwing javelins and spears
+hardened with fire. Some of them singled out Magellan. They threw at him
+lances pointed with iron.
+
+Magellan, seeing that the odds were against him in such a contest,
+sought to break their lines by firing their houses. Some thirty houses
+burst into flame.
+
+The sight of the fire maddened the natives and rendered them furious.
+They discovered that the legs of the invaders were exposed, and that
+they could be wounded there with poisoned arrows.
+
+A poisoned arrow was aimed at Magellan. It pierced him in the leg. He
+felt the wound, and knew its import.
+
+He gave orders to retreat. A panic ensued, and his men took to flight.
+
+The air was filled with arrows, spears, stones, and mud.
+
+The Spaniards tried to escape to the boat. The islanders followed them
+and directed their fury to Magellan. They struck him twice on his
+helmet.
+
+Magellan's thought now was not for himself, but for the safety of his
+men.
+
+He stood at his own post fighting that they might make safe their
+retreat.
+
+He thus broke the assault for nearly an hour, until he was almost left
+alone.
+
+An Indian suddenly rushed down toward him having a cane lance. He thrust
+this into his face. Magellan wounded the Indian, and attempted to draw
+his sword. But he had received a javelin wound in his arm, and his
+strength failed.
+
+Seeing him falter, the Indian rushed upon him and brought him down to
+the earth with a rude sword.
+
+The Indians now fell upon him and ran him through with lances.
+
+He tried to rise up, to see if his men were safe. He did not call for
+assistance, but to the last sought to secure the safety of his men. In
+fact, he never seemed to so much as think of himself in the whole
+contest. It was thus that his life went out, and his heart ceased to
+beat. He was left dead on the sand, on April 27, 1521. The natives
+refused to surrender his body. Eight of his own men and four Indians,
+who had become Christians, perished with him.
+
+[Illustration: The death of Magellan.]
+
+There was one man who was true to the Admiral to the end. He was wounded
+with him, but survived. He it was that saw that the Admiral had
+forgotten himself at the hour of the final conflict. It was Pigafetta,
+the Italian, whose narrative we are following.
+
+This hero of the pen says of him to whom he gave his heart:
+
+"One of his principal virtues was constancy in the most adverse
+fortune."
+
+"It was God who made me the messenger of the new heavens and new earth,
+and told me where to find them," said Columbus. "Maps, charts, and
+mathematical knowledge had nothing to do with the case."
+
+As sublime an inspiration is seen in the words of Pigafetta in regard to
+Magellan:
+
+"_No one gave to him the example how to encompass the globe._" His sight
+was the inner eye, the pure vision of a consecrated purpose in life.
+
+No hero of the sea has ever been more noble! His purpose in life was
+everything; he had the faith of a Christian Knight; he was as nothing to
+himself, but to others all, and he died giving his own body for a shield
+to his men. His name will always be associated with what is glorious in
+the history of the Philippines.
+
+Magellan was dead, but a good purpose lives in others. Magellan dead,
+Del Cano yet lives, and the Italian historian has other scenes to
+record.
+
+The farol of Magellan will go on; it will never cease to shine, and the
+cast-out name of the Christian Knight will become a fixed star amid the
+lights that have inspired the world.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+THE SPICE ISLANDS.--WONDERFUL BIRDS.--CLOVES, CINNAMON, NUTMEGS,
+GINGER.--THE SHIPS OVERLOADED.
+
+
+The massacre at Matan caused the Spaniards to lose credit in the eyes of
+the natives. The King of Seba turned against them, thus throwing a
+shadow on the glory of Magellan's missionary work. The Spaniards were,
+however, much to blame for the change that took place in the King's
+heart.
+
+Their ships were becoming unseaworthy.
+
+They were reduced to two ships, the Victoria and the Trinidad, and these
+shaped their course for the Moluccas, or Spice Islands, by the way of
+Borneo. Del Cano began to represent the spirit of Magellan among the
+crews.
+
+They came to the Bornean city, Brunei, "a collection of houses built on
+piles over the water, where were twenty-five thousand fires or
+families." On the shore was the palace of a voluptuous Sultan, its walls
+hung with brocades of silk. Here was also one of the most curious
+markets in all the world, carried on at high tide, when there gathered
+a great army of canoes.
+
+On November 8, 1521, the two ships anchored off Tidor on the Spice
+Islands, saluting the King of the place with a broadside.
+
+They concluded a treaty of peace with the King, and began to load the
+two ships with spice, and especially with cloves, a kind of spice at
+that time regarded as a great luxury in Spain.
+
+If Pigafetta had desired above all things to see the wonders of the
+ocean world, he must again have been gratified here at some of the
+presents sent to the ships by the natives. Columbus had brought to Spain
+gorgeous parrots or macaws. But the King of Batchian sent to him a bird
+whose plumage surpassed anything that he had ever seen.
+
+"It is the bird of Paradise," said the agent of the royal almoner.
+
+The Italian did not doubt it. He wished to learn the history of this
+superb inhabitant of the air.
+
+He did in a way that excited his wonder beyond measure.
+
+The bird, after the Mohammedan account, was born in Paradise. It came
+down from Heaven where dwelt departed souls, who had died true to the
+Moslem faith.
+
+These birds were found dead, and they had no feet. If Pigafetta inquired
+the cause of this, he doubtless was answered:
+
+"They do not need feet; they never alight on the ground."
+
+But as greatly as the Chevalier must have wondered, he was not induced
+to accept the Moslem faith.
+
+They overcrowded the ships while receiving the favors of the Sultan of
+Tidor.
+
+An account of their voyage about the Spice Islands, "most delightful to
+read," as we are told in the title, was written by one Maximilianus
+Transylvanus, from which we gather the following incidents (Hakluyt
+Society) of great pearls and strange men:
+
+"They came to the shores of the Island of Solo, where they heard that
+there were pearls as big as dove's eggs, and sometimes as hen's eggs,
+but which can only be fished up from the very deepest sea. Our men
+brought no large pearl, because the season of the year did not allow of
+the fishery. But they testify that they had taken an oyster in that
+region, the flesh of which weighed forty-seven pounds. For which reason
+I could easily believe that pearls of that great size are found there;
+for it is clearly proved that pearls are the product of shellfish. And
+to omit nothing, our men constantly affirm that the islanders of Porne
+told him that the King wore in his crown two pearls of the size of a
+goose's egg.
+
+"Hence they went to the Island of Gilo, where they saw men with ears so
+long and pendulous that they reached to their shoulders. When our men
+were mightily astonished at this, they learnt from the natives that
+there was another island not far off where the men had ears not only
+pendulous, but so long and broad that one of them would cover the whole
+head if they wanted it (_cum exusu esset_). But our men, who sought not
+monsters but spices, neglecting this nonsense, went straight to the
+Moluccas, and they discovered them eight months after their Admiral,
+Magellan, had fallen in Matan. The islands are five in number, and are
+called Tarante, Muthil, Thidore, Mare, and Matthien; some on this side
+some on the other, and some upon the equinoctial line.
+
+"One produces cloves, another nutmegs, and another cinnamon. All are
+near to each other, but small and rather narrow."
+
+The world to-day thinks little of spices, for commerce has made common
+the luxuries of the Indian Ocean. Cloves, nutmegs, allspice, cinnamon,
+ginger are found in every home in all civilized lands, and even children
+make few inquiries about them.
+
+This was not so in the early days of the Viceroys of India. Spices which
+were gathered and sold by Arabian merchants, were held in Europe as a
+gift of Arabia, and esteemed to be the greatest, or among the greatest
+of luxuries. A ship laden with spices was hailed in the ports of the
+Iberian peninsula as next to a ship freighted with gold, as the Golden
+Hynde was welcomed in the days of Sir Francis Drake. It used to be said
+that the odors of the spice ships from the East Indies could be breathed
+through the breezes that wafted them toward the land.
+
+The principal Spice Islands were the Moluccas, or the islands of the
+East India Archipelago between Celebes on the west and New Guinea on the
+east, Timor on the south and the open Pacific Sea on the north. They are
+distributed over a wide ocean area. Of these the Moluccas form the
+principal group. Here are the paradises of the seas.
+
+It was to these islands where could be procured the products of "Araby
+the Blessed" that Magellan had hoped to find a new way. There were
+brighter shores than Spain, and to these he sought the shortest routes
+over which ships could travel.
+
+The Peruvian adventurers wished to find gold; the voyagers to the
+Antilles, magical waters and new productions of the earth; but
+Magellan's dream was of the spiceries of the Indian seas. They all found
+what they sought, except Ponce de Leon, who hoped to find the Fountain
+of Eternal Youth.
+
+Transylvanus speaks of another wonderful bird that only alighted at
+death, and whose feathers were believed to possess magic powers.
+
+"The kings of Marmin began to believe that souls were immortal a few
+years ago, induced by no other argument than that they saw that a
+certain most beautiful small bird never rested upon the ground nor upon
+anything that grew upon it; but they sometimes saw it fall dead upon the
+ground from the sky. And as the Mohammedans, who traveled to those parts
+for commercial purposes, told them that this bird was born in Paradise,
+and that Paradise was the abode of the souls of those who had died,
+these kings (reguli) embraced the sect of Mohammed, because it promised
+wonderful things concerning this abode of souls. But they call the bird
+Mamuco Diata, and they hold it in such reverence and religious esteem
+that they believe that by it their kings are safe in war, even though
+they, according to custom, are placed in the forefront of battle."
+
+He continues his narrative:
+
+"But, our men having carefully inspected the position of the Moluccas
+and of each separate island, and also having inquired about the habits
+of the kings, went to Thedori, because they learnt, that in that island
+the supply of cloves was far above that of the others, and that its King
+also surpassed the other kings in wisdom and humanity. So, having
+prepared their gifts they land, and salute the King, and they offer the
+presents as if they had been sent by Cæsar. He, having received the
+presents kindly, looks up to Heaven, and says:
+
+"'I have known now for two years from the course of the stars, that you
+were coming to seek these lands, sent by the most mighty King of Kings.
+Wherefore your coming is the more pleasant and grateful to me, as I had
+been forewarned of it by the signification of the stars.
+
+"'And, as I know that nothing ever happens to any man which has not been
+fixed long before by the decree of fate and the stars, I will not be the
+one to attempt to withstand either the fates or the signification of the
+stars, but willingly and of good cheer, will henceforth lay aside the
+royal pomp and will consider myself as managing the administration of
+this island only in the name of your King. Wherefore draw your ships
+into port, and order the rest of your comrades to land; so that now at
+last, after such a long tossing upon the seas, and so many dangers, you
+may enjoy the pleasures of the land and refresh your bodies. And think
+not but that you have arrived at your King's kingdom.'
+
+"Having said this, the King, laying aside his crown, embraced them one
+by one, and ordered whatever food that land afforded to be brought. Our
+men being overjoyed at this, returned to their comrades, and told them
+what had happened. They, pleased above measure with the friendly
+behavior and kindness of the King, take possession of the island. And
+when their health was completely restored, in a few days, by the King's
+munificence, they sent envoys to the other kings, to examine the wealth
+of the islands, and to conciliate the other kings."
+
+His description of the clove trees is very pleasing:
+
+"Tirante was the nearest, and also the smallest, of the islands; for it
+has a circumference of a little more than six Italian miles. Matthien is
+next to it, and it, too, is small. These three produce a great quantity
+of cloves, but more every fourth year than the other three. These trees
+only grow on steep rocks, and that so thickly as frequently to form a
+grove. This tree is very like a laurel (or bay tree) in leaf, closeness
+of growth, and height; and the gariophile, which they call clove from
+its likeness to a nail (clavus), grows on the tip of each separate twig.
+First a bud, and then a flower, just like the orange flower is produced.
+
+"The pointed part of the clove is fixed at the extreme end of the
+branch, and then growing slightly longer, it forms a spike. It is at
+first red, but soon gets black by the heat of the sun. The natives keep
+the plantations of these trees separate, as we do our vines. They bury
+the cloves in pits till they are taken away by the traders."
+
+He also describes the cinnamon tree:
+
+"Muthil, the fourth island, is not larger than the rest, and it produces
+cinnamon. The tree is full of shoots, and in other respects barren; it
+delights in dryness, and is very like the tree which bears pomegranates.
+The bark of this splits under the influence of the sun's heat, and is
+stripped off the wood; and, after drying a little in the sun, it is
+cinnamon."
+
+Also the nutmeg tree:
+
+"Near to this is another island, called Bada, larger and more ample than
+the Moluccas. In this grows the nutmeg, the tree of which is tall and
+spreading, and is rather like the walnut tree, and its nut, too, grows
+like the walnut; for it is protected by a double husk, at first like a
+furry calix, and under this a thin membrane, which embraces the nutlike
+network. This is called the Muscat flower with us, but by the Spaniards
+mace, and is a noble and wholesome spice. The other covering is a woody
+shell, like that of a hazelnut, and in that, as we have already said, is
+the nutmeg."
+
+And ginger:
+
+"Ginger grows here and there in each of the islands of the archipelago.
+It sometimes grows by sowing, and sometimes spontaneously; but that
+which is sown is the more valuable. Its grass is like that of the
+saffron, and its root is almost the same too, and that is ginger."
+
+While sailing among these bowery ocean gardens, and gathering their
+odorous products, the poetic Maximilianus was presented with one of the
+immortal birds that protected a hero in battle, "the bird of God."
+
+He thus speaks of the rare present:
+
+"Our men were kindly treated by the chiefs in turn, and they, too,
+submitted freely to the rule of Cæsar, like the King of Thidori. But the
+Spaniards, who had but two ships, resolved to bring some of each
+(spice) home, but to load the ships with cloves, because the crop of
+that was the most abundant that year, and our ships could contain a
+greater quantity of this kind of spice. Having, therefore, loaded the
+ships with cloves, and having received letters and presents for Cæsar
+from the Kings, they make ready for their departure. The letters were
+full of submission and respect. The gifts were Indian swords, and things
+of that sort. But, best of all, the Mamuco Diata; that is, the bird of
+God, by which they believe themselves to be safe and invincible in
+battle. Of which five were sent, and one I obtained from the Captain
+(_congran prieghi_), which I send to your reverence, not that your
+reverence may think yourself safe from treachery and the sword by means
+of it, as they profess to do, but that you may be pleased with its
+rareness and beauty. I send also some cinnamon and nutmeg and cloves, to
+show that our spices are not only not worse, but more valuable than
+those which the Venetians and Portuguese bring, because they are
+fresher."
+
+He also relates the disasters which fell to one of the overloaded ships:
+
+"When our men had set sail from Thedori, one of the ships, and that the
+larger one, having sprung a leak, began to make water, so that it became
+necessary to put back to Thedori. When the Spaniards saw that this
+mischief could not be remedied without great labor and much time, they
+agreed that the other ship should sail to the Cape of Cattigara, and
+afterward through the deep as far as possible from the coast of India,
+lest it should be seen by the Portuguese, and until they saw the
+promontory of Africa which projects beyond the tropic of Capricorn, and
+to which the Portuguese have given the name of Good Hope; and from that
+point the passage to Spain would be easy.
+
+"But as soon as the other ship was refitted it should direct its course
+through the archipelago, and that vast ocean toward the shores of the
+continent which we mentioned before, till it found that coast which was
+in the neighborhood of Darien, and where the southern sea was separated
+from the western, in which are the Spanish Islands, by a very narrow
+piece of land. So the ship sailed again from Thedori, and, having gone
+twelve degrees on the other side of the equinoctial line, they did not
+find the Cape of Cattigara, which Ptolemy supposed to extend even beyond
+the equinoctial line; and when they had traversed an immense space of
+sea, they came to the Cape of Good Hope and afterward to the Islands of
+the Hesperides.
+
+"And, as this ship let in water, being much knocked about by this long
+voyage, the sailors, many of whom had died by hardships by land and by
+sea, could not clear the ship of water. Wherefore they landed upon one
+of the islands, which is named after Saint James, to buy slaves.
+
+"But as our men had no money, they offered, sailor fashion, cloves for
+the slaves. This matter having come to the ears of the Portuguese who
+were in command of the island, thirteen of our men were thrown into
+prison. The rest were eighteen in number.
+
+"Frightened by the strangeness of this behavior, they started straight
+for Spain, leaving their shipmates behind them. And so, in the sixteenth
+month after leaving Thedori, they arrived safe and sound on the 6th of
+September, at the port near Hispalis (Seville). Worthier, indeed, are
+our sailors of eternal fame than the Argonauts who sailed with Jason to
+Colchis. And much more worthy was their ship of being placed among the
+stars than that old Argo; for that only sailed from Greece through
+Pontus, but ours from Hispalis to the South; and after that, through the
+whole West and the Southern hemisphere, penetrating into the East, and
+again returned to the West."
+
+His subscription is interesting:
+
+
+"I commend myself most humbly to your reverence. Given at Vallisoleti,
+on the 23d of October, 1522.
+
+    "Your most reverend and illustrious lordship's
+        "Most humble and constant servant,
+                "MAXIMILIANUS TRANSYLVANUS."
+
+When the spice ship began to fill with water, the officers sent for
+native divers. But these, although very skillful, could not find the
+place or the cause of the leak.
+
+Let us change our view to a different scene, across the wide tropical
+world.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+MESQUITA IN PRISON.
+
+
+While the little ship Victoria, which had sought for Mesquita in vain,
+was sailing around the world, and was returning laden with spice,
+Mesquita himself remained shut out from the sun by the shadows of prison
+walls. His lite became more and more silent and neglected.
+
+We know not by what authority he was held in a dungeon for advising the
+supposed crimes of his cousin Magellan. It could not have been that of
+Juana, who was still watching over the tomb from which she expected her
+husband to rise, nor by good Cardinal Ximenes, and possibly not by
+Charles V himself, but perhaps by one of his ministers. It may have been
+by the direction of Charles, for his imprisonment implies doubt;
+otherwise with such an array of testimony against him, we might expect
+he would have been executed.
+
+Two years had passed over beautiful Seville, and the India House there
+must have began to doubt the story of Gormez as not one of the other
+ships returned. These ships might have been cast away in the wintry
+seas that Gormez and his crew described, or the flag of Spain that the
+daring Portuguese had set toward the Spice Islands of the East by the
+way of the South might be seen again some day, rising over the
+Guadalquivir.
+
+Mesquita believed in his cousin Magellan; not only in him as a true man,
+but as one who had a divine calling to fulfill; as one whom destiny had
+allotted to lead the decisive events of mankind. He still felt that he
+would prove another Columbus or Vasco da Gama.
+
+The two priests whom Magellan had marooned had honestly thought Magellan
+mad. But Mesquita had his own confessor, and we can easily fancy how the
+prisoner must have opened his heart to him.
+
+"Padre, I am misunderstood," we can hear him say. "Time tells the truth
+about all men. Time vindicates all.
+
+"Padre, some messenger from Magellan will come back again. Time weighs
+all events, and life is self revealing. The heralds will blow their
+trumpets then, and the bells will ring.
+
+"Padre, they do well to prolong my life. Some day my prison doors will
+open wide, and I shall ride through the streets of Seville, and those
+who doubt me now will hail me as a heart that, was always true to a
+Knight whose heart will be found true to the Emperor!"
+
+The lamp of his faith burned clear and odorous oil. He had a quiet
+conscience. But how must the conspirators have felt during these
+uncertain months? The ships did not return. That seemed to favor one
+view of the madness of Magellan, and yet it did not leave them at ease.
+There were some who reasoned: If Magellan were indeed mad on his own
+ship, why might not one or more of the other ships have returned? If the
+other ships had been loyal to the lantern of Magellan, and had kept
+together, might the fleet not return again? Should it return what a
+stigma would be cast on the characters of the cowardly mutineers! In
+such a case Mesquita would become a hero, and the latter would have to
+flee from their own names.
+
+Charles V was in his promise of glory now. In 1519, as we have before
+stated, he had been elected Emperor of Germany; and in 1520 he had been
+crowned at Aix la Chapelle, amid great rejoicings, and the Pope had
+bestowed upon him the title of Cæsar or Emperor of the Roman world. He
+was called "Cæsar" in the chronicles of the times.
+
+Poor Juana took no interest in any of these pomps of her son, as they
+shook the world. Her ears were deaf to them, her heart was dead to them
+all. The mother of "Cæsar" was almost the only person in Spain who
+hailed not the glory of Cæsar.
+
+Amid all the splendors of his court the dream of Magellan must still
+have haunted the mind of the new Cæsar. He had accepted the story
+brought by the returned ship; but Magellan the madman might come back
+again. Madmen had returned before.
+
+The period was a wonderful one. Printing, the art of which had been but
+recently developed after the discovery of Gutenberg, was revealing its
+great possibilities. These were the times of Francis in France, and of
+Henry VIII in England. The Reformation was overturning Germany. The
+whole world seemed to be changing.
+
+If the ships of Magellan were to find a new way to the East, and were to
+sail around the world, what surprising events might follow!
+
+So, night after night, Mesquita could but hope and ask:
+
+"Where is the lantern of Magellan now?"
+
+Seville was full of maritime prosperity. The tuneful bells in her many
+churches had frequent occasions to ring out for national festivals. The
+sailors loved these services, and especially those that celebrated the
+triumphs of the Virgin whose dominion had become, as was supposed, the
+sea, and who was hailed as the "Star of the Deep."
+
+The happy crowds on their way to the rejoicing churches must have passed
+the prison walls where Mesquita was detained. Life indeed must have been
+mysterious to him. The world in which he deserved so much honor and
+happiness was shut out from him--even the sun and stars.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+STRANGE STORIES.--THE WISE OLD WOMEN.--THE WALKING LEAVES.--THE HAUNTED
+SANDALWOOD TREES.--THE EMPEROR OF CHINA.--THE LITTLE BOY AND THE GIANT
+BIRD.
+
+
+Pigafetta was no Munchausen, but he had a love of marvelous stories, and
+there never was a voyage that offered to a European a greater number of
+curious events and superstitions. Some of the incidents that excited our
+Chevalier's wonder were natural events which have been since explained.
+The superstitious legends of the people were, however, for the most part
+but the growth of folklore through the imagination.
+
+One of these accounts relates to the wise old women who prepared the
+sacrifices of the wild boar as offerings to the sun. It shows how small
+may be the real meaning of pompous and pretentious ceremonies. The rites
+took place in the Philippines.
+
+Says Pigafetta in his narrative prepared for the Grand Master of the
+Knight of Rhodes:
+
+"Since I have spoken of the idols, it may please your illustrious
+Highness to have an account of the ceremony with which, in this island,
+they bless the pig. They begin by sounding some great drums (tamburi);
+they then bring three large dishes; two are filled with cakes of rice
+and cooked millet rolled up in leaves, with roast fish; in the third are
+Cambay cloths and two strips of palm cloth. A cloth of Cambay is spread
+out on the ground; then two old women come, each of whom has in her hand
+a reed trumpet. They step upon the cloth and make an obeisance to the
+sun; they then clothe themselves with the above-mentioned cloths. The
+first of these puts on her head a handkerchief which she ties on her
+forehead so as to make two horns, and taking another handkerchief in her
+hand, dances and sounds her trumpet and invokes the sun.
+
+"The second old woman takes one of the strips of palm cloth and dances,
+and also sounds her trumpet; thus they dance and sound their trumpets
+for a short space of time, saying several things to the sun. The first
+old woman then drops the handkerchief she has in her hand and takes the
+other strip of cloth, and both together sounding their trumpets, dance
+for a long time round the pig which is bound on the ground. The first
+one always speaks in a low tone to the sun, and the second answers her.
+So the sun and the two old women had a luminous partnership.
+
+"The second old woman then presents a cup of wine to the first, who,
+while they both continue their address to the sun, brings the cup four
+or five times near the mouth as though going to drink, and meanwhile
+sprinkles the wine on the heart of the pig. She then gives up the cup,
+and receives a lance which she brandishes, while still dancing and
+reciting, and four or five times directs the lance at the pig's heart;
+at last, with a sudden and well-aimed blow, she pierces it through and
+through. She withdraws the lance from the wound, which is then closed
+and dressed with herbs.
+
+"During the ceremony a torch is always burning, and the old woman who
+pierced the pig takes and puts it out with her mouth; the other old
+woman dips the end of her trumpet in the pig's blood, and with it marks
+with blood the forehead of her husband and of her companion, and then of
+the rest of the people. But they did not come and do this to us.
+
+"That done the old women took off their robes and ate what was in the
+two dishes, inviting only women to join them. After that they get the
+hair off the pig with fire. Only old women are able to consecrate the
+boar, and this animal is never eaten unless it is killed in this
+manner."
+
+Pigafetta saw wonderful things in Borneo, among them a wild boar whose
+head was two and a half spans long, and oysters as large as turtles. He
+says that the flesh of one of these oysters weighed forty-five pounds.
+
+But the thing there which probably must have most greatly excited his
+curiosity was the _walking leaves_. There were certain trees on the
+islands that had very animated leaves. When one of these leaves fell
+from the tree, it did not lie where it fell, to rot or to be shuffled by
+the winds, but it lifted itself up and walked away.
+
+Here was a sight indeed to make the young Italian fly to his memoranda
+book, which he did.
+
+Other travelers later saw the same curious thing, but they examined the
+miracle more closely than the credulous Chevalier. They found that the
+leaves were moved by an insect that lived inside of them, like the
+Mexican bean, which is used as a toy, and will jump about a table.
+
+The islands of the Indian Ocean abound in sandalwood. Of the sandal
+trees Pigafetta heard other curious legends. One of them tells us that
+when the people of the Timor went out to cut sandalwood, the devil
+appeared to them, and demanded them to bargain with him for the wood.
+This they did, for those who cut the wood are otherwise likely to fall
+sick; a poisonous miasma is exhaled from the wounded wood.
+
+Pigafetta heard also marvelous tales of the Emperor of China, who seemed
+to live amid human walls. There may be some truths in these incidents;
+if so, what a remarkable condition must have been that of the Chinese
+court four hundred years ago!
+
+He says:
+
+"The kingdom of Cocchi lies next; its sovereign is named Raja Seri
+Bummipala. After that follows Great China, the king of which is the
+greatest sovereign of the world, and is called Santoa Raja. He has
+seventy crowned kings under his dependence; and some of these kings have
+ten or fifteen lesser kings dependent on them. The port of this kingdom
+is named Guantan, and among the many cities of this Empire, two are the
+most important, namely, Nankin and Comlaha, where the King usually
+resides.
+
+"He has four of his principal ministers close to his palace, at the four
+sides looking to the four cardinal winds; that is, one to the west, one
+to the east, to the south, and to the north. Each of these gives
+audience to those that come from his quarter. All the kings and lords of
+India major and superior obey this King, and in token of their
+vassalage, each is obliged to have in the middle of the principal palace
+of his city the marble figure of a certain animal named Chinga, an
+animal more valuable than the lion; the figure of this animal is also
+engraved on the King's seal, and all who wish to enter his port must
+carry the same emblem in wax or ivory.
+
+"If any lord is disobedient to him, he is flayed, and his skin, dried in
+the sun, salted, and stuffed, is placed in an eminent part of the public
+place, with the head inclined and the hands on the head in the attitude
+of doing zongu; that is obeisance to the King.
+
+"He is never visible to anybody; and if he wishes to see his people he
+is carried about the palace on a peacock most skillfully manufactured
+and very richly adorned, with six ladies dressed exactly like himself,
+so that he can not be distinguished from them. He afterward passes into
+a richly adorned figure of a serpent called Naga, which has a large
+glass in the breast, through which he and the ladies are seen, but it is
+not possible to distinguish which is the King. He marries his sisters in
+order that his blood should not mix with that of others.
+
+"His palace has seven walls around it, and in each circle there are
+daily ten thousand men on guard, who are changed every twelve hours at
+the sound of a bell. Each wall has its gate, with a guard at each gate.
+At the first stands a man with a great scourge in his hand, named
+Satuhoran with satubagan; at the second, a dog called Satuhain; at the
+third, a man with an iron mace, called Satuhoran with pocumbecin; at the
+fourth, a man with a bow in his hand, called Saturhoran with anatpanan;
+at the fifth, a man with a lance, called Satuhoran with tumach; at the
+sixth, a lion, called Saturhorimau; at the seventh, two white elephants,
+called Gagiapute.
+
+"The palace contains seventy-nine halls, in which dwell only the ladies
+destined to serve the King; there are always torches burning there. It
+is not possible to go round the palace in less than a day. In the upper
+part of it are four halls where the ministers go to speak to the King;
+one is ornamented with metal, both the pavement and the walls; another
+is all of silver, another all of gold, and the other is set with pearls
+and precious stones. The gold and other valuable things which are
+brought as tribute to the King are placed in these rooms; and when they
+are there deposited, they say, 'Let this be for the honor and glory of
+our Santoa Raja.' All these things and many others relating to this
+King, were narrated to us by a Moor, who said that he had seen them."
+
+A palace of seven walls, seventy-nine halls, and ten thousand men on
+guard! A hall of silver, another of gold, and one of precious stones! It
+took a day to encompass it. We may well wonder how much of truth there
+was in this brief Oriental story!
+
+When the adventurers came to Java they heard some tales that were
+marvelous, and that quite equaled those which Queen Scheherezade of the
+Arabian Nights told of Sinbad the Sailor.
+
+One of these fabulous stories, told them by a pilot, had an Oriental
+charm and coloring. It was of a giant bird, like the roc of the Arabian
+Nights.
+
+According to this fanciful legend which we give with some freedom, there
+was a land called Java Major on the north of the Gulf of China, where
+grew an enormous tree, seemingly as big as a mountain--one of the
+greatest trees in all the world. In this tree, which might have shaded a
+hill, lived a colony of birds, with wings like clouds, so broad and
+powerful that they could lift an elephant or a buffalo into the air and
+bear him away to the mountainous tree. The fruit of this tree was larger
+than the largest melons.
+
+There were Moors on the ship where this story of the great tree and the
+great bird was told. One of them said:
+
+"I have _seen_ the great bird with my own eyes!"
+
+Another Moor said:
+
+"One of the birds was once captured, and sent as a present to the King
+of Siam!"
+
+An account of the capture of such a bird would have been very
+interesting!
+
+There were great whirlpools around the mountainous tree. So that no ship
+could approach within three or four leagues of it.
+
+But once, according to the legend, some adventurous sailors sailed near
+the great tree. They had a little boy on board their boat, and he must
+have surveyed the giant of the forest with wonder.
+
+They sailed too near, for presently their boat began to go round and
+round, and they found themselves in the power of the whirlpool.
+
+Round and round went the junk until it struck against a rock, and all
+on board perished, except the little boy, who was supple.
+
+This child caught a plank and held on to it. He was carried hither and
+thither among the eddies and breakers, but he found himself drawing
+nearer and nearer the great tree. At last he was cast on shore at the
+foot of the tree.
+
+"Here must be my home," said he, for he thought he never could get away
+again. No boat could come to him, and _he_ could not fly.
+
+The tree had great masses of bark, so that he could climb up into it. He
+mounted up to its high limbs. He could not starve, for the fruit of such
+a tree must have been sufficient to have supplied a colony.
+
+So cast away on the tree, he here expected to live and to die.
+
+Toward sunset great wings like clouds darkened the shining air. The
+birds were coming home to-night in the tree. Their nests were there as
+big as houses.
+
+They settled down, causing a great wind, and put their great heads under
+their wings and went to sleep.
+
+The boy was bright, and a plan of getting away from the tree came to
+him. He reasoned that if he could not fly the bird could, and what would
+be the weight of a little boy to a bird who could carry away an
+elephant?
+
+So he marked the largest and most powerful bird with his eye, and crept
+up to it and got under his wing, and into his great feathers.
+
+The bird was asleep and did not wake!
+
+Morning came, and with the first red dawn, as we may fancy, the bird
+threw up his head and begun to stir. He lifted himself up and shook
+himself, but he did not shake off the boy, who was safely nestled among
+the little forest of its feathers.
+
+The sun was brightening the islands, and the bird mounted up and flew
+away in search of food, carrying the little boy under his wing.
+
+After traversing the sunrise air for a long time, the bird flew over a
+land of buffaloes.
+
+He here descended to capture a buffalo, to bear him away to the
+mountainous tree for food. As he alighted on the back of the buffalo
+with a wild scream of delight, the little boy dropped out from under his
+wing, and so found his way to his own island.
+
+It was the little boy that told this large story, quite like Sinbad's.
+
+There were found mysterious fruits floating on the sea, which were
+supposed to have fallen from the tree.
+
+"I have seen the bird myself," said a third Moorish pilot, and with the
+testimony of the little boy, and the three pilots and the floating
+fruit, this story ought to be as trustworthy as the one of Sinbad the
+Sailor.
+
+The voyage back to the Cape of Good Hope and thence to the Cape Verde
+Islands was one for strange reflections. Del Cano now was the leader of
+the returning mariners. The expedition had gone out from the port of
+Seville amid shouting quays and towers, with some two hundred and
+seventy men. Only one ship was returning and she was bringing home
+hardly as many men as composed her own crew.
+
+We can imagine Del Cano on deck, with the lantern of Magellan still
+swinging above him, talking with his officers on a tropical night off
+the African coast.
+
+"Magellan has found an unknown grave," we may hear him say.
+
+"But humanity will mourn for him, and honor him, and the grave matters
+not," answers a padre.
+
+"We shall never see Mesquita again," continues Del Cano.
+
+"We can not be sure," replies the padre. "We can know nothing that we do
+not see."
+
+"We surely shall never meet Carthagena again. I can see in my memory
+those last biscuits and bottles of wine. He needs none of them now."
+
+"He may have them all," answers the padre.
+
+"We are yet rich in spices. We shall surprise the world when we drop
+anchor at Seville."
+
+"And Seville may have surprises for us," says the hopeful padre.
+
+They drifted on under favoring airs. The soul of Del Cano was lost to
+common events in the wonderful revelations of the sea. Should he reach
+Seville, he would be the living hero of the most marvelous voyage ever
+made by any mariner.
+
+Such were the scenes and tales that crowded upon the mind of Pigafetta,
+who wished "to see the wonders of the world." The story of the Emperor
+of China's palace is associated with objects so marvelous that the
+meaning of their names is lost to-day.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+THE LOST DAY.
+
+
+When they reached the Cape Verde Islands, the sailors found that a very
+strange thing had happened.
+
+They had lost a day--or, the islanders had gained a day!
+
+They met the ships from Seville there, and doubtless disputed with the
+traders in regard to what day of the week it was.
+
+"This is the 6th of September," they said; "a day that we shall ever
+have occasion to celebrate."
+
+"It is the 7th of September," said their joyous friends.
+
+The sailors consulted with each other. All agreed that it was the 6th of
+September. Nowhere had they failed to make a daily memorandum. The
+people of Seville must have lost a day.
+
+The solar year consists of three hundred and sixty-five days and six
+hours, and if one sails West three years one will gain a day, and if one
+sails East, one will lose a day.
+
+If the reader will note the following dates of this wonderful voyage, he
+will solve the mystery of the "lost day:"
+
+
+    CHRONOLOGY OF THE FIRST VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD.
+
+    Magellan arrives at Seville                          October 20, 1518.
+
+    Magellan's fleet sails from Seville, Monday[A]       August 10, 1519.
+
+        [A] The 10th of August was Wednesday, and Monday
+        was the 8th of August: all the other dates of the
+        week and month agree and are consistent with each
+        other.
+
+    Magellan sails from San Lucar de Barrameda,
+      Tuesday                                            September 20, 1519.
+
+    Magellan arrives at Teneriffe                        September 26, 1519.
+
+    Magellan sails from Teneriffe, Monday                October 3, 1519.
+
+    Magellan arrives at Rio Janeiro                      December 13, 1519.
+
+    Magellan sails from Rio                              December 26, 1519.
+
+    Magellan sails from Rio de la Plata                  February 2, 1520.
+
+    Magellan arrives at Port St. Julian                  March 31, 1520.
+
+    Eclipse of sun                                       April 17, 1520.
+
+    Loss of Santiago.
+
+    Magellan sails from Port St. Julian                  August 24, 1520.
+
+    Magellan sails from river of Santa Cruz              October 18, 1520.
+
+    Magellan makes Cape of the Virgins, entrance
+      of straits                                         October 21, 1520.
+
+    Desertion of San Antonio                             November, 1520.
+
+    Magellan issues from straits into the Pacific,
+      Wednesday                                          November 28, 1520.
+
+    Magellan fetches San Pablo Island                    January 24, 1521.
+
+    Magellan fetches Tiburones Island                    February 4, 1521.
+
+    Magellan reaches the Ladrone Islands, Wednesday      March 6, 1521.
+
+    Magellan reaches Samar Island of the Philippines,
+      Saturday                                           March 16, 1521.
+
+    Magellan reaches Mazzava Island, Thursday            March 28, 1521.
+
+    Magellan arrives at Zebu Island                      April 7, 1521.
+
+    Death of Magellan at Matan, Saturday                 April 27, 1521.
+
+    Arrival of San Antonio at Seville                    May 6, 1521.
+
+    Arrival of Victoria and Trinity at Tidore,
+      Friday                                             November 8, 1521.
+
+    Victoria sails from Tidore                           December 21, 1521.
+
+    Victoria discovers Amsterdam Island, Tuesday         March 18, 1522.
+
+    Victoria doubles the Cape of Good Hope               May 18, 1522.
+
+    Victoria arrives at San Lucar, Wednesday[A]          September 6, 1522.
+
+        [A] According to ship's time.
+
+They sought provisions of the Portuguese colony at Cape Verde.
+
+The Portuguese persecution of the expedition, which Magellan had made
+for Spain, did not cease even here. The Victoria sent out boats for
+rice. One of the sailors could not restrain his joy, and told the
+Portuguese who he was and whence he came.
+
+The jealousy of the Portuguese was aroused again.
+
+"The expedition carries glory to Spain," said they. "Did not the King
+tear the arms from Magellan's door?"
+
+One of the boats sent out for rice did not return. The Victoria knew why
+they were detained, and sailed away while she could, to bear the
+glorious news of the discovery to Seville.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+
+IN THE CHURCH OF OUR LADY OF VICTORY.--PIGAFETTA.
+
+
+The Victoria cast anchor in the Port of Seville on September 8, 1522.
+Joy filled the city on that day, and heralds went forth to proclaim the
+news.
+
+What news it was!
+
+That Magellan had found a new way to the Pacific.
+
+That he had discovered the Pacific to be a mighty ocean.
+
+That he had sailed over it and found a new ocean world.
+
+That he was dead.
+
+That he had made immortal discoveries, and that one of his ships had
+sailed around the world.
+
+The hero of the day was Del Cano, the commander of the Victoria.
+
+There was a most beautiful church in Seville, called Our Lady of
+Victory. To that the returning mariners were summoned to give thanks for
+their discovery on the day after their arrival, September 9, 1522.
+
+Bells rang out on the shining air. The remnant of the happy crews
+entered the church amid the joyous music to hear the songs of
+thanksgiving for victory:
+
+    "We praise thee, O God!
+    We believe thee to be
+    The Father everlasting!"
+
+They had returned in the Victoria, and the service had to them a special
+significance in the church of that name.
+
+Mesquita must have heard the acclaiming city.
+
+To the prisoner who had waited in hope, the trumpets of the heralds must
+have been sweet after his release! Juana, the demented Queen, was yet
+watching by the tomb in view of her window, hoping at each dawn of the
+morning that she would find that the dust had awakened to life again.
+Charles was mapping Europe; his fire of ambition was glowing, and the
+news of the new fields of the ocean that these discoveries had brought
+to him filled him with pride and exultation.
+
+He resolved on giving Del Cano and his mariners a splendid reception,
+after the manner that Isabella had received Columbus.
+
+Del Cano was now the living representative of Magellan. In publicly
+receiving him with heralds, music, and festival he would do honor to
+Magellan, whose name was now immortal. So Charles spread his tables of
+silver and gold to those who had lived on the open sea on scraps of
+leather, and magnanimously welcomed as knights of the sea those who had
+followed the sun around the world.
+
+Spain opened the prison doors of Mesquita.
+
+How must Del Cano have welcomed Mesquita as he came forth from his
+prison, vindicated on these festal days!
+
+Mesquita was a hero now, and a hero among heroes, for he had been a
+martyr to the cause. The people's hearts overflowed toward him.
+
+So the islands of the new ocean world came to be the possessions of
+Spain, and from Philip, who succeeded Charles, were called the
+Philippines. They were to be governed, robbed, taxed, and, in part,
+reduced to slavery for the enrichment of Spain for nearly four hundred
+years. Then Spain was to vanish from their history in the smoke of
+Admiral Dewey's guns, and over them was to float the flag of the
+republic of the West.
+
+It is a strange allotment of events that these islands should introduce
+the republic of the West into the Asiatic world. A half century ago the
+subject of Europe in Asia excited the attention of mankind, but no one
+ever dreamed that a like topic of America in Asia would ever become one
+of the political problems of the world.
+
+[Illustration: Pigafetta presenting the history of the voyage to the
+King of Spain.]
+
+The future of these islands must be one of civilization, education,
+and development, and we may hope that these will be brought about under
+the divine law of American institutions, that "all governments derive
+their just powers from the consent of the governed." Justice alone is
+the true sword of power, perpetuity, and peace. To lead the natives of
+these islands to desire to receive all that is best in civilized life,
+is one of the great missions of the republic of the West; and that
+republic, governed by the conscience of the people, will be true to the
+cause of human rights.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Pigafetta? We must let him tell the story of his life on his return.
+"Leaving Seville I repaired to Valladolid, where I presented his sacred
+Majesty, Don Carlos, neither gold nor silver, but other things far more
+precious in the eyes of so great a sovereign. For I brought to him,
+among other things, a book written in my own hand, giving an account of
+all the things which had happened day by day on the voyage.
+
+"Then I went to Portugal, where I related to King John the things that I
+had seen.
+
+"Returning by the way of Spain, I came to France, where I presented
+treasures that I had brought home to the regent mother of the most
+Christian King Don Francis.
+
+"Then I turned my face toward Italy, where I gave myself to the service
+of the illustrious Philip de Villiers l'Isle Adams, the Grand Master of
+Rhodes."
+
+The scene of the presentation of the parchment story of Magellan to
+Charles V is most interesting. That manuscript was like the return of
+Magellan himself; it told what the hero of the sea had been and what he
+had done. It was in itself a work of genius, and the world has never
+ceased to read it in the spirit of sympathy in which it was written.
+
+We may fancy the scene: the young King surrounded by his court, in his
+happiest days; the Italian Knight amid the splendors of the audience
+room, placing in the hands of the new Cæsar the roll of the narrative of
+the voyage around the world! Such a story no pen had ever traced before.
+That must have been one of the proudest moments in the life of Charles
+as he took from the Knight the map of the round world.
+
+To the last Pigafetta was true to the Admiral; and one of the best
+things that can be said of any man is, "He is true hearted."
+
+A wooden statue of Del Cano was found at Cavite on the surrender of that
+port to Commodore Dewey. It was sent to Washington. It should be
+replaced by some worthy work of art.
+
+The island of Guam, of the Ladrones, which broke the long voyage of
+Magellan over the Pacific, and which is some fifteen hundred miles from
+Luzon, was captured by Captain Glass, of the United States cruiser
+Charleston, July 21, 1898. It is a connecting link between the West and
+the Orient. A memorial of Magellan, Del Cano, and Pigafetta might be
+suitably placed there.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The author of the Songs of the Sierras has described the spirit of
+Columbus in a poem which has been highly commended. The interpretation
+applies as well to Magellan. We quote two verses: genius must overcome
+obstacles, and all obstacles, to be made divine.
+
+
+THE PORT.
+
+    Behind him lay the gray Azores,
+      Behind, the gates of Hercules.
+    Before him not the ghosts of shores,
+      Before him only shoreless seas.
+    The good mate said: "Now must we pray,
+      For, lo! the very stars are gone.
+    Brave Admiral, speak--what shall I say?"
+      "Why say--Sail on, sail on, sail on!"
+
+    They sailed, they sailed. Then spoke the mate:
+      "This mad sea shows her teeth to-night;
+    She curls her lip and lies in wait
+      With lifted teeth as if to bite.
+    Brave Admiral, say but one good word,
+      What shall we do when hope is gone?"
+    The words leaped as a leaping sword--
+      "Sail on, sail on, sail on and on!"
+
+
+
+
+SUPPLEMENTAL.
+
+THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.--LAGASPI.--THE STRUGGLE OF THE NATIVES WITH
+SPAIN.--STORY OF THE PATRIOT RIZAL.--AGUINALDO.
+
+
+The Philippine Islands, which promise to become a republic of the seas,
+and the first republic in Asiatic waters, were for generations held by
+Spain. These one thousand and more sea gardens, some eleven thousand
+miles from New York, number about as few islands of importance as there
+are American States. The government of the more populous islands has
+been so restrictive that, before the boom of Dewey's guns in the China
+Sea, little was known about them to the world.
+
+The archipelago consists of some six hundred islands that might find
+marking on an ordinary map of the world.
+
+Twenty-five of these have gained a commercial standing, from which are
+collected products for foreign trade. The chief of these is Luzon, and
+the principal ports of the larger islands are Iloilo, on the island of
+Panay; Zebu and Zamboango.
+
+Luzon and the northern islands are inhabited by a partly civilized
+race, called the Tagals, who are supposed to be descended from
+immigrants from the Malay peninsula. They have had the reputation of a
+mild-mannered people, as they have long received, directly or
+indirectly, European influences. There are two thousand one hundred
+schools in Luzon and some six millions of the natives of the islands are
+claimed as Catholics.
+
+A sultanate was formed on the Sulu archipelago nearly eight hundred
+years ago, and the Mohammedan populations are called Moros or Moors. The
+Visayas people are a lower race. Colonies of Chinese are to be found in
+many of the larger islands, and these constitute the centers of thrift
+and industry.
+
+The official language of the islands is Spanish, but the natives speak
+in twenty or more dialects. The islands are supposed to contain about
+ten million people, but there are no correct censuses by which to
+compute the number. Even the islands themselves seem not to have been
+correctly counted.
+
+The history of the islands since their discovery has been one of the
+most silent in the world. They have been governed by Spain in such a
+manner as to enrich the Crown of Spain. When the Pope apportioned the
+newly discovered world among the Kings of the Church, the Western
+Hemisphere was given to Spain, and by an error of division Spain
+received the Moluccas or Spice Islands. Magellan declared the King of
+Spain suzerain of the islands, and after many years Spain sent an
+expedition from one of her colonies to Zebu to begin the occupation of
+the Spicery. The leader of this expedition, Miguel de Legaspi, caused
+his men to marry native women, hoping thereby more easily to subdue a
+wild and untrained race.
+
+In 1571 this colonizer brought Manila under his influence, and induced
+the native King to accept the suzerainty of the Spanish King. He
+proclaimed Manila the seat of Government, and made it an episcopal city.
+
+Legaspi came to learn a very strange thing. It was that the Chinese had
+made themselves masters of navigation _by monsoons_. They came down from
+their coasts to Manila Bay on northwest monsoons, and when the monsoons
+changed they were carried back again. This power was akin to steam.
+Their boats were junks, but they filled the marts of Manila with silks
+and other Oriental luxuries.
+
+Legaspi encouraged this trade. He was the founder of trade in the ports
+of the China Sea. He caused a market place to be built for the Chinese
+traders in Manila, in the form of a circus, and afterward opened a
+quarter for them within the walls. The Chinese still hold a large part
+of the retail trade of the port. Before the late Spanish war, they
+numbered about sixty thousand, and one hundred thousand in the port and
+provinces.
+
+The monks came and sought to convert the people; their efforts were
+partly successful, but sometimes ended in tragedies.
+
+The trade between Spain and the Philippines was for a long time carried
+on by the way of Mexico. The intercourse between the Crown and her
+dependencies here was infrequent. The Mohammedans waged frequent wars
+against the Catholic missionaries, whom they sought to exterminate.
+
+The friars became the real rulers of the civilized parts of the islands.
+The will of the Spanish priest was absolute. He was independent of State
+authority. The rule of the Church was so severe that it brought religion
+into disfavor, and when the power of Aguinaldo arose, that chief
+insisted upon the expulsion of certain monastic orders, as detrimental
+to liberty, and demanded the restoration of the estates of the Church to
+the people.
+
+Such is, in brief, the simple history of the islands discovered by
+Magellan before the archipelago was ceded by the treaty of Paris to the
+United States.
+
+
+MANILA.
+
+Beautiful Manila, shining over the China Sea--so seductive to the white
+man when seen from a distance, so withering to all his energies when the
+same white man becomes a resident there!
+
+A two days' voyage from Hong Kong brings the traveler to Luzon to the
+river Pasig, where the grim old fortresses of Manila, earthquake rent,
+like a haze of green vegetation, break the view. Palms lift their green
+cool shadows in the burning air.
+
+Manila is a walled city. The entrance is by drawbridges, which are
+raised at night.
+
+The mediæval atmosphere does not disappear when one finds one's self
+within the walls. Exhaustion and decay are everywhere. The large open
+bay lies in the splendors of the sunlight when the day is calm, and the
+visitor would never dream of its turbulent condition when it is lashed
+by the typhoon.
+
+[Illustration: Admiral Dewey.]
+
+Across the bay stands Cavite, the naval station, the scene of Dewey's
+victory over the Spanish fleet.
+
+The city has some two hundred and seventy thousand inhabitants. The
+merchants, as we have said, are largely Chinese, and their quarters are
+picturesque with gay bazaars.
+
+In the shadow land of trees and open dry marshes outside of the city are
+beautiful estates, and along the roadsides people go waving their fans
+slowly and listlessly. Here are the parks, the bull ring, and the lovely
+botanical gardens.
+
+Commercial Manila is a city of coolies, who bare their backs to the
+sun, though little work can be done here in the noonday heat.
+
+[Illustration: PHILIPPINE ISLANDS]
+
+Some years ago a terrible cold came to Manila. It was on a late December
+night, near morning. The thermometer went down to 74°. Think of that,
+and of the poor coolies, and of the negritos, or the little black
+dwarfs, and of those who lived in the thousands of huts of bamboo or
+reeds! True, 74° would indicate a hot day in our American June or July,
+but in Manila it was a cold morning, and the people came shivering into
+the streets, to tell each other of their sufferings.
+
+The best description of Manila before the war that we have seen was
+written by Crozet, and is contained in an English translated book
+entitled Crozet's Voyage to Tasmania, New Zealand, the Ladrone Islands,
+and the Philippines. From this beautifully illustrated work we present a
+view of the city and the surrounding island as it appeared seven years
+or more ago:
+
+"The city of Manila is one of the most beautiful that Europeans have
+built in the East Indies; its houses are all of stone, with tile roofs
+and they are big, comfortable and well ventilated. The streets of Manila
+are broad and perfectly straight; there are five principal streets,
+which divide the city lengthwise, and about ten which divide it
+broadways. The form of the city is that of an oblong, surrounded by
+walls and ditches, and defended on the side of the river by a badly
+planned citadel, which is about to be pulled down and rebuilt. The city
+walls are flanked by a bastion at every one of the four angles. There
+are at Manila eight principal churches, with an open place in front of
+every one; they are all beautiful, large and very richly decorated. The
+Cathedral is a building which would grace any of our European cities,
+and has just been rebuilt by an Italian Theatin,[A] who is an able
+architect. The two rows of columns which support the vaults of the nave
+and of the aisles are of magnificent marble; so also are the columns of
+the portal, the altars, the steps, and the pavement. These marbles are
+obtained from local quarries, are of great variety, and are of the
+greatest beauty. The space in front of the Cathedral is very large, and
+is the finest in the city.
+
+    [A] A regular order of clergy established at Rome in 1524, but which
+    does not appear to have spread much beyond Italy and France.
+
+"On one side the palace of the Governor is flanked by the Cathedral, on
+the other by the Town Hall. The Town Hall is very beautiful. At the
+extremity of the place in front of the Cathedral a large barracks is
+being constructed, which is to be capable of lodging eight thousand
+troops.
+
+"Private houses, as well as public buildings, are all one story high.
+Spaniards never live on the ground floor, on account of the dampness,
+but they occupy the first floor instead. The heat of the climate
+has induced them to build very large apartments, with verandas running
+right round the outside, so as to keep out of the sun; the windows form
+part of the verandas, and the daylight only enters the rooms by means of
+the doors which open out on to these verandas. The ground floor serves
+as a storehouse, and to prevent the rising of moisture from the soil its
+surface is raised a foot, by means of a bed of charcoal; then sand or
+gravel is placed on top of this bed, which is finally paved with stone
+or brick laid with mortar.
+
+"As the country is very subject to earthquakes, the houses, although
+built of stone, are strengthened with large posts of wood or iron fixed
+perpendicularly in the ground, rising to the top of the wall-plates, and
+built within the walls, so that they can not be seen, and then crossed
+on every floor by master girders, strongly bound together and bolted by
+wooden keys, which so consolidate the whole building.
+
+"Manila is built on the mouth of a beautiful river, which flows from a
+lake, called by the Spaniards _Lagonne-de-bay_, and which is situated
+five leagues inland. Forty streams flow into this lake, which is twenty
+leagues in circumference, and around which there are as many villages as
+streams. The Manila River is the only one which flows out of the lake.
+It is covered with boats, bringing to the city every sort of provision
+from the forty agricultural tribes established on the lake shores.
+
+"The suburbs are bigger and more thickly populated than the city itself;
+they are separated from it by a river, across which a beautiful bridge
+has been thrown. The Minondo suburb is more especially inhabited by
+half-breeds, Chinese, and Indians, who are for the most part goldsmiths
+and silversmiths, and all of them work people.
+
+"The Saint Croix suburb is inhabited by Spanish merchants, by foreigners
+of all nations, and by Chinese half-breeds. This quarter is the most
+agreeable one in the country, because the houses, which are quite as
+fine as those of the city, are built on the river bank, and thereby they
+enjoy all the conveniences and pleasantness due to such a position.
+
+"In spite of such advantages, the city is badly situated, being placed
+between two intercommunicating volcanoes, and of which the interiors,
+being always active, are evidently preparing its ruin. The two volcanoes
+are those of the Lagonne-ed-Taal and of Monte Albay. When one burns, the
+other smokes. I shall speak later on of the former of these volcanoes,
+which, to me at least, appeared a most singular one.
+
+[Illustration: Native Houses in Manila.]
+
+"Until the shocks of the volcanoes shall decide its fate, Manila remains
+the capital of the Spanish establishments in the Philippines. Here
+reside the Governor, who is called the Captain General and President of
+the Royal Audience. Don Simon de Auda filled this office when I arrived
+at Manila. This Governor had previously been a member of the Royal
+Audience, and when the English, at the end of the last war, took Manila,
+he escaped from the city before the surrender, placed himself at the
+head of the Indians of the province of Pampague, and, without regard to
+the capitulation of the city, he is said to have succeeded in confining
+the English within their conquest, starving equally the conquerors and
+the conquered. Noticing that the Chinese established outside the city
+walls were furnishing provisions to English and Spaniards alike, he
+butchered them, putting more than ten thousand to the sword. It seemed
+to me, however, that the Spaniards in general considered the efforts of
+this councillor to be more harmful than advantageous to the welfare of
+the Spanish colony. The English, harassed by the Indians under Don Simon
+de Auda, had on their part armed and raised other provinces of Luzon, so
+as to oppose Indian to Indian, and this sort of civil war did more harm
+to the colony than even the capture of Manila by the English.
+
+"However this may be, Don Simon de Auda returned to Spain after the
+peace, was rewarded for his zeal by being made Privy Councillor of
+Castile, and was sent back to Manila as Governor General of the
+Philippines. Since his arrival in his province he has started a number
+of important projects, but difficult to be carried out at one and the
+same time. He has started considerable fortifications in various parts
+of the city, very large barracks, dykes at the mouth of the river, a
+powder-mill, smelting furnaces and forges to work the iron mines, and a
+number of other useful works, which might have succeeded better had they
+been started in due succession.
+
+"The Philippine Archipelago contains fourteen principal islands, the
+Government of which is divided into twenty-seven provinces, which are
+governed by _alcaldes_ under the orders of the Governor Captain General.
+All these islands are thickly populated, being about three million.
+These islands extend from the tenth to the twenty-third degree north
+latitude, and vary in breadth from about forty leagues at the north end
+of Luzon up to two hundred leagues from the south of the southeast point
+of Mindanao to the southwest point of Paragoa.
+
+"They are all fertile and rich in natural products. But although the
+Spaniards have been established here for more than two hundred years,
+they have not yet succeeded in making themselves masters of the islands.
+They have no foothold on Paragoa, which is almost eighty leagues long,
+nor on the adjacent small islands; they only possess a few acres on the
+big island of Mindanao, which is two hundred leagues in circumference,
+nor are they yet fully acquainted with the interior of the island of
+Luzon, where they have their chief settlement, namely, the city of
+Manila. Luzon is the largest of these islands, being a hundred and
+forty leagues long from Cape Bojador to Bulusan Point, which is the most
+northerly point, and about forty leagues broad. In the northern part of
+Luzon, near the province of Ilocos, there are some aborigines with whom
+the Spaniards have never been able to establish communication. It is
+believed that these people are the descendants of Chinese, who, having
+been shipwrecked on these shores, have established themselves in the
+mountains of this part of the island. It is said that some Indians know
+the routes by which access is gained to this people, and that they have
+been well received by them; but it is in the interest of these Indians
+to withhold the knowledge from the Spaniards, on account of their great
+trade profits with those people, who lack many things and have only
+provisions and gold."
+
+
+THE STORY OF THE PATRIOT RIZAL.
+
+DR. JOSÉ RIZAL, a virtuous Catholic reformer, was the Samuel Adams of
+the awakening of moral feeling against the tyranny of Spain. He sought
+to reform the Government and to correct corruption in the Church.
+
+He belonged to the province of Cavite. He was a small man, of a clear,
+sensitive conscience, and great intellectual penetration and force. It
+became the one purpose of his life to free his countrymen. "He organized
+the Revolution," says a monument to Samuel Adams, and Dr. Rizal sought
+to organize a revolution in a like manner as the "last of the Puritans"
+in New England, by the collecting of facts for correspondence with
+patriots at Manila and Hong Kong.
+
+In his school life he beheld the universal corruption going on around
+him. His heart was moved to pity the people.
+
+He wrote a letter in which he urged reform by the expulsion of corrupt
+officers of the Government and of certain immoral priests. This awakened
+the Government and made him secret enemies. He was accused by the
+Government of treason and by the decadent priests of the Church of
+blasphemy. He held to his convictions against all opposition, knowing
+that right was right and truth was truth.
+
+He sought to unite the worthy representatives of the State and Church in
+an effort to bring about a change which should honor morals and give
+justice to the people. Among men of conscience his influence secretly
+grew. He hoped to gain such force as to make an appeal to the court at
+Madrid.
+
+He organized a moral revolution.
+
+Conscience is power, but its progress is slow.
+
+In 1890 Dr. Rizal published a pamphlet that stirred the island world. He
+pictured the sufferings of the natives under the Spanish rule. He
+appealed to the enlightened Church, conscience and humanity.
+
+The patriot's friends saw that the reform movement was about to be
+crushed, and said to Rizal:
+
+"Escape to Hong Kong!"
+
+There was a patriotic club in Hong Kong that sought the emancipation of
+the natives of Luzon and the Philippines from the extortions of Spain.
+It would be well for him now to go there.
+
+"How shall I leave the city?" was the one question that suddenly haunted
+his mind.
+
+He must go by sea. He could not go on board a ship without being
+detected and detained.
+
+"Get into a perforated box," said a fellow patriot, "and I will ship you
+with the merchandise."
+
+Dr. Rizal secreted himself in the perforated box, and was shipped from
+Luzon to Hong Kong.
+
+He was received with great enthusiasm by the Philippine patriots in Hong
+Kong.
+
+But he was more dangerous to the officials of Luzon in Hong Kong than at
+Cavite. It became a problem with the latter how to get him once more in
+their power.
+
+The Governor General Weyler caused a dispatch to be sent to him which
+stated that he "was too valuable a man for the State to lose his
+services," that his past conduct would be overlooked, and that he could
+safely return to his own island.
+
+Honest himself, he could not believe that the dispatch was insincere.
+
+He went back to Manila. His foes were bent on his destruction.
+
+He was one day absent from his rooms attending probably to his medical
+duties, when some soldiers led by a spy entered his apartments and
+searched his trunks and pretended to find there seditious books.
+
+Dr. Rizal was arrested. His enemies formed the court to try him for
+treason.
+
+The books were put out as evidence against him.
+
+"I imported no books," said he.
+
+"But the books are here."
+
+"The customhouse officers found no books in my trunks," said Dr. Rizal.
+
+"But here are the books that witness against you."
+
+"There were no books in my room when I left it," said he.
+
+"But we found them there."
+
+"Let me call the customhouse officers."
+
+The court refused the request.
+
+"Let me summon the owner of my room."
+
+The court refused the request.
+
+"The witness against me is a convict, a spy, and a perjurer."
+
+The court found him guilty.
+
+He was sent into exile. The injustice of the trial was a flame of
+liberty; the British consul protested against it, and riots broke out in
+Cavite against the officials that countenanced such a mockery of
+justice.
+
+He went again to Hong Kong. Weyler had left Luzon, and had been
+succeeded by Despajol.
+
+His case aroused the Patriot Club. The patriots resolved to go to Spain
+and lay their cause before the throne. They were mobbed in Spain and
+sent to Manila for trial.
+
+The trial was a farce; Dr. Rizal was again condemned.
+
+On December 6, 1896, he was led out of the Manila prison into the
+courtyard. A file of soldiers awaited the coming. A sharp volley of
+shots broke the stillness of the air; and that heart, so true to
+liberty, was broken and lay bleeding on the earth. So perished one of
+the noblest patriots of the islands of the China Sea.
+
+
+AGUINALDO.
+
+AGUINALDO, called "the greatest of the Malays," in that he rose against
+Spanish tyranny, is one of the interesting characters of the closing
+century. His true character can hardly be determined at the present
+time. Future events must reveal it. He is of mixed blood, and is said to
+more resemble a European than a Malay.
+
+He was born in the province of Cavite, and is supposed to have European
+blood in his veins. He was brought up as a house boy in the apartments
+of a Jesuit priest--a house boy being an errand boy; a boy handy for all
+common work.
+
+It has been the policy of Spain for centuries to keep her subjects on
+the Pacific islands in partial ignorance; but this bright boy had an
+impulse to learn, to acquire knowledge, to grasp the truth of life. He
+had a remarkable memory, and he became such an apt scholar as to excite
+wonder. When he was fourteen years old he entered the medical school at
+Manila. He lost the favor of the Church by joining the Masonic order.
+
+[Illustration: Aguinaldo.]
+
+In 1888 he went to Hong Kong, where was a Philippine colony. Here he
+sought and obtained a military education, and studied military works,
+and the historical campaigns of the world's greatest heroes. He learned
+Latin, English, French, and Chinese.
+
+At the breaking out of the insurrection of the Philippines against Spain
+in 1896, Aguinaldo espoused the cause of liberty, and was made an
+officer and became a leader. The revolution grew and affected the native
+troops, and its spirit filled the archipelago. It became the purpose of
+the more fiery patriots to "drive the Spaniards into the sea."
+
+Aguinaldo advocated the acceptance of concessions by the Spanish
+Government, by which the rights of the native races should be recognized
+and protected. His policy was accepted, and the insurgents disbanded. He
+received Spanish gold to abandon the war for independence, and fell
+under the suspicion that his patriotism was purchasable. This suspicion
+has shadowed his fame. He went to Hong Kong.
+
+The island Hong Kong, which is English, is a school of good government.
+Here Aguinaldo seems to have conceived an ambition to free the native
+races of the archipelago, and form a republic of the confederated
+islands. The Spanish-American War revealed to him an opportunity to
+strike for liberty. He said to the Filipinos: "The hour has come."
+
+The Filipinos looked upon him as the man for the crisis.
+
+An article in the Review of Reviews represents the chief as saying to an
+American naval officer:
+
+"There will be war between your country and Spain, and in that war you
+can do the greatest deed in history by putting an end to Castilian
+tyranny in my native land. We are not ferocious savages. On the
+contrary, we are unspeakably patient and docile. That we have risen from
+time to time is no sign of bloodthirstiness on our part, but merely of
+manhood resenting wrongs which it is no longer able to endure. You
+Americans revolted for nothing at all compared with what we have
+suffered. Mexico and the Spanish republics rose in rebellion and swept
+the Spaniard into the sea, and all their sufferings together would not
+equal that which occurs every day in the Philippines. We are supposed to
+be living under the laws and civilization of the nineteenth century, but
+we are really living under the practices of the Middle Ages.
+
+"A man can be arrested in Manila, plunged into jail, and kept there
+twenty years without ever having a hearing or even knowing the complaint
+upon which he was arrested. There is no means in the legal system there
+of having a prompt hearing or of finding out what the charge is. The
+right to obtain evidence by torture is exercised by military, civil, and
+ecclesiastical tribunals. To this right there is no limitation, nor is
+the luckless witness or defendant permitted to have a surgeon, a
+counsel, a friend, or even a bystander to be present during the
+operation. As administered in the Philippines one man in every ten dies
+under the torture, and nothing is ever heard of him again. Everything is
+taxed, so that it is impossible for the thriftiest peasant farmer or
+shopkeeper to ever get ahead in life.
+
+"The Spanish policy is to keep all trade in the hands of the Spanish
+merchants, who come out here from the peninsula and return with a
+fortune. The Government budget for education is no larger than the sum
+paid by the Hong Kong authorities for the support of Victoria College
+here. What little education is had in the Philippines is obtained from
+the good Jesuits, who, in spite of their being forbidden to practice
+their priestly calling in Luzon, nevertheless devote their lives to
+teaching their fellow-countrymen. They carry the same principle into the
+Church, and no matter how devout, able, or learned a Filipino or even a
+half-breed may be, he is not permitted to enter a religious order or
+ever to be more than an acolyte, sexton, or an insignificant assistant
+priest. The State taxes the people for the lands which it says they own,
+and which as a matter of fact they have owned from time immemorial, and
+the Church collects rent for the same land upon the pretext that it
+belongs to them under an ancient charter of which there is no record.
+Neither life nor limb, liberty nor property have any security whatever
+under the Spanish administration."
+
+Such was his indictment of Spain.
+
+He began a war for independence from Spain in the provinces of Luzon. He
+was an inspiring general and practically made prisoners of some fifteen
+thousand of the Spanish forces. He organized a Government at least
+nominally Republican, although it has been called a dictatorship. The
+purchase of the Philippines by the United States, in accordance with the
+Treaty of Paris, has been opposed by Aguinaldo and his followers in a
+most distressing war. He has claimed the absolute independence of all
+the Philippines, although, so far as our knowledge goes, his authority
+does not extend far beyond certain districts of the Island of Luzon.
+Without anticipating the verdict of history upon our relations to the
+Philippines, it is enough to add that the bloodshed and suffering caused
+by this war are most deplorable.
+
+
+HONG KONG.
+
+HONG KONG and the China Sea have come to stand not only for Europe in
+Asia, but for America in Asia, though of the latter, Manila is the port.
+The center of the world's forces changes, and it is a strange current of
+events that has made the China Sea, with its English port of Hong Kong,
+and the Luzon port of Manila, facing each other across the blue ocean
+way, the pivotal point of not only England in China, but of America in
+the East. The Anglo-Chinese community in Hong Kong represents the union
+of Europe and Asia in the family of nations, and America joins the world
+of the higher civilization at Manila, the scene of Dewey's victory.
+
+The civilizing history of Hong Kong is largely associated with Sir John
+Bowring, whom a large part of the world recalls merely as a writer of
+popular hymns; as, "In the Cross of Christ I Glory."
+
+The British free traders secured Hong Kong as a market for the East, and
+added it to the British Empire in the middle of the century. The Suez
+Canal increased the importance of Hong Kong.
+
+[Illustration: Hong Kong]
+
+Hong Kong, not being an integral part of Asia, became a place of
+refugees before its union with the British Empire. It lay in the route
+of the British possessions in Africa, India, and North America. Its
+Urasian destiny was seen in the alliance between Europe and Asia
+concluded at Canton (1634) between the East India Company and the
+Chinese Government. It then became the vantage ground of the Anglo-Saxon
+race. The early English Governors of Hong Kong made the port the cradle
+of liberty and free trade, and a civilizing influence in the East.
+
+The island is some nine miles long and from two to six miles broad, with
+a population of more than one hundred and twenty thousand, most of whom
+are Chinese. It was ceded in perpetuity to the British by the treaty of
+Nankin in 1843, when its Government began to be administered by Colonial
+Governors, under whom it grew commercially.
+
+The East India Trade Company had prepared the way for this little
+Britain in the East. The United States in the middle of the century
+began to trade at Canton from the ports of Boston and Salem. It is a
+very curious and almost forgotten fact that the first cargoes from New
+England to Canton consisted largely of ginseng, a plant now little
+esteemed, but which at that time had acquired such a medical reputation
+in China as to be almost worth its weight in gold. The plant was held to
+be a magical cure for nearly all diseases and to possess the gift of
+immortal youth.
+
+Boston and Salem are still adorned with the tall and stately mansions of
+these old merchants, whose wooden vessels went to the China Sea, at
+first carrying ginseng and returning with tea. A writer in a Boston
+paper thus pictures this period:
+
+"The generation that would not have had to look at a map to find out
+where Manila was when George Dewey arrived there, is almost passed away.
+These were the great sailors of their time; men who met emergencies with
+nerve and overcame tempest and adversity with equal complacency, who
+knew the merchants of Canton and Calcutta as well as the merchants of
+Salem and Boston, and whose tempers were never ruffled if even stress of
+circumstance compelled them to put up with a paltry profit of one
+hundred per cent. They lived at a time when there might easily be a
+fortune in a single freight, and when one turn round the world might
+represent more than a million of money. Most of them lived before the
+day of the bill of exchange, and when the solid old method of carrying
+specie in the hold was the familiar business practice. They knew the
+pirate of the China Sea and he of Barbary, too, for it was this
+old-fashioned system of carrying your capital with you that made the
+pirates' life worth living. They lived before the cable as well, and
+from the moment that a ship cleared from Canton or Manila or Singapore
+there was no way in the world for the consignee or the merchant in
+Boston to know what she had on board until she arrived here to speak
+for herself. Be it silks or teas or what-not, the merchant must move
+quickly to bid or buy, for the nature and value of the cargo could not
+have been discounted in advance, while the ship was skimming the oceans.
+Each vessel made her own market, and the wharf was the market place. It
+was good news, indeed, when a captain with a cargo of teas was informed
+by his owners, who may have met him upon the completion of a two years'
+cruise, that the price of tea had advanced the day before his arrival.
+It was pretty apt to be something in the captain's own pocket, too, for
+in those days he was allowed to carry twenty-five tons of freight for
+his own private speculation, and a salary of three hundred dollars a
+month in addition was not uncommon. There are retired captains on Cape
+Cod and in Salem and in the suburbs of Boston to-day who earned a
+competence in those times of Boston's water-front prosperity. They
+became masters sometimes before they were of age, and occasionally there
+would be one, like the late R. B. Forbes, who would become a great
+merchant, the head of a famous, wealthy house, known the world over,
+almost before he realized how great was the fortune that had overtaken
+him. And there was another very nice thing about those old days of
+plenty. If a man came home from China rich, invested his wealth in a
+railroad or some manufacturing or mining project that would be pretty
+apt to ruin him, all he would have to do would be to exile himself,
+under the right auspices, for another year or two in China, and then
+return to his home and friends with his fortunes quite mended."
+
+[Illustration: Iloilo.]
+
+The great merchant at Canton at the time of the Boston commercial period
+was Honqua. He was as noble as he was rich, and Mr. Forbes, the famous
+old Boston merchant, relates the following story of him:
+
+"A New England trader had gone to Canton, and had been unsuccessful, and
+owed Honqua one hundred thousand dollars. He desired to return home, but
+could not do so if he discharged the debt. Honqua heard of his
+condition, pitied him, and sent for him.
+
+"'I shall be sorry to part from you,' he said, 'but I wish you to return
+as you so desire, happy and free. Here are all your notes canceled.'"
+
+Here was superb commercialism.
+
+The American sovereignty over the Philippine Islands opens the way to
+China by the China Sea. In the progress of events the achievements of
+Magellan have led the ships of the West to the East again, and it is
+possible that there may yet be great Mongol emigrations to the western
+shores of the southern continent. The lantern or farol of Magellan was
+never more prophetic than now. So suggestion lives.
+
+
+TRAVELERS' TALES OF THE PHILIPPINES.
+
+HONG KONG is the market place of the Eastern world. Here the East and
+West meet in the airy bazaars, and from it, it is easy to find one's way
+to Luzon, over the bright sea mirrors, the sleepy, dreamy splendors of
+the China Sea.
+
+But few travelers have written books on Luzon, and those have usually
+published them in French or in Spanish. Travelers from the East have, as
+a rule, not remained long on the island, where earthquakes, typhoons,
+malarial fevers, and the plague itself have been not unfrequent
+visitors, and where one welcomes gratefully the shadows of the night in
+the seasons of fervid heat. The rain storms are downpours and deluges
+that are blinding, but they leave behind their inky tracts a paradise of
+beauty and bloom.
+
+The morning on the China Sea in serene weather is a royal glory. It has
+the odors of Araby and the freshness of an Eden. The earth seems
+waiting. The sails hang listlessly on the glassy, breathless straits,
+and the sun sheds its splendor through the pale blue air as powerfully
+as the clouded heavens poured down the rain.
+
+The Filipinos are a sensitive race, and many of them have a keen sense
+of injustice. Great numbers of them have a church education, and their
+views of the world are bounded by what they have learned of India,
+China, and Malaysia and Iberian peninsula from the priests of Spain.
+
+A recent traveler from Manila said to me:
+
+"The Filipinos have hot blood and are revengeful, but they are quick to
+discern justice. A boy who attended me at the hotel came to me one day
+bleeding.
+
+"'My master has beaten me,' he said, 'with a rawhide.'
+
+"'He has abused you,' I said. 'Why?'
+
+"'He took me into the storeroom and lashed me, and the rawhide cut me. I
+bleed.'
+
+"'Why did he punish you?'
+
+"'The porter told him he found me neglecting my work by hiding away and
+fighting cocks. It was not true. The porter lied; he hates me.'
+
+"'Go to the marshal and make a complaint against the landlord. Go now,
+before the blood dries. A master has no right to beat one like that. It
+is inhuman. Justice ought to be done.'
+
+"'But I do not blame _him_; he is not to blame. The porter is to blame.
+The porter lied.'
+
+"'But the marshal would hardly take up your case against the porter; he
+would hold him to be a person of slight consequence.'
+
+"'But wrong is wrong whether it be done by a landlord or his porter. The
+porter should go to prison for twenty years!'"
+
+The case then dropped, but the boy carried a case for revenge against
+the porter in his heart. He was quick to discern justice.
+
+Cockfighting is a favorite diversion among the Filipinos. A traveler
+says that he has seen Filipinos going to mass carrying gamecocks under
+their arms to set fighting in the cemetery after the service.
+
+The brutal sport is a passion, and is to be seen going on almost
+everywhere on festal days, and in the evenings in the cool shadows of
+awnings and palms.
+
+Alfred Marché published a book in Paris in 1887 entitled Luxon and
+Palaveran; Six Annes de Voyages aux Philippines. It contains some vivid
+pictures of the natives, of the habits and customs of the country, of
+the earthquakes and storms. He describes the earthquake seasons when the
+earth trembled, and the people rushed wildly into the open courts at the
+first tremor. As great as the terror was the Chinese did not leave their
+merchandise unprotected for fear of thieves, showing that the trembling
+earth did not overcome the nature of the merchant or the native thief.
+The one would face death for his goods and the other for his chance of
+getting plunder.
+
+Monsieur Marché gives some views of the tropic jungles, one of which is
+illustrated by a very curious anecdote and pictorial illustration.
+
+One day one of his native servants told him that he had seen in the
+woods an immense python, which seemed to have been gorged with some
+animal that he had swallowed, and so rendered sluggish and resistless.
+
+"I should like to see so large a serpent," said the traveler.
+
+An hour afterward, while he was sitting in the shadow of his bungalow,
+an extraordinary sight met his eyes. The native had gone into the wood
+and had put a cord about the neck of the great serpent and attached it
+to the horns of a buffalo, and the buffalo was dragging the python
+toward the bungalow. The python was seven meters long (thirty-nine
+inches to a meter), a distended mass of folds and flesh (page 356,
+Alfred Marché's Luzon).
+
+What had he swallowed? What creature was there inside of him that was
+about to be digested, and that so distorted his folds?
+
+The serpent was harmless in the noose and from the weight of his meal.
+
+The traveler severed the python's vertebræ, rendering it inoffensive,
+and then made an incision into its abdomen.
+
+A surprise followed. Out of the abdomen came a calf of some months'
+growth. The animal's legs were so doubled under its body as to make the
+latter horizontal. The serpent was prepared for the museum of the
+traveler.
+
+The same traveler describes earthquakes, after which victims were fed
+by tubes let down under the ponderous débris.
+
+One of the most interesting books of travel in Luzon that we have ever
+read is entitled Aventures d'un Gentilhomme Breton aux iles Philippines,
+par P. de la Gironière (Paris, 1855). A part of the work has been
+translated into English by Frederick Hardman, and from this translation
+in part we select material for a view of the life of the French savant
+in Jala-Jala, a very interesting district of the island. The original
+French work is very vividly illustrated. The English abridgment is
+without illustrations. (French edition, Boston Public Library, No.
+3040a, 182. English abridgment, 5049a, 69.)
+
+THE ADVENTURES OF DR. DE LA GIRONIÈRE IN LUZON.
+            (After Hardman.)
+
+    CHANGING THE HEART OF A BRIGAND.
+
+"JALA-JALA is a long peninsula, stretching from north to south into the
+middle of Bay Lake. The peninsula is divided longitudinally by a chain
+of mountains, which gradually diminish in elevation, until, for the last
+three leagues, they dwindle into mere hills. These mountains, of easy
+access, are covered partly with wood and partly with beautiful pastures,
+where the grass attains a height of between one and two yards, and, when
+waving in the wind, resembles the waves of the ocean. Finer vegetation
+can nowhere be found; it is refreshed by limpid springs, flowing from
+the higher slopes of the mountain down into the lake. Owing to these
+pastures, Jala-Jala is richer in game than any other part of the island
+of Luzon. Deer, wild boar, and buffalo, quails, hens, snipes, pigeons of
+fifteen or twenty kinds, parrots; in short, all manner of birds, there
+abound. The lake teems with water-fowl, and especially with wild ducks.
+Notwithstanding its extent, the island contains no dangerous or
+carnivorous beasts; the worst things to be feared in that way is the
+civet, a little animal about the size of a cat, which attacks only
+birds; and the monkeys, which issue from the forest by troops, and lay
+waste the maize and sugar fields.
+
+"The lake, which yields excellent fish, is less favored than the land;
+for it contains a great many caymans, a creature of such enormous size
+that in a few minutes it divides a horse piecemeal and absorbs it into
+its huge stomach. The accidents occasioned by these caymans are frequent
+and terrible, and I have seen more than one Indian fall victims to them.
+
+"At the period of my purchase the only human inhabitants of Jala-Jala
+were a few Indians, of Malay extraction, who lived in the woods and
+tilled some nooks of land. At night they were pirates upon the lake, and
+they afforded shelter to all the banditti of the surrounding provinces.
+The people at Manila had given me the most dismal account of the
+district; according to them, I should soon be murdered: my turn for
+adventure was such, that all their stories, instead of alarming me, only
+increased my desire to visit men who were living almost in a savage
+state.
+
+"As soon as I had bought Jala-Jala, I traced for myself a plan of
+conduct, having for its object to attract the banditti to me; to this
+end, I felt that I must not appear among them in the character of an
+exacting and sordid owner, but in that of a father. All depended upon
+the first impressions I should make upon these Indians, now my vassals.
+On landing, I went straight to a little hamlet, composed of a few
+cabins.
+
+"My faithful coachman was with me; we were each of us armed with a good
+double-barreled gun, a brace of pistols, and a saber. I had already
+ascertained, from some fishermen, to which Indian I ought to address
+myself. This man, who was much respected by his countrymen, was called,
+in the Tagal tongue, _Mabutin-Tajo_, translatable as _The brave and
+valiant_.
+
+"He was quite capable of committing, without the slightest remorse, five
+or six murders in the course of a single expedition; but he was brave;
+and courage is a virtue before which all primitive races respectfully
+bow. My conversation with _Mabutin-Tajo_ was not long; a few words
+sufficed to win his good will, and to convert him into a faithful
+servant for the whole time I dwelt at Jala-Jala. This is how I spoke to
+him:
+
+"'You are a great rascal,' I said; 'I am the lord of Jala-Jala; it is my
+will that you amend your conduct; if you refuse, you shall expiate all
+your misdeeds. I want a guard; give me your word of honor to turn honest
+man, and I will make you my lieutenant.'
+
+"When I completed this brief harangue, Alila (that was the brigand's
+name) remained for a moment silent, his countenance indicating deep
+reflection. I waited for him to speak; not without a certain degree of
+anxiety as to what his answer would be.
+
+"'Master!' he at last exclaimed, offering me his hand and putting one
+knee to the ground, 'I will be faithful to you until death!'
+
+"I was very well pleased with this reply, but I concealed my
+satisfaction.
+
+"''Tis good,' I said; 'to show you that I have confidence in you, take
+this weapon, and use it only against enemies.'
+
+"I presented him with a Tagal sabre, on which was inscribed in Spanish:
+'Draw me not without cause, nor sheath me without honor.'
+
+"This legend I translated into Tagal; Alila thought it sublime, and
+swore ever to observe it.
+
+"'When I go to Manila,' I added, 'I will bring you epaulets and a
+handsome uniform; but you must lose no time in getting together the
+soldiers you are to command, and who will compose my guard. Take me at
+once to him among your comrades whom you think most capable of acting as
+sergeant.'
+
+"We walked a short distance to the habitation of a friend of Alila's,
+who usually accompanied him on his piratical expeditions. A few words,
+in the same strain as those I had spoken to my future lieutenant,
+produced the same effect on his comrade, and decided him to accept the
+rank I offered him. We passed the day recruiting in the various huts,
+and before night we had got together, in cavalry, a guard of ten men, a
+number I did not wish to exceed. I took the command as captain.
+
+"The next day I mustered the population of the peninsula, and,
+surrounded by my new guards, I selected a site for a village, and one
+for a house for myself. I gave orders to the fathers of families to
+build their cabins upon a line which I marked out, and I desired my
+lieutenant to employ all the hands he could procure in extracting stone,
+cutting timber, and preparing everything for my dwelling. My orders
+given, I set out for Manila, promising soon to return. On reaching home,
+I found my friends uneasy on my account; for, not having heard from me,
+they feared I had fallen victim to the caymans or the pirates. The
+narrative of my voyage, my description of Jala-Jala, far from making my
+wife averse to my project of living there, rendered her on the contrary
+impatient to visit our property, and to settle upon it."
+
+Dr. de la Gironière lived many years at Jala-Jala in the peninsula
+country. He relates many adventures in the primitive forests, one of
+which is as follows:
+
+
+A BUFFALO HUNT IN JALA-JALA.
+
+"THE Indians consider the pursuit of the buffalo the most dangerous of
+all hunts; and my guards told me they would rather place their naked
+breast at twenty paces from a rifle's muzzle than find themselves at the
+same distance from a wild buffalo. The difference is, they say, that a
+rifle bullet may only wound, whereas a buffalo's horn is sure to kill.
+
+"Taking advantage of their fear of the buffalo, I one day informed them,
+with all the coolness I could assume, of my intention to hunt that
+animal. Thereupon they exerted all their eloquence to dissuade me from
+my project; they drew a most picturesque and intimidating sketch of the
+dangers and difficulties I should encounter; I, especially, as one
+unaccustomed to that sort of fight--for such a chase is in fact a life
+or death contest. I would not listen to them. I had declared my will; I
+would not discuss the subject, or attend to their advice.
+
+[Illustration: Boats on the River Pasig.]
+
+"It was fortunate that I did not; for these affectionate counsels, these
+alarming pictures of the dangers I was about to run, were given and
+drawn by way of snare; they had agreed among themselves to estimate my
+courage accordingly as I accepted or avoided the combat. My only reply
+was an order to get everything in readiness for the hunt. I took care
+that my wife should know nothing of the expedition, and I set out,
+accompanied by a dozen Indians, almost all armed with guns.
+
+"The buffalo is hunted differently in the plain and in the mountains. In
+the plain, all that is needed is a good horse, agility, and skill in
+throwing the lasso. In the mountains, an extraordinary degree of
+coolness is requisite. This is how the thing is done: The hunter takes a
+gun, upon which he is sure he can depend, and so places himself that the
+buffalo, on issuing from the forest, must perceive him. The very instant
+the brute sees you, he rushes upon you with his very utmost speed,
+breaking, crushing, trampling under foot, everything that impedes his
+progress. He thunders down upon you as though he would annihilate you;
+at a few paces distance, he pauses for a moment, and presents his sharp
+and menacing horns.
+
+"It is during that brief pause that the hunter must take his shot, and
+send a bullet into the center of his enemy's brow. If unfortunately the
+gun misses fire, or if his hand trembles and his ball goes askew, he is
+lost--Providence alone can save him! Such, perhaps, was the fate that
+awaited me; but I was determined to run the chance. We reached the edge
+of a large wood, in which we felt sure that buffaloes were; and there we
+halted. I was sure of my gun; I thought myself tolerably sure of my
+coolness, and I desired that the hunt should take place as if I had been
+a common Indian. I stationed myself on a spot over which everything made
+it probable that the animal would pass, and I suffered no one to remain
+near me. I sent every man to his post, and remained alone on the open
+ground, two hundred paces from the edge of the forest, awaiting a foe
+who would assuredly show me no mercy if I missed him.
+
+"That is certainly a solemn moment in which one finds himself placed
+thus between life and death, all depending on the goodness of a gun, and
+on the steadiness of the hand that grasps it. I quietly waited. When all
+had taken up their positions, two men entered the forest, having
+previously stripped off a part of their clothes, the better to climb the
+trees in case of need. They were armed only with cutlasses, and
+accompanied by dogs. For more than half an hour a mournful silence
+reigned. We listened with all our ears, but no sound was heard.
+
+"The buffalo is often very long before giving sign of life. At last the
+reiterated barking of the dogs, and the cries of the prickers, warned us
+that the beast was afoot. Soon I heard the cracking of the branches and
+young trees, which broke before him as he threaded the forest with
+frightful rapidity. The noise of his headlong career was to be compared
+only to the gallop of several horses, or to the rush of some monstrous
+and fantastical creature; it was like the approach of an avalanche. At
+that moment, I confess, my emotion was so great that my heart beat with
+extraordinary rapidity. Was it death, a terrible death, that thus
+approached me? Suddenly the buffalo appeared. He stood for a moment,
+glared wildly about him, snuffed the air of the plain, and then, his
+nostrils elevated, his horns thrown back upon his shoulders, charged
+down upon me with terrible fury.
+
+"The decisive moment had come. A victim there must be--either the
+buffalo or myself--and we were both disposed to defend ourselves
+stoutly. I should be puzzled to describe what passed within me during
+the short time the animal took to traverse the interval between us. My
+heart, which had beat so violently when I heard him tearing through the
+forest, no longer throbbed. My eyes were fixed upon his forehead with
+such intensity that I saw nothing else. There was a sort of deep silence
+within me. I was too much absorbed to hear anything--even the baying of
+the dogs as they followed their prey at a short distance.
+
+"At last the buffalo stopped, lowered his head, and presented his horns;
+just as he gave a spring I fired. My bullet pierced his skull--I was
+half saved. He fell to the ground, just a pace in front of me, with the
+ponderous noise of a mass of rock. I put my foot between his horns and
+was about to fire my second barrel, when a hollow and prolonged roar
+informed me that my victory was complete. The buffalo was dead. My
+Indians came up. Their joy turned to admiration; they were delighted; I
+was all that they wished me to be.
+
+"Their doubts had been dissipated with the smoke of my gun; I was brave,
+I had proved it, and they had now entire confidence in me. My victim was
+cut up, and carried in triumph to the village. In right of conquest I
+took his horns; they were six feet in length; I have since deposited
+them in the Nantes museum. The Indians, those lovers of metaphor, those
+givers of surnames, thenceforward called me _Malamit Oulou_--Tagal
+words, signifying 'cool head.'"
+
+The traveler describes the cayman, which is of enormous size--the whale
+of the oozy lagoon. He relates the following adventure with a boa:
+
+
+THE BOA OF LUZON.
+
+"THE other monster of which I have promised a description, the boa, is
+common in the Philippines, but it is rare to meet with a very large
+specimen. It is possible, even probable, that centuries (?) are
+necessary for this reptile to attain its largest size; and to such an
+age the various accidents to which animals are exposed rarely suffer it
+to attain. Full-sized boas are met with only in the gloomiest, most
+remote, and most solitary forests.
+
+[Illustration: A boa.]
+
+"I have seen many boas of ordinary size, such as are found in our
+European collections. There were some, indeed, that inhabited my house;
+and one night I found one, two yards long, in possession of my bed.
+
+"Several times, passing through the woods with my Indians, I heard the
+piercing cries of a wild boar. On approaching the spot whence they
+proceeded we almost invariably found a wild boar, about whose body a boa
+had twisted its folds, and was gradually hoisting him up into the tree
+round which it had coiled itself. (See book for illustration.)
+
+"When the wild boar had reached a certain height the snake pressed him
+against the tree with a force that crushed his bones and stifled him.
+Then the boa let its prey fall, descended the tree, and prepared to
+swallow what it had slain. This last operation was much too lengthy for
+us to await its end.
+
+"To simplify matters, I sent a ball into the boa's head. Then my Indian
+took the flesh to dry (bucanier) it, and the skin for dagger sheaths. It
+is unnecessary to say that the wild boar was not forgotten. It was a
+prey that had cost us little pains.
+
+"One day an Indian surprised one of these reptiles asleep, after it had
+swallowed an enormous doe deer. Its size was such that a buffalo cart
+would have been required to transport it to the village.
+
+"The Indian cut it in pieces, and contented himself with as much as he
+could carry off. I sent for the remainder. They brought me a piece about
+eight feet long, and so large that the skin, when dried, enveloped the
+tallest man like a cloak. I gave it to my friend Lindsay.
+
+"I had not yet seen one of the full-grown reptiles, of which the Indians
+spoke to me so much (always with some exaggeration), when one afternoon,
+crossing the mountains with two shepherds, our attention was attracted
+by the sustained barking of my dogs, who seemed assailing some animal
+that stood upon its defense. We at first thought it was a buffalo which
+they had brought to bay, and approached the spot with precaution.
+
+"My dogs were dispersed along the brink of a deep ravine, in which was
+an enormous boa. The monster raised his head to a height, of five or six
+feet, directing it from one edge to the other of the ravine, and
+menacing his assailants with his forked tongue; but the dogs, more
+active than he was, easily avoided his attacks. My first impulse was to
+shoot him, but then it occurred to me to take him alive and send him to
+France. Assuredly he would have been the most monstrous boa that had
+ever been seen there. To carry out my design, we manufactured nooses of
+cane, strong enough to resist the most powerful wild buffalo. With great
+precaution we succeeded in passing one of our nooses round the boa's
+neck; then we tied him tightly to a tree, in such a manner as to keep
+its head at its usual height--about six feet from the ground.
+
+"This done, we crossed to the other side of the ravine and threw another
+noose over him, which we secured like the first. When he felt himself
+thus fixed at both ends, he coiled and writhed, and grappled several
+little trees which grew within his reach along the edge of the ravine.
+Unluckily for him, everything yielded to his efforts; he tore up the
+young trees by the roots, broke off the branches, and dislodged enormous
+stones, round which he sought in vain to obtain the hold or point of
+resistance he needed. The nooses were strong, and withstood his most
+furious efforts. To convey an animal like this several buffaloes and a
+whole system of cordage was necessary. Night approached; confident in
+our nooses we left the place, proposing to return next morning and
+complete the capture--but we reckoned without our host. In the night the
+boa changed his tactics, got his body round some huge blocks of basalt,
+and finally succeeded in breaking his bonds and getting clear off. I was
+greatly disappointed, for I doubted whether I should ever have another
+chance.
+
+"Human beings rarely fall victims to these huge reptiles. I was able to
+verify but one instance. A criminal hid from justice in a cavern. His
+father, who alone knew of his hiding place, went sometimes to see him
+and to take him rice. One day he found, instead of his son, an enormous
+boa asleep. He killed it, and found his son's body in its stomach. The
+priest of the village, who went to give the body Christian burial, and
+who saw the remains of the boa, described it to me as of almost
+incredible size."
+
+
+AN ADVENTURE WITH A MONSTER CAYMAN.
+
+"At the period at which I first occupied my habitation and began to
+colonize the village of Jala-Jala, caymans abounded upon that side of
+the lake. From my windows I daily saw them gamboling in the water, and
+waylaying and snapping at the dogs that ventured too near the brink. One
+day a female servant of my wife's having been so imprudent as to bathe
+at the edge of the lake was surprised by one of them, a monster of
+enormous size. One of my guards came up at the very moment she was being
+carried off; he fired his carbine at the brute and hit it under the
+fore-leg (the armpit), which is the only vulnerable place. But the wound
+was insufficient to check the cayman's progress, and it disappeared with
+its prey. Nevertheless, this little bullet-hole was the cause of its
+death; and here it is to be noted that the slightest wound received by
+the cayman is incurable. The shrimps, which abound in the lake, get into
+the hurt; little by little their number increases, until at last they
+penetrate deep into the solid flesh and into the very interior of the
+body. This is what happened to the one which devoured my wife's maid. A
+month after the accident the monster was found dead upon the bank five
+or six leagues from my house. Indians brought me back the unfortunate
+woman's earrings, which they had found in its stomach.
+
+"Upon another occasion a Chinese was riding with me. We reached a river,
+and I let him go on alone in order to ascertain whether the river was
+very deep or not. On a sudden three or four caymans, which lay in
+waiting under the water, threw themselves upon him; horse and Chinese
+disappeared, and for some minutes the water was tinged with blood.
+
+"I was very curious to obtain a near sight of one of these voracious
+monsters. At the time that they frequented the vicinity of my house I
+made several attempts to attain that end. One night I baited a huge
+hook, secured by a chain and strong cord, with an entire sheep. Next
+morning sheep and chain had disappeared. I lay in wait for the creatures
+with my gun, but the bullets rebounded from their scales. A large dog,
+of a race peculiar to the Philippines and exceeding any European dog in
+size, happening to die, I had his carcase dragged to the shore of the
+lake; I then hid myself in a little thicket and waited, with my gun in
+readiness, the coming of a cayman. But presently I fell asleep, and when
+I awoke the dog had disappeared. It was fortunate the cayman had not
+taken the wrong prey.
+
+"When the colony of Jala-Jala had been a few years founded, the caymans
+disappeared from its neighborhood. I was out one morning with my
+shepherds, at a few leagues from my house, when we came to a river which
+must be swum across. One of them advised me to ascend it to a narrower
+place, for that it was full of caymans, and I was about to do so when
+another Indian, more imprudent than his companions, spurred his horse
+into the stream. 'I do not fear the caymans!' he exclaimed. But he was
+scarcely halfway cross when we saw a cayman of monstrous size advancing
+toward him. We uttered a shout of warning; he at once perceived the
+danger, and, to avoid it, got off his horse at the opposite side to that
+upon which the cayman was approaching, and swam with all his strength
+toward the bank. On reaching it, he paused behind a fallen tree trunk,
+where he had water to his knees, and where, believing himself in perfect
+safety, he drew his cutlass and waited. Meanwhile the cayman reared his
+enormous head out of the water, threw himself upon the horse, and seized
+him by the saddle. The horse made an effort, the girths broke, and,
+while the cayman crunched the leather, the steed reached dry land.
+Perceiving that the saddle was not what he wanted, the cayman dropped it
+and advanced upon the Indian. We shouted to him to run. The poor fellow
+would not stir, but waited calmly, cutlass in hand, and, on the
+alligator's near approach, dealt him a blow upon the head. He might as
+well have tapped upon an anvil. The next instant he was writhing in the
+monster's jaws. For more than a minute we beheld him dragged in the
+direction of the lake, his body erect above the surface of the water
+(the cayman had seized him by the thigh), his hands joined, his eyes
+turned to heaven, in the attitude of a man imploring divine mercy. Soon
+he disappeared. The drama was over, the cayman's stomach was his tomb.
+
+"During this agonizing moment we had all remained silent, but no sooner
+had my poor shepherd disappeared than we vowed we would avenge his
+death.
+
+"I had three nets made of strong cord, each net large enough to form a
+complete barrier across the river. I also had a hut built, and put an
+Indian to live in it, whose duty was to keep constant watch and to let
+me know as soon as the cayman returned to the river. He watched in vain
+for upward of two months; but at the end of that time he came and told
+me that the monster had seized a horse and dragged it into the river to
+devour it at leisure. I immediately repaired to the spot, accompanied by
+my guards, by my priest, who positively would see a cayman hunt, and by
+an American friend of mine, Mr. Russell, of the house of Russell and
+Sturgis, who was then staying with me. I had the nets spread at
+intervals, so that the cayman could not escape back into the lake. This
+operation was not effected without some acts of imprudence; thus, for
+instance, when the nets were arranged, an Indian dived to make sure that
+they reached the bottom, and that our enemy could not escape by passing
+below them. But it might very well have happened that the cayman was in
+the interval between the nets, and so have gobbled up my Indian.
+Fortunately everything passed as we wished. When all was ready, I
+launched three pirogues, strongly fastened together side by side, with
+some Indians in the center, armed with lances, and with tall bamboos
+with which they could touch bottom. At last, all measures having been
+taken to attain my end without any risk or accident, my Indians began to
+explore the river with their long bamboos.
+
+"An animal of such formidable size as the one we sought can not very
+easily hide himself, and soon we beheld him upon the surface of the
+river, lashing the water with his long tail, snapping and clattering
+with his jaws, and endeavoring to get at those who dared disturb him in
+his retreat. A universal shout of joy greeted his appearance; the
+Indians in the pirogues hurled their lances at him, while we, upon
+either shore of the river, fired a volley. The bullets rebounded from
+the monster's scales, which they were unable to penetrate; the keener
+lances made their way between the scales and entered the cayman's body
+some eight or ten inches. Thereupon he disappeared, swimming with
+incredible rapidity, and reached the first net.
+
+"The resistance it opposed turned him; he reascended the river, and
+again appeared on the top of the water. This violent movement broke the
+staves of the lances which the Indians had stuck into him, and the iron
+alone remained in the wounds. Each time that he reappeared the firing
+recommenced, and fresh lances were plunged into his enormous body.
+Perceiving, however, how ineffectual firearms were to pierce his
+cuirass of invulnerable scales, I excited him by my shouts and gestures;
+and when he came to the edge of the water, opening his enormous jaws all
+ready to devour me, I approached the muzzle of my gun to within a few
+inches and fired both barrels, in the hope that the bullets would find
+something softer than scales in the interior of that formidable cavern,
+and that they would penetrate to his brain. All was in vain. The jaws
+closed with a terrible noise, seizing only the fire and smoke that
+issued from my gun, and the balls flattened against his bones without
+injuring them. The animal, which had now become furious, made
+inconceivable efforts to seize one of his enemies; his strength seemed
+to increase instead of diminishing, while our resources were nearly
+exhausted. Almost all our lances were sticking in his body, and our
+ammunition drew to an end. The fight had lasted more than six hours,
+without any result that could make us hope its speedy termination, when
+an Indian struck the cayman, while at the bottom of the water, with a
+lance of unusual strength and size.
+
+"Another Indian struck two vigorous blows with a mace upon the butt end
+of the lance; the iron entered deep into the animal's body, and
+immediately, with a movement as swift as lightning, he darted toward the
+nets and disappeared. The lance-pole, detached from the iron head,
+returned to the surface of the water; for some minutes we waited in
+vain for the monster's reappearance; we thought that his last effort had
+enabled him to reach the lake, and that our chase was perfectly
+fruitless. We hauled in the first net, a large hole in which convinced
+us that our supposition was correct. The second net was in the same
+condition as the first. Disheartened by our failure, we were hauling in
+the third when we felt a strong resistance. Several Indians began to
+drag it toward the bank, and presently, to our great joy, we saw the
+cayman upon the surface of the water, expiring.
+
+"We threw over him several lassos of strong cords, and when he was well
+secured we drew him to land. It was no easy matter to haul him up on the
+bank; the strength of forty Indians hardly sufficed. When at last we had
+got him completely out of the water, and had him before our eyes, we
+stood stupefied with astonishment; for a very different thing was it to
+see his body thus, and to see him swimming when he was fighting against
+us. Mr. Russell, a very competent person, was charged with his
+measurement. From the extremity of the nostrils to the tip of the tail
+he was found to be _twenty-seven feet_ long, and his circumference was
+eleven feet, measured under the armpits. His belly was much more
+voluminous, but we thought it useless to measure him there, judging that
+the horse upon which he had breakfasted must considerably have
+increased his bulk."
+
+
+SWIFTS.
+
+The edible swallows' nests are found in most of the islands of the
+Eastern archipelago.
+
+A traveler, Mr. H. Pryer, who made a visit to one of the swifts' caves
+in Borneo, thus describes the coming and the going of the dusky birds:
+
+"At a quarter past six in the evening the swifts began to return to the
+caves of their nests; a few had been flying in and out all day long, but
+now they began to pour in, at first in tens and then in hundreds, until
+the sound of their wings was like a strong gale of wind whistling
+through the rigging of a ship.
+
+"They continued flying until after midnight. As long as it remained
+light I found it impossible to catch any with my butterfly net, but
+after dark I found it only necessary to wave my net to secure as many as
+I wanted.
+
+"They must possess wonderful powers of sight to fly about in the dark of
+the recesses of their caves and to return to their nests, which are
+often built in places where no light penetrates."
+
+The edible nests are a luxury in China, where they are used in soups.
+The bird makes her nest of saliva, and plasters it on to the rocks
+inside of caves. The nests are collected by means of boats, ropes, and
+ladders, and bring in the Chinese market from £2 to £7 per pound. There
+have been imported to Canton more than eight million nests in a single
+year.
+
+Such are some views of life inside of the vast possession of the sea
+which Magellan discovered for Spain, but which has fallen under the
+folds of the flag of the Republic of the West.
+
+                            THE END.
+
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      D. APPLETON AND COMPANY'S PUBLICATIONS.
+      --------------------------------------
+
+      BOOKS BY WILLIAM O. STODDARD.
+
+      UNIFORM EDITION. EACH, 12MO, CLOTH, $1.50.
+
+      _WITH THE BLACK PRINCE._ A Story of Adventure in the Fourteenth
+      Century. Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst.
+
+      This is a story of adventure and of battle, but it is also an
+      informing presentation of life in England and some phases of life
+      in France in the fourteenth century. The hero is associated with
+      the Black Prince at Crécy and elsewhere. Mr. Stoddard has done his
+      best work in this story, and the absorbing interest of his stirring
+      historical romance will appeal to all young readers.
+
+      _SUCCESS AGAINST ODDS; or, How an American Boy made his Way._
+      Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst.
+
+      In this spirited and interesting story Mr. Stoddard tells the
+      adventures of a plucky boy who fought his own battles, and made his
+      way upward from poverty in a Long Island seashore town. It is a
+      tale of pluck and self-reliance capitally told. The seashore life
+      is vividly described, and there are plenty of exciting incidents.
+
+      _THE RED PATRIOT._ A Story of the American Revolution. Illustrated
+      by B. West Clinedinst.
+
+      _THE WINDFALL; or, After the Flood._ Illustrated by B. West
+      Clinedinst.
+
+      _CHRIS, THE MODEL-MAKER._ A Story of New York. With 6 full-page
+      Illustrations by B. West Clinedinst.
+
+      _ON THE OLD FRONTIER._ With 10 full-page Illustrations.
+
+      _THE BATTLE OF NEW YORK._ With 11 full-page Illustrations and
+      colored Frontispiece.
+
+      _LITTLE SMOKE._ A Story of the Sioux Indians. With 12 full-page
+      Illustrations by F. S. Dellenbaugh, portraits of Sitting Bull, Red
+      Cloud, and other chiefs, and 72 head and tail pieces representing
+      the various implements and surroundings of Indian life.
+
+      _CROWDED OUT O' CROFIELD._ The story of a country boy who fought
+      his way to success in the great metropolis. With 23 Illustrations
+      by C. T. Hill.
+
+      D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.
+
+      ----------------------------------
+
+      D. APPLETON AND COMPANY'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+      GOOD BOOKS FOR YOUNG READERS.
+
+      _THE EXPLOITS OF MYLES STANDISH._ By HENRY JOHNSON (Muirhead
+      Robertson), author of "From Scrooby to Plymouth Rock," etc.
+      Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+      "A vivid picture, keen and penetrating in its interests, and
+      familiarizing young people in a popular way with the hardships
+      endured by the early settlers of New England"--_Boston Herald._
+
+      "All that concerns the settlement at New Plymouth is told with fine
+      skill and vividness of description.... A book that must be read
+      from cover to cover with unfaltering interest."--_Boston Saturday
+      Evening Gazette._
+
+      _CHRISTINE'S CAREER._ A Story for Girls. By PAULINE KING.
+      Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth, specially bound. $1.50.
+
+      The story is fresh and modern, relieved by incidents and constant
+      humor, and the lessons which are suggested are most beneficial.
+
+      _JOHN BOYD'S ADVENTURES._ By THOMAS W. KNOX, author of "The Boy
+      Travelers," etc. With 12 full-page Illustrations. 12mo. Cloth,
+      $1.50.
+
+      _ALONG THE FLORIDA REEF._ By CHARLES F. HOLDER, joint author of
+      "Elements of Zoölogy." With numerous Illustrations. 12mo. Cloth,
+      $1.50.
+
+      _ENGLISHMAN'S HAVEN._ By W. J. GORDON, author of "The
+      Captain-General," etc. With 8 full-page Illustrations. 12mo. Cloth,
+      $1.50.
+
+      _WE ALL._ A Story of Outdoor Life and Adventure in Arkansas. By
+      OCTAVE THANET. With 12 full-page Illustrations by E. J. Austen and
+      Others, 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+      _KING TOM AND THE RUNAWAYS._ By LOUIS PENDLETON. The experiences of
+      two boys in the forests of Georgia. With 6 Illustrations by E. W.
+      Kemble. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+      D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.
+
+      ---------------------------------
+
+
+      _BOYS IN THE MOUNTAINS AND ON THE PLAINS; or, The Western
+      Adventures of Tom Smart, Bob Edge, and Peter Small._ By W. H.
+      RIDEING, Member of the Geographical Surveys under Lieutenant
+      Wheeler. With 101 Illustrations. Square 8vo. Cloth, gilt side and
+      back, $2.50.
+
+      "A handsome gift-book relating to travel, adventure, and field
+      sports in the West."--_New York Times._
+
+      "Mr. Rideing's book is intended for the edification of advanced
+      young readers. It narrates the adventures of Tom Smart, Bob Edge,
+      and Peter Small, in their travels through the mountainous region of
+      the West, principally in Colorado. The author was a member of the
+      Wheeler expedition, engaged in surveying the Territories, and his
+      descriptions of scenery, mining life, the Indians, games, etc., are
+      in a great measure derived from personal observation and
+      experience. The volume is handsomely illustrated, and can not but
+      prove attractive to young readers."--_Chicago Journal._
+
+      _BOYS COASTWISE; or, All Along the Shore._ By W. H. RIDEING,
+      Uniform with "Boys in the Mountains." With numerous Illustrations.
+      Illuminated boards, $1.75.
+
+      "Fully equal to the best of the year's holiday books for boys....
+      In his present trip the author takes them among scenes of the
+      greatest interest to all boys, whether residents on the coast or
+      inland--along the wharves of the metropolis, aboard the pilot-boats
+      for a cruise, with a look at the great ocean steamers, among the
+      life-saving men, coast wreckers and divers, and finally on a tour
+      of inspection of lighthouses and lightships, and other interesting
+      phases of nautical and coast life."--_Christian Union._
+
+      _THE CRYSTAL HUNTERS._ A Boy's Adventures in the Higher Alps. By
+      GEORGE MANVILLE FENN, author of "In the King's Name," "Dick o' the
+      Fens," etc. 12mo, Cloth, $1.50.
+
+      "This is the boys' favorite author, and of the many books Mr. Fenn
+      has written for them this will please them the best. While it will
+      not come under the head of sensational, it is yet full of life and
+      of those stirring adventures which boys always delight
+      in."--_Christian at Work._
+
+      "English pluck and Swiss coolness are tested to the utmost in these
+      perilous explorations among the higher Alps, and quite as thrilling
+      as any of the narrow escapes is the account of the first breathless
+      ascent of a real mountain-peak. It matters little to the reader
+      whether the search for crystals is rewarded or not, so concerned
+      does he become for the fate of the hunters."--_Literary World._
+
+      _SYD BELTON: The Boy who would not go to Sea._ By GEORGE MANVILLE
+      FENN. With 6 full-page Illustrations. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+      "Who among the young story-reading public will not rejoice at the
+      sight of the old combination, so often proved admirable--a story by
+      Manville Fenn, illustrated by Gordon Browne! The story, too, is one
+      of the good old sort, full of life and vigor, breeziness and fun.
+      It begins well and goes on better, and from the time Syd joins his
+      ship, exciting incidents follow each other in such rapid and
+      brilliant succession that nothing short of absolute compulsion
+      would induce the reader to lay it down."--_London Journal of
+      Education._
+
+      D. APPELTON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.
+
+      ----------------------------------
+
+      YOUNG HEROES OF OUR NAVY.
+
+      Uniform Edition. Each, 12mo, Cloth, $1.00.
+
+=Dewey on the Mississippi.=
+
+      The Story of the Admiral's Younger Years. By ROSSITER JOHNSON. A
+      New Book in the Young Heroes of our Navy Series. Illustrated.
+
+=The Hero of Erie (Commodore Perry).=
+
+      By JAMES BARNES, author of "Midshipman Farragut," "Commodore
+      Bainbridge," etc. With 10 full-page Illustrations.
+
+=Commodore Bainbridge.=
+
+      From the Gunroom to the Quarter-deck. By JAMES BARNES, author of
+      "Midshipman Farragut." Illustrated by George Gibbs and Others.
+
+=Midshipman Farragut.=
+
+      By JAMES BARNES, author of "For King or Country," etc. Illustrated
+      by Carlton T. Chapman.
+
+=Decatur and Somers.=
+
+      By MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL, author of "Paul Jones," "Little Jarvis,"
+      etc. With 6 full-page Illustrations by J. O. Davidson and Others.
+
+=Paul Jones.=
+
+      By MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL. With 8 full-page Illustrations.
+
+=Midshipman Paulding.=
+
+      A True Story of the War of 1812. By MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL. With 6
+     full-page Illustrations.
+
+=Little Jarvis.=
+
+      The story of the heroic midshipman of the frigate Constellation. By
+      MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL. With 6 full-page Illustrations.
+
+      D. APPELTON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.
+
+      ----------------------------------
+
+      D. APPELTON AND CO'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+      _PAUL AND VIRGINIA._ By BERNARDIN DE SAINT-PIERRE. With a
+      Biographical Sketch, and numerous Illustrations by Maurice Leloir.
+      8vo. Cloth, gilt top, uniform with "Picciola," "The Story of
+      Colette," and "An Attic Philosopher in Paris." $1.50.
+
+      It is believed that this standard edition of "Paul and Virginia"
+      with Leloir's charming illustrations will prove a most acceptable
+      addition to the series of illustrated foreign classics in which D.
+      Appleton and Co. have published "The Story of Colette," "An Attic
+      Philosopher in Paris," and "Picciola." No more sympathetic
+      illustrator than Leloir could be found, and his treatment of this
+      masterpiece of French literature invests it with a peculiar value.
+
+      _PICCIOLA._ By X. B. SAINTINE. With 130 Illustrations by J. F.
+      GUELDRY. 8vo. Cloth, gilt top, $1.50.
+
+      "Saintine's 'Picciola,' the pathetic tale of the prisoner who
+      raised a flower between the cracks of the flagging of his dungeon,
+      has passed definitely into the list of classic books.... It has
+      never been more beautifully housed than in this edition, with its
+      fine typography, binding, and sympathetic
+      illustrations."--_Philadelphia Telegraph._
+
+      "The binding is both unique and tasteful, and the book commends
+      itself strongly as one that should meet with general favor in the
+      season of gift-making."--_Boston Saturday Evening Gazette._
+
+      "Most beautiful in its clear type, cream-laid paper, many
+      attractive illustrations, and holiday binding."--_New York
+      Observer._
+
+      _AN ATTIC PHILOSOPHER IN PARIS; or, A Peep at the World from a
+      Garret._ Being the Journal of a Happy Man. By ÉMILE SOUVESTRE. With
+      numerous Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, gilt top, $1.50.
+
+      "A suitable holiday gift for a friend who appreciates refined
+      literature."--_Boston Times._
+
+      "The influence of the book is wholly good. The volume is a
+      particularly handsome one."--_Philadelphia Telegraph._
+
+      "It is a classic. It has found an appropriate reliquary. Faithfully
+      translated, charmingly illustrated by Jean Claude with full-page
+      pictures, vignettes in the text, and head and tail pieces, printed
+      in graceful type on handsome paper, and bound with an art worthy of
+      Matthews, in half-cloth, ornamented on the cover, it is an
+      exemplary book, fit to be 'a treasure for aye.'"--_New York Times._
+
+      _THE STORY OF COLETTE._ A new large-paper edition. With 36
+      Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, gilt top, $1.50.
+
+      "One of the handsomest of the books of fiction for the holiday
+      season."--_Philadelphia Bulletin._
+
+      "One of the gems of the season.... It is the story of the life of
+      young womanhood in France, dramatically told, with the light and
+      shade and coloring of the genuine artist, and is utterly free from
+      that which mars too many French novels. In its literary finish it
+      is well-nigh perfect, indicating the hand of the master."--_Boston
+      Traveller._
+
+      New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.
+
+      ----------------------------------------------
+
+      D. APPLETON AND CO.'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+      _THE FARMER'S BOY._ By CLIFTON JOHNSON, author of "The Country
+      School in New England," etc. With 64 Illustrations by the Author.
+      8vo. Cloth, $2.50.
+
+      "One of the handsomest and most elaborate juvenile works lately
+      published."--_Philadelphia Item._
+
+      "Mr. Johnson's style is almost rhythmical, and one lays down the
+      book with the sensation of having read a poem and that saddest of
+      all longings, the longing for vanished youth."--_Boston Commercial
+      Bulletin._
+
+      "As a triumph of the realistic photographer's art it deserves warm
+      praise quite aside from its worth as a sterling book on the
+      subjects its title indicates.... It is a most praiseworthy book,
+      and the more such that are published the better."--_New York Mail
+      and Express._
+
+      "The book is beautiful and amusing, well studied, well written,
+      redolent of the wood, the field, and the stream, and full of those
+      delightful reminders of a boy's country home which touch the
+      heart."--_New York Independent._
+
+      "One of the finest books of the kind that have ever been put
+      out."--_Cleveland World._
+
+      "A book on whose pages many a gray-haired man would dwell with
+      retrospective enjoyment."--_St. Paul Pioneer Press._
+
+      "The illustrations are admirable, and the book will appeal to every
+      one who has had a taste of life on a New England farm."--_Boston
+      Transcript._
+
+      _THE COUNTRY SCHOOL IN NEW ENGLAND._ By CLIFTON JOHNSON. With 60
+      Illustrations from Photographs and Drawings made by the Author.
+      Square 8vo. Cloth, gilt edges, $2.50.
+
+      "An admirable undertaking, carried out in an admirable way.... Mr.
+      Johnson's descriptions are vivid and lifelike and are full of
+      humor, and the illustrations, mostly after photographs, give a
+      solid effect of realism to the whole work, and are superbly
+      reproduced.... The definitions at the close of this volume are
+      very, very funny, and yet they are not stupid; they are usually the
+      result of deficient logic."--_Boston Beacon._
+
+      "A charmingly written account of the rural schools in this section
+      of the country. It speaks of the old-fashioned school days of the
+      early quarter of this century, of the mid-century schools, of the
+      country school of to-day, and of how scholars think and write. The
+      style is animated and picturesque.... It is handsomely printed, and
+      is interesting from its pretty cover to its very last
+      page."--_Boston Saturday Evening Gazette._
+
+      "A unique piece of book-making that deserves to be popular....
+      Prettily and serviceably bound, and well illustrated."--_The
+      Churchman._
+
+      "The readers who turn the leaves of this handsome book will unite
+      in saying the author has 'been there.' It is no fancy sketch, but
+      text and illustrations are both a reality."--_Chicago Inter-Ocean._
+
+      "No one who is familiar with the little red schoolhouse can look at
+      these pictures and read these chapters without having the mind
+      recall the boyhood experiences, and the memory is pretty sure to be
+      a pleasant one."--_Chicago Times._
+
+      "A superbly prepared volume, which by its reading matter and its
+      beautiful illustrations, so natural and finished, pleasantly and
+      profitably recalls memories and associations connected with the
+      very foundations of our national greatness."--_N. Y. Observer._
+
+      New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.
+
+      -----------------------------------------------
+
+      D. APPLETON AND CO.'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+      _UNCLE REMUS. His Songs and his Sayings._ By JOEL CHANDLER HARRIS.
+      With new Preface and Revisions, and 112 Illustrations by A. B.
+      Frost. Library Edition. 12mo. Buckram, gilt top, uncut, $2.00.
+      Also, _Edition de luxe_ of the above, limited to 250 copies, each
+      signed by the author, with the full-page cuts mounted on India
+      paper. 8vo. White vellum, gilt top, $10.00.
+
+      "The old tales of the plantation have never been told as Mr. Harris
+      has told them. Each narrative is to the point, and so swift in its
+      action upon the risibilities of the reader that one almost loses
+      consciousness of the printed page, and fancies it is the voice of
+      the lovable old darky himself that steals across the senses and
+      brings mirth inextinguishable as it comes; ... and Mr. Frost's
+      drawings are so superlatively good, so inexpressibly funny, that
+      they promise to make this the standard edition of a standard
+      book."--_New York Tribune._
+
+      "An exquisite volume, full of good illustrations, and if there is
+      anybody in this country who doesn't know Mr. Harris, here is an
+      opportunity to make his acquaintance and have many a good
+      laugh."--_New York Herald._
+
+      "There is but one 'Uncle Remus,' and he will never grow old.... It
+      was a happy thought, that of marrying the work of Harris and
+      Frost."--_New York Mail and Express._
+
+      "Nobody could possibly have done this work better than Mr. Frost,
+      whose appreciation of negro life fitted him especially to be the
+      interpreter of 'Uncle Remus,' and whose sense of the humor in
+      animal life makes these drawings really illustrations in the
+      fullest sense. Mr. Harris's well-known work has become in a sense a
+      classic, and this may be accepted as the standard
+      edition."--_Philadelphia Times._
+
+      "A book which became a classic almost as soon as it was
+      published.... Mr. Frost has never done anything better in the way
+      of illustration, if indeed he has done anything as good."--_Boston
+      Advertiser._
+
+      "We pity the reader who has not yet made the acquaintance of 'Uncle
+      Remus' and his charming story.... Mr. Harris has made a real
+      addition to literature purely and strikingly American, and Mr.
+      Frost has aided in fixing the work indelibly on the consciousness
+      of the American reader."--_The Churchman._
+
+      "The old fancies of the old negro, dear as they may have been to us
+      these many years, seem to gain new life when they appear through
+      the medium of Mr. Frost's imagination."--_New York Home Journal._
+
+      "In his own peculiar field 'Uncle Remus' has no rival. The book has
+      become a classic, but the latest edition is the choice one. It is
+      rarely riven to an author to see his work accompanied by pictures
+      so closely in sympathy with his text."--_San Francisco Argonaut._
+
+      "We say it with the utmost faith that there is not an artist who
+      works in illustration that can catch the attitude and expression,
+      the slyness, the innate depravity, the eye of surprise, obstinacy,
+      the hang of the head or the kick of the heels of the mute and the
+      brute creation as Mr. Frost has shown to us here."--_Baltimore
+      Sun._
+
+      New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.
+
+      -----------------------------------------------
+
+      D. APPLETON AND CO'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+      _THE STORY OF WASHINGTON._ By ELIZABETH EGGLESTON SEELYE. Edited by
+      Dr. Edward Eggleston. With over 100 Illustrations by Allegra
+      Eggleston. A new volume in the "Delights of History" Series,
+      uniform with "The Story of Columbus." 12mo. Cloth, $1.75.
+
+      "One of the best accounts of the incidents of Washington's life for
+      young people."--_New York Observer._
+
+      "The Washington described is not that of the demigod or hero of the
+      first half of this century, but the man Washington, with his
+      defects as well as his virtues, his unattractive traits as well as
+      his pleasing ones.... There is greater freedom from errors than in
+      more pretentious lives."--_Chicago Tribune._
+
+      "The illustrations are numerous, and actually illustrate, including
+      portraits and views, with an occasional map and minor pictures
+      suggestive of the habits and customs of the period. It is
+      altogether an attractive and useful book, and one that should find
+      many readers among American boys and girls."--_Philadelphia Times._
+
+      "A good piece of literary work presented in an attractive
+      shape."--_New York Tribune._
+
+      "Will be read with interest by young and old. It is told with good
+      taste and accuracy, and if the first President loses some of his
+      mythical goodness in this story, the real greatness of his natural
+      character stands out distinctly, and his example will be all the
+      more helpful to the boys and girls of this generation."--_New York
+      Churchman._
+
+      "The book is just what has been needed, the story of the life of
+      Washington, as well as of his public career, written in a manner so
+      interesting that one who begins it will finish, and so told that it
+      will leave not the memory of a few trivial anecdotes by which to
+      measure the man, but a just and complete estimate of him. The
+      illustrations are so excellent as to double the value of the book
+      as it would be without them."--_Chicago Times._
+
+      _THE STORY OF COLUMBUS._ By ELIZABETH EGGLESTON SEELYE. Edited by
+      Dr. Edward Eggleston. With 100 Illustrations by Allegra Eggleston.
+      "Delights of History" Series. 12mo. Cloth, $1.75.
+
+      "A brief, popular, interesting, and yet critical volume, just such
+      as we should wish to place in the hands of a young reader. The
+      authors of this volume have done their best to keep it on a high
+      plane of accuracy and conscientious work without losing sight of
+      their readers."--_New York Independent._
+
+      "In some respects altogether the best book that the Columbus year
+      has brought out."--_Rochester Post-Express._
+
+      "A simple story told in a natural fashion, and will be found far
+      more interesting than many of the more ambitions works on a similar
+      theme."--_New York Journal of Commerce._
+
+      "This is no ordinary work. It is pre-eminently a work of the
+      present time and of the future as well."--_Boston Traveller._
+
+      "Mrs. Seelye's book is pleasing in its general effect, and reveals
+      the results of painstaking and conscientious study."--_New York
+      Tribune._
+
+      "A very just account is given of Columbus, his failings being
+      neither concealed nor magnified, but his real greatness being made
+      plain."--_New York Examiner._
+
+      "The illustrations are particularly well chosen and neatly
+      executed, and they add to the general excellence of the
+      volume."--_New York Times._
+
+      New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Story of Magellan and The
+Discovery of the Philippines, by Hezekiah Butterworth
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE STORY OF MAGELLAN ***
+
+***** This file should be named 37814-8.txt or 37814-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/8/1/37814/
+
+Produced by Charlene Taylor, Eric Skeet, Marilynda
+Fraser-Cunliffe and the Online Distributed Proofreading
+Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was made using scans
+of public domain works from the University of Michigan
+Digital Libraries.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/37814-8.zip b/37814-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b6d00a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-8.zip
diff --git a/37814-h.zip b/37814-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f93c063
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h.zip
diff --git a/37814-h/37814-h.htm b/37814-h/37814-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4347f11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/37814-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,9357 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+<!-- $Id: header.txt 236 2009-12-07 18:57:00Z vlsimpson $ -->
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Story of Magellan and the Discovery of the Philippines, by Hezekiah Butterworth
+    </title>
+<style type="text/css">
+
+body {
+    margin-left: 10%;
+    margin-right: 10%;
+    font-family: serif;
+    font-size: 12pt;
+}
+
+    h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+    text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+    clear: both;
+}
+
+p {
+    margin-top: .75em;
+    text-align: justify;
+    margin-bottom: .75em;
+}
+
+hr {
+    width: 33%;
+    margin-top: 2em;
+    margin-bottom: 2em;
+    margin-left: auto;
+    margin-right: auto;
+    clear: both;
+}
+
+.pagenum {
+    position: absolute;
+    left: 92%;
+    font-size: smaller;
+    text-align: right;
+}
+
+
+.center   {text-align: center;}
+
+.smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+.caption  {font-weight: bold;
+           font-size: 9pt;
+           text-align: center;
+}
+
+
+.figleft {
+    float: left;
+    clear: left;
+    margin-left: 0;
+    margin-bottom: 1em;
+    margin-top: 1em;
+    margin-right: 1em;
+    padding: 0;
+    text-align: center;
+}
+
+.figright {
+    float: right;
+    clear: right;
+    margin-left: 1em;
+    margin-bottom: 1em;
+    margin-top: 1em;
+    margin-right: 0;
+    padding: 0;
+    text-align: center;
+}
+
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Story of Magellan and The Discovery of
+the Philippines, by Hezekiah Butterworth
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Story of Magellan and The Discovery of the Philippines
+
+Author: Hezekiah Butterworth
+
+Illustrator: Frank T. Merrill
+
+Release Date: October 21, 2011 [EBook #37814]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE STORY OF MAGELLAN ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Charlene Taylor, Eric Skeet, Marilynda
+Fraser-Cunliffe and the Online Distributed Proofreading
+Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was made using scans
+of public domain works from the University of Michigan
+Digital Libraries.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+
+<p>Transcriber's Notes:<br />
+(1) Typos, punctuation, and spelling errors have been corrected.<br />
+(2) Footnotes are marked [A], [B], etc, and are placed at the end of the book.<br />
+(3) An illustration has been moved from page 18 to page 2, nearer the relevant text.<br />
+(4) If viewer's computer does not display images, the captions are shown in bolder text.
+</p>
+
+
+
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_ii" id="Page_ii">[ii]</a></span></p>
+<h2>THE STORY OF MAGELLAN AND THE<br />DISCOVERY OF THE PHILIPPINES
+<br />
+<br /></h2>
+
+<p class="center" style="border-style: solid; border-width: thin; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;">
+<br />BY HEZEKIAH BUTTERWORTH.
+<br />
+Uniform edition. Each, 12mo, cloth, $1.50.
+<br />
+&nbsp; &nbsp;<br />
+<b>The Story of Magellan.</b> A Tale of the Discovery<br />
+of the Philippines. Illustrated by F. T. Merrill and<br />
+Others.<br />&nbsp; <br />
+<b>The Treasure Ship.</b> A Story of Sir William Phipps<br />
+and the Inter-Charter Period in Massachusetts. Illustrated<br />
+by B. West Clinedinst and Others.
+<br />&nbsp; <br />
+<b>The Pilot of the Mayflower.</b> Illustrated by H.<br />
+Winthrop Peirce and Others.
+<br />&nbsp; <br />
+<b>True to his Home.</b> A Tale of the Boyhood of<br />
+Franklin. Illustrated by H. Winthrop Peirce.
+<br />&nbsp; <br />
+<b>The Wampum Belt:</b> <i>or, The Fairest Page of<br />
+History.</i> A Tale of William Penn's Treaty with<br />
+the Indians. With 6 full-page Illustrations.
+<br />&nbsp; <br />
+<b>The Knight of Liberty.</b> A Tale of the Fortunes of<br />
+Lafayette. With 6 full-page Illustrations.
+<br />&nbsp; <br />
+<b>The Patriot Schoolmaster.</b> A Tale of the Minutemen<br />
+and the Sons of Liberty. With 6 full-page<br />
+Illustrations by H. Winthrop Peirce.
+<br />&nbsp; <br />
+<b>In the Boyhood of Lincoln.</b> A Story of the Black<br />
+Hawk War and the Tunker Schoolmaster. With 12<br />
+Illustrations and colored Frontispiece.
+<br />&nbsp; <br />
+<b>The Boys of Greenway Court.</b> A Story of the<br />
+Early Years of Washington. With 10 full-page<br />
+Illustrations.
+<br />&nbsp; <br />
+<b>The Log School-House on the Columbia.</b> With<br />
+13 full-page Illustrations by J. Carter Beard, E. J.<br />
+Austen, and Others.
+<br />&nbsp;<br />
+D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.</p>
+
+
+<p><a name="ill4"></a></p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iii" id="Page_iii">[iii]</a></span></p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_004.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Magellan planting the Cross in the Philippine Islands.<br />(See page 123</span>)</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv">[iv]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h2>THE STORY OF MAGELLAN</h2>
+<h6>AND</h6>
+<h4>THE DISCOVERY OF THE PHILIPPINES</h4>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<h6>BY</h6>
+
+<h4>HEZEKIAH BUTTERWORTH</h4>
+
+<h6>AUTHOR OF<br />
+THE TREASURE SHIP, THE PILOT OF THE MAYFLOWER,<br />
+TRUE TO HIS HOME, THE WAMPUM BELT,<br />
+IN THE BOYHOOD OF LINCOLN, ETC.</h6>
+
+<h5><i>ILLUSTRATED BY FRANK T. MERRILL<br />
+AND OTHERS</i></h5>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_005.jpg" alt="Publisher's logo" title=" " /></p>
+
+<h4>NEW YORK<br />
+D. APPLETON AND COMPANY<br />
+1899</h4>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v">[v]</a></span></p>
+
+<hr style="width:45%" />
+
+<p class="center" style="font-size: 8pt"><span class="smcap">Copyright,</span> 1899,<br />
+<span class="smcap">By</span> D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.</p>
+
+<hr style="width:45%" />
+
+<p><a name="noteA"></a></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi">[vi]</a></span></p>
+
+<p style="margin-left: 25%; font-size: 10pt;">
+"Fired by thy fame,<a href="#foot">[A]</a> and with his King in ire<br />
+To match thy deed, shall Magalhaes aspire.<br />
+<br />
+"Along the regions of the burning zone,<br />
+To deepest South he dares the course unknown.<br />
+<br />
+"A land of giants shall his eyes behold,<br />
+Of camel strength, surpassing human mould.<br />
+<br />
+"Beneath the Southern star's gold gleam he braves<br />
+And stems the whirl of land-surrounded waves.<br />
+<br />
+"Forever movèd to the hero's fame,<br />
+Those foaming straits shall bear his deathless name."</p>
+
+<p style="margin-left: 20em; width: 35%; text-align: right; font-size: 8pt" class="smcap">Camoëns.</p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vii" id="Page_vii">[vii]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<h3>PREFACE.</h3>
+
+
+<p>I have been asked to write a story of Ferdinand
+Magellan, the value of whose discoveries has
+received a new interpretation in the development of
+the South Temperate Zone of America, and in the
+ceding of the Philippine Islands to the United States.
+The works of Lord Stanley and of Guillemard furnish
+comprehensive histories of the intrepid discoverer
+of the South Pacific Ocean and the Philippine
+Islands; but there would seem to be room for a
+short, picturesque story of Magellan's adventures,
+such as might be read by family lamps and in
+schools.</p>
+
+<p>To attempt to write such a story is more than
+a pleasure, for the study of Magellan reveals a character
+high above his age; a man unselfish and true,
+who was filled with a passion for discovery, and who
+sought the welfare of humanity and the glory of
+the Cross rather than wealth or fame. Among
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_viii" id="Page_viii">[viii]</a></span>
+great discoverers he has left a character well-nigh
+ideal. The incidents of his life are not only honorable,
+but usually have the color of chivalry.</p>
+
+<p>His voyages, as pictured by his companion Pigafetta,
+the historian, give us our first view of the
+interesting native inhabitants of the South Temperate
+Zone and of the Pacific archipelagoes, and his
+adventures with the giants of Patagonia and with
+the natives of the Ladrone Islands, read almost like
+stories of Sinbad the Sailor. The simple record of
+his adventures is in itself a storybook.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan, from his usually high and unselfish
+character, as well as for the lasting influence of
+what he did as shown in the new developments of
+civilization, merits a place among household heroes;
+and it is in this purpose and spirit I have undertaken
+a simple sympathetic interpretation of his
+most noble and fruitful life. I have tried to put into
+the form of a story the events whose harvests now
+appear after nearly four hundred years, and to picture
+truthfully a beautiful and inspiring character.
+To the narrative of his lone lantern I have added
+some tales of the Philippines.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-left:60%"><span class="smcap">H. Butterworth.</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">28 Worcester Street, Boston, Mass.</span></p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_ix" id="Page_ix">[ix]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3>CONTENTS.</h3>
+
+
+<table style="margin-left: 10%; " summary="Contents">
+<tr>
+<td colspan="2" style="text-align: left">CHAPTER</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right;">PAGE</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">I.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">A strange royal order</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap1">1</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">II.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Friends with a Purpose</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap2">9</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">III.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Prince Henry the Navigator and Vasco da Gama</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap3">15</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">IV.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">The enthusiasts carry their plans to the king</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap4">24</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">V.&mdash;<br /><br /></td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">About the happy Italian who wished to see the<br />world.&mdash;Beautiful Seville!</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap5">38</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">VI.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Enemies.&mdash; Estaban Gormez</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap6">43</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">VII.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">"Marooned"</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap7">52</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">VIII.&mdash;<br /><br /><br /></td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">"The wonders of new lands."&mdash;Pigafetta's tales of<br />
+his adventures with Magellan.&mdash;The story of "the<br />
+fountain tree."&mdash;"St Elmo's Fire"</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap8">60</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">IX.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Pineapples, potatoes, very old people</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap9">70</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">X.&mdash;<br /><br /></td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">The first giant.&mdash; The islands of geese and<br />goslings.&mdash; The dancing giants</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap10">76</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XI.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Capturing a giant.&mdash; Magellan's decision</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap11">84</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XII.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">The mutiny at Port Julian.&mdash; The Straits.&mdash; 1519</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap12">91</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XIII.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">"The Admiral was mad"</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap13">99</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XIV.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">The Pacific.&mdash; The death of the giants</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap14">103</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XV.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Welcome to the Philippines</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap15">108</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XVI.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">The visit of the King.&mdash; Pigafetta visits the King</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap16">116</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XVII.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Easter Sunday.&mdash; Magellan plants the cross</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap17">122</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XVIII.&mdash;<br /><br /></td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Christianity and trade established.&mdash; The Baptist of<br/>
+the Queen</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap18">129</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XIX.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Halcyon Days</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap19">136</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XX.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">The Death of Magellan</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap20">139</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XXI.&mdash;<br /><br /></td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">The Spice Islands.&mdash; Wonderful birds.&mdash; Cloves, cinnamon<br/>
+nutmegs, ginger.&mdash; The ships overloaded</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap21">144</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XXII.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Mesquita in prison</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap22">157</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XXIII.&mdash;<br /><br /><br /></td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Strange stories.&mdash; The wise old women.&mdash; The walking<br />
+leaves.&mdash; The haunted sandalwood trees.&mdash; The Emperor<br />
+Of China.&mdash; The little boy and the giant bird</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap23">161</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XXIV.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">The lost day</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap24">173</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: right">XXV.&mdash;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">In the Church of Our Lady of Victory.&mdash; Pigafetta</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#chap25">176</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>&nbsp;</td>
+<td class="smcap" style="text-align: left;">Supplemental</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right;"><a href="#chapsupp">183</a></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xi" id="Page_xi">[xi]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>LIST OF FULL-PAGE ILLUSTRATIONS.</h4>
+
+<table style="margin-left: 12%; " summary="Illustrations">
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">&nbsp;</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right">FACING<br />PAGE</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Magellan planting the Cross in the Philippine Islands</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill4"><i>Frontispiece</i></a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">"He is a renegade. His arms must come down!"</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill33">2</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Lisbon, from the south bank of the Tagus</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill19">4</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Ferdinand Magellan</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill21">6</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Barcelona</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill51">34</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Night after night the ships followed Magellan's lantern</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill72">55</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Interior of the Alcázar of Seville</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill79">60</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">The dancing giant</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill99">80</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Mount Mayon, on the Island of Luzon</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill144">125</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">The death of Magellan</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill163">142</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Pigafetta presenting the history of the voyage to the King of Spain</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill202">179</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Map of the Philippine Islands</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill212">187</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Native houses in Manila</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill217">190</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Hong Kong</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill231">202</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Iloilo</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill235">206</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td style="text-align: left;">Boats on the River Pasig</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 5pt; text-align: right"><a href="#ill247">218</a></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[1]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h2>THE STORY OF MAGELLAN.</h2>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap1" id="chap1"></a>CHAPTER I.</h3>
+
+<h4>A STRANGE ROYAL ORDER.</h4>
+
+
+<p>I am to tell the story of a man who had faith in
+himself.</p>
+
+<p>The clouds and the ocean bear his name. Lord
+Stanley has called him "the greatest of ancient and
+modern navigators."</p>
+
+<p>That was a strange royal order, indeed, which
+Dom Manoel, King of Portugal, issued in the early
+part of the fifteenth century. It was in effect: "Go
+to the house of Hernando de Magallanes, in Sabrosa,
+and tear from it the coat of arms. Hernando de
+Magallanes (Ferdinand Magellan) has transferred
+his allegiance to the King of Spain."</p>
+
+<p>The people of the mountain district must have
+been very much astonished when the cavaliers, if
+such they were, appeared to execute this order.</p>
+
+<p>As the arms were torn away from the ancient
+house, we may imagine the alcalde of the place inquiring:</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[2]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"What has our townsman done? Did he not
+serve our country well in the East?"</p>
+
+<p>"He is a renegade!" answers the commander.</p>
+
+<p>"But he carried his plans for discovery to our
+own King first before he went to the court of Spain."</p>
+
+<p>"Say no more! Spain is reaping the fruits of
+his brain, and under his lead is planting her colonies
+in the new seas, to the detriment of our country<a name="ill33"></a>
+and the shame of the throne. His arms must come
+down. Portugal rejects his name forever!"</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_033.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">"He is a renegade. His arms must come down!"</span></p>
+
+
+<p>The officers of the King tore down the arms. They thought they had
+consigned the name for which the arms stood to oblivion. As the Jewish
+hierarchy said of Spinoza: "Let his name be cast out under the whole
+heavens!" That name rose again.</p>
+
+<p>Years passed and a nephew of Magellan inherited
+one of the family estates. He was stoned in the
+streets on account of his name. This man fled in
+exile from Portugal to Brazil. He died there, and
+said: "Let no heir or descendant of mine ever restore
+the arms of my family."</p>
+
+<p>In his will he wrote:</p>
+
+<p>"I desire that the arms of my family (Magellan)
+should remain forever obliterated, as was done by
+order of my Lord and King, <i>as a punishment for the
+crime</i> of Ferdinand Magellan, because he entered
+the service of Castile to the injury of our kingdom."</p>
+
+<p>It is the history of this same Ferdinand Magellan,
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[3]</a></span>
+whom Portugal and his own family sought to crush
+out from the world, that we are now about to
+trace.</p>
+
+<p>Following his highest inspiration, he shut his
+eyes to the present, and followed the light of the
+star of destiny in his soul. His discovery seems
+to open to the West the doors of China.</p>
+
+<p>He was filled from boyhood with a passion for
+finding unknown lands and waters; he was haunted
+by ideals and visions of noble exploits for the good
+of mankind. His own country, Portugal, would
+not listen to his projects at the time that he
+offered them to the court; so, like Columbus, Vespucci,
+and Cabot, he sought the favor of another
+country. Nothing could stand before the high purpose
+of his soul. "If not by Portugal, then by
+Spain," he said to an intimate friend; meaning that,
+if his own country denied him the favor of giving
+him an opportunity for exploration, he would present
+his cause to the court of Spain, which he
+did.</p>
+
+<p>This man, whose real name was Fernao de Magalhaes,
+was born about the year 1480, at Sabrosa,
+in Portugal, a wintry district where the hardy soil
+and the "gloomy grandeur" of the mountain scenery
+produced men of strong bodies and lofty spirit. He
+belonged to a noble family, "one of the noblest in
+the kingdom." His boyhood was passed in the
+sierras. He had a love of works of geography and
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[4]</a></span>
+travel, and he dreamed even then of sunny zones,
+undiscovered waters, and unknown regions of the
+world. Henry the Navigator and his school of
+pilots, astronomers, and explorers, had left the
+country full of the spirit of new discoveries which
+yet lived.</p>
+
+<p>He went to the capital of Portugal to be educated,
+and was made a page to the Queen. He was
+yet a boy when Columbus returned, bringing the
+enthralling news of a new world. Spain was filled
+with excitement at the event; her cities rang with
+jubilees by day and flared with torches at night.
+Portugal caught the new spirit of her late King,
+Henry the Navigator, and was ambitious to rival
+the discoveries of Spain. She had already established
+herself in the glowing realms of India.</p>
+
+<p>In 1509 Magellan went to the West Indies in the
+service of the Portuguese Government. He joined
+the expedition that discovered the Spice Islands of
+Banda, and it became his conviction that these
+islands could be reached by a new ocean way.</p>
+
+<p>A great vision arose in his mind. It was a suggestion
+that never left him until he saw its fulfillment
+in an unexpected way on seas of which he
+never had dreamed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="ill19"></a>This view was that he could sail around the
+world and reach the Spice Islands by the way of
+the West.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_019.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Lisbon, from the south bank of the Tagus.</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In the service of the King against the Moors in one
+of the Portuguese wars, he received a wound which
+healed, but left him lame for life. He, like other
+officers, sent in his claim for the pension due to
+such service. He received answer from the parsimonious
+King (Dom Manoel):</p>
+
+<p>"Your claim is not good. Your wound has
+healed."</p>
+
+<p>He was wounded more deeply by this insult than
+he could have been by any poisoned dart from the
+Moors. That he should have been refused the recognition
+of those who had shed blood in his country's
+cause rankled in his heart, especially as he saw his
+comrades paraded in honor and pensioned for lesser
+disabilities. He left Portugal, as an exile, and went
+to Spain.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Here the high aspirations of the lame soldier met
+with recognition, and it was this service that caused
+the Portuguese King to issue the strange order
+which has introduced the young and high-spirited
+grandee to the readers of this story.</p>
+
+<p>If he had faults&mdash;as far as history records he
+had no vices&mdash;his high aim overcame them. He
+had caught the spirit of Portuguese Henry the Navigator,
+and his soul had glowed when the fame of
+Columbus first thrilled Spain. He had learned the
+history of Vasco da Gama, whose name was the<a name="ill21"></a>
+glory of Portugal. He had educated himself for
+action.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_021.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Ferdinand Magellan. <br />After a painting by Velasquez.</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[7]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It was the age of opportunity. He saw it; he
+could not know the way, but he knew the guide
+that was in him. As a son of the Church, which he
+then was, he consecrated all he had to her glory.
+What was fame, what was wealth, what was anything
+to becoming a benefactor of the world, and
+living forever in the heart of all mankind?</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>So his deserted house crumbed in Sabrosa, and
+his coat of arms did not there reappear until centuries
+had followed the course of his genius, and the
+whole world came to know his worth.</p>
+
+<p>In view of recent events his character becomes
+one of the most interesting of past history.</p>
+
+<p>After nearly four hundred years that cast-out
+name rises like a star!</p>
+
+<p>Why, in the view of to-day, was that name cast
+out?</p>
+
+<p>Because Magellan saw his duty in a larger life
+than in the restrictions of a provincial court. The
+lesson has its significance. He who sinks self and
+policy, and follows his highest duty and enters the
+widest field, will in the final judgment of man receive
+the noblest and best reward.</p>
+
+<p>We love a lover of mankind, and it strengthens
+faith and hope to follow the keel of such a sailor on
+any sea.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap2" id="chap2"></a>CHAPTER II.</h3>
+
+<h4>FRIENDS WITH A PURPOSE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Souls kindle kindred souls, and the inspirations
+of friendship commonly form a part of the early history
+of beneficent lives.</p>
+
+<p>One of Magellan's early friends was Francisco
+Serrao, who sailed with him for Malacca, a great
+mart of merchandise in the East. It was to him
+that Magellan wrote that he would meet him again
+in the East, "if not by the way of Portugal, by that
+of Spain;" words of signal import, which we have
+already quoted.</p>
+
+<p>Serrao had a very curious, romantic, and pathetic
+history. He lived in the times of the Portuguese
+Viceroys of India. He was made captain of a ship
+which sought to explore the Spice Islands, which
+were then held to be the paradise of the East.
+Cloves and nutmegs then were luxuries, and when
+brought to Portugal bore the flavor of the sun lands
+of the far-off mysterious seas.</p>
+
+<p>At Banda ships were loaded with spices. On
+sailing there Serrao suffered shipwreck and was cast
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span>
+upon a reef and found refuge on a deserted island.
+The place was a resort of pirates or wreckers. Some
+pirates sighted the wreck of the ship and sought to
+plunder the wreckage.</p>
+
+<p>"We have no ship, and the island is without food
+or water," said Serrao to his men. "Hide under the
+rock and obey me, and we will soon have a ship and
+water and food."</p>
+
+<p>The men hid among the caverns of the reef. The
+pirates landed, and left their ship for the wreckage.</p>
+
+<p>Serrao rushed through the surf, followed by his
+men, and boarded the pirates' vessel.</p>
+
+<p>The wreckers were filled with terror when they
+saw what would be their fate if left there, and they
+begged to be taken on board, and were received by
+Serrao as prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>Serrao traded for many years among the Spice
+Islands and was advanced to high positions, but was
+poisoned at last, as is supposed, by an intrigue of the
+King of Tidor.</p>
+
+<p>One of the most inspiring of Magellan's friends
+was Ruy Faleiro, who had wonderful instincts and
+a wide vision, but who became a madman. Faleiro
+was a Portuguese who, like Magellan, was out of
+favor with the court. He was an astronomer, a geographer,
+and an astrologer. He had a fiery and impulsive
+temper, but with it a passion for discovery, and
+so was drawn into Magellan's heart by gravitation.
+The two journeyed together, studied together, and
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span>
+started at about the same time for Spain. At Seville
+they met in a club of famous discoverers, students,
+and refugees.</p>
+
+<p>They had one vision in common, that there was
+a short route to the Moluccas by the way of the
+West. The route was not what they dreamed it
+to be; but there was a new way to the Spice Islands
+by the West and East, a way that probably no
+voyager from Europe had ever seen, and their
+vision was decisive of one of the greatest events&mdash;the
+circumnavigation of the world. The angle of
+vision was not true in their private meetings, nor
+had Magellan's been before they met; but another
+angle leading from it was true, and would cause
+a change of the conception of the world when poor
+Ruy Faleiro's brain was losing its hold on such
+entrancing hopes.</p>
+
+<p>"We can reach Molucca by a short voyage to the
+West," said Ruy Faleiro.</p>
+
+<p>"I am sure that I can do this, if I can have an
+expedition such as the King of Spain can give me,"
+said Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>"You must never communicate this secret to any
+man," said Ruy.</p>
+
+<p>"I will never mention the subject to any but
+you," said Magellan, "until we can act together."</p>
+
+<p>The vision of finding the East by a short passage
+to the West, involved so great a prospect of human
+progress and glory that it would not let Magellan
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span>
+rest at any time. It haunted him wherever he went.
+He began to talk about it under restraint, and
+friends came to see what was on his mind and to
+take advantage of it.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_026.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">The earliest map of the world.<br />
+By Hecatæus of Miletus (sixth century <span class="smcap">b.c.</span>).
+Probably copied in part from Anaximander, inventor of map drawing.</span></p>
+
+<p>The fiery Ruy Faleiro, when he found that his
+friend had opened their confidential secret, partly
+broke friendship with him. Magellan could only
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span>
+acknowledge his error, and say that he never meant
+in his heart to betray the secrets of his friend, the
+cosmographer.</p>
+
+<p>Faleiro dreamed on, but his mind weakened.</p>
+
+<p>The popular legend about this unhappy man was,
+that being an astrologer he cast his own horoscope,
+and found that the expedition that he hoped to command
+would be lost, and so feigned madness. This
+is only a story.</p>
+
+<p>Faleiro died in Seville about 1523.</p>
+
+<p>It would be interesting to know if he lived to
+hear of the great discovery of his old friend Magellan,
+and if he joined in the general rejoicing
+over it. It is probable that he lived to see
+the strange ways by which his countryman had
+been led, not over a short passage, but over far-distant
+seas. His was a pitiable fate; but his
+name merits honorable mention among men, who,
+like Miranda in South America, have inspired
+great deeds which they themselves could not accomplish.</p>
+
+<p>Men of vision and men of action are essential to
+each other; for many men can see what only a few
+others can perform.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan married Beatriz Barbosa about the year
+1518. He was the father of one son. His wife
+died shortly after hearing the news of his great discovery
+of the Pacific and the new way to the East.</p>
+
+<p>He was now prepared to go to Charles V, King
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span>
+of Spain, son of the demented Queen Joanna, the
+daughter of Isabella, and to lay before him a plan
+of opening a short way to the East by sailing West.
+This purpose more and more absorbed his soul&mdash;he
+himself was nothing, discovery was everything. The
+frown of Portugal no longer cast any deep shadow
+over his life; it was his mission to <i>find</i>. He heard in
+the acclaim of Columbus a prophecy of what his
+own name would one day be.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap3" id="chap3"></a>CHAPTER III.</h3>
+
+<h4>PRINCE HENRY THE NAVIGATOR AND VASCO DA GAMA.</h4>
+
+
+<p>All things follow suggestion and inspiration,
+and the discovery of the Western World owes much
+to the heart and brain of Prince Henry, called the
+Navigator. Although the son of a King, he felt that
+he was more than that&mdash;a son of Humanity. He took
+up his residence far from the pomp of courts on
+the bleak, bare, solitary promontory of Sagres, the
+sharp angle of Western Europe. Here he could see
+the sun go down on the western sea, day by day.
+Some inward genius like a haunting spirit seemed to
+beckon his thoughts toward the West.</p>
+
+<p>In view of his abode on a tall headland were the
+ruins of a Druidical temple, where Strabo tells us
+the gods used to assemble at night under the moon
+and stars. So the place was called the Sacrum
+Promontorium, and it was in this region that Prince
+Henry schooled his soul in navigation and sought
+to inspire all adventurers upon the sea. "Farther"
+was his motto, and "Farther yet!" In his solitude
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span>
+he called to him a company of restless spirits with
+a passion for discovery, and said to them all, "Farther,"
+and "Farther yet!"</p>
+
+<p>The night of the dark ages was passing, and in
+the new dawn of civilization, Prince Henry had visions
+of new ways to India, the magnificent; the
+land of gold, gems, and spices, where the sun shone
+on gardens of palms and seas of glory.</p>
+
+<p>There were no lighthouses then on the African
+coast; there were no sea charts, and the compass
+was but little known. But there were eternal stars,
+and under them were the living instincts that
+awaken genius.</p>
+
+<p>Prince Henry the Navigator was the fourth son
+of King Joao I, or John the Great, and of Queen
+Philippa, of the Roses. He was a great-grandson
+of Edward III, of England.</p>
+
+<p>Prince Henry's motto was "<i>Talent de bien faire</i>"&mdash;"talent
+of good faculty." The motto furnishes in
+brief a history of his life.</p>
+
+<p>The first fruit of Prince Henry's geographical
+studies was the discovery of the islands of Madeira;
+but there were islands beyond Madeira, and
+his restless spirit cried out in the night: "Farther!"
+and "Farther yet!"</p>
+
+<p>Cape Bojador, farther "than the farthest point
+of the earth," rose just before the supposed regions
+of sea monsters, fire, and darkness. Prince John sent
+a navigator there, and found serene seas.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span></p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_031.jpg" alt="" title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">PROGRESS OF PORTUGUESE DISCOVERY</span></p>
+
+<p>"Farther!"</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In 1446 the Prince obtained a charter of the
+Canary Islands. His ships next discovered the
+Azores. But there were lands and islands and seas
+"farther yet."</p>
+
+<p>Prince Henry died in 1463, about thirty years
+before the triumph of Columbus.</p>
+
+<p class="figright"><img src="images/illus_032.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 10pt; font-weight: bolder; ">Prince Henry the Navigator<br />
+From a drawing by Allegra Eggleston,<br /> in The Story of Columbus</span></p>
+
+<p>He was the father of modern discovery, the spirit
+of which rested not
+until the map of the
+whole world could
+be drawn. He was
+buried in a splendid
+tomb, and the pupils
+of his school of cosmography
+and navigation
+continued to
+penetrate the ocean
+farther and farther to
+the South and West.
+Vasco da Gama
+opened the ocean
+ways to India, and
+the two great navigators,
+Columbus and Magellan, owed much to the
+spirit of the Prince who left courts that he might
+found a school amid the sea desolations of St. Vincent,
+in order to inspire young sailors to venture
+always "Farther!" and "Farther yet!"</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>We must here tell you something of Vasco da
+Gama, in order that you may better understand the
+plan and purpose of Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>Take your map of the world. Before the passage
+to India was discovered by sailing around the Cape
+of Good Hope, Africa, the trade between Asia and
+Europe was carried on in this manner: There was
+a great commercial city on the southern coast of
+Arabia (Arabia Felix) called Alda, or Port Alda. It
+was a city of merchants. To this port came the ships
+from the East&mdash;China, Japan, India&mdash;laden with
+gold, silk, and spices. The merchants of Alda
+carried these goods to the Port of Suez on the
+Red Sea. Thence the merchandise was conveyed
+on camels to the Nile and to Alexandria, Egypt,
+and thence by ships to the ports of the Mediterranean.</p>
+
+<p>Vasco da Gama discovered a new way to India
+by doubling the Cape of Good Hope, and when he
+returned from that voyage all Europe rang with his
+praise. His discovery of the way to India from the
+Mediterranean by rounding Africa was one of the
+most momentous ever made. Vasco da Gama holds
+rank with Columbus in the unveiling of the mysteries
+of the ocean world.</p>
+
+<p>King John the Navigator had heard such wonderful
+tales of India that he wished to find a way
+there by water. He accordingly sent one Bartholomeu
+Diaz on an expedition with this end in view.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span>
+Diaz did not find India, but he found a cape on the
+southernmost point of Africa, which he doubled.</p>
+
+<p>So fearful were the tempests there that he called
+it the Cape of Storms.</p>
+
+<p>But King John saw that the islands of India
+lay in that direction, and he exclaimed in delight
+on hearing Diaz's narrative of the tempestuous
+place:</p>
+
+<p>"'Tis the Cape of Good Hope!" This gave the
+cape its name.</p>
+
+<p>A Jewish astrologer told Dom Manoel, King of
+Portugal, that the riches of India could yet be found
+by way of the sea. Of such a discovery the new
+King dreamed. Who should he get to undertake a
+voyage with such a purpose?</p>
+
+<p>One day, as he sat in his halls among his courtiers
+and grandees studying maps, a man of about thirty
+years, who had a noble bearing, entered an outer
+apartment. A sword hung by his side.</p>
+
+<p>The King, who had been thinking of his great
+mariners, lifted his face and said:</p>
+
+<p>"Thank God! I have found my man. Bring to
+me Vasco da Gama."</p>
+
+<p>He it was that stood in the outer hall.</p>
+
+<p>"Vasco," said the King, "I know your soul. For
+the glory of Portugal you must find India by the
+way of the sea!"</p>
+
+<p>"I am at your service, sire, while life shall last."</p>
+
+<p>"Depart in all haste."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It was March, 1497. Vasco da Gama raised his
+sails and departed from Lisbon.</p>
+
+<p class="figleft"><img src="images/illus_037.jpg" alt="" title=" " /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 10pt; font-weight: bold;">Vasco da Gama.</span></p>
+
+<p>He passed the "Cape of Good Hope," and met
+with many adventures,
+the narratives of which
+would fill a book.</p>
+
+<p>He crossed the India
+Ocean, blown pleasantly
+on by the trade winds.</p>
+
+<p>One day a loud cry
+arose:</p>
+
+<p>"Land! land!"</p>
+
+<p>The pilot came running
+to Vasco da Gama,
+and fell at his feet.</p>
+
+<p>"Captain, behold India!"</p>
+
+<p>The shores of India rose in the burning light of
+the tropic seas. Vasco da Gama saw them and fell
+upon his knees.</p>
+
+<p>Mountain rose above mountain, and hill over hill;
+then green palms and shining beaches came into
+view like scenes of enchantment.</p>
+
+<p>"That is Cananor," said the Moorish pilot; "the
+great city of Calicat is twelve leagues distant."</p>
+
+<p>They sailed over those twelve leagues of clear
+resplendent waters and came to Calicat, or Malabar.
+That day of discovery was Portugal's glory.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span></p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_038.jpg" alt="" title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">PORTUGUESE INDIES</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Calicat was a merchant city of the East, and one
+of the most famous of India. Here came Arabian
+and Egyptian merchants. It was a Mohammedan
+city, and the princes of Calicat encouraged trade
+between the Arabs and Hindoos. The city was now
+to become an emporium for the Western World.</p>
+
+<p>After many adventures in Malabar, Vasco da
+Gama cruised along the coast of India. Everything
+was wonderful, and the wonders grew.</p>
+
+<p>In September, 1499, he returned, and was received
+like a sovereign by the Portuguese King. His
+arrival was a holiday, the glory of which has lived
+in all Portuguese holidays until now.</p>
+
+<p>He was given titles of distinction. He was made
+a Viceroy of India.</p>
+
+<p>Twenty years after these events Magellan was
+destined to discover <i>another</i> way to India.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap4" id="chap4"></a>CHAPTER IV.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE ENTHUSIASTS CARRY THEIR PLANS TO THE KING.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Magellan, full of his project of finding a short
+way to the rich spicery by sailing West, now sought
+the favor of the Spanish court. Gold has ever been
+the royal want, and nobles have always had open
+ears to schemes that promised to fill the public
+treasury.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan's interesting friend Francisco Serrao,
+who had remained in the Indian possessions of the
+Portuguese, after Magellan's return, had discovered
+resources of the tropical seas of the Orient that were
+almost boundless. He had written to Magellan:</p>
+
+<p>"If you would become rich return to the Moluccas."</p>
+
+<p>This letter would be a sufficient passport to the
+nobles who had the ear of the King. He showed the
+letter to the King's ministers.</p>
+
+<p>He thought that the point of South America
+turned <i>westward</i>, as the Cape of Good Hope toward
+the East. He had an imaginary map in his mind of
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span>
+an ocean world whose shape had no real existence,
+but that answered well as a theory.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan had brought a globe from Portugal on
+which he had drawn the undiscovered world as he
+thought it existed. The strait which he had hoped
+to find was omitted on this globe in his drawings
+that no navigator might anticipate his discovery.</p>
+
+<p>Some of the ministers listened to the project with
+indifference, a few with ridicule; but as a rule Magellan
+appealed to willing ears. The ministers as a
+body agreed to commend the enterprise to the King.
+The Haros of Antwerp, the Rothschilds of the time,
+favored the expedition. So Magellan and Faleiro
+made out a petition of formal proposals which they
+desired to present to the King, and awaited the
+opportunity.</p>
+
+<p>That opportunity soon came. Charles V, son of
+Joanna, who was passing her days in solitude and
+grief on account of the loss of her husband, was on
+his way to Aragon. He was Emperor of Germany
+and King of Spain. He was a youth now; having
+been born in Ghent, February 24, 1500. He came to
+the throne of Spain in 1516, as the disordered intellect
+of his mother made her incapable of reigning.
+He was elected German Emperor in 1519.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_042.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Charles V.<br />After a painting by Titian.</span></p>
+
+<p>In his youth he had been dissolute. Seeing the
+responsibilities that he owed to the world and the
+age, he suddenly received new moral impulses and
+conquered himself, and his moral life was followed<span class="pagenum">
+<a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span>
+by a religious disposition. He received from the
+Pope the title of Roman Emperor. His powerful intellect
+subdued a great part of continental Europe
+to his will; but he became weary of the cares of
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span>
+state, retired from the world, and ended his life as
+a religious recluse.</p>
+
+<p>The young King entered Spain in triumph, but
+amid the glare of receptions his ears were not dull
+to projects for acquiring gold.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan and Faleiro, under the commendation
+of the ministry, were soon able to lay their project
+before the young grandson of the great Isabella. He
+received them in the spirit that Isabella had met
+Columbus. He approved their plans, and charged
+them to make preparations for the expedition.</p>
+
+<p>Charles entered Zaragoza in May, 1518, a youth
+of eighteen, and Magellan and Faleiro followed the
+royal train on its triumphal march in the blooming
+days of the year. They were happy men, and their
+glowing visions added to the joy of the court on its
+journey amid singing nightingales and pealing bells.</p>
+
+<p><a name="noteB"></a>The royal name signed to Magellan's commission
+was "Juana," who had been the favorite daughter
+of Queen Isabella, who had signed the commission
+of Columbus.<a href="#foot">[B]</a> This royal daughter of Aragon and
+Castile was born at Toledo, November 6, 1479. She
+was in the bloom of her girlhood when the news of
+the return of Columbus thrilled Spain.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>She was a girl of ardent affections; a lover of
+music; not beautiful, but charming in manner; and
+at the age of eighteen was betrothed to Philip of
+the Low Countries, called Philip the Handsome.</p>
+
+<p>The wedding of this daughter of Isabella was to
+be celebrated in Flanders by fêtes of unusual splendor.
+A fleet of one hundred and thirty vessels prepared
+to bear the bride to her handsome Prince.
+The ships were under the command of the chivalrous
+admiral of Castile.</p>
+
+<p>Juana took leave of her mother at the end of
+August, 1496, and embarked at the port of Laredo.
+A more interesting bride under more joyous circumstances
+had seldom gone forth to meet a bridegroom.</p>
+
+<p>The sails covered the sea under the flags of the
+glory of Spain. They drifted away amid music and
+shoutings, but the salvos of the guns had hardly
+died away before terrible storms arose. The fleet
+was shattered, and many of the vessels were lost.</p>
+
+<p>The young bride herself arrived in Flanders
+safely, and her marriage with the archduke followed
+at Lille.</p>
+
+<p>When Queen Isabella heard of the birth of
+Charles, she recalled that it fell on the day of Matthias,
+and exclaimed, "<i>Sors cecidit super Mathiam</i>"&mdash;"the
+lot fell upon Matthias."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>She predicted that the infant would become the
+King of Spain.</p>
+
+<p class="figright"><img src="images/illus_045.jpg" alt="" title=" " /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 10pt; font-weight: bolder;">Ferdinand and Isabella.<br />From a coin.</span></p>
+
+<p>Philip and Juana were summoned to Spain to
+meet the people over whom it then seemed probable
+that they would soon
+be called to reign.
+They entered France
+in 1501, attended by
+Flemish nobles, and
+wherever they went
+was a holiday. There
+were weeks of splendid
+fêtes in honor
+of the progress.</p>
+
+<p>When Ferdinand
+and Isabella heard
+of the arrival of
+Philip and Juana in
+Spain they hastened
+to Toledo to meet
+them. Here Philip and his Queen received the allegiance
+of the Cortes.</p>
+
+<p>But Philip was a gay Prince, and he loved the
+dissipations of Flanders more than his wife or the
+interests of his prospective Spanish possessions. So
+he left his wife, and returned to Flanders.</p>
+
+<p>The conduct of the handsome Prince drove Juana
+mad. She loved him so fondly that she thought only
+of him, and sat in silence day after day with her
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span>
+eyes fixed on the ground, as an historian says, "equally
+regardless of herself, her future subjects, and her
+afflicted parents."</p>
+
+<p>She subsequently joined Philip at Burgos. Here
+Philip died of fever after overexertion at a game of
+ball. Juana never left his bedside, or shed a tear.
+Her grief obliterated nearly all things in life, and
+she was dumb. Her only happiness now, except in
+music, was to be with his dead body.</p>
+
+<p>She removed her husband's remains to Santa
+Clara.</p>
+
+<p>The body was placed on a magnificent car, and
+was accompanied in the long way to the tomb by a
+train of nobles and priests. Juana never left it.
+She would not allow it to be moved by day. She
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"A widow who has lost the sun of her soul
+should never expose herself to the light of day!"</p>
+
+<p>Wherever the procession halted, she ordered new
+funeral ceremonies. She forbade nuns to approach
+the body. Finding the coffin had been carried to a
+nunnery at a stage of the journey, she had it removed
+to the open fields, where she watched by
+it, and caused the embalmed body to be revealed to
+her by torches. She had a tomb made for the remains
+in sight of her palace windows in Santa
+Clara, and she watched over it in silence for forty-seven
+years, taking little interest in any other thing.</p>
+
+<p>But as she survived Ferdinand and Isabella, her
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span>
+name for a time was affixed to royal commissions,
+and so Magellan sailed in the service of Charles
+under the signature of Juana, who was silently
+watching over her husband's tomb, in the hope that
+the Prince would one day rise again.</p>
+
+<p>We relate this narrative to give a view of the
+events of the period, and for the same reason we
+must speak of another
+eminent person
+who acted in the
+place of the Queen in
+her unhappy state of
+mind.</p>
+
+<p class="figright"><img src="images/illus_047.jpg" alt="" title=" " /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 10pt; font-weight: bold;">Cardinal Ximenes.<br />After a painting by Velasquez</span></p>
+
+<p>This was the great
+political genius of
+the time, the virtuous
+and benevolent
+Cardinal Ximenes,
+statesman, archbishop,
+the heart of the
+people and the conscience
+of the Church.
+He was born of a
+humble family in Castile in 1487. He was educated
+in Rome. His character and learning were such
+that Queen Isabella chose him for her confessor, and
+made him Archbishop of Toledo, with the approval
+of the Pope.</p>
+
+<p>On the death of Philip in 1505, he was made<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span>
+regent for Juana. Ferdinand named Ximenes regent
+of Spain on his deathbed, until Charles V
+should return from Flanders to Spain.</p>
+
+<p>The regency of Ximenes was one of honor and
+glory. He himself lived humbly and simply amid
+all his associations of pomp and power.</p>
+
+<p>He maintained thirty poor persons daily at his
+own cost, and gave half of his income to charity.
+He excited the jealousy of Charles V at last, and
+lost his power in consequence. He lived to extreme
+age, and left a character that Spain has ever loved
+to hold in honor.</p>
+
+<p>Such was the political condition of Spain in the
+early days of Magellan.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap5" id="chap5"></a>CHAPTER V.</h3>
+
+<h4>ABOUT THE HAPPY ITALIAN WHO WISHED TO SEE<br />
+THE WORLD.&mdash;BEAUTIFUL SEVILLE!</h4>
+
+
+<p>We should have known but little of the adventures
+of Magellan, but for Antonia Pigafetta, Chevalier,
+and Knight of Rhodes.</p>
+
+<p>He was a young Italian of a susceptible heart and
+happy imagination.</p>
+
+<p>He came wandering to Barcelona, Spain, in the
+generation that remembered Columbus, and the
+splendid scenes that welcomed the return of Columbus
+on the field of Sante Fé. He must have heard
+the enthralling description of those golden days&mdash;he
+could not be a Columbus; but, if he could win
+the good will of Magellan, he might go after Columbus
+and see what no Europeans had seen.</p>
+
+<p>So he wandered the streets of Barcelona and
+heard the tales of the events that occurred when
+the "Viceroy of the Isles" was received there by
+Isabella.</p>
+
+<p>What days those had been! The march of Columbus
+through Spain to meet Isabella at Sante Fé, was
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span>
+such as had a demigod appeared on earth. Spain
+was thrilled. The world knew no night. The trumpets
+of heralds rent the air, and men's hearts swelled
+high at the tales of the golden empires that Colon
+had added to Aragon and Castile. Alas! they did
+not know that there are riches which do not enrich,
+and that it is only the gold that does good that
+ennobles.</p>
+
+<p>As Columbus approached with his glittering
+cavaliers songs rent the air, whose words have been
+interpreted&mdash;</p>
+
+
+<p style="margin-left:25%; ">"Thy name, O Fernando!<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 4%; ">Through all earth shall be sounded,</span><br />
+<span>Columbus has triumphed,</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 4%; ">His foes are confounded!"</span>
+</p>
+
+
+<p>or</p>
+
+
+<p style="margin-left: 25%; ">"Thy name, Isabella,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 4% ;">Through all earth shall be sounded,</span><br />
+<span>Columbus has triumphed,</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 4%; ">His foes are confounded!"</span>
+</p>
+
+
+<p><a name="ill51"></a>To Aragon and Castile Columbus had "given a
+new world." Peals of golden horns shook the
+delighted cities, where balconies overflowed with
+flowers.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_051.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Barcelona</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>His reception at Barcelona by the King and
+Queen had been made inconceivably splendid:</p>
+
+
+<p style="margin-left: 5em">
+<span style="margin-left: 7em;">"That was a glorious day</span><br />
+That dawned on Barcelona. Banners filled<br />
+The thronging towers, the old bells rung, and blasts<br />
+Of lordly trumpets seemed to reach the sky<br />
+Cerulean. All Spain had gathered there,<br />
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span>
+And waited there his coming; Castilian knights,<br />
+Gay cavaliers, hidalgos young, and e'en the old<br />
+Puissant grandees of far Aragon,<br />
+With glittering mail and waving plumes and all<br />
+The peasant multitude with bannerets<br />
+And charms and flowers.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 7em;">"Beneath pavilions</span><br />
+Of brocades of gold, the Court had met.<br />
+The dual crowns of Leon old and proud Castile<br />
+There waited him, the peasant mariner.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 7em;">"The heralds waited</span><br />
+Near the open gates; the minstrels young and fair<br />
+Upon the tapestries and arrased walls,<br />
+And everywhere from all the happy provinces<br />
+The wandering troubadours.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 7em;">"Afar was heard</span><br />
+A cry, a long acclaim. Afar was seen<br />
+A proud and stately steed with nodding plumes,<br />
+Bridled with gold, whose rider stately rode,<br />
+And still afar a long and sinuous train<br />
+Of silvery cavaliers. A shout arose,<br />
+And all the city, all the vales and hills,<br />
+With acclamations rung.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 7em;">"He came, the Genoese,</span><br />
+With reverent look and calm and lofty mien,<br />
+And saw the wondering eyes and heard the cries,<br />
+And trumpet peals, as one who followed still<br />
+Some Guide unseen.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 7em;">"Before his steed</span><br />
+Crowned Indians marched with lowly faces,<br />
+And wondered at the new world that they saw;<br />
+Gay parrots screamed from their gold-circled arms,<br />
+And from their crests swept airy plumes. The sun<br />
+Shone full in splendor on the scene, and here<br />
+The old and new world met!"
+</p>
+
+<p>The young Italian Chevalier, Pigafetta, Knight of
+Rhodes, visited the scenes that his own countryman
+had made immortal by his voyage.</p>
+
+<p>He thought of the plumed Indians and of the
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span>
+birds of splendid plumage that Columbus had
+brought back.</p>
+
+<p>He heard much of Magellan, the "new Columbus."
+Why might he not go out upon unknown seas
+with him and discover new races, and bring back
+with him tropic spices, birds, and flowers?</p>
+
+<p>He journeyed to Seville and there met Magellan.
+He entered into the dreams of the new navigator.
+He asked Magellan to let him sail with him.</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you wish to enter upon such a hazardous
+undertaking?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am desirous of seeing the wonderful things of
+the ocean!"</p>
+
+<p>Magellan saw it was so. The Spaniards might
+distrust him, the Portuguese be jealous of him, but
+here was a man who would have no race prejudices&mdash;a
+man after his own heart, whom he could
+trust.</p>
+
+<p>"You wish to see the wonders of the ocean
+world?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and I can write, and whatever I may do,
+and wherever I may go, I will always be true to
+you&mdash;the heart of Pigafetta will always be loyal to
+the Admiral!"</p>
+
+<p>"My Italian Chevalier, you may embark with me
+to see the wonders of the ocean world. You shall
+follow my lantern."</p>
+
+<p>From that hour the young Italian lived in anticipation.
+What new lands would he see, what palm
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span>
+islands, what gigantic men and strange birds, and
+inhabitants of the sea?</p>
+
+<p>The young Knight of Rhodes had spoken truly,
+whatever light might fail, his heart would ever be
+true to the Admiral.</p>
+
+<p>So the Knight embarked with the rude crew to
+follow, in the silences of uncharted seas, the lantern
+of Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>He composed on the voyage a narrative for Villiers
+de l'Isle Adams, Grand Master of Rhodes. By
+this narrative we are still able to follow in fancy
+the lantern of Magellan through the straits that
+now bear the name of Magellan, to the newly discovered
+Pacific, and around the world.</p>
+
+<p>His character was as spirited as Magellan's was
+noble.</p>
+
+<p>We will sail with him in our voyage around the
+world, for <i>he</i> went all the way and bore the news
+of Magellan's triumphs to Seville again.</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p>Beautiful Seville! We must glance at the city
+here. She was the pride of Spain in those times
+when Spain dazzled the world. The Hispal of the
+Ph&oelig;nicians, the Hispales of the Roman conquest,
+and the Seville of the Moors! Her glory had arisen
+in the twilight of history, and had grown with the
+advancement of the race.</p>
+
+<p>She was indeed beautiful at the time when Magellan
+was preparing for the sea. The Moorish
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span>
+period had passed leaving her rich in arts and treasures,
+and splendid architecture.</p>
+
+<p>Situated on the banks of the Guadalquivir, circular
+in shape and surrounded with more than a hundred
+Moorish towers, and about ten miles in circumference,
+she rivaled
+the cities
+of Europe and of
+the Orient.</p>
+
+<p class="figright"><img src="images/illus_055.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 10pt; font-weight: bold;">The Giralda.</span></p>
+
+<p>The great cathedral
+was being
+completed at
+that time, a mountain
+of art, arising
+from its plain
+of marble. It was
+four hundred and
+thirty-one feet
+long, and three
+hundred and fifteen
+feet wide,
+with solemn and
+grand arches
+lighted by the
+finest windows in Spain, perhaps the most enchanting
+lights through which the sun ever shone.
+The altars were enriched by the wealth of discovery.</p>
+
+<p>Over this mountain of gold, marbles, and gems
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span>
+gleamed the Giralda, or weather vane, in the form
+of a statue, three hundred and fifty feet high.</p>
+
+<p>Seville at this time was a city of churches. To
+these, sailors resorted while waiting for an expedition
+to complete its preparations for the sea, for most
+of them were good Catholics, and such as hoped for
+God's favor in the enterprise upon which they were
+about to enter.</p>
+
+<p>Here, too, was the old Moorish palace, the Alcázar,
+with its delicate lacework like the walls of
+the Alhambra, but richer in color. In this palace
+was the Hall of the Ambassadors, one of the most
+enchanting apartments ever created by the genius
+of man.</p>
+
+<p>In the latter dream of Moorish fancy have passed
+aching hearts, as well as those filled with wonder
+and delight. Here Pedro the Cruel received one of
+the kings of Granada, and murdered him with his
+own hand, to rob him of the jewels that adorned his
+person.</p>
+
+<p>The tales of Pedro the Cruel haunted the city at
+this time.</p>
+
+<p>We are told that this monarch used to go about
+the city in disguise.</p>
+
+<p>One night he went out thus to serenade a beautiful
+lady. As he approached the balcony with his
+guitar where the lady lived, he saw another man
+there, who had come for the same purpose. The
+rival musician filled him with rage, and the King
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span>
+rushed upon him and struck him down and killed
+him.</p>
+
+<p>He fled away. He reasoned that as he was in
+disguise no one could know him.</p>
+
+<p>There was an old woman who kept a bakery
+across the way from the house where the noble lady
+lived. She was looking out of her window at the
+time of the murder. She saw the act, and got a
+view of the terrible face of the royal musician as
+he was fleeing away.</p>
+
+<p>"That was the King himself," said the old bake
+woman. "By my soul, that was the King!"</p>
+
+<p>The next day the news of the murder filled the
+city. The murdered man was a person of rank and
+importance. The people were alarmed and indignant.</p>
+
+<p>"Who did the deed?" was a question that arose
+to every lip.</p>
+
+<p>The King, cruel as he was, did not wish to be
+suspected of being a street assassin. So he issued
+a proclamation in this form:</p>
+
+<p>"Unless the alcalde (judge) of Seville shall
+discover the murderer of the gallant musician
+within three days, the alcalde shall lose his
+head."</p>
+
+<p>The city judge began to make great exertions
+to discover the murderer.</p>
+
+<p>The old bake woman came to him and said:</p>
+
+<p>"I know who did the deed. But silence, silence!
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span>
+I saw it with my own eyes, but we must be still. It
+was the King himself!"</p>
+
+<p>The alcalde dared not accuse the King, and yet
+he must save his own head. What was he to do?</p>
+
+<p>He made an image of the King. He then went to
+the palace.</p>
+
+<p>"O King! I have found the murderer. I have
+brought him here to receive sentence."</p>
+
+<p>The King was glad that a suspected person had
+been found, so that the public thought might be
+directed to the suspect.</p>
+
+<p>"What shall be done with him?" asked the
+alcalde.</p>
+
+<p>"What! He who would slay a musician about to
+serenade a noble lady?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, your Majesty."</p>
+
+<p>"What shall be done with him? I condemn him
+to death. Bring him before me."</p>
+
+<p>The alcalde brought in the image of the King,
+and uncovered it.</p>
+
+<p>The King beheld himself.</p>
+
+<p>"I will save <i>your</i> head," said the King, and the
+alcalde went thoughtfully away.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap6" id="chap6"></a>CHAPTER VI.</h3>
+
+<h4>ENEMIES.&mdash;ESTEBAN GORMEZ.</h4>
+
+
+<p>No man living could better know what he needed
+for such a stupendous and unprecedented undertaking
+than Magellan, who had already been to the
+spicery of the Orient in the service of Albuquerque,
+the Portuguese Viceroy. Under the royal sanction,
+the dockyards of Seville were at his command. He
+repaired to Seville, and was there looked upon as
+one destined to harvest the wealth of the Indies.</p>
+
+<p>But as soon as it became known in Portugal that
+Magellan was to lead a new expedition of discovery,
+the mistake that the King had made in rejecting
+the proposal of the lame soldier, to whom he had refused
+pension honors, became apparent. The court
+saw what this rejected man of positive purpose and
+invaluable knowledge of navigation might accomplish.
+Should his dreams be prophetic and his projects
+prove successful, the glory would go to Spain,
+and the King would be held responsible for another
+mistake like that which his predecessor had made
+in the case of Columbus.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>What must the court of Portugal do? The hammers
+were flying in Seville on the ships loading for
+the voyage. Magellan was making up his crews.
+Spain had faith in him, and he had faith in himself;
+never a man had more.</p>
+
+<p>Portugal must prevent the expedition. The
+Crown must appeal to Magellan to withdraw from
+it. The King must ask young King Charles to dismiss
+Magellan as an act of royal courtesy. If these
+efforts were not successful, it was argued that the
+expedition must be arrested by force, or Magellan
+must be murdered by secret spies of the court.</p>
+
+<p>The fleet preparing was to consist of five ships
+with ample equipment. These were named the
+Trinidad, the San Antonio, of one hundred and
+twenty Spanish tons each; the Concepcion, of ninety
+Spanish tons; the Victoria, of eighty-five tons; and
+the Santiago, of seventy-five. The Victoria, the ship
+of destiny, was to circumnavigate the globe.</p>
+
+<p>And now while the hammers were at work, the
+dull King of Portugal began to arouse himself to
+arrest the plan, and the court, seeing his spirit,
+acted with him.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In the bright days in Zaragoza Magellan had
+been warned that he was in danger of being assassinated.
+But he did not take alarm. As his project
+rose into public view at Seville he must have known
+that he was surrounded by spies, but he did not heed
+them; he kept right on, marching forward as it
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span>
+were after the inspiration that had taken possession
+of his soul.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_061.jpg" alt="" title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">BEHAIM'S GLOBE. 1492.</span></p>
+
+<p>There was an India House in Seville, composed
+of merchants, and these were favorable to the expedition.
+In Spain everything favored Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>Aluaro da Costa was the Portuguese minister to
+the court of Spain. He plotted against Magellan, and
+sought an interview with young Charles in order to
+induce him to eliminate the Portuguese from the expedition.
+Charles was about to become a brother-in-law
+to Dom Manoel, and Aluaro da Costa could
+appeal to the King in this cause in many ways.</p>
+
+<p>Full of diplomacy and craft, he met the King
+who had to weigh the prospect of gold and glory
+against this personal argument. Gold outweighed
+the family considerations, for Charles in his young
+days was a man of powerful ambitions.</p>
+
+<p>Aluaro da Costa wrote to Dom Manoel a graphic
+account of this interview. It shows how politic
+ministers of state were in those days. We can not
+give the reader a clearer view of some of the obstacles
+against which Magellan had to contend in
+those perilous days in Spain than by citing Aluaro's
+account to Dom Manoel of his interview with young
+Charles V in his intrigue against Magellan:</p>
+
+<p>"<span class="smcap">Sire</span>: Concerning Ferdinand Magellan's affair,
+how much I have done and how I have labored,
+God knows, as I have written you at length; and
+now I have spoken upon the subject very strongly
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span>
+to the King, putting before him all the inconveniences
+that in this case may arise, and also representing
+to him what an ugly matter it was, and
+how unusual for one King to receive the subjects
+of another King, his friend, contrary to his wish,
+a thing unheard of among cavaliers, and accounted
+both ill-judged and ill-seeming. Yet I had
+just put your Highness and your Highness's possessions
+at his service in Valladolid at the moment
+that, he was harboring these persons against your
+will. I begged him to consider that this was not
+the time to offend your Highness, the more so in an
+affair which was of so little importance and so uncertain;
+and that he would have plenty of subjects
+of his own and men to make discoveries when the
+time came, without availing himself of those malcontents
+of your Highness, whom your Highness
+could not fail to believe likely to labor more for
+your disservice than for anything else; also that
+his Highness had had until now so much to do in
+discovering his own kingdoms and dominions, and in
+settling them, that he ought not to turn his attention
+to these new affairs, from which dissensions and
+other matters, which may well be dispensed with,
+may result.</p>
+
+<p><a name="noteC"></a>"I also presented to him the bad appearance
+that this would have at the very moment of the
+marriage&mdash;the ratification of friendship and affection.
+And also that it seemed to me that your
+Highness would much regret to learn that these
+men asked leave of him to return,<a href="#foot">[C]</a> and that he did
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span>
+not grant it, the which are two faults&mdash;the receiving
+them contrary to your desire, and the retaining
+them contrary to their own. And I begged of
+him, both for his own and for your Highness's sake,
+that he would do one of two things: either permit
+them to go, or put off the affair for this year, by
+which he would not lose much; and means might
+be taken whereby he might be obliged, and your
+Highness might not be offended, as you would be
+were this scheme carried out.</p>
+
+<p>"He was so surprised, sire, at what I told him,
+that I also was surprised; but he replied to me with
+the best words in the world, saying that on no
+account did he wish to offend your Highness, and
+many other good words; and he suggested that I
+should speak to the Cardinal, and confide the whole
+matter to him.</p>
+
+<p>"May the Lord increase the life and dominions
+of your Highness to his holy service. From Saragoca,
+Tuesday night, the 28th day of September.</p>
+
+
+<p style="margin-left: 3em">
+"I kiss the hands of your Highness,<br />
+<br />
+<span style="padding-left: 12em" class="smcap">"ALUARO DA COSTA.</span>"<br />
+</p>
+
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p>Court intrigue against Magellan did not avail.
+There was one thing statecraft could do. It could
+set spies on Magellan on board his own ships. This
+it succeeded in doing.</p>
+
+<p>There was in Spain at this time a Portuguese
+adventurer and navigator by the name of Estevan
+or Esteban Gormez&mdash;Stephen Gormez.</p>
+
+<p>He was a student of navigation, and was restless
+to follow the examples of Columbus and Vasco
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span>
+da Gama. He had applied to the court of Spain&mdash;probably
+to Cardinal Ximenes, for a commission to
+go on a voyage of discovery and he had received a
+favorable answer, and was preparing to embark,
+when Magellan appeared at court and promised to
+find the Spice Islands by way of South America.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan's scheme was so much larger and definite
+than that of Gormez that the court canceled
+its favors to the lesser plans, and Gormez had to
+abandon his prospects of sailing under the royal
+favors of Spain.</p>
+
+<p>The eyes of Spain were now fixed on Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>"I will find a way to the Spice Islands by South
+America or by the West," said Magellan to the ministers
+of the King, "or you may have my head."</p>
+
+<p>These were bold words. Magellan had not only
+been to the Spice Islands, but he had gone out on
+the very voyage that discovered some of them. He
+had behaved heroically on the voyage. So his application
+to the court superseded the plan of Gormez
+and the latter sunk out of sight.</p>
+
+<p>In his despondency at the failure of his plans,
+Gormez came to Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>"My countryman," said Gormez, "your schemes
+have supplanted mine and turned my ships into air.
+I was the first to plan a voyage to the Moluccas out
+of the wake of hurricanes and monsoons. I do not
+feel that I have been treated rightly. Something
+surely is due to me."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Magellan was a man of generous impulses. He
+saw that Gormez had a case for moral appeal.</p>
+
+<p>"My friend," said he, "you shall have a place in
+my expedition."</p>
+
+<p>He could but think that the inspiration and
+knowledge of navigation of his countryman would
+be useful to him, and he pitied him for his disappointment,
+knowing how he himself would feel were
+his plans to be set aside.</p>
+
+<p>So Gormez, the Portuguese, was made the pilot
+of the Antonio.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan, had he reflected, must have seen that
+this man would carry with him envy and jealousy,
+passions that are poisons. But Estefano, or Esteban,
+or Stephen Gormez, took his place at the
+pilot house of the Antonio to follow the lantern of
+Magellan, but the hurt in his heart at being superseded
+never healed.</p>
+
+<p>On the ships also was one Juan de Carthagena,
+captain of the Concepcion, a spy, and one of the
+"malapots" of the expedition. He was called the
+<i>reedor</i>, or inspector. He inspected Magellan, and
+Magellan inspected him, as we shall see.</p>
+
+<p>And now the flags arose in the clear air, and the
+joyful fleet cleared the Guadalquivir and leaped into
+the arms of the open sea, amid the acclamations of
+gay grandees and a happy people.</p>
+
+<p>It was September 20th when the anchors were
+lifted, of which probably one was destined to come
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span>
+back in triumph after an immortal voyage that encompassed
+the earth, and gave to Spain a new
+ocean.</p>
+
+<p>And the King of Portugal ordered the coat of
+arms to be torn down from the house of Magellan,
+as we have pictured at the beginning of our narrative.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap7" id="chap7"></a>CHAPTER VII.</h3>
+
+<h4>"MAROONED."</h4>
+
+
+<p>The expedition moved down its western way,
+over the track of Columbus. It had left poor Ruy
+Faleiro behind&mdash;he who had seen the progress of it
+all in the fitful light of a disordered vision. He had
+not relinquished his own high aims. He hoped to
+follow Magellan with an expedition of his own.</p>
+
+<p>The ships were furnished with "castles," fore and
+aft; they carried gay pennons and were richly stored.
+The artillery comprised sixty-two culverins and
+smaller ordnance. Five thousand or more pounds
+of powder were shut up in the magazines, and a
+large provision was made for trading with the
+natives&mdash;looking glasses for women, velvets, knives,
+and ivory ornaments, and twenty thousand bells.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan's ship bore a lantern, swung high in
+the air amid the thickly corded rigging, which the
+other ships were to keep in view in the night. What
+a history had this lantern! It gleamed out on the
+night track of a new world, a pillar of fire that
+encompassed the earth as in the orbit of a star.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The fleet had fifteen days of good weather and
+passed Cape Verde Islands, running along the African
+coast.</p>
+
+<p>But the fleet carried with it disloyal hearts. The
+Portuguese prejudice against Magellan sailed with
+it. The Spanish sailors distrusted the loyalty of Magellan
+to Spain.</p>
+
+<p>The commander was a man of great heart, chivalrous,
+and noble, but he could be firm when there
+arose an occasion for it.</p>
+
+<p>After leaving Teneriffe Magellan altered his
+course.</p>
+
+<p>Juan de Carthagena, captain of the San Antonio,
+"the inspector" and a spy, demanded of Magellan
+why he had done so.</p>
+
+<p>"Sir," said Magellan, "you are to follow my flag
+by day and my lantern by night, and to ask me no
+further questions."</p>
+
+<p>Carthagena demanded that Magellan should report
+his plans to him. Finding that the Admiral
+was bent on conducting his own expedition, he
+began to act sullenly, and to disobey orders.</p>
+
+<p>Again the captain of the San Antonio demanded
+of Magellan that he should communicate his orders
+in regard to the course of steerage to him. He did
+this by virtue of his office as inspector. He showed
+a very haughty and disloyal spirit, and if this were
+not to be checked, the success of the expedition
+would be imperilled. He was abetted by Pedro
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span>
+Sanches, a priest. Magellan saw treason already
+brewing, and he determined to stamp it out at once.</p>
+
+<p>He went to Carthagena, and laid his hands
+on him.</p>
+
+<p>"Captain, you are my prisoner."</p>
+
+<p>The astonished captain cried out to his men:</p>
+
+<p>"Unhand me&mdash;seize Magellan!"</p>
+
+<p>Carthagena had been a priest, and he had great
+personal influence, but the men did not obey him.</p>
+
+<p>"Lead him to the stocks and secure him there,"
+ordered Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>The order was obeyed. The fallen inspector was
+committed to the charge of the Captain of the Victoria,
+and another officer was given charge of the
+San Antonio.</p>
+
+<p>"When we reach land Juan de Carthagena shall
+be marooned," was the sentence imposed upon the
+inspector. A like sentence was imposed upon Sanches.</p>
+
+<p>It touched the hearts of the crews to hear this
+sentence. What would become of the two priests,
+were it to be executed? Would they fall prey to
+the natives, or perhaps win the hearts of the people
+and be made chiefs among them?</p>
+
+<p>There was a pilot on board the ship who sympathized
+with the mutineers, but who had close lips,
+Esteban Gormez, of whom we have spoken. Were
+the two mutineers to be marooned he would be glad
+to rescue them.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>He had been discontented since the day that his
+own plans for an expedition had been superseded by
+those of Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>His discontentment had grown. He became critical
+as the fleet sailed on. Every day reminded him
+of what he might have done, if he could have only
+secured the opportunity.</p>
+
+<p>A disloyal heart in any enterprise is a very perilous
+influence. A wooden horse in Troy is more dangerous
+than an army outside.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan in Gormez had a subtle foe, and that
+foe was his own countryman.</p>
+
+<p>This man probably could not brook to see his
+rival add the domains of the sea to the crowns of
+Juana and of Charles, though he himself had sought
+to do the same thing. Magnanimous he could not be.
+Discovery for the sake of discovery had little meaning
+for him, but only discovery for his own advancement
+and glory.</p>
+
+<p>He became jealous of Mesquita, Magellan's<a name="ill72"></a>
+cousin, now master of the Antonio, who is thought
+to have advised severe measures to suppress conspiracy.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_072.jpg" alt="Night after night the ships followed." title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Night after night the ships followed Magellan's lantern.</span></p>
+
+<p>Night after night he sat down under the moon
+and stars, and brooded over his fancied neglect, and
+dreamed. Night after night the ships followed the
+lantern of Magellan, and the wonders of the sea
+grew; but to him it were better that no discoveries
+should be made than that such achievements were
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span>
+to go to the glory of Spain through the pilotage of
+Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>Discontent grows; jealousy grows as one broods
+over fancied wrongs, and sees the prospects of a
+rival's success. So it was with Gormez. In his
+heart he did not wish the expedition to succeed. He
+was ambitious to lead such an enterprise himself,
+which he also did, at last, sailing along Massachusetts
+Bay and giving it its first name.</p>
+
+<p>When Gormez had heard that the two disloyal
+men were to be marooned, his feelings rose against
+Magellan. That they deserved their sentence he
+well knew, but they were opposed to Magellan, as
+was his own heart. He would have been glad to
+have saved them from the execution of their sentence,
+but he did not know how to do it.</p>
+
+<p>"I will rescue them if ever I can," he thought.
+"This expedition is not for the glory of Portugal."</p>
+
+<p>The ships sailed on, bearing the two conspirators
+to some place where they could be marooned.</p>
+
+<p>Let us turn from this dark scene to one of a more
+hopeful spirit.</p>
+
+<p>One day, as we may picture the scene, the
+sea lay unruffled like a mirror. The ships drifted
+near each other, and night came on after a sudden
+twilight, and the stars seemed like liquid lights shot
+forth or let down from some ethereal fountain. The
+Southern Cross shone so clearly as to uplift the eyes
+of the sailors. The ships were becalmed.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Boats began to ply between the ships, and the
+officers of the Trinity, Santiago, Victoria, and Concepcion
+assembled under the awning of the San
+Antonio, Mesquita's ship, of one hundred and
+twenty tons.</p>
+
+<p>Mesquita, as we have said, was a cousin of
+Magellan, and so the Antonio seemed a friendly
+ship.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan sat down by his cousin. The lantern
+was going out; its force was spent.</p>
+
+<p>"We must get a new kind of lantern," said Magellan
+to his cousin, "and a code of signal lights.
+We need a lantern that is something more steady
+and durable than a faggot of wood."</p>
+
+<p>"I have here a new farol," he continued, the men
+listening with intent ears. "Here it is, and I
+wonder, my sailors, how far your eyes will follow
+it."</p>
+
+<p>"All loyal hearts will follow it," said Mesquita,
+"wherever it may go."</p>
+
+<p>Gormez frowned. His heart was bitter.</p>
+
+<p>There rose up an officer named Del Cano, and
+stood hat in hand. All eyes were fixed upon him.</p>
+
+<p>"May it please you, Admiral," he said, "to receive
+a word from me. I will follow the new farol
+wherever it may lead me. I have ceased to count
+my own life in this cause."</p>
+
+<p>Gormez frowned again.</p>
+
+<p>"Del Cano," said the Admiral, "I believe in you.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span>
+You have a true heart. If I should fall see that
+this farol goes back to Spain!"</p>
+
+<p>Del Cano bowed.</p>
+
+<p class="figleft"><img src="images/illus_076.jpg" alt="" title=" " /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 10pt; font-weight: bold;">Arms granted to Sebastian Del Cano,<br />Captain of the Victoria,
+the first vessel<br />that circumnavigated the globe.</span></p>
+
+<p>Magellan showed the new lantern to the officers.
+It was made of
+beaten reeds that had
+been soaked in water,
+and dried in the sun. It
+would hold light long,
+and carry it strongly
+and steadily.</p>
+
+<p>"All the ships must
+have these new farols,"
+said he, "and I must
+teach you how to signal
+by them."</p>
+
+<p>He stood up. The
+moon was rising, and
+the dusky, purple air became
+luminous.</p>
+
+<p>He held the farol in
+his hand.</p>
+
+<p>"Two lights," he said, "shall mean for the ship
+to tack.</p>
+
+<p>"Three lights that the sails shall be lowered.
+Four, that they shall stop.</p>
+
+<p>"Five lights, or more, that we have discovered
+land, when the flagship shall discharge a bombard.
+Follow my lantern always; you can trust it
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span>
+wherever it may fare. My farol shall be my
+star!"</p>
+
+<p>The men sat there long. There sprung up a
+breeze at last, and the sea began to ripple in the
+moon.</p>
+
+<p>Most expeditions that have made successful
+achievements have carried men of great hope. Such
+a man was Del Cano. He was loyal to the heart of
+Magellan; and happy is any leader who has such a
+companion, whose steel rings true.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan hung out the farol. The sails were
+spread, and the fleet passed on over the solitary
+ocean.</p>
+
+<p>Whither?</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap8" id="chap8"></a>CHAPTER VIII.</h3>
+
+<h4>"THE WONDERS OF  NEW LANDS."&mdash;PIGAFETTA'S
+TALES OF HIS ADVENTURES WITH MAGELLAN.&mdash;THE
+STORY OF "THE FOUNTAIN TREE."&mdash;"ST.
+ELMO'S FIRE."</h4>
+
+
+<p>The ships moved on, bearing the hopeful Del
+Cano, the frowning Gormez, the two prisoners, and
+the happy Italian Pigafetta.</p>
+
+<p>Our next chapters will be a series of wonder tales<a name="ill79"></a>
+which reveal the South Temperate Zone and its inhabitants
+as they appeared to the young and susceptible
+Italian, Pigafetta, nearly four hundred years
+ago.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_079.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Interior of the Alcázar of Seville.</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Pigafetta, as we have shown, desired to accompany
+Magellan that he might "see the wonders of
+the new lands." He saw them indeed, and he
+painted them with his pen so vividly that they will
+always live. We get our first views of the strange
+inhabitants of the Southern regions of the New
+World from him. We are to follow his narratives, as
+printed for the Hakluyt Society, London, making
+some omissions, and changing its form in part, hoping
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span>
+thereby to render the text more clear. We
+closely follow the spirit of events. Pigafetta addresses
+his narrative "To the very illustrious and
+very excellent Lord Philip de Villiers Lisleaden,
+Grand Master of Rhodes," of whom we have spoken.</p>
+
+<p>He says, by way of introduction:</p>
+
+<p>"Finding myself in Spain in the year of the
+nativity of our Lord, 1519, at the court of the most
+serene King of the Romans (Charles V), and learning
+there of the great and awful things of the ocean
+world, I desired to make a voyage to unknown seas,
+and to see with my own eyes some of the wonderful
+things of which I had heard.</p>
+
+<p>"I heard that there was in the city of Seville
+an armada (armade) of five ships, which were ready
+to perform a long voyage in order to find the shortest
+way to the Islands of Moluco (Molucca) from
+whence came the spices. The Captain General of
+this armada was Ferdinand de Magagleanes (Magellan),
+a Portuguese gentleman, who had made several
+voyages on the ocean. He was an honorable
+man. So I set out from Barcelona, where the Emperor
+was, and traveled by land to the said city of
+Seville, and secured a place in the expedition.</p>
+
+<p>"The Captain General published ordinances for
+the guidance of the voyage.</p>
+
+<p>"He willed that the vessel on which he himself
+was should go before the other vessels, and that the
+others should keep in sight of it. Therefore he hung
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span>
+by night over the deck a torch or faggot of burning
+wood which he called a farol (lantern), which
+burned all night, so that the ships might not lose
+sight of his own.</p>
+
+<p>"He arranged to set other lights as signals in the
+night. When he wished to make a tack on account
+of a change of weather he set two lights. Three
+lights signified "faster." Four lights signified to
+stop and turn. When he discovered a rock or land,
+it was to be signalled by other lights.</p>
+
+<p>"He ordered that three watches should be kept
+at night.</p>
+
+<p><a name="noteD"></a>"On Monday, St. Lawrence Day, August 10th,
+the five ships with the crews to the number of two
+hundred and thirty-seven<a href="#foot">[D]</a> set sail from the noble
+city of Seville, amid the firing of artillery and came
+to the end of the river Guadalcavir (Guadalquivir).
+We stopped near the Cape St. Vinconet to make
+further provisions for the voyage.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>"We went to hear mass on shore. There the Captain
+commanded that all the men should confess
+before going any further.</p>
+
+<p>"On Tuesday, September 20th, we set sail from
+St. Lucar.</p>
+
+<p>"We came to Canaria (Canaries)."</p>
+
+<p>This account repeats in a different way a part
+of the facts we have given.</p>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span></p>
+<p>Here the young Italian relates his first story,
+which is substantially as follows:</p>
+
+
+<p class="center">THE FOUNTAIN TREE.</p>
+
+<p>"Among the isles of the Canaria there is one
+which is very wonderful. There is not to be found
+a single drop of water which flows from any fountain
+or river.</p>
+
+<p>"But in this rainless land at the hour of midday,
+every day, there descends a cloud from the sky
+which envelops a large tree which grows on this
+island.</p>
+
+<p>"The cloud falls upon the leaves of the tree, when
+a great abundance of water distills from the leaves.
+The tree flows, and soon at the foot of it there
+gathers a fountain.</p>
+
+<p>"The people of the island come to drink of the
+water. The animals and the birds refresh themselves
+there."</p>
+
+<p>The story is true so far as relates to the fountain
+tree. But that a cloud comes down from Heaven
+at midday to refresh it, is not an exact statement
+of the manner in which this tree furnishes water to
+the sterile island. The young Italian writer describes
+the tree as he saw it, and as it seemed to be. The tree
+that supplies water as from a natural fountain may
+still be found.</p>
+
+<p>With such a tree to begin his researches on the sea,
+Pigafetta must have been impatient to proceed along
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span>
+the marvelous ocean way. All the world was to him
+as he saw it; he seldom stopped to inquire if appearances
+were true.</p>
+
+<p>With men like Del Cano on board, who had ears
+for a marvelous story, his life in the early part of
+the voyage must have been a very happy one.
+Wonder followed wonder....</p>
+
+<p>"Monday, the 3d of October," says the interesting
+Italian, "we set sail making the course auster,
+which the Levantine mariners call siroc (southeast)
+entering into the ocean sea. We passed Cape Verde
+and navigated by the coast of Guinea of Ethiopia,
+where there is a mountain called Sierra Leona. A
+rain fell, and the storm lasted sixty days."</p>
+
+<p>They came to waters full of sharks, which had
+terrible teeth, and which ate all the people whom
+they found in the sea, alive or dead. These were
+caught by a hook of iron.</p>
+
+
+<p class="center">ST. ELMO'S FIRE.</p>
+
+<p>Here good St. Anseline met the ships; in the
+fancy of the mariners of the time, this airy saint
+appeared to favored ships in the night, and fair
+weather always followed the saintly apparition. He
+came in a robe of fire, and stood and shone on the
+top of the high masts or on the spars. The sailors
+hailed him with joy, as one sent from Heaven.
+Happy was the ship on the tropic sea upon whose
+rigging the form of good St. Anseline appeared in
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span>
+the night, and especially in the night of cloud and
+storm!</p>
+
+<p>To the joy of all the ships good St. Anseline came
+down one night to the fleet of Magellan. The poetical
+Italian tells the story in this way:</p>
+
+<p>"During these storms, the body of St. Anseline
+appeared to us several times.</p>
+
+<p>"One night among others he came when it was
+very dark on account of bad weather. He came in
+the form of a fire lighted at the summit of the main
+mast, and remained there near two hours and a half.</p>
+
+<p>"This comforted us greatly, for we were in tears,
+looking for the hour when we should perish.</p>
+
+<p>"When the holy light was going away from us
+it shed forth so great a brilliancy in our eyes that
+we were like people blinded for near a quarter of an
+hour. We called out for mercy.</p>
+
+<p>"Nobody expected to escape from the storm.</p>
+
+<p>"It is to be noted that all and as many times as
+the light which represents St. Anseline shows itself
+upon a vessel which is in a storm at sea, that vessel
+never is lost.</p>
+
+<p>"As soon as this light had departed the sea grew
+calmer and the wings of divers kinds of birds appeared."</p>
+
+<p>Beneficent St. Anseline who manifested his presence
+by illuminations in the mast and spars in
+equatorial waters! The beautiful illusion has long
+been explained and dispelled. It is but an electric
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span>
+fire at the end of atmospheric disturbances. But
+it is usually a correct prophecy of fair skies and
+smooth seas. It is now called St. Elmo's Fire.</p>
+
+<p>If ever there was an expedition that the saint of
+the mariners might favor it would seem to be this.</p>
+
+<p>One can almost envy the pious Italian his imagination
+in the clearing tropic night.</p>
+
+<p>His next wonders were the sea birds, of which
+there were flocks and clouds, and with them appeared
+flying fish.</p>
+
+<p>The ships were now off the coasts of Brazil and
+stopped at Verzim.</p>
+
+<p>The people of the Brazilian Verzim were accustomed
+to paint themselves "by fire." We do not
+clearly understand how this painting "by fire" was
+done. The art of scorching has perished with them.
+But besides these indelible marks, the men had three
+holes in their lower lips, and hung in them, after the
+manner of earrings, small round ornamental stones,
+about a finger in length. The men did not shave,
+for they <i>plucked out</i> their beard.</p>
+
+<p>Their only clothing was a circle of parrot
+feathers. How <i>terribly</i> gay they must have looked!
+And yet such customs were hardly more ridiculous
+than those of later times, and more civilized countries&mdash;earrings,
+beauty patches, plume, and snuffboxes.</p>
+
+<p>It was the land of parrots. The most beautiful
+and intelligent parrots still come from Brazil. Columbus
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span>
+saw parrots in "clouds" over the islands of
+the Antilles.</p>
+
+<p>Parrots were not expensive in these equatorial
+forests at this time. "The natives," says Pigafetta,
+"give eight or ten parrots for a looking glass," and
+as a looking glass would multiply the picture of parrots
+indefinitely the Verzimans must have thought
+the exchange a marvelous bargain.</p>
+
+<p>If Brazilian parrots were cheap and so charming
+as likely to become an embarrassment of riches, so
+were the little cat monkeys which delighted the men.
+These little creatures, which looked like miniature
+lions, still delight the visitors to the coast of Brazil,
+but they shiver up when brought to the northern
+atmospheres and piteously cry for the home lands
+of the sun again.</p>
+
+<p>Very curious birds began to excite the surprise of
+the voyagers, among such as had a "beak like a
+spoon," and "no tongue."</p>
+
+<p>The markets of the new land displayed another
+commodity far more surprising than birds or animals,
+young slaves, which were offered for sale by
+their own families. So a family who had many children
+was rich. It cost a hatchet to buy one of these,
+and for a hatchet and a knife one might buy <i>two</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The people made bread of the "marrow of trees,"
+and carried victuals in baskets on their heads.</p>
+
+<p>Masses were said for the crews on shore, and the
+natives knelt down with the men.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The people were so pleased with their visitors
+that they built a common house for them.</p>
+
+<p>A pleasing illusion had made the sailors most
+welcome here.</p>
+
+<p>It had not rained in Verzim for two months
+when the expedition landed. The people were looking
+to the heavens for mercy day by day. But the
+copper sun rose as often in a clear sky.</p>
+
+<p>At last Magellan's sails appeared in the burning
+air. The sight of the sails was followed by that
+of clouds.</p>
+
+<p>The people thought that the fleet had brought
+the clouds with them.</p>
+
+<p>"They come from Heaven," said they of the adventurers.</p>
+
+<p>So when they were exhorted to accept Christianity,
+they at once fell down before the uplifted crosses
+and believed the teachings of the sea heroes who
+could command the clouds and bring rain to the
+parched land.</p>
+
+<p>They thought the ships were gods and the small
+boats the children of such beings, and when the
+latter approached the ships they imagined that they
+were children come home to their fathers or
+mothers.</p>
+
+<p>The ships remained in this delightful country of
+Verzim thirteen weeks. Pigafetta and Del Cano
+must have thought that life here was ideal. What
+scenes would follow?</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap9" id="chap9"></a>CHAPTER IX.</h3>
+
+<h4>PINEAPPLES, POTATOES, VERY OLD PEOPLE.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Other things were there on the wonderful Brazilian
+coast. There the mariners traded in them
+and were refreshed with a delicious fruit, called
+pique&mdash;pineapples.</p>
+
+<p>They came to the knowledge here of a nutritious
+ground fruit called battate. "This," says our
+Italian, "has the taste of a chestnut and is the
+length of a shuttle." These ground fruits were
+potatoes.</p>
+
+<p>The people here seem to have been very liberal in
+trading.</p>
+
+<p>They would give six fowls for a knife&mdash;well they
+might do so, as they used stone implements.</p>
+
+<p>They gave <i>two</i> geese for a comb&mdash;here they were
+both generous and wise.</p>
+
+<p>They gave as great a quantity of fish as ten men
+could eat for a pair of scissors.</p>
+
+<p>And for a bell, they gave a whole basket full of
+potatoes (battate).</p>
+
+<p>Marvelous indeed as was this same country of
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span>
+Verzim, it also abounded in the conditions and atmospheres
+of long life.</p>
+
+<p>"Some of these people," says our Italian chronicler,
+"live to be a hundred or a hundred and twenty,
+or a hundred and forty or more. They wear little
+clothing."</p>
+
+<p>Which speaks well for pineapples, potatoes, and
+easy dress.</p>
+
+<p>"They sleep on cotton nets, which are fastened
+on large timbers, and stretch from one end of the
+house to another."</p>
+
+<p>It is good to sleep in ample ventilation. We do
+not wonder that many of the people passed a hundred
+years.</p>
+
+<p>The boats of these people were as simple as their
+open houses.</p>
+
+<p>"These are not made with iron instruments, for
+there are none, but with stones."</p>
+
+<p>The canoes were dug out of one long tree&mdash;some
+giant growth of the forest which would convey from
+thirty to forty men. The paddles for these canoes
+resembled shovels. The rowers were usually black
+men.</p>
+
+<p>The people ate human flesh, but only at feasts of
+triumph. They then served up their enemies.</p>
+
+<p>Pigafetta draws the following grewsome picture:</p>
+
+<p>"They do not eat up the whole body of a man
+whom they take prisoner; they eat him bit by bit,
+and for fear that he should be spoiled, they cut him
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span>
+up into pieces, which they set to dry before the
+chimney. They eat this day by day, so as to keep in
+mind the memory of their enemy."</p>
+
+<p>This was indeed the sweet food of revenge, and
+as barbarous as it seems, the spirit of revenge secretly
+cherished is hardly less unworthy when it finds
+expression in words that are bitter, if not carnal.</p>
+
+<p>The region abounded with bright birds, yet with
+all these delights, and pineapples and potatoes,
+there fell great rains. So there were shadows in
+the sunlands.</p>
+
+<p>We can fancy Pigafetta relating his discoveries
+on the shore to a susceptible spirit, like Del Cano,
+and writing an account of them day by day in his
+immortal journal.</p>
+
+<p>These strange adventures by sea and on land
+which so greatly interested the Italian Knight Pigafetta,
+our historian, do not seem to have greatly
+impressed the mind of Magellan. The lands had
+been sighted before. His whole soul was bent on
+one purpose&mdash;not on rediscovery, but on discovery.
+He was sailing now where other keels had been. It
+was his purpose to find new ways for the world to
+follow over unknown seas. His heart could find no
+full satisfaction but in water courses that sails had
+never swept; a new way to the Moluccas that no
+ship had ever broken.</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding the friendly spirit and liberal
+patronage of the Emperor, he still stood against the
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span>
+world. He represented a cast-out name. His own
+countrymen, on his own ships in the long delays on
+the voyage to unknown seas, were plotting against
+him.</p>
+
+<p>Let us recall in fancy a night scene as the ships
+lay on the waters of the meridional world. Magellan
+sits alone in one of the castles of the ship and looks
+out on the phosphorescent sea. The stars above
+him shine in a clear splendor, and are reflected in
+the sea. The sky seems to be in the waters; the
+waters are a mirror of the sky. Among the clear
+stars the Southern Cross, always vivid, here rises
+high. Magellan lifts to it his eye, and feels the religious
+inspiration of the suggestion. He is a son
+of the Church, and he holds that all discoveries are
+to be made for the glory of the Cross.</p>
+
+<p>On the distant shores palms rise in armies in
+the dusky air. The shores are silent. When arose
+the tall people that inhabited them?</p>
+
+<p>Magellan dreams: he wonders at himself, at his
+inward commission; at his cast-out name and great
+opportunity.</p>
+
+<p>One of his trusty friends comes to him; he is a
+Spaniard and his disquieting words break the serenity
+of the scene.</p>
+
+<p>"Captain General, it hurts my soul to say it,
+but there is disloyalty on the ships&mdash;it is everywhere."</p>
+
+<p>"I seem to feel the atmospheres of it," said Magellan.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span>
+"Why should it be? The sea and the sky
+promise us success. Who are disloyal?"</p>
+
+<p>"Captain General, they are your own countrymen!"</p>
+
+<p>"And why do they plot treason under the Cross
+of discovery?"</p>
+
+<p>"Captain General, if the ocean open new ways
+before you, and you should achieve all of which you
+dream, they will have little share in the glory; you
+are facing stormy waters and perils unknown, not
+for Portugal, but for Spain."</p>
+
+<p>"Not for Spain alone, nor for Portugal, but for
+the glory of the Cross, and the good of all the world.
+A divine will leads me, and sustains me, and directs
+me. I am not seeking gold or fame or any personal
+advantage; my soul goes forth to reveal the wonders
+and the benevolence of Providence to the heart of
+the whole world. I go alone, and feel the loneliness
+of my lot. I left all that I had to make this expedition.
+It is my purpose to discover unknown seas.
+Joy, rapture, and recompense would come to me,
+beyond wealth or fame, could my eyes be the first
+to see a new ocean world, and to carry back the
+knowledge of it to all nations. What happiness
+would it be to me to ride on uncharted tides! My
+friend, you are loyal to me?"</p>
+
+<p>"Captain General, I am loyal, and the Spanish
+sailors are loyal; it is your own men who plot in
+dark corners to bring your plans to naught."
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In the shadow of one of the tall castles of another
+ship sit a band of idle men. They are Portuguese.</p>
+
+<p>One of them, who seems to lead the minds of the
+others, is whittling, and after a long silence says:</p>
+
+<p>"We do not know where we are going, and
+wherever we are going, we are Portuguese and are
+slaves to Spain."</p>
+
+<p>"Ay, ay," returned an old Portuguese sailor,
+"and when we go back again, should that ever be,
+the profit to us will be little at the India House."</p>
+
+<p>"Right," answered a number of voices, and one
+ventured to say:</p>
+
+<p>"Magellan, after all, may be mad, like his old
+companion, the astronomer. Both came from the
+same place in Portugal."</p>
+
+<p>Some of the officers had schemes of their own.</p>
+
+<p>But the ships crept on and on, along the Brazilian
+coast, where the flag of Spain and the farol guided
+them in the track of the Admiral they followed.
+Night after night the lantern of the flagship gleamed
+in the air, moving toward cooler waters under the
+Southern Cross.</p>
+
+<p>And in Magellan's heart was a single purpose,
+and he anticipated the joy of a great discovery, as
+a revelation that would answer the prophetic light
+that shone like a star in his own spiritual vision.
+On, and on!</p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap10" id="chap10"></a>CHAPTER X.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE FIRST GIANT.&mdash;THE ISLANDS OF GEESE AND
+GOSLINGS.&mdash;THE DANCING GIANTS.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The narrative of Pigafetta, the Knight of Rhodes,
+has much curious lore in regard to giants. At a
+place on the coast, formerly called Cape St. Mary,
+the first of these giants appeared.</p>
+
+<p>He was a leader of a tribe "who ate human
+flesh." The lively Knight of Rhodes informs us
+that this man, who towered above his fellows, "had
+a voice like a bull."</p>
+
+<p>He came to one of the captains' ships and asked&mdash;of
+course in sign language; for a man may have a
+"voice like a bull" and yet fail to be understood in
+cannibal tongues&mdash;if he might come on board the
+ship and bring his fellows with him.</p>
+
+<p>He left a quantity of goods on the shore. While
+he was negotiating at the ships, his people on the
+shore, who seem to have been unusually wise and
+prudent, began to remove the stores of goods from
+exposure to danger to a kind of castle at some distance.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The officers of the ships grew inpatient when
+they saw the tempting goods being thus removed.
+So they landed a hundred men to recover the goods,
+which they seemed to have deemed theirs after the
+"right of discovery."</p>
+
+<p>The men began to run after the provident natives,
+when they became greatly surprised. The natives
+seemed to <i>fly</i> over the ground, and leave them behind
+at a humiliating distance.</p>
+
+<p>"They did more in one step than we could do at
+a bound," says Pigafetta, Knight of Rhodes.</p>
+
+<p>The giant people here showed that there was
+need to approach them with caution. Some time
+before, these "Canibali" had captured a Spanish
+sea captain and sixty men, who had landed and pastured
+inland to make discoveries. They ate them
+all&mdash;a fearful feast!</p>
+
+<p>Our voyagers probably had no desire to go too
+far inland in view of such a warning; so they returned
+and proceeded on their course toward the
+antarctic pole.</p>
+
+<p>They discovered two small islands, which had
+more agreeable inhabitants than the land of Cape
+St. Mary. "These islands," says our good Knight
+Pigafetta, "were full of geese and goslings and sea
+wolves." He adds: "We loaded five ships with them
+for an hour."</p>
+
+<p>The Knight has also left us the following
+curious picture of the birds, which must have
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span>
+been very much surprised at being so rudely disturbed:</p>
+
+<p>"The geese are black, and have feathers all over
+the body of the same size and shape; and they do not
+fly but live on fish, and they were so fat that we
+did not pluck them, but skinned them. They have
+beaks like that of a crow.</p>
+
+<p>"The sea wolves of these islands are of many
+colors and of the size and thickness of a calf, and
+have a head like a calf, and ears small and round.
+They have teeth but no legs, but feet joining close
+to the body, which resemble a human hand. They
+have small nails to their feet, and skin between the
+fingers like geese.</p>
+
+<p>"If these animals could run they would be very
+bad and cruel, but they do not stir from the waters,
+and swim and live upon fish."</p>
+
+<p>This seems to be a very admirable description of
+a sea wolf, O Knight of Rhodes!</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>A great storm came down upon the ships here.
+But, marvelous to relate, the fiery body of good St.
+Anselmo or Anseline "appeared to us, and immediately
+the storm ceased."</p>
+
+<p>The fleet sailed away again and came to Port St.
+Julian, the true land of the giants, of which place our
+Knight has some very interesting stories to tell.</p>
+
+<p>The fleet entered the Port of St. Julian. It was
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span>
+winter, and for a long time no human beings appeared.</p>
+
+
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_097.jpg" alt="" title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">The world according to the Ptolemy of 1548.</span></p>
+
+<p>Suddenly one day a most extraordinary sight met
+the eyes of some of the adventurers. Our Knight's
+description of this being is very vivid. He says:</p>
+
+<p>"One day, without any one's expecting it, we saw
+a giant who was on the shore of the sea, quite naked,
+and was dancing and leaping and singing, and, while
+singing, he put sand and dust on his head."
+The Captain of one of the ships, who first saw this
+extraordinary creature, said to one of the sailors:</p>
+
+<p>"Go and meet him. He dances and sings as a
+sign of friendship. You must do the same. Beckon
+him to me."</p>
+
+<p>The Captain himself was on a little island.</p>
+
+<p>The scene that followed must have been comical
+indeed.</p>
+
+<p>The giant danced and sung and sprinkled his
+head with sand. The sailor did the same, danced
+and sang, and the two approached each other.</p>
+
+<p>So the giant was made to think that he was
+among friends. The sailor led him on to the island,
+where he met the Captain.</p>
+
+<p>But the lively giant now began to be afraid in
+the presence of a new people. He seemed to wish
+to ask them who they were and whence they came.
+Then an answer to this question came to him. He
+looked up to the sky and pointed upward with one
+finger, saying by signs:</p>
+
+<p>"Did you come down from Heaven?"</p>
+
+<p>"He was so tall," says our descriptive Knight,
+"that the tallest of us only came up to his waist."
+He was probably hardly taller than many of his
+race. Falkner, in his account of Patagonia (1774),
+says that he saw men there seven feet and a half
+high.</p>
+
+<p>Of this dancing giant our historian gives a further
+description in lively and interesting colors:</p>
+
+<p>"He had a large face painted red all around, and
+around his eyes were rings of yellow, and he had
+two hearts painted on his cheeks. He had but little
+hair on the top of his head, which was painted white.</p>
+
+
+<p><a name="ill99"></a>"When he was brought before the Captain, he
+had thrown over him the skin of a certain beast,
+which skin was very carefully sewed."</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_099.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">The dancing giant</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The skin was that of a guanaco, a kind of llama.</p>
+
+<p>Our historian thus describes the guanaco:</p>
+
+<p>"This beast has its head and ears of the size of
+a mule, and the neck and body of the fashion of a
+camel, the legs of a deer, and the tail of a horse,
+and it neighs like a horse. There are great numbers
+of these animals in the same place."</p>
+
+<p>Patagonia is the land of these strange animals,
+which are still found there, and are hunted by Indians
+who lie upon the ground with drawn bows.
+The animal has great curiosity, and he draws near
+this living snare and is killed. When tame he is an
+interesting companion, but if angered he suddenly
+emits a great quantity of offensive liquid from his
+nose, like a half bucket of water, which he throws
+upon the offender. He is the South American
+camel.</p>
+
+<p>This giant when he made himself ready to meet
+the adventurers had shoes of leather or skins, and
+carried a bow made of the "gut of a beast" and a
+bundle of cane arrows feathered, at the end of
+which were small white stones.</p>
+
+<p>"The Captain caused food and drink to be given
+to him.</p>
+
+<p>"Then the crew began to show him some of the
+presents they had brought, among them a looking-glass."
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When the giant saw himself in the glass he was
+filled with wonder. It was as though his own ghost
+had appeared to him. There were men behind him
+curious to see how he would be affected. He leaped
+back with such force as to tumble them over. They
+were but pigmies to him.</p>
+
+<p>The Captain now gave the giant two bells, a mirror,
+a comb, and beads, and sent him back to the
+shore.</p>
+
+<p>One of the giants of the country saw him coming
+back, ran to the habitation of the giants, and
+summoned the giant people to the shore to meet
+him. They came, almost naked, leaping and singing,
+and pointing upward to Heaven. What a sight
+it must have been!</p>
+
+<p>The women were laden with goods. The sailors
+beckoned them to the ships to trade.</p>
+
+<p>Queerly enough, the women brought with them
+a baby or little guanaco, which they led by a string.
+Our historian learned that when these giants wished
+to capture the old guanacos or camels they fastened
+one of the little guanacos to a bush, and the old ones
+came to the bush to play with it, and so became an
+easy prey.</p>
+
+<p>"Six days afterward, our people going to cut
+wood," writes the Knight, "saw another giant, who
+raised his hands toward Heaven.</p>
+
+<p>"When the Captain General came to know of it,
+he sent to fetch him with his ship's boat, and brought
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span>
+him to one of the little islands in the port. This
+giant was of a better disposition than the other, and
+was a gracious and amiable person, he loved to
+dance and leap. When he leaped, he caused the
+earth to sink to a palm's depth at the place where
+his feet touched."</p>
+
+<p>The good giant remained for a time with the
+adventurers. They gave him the name of John.
+They learned him to pronounce the name of Jesus.</p>
+
+<p>"Say Pater Noster," said they.</p>
+
+<p>"Pater Noster," said the giant.</p>
+
+<p>"Say Ave Maria," said the men.</p>
+
+<p>"Ave Maria," said the susceptible giant.</p>
+
+<p>They made him presents when he went away,
+among them some of the many tinkling bells.</p>
+
+<p>"We must capture some of these people," said
+the Captain, "and take them to Spain for wonders."</p>
+
+<p>So the explorers began to study how to secure
+some interesting specimens of these tall people, to
+excite the wonder of the people of Spain.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap11" id="chap11"></a>CHAPTER XI.</h3>
+
+<h4>CAPTURING A GIANT.&mdash;MAGELLAN'S DECISION.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The attempts to capture wild giants greatly
+interested Pigafetta.</p>
+
+<p>Our historian says that it was "done by gentle
+and cunning means, for otherwise they would have
+done a hurt to some of our men."</p>
+
+<p>One day some sailors saw four giants hidden in
+some bushes, and they were unarmed. They
+brought these into the power of the Captain. Two
+of them were young, and such as would excite admiration
+anywhere for their noble development.</p>
+
+<p>They gave these two lusty young Herculeses as
+many knives, mirrors, bells, and trinkets as they
+could hold in their hands, and while the delighted
+youths were thus abounding in riches, the Captain
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"Now show them the iron fetters."</p>
+
+<p>The two youths could but wonder at these when
+they were brought.</p>
+
+<p>The Captain ordered that the fetters be presented
+to them.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>But their hands were already full. What could
+they do with them? Where could they put them?</p>
+
+<p>The Captain signified to them that he would ornament
+their feet with the fetters. To this they consented.</p>
+
+<p>So the fetters were put on the feet of each of
+them, like necklaces or rings, but when the young
+giants saw a blacksmith bring a hammer and rivet
+the fetters, they began to be distrustful and presently
+greatly agitated. They tried to walk, but they
+could not move.</p>
+
+<p>Our historian thus describes their fury when they
+saw that they were helplessly bound:</p>
+
+<p>"Nevertheless when they saw the trick which
+had been played on them they began to be enraged,
+and to foam like bulls, crying out to the <i>devil</i> to help
+them." We do not see why our Knight should have
+taken this view of the case; we would think that
+two human beings who had been so treacherously
+deceived, might have been regarded as appealing to
+the Deity of justice.</p>
+
+<p>"The hands of the other two giants were bound,"
+says the original narrative, "but it was with great
+difficulty; then the Captain sent them back on shore,
+with nine of his men to conduct them, and to bring
+the wife of one of those who had remained in irons,
+because he regretted her greatly." This last touch
+gives us a very favorable view of this young giant.</p>
+
+<p>But on being conducted away, one of the two
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span>
+giants who were to be liberated, untied his hands
+and escaped. As soon as he found that he was
+free, his feet were picked up nimbly indeed. He
+flew, as it were, his long strides leaving his late
+captors far behind him. He had no heart to trust
+Europeans again. He rushed to his native town,
+but he found only the women there, who must
+have been greatly alarmed; the men had gone to
+hunt.</p>
+
+<p>He rushed after the hunters to tell them how his
+companions had been betrayed.</p>
+
+<p>What became of the other giant whose hands
+were bound? He struggled, too, to break the cords,
+seeing which, one of the men struck him on the
+head. He became quiet when he saw that he was
+helpless, and led the men to the giant's town where
+the women and children were.</p>
+
+<p>The men concluded to pass the night there, as it
+was near night and everything there looked harmless
+and inviting.</p>
+
+<p>But during the night the other giant who had
+gone to meet the hunters returned with his companions.
+These saw the bruised head of the giant
+who had also been bound, and warned the women
+who began to run. We are told that the youngest
+"ran faster than the biggest" and that the men
+"ran faster than horses," at which we can not
+wonder. The fleeing giant shot one of the men from
+the ships, and he was buried there on shore. The
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span>
+poor giant in irons who had lamented for his wife
+probably never saw the giantess again.</p>
+
+<p>The methods of treating sickness in the town of
+the giants were curious. For an emetic one ran a
+stick down his throat. For a headache, one cut a
+gash on the forehead, not unlike the old method of
+bleeding. The philosophy of this latter treatment
+was interesting&mdash;blood did not remain with pain,
+and pain departed with blood&mdash;quite true; white
+people have advanced theories as conclusive.</p>
+
+<p>"When one of them dies," says our Knight, "ten
+devils appear and dance around the dead man." One
+of the poor giants who was forced to remain on
+board said he had seen devils with horns, and hair
+that fell to their feet, who spouted fire. There
+seems to be the color of the European imagination
+in this statement.</p>
+
+<p>The giants lived on raw meat, thistles, and sweet
+root, and one of them drank a "bucket of water" at
+a time.</p>
+
+<p>The expedition remained at St. Julian five
+months, and acquired much information about the
+country from the captive giants with whom they
+learned to talk by sign language.</p>
+
+<p>They here set up a cross on a mountain and took
+possession of the country in the name of the King of
+Spain. They called the signal elevation where they
+planted the cross the Mount of Christ.</p>
+
+<p>The primitive people of the shores of Brazil and
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span>
+Patagonia delighted in exciting the wonder of their
+visitors. Many of these people who thought that
+the Europeans had come down from the sky, where
+they conceived all life must be wonderful indeed,
+liked to show them some of the feats that the people
+of the earth could do. The people who came down
+from the sky they reasoned had great wisdom in
+sailing the seas, but they were not giants. They
+could trail a lantern along the sea in the night air
+in some unaccountable way, but they did not know
+how to run with flying feet on the land or how to
+wing arrows with unerring aim into the sky and sea.</p>
+
+<p>One day there came from a company of the primitive
+people, a champion in an art of which the Europeans
+could have never heard. They had seen these
+people run, leap, and vault with almost magic power,
+but they had never seen one who could make a tube
+of himself.</p>
+
+<p>This new champion approached the men in the
+usual way, inviting attention. He carried in his
+hand an arrow which was a cubit and a half long.</p>
+
+<p>He tilted it, opened his great mouth to receive
+it, dropped it into his throat, when, amid muscular
+contortions, it began to descend. The sailors
+watched him with amazement as it went down. It
+disappeared at last, having, as we are told, descended
+to the "bottom of his stomach." It seemed
+to cause him no pain.</p>
+
+<p>Presently the quiver began to appear again. The
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span>
+long arrow slowly rose out of the human tube which
+the man had made of himself, and dropped into his
+hand at last, the whole being performed by muscular
+movement.</p>
+
+<p>He must have been delighted at the sensation
+which this mental control over the muscles of digestion
+had produced. It was less strange that the
+arrow should have gone down than that it should
+have come up again.</p>
+
+<p>Such feats as these entertained the sailors from
+time to time when they were on shore. Pigafetta
+was now seeing the "wonders of the world" indeed.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan's mind was given to the more serious
+problems of the voyage.</p>
+
+<p>The Antarctic pole star now rose to his view. It
+was cold. Magellan saw that the voyage would be
+likely to last long.</p>
+
+<p>Not only the Portuguese came to distrust him,
+but some of the Spanish sailors caught the infection
+of the deleterious atmosphere. They reasoned
+differently from the Portuguese.</p>
+
+<p>"The Admiral is a native of Portugal," said they,
+"and though the Portuguese court rejected him, he
+will be sure in the end to be true to his own people
+and King. He will never allow the glory of his discoveries
+to go to Spain."</p>
+
+<p>Some of them came to him to say that the wind
+blew cold, that the sea was full of perils, that nothing
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span>
+but disaster could come by pushing on into the
+sea where they were tending.</p>
+
+<p>"Turn south," said they.</p>
+
+<p>The answer of Magellan was royal and loyal. We
+give it in what, from what was reported of it, must
+be in his own thought, and very nearly his own
+words.</p>
+
+<p>"Comrades, my course was laid down by Cæsar
+(the King) himself. I&mdash;will&mdash;not&mdash;depart&mdash;from&mdash;it&mdash;in&mdash;any&mdash;degree.
+I will open to Cæsar an unknown world."</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap12" id="chap12"></a>CHAPTER XII.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE MUTINY AT PORT JULIAN.&mdash;THE STRAITS.&mdash;1519.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Days of mutiny came in the cold waters.</p>
+
+<p>The spirit of disloyalty that had found expression
+in the inspector broke out anew at Port St.
+Julian. It spread through the officers and crews of
+three of the ships. These caused to be published the
+resolution that they would sail no farther.</p>
+
+<p>"You are leading us to destruction," said the
+mutineers.</p>
+
+<p>Luis de Mendoza, Captain of the Victoria, the
+treasurer of the expedition, was a leader of the
+mutiny. Another disturbing spirit was Gasper de
+Queixada, Captain of the Concepcion.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan, of the kind heart, had, as we have seen,
+the resolution to meet emergencies. This expedition
+was his life. It must not be opposed, hindered,
+or thwarted. He lived in his purpose. He must
+stamp out the mutiny. He no more used gentle and
+courteous words. He thundered his will.</p>
+
+<p>One day Ambrosia Fernandez, his constable,
+came to him, and said:<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Three crews are ready to mutiny, to force you
+to go back."</p>
+
+<p>Magellan saw that he must make the leaders of
+these ships his prisoners, or that he would become
+theirs.</p>
+
+<p>"Constable," he said, "pick out sixty trusty men
+and arm them well. Go with them on board the
+treasurer's ship, and arrest Mendoza and lay him
+dead on the deck."</p>
+
+<p>The fleet was moored in line. It was flood tide,
+and Mendoza's ship rode astern of Magellan's, and
+the ship of Queixada, ahead.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan prepared his own crew to face the consequences
+of a tragedy should one occur. He ordered
+his hawser to be attached to the cable, and called
+his crew to arms.</p>
+
+<p>When the flood tide was at its height, Fernandez,
+the constable, prepared to execute his order.</p>
+
+<p>He appeared before the ship of the mutinous Mendoza,
+and asked to be received on board.</p>
+
+<p>"Back to your own ship," said the mutineer. "I
+command the Victoria."</p>
+
+<p>"But we are few against many," said the constable,
+"and I have a message from the Admiral
+which I must deliver."</p>
+
+<p>He was helped on board the Victoria.</p>
+
+<p>His feet had no sooner touched the deck than he
+seized Mendoza.</p>
+
+<p>"I arrest you in the name of the Emperor."
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The armed men that the constable had left on the
+boat rushed on board.</p>
+
+<p>The crew of the Victoria, stood aghast. They
+saw the power of the Admiral's mind.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan brought his ship alongside the Victoria.</p>
+
+<p>He led his armed crew on board the Victoria,
+and halted before a terrible scene. Mendoza had
+been stabbed by the constable, and the crew of the
+Victoria plead for mercy, and promised to be loyal
+to the Admiral.</p>
+
+<p>In this hour of tragedy and terror Magellan bore
+his ship around to Queixada's, and made the officers
+and crew of the Concepcion his prisoners. The leaders
+of the mutiny were executed. It was a necessity.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan caused also the sentence he had imposed
+on the inspector and his accomplice to be
+carried out here.</p>
+
+<p>Carthagena and Sanches were led from their
+prison to the shore.</p>
+
+<p>As the sails were being lifted to depart, they
+were marooned&mdash;left with some provisions, among
+which were some bottles of wine, on the desert
+shore.</p>
+
+<p>There were hearts that pitied them as the ships
+sailed away. There was <i>one</i> who plotted to rescue
+them. It was Gormez.</p>
+
+<p>They left them some biscuits with the bottles of
+wine.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"It is the last bread they will ever eat," said their
+companions.</p>
+
+<p>"And the last wine that they will ever drink,"
+said a loyal priest on board.</p>
+
+<p>But there was one on board that shook his head.</p>
+
+<p>If he could have his will the two would eat bread
+and drink wine again in the convents of beautiful
+Seville.</p>
+
+<p>The execution of the disloyal Spaniards again
+awakened the jealousy of Gormez. He probably
+began to plan about this time to separate the Antonio
+from the expedition, and lead her back to Spain.
+His heart was with the inspector and friar far away
+on the desolate shore.</p>
+
+<p>The ships sailed away, and the marooned priests
+saw them disappear.</p>
+
+<p>"They were cast aside for opposing a madman,"
+reasoned Gormez. "Magellan is no fit leader of an
+expedition. If I had full command of the Antonio,
+I would rescue the inspector, if I were to find him
+alive."</p>
+
+<p>But he could not take the Antonio back while
+Mesquita, Magellan's loyal cousin, was in command.
+Had he breathed a breath of disloyalty in the presence
+of this Portuguese, he might have himself been
+deposed from his position and marooned, as had
+been the inspector and the friar.</p>
+
+<p>A dark plot began to form in the pilot's mind.
+If he could incite the crew against Mesquita in some
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span>
+hour of peril, he might cause him to be imprisoned
+on his own ship, and then he could succeed to the
+command, and take the Antonio back to Spain.</p>
+
+<p>And he would also endeavor to rescue the inspector
+and the friend of the inspector who had
+been marooned. If he could rescue them and take
+them back with him to Spain, they would be powerful
+witnesses for him against Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>Gormez now waited his opportunity. A jealous
+man seeks for a principle of life to ease his conscience
+and justify evil deeds. Gormez had two
+principles to sustain him in his disloyalty. The one
+was that he could lead a better expedition, and the
+other the merciful rescue of his two companions
+who had been marooned for the same opinions that
+he had from the first carried in his heart. So calling
+treachery, loyalty and sympathy, he awaited an
+hour favorable to his plan.</p>
+
+<p>If he could return to Spain he would offer his
+services to Portugal or to Spain to lead an expedition
+to the Spice Islands that should be conducted
+in some more promising way than by the winter
+seas.</p>
+
+<p>As the ships sailed on into the clouds and cold,
+the sailors were filled with apprehension. But the
+farol still shone at night like a star in the changing
+atmosphere. They had expected that the extremity
+of South America would point West, but this was
+not the case. Whither were they tending?
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It was the middle of October. The water grew
+colder and the land became more desolate. Suddenly
+a bay appeared and the continent seemed to
+part. The sea poured its tides to the East amid
+towering mountains, and a strait appeared, which
+now bears the name of Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>The soul of the Admiral thrilled. It was the fulfillment
+of his visions. He called the opening to
+the swift channel Cape Virgins, as he discovered
+it on the day on which the Church commemorated
+the martyrdom of the "eleven thousand virgins."</p>
+
+<p>His lone lantern entered the straits. The way
+was toward the East.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan sent the ship Antonio, which was commanded
+by his cousin Alvaro de Mesquita, to explore
+the bay, of which ship Gormez still held the
+position of pilot. The mutineer's hour had come.</p>
+
+<p>The pilot entered the bay, but presently a powerful
+tide carried the ship back, and beyond the sight
+of the flag and the lantern of Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>The jealous Portuguese had seen enough to know
+that great perils were before the fleet or that a
+glory like to that of Columbus was now likely to
+fall to the lot of Magellan. He determined to be
+revenged upon the Admiral for supplanting him in
+accepting the favors of the King.</p>
+
+<p>He called the crew secretly about him.</p>
+
+<p>"You are rushing on to ruin," he said. "I can
+take you back to Spain. Put Mesquita in irons, and
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span>
+let us return. Mesquita advised Magellan to execute
+our comrades!"</p>
+
+<p>The crew, overcome by the perils of the situation,
+obeyed the pilot.</p>
+
+<p>Mesquita was placed in irons, and the pilot bore
+the Antonio away from the wintry seas, and turned
+her prow toward Spain.</p>
+
+<p>But untrue as the sailors were to Magellan, he
+was true to them. He delayed the expedition for
+their return, and sent out the Victoria in search of
+them. The Victoria's crew planted signal standards,
+under which were letters.</p>
+
+<p>Now perhaps for the first time Magellan was
+master of the expedition. He supposed at first that
+the Antonio had become lost in the terrible tides,
+but he still suspected treachery.</p>
+
+<p>As the fleet entered the straits, the hills at night
+blazed with fires. The explorers thought these fires
+were volcanoes. They were signal fires kindled by
+the natives. Magellan gave the place the name of
+"Tierra del Fuego"&mdash;the "Land of Fire," a name
+that it still bears.</p>
+
+<p>The water ran icy cold. Peaks of crystal towered
+above the straits, and the sublimities of mountain
+desolations everywhere appeared. So amid awful
+chasms of the sea, now white with snows, now dark
+with shadows, the little fleet glided on, the farol in
+the air at night, and all eyes strained with wonder
+to see what new disclosure this strait would bring.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>What must have been the reflection of Magellan
+as the mysteries of the new world lifted before his
+eyes?</p>
+
+<p>Joy is the compensation of suffering, and if his
+happiness was as great as his trials had been, he
+must have indeed known thrilling moments. He had
+dared, and he had achieved.</p>
+
+<p>He wondered at the fate of the Antonio, as the
+days went by. He indeed thought her lost, but yet
+hoped that she might appear.</p>
+
+<p>"She has deserted us," ventured a loyal officer.</p>
+
+<p>"No," reasoned the Admiral. "Mesquita would
+never desert me."</p>
+
+<p>He was right. There were many true hearts that
+made the voyage like Del Cano's, but no heart was
+truer to Magellan than Mesquita's; and true hearts
+know and love each other.</p>
+
+<p>The ships glided on slowly, without the Antonio.
+They had two new passengers in the giants whose
+lives must have been filled with wonder on ship-board.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap13" id="chap13"></a>CHAPTER XIII.</h3>
+
+<h4>"THE ADMIRAL WAS MAD!"</h4>
+
+
+<p>Grave as was the act of treachery that the
+jealousy of Gormez led him to commit, he was true
+to the two marooned priests who had opposed the
+daring schemes of Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>"We must not leave them to perish," he said.</p>
+
+<p>So with Mesquita in irons he steered his ship
+toward the lonely islands where the crew had passed
+the winter.</p>
+
+<p>They found Carthagena and his brother monk
+still living, and never could two men have been more
+glad to escape from exile. To live among naked
+giants, whom they could not civilize, must have become
+a horror to them. But their lives had been
+spared, though their biscuits and wine, we fancy,
+were gone.</p>
+
+<p>"The Admiral has gone mad," said the men who
+had come to rescue them. "He knows not the way
+to the Moluccas, nor to anywhere."</p>
+
+<p>The marooned men asked them where they were
+now going.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"To Spain," was the answer. "We have come
+to rescue you. Our Captain has never forgotten you.
+He will need you as witnesses. You must testify
+that the Admiral is mad."</p>
+
+<p>They were ready to testify that.</p>
+
+<p>The ship sailed back to Spain.</p>
+
+<p>The tales that they carried back to beautiful
+Seville caused a great disappointment in Spain.
+They must have stricken the heart of the wife of
+Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>Gormez related there that the Admiral had become
+mad; that he had marooned the two priests
+whom they had brought back as witnesses of the
+truth of what he asserted; that Magellan had sailed
+into winter seas, and quite lost his reason, and knew
+not where he was going.</p>
+
+<p>Then he told a terrible story of the execution of
+the mutinous Spaniards, friends of the King, at St.
+Julian. He said:</p>
+
+<p>"His cousin, Mesquita, our captain, advised these
+crimes, and so we put him in irons, and have brought
+him back to receive justice in Spain."</p>
+
+<p>Mesquita protested his innocence and tried to gain
+credence for his case. But no one cared to listen to
+him. The court and the popular feeling were against
+him. He was consigned to a prison. It was useless
+for him to protest, and to say that Magellan had made
+a great discovery; that he had found straits which
+were leading to the South Sea, and which were
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span>
+likely to prove that the ocean that Balboa had beheld
+was continuous.</p>
+
+<p>He was placed in a lonely dungeon, and there
+brooded over his wrongs and dreamed.</p>
+
+<p>He had one hope; it was that Magellan would
+return triumphant, a second Columbus or Vasco da
+Gama. If that day were to come, he would be released,
+and the court would honor him, and he would
+be hailed as a hero.</p>
+
+<p>"I have been made a prisoner by treachery," he
+said to a few men. "I believe that the day of my
+vindication will one day dawn."</p>
+
+<p>Cardinal Ximenes died. Juana still watched by
+the tomb of her husband, and took no interest in the
+world. Charles V was entering upon his career as
+a conqueror who was to subdue the Roman world
+to his will.</p>
+
+<p>As for Magellan in Spain he was to be but little
+more remembered now. Spain believed the story
+of the jealous Gormez, and the mariners of Seville
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"The Admiral was mad!"</p>
+
+<p>In the common view the mad Admiral had gone
+down in Antarctic seas. Like Faleiro, his friend,
+who had been sent to the mad house, it was thought
+that his brain had become unsettled, and that his
+bright visions had failed.</p>
+
+<p>The two mutineers ate bread and drank wine
+again in the convent bowers of Seville.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Gormez had schemes of his own. He desired the
+authority of the throne to make an expedition to the
+Spice Islands, which he believed he could find by
+sailing West. Strangely enough, as we have said,
+this jealous, treacherous man was afterward made a
+pilot in an expedition that visited Florida, Cape Cod,
+and Massachusetts Bay. But he did not find the
+way to the Spice Islands on the voyage.</p>
+
+<p>Mesquita, still believing in the success of the
+expedition of Magellan, said to a few whom he could
+reach:</p>
+
+<p>"Magellan is not mad. He executed those who
+had planned to murder him. He had to put to death
+these men for the sake of the expedition. He will
+return again!"</p>
+
+<p>Few believed his story, and fewer his prophecy.</p>
+
+<p>Still there were some who hoped that the prisoner's
+prophecy might prove true. Columbus was
+deemed mad, and quelled a mutiny, but he returned
+again. Vasco da Gama faced doubt and destruction,
+but he returned again. There were not wanting
+some who asked, "Will Magellan ever return
+again?" Such usually received the answer, "The
+Admiral was mad!"</p>
+
+<p>The poor wife of Magellan, who had hoped much
+from him for the sake of her child, as well as for
+Spain, heard these reports in an agony of grief. But
+she still hoped. She must have believed in her husband's
+destiny.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap14" id="chap14"></a>CHAPTER XIV.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE PACIFIC.&mdash;THE DEATH OF THE GIANTS.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The four ships glided along the wonderful straits
+which Magellan named the "Virgins," but which
+will always bear his own name. The scenery continued
+wild and fierce, and in some places overawing
+and sublime; they sailed amid domes of crystal and
+almost under the roofs of a broken world. They
+still moved slowly&mdash;the scenery growing more and
+more wonderful.</p>
+
+<p>The air grew bright again. The ships were in
+the sea. They had entered a sea broad and glorious,
+but which Magellan could have hardly dreamed to
+be nearly ten thousand miles long, and more than
+that wide! Its waters were placid&mdash;an ocean plain.
+Columbus had heard of this vast sea, and Balboa
+had seen it from the peak of Darien.</p>
+
+<p>All the joy that Magellan had anticipated in his
+visions of years now burst upon him.</p>
+
+<p>"The Pacific!"</p>
+
+<p>This was the name that came to him as he surveyed
+the new ocean world. He was the discoverer
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span>
+of the South Pacific, which was continuous with the
+ocean discovered by Balboa. What did it contain?
+Whither might he sail over the new serenity of
+waters?</p>
+
+<p>His soul had stood against his own country; his
+name had been cast out by his countrymen. But in
+the splendors of the sunset sea he had found his
+faith to be reality. It is said that the sailors wept
+when they beheld the Pacific.</p>
+
+<p>We may fancy the joy of Del Cano.</p>
+
+<p>We may imagine how the heart of Pigafetta, the
+young Italian, which had always been true to the
+Admiral, must have overflowed with delight when
+the Pacific opened before his eyes! There is a strong
+heart beat in the happiness of one who has been true
+to a successful man in the hour of his need.</p>
+
+<p>He may have sung the song that cheered Columbus
+and his men&mdash;the mariners' hymn to the Virgin:</p>
+
+
+<p class="center">
+"Gentle Star of Ocean!<br />
+<span style="padding-left: 2em">Portal of the sky!</span><br />
+Ever Virgin Mother<br />
+<span style="padding-left: 4em">Of the Lord most high!"</span><br />
+</p>
+
+
+<p>"Wednesday, the 20th of November, 1520," says
+the original narrative, "we came forth out of the
+same strait, and entered the Pacific Sea."</p>
+
+<p>The ships sailed on into the calm mystery of the
+ocean, the soul of Magellan glowing. But though
+the Admiral had risen superior to so many obstacles,
+there were others to be met. The sea was indeed
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span>
+placid and full of promise, but starvation now stared
+him in the face, and after the spectre of Treason had
+departed that of Famine appeared.</p>
+
+<p>Day after day the sun arose on the same serenity
+of sea. One month passed, and still there spread
+before the ships the same infinite ocean. Another
+month passed, and another, and twenty days more.</p>
+
+<p>How did the crews live on this long voyage of
+silence and calms?</p>
+
+<p>The narrative says: "We only ate old biscuit
+reduced to powder, and full of grubs, and we drank
+water that had turned yellow and smelled."</p>
+
+<p>But a more perilous diet had to be followed.</p>
+
+<p>They ate the "ox hides that were under the main
+yard." To eat these hides they had to soak them
+for some days in the sea, and then cook them on
+embers.</p>
+
+<p>They ate sawdust; then the vermin on the ships.</p>
+
+<p>A worse condition came. The gums of the men
+swelled from such food, so that many of them could
+not eat at all, and nineteen died. Beside those who
+died, twenty-five fell ill of "divers sicknesses."</p>
+
+<p>Kind-hearted Pigafetta, who was always true to
+the Portuguese Admiral, formed an intimacy with
+the poor young giant, presumably with the giant
+whose wife had been left behind. This giant was
+imprisoned on the flagship of Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>One day the giant said to him, helplessly:</p>
+
+<p>"Capac."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Our Italian understood that this must be the Patagonian
+word for bread. So he wrote it down, and
+the giant saw that he was interested in the meaning
+of his native words.</p>
+
+<p>So the young giant began to teach the young
+Italian.</p>
+
+<p>"Her-dem" meant a chief.</p>
+
+<p>"Holi" meant water.</p>
+
+<p>"Ohone," a storm.</p>
+
+<p>"Setebos," the Unseen Power.</p>
+
+<p>They studied together for a time, and shared each
+other's good will.</p>
+
+<p>One day the Italian drew a cross on paper. The
+young giant raised it to his lips and kissed it,
+as he had seen Pigafetta kiss the sign of the
+Cross.</p>
+
+<p>But he said by signs: "Do not make the Cross
+again, else Setebos will enter into you and kill
+you."</p>
+
+<p>The meaning of the cross was explained to him.</p>
+
+<p>The poor giant fell ill at last, amid all the misery.</p>
+
+<p>"Bring me the Cross," he said by signs.</p>
+
+<p>He kissed it again.</p>
+
+<p>He knew that he would soon die.</p>
+
+<p>"Make me a Christian," he said.</p>
+
+<p>They named him "Paul," and baptized him.</p>
+
+<p>One day found him dead, and they cast his great
+frame into the sea. He was probably the first convert
+to the faith among Patagonians, and his so-called
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span>
+conversion was the heart's cry in helplessness.</p>
+
+<p>The other giant may have lived to see the days
+of famine, when men shrank and death threatened
+all. Then he, too, famished and died, and found a
+grave in the sea. Another account, makes this
+giant die on the Antonio before that ship went back
+to St. Julian.</p>
+
+<p>Two islands only appeared in the months of
+steady sailing. They were uninhabited except by
+birds. The sky in all this time brought no storm.</p>
+
+<p>In these days of ocean solitude, hunger, and
+death, Magellan was sure always of the faith of two
+true hearts&mdash;the susceptible Italian and Del Cano.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan dreamed of the fate of Mesquita in
+these strange experiences, and Mesquita in his lonely
+prison thought continually of him. Would Magellan
+ever return? the latter must have asked daily.</p>
+
+<p>If so, his prison doors might swing open. He had
+no other hope, but this hope was a star. Magellan's
+wife must have shared this hope with the prisoner.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap15" id="chap15"></a>CHAPTER XV.</h3>
+
+<h4>WELCOME TO THE PHILIPPINES!</h4>
+
+
+<p>On Wednesday, March 6th, Magellan sighted
+islands. His lantern had crossed the Pacific Ocean.
+Here he hoped to find food. He approached the
+shores eagerly. So hungry were the crews that one
+of the sick men begged that if any of the natives
+were killed human flesh might be brought him.</p>
+
+<p>But the natives here were not only wild men,
+they were robbers; they sought to kill the voyagers
+and to steal everything. Hence, Magellan called
+the islands the Ladrones (robbers).</p>
+
+<p>The robbers threw stones at the famishing mariners
+as the ships turned away in search of more
+hospitable shores. The women were dressed in
+bark.</p>
+
+<p>The ships moved on into unknown seas.</p>
+
+<p>On Saturday, March 16, 1521, a notable sight
+appeared in the dawn of the morning. It was a
+high bluff, some three hundred leagues distant from
+the Thieves' Islands. The island was named Zamal,
+now called Samar.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan saw another island near. It was inhabited
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span>
+by a friendly people. He determined to
+land there for the sake of security, as he could there
+gather sea food and care for the sick. He planted
+his tents there, and provided the sick with fresh
+meat.</p>
+
+<p>Where was he?</p>
+
+<p>Here surely was a new archipelago which had
+found no place on a map. March 16, 1521, was to be
+a notable date of the world.</p>
+
+<p>He had discovered the Philippine Islands, though
+they were not then known by that name. They
+were the door to China from the West&mdash;this he could
+hardly have known.</p>
+
+<p>The islands as now known consist of Luzon,
+fifty-one thousand three hundred square miles in
+extent; and Mendanao, more than twenty-five thousand
+miles in extent. The islands lying between
+Luzon and Mendanao are called the Bissayas, of
+which Samar has an area of thirteen thousand and
+twenty miles. Magellan visited Mendanao and then
+sailed for Zebu, a small island where the first Spanish
+settlement was made, before Manila, which was
+founded in 1581.</p>
+
+<p>This archipelago was a new world of wonder.
+The small islands are now computed to number
+fourteen hundred. Magellan never knew the extent
+of his discovery.</p>
+
+<p>Here he was to find the happiest days of his life,
+after the serene but famishing voyage.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The people here were to receive him with open
+arms; to feast him; to raise his expectations and to
+bow down before the Cross. We must describe in
+detail&mdash;thanks to the Italian who was true to the
+heart of the Admiral&mdash;this golden age of the
+troubled life of Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>After all the struggle for so many years against
+many overwhelming oppositions, Magellan now rose
+into the vantage ground of success, and fulfilled the
+vision which had illumined his soul in his darkest
+hours.</p>
+
+<p>Every man has a right to his record, and whatever
+might happen now, his record no power could
+destroy; he had discovered the Pacific Ocean, and
+a new way around the world. Whatever might be
+his fate, the world must follow his lantern.</p>
+
+<p>On the 18th of March, 1521, after dinner on
+shore, the Admiral saw a boat coming out from
+a near island toward his ship. There were men
+in it.</p>
+
+<p>"Let no one move or speak," said Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>The crews awaited the coming of the strangers
+in the blazing sunlight of the tropic sea. The Indians
+landed, led by a chief.</p>
+
+<p>They were friends. They signified by signs their
+joy at seeing them. Magellan feasted the Indians
+and gave them presents.</p>
+
+<p>When these people saw the good disposition of
+the Captain, they gave him palm wine and figs
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span>
+"more than a foot long." On leaving they promised
+to return with fruits.</p>
+
+<p>Pigafetta, our Italian Chevalier, vividly describes
+the scenes that followed between Magellan and the
+friendly people of the newly-discovered islands,
+which we call the Philippines, but which were not
+so named at that time.</p>
+
+<p>He tells us in a wonderfully interesting narrative
+a translation of which we closely follow:</p>
+
+<p>"That people became very familiar and friendly,
+and explained many things in their language, and
+told the names of some islands which they beheld.
+The island where they dwelt was called Zuluam, and
+it was not large. As they were sufficiently agreeable
+and conversible the crews had great pleasure
+with them. The Captain seeing that they were of
+this good spirit, conducted them to the ship and
+showed them specimens of all his goods&mdash;that he
+most desired&mdash;cloves, cinnamon, pepper, ginger, nutmeg,
+mace, and gold.</p>
+
+<p>"He also had shots fired with his artillery, at
+which they were so much afraid that they wished
+to jump from the ship into the sea. They made
+signs that the things which the Captain had shown
+them grew there.</p>
+
+<p>"When they wished to go they took leave of the
+Captain and of the crew with very good manners
+and gracefulness, promising to come back.</p>
+
+<p>"The island where the ships had moored was
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span>
+named Humunu; but because the men found there
+two springs of very fresh water it was named the
+Watering Place of Good Signs. There was much
+white coral there, and large trees which bear fruit
+smaller than an almond, and which are like pines.
+There were also many palm trees both good and bad.
+In this place there were many circumjacent islands,
+on which account the archipelago was named St.
+Lazarus. This region and archipelago is in ten
+degrees north latitude, and a hundred and sixty-one
+degrees longitude from the line of demarcation.</p>
+
+<p>"Friday, the 22d of March, the above-mentioned
+people, who had promised to return, came about midday
+with two boats laden with the said fruit, cochi,
+sweet oranges, a vessel of palm wine, and a cock, to
+give us to understand that they had poultry in their
+country." The Italian thus describes the habits of
+the people:</p>
+
+<p>"The lord of these people was old, and had his
+face painted, and had gold rings suspended to his
+ears, which they name 'schione,' and the others
+had many bracelets and rings of gold on their arms,
+with a wrapper of linen round their head. We remained
+at this place eight days; the Captain went
+there every day to see his sick men, whom he had
+placed on this island to refresh them; and he gave
+them himself every day the water of this said fruit,
+the cocho, which comforted them much."</p>
+
+<p>Pigafetta tells us that near this isle is another
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span>
+where there is a kind of people "who wear holes in
+their ears so large that they can pass their arms
+through them"&mdash;a very remarkable statement&mdash;"and
+these people go naked, except that round their
+middles they wear cloth made of the bark of trees.
+But there are some of the more remarkable of them
+who wear cotton stuff, and at the end of it there is
+some work of silk done with a needle. These people
+are tawny, fat, and painted, and they anoint themselves
+with the oil of cocoanuts and sesame to preserve
+them from the sun and the wind. Their hair
+is very black and long, reaching to the waist, and
+they carry small daggers and knives, ornamented
+with gold."</p>
+
+<p>Pigafetta fell into the sea here, and he gives a
+vivid account of the personal accident:</p>
+
+<p>"The Monday of Passion week, the 25th of
+March, and feast of our Lady, in the afternoon, and
+being ready to depart from this place, I went to the
+side of our ship to fish, and putting my feet on a
+spar to go down to the storeroom, my feet slipped,
+because it had rained, and I fell into the sea, without
+any one seeing me; and being near drowning, by
+luck I found at my left hand the sheet of the large
+sail which was in the sea, I caught hold of it and
+began to cry out till some came to help and pick
+me up with the boat. I was assisted not by my
+merits, but by the mercy and grace of the Fountain
+of Pity. That same day we took the course between
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span>
+west and southwest, and passed amid four small
+islands; that it to say, Cenalo, Huinanghar, Ibusson,
+and Abarien."</p>
+
+<p>The Italian describes in an interesting way the
+visit of the King of one of the islands to the ships.
+He says of this first visit of a Philippine King to the
+Europeans:</p>
+
+<p>"Thursday, the 28th of March, having seen the
+night before fire upon an island, at the morning we
+came to anchor at this island, where we saw a small
+boat which they call boloto, with eight men inside,
+which approached the ship of the Captain General.
+Then a slave of the Captain's, who was from Sumatra,
+otherwise named Traprobana, spoke from
+afar to these people, who understood his talk, and
+came near to the side of the ship, but they withdrew
+immediately, and would not enter the ship from fear
+of us.</p>
+
+<p>"So the Captain, seeing that they would not
+trust to us, showed them a red cap and other things,
+which he had tied and placed on a little plank, and
+the people in the boat took them immediately and
+joyously, and then returned to advise their King.
+Two hours afterward, or thereabout, we saw come
+two long boats, which they call ballanghai, full of
+men.</p>
+
+<p>"In the largest of them was their King sitting
+under an awning of mats; when they were near the
+ship of the Captain General, the said slave spoke
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span>
+to the King, who understood him well, because in
+these countries the kings know more languages than
+the common people. Then the King ordered some
+of his people to go to the Captain's ship, while he
+would not move from his boat, which was near
+enough to us.</p>
+
+<p>"This was done, and when his people returned to
+the boat, he went away at once. The Captain made
+a good entertainment to the men who came to his
+ship, and gave them all sorts of things, on which
+account the King wished to give the Captain a
+rather large bar of solid gold, and a chest full of
+ginger. However, the Captain thanked him very
+much, but would not accept the present. After
+that, when it was late, he went with the ships near
+to the houses and abode of the King."</p>
+
+<p>The Captain in refusing the offer of gold and
+ginger from his guest, showed indeed a true sense
+of hospitality. The incident pictures the life of
+Magellan. He obeyed his moral sense and his heart
+was true. He was a Portuguese gentleman of the
+old type, and presented an example worthy of imitation
+in any age.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap16" id="chap16"></a>CHAPTER XVI.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE VISIT OF THE KING.&mdash;PIGAFETTA VISITS THE KING.</h4>
+
+
+<p>They were ready to meet the King now, when all
+was so friendly and promising. The good soul of
+Pigafetta felt that these islands of fruits and spiceries
+were indeed an earthly paradise. He alone had
+not been sick in all of the long monotonous voyage
+across the Pacific. His strength had never
+abated and his faith in the Admiral had never faltered.</p>
+
+<p>Night after night he had watched the lantern
+swinging in the unknown air, and had said his
+prayers. He had had ever a cheering word to say
+to the Admiral on all occasions. His heart was true
+to the lantern, the stars, the Admiral, and the Divine
+Power which he believed was leading him.</p>
+
+<p>He was now in the sea gardens of palms and
+spices. He thus continues his narrative (we follow
+in part the translation of the Hakluyt Society in the
+work of Lord Stanley Alderley).</p>
+
+<p>He tells us that on "the next day, which was
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span>
+Good Friday, the Captain sent on shore a slave, who
+was an interpreter, to the King to beg him to give
+him for money some provisions for his ships, sending
+him word that he had not come to his country as an
+enemy, but as a friend. The King on hearing this
+came with seven or eight men in a boat, and entered
+the ship, and embraced the Captain, and gave him
+three China dishes covered with leaves full of rice,
+and two <i>dorades</i>, which are rather large fish. The
+Captain gave this King a robe of red and yellow
+cloth, made in the Turkish fashion, and a very fine
+red cap, and to his people he gave knives and mirrors.
+After that refreshments were served up to
+them. The Captain told the King, through the interpreter,
+that he wished to be with him, as <i>cassi cassi</i>;
+that is to say, brothers. To which the King answered
+that he desired to be the same toward him.
+After that the Captain showed him cloths of different
+colors, linen, coral, and much other merchandise,
+and all the artillery, of which he had some
+pieces fired before him, at which the King was much
+astonished; after that the Captain had one of his
+soldiers armed with white armor, and placed him
+in the midst of three comrades, who struck him with
+swords and daggers.</p>
+
+<p>"The King thought this very strange, and the
+Captain told him, through the interpreter, that a
+man thus in white armor was worth many common
+men; he answered that it was true; he was further
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span>
+informed that there were in each ship two hundred
+like that man.</p>
+
+<p>"After that the Captain showed him a great number
+of swords, cuirasses, and helmets, and made two
+of the men play with their swords before the King;
+he then showed him the sea chart and the ship compass,
+and informed him how he had found a strait,
+and of the time which he had spent on the voyage;
+also of the time he had been without seeing any
+land, at which the King was astonished. At the
+end the Captain asked if he would be pleased that
+two of his people should go with him to the places
+where they lived to see some of the things of his
+country. This the King granted, and I went with
+another."</p>
+
+<p>The Italian was again in his element, and he
+gives a graphic account of his visit to the natives:</p>
+
+<p>"When I had landed, the King raised his hands
+to the sky, and turned to us two, and we did the
+same as he did; after that he took me by the hand,
+and one of his principal people took my companion,
+and led us under a place covered with canes, where
+there was a ballanghai; that is to say, a boat, eighty
+feet long or thereabouts, resembling a fusta. We sat
+with the King upon its stern, always conversing with
+him by signs, and his people stood up around us,
+with their swords, spears, and bucklers. Then the
+King ordered to be brought a dish of pig's flesh and
+wine. Their fashion of drinking is in this wise: they
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span>
+first raise their hands to Heaven, then take the
+drinking vessel in their right hand, and extend the
+left hand closed toward the people. This the King
+did, and presented to me his fist, so that I thought
+that he wanted to strike me; I did the same thing
+toward him; so with this ceremony, and other signs
+of friendship, we banqueted, and afterward supped
+with him."</p>
+
+<p>The Italian was a pious man, but he says:</p>
+
+<p>"I ate flesh on Good Friday, not being able to do
+otherwise, and before the hour of supper, I gave several
+things to the King, which I had brought. There
+I wrote down several things as they name them in
+their language, and when the King and the others
+saw me write, and I told them their manner of
+speech, they were all astonished.</p>
+
+<p>"When the hour for supper had come, they
+brought two large China dishes, one of which was
+full of rice, and the other of pig's flesh, with its
+broth and sauce. We supped with the same signs
+and ceremonies, and then went to the King's palace,
+which was made and built like a hay grange, covered
+with fig and palm leaves."</p>
+
+<p>Here the two found delightful hospitality; the
+house was "built on great timbers high above the
+ground, and it was necessary to go up steps and
+ladders to it. Then the King made us sit on a cane
+mat, with our legs doubled as was the custom; after
+half an hour there was brought a dish of fish roast
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span>
+in pieces, and ginger fresh gathered that moment
+and some wine. The eldest son of the King, who
+was a Prince, came where we were, and the King
+told him to sit down near us, which he did; then
+two dishes were brought, one of fish, with its sauce,
+and the other of rice, and this was done for us to
+eat with the Prince. My companion enjoyed the
+food and drank so much that he got drunk. They
+use for candles or torches the gum of a tree which
+is named anime, wrapped up in leaves of palms or
+fig trees. The King made a sign that he wished to
+go to rest, and left us with the Prince, with whom
+we slept on a cane mat, with some cushions and
+pillows of leaves. Next morning the King came
+and took me by the hand, and so we went to the
+place where we had supped, to breakfast, but the
+boat came to fetch us. The King, before we went
+away, was very gay, and kissed our hands, and we
+kissed his. There came with us a brother of his,
+the King of another island, accompanied by three
+men. The Captain General detained him to dine
+with us, and we gave him several things."</p>
+
+<p>"The King abounded in gold, and was a grand
+figure. In the island belonging to the King who
+came to the ship there are mines of gold, which they
+find in pieces as big as a walnut or an egg, by seeking
+in the ground. All the vessels which he makes
+use of are made of it, and also some parts of his
+house, which was well fitted up according to the
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span>
+custom of the country, and he was the handsomest
+man that we saw among these nations. He had very
+black hair coming down to his shoulders, with a
+silk cloth on his head, and two large gold rings
+hanging from his ears; he had a cloth of cotton
+worked with silk, which covered him from the waist
+to the knees; at his side he wore a dagger, with a
+long handle which was all of gold, his sheath was of
+carved wood. Besides he carried upon him scents
+of storax and benzoin. He was tawny and painted
+all over."</p>
+
+<p>An island where nuggets of gold as big as eggs
+could be found must have offered a tempting place
+of residence.</p>
+
+<p>But Magellan's first thought was for the good
+of the souls of this hospitable people.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap17" id="chap17"></a>CHAPTER XVII.</h3>
+
+<h4>EASTER SUNDAY.&mdash;MAGELLAN PLANTS THE CROSS.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Now begins the dawn of Christianity in the
+Philippines. Magellan was a deeply religious man,
+and Pigafetta was a Christian Knight. Magellan
+saw the significance of his marvelous voyage, and
+his soul glowed with gratitude to Heaven.</p>
+
+<p>Easter Sunday approached. Magellan had made
+preparations to plant a cross on a mountain overlooking
+the sea.</p>
+
+<p>Easter Sunday fell on the last day of March.
+"The Captain," to follow the Italian's narrative in
+part, "sent the Chaplain ashore early to say mass,
+and the interpreter went with him to tell the King
+that they were not coming on shore to dine with
+him, but only to hear the mass.</p>
+
+<p>"When it was time for saying mass the Captain
+went ashore with fifty men, not with their arms, but
+only with their swords, and dressed as well as each
+one was able to dress, and before the boats reached
+the shore our ships fired six cannon shots as a sign
+of peace.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"At our landing the two Kings of the islands
+were there, and received the Captain in a friendly
+manner, and placed him between them, and then we
+went to the place prepared for saying mass, which
+was not far from the shore."</p>
+
+<p>The ceremonies that followed were dramatic.
+"Before the mass began the Captain threw a quantity
+of musk-rose water on those two Kings," is the
+picture drawn by the Italian, "and when the offertory
+of the mass came, the two Kings went to kiss
+the Cross like us, but they offered nothing, and at
+the elevation of the body of our Lord they were
+kneeling like us, and adored our Lord with joined
+hands. The ships fired all their artillery at the elevation
+of the body of our Lord."</p>
+
+<p>The scene that followed discloses the religious
+nature of Magellan and his joy in what was ennobling.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>He caused a great cross to be lifted, "with the
+nails and crown, to which the Kings made reverence."
+He told the Kings that he wished to place it
+in their country for their profit, "because if there
+came afterward any ships from Spain to those
+islands, on seeing this cross, they would know that
+we had been there, and therefore they would not
+cause them any displeasure to their persons nor their<a name="ill144"></a>
+goods; and if they took any of their people, on showing
+them this sign, they would at once let them go."
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span></p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_144.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Mount Mayon, on the Island of Luzun.</span></p>
+
+<p>The Captain continued his address to the Kings
+in the same spirit. He told them that it was necessary
+that this cross "should be placed on the summit
+of the highest mountain in their country, so that
+seeing it every day and night they might adore it."
+He further told them that if they did thus, "neither
+thunder, lightning, nor the tempest could do them
+hurt." This he believed to be true. The Kings
+"thanked the Captain, and said they would do it
+willingly." The Captain asked them how they worshiped.
+They answered that "they did not perform
+any other adoration, but only joined their
+hands, looking up to Heaven, and that they called
+their God Aba. Hearing this, the Captain was very
+joyful; on seeing that, the first King raised his hands
+to the sky and said that he wished it were possible
+for him to be able to show the affection which he felt
+toward him."</p>
+
+<p>The elevation of the Cross followed.</p>
+
+<p>"After dinner we all returned in our dress coats,
+and we went together with the two Kings to the
+middle of the highest mountain we could find, and
+there the Cross was planted."</p>
+
+<p>Important information followed.</p>
+
+<p>"After the two Kings and the Captain rested
+themselves, and, while conversing, I asked where
+was the best port for obtaining victuals. They replied
+that there were three; that is to say, Ceylon,
+Zubu, and Calaghan; but that Zubu was the
+largest and of the most traffic. Then the Kings
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span>
+offered to give him pilots to go to those ports, for
+which he thanked them, and deliberated to go
+there, for his ill-fortune would have it so. After the
+cross had been planted on the mountain, each one
+said the Paternoster and Ave Maria, and adored it,
+and the Kings did the like. Then he went down
+below to where their boats were. There the
+kings had brought some of the fruit called cocos
+and other things to make a collation and to refresh
+us."</p>
+
+<p>The fleet sailed away soon after Easter Monday,
+the Captain having secured native pilots from the
+Kings. One of the Kings volunteered to act himself
+as pilot, and this service was accepted.</p>
+
+<p>Pigafetta describes the use of betel:</p>
+
+<p>"This kind of people are gentle, and go naked,
+and are painted. They wear a piece of cloth made
+from a tree, like a linen cloth, round their body to
+cover their natural parts; they are great drinkers.
+The women are dressed in tree cloth from their
+waists downward; their hair is black, and reaches
+down to the ground; they wear certain gold rings
+in their ears. These people chew most of their time
+a fruit which they call areca (betel), which is something
+of the shape of a pear; they cut it in four
+quarters, and after they have chewed it for a long
+time they spit it out, from which afterward they
+have their mouths very red. They find themselves
+the better from the use of this fruit because it refreshes
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span>
+them much, for this country is very hot, so
+that they could not live without it."</p>
+
+<p>The use of the areca, or betel nut, is still common
+in all the Philippine Islands.</p>
+
+<p>The fleet next went to Maestral, "passing through
+five islands&mdash;Ceylon, Bohol, Canighan, Baibai, and
+Satighan. In the Island of Satighan was a kind of
+bird called barbarstigly, which was as large as an
+eagle. Of these we killed only one," says our narrator,
+"because it was late. We ate it, and it had
+the taste of a fowl. There were also in this island
+doves, tortoises, parrots, and certain black birds as
+large as a fowl, with a long tail. They lay eggs as
+large as those of a goose. These they put a good
+length under the sand in the sun, where they were
+hatched by the great heat, which the heated sand
+gives out; and when these birds were hatched they
+pushed up the sand and came out. These eggs are
+good to eat.</p>
+
+<p>"From this island of Mazzubua to that of Satighan
+there are twenty leagues, and on leaving
+Satighan we went by the west; but the King
+of Mazzubua could not follow us; therefore we
+waited for him near three islands; that is to say,
+Polo, Ticobon, and Pozzon. When the King
+arrived he was much astonished at our navigation;
+the Captain General bade him come on
+board his ship with some of his principal people,
+at which they were much pleased. Thus we
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span>
+went to Zubu, which is fifteen leagues off from
+Satighan."</p>
+
+<p>The story of the Italian here, which we so freely
+use, leaves in the mind a picture of the first voyage
+among the Philippines. The habits of the people in
+these same islands are not greatly changed, but we
+hardly find there now as tractable kings as were
+those to whom Magellan left the Cross.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap18" id="chap18"></a>CHAPTER XVIII.</h3>
+
+<h4>CHRISTIANITY AND TRADE ESTABLISHED.&mdash;THE
+BAPTISM OF THE QUEEN.</h4>
+
+
+<p>On April 9th they entered the Port of Zubu, on
+approaching which they saw houses in the trees.
+The Captain hung out his flags in the clear sunny
+air. He caused his artillery to be fired, which greatly
+alarmed the natives. He then sent an interpreter
+to the King.</p>
+
+<p>The interpreter found the people in terror at the
+thunder of the guns. He assured the King that the
+salute had been made in his honor. Then the interpreter
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"My master is the greatest King in all the world.
+We are sailing at his command to discover the Spice
+Islands. But we have heard of your fame, and the
+fame of your country, and have come to visit you."</p>
+
+<p>"You are welcome," said the King, "but you
+must pay me tribute."</p>
+
+<p>"My master," said the interpreter, "is the greatest
+of all Kings, and we can pay tribute to no
+one."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The King feasted them, and they entered into
+negotiations of peace with the King of Zubu.</p>
+
+<p>At Zubu Magellan turned missionary with no
+common zeal.</p>
+
+<p>He told the native princes that his visit was for
+the sake of peace.</p>
+
+<p>We are told that the "Captain General sat in a
+chair of red velvet, and near him were the principal
+men of the ships sitting in leather chairs, and the
+others sat on the ground on mats.</p>
+
+<p>"The Captain," says the narrative, "spoke at
+length on the subject of peace, and prayed God to
+confirm it in Heaven. These people replied that they
+had never heard such words as these which the Captain
+had spoken to them, and they took great pleasure
+in hearing them. The Captain, seeing then that
+those people listened willingly to what was said to
+them, and that they gave good answers, began to
+say a great many good things to induce them to
+become Christians.</p>
+
+<p>"He told them how God had made Heaven and
+earth and all other things in the world, and that he
+had commanded that every one should render honor
+and obedience to his father and mother, and that
+whoever did otherwise was condemned to eternal
+fire."</p>
+
+<p>His teaching bore immediate fruit.</p>
+
+<p>"The people heard these things willingly, and
+besought the Captain to leave them two men to teach
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span>
+and show them the Christian faith, and they would
+entertain them well with great honor. To this the
+Captain answered that for the moment he could not
+leave any of his people, but that if they wished to
+be Christians that his priest would baptize them, and
+that another time he would bring priests and teachers
+to teach them the faith."</p>
+
+<p>His manner of teaching reveals his heart:</p>
+
+<p>"The people told him that they wished to consult
+their King in regard to becoming Christians."
+The friends of the Captain "wept for the joy which
+they felt at the good-will of these people, and
+the Captain told them not to become Christians
+'from fear of us, or to please us, but that if they
+wished to become Christian they must do it willingly,
+and for the love of God, for even though
+they should not become Christian, no displeasure
+would be done them, but those who became Christian
+would be more loved and better treated than
+the others.' Then they all cried out with one voice
+that they did not wish to become Christians from
+fear, nor from complaisance, but of their free
+will."</p>
+
+<p>Here the true character of the man again appears&mdash;few
+Christian explorers ever made so noble a
+record. His sincerity won the hearts of the natives:</p>
+
+<p>"At last they said they did not know what more
+to answer to so many good and beautiful words
+which he spoke to them, but that they placed themselves
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span>
+in his hands, and that he should do with them
+as with his own servants."</p>
+
+<p>The next scene is ideal:</p>
+
+<p>"Then the Captain, with tears in his eyes, embraced
+them, and, taking the hand of the Prince and
+that of the King, said to him that by the faith he
+had in God, and to his master the Emperor, and by
+the habit of St. James which he wore, he promised
+them to cause them to have perpetual peace with
+the King of Spain, at which the Prince and the
+others promised him the same."</p>
+
+<p>It is a pleasure to follow such a narrative as
+Pigafetta here writes in illustration of the character
+of a true Christian Knight. Compare this narrative
+with the history of Pizarro, Cortes, and De Soto.
+Magellan was a Las Casas, a Marquette, a La Salle.</p>
+
+<p>The next incident told by Pigafetta has as fine
+a touch as a portrayal of character. It relates to a
+message which Magellan sent to the King, with a
+present.</p>
+
+<p>"When we came to the town we found the King
+of Zubu at his palace, sitting on the ground on a
+mat made of palm, with many people about him.</p>
+
+<p>"He had a very heavy chain around his neck,
+and two gold rings hung in his ears with precious
+stones.</p>
+
+<p>"He was eating tortoise eggs in two china
+dishes, and he had four vessels full of palm wine,
+which he drank with a cane pipe. We made our
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span>
+obeisance, and presented to him what the Captain
+had sent him, and told him, through the interpreter
+that the present <i>was not as a return for his present
+which he had sent to the Captain, but for the affection
+which he bore him</i>. This done, his people told him all
+the good words and explanations of peace and religion
+which he had spoken to them."</p>
+
+<p>We now behold Magellan in a new attitude, as a
+missionary teacher, a John the Baptist in the wilderness.
+Pigafetta thus describes the scene:</p>
+
+<p>"On Sunday morning, the fourteenth day of
+April, we went on shore, forty men, of whom two
+were armed, who marched before us, following the
+standard of our King Emperor. When we landed
+the ships discharged all their artillery, and from
+fear of it the people ran away in all directions.</p>
+
+<p>"Magellan and the King embraced one another,
+and then joyously we went near the scaffolding,
+where the Captain General and the King sat on two
+chairs, one covered with red, the other with violet
+velvet. The principal men sat on cushions, and
+others on mats, after the fashion of the country.</p>
+
+<p>"Then the Captain began to speak to the King
+through the interpreter to incite him to the faith of
+Jesus Christ, and told him that if he wished to be
+a good Christian, as he had said the day before, that
+he must burn all the idols of his country, and, instead
+of them, place a cross, and that every one
+should worship it every day on their knees, and their
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span>
+hands joined to Heaven; and he showed him how he
+ought every day to make the sign of the Cross.</p>
+
+<p>"To that the King and all his people answered
+that they would obey the commands of the Captain
+and do all that he told them. The Captain took the
+King by the hand, and they walked about on the
+scaffolding, and when he was baptized he said that
+he would name him Don Charles, as the Emperor his
+sovereign was named; and he named the Prince Don
+Fernand, after the brother of the Emperor, and the
+King of Mazzava, Jehan; to the Moor he gave the
+name of Christopher, and to the others each a name
+of his fancy. Thus, before mass, there were fifty men
+baptized."</p>
+
+<p>The baptism of the Queen followed.</p>
+
+<p>"Our Chaplain and some of us went on shore to
+baptize the Queen. She came with forty ladies, and
+we conducted them onto the scaffolding; then made
+her sit down on a cushion, and her women around
+her, until the priest was ready. During that time
+they showed her an image of our Lady, of wood, holding
+her little child, which was very well made, and a
+cross. When she saw it, she had a greater desire to
+be a Christian, and, asking for baptism, she was baptized
+and named Jehanne, like the mother of the
+Emperor. The wife of the Prince, daughter of this
+Queen, had the name of Catherine, the Queen of
+Mazzava Isabella, and to the others each their name.</p>
+
+<p>"That day we baptised eight hundred persons of
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span>
+men, women, and children. The Queen was young
+and handsome, covered with a black and white
+sheet; she had the mouth and nails very red, and
+wore on her head a large hat made of leaves of
+palm, with a crown over it made of the same leaves,
+like that of the Pope. After that she begged us to
+give her the little wooden boy to put in the place of
+the idols. This we did, and she went away. In the
+evening the King and Queen, with several of their
+people, came to the sea beach, where the Captain
+had some of the large artillery fired, in which they
+took great pleasure. The Captain and the King
+called one another brother."</p>
+
+<p>The "little boy" spoken of was an image of the
+infant Christ. The figure was preserved until the
+year 1598, when the Spaniards sent missionaries to
+the place who gave it a place in a shrine and named
+a city for it.</p>
+
+<p>The naming of the Queen at her baptism for
+poor Juana, or "Crazy Jane," the incapable mother
+of Charles V, who was watching beside her dead
+husband in Granada, and who had signed the commission
+of Magellan by proxy, completes a tale of
+missionary work in a somewhat ideal way. If these
+people did not maintain their faith, the work reveals
+the intention of Magellan, and shows the nobility
+of character of the Christian Knight.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap19" id="chap19"></a>CHAPTER XIX.</h3>
+
+<h4>HALCYON DAYS.</h4>
+
+
+<p>These were indeed days of joy. The glory of
+them grew. All the inhabitants of the island came
+to be baptized. Magellan went on shore daily to
+hear mass.</p>
+
+<p>It was Pigafetta who gave to the Queen the
+image of the infant Christ, which became historical.</p>
+
+<p>On one of the occasions that Magellan went on
+shore to hear mass he met the Queen, who appeared
+in a veil of silk and gold. He sprinkled over her
+some rose water and musk, and noticed that she
+cherished the image of the infant Christ.</p>
+
+<p>"You do well," said he. "Put it in the place
+where your idols were; it will keep in your mind
+the Son of God."</p>
+
+<p>"I will cherish it forever," said the veiled Queen.</p>
+
+<p>She seems to have kept her word.</p>
+
+<p>The joy of these scenes reached their height,
+when the King of Seba swore fealty to the King of
+Spain.</p>
+
+<p>The scene of the conclusion of this ceremony was
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span>
+knightly indeed, and again reveals the heart of
+Magellan.</p>
+
+<p>He, seeing a good spirit, of the King of Seba, resolved
+to swear fealty of eternal friendship to him.
+Only a Christian Knight would have dreamed of
+such a thing.</p>
+
+<p>"I swear," he said, "by the image of our Lady,
+the Virgin, by the love of my Emperor, and by the
+insignia, on my heart, that I will ever be faithful to
+you, O King of Seba!"</p>
+
+<p>Here the true character of the statesman as well
+as teacher appeared. History records few acts more
+noble. Magellan sought the good of mankind.</p>
+
+<p>There was one officer on the ships whose soul,
+like that of Pigafetta's, must have been in all these
+benevolent efforts.</p>
+
+<p>The expedition was tarrying long, seeking the
+glory of the Cross rather than the gold and spices.
+There were impatient hearts in Seville.</p>
+
+<p>Mesquita in his still prison, with the world
+against him, dreamed of Magellan, Del Cano, and the
+Italian historian. The half world separated them
+now.</p>
+
+<p>In his dreams Mesquita saw the fleet coming
+back again, and he heard the shouting of the people
+and the ringing of the bells. The star of hope in his
+heart did not fail.</p>
+
+<p>"Padre," he said, "the day of my vindication will
+come."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>But the seasons came and went, and the light
+changed color in the window of his cell, and the
+birds sang their notes in the trees in spring and left
+their empty nests to silence in the retreating summer.
+The great Cathedral grew, and the achievement
+of Charles had begun to excite the world.</p>
+
+<p>We now come to the tragedy of this wonderful
+expedition; to the tempest that rose out of the calm.
+The transition from these ideal scenes to what is
+to follow is sudden indeed.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap20" id="chap20"></a>CHAPTER XX.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE DEATH OF MAGELLAN.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Magellan, as we have shown, had sought not
+wealth, nor glory, but the good of the world in his
+life. He was ever ready to put his own interest aside
+in the service of that which was best for others. He
+had sought welfare and not wealth, service and not
+self, and his life was about to end in the unselfish
+spirit in which it had lived.</p>
+
+<p>On Friday, April 26, 1520, Zula, one of the great
+chiefs of the Island of Matan, sent to Magellan one
+of his sons and two goats as a present. He had
+promised his service to the King of Spain, but this
+surrender of royalty had been opposed by another
+chief named Silapalapa. This chief had declared
+with native spirit that Matan would never submit
+to the Spanish King.</p>
+
+<p>"But I can overthrow Silapalapa," ran the Matan
+chief's message, "if I can have your help. Send me
+a boatload of men. Let them come to-morrow
+night."</p>
+
+<p>Magellan received the message and the presents
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span>
+in a friendly feeling, and resolved to follow the
+chief's lead.</p>
+
+<p>"I will not send another on this expedition so
+full of peril," he thought. "I will lead it myself."</p>
+
+<p>So he set out from Zubu to Matan at midnight,
+with sixty men, in corselets and helmets. He took
+with him the Christian King, and the chief men of
+his new adherents.</p>
+
+<p>The boats moved silently over the tropic waters
+under the moon and stars. Magellan had become a
+happy man. He could not doubt that he was on his
+way to new victories. Pigafetta, the Italian, always
+true to the Admiral, was with him.</p>
+
+<p>The expedition arrived at Matan just before the
+dawn of the morning.</p>
+
+<p>The mellow nature of Magellan came back to him
+on this short night journey. He had no wish to
+slaughter men.</p>
+
+<p>So he spoke to a Moorish merchant.</p>
+
+<p>"Go to the natives," he said, "and tell them if
+they will recognize a Christian King as their sovereign
+I will become their friend. If not, that they
+must feel our lances."</p>
+
+<p>The Moorish ambassador was landed, and met
+the chiefs.</p>
+
+<p>"Go tell your master," they said, "that if he has
+lances, so have we, and our lances are hardened by
+fire."</p>
+
+<p>At the red dawn of the morning, the Admiral
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span>
+gave the order to disembark, and forty-nine men
+leaped into the water. They faced a fierce army,
+some fifteen hundred in number.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan divided his followers into two bands.
+The musketeers and cross bowmen began the attack.
+But the firing was not effective. The black army
+moved down upon them like a cloud, throwing javelins
+and spears hardened with fire. Some of them
+singled out Magellan. They threw at him lances
+pointed with iron.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan, seeing that the odds were against him
+in such a contest, sought to break their lines by firing
+their houses. Some thirty houses burst into flame.</p>
+
+<p>The sight of the fire maddened the natives and
+rendered them furious. They discovered that the
+legs of the invaders were exposed, and that they
+could be wounded there with poisoned arrows.</p>
+
+<p>A poisoned arrow was aimed at Magellan. It
+pierced him in the leg. He felt the wound, and knew
+its import.</p>
+
+<p>He gave orders to retreat. A panic ensued, and
+his men took to flight.</p>
+
+<p>The air was filled with arrows, spears, stones,
+and mud.</p>
+
+<p>The Spaniards tried to escape to the boat. The
+islanders followed them and directed their fury to
+Magellan. They struck him twice on his helmet.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan's thought now was not for himself, but
+for the safety of his men.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>He stood at his own post fighting that they might
+make safe their retreat.</p>
+
+<p>He thus broke the assault for nearly an hour,
+until he was almost left alone.</p>
+
+<p>An Indian suddenly rushed down toward him
+having a cane lance. He thrust this into his face.
+Magellan wounded the Indian, and attempted to
+draw his sword. But he had received a javelin
+wound in his arm, and his strength failed.</p>
+
+<p>Seeing him falter, the Indian rushed upon him
+and brought him down to the earth with a rude
+sword.</p>
+
+<p>The Indians now fell upon him and ran him
+through with lances.</p>
+
+<p>He tried to rise up, to see if his men were safe.
+He did not call for assistance, but to the last sought
+to secure the safety of his men. In fact, he never
+seemed to so much as think of himself in the whole
+contest. It was thus that his life went out, and his
+heart ceased to beat. He was left dead on the sand,<a name="ill163"></a>
+on April 27, 1521. The natives refused to surrender
+his body. Eight of his own men and four Indians,
+who had become Christians, perished with him.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_163.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">The death of Magellan.</span></p>
+
+<p>There was one man who was true to the Admiral
+to the end. He was wounded with him, but survived.
+He it was that saw that the Admiral had
+forgotten himself at the hour of the final conflict.
+It was Pigafetta, the Italian, whose narrative we
+are following.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>This hero of the pen says of him to whom he
+gave his heart:</p>
+
+<p>"One of his principal virtues was constancy in
+the most adverse fortune."</p>
+
+<p>"It was God who made me the messenger of the
+new heavens and new earth, and told me where to
+find them," said Columbus. "Maps, charts, and
+mathematical knowledge had nothing to do with
+the case."</p>
+
+<p>As sublime an inspiration is seen in the words of
+Pigafetta in regard to Magellan:</p>
+
+<p>"<i>No one gave to him the example how to encompass
+the globe.</i>" His sight was the inner eye, the pure
+vision of a consecrated purpose in life.</p>
+
+<p>No hero of the sea has ever been more noble!
+His purpose in life was everything; he had the faith
+of a Christian Knight; he was as nothing to himself,
+but to others all, and he died giving his own
+body for a shield to his men. His name will always
+be associated with what is glorious in the history
+of the Philippines.</p>
+
+<p>Magellan was dead, but a good purpose lives in
+others. Magellan dead, Del Cano yet lives, and the
+Italian historian has other scenes to record.</p>
+
+<p>The farol of Magellan will go on; it will never
+cease to shine, and the cast-out name of the Christian
+Knight will become a fixed star amid the lights that
+have inspired the world.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap21" id="chap21"></a>CHAPTER XXI.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE SPICE ISLANDS.&mdash;WONDERFUL BIRDS.&mdash;CLOVES,
+CINNAMON, NUTMEGS, GINGER.&mdash;THE SHIPS OVERLOADED.</h4>
+
+
+
+<p>The massacre at Matan caused the Spaniards
+to lose credit in the eyes of the natives. The King
+of Seba turned against them, thus throwing a
+shadow on the glory of Magellan's missionary work.
+The Spaniards were, however, much to blame for the
+change that took place in the King's heart.</p>
+
+<p>Their ships were becoming unseaworthy.</p>
+
+<p>They were reduced to two ships, the Victoria and
+the Trinidad, and these shaped their course for the
+Moluccas, or Spice Islands, by the way of Borneo.
+Del Cano began to represent the spirit of Magellan
+among the crews.</p>
+
+<p>They came to the Bornean city, Brunei, "a collection
+of houses built on piles over the water, where
+were twenty-five thousand fires or families." On
+the shore was the palace of a voluptuous Sultan, its
+walls hung with brocades of silk. Here was also
+one of the most curious markets in all the world,
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span>
+carried on at high tide, when there gathered a great
+army of canoes.</p>
+
+<p>On November 8, 1521, the two ships anchored off
+Tidor on the Spice Islands, saluting the King of the
+place with a broadside.</p>
+
+<p>They concluded a treaty of peace with the King,
+and began to load the two ships with spice, and
+especially with cloves, a kind of spice at that time
+regarded as a great luxury in Spain.</p>
+
+<p>If Pigafetta had desired above all things to see
+the wonders of the ocean world, he must again have
+been gratified here at some of the presents sent to
+the ships by the natives. Columbus had brought to
+Spain gorgeous parrots or macaws. But the King
+of Batchian sent to him a bird whose plumage surpassed
+anything that he had ever seen.</p>
+
+<p>"It is the bird of Paradise," said the agent of the
+royal almoner.</p>
+
+<p>The Italian did not doubt it. He wished to learn
+the history of this superb inhabitant of the air.</p>
+
+<p>He did in a way that excited his wonder beyond
+measure.</p>
+
+<p>The bird, after the Mohammedan account, was
+born in Paradise. It came down from Heaven where
+dwelt departed souls, who had died true to the Moslem
+faith.</p>
+
+<p>These birds were found dead, and they had no
+feet. If Pigafetta inquired the cause of this, he
+doubtless was answered:
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"They do not need feet; they never alight on the
+ground."</p>
+
+<p>But as greatly as the Chevalier must have wondered,
+he was not induced to accept the Moslem
+faith.</p>
+
+<p>They overcrowded the ships while receiving the
+favors of the Sultan of Tidor.</p>
+
+<p>An account of their voyage about the Spice
+Islands, "most delightful to read," as we are
+told in the title, was written by one Maximilianus
+Transylvanus, from which we gather the following
+incidents (Hakluyt Society) of great pearls and
+strange men:</p>
+
+<p>"They came to the shores of the Island of Solo,
+where they heard that there were pearls as big as
+dove's eggs, and sometimes as hen's eggs, but which
+can only be fished up from the very deepest sea.
+Our men brought no large pearl, because the season
+of the year did not allow of the fishery. But they
+testify that they had taken an oyster in that region,
+the flesh of which weighed forty-seven pounds. For
+which reason I could easily believe that pearls of
+that great size are found there; for it is clearly
+proved that pearls are the product of shellfish. And
+to omit nothing, our men constantly affirm that the
+islanders of Porne told him that the King wore in
+his crown two pearls of the size of a goose's egg.</p>
+
+<p>"Hence they went to the Island of Gilo, where
+they saw men with ears so long and pendulous that
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span>
+they reached to their shoulders. When our men
+were mightily astonished at this, they learnt from
+the natives that there was another island not far
+off where the men had ears not only pendulous, but
+so long and broad that one of them would cover the
+whole head if they wanted it (<i>cum exusu esset</i>). But
+our men, who sought not monsters but spices, neglecting
+this nonsense, went straight to the Moluccas,
+and they discovered them eight months after their
+Admiral, Magellan, had fallen in Matan. The
+islands are five in number, and are called Tarante,
+Muthil, Thidore, Mare, and Matthien; some on this
+side some on the other, and some upon the equinoctial
+line.</p>
+
+<p>"One produces cloves, another nutmegs, and another
+cinnamon. All are near to each other, but
+small and rather narrow."</p>
+
+<p>The world to-day thinks little of spices, for commerce
+has made common the luxuries of the Indian
+Ocean. Cloves, nutmegs, allspice, cinnamon, ginger
+are found in every home in all civilized lands, and
+even children make few inquiries about them.</p>
+
+<p>This was not so in the early days of the Viceroys
+of India. Spices which were gathered and sold by
+Arabian merchants, were held in Europe as a gift
+of Arabia, and esteemed to be the greatest, or among
+the greatest of luxuries. A ship laden with spices was
+hailed in the ports of the Iberian peninsula as next
+to a ship freighted with gold, as the Golden Hynde
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span>
+was welcomed in the days of Sir Francis Drake.
+It used to be said that the odors of the spice ships
+from the East Indies could be breathed through the
+breezes that wafted them toward the land.</p>
+
+<p>The principal Spice Islands were the Moluccas,
+or the islands of the East India Archipelago between
+Celebes on the west and New Guinea on the east,
+Timor on the south and the open Pacific Sea on the
+north. They are distributed over a wide ocean area.
+Of these the Moluccas form the principal group.
+Here are the paradises of the seas.</p>
+
+<p>It was to these islands where could be procured
+the products of "Araby the Blessed" that Magellan
+had hoped to find a new way. There were brighter
+shores than Spain, and to these he sought the
+shortest routes over which ships could travel.</p>
+
+<p>The Peruvian adventurers wished to find gold;
+the voyagers to the Antilles, magical waters and new
+productions of the earth; but Magellan's dream was
+of the spiceries of the Indian seas. They all found
+what they sought, except Ponce de Leon, who hoped
+to find the Fountain of Eternal Youth.</p>
+
+<p>Transylvanus speaks of another wonderful bird
+that only alighted at death, and whose feathers were
+believed to possess magic powers.</p>
+
+<p>"The kings of Marmin began to believe that souls
+were immortal a few years ago, induced by no other
+argument than that they saw that a certain most
+beautiful small bird never rested upon the ground
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span>
+nor upon anything that grew upon it; but they sometimes
+saw it fall dead upon the ground from the sky.
+And as the Mohammedans, who traveled to those
+parts for commercial purposes, told them that this
+bird was born in Paradise, and that Paradise was the
+abode of the souls of those who had died, these
+kings (reguli) embraced the sect of Mohammed, because
+it promised wonderful things concerning this
+abode of souls. But they call the bird Mamuco
+Diata, and they hold it in such reverence and religious
+esteem that they believe that by it their
+kings are safe in war, even though they, according
+to custom, are placed in the forefront of battle."</p>
+
+<p>He continues his narrative:</p>
+
+<p>"But, our men having carefully inspected the
+position of the Moluccas and of each separate island,
+and also having inquired about the habits of the
+kings, went to Thedori, because they learnt, that in
+that island the supply of cloves was far above that of
+the others, and that its King also surpassed the
+other kings in wisdom and humanity. So, having
+prepared their gifts they land, and salute the King,
+and they offer the presents as if they had been sent
+by Cæsar. He, having received the presents kindly,
+looks up to Heaven, and says:</p>
+
+<p>"'I have known now for two years from the
+course of the stars, that you were coming to seek
+these lands, sent by the most mighty King of Kings.
+Wherefore your coming is the more pleasant and
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span>
+grateful to me, as I had been forewarned of it by
+the signification of the stars.</p>
+
+<p>"'And, as I know that nothing ever happens to
+any man which has not been fixed long before by
+the decree of fate and the stars, I will not be the one
+to attempt to withstand either the fates or the signification
+of the stars, but willingly and of good
+cheer, will henceforth lay aside the royal pomp and
+will consider myself as managing the administration
+of this island only in the name of your King.
+Wherefore draw your ships into port, and order the
+rest of your comrades to land; so that now at last,
+after such a long tossing upon the seas, and so many
+dangers, you may enjoy the pleasures of the land
+and refresh your bodies. And think not but that
+you have arrived at your King's kingdom.'</p>
+
+<p>"Having said this, the King, laying aside his
+crown, embraced them one by one, and ordered
+whatever food that land afforded to be brought. Our
+men being overjoyed at this, returned to their comrades,
+and told them what had happened. They,
+pleased above measure with the friendly behavior
+and kindness of the King, take possession of the
+island. And when their health was completely restored,
+in a few days, by the King's munificence, they
+sent envoys to the other kings, to examine the
+wealth of the islands, and to conciliate the other
+kings."</p>
+
+<p>His description of the clove trees is very pleasing:
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Tirante was the nearest, and also the smallest,
+of the islands; for it has a circumference of a little
+more than six Italian miles. Matthien is next to it,
+and it, too, is small. These three produce a great
+quantity of cloves, but more every fourth year than
+the other three. These trees only grow on steep
+rocks, and that so thickly as frequently to form a
+grove. This tree is very like a laurel (or bay tree)
+in leaf, closeness of growth, and height; and the
+gariophile, which they call clove from its likeness to
+a nail (clavus), grows on the tip of each separate
+twig. First a bud, and then a flower, just like the
+orange flower is produced.</p>
+
+<p>"The pointed part of the clove is fixed at the
+extreme end of the branch, and then growing slightly
+longer, it forms a spike. It is at first red, but soon
+gets black by the heat of the sun. The natives keep
+the plantations of these trees separate, as we do our
+vines. They bury the cloves in pits till they are
+taken away by the traders."</p>
+
+<p>He also describes the cinnamon tree:</p>
+
+<p>"Muthil, the fourth island, is not larger than the
+rest, and it produces cinnamon. The tree is full of
+shoots, and in other respects barren; it delights in
+dryness, and is very like the tree which bears pomegranates.
+The bark of this splits under the influence
+of the sun's heat, and is stripped off the wood; and,
+after drying a little in the sun, it is cinnamon."</p>
+
+<p>Also the nutmeg tree:
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Near to this is another island, called Bada,
+larger and more ample than the Moluccas. In this
+grows the nutmeg, the tree of which is tall and
+spreading, and is rather like the walnut tree, and
+its nut, too, grows like the walnut; for it is protected
+by a double husk, at first like a furry calix,
+and under this a thin membrane, which embraces
+the nutlike network. This is called the Muscat
+flower with us, but by the Spaniards mace, and is
+a noble and wholesome spice. The other covering
+is a woody shell, like that of a hazelnut, and in
+that, as we have already said, is the nutmeg."</p>
+
+<p>And ginger:</p>
+
+<p>"Ginger grows here and there in each of the
+islands of the archipelago. It sometimes grows by
+sowing, and sometimes spontaneously; but that
+which is sown is the more valuable. Its grass is like
+that of the saffron, and its root is almost the same
+too, and that is ginger."</p>
+
+<p>While sailing among these bowery ocean gardens,
+and gathering their odorous products, the poetic
+Maximilianus was presented with one of the immortal
+birds that protected a hero in battle, "the
+bird of God."</p>
+
+<p>He thus speaks of the rare present:</p>
+
+<p>"Our men were kindly treated by the chiefs in
+turn, and they, too, submitted freely to the rule of
+Cæsar, like the King of Thidori. But the Spaniards,
+who had but two ships, resolved to bring some of
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span>
+each (spice) home, but to load the ships with cloves,
+because the crop of that was the most abundant that
+year, and our ships could contain a greater quantity
+of this kind of spice. Having, therefore, loaded
+the ships with cloves, and having received letters
+and presents for Cæsar from the Kings, they make
+ready for their departure. The letters were full of
+submission and respect. The gifts were Indian
+swords, and things of that sort. But, best of all, the
+Mamuco Diata; that is, the bird of God, by which
+they believe themselves to be safe and invincible
+in battle. Of which five were sent, and one I obtained
+from the Captain (<i>congran prieghi</i>), which I
+send to your reverence, not that your reverence may
+think yourself safe from treachery and the sword
+by means of it, as they profess to do, but that you
+may be pleased with its rareness and beauty. I send
+also some cinnamon and nutmeg and cloves, to show
+that our spices are not only not worse, but more
+valuable than those which the Venetians and Portuguese
+bring, because they are fresher."</p>
+
+<p>He also relates the disasters which fell to one of
+the overloaded ships:</p>
+
+<p>"When our men had set sail from Thedori, one
+of the ships, and that the larger one, having sprung
+a leak, began to make water, so that it became necessary
+to put back to Thedori. When the Spaniards
+saw that this mischief could not be remedied without
+great labor and much time, they agreed that the
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span>
+other ship should sail to the Cape of Cattigara, and
+afterward through the deep as far as possible from
+the coast of India, lest it should be seen by the Portuguese,
+and until they saw the promontory of
+Africa which projects beyond the tropic of Capricorn,
+and to which the Portuguese have given the
+name of Good Hope; and from that point the passage
+to Spain would be easy.</p>
+
+<p>"But as soon as the other ship was refitted it
+should direct its course through the archipelago,
+and that vast ocean toward the shores of the continent
+which we mentioned before, till it found that
+coast which was in the neighborhood of Darien, and
+where the southern sea was separated from the
+western, in which are the Spanish Islands, by a very
+narrow piece of land. So the ship sailed again from
+Thedori, and, having gone twelve degrees on the
+other side of the equinoctial line, they did not find
+the Cape of Cattigara, which Ptolemy supposed to
+extend even beyond the equinoctial line; and when
+they had traversed an immense space of sea, they
+came to the Cape of Good Hope and afterward to the
+Islands of the Hesperides.</p>
+
+<p>"And, as this ship let in water, being much
+knocked about by this long voyage, the sailors, many
+of whom had died by hardships by land and by sea,
+could not clear the ship of water. Wherefore they
+landed upon one of the islands, which is named after
+Saint James, to buy slaves.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"But as our men had no money, they offered,
+sailor fashion, cloves for the slaves. This matter
+having come to the ears of the Portuguese who were
+in command of the island, thirteen of our men were
+thrown into prison. The rest were eighteen in
+number.</p>
+
+<p>"Frightened by the strangeness of this behavior,
+they started straight for Spain, leaving their shipmates
+behind them. And so, in the sixteenth month
+after leaving Thedori, they arrived safe and sound
+on the 6th of September, at the port near Hispalis
+(Seville). Worthier, indeed, are our sailors of eternal
+fame than the Argonauts who sailed with Jason to
+Colchis. And much more worthy was their ship of
+being placed among the stars than that old Argo;
+for that only sailed from Greece through Pontus,
+but ours from Hispalis to the South; and after that,
+through the whole West and the Southern hemisphere,
+penetrating into the East, and again returned
+to the West."</p>
+
+<p>His subscription is interesting:</p>
+
+
+<p>"I commend myself most humbly to your reverence.
+Given at Vallisoleti, on the 23d of October,
+1522.</p>
+
+
+<p>
+"Your most reverend and illustrious lordship's<br />
+&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; "Most humble and constant servant,<br />
+<span class="smcap" style="margin-left: 20%">"Maximilianus Transylvanus."</span>
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<p>When the spice ship began to fill with water, the
+officers sent for native divers. But these, although
+very skillful, could not find the place or the cause
+of the leak.</p>
+
+<p>Let us change our view to a different scene, across
+the wide tropical world.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap22" id="chap22"></a>CHAPTER XXII.</h3>
+
+<h4>MESQUITA IN PRISON.</h4>
+
+
+<p>While the little ship Victoria, which had sought
+for Mesquita in vain, was sailing around the world,
+and was returning laden with spice, Mesquita himself
+remained shut out from the sun by the shadows
+of prison walls. His lite became more and more
+silent and neglected.</p>
+
+<p>We know not by what authority he was held in
+a dungeon for advising the supposed crimes of his
+cousin Magellan. It could not have been that of
+Juana, who was still watching over the tomb from
+which she expected her husband to rise, nor by good
+Cardinal Ximenes, and possibly not by Charles V
+himself, but perhaps by one of his ministers. It
+may have been by the direction of Charles, for his
+imprisonment implies doubt; otherwise with such
+an array of testimony against him, we might expect
+he would have been executed.</p>
+
+<p>Two years had passed over beautiful Seville, and
+the India House there must have began to doubt the
+story of Gormez as not one of the other ships returned.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span>
+These ships might have been cast away in
+the wintry seas that Gormez and his crew described,
+or the flag of Spain that the daring Portuguese had
+set toward the Spice Islands of the East by the way
+of the South might be seen again some day, rising
+over the Guadalquivir.</p>
+
+<p>Mesquita believed in his cousin Magellan; not
+only in him as a true man, but as one who had a
+divine calling to fulfill; as one whom destiny had
+allotted to lead the decisive events of mankind. He
+still felt that he would prove another Columbus or
+Vasco da Gama.</p>
+
+<p>The two priests whom Magellan had marooned
+had honestly thought Magellan mad. But Mesquita
+had his own confessor, and we can easily fancy how
+the prisoner must have opened his heart to him.</p>
+
+<p>"Padre, I am misunderstood," we can hear him
+say. "Time tells the truth about all men. Time
+vindicates all.</p>
+
+<p>"Padre, some messenger from Magellan will come
+back again. Time weighs all events, and life is self
+revealing. The heralds will blow their trumpets
+then, and the bells will ring.</p>
+
+<p>"Padre, they do well to prolong my life. Some
+day my prison doors will open wide, and I shall ride
+through the streets of Seville, and those who doubt
+me now will hail me as a heart that, was always true
+to a Knight whose heart will be found true to the
+Emperor!"<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The lamp of his faith burned clear and odorous oil.
+He had a quiet conscience. But how must the conspirators
+have felt during these uncertain months?
+The ships did not return. That seemed to favor one
+view of the madness of Magellan, and yet it did not
+leave them at ease. There were some who reasoned:
+If Magellan were indeed mad on his own ship, why
+might not one or more of the other ships have returned?
+If the other ships had been loyal to the
+lantern of Magellan, and had kept together, might
+the fleet not return again? Should it return what
+a stigma would be cast on the characters of the
+cowardly mutineers! In such a case Mesquita
+would become a hero, and the latter would have to
+flee from their own names.</p>
+
+<p>Charles V was in his promise of glory now. In
+1519, as we have before stated, he had been elected
+Emperor of Germany; and in 1520 he had been
+crowned at Aix la Chapelle, amid great rejoicings,
+and the Pope had bestowed upon him the title of
+Cæsar or Emperor of the Roman world. He was
+called "Cæsar" in the chronicles of the times.</p>
+
+<p>Poor Juana took no interest in any of these pomps
+of her son, as they shook the world. Her ears were
+deaf to them, her heart was dead to them all. The
+mother of "Cæsar" was almost the only person in
+Spain who hailed not the glory of Cæsar.</p>
+
+<p>Amid all the splendors of his court the dream
+of Magellan must still have haunted the mind of the
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span>
+new Cæsar. He had accepted the story brought by
+the returned ship; but Magellan the madman might
+come back again. Madmen had returned before.</p>
+
+<p>The period was a wonderful one. Printing, the
+art of which had been but recently developed after
+the discovery of Gutenberg, was revealing its great
+possibilities. These were the times of Francis in
+France, and of Henry VIII in England. The Reformation
+was overturning Germany. The whole
+world seemed to be changing.</p>
+
+<p>If the ships of Magellan were to find a new way
+to the East, and were to sail around the world, what
+surprising events might follow!</p>
+
+<p>So, night after night, Mesquita could but hope
+and ask:</p>
+
+<p>"Where is the lantern of Magellan now?"</p>
+
+<p>Seville was full of maritime prosperity. The
+tuneful bells in her many churches had frequent
+occasions to ring out for national festivals. The
+sailors loved these services, and especially those that
+celebrated the triumphs of the Virgin whose dominion
+had become, as was supposed, the sea, and
+who was hailed as the "Star of the Deep."</p>
+
+<p>The happy crowds on their way to the rejoicing
+churches must have passed the prison walls where
+Mesquita was detained. Life indeed must have been
+mysterious to him. The world in which he deserved
+so much honor and happiness was shut out from
+him&mdash;even the sun and stars.</p>
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[161]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap23" id="chap23"></a>CHAPTER XXIII.</h3>
+
+<h4>STRANGE STORIES.&mdash;THE WISE OLD WOMEN.&mdash;THE
+WALKING LEAVES.&mdash;THE HAUNTED SANDALWOOD
+TREES.&mdash;THE EMPEROR OF CHINA.&mdash;THE LITTLE
+BOY AND THE GIANT BIRD.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Pigafetta was no Munchausen, but he had a
+love of marvelous stories, and there never was a
+voyage that offered to a European a greater number
+of curious events and superstitions. Some of the
+incidents that excited our Chevalier's wonder were
+natural events which have been since explained.
+The superstitious legends of the people were, however,
+for the most part but the growth of folklore
+through the imagination.</p>
+
+<p>One of these accounts relates to the wise old
+women who prepared the sacrifices of the wild boar
+as offerings to the sun. It shows how small may be
+the real meaning of pompous and pretentious ceremonies.
+The rites took place in the Philippines.</p>
+
+<p>Says Pigafetta in his narrative prepared for the
+Grand Master of the Knight of Rhodes:</p>
+
+<p>"Since I have spoken of the idols, it may please
+your illustrious Highness to have an account of the
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span>
+ceremony with which, in this island, they bless the
+pig. They begin by sounding some great drums
+(tamburi); they then bring three large dishes; two
+are filled with cakes of rice and cooked millet rolled
+up in leaves, with roast fish; in the third are Cambay
+cloths and two strips of palm cloth. A cloth of
+Cambay is spread out on the ground; then two old
+women come, each of whom has in her hand a reed
+trumpet. They step upon the cloth and make an
+obeisance to the sun; they then clothe themselves
+with the above-mentioned cloths. The first of these
+puts on her head a handkerchief which she ties on
+her forehead so as to make two horns, and taking
+another handkerchief in her hand, dances and sounds
+her trumpet and invokes the sun.</p>
+
+<p>"The second old woman takes one of the strips
+of palm cloth and dances, and also sounds her
+trumpet; thus they dance and sound their trumpets
+for a short space of time, saying several things to
+the sun. The first old woman then drops the handkerchief
+she has in her hand and takes the other
+strip of cloth, and both together sounding their
+trumpets, dance for a long time round the pig which
+is bound on the ground. The first one always speaks
+in a low tone to the sun, and the second answers
+her. So the sun and the two old women had a luminous
+partnership.</p>
+
+<p>"The second old woman then presents a cup of
+wine to the first, who, while they both continue their
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[163]</a></span>
+address to the sun, brings the cup four or five times
+near the mouth as though going to drink, and meanwhile
+sprinkles the wine on the heart of the pig.
+She then gives up the cup, and receives a lance
+which she brandishes, while still dancing and reciting,
+and four or five times directs the lance at the
+pig's heart; at last, with a sudden and well-aimed
+blow, she pierces it through and through. She withdraws
+the lance from the wound, which is then
+closed and dressed with herbs.</p>
+
+<p>"During the ceremony a torch is always burning,
+and the old woman who pierced the pig takes and
+puts it out with her mouth; the other old woman
+dips the end of her trumpet in the pig's blood, and
+with it marks with blood the forehead of her husband
+and of her companion, and then of the rest of
+the people. But they did not come and do this
+to us.</p>
+
+<p>"That done the old women took off their robes
+and ate what was in the two dishes, inviting only
+women to join them. After that they get the hair
+off the pig with fire. Only old women are able to
+consecrate the boar, and this animal is never eaten
+unless it is killed in this manner."</p>
+
+<p>Pigafetta saw wonderful things in Borneo, among
+them a wild boar whose head was two and a half
+spans long, and oysters as large as turtles. He says
+that the flesh of one of these oysters weighed forty-five
+pounds.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>But the thing there which probably must have
+most greatly excited his curiosity was the <i>walking
+leaves</i>. There were certain trees on the islands that
+had very animated leaves. When one of these
+leaves fell from the tree, it did not lie where it fell,
+to rot or to be shuffled by the winds, but it lifted
+itself up and walked away.</p>
+
+<p>Here was a sight indeed to make the young Italian
+fly to his memoranda book, which he did.</p>
+
+<p>Other travelers later saw the same curious thing,
+but they examined the miracle more closely than the
+credulous Chevalier. They found that the leaves
+were moved by an insect that lived inside of them,
+like the Mexican bean, which is used as a toy, and
+will jump about a table.</p>
+
+<p>The islands of the Indian Ocean abound in sandalwood.
+Of the sandal trees Pigafetta heard other
+curious legends. One of them tells us that when the
+people of the Timor went out to cut sandalwood, the
+devil appeared to them, and demanded them to bargain
+with him for the wood. This they did, for those
+who cut the wood are otherwise likely to fall sick;
+a poisonous miasma is exhaled from the wounded
+wood.</p>
+
+<p>Pigafetta heard also marvelous tales of the Emperor
+of China, who seemed to live amid human
+walls. There may be some truths in these incidents;
+if so, what a remarkable condition must have been
+that of the Chinese court four hundred years ago!
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>He says:</p>
+
+<p>"The kingdom of Cocchi lies next; its sovereign
+is named Raja Seri Bummipala. After that follows
+Great China, the king of which is the greatest sovereign
+of the world, and is called Santoa Raja. He
+has seventy crowned kings under his dependence;
+and some of these kings have ten or fifteen lesser
+kings dependent on them. The port of this kingdom
+is named Guantan, and among the many cities of
+this Empire, two are the most important, namely,
+Nankin and Comlaha, where the King usually resides.</p>
+
+<p>"He has four of his principal ministers close to
+his palace, at the four sides looking to the four cardinal
+winds; that is, one to the west, one to the
+east, to the south, and to the north. Each of these
+gives audience to those that come from his quarter.
+All the kings and lords of India major and superior
+obey this King, and in token of their vassalage, each
+is obliged to have in the middle of the principal
+palace of his city the marble figure of a certain animal
+named Chinga, an animal more valuable than
+the lion; the figure of this animal is also engraved
+on the King's seal, and all who wish to enter his port
+must carry the same emblem in wax or ivory.</p>
+
+<p>"If any lord is disobedient to him, he is flayed,
+and his skin, dried in the sun, salted, and stuffed, is
+placed in an eminent part of the public place, with
+the head inclined and the hands on the head in the
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span>
+attitude of doing zongu; that is obeisance to the
+King.</p>
+
+<p>"He is never visible to anybody; and if he wishes
+to see his people he is carried about the palace on
+a peacock most skillfully manufactured and very
+richly adorned, with six ladies dressed exactly like
+himself, so that he can not be distinguished from
+them. He afterward passes into a richly adorned
+figure of a serpent called Naga, which has a large
+glass in the breast, through which he and the ladies
+are seen, but it is not possible to distinguish which
+is the King. He marries his sisters in order that his
+blood should not mix with that of others.</p>
+
+<p>"His palace has seven walls around it, and in each
+circle there are daily ten thousand men on guard,
+who are changed every twelve hours at the sound
+of a bell. Each wall has its gate, with a guard at
+each gate. At the first stands a man with a great
+scourge in his hand, named Satuhoran with satubagan;
+at the second, a dog called Satuhain; at the
+third, a man with an iron mace, called Satuhoran
+with pocumbecin; at the fourth, a man with a bow
+in his hand, called Saturhoran with anatpanan; at
+the fifth, a man with a lance, called Satuhoran with
+tumach; at the sixth, a lion, called Saturhorimau;
+at the seventh, two white elephants, called Gagiapute.</p>
+
+<p>"The palace contains seventy-nine halls, in which
+dwell only the ladies destined to serve the King;
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span>
+there are always torches burning there. It is not possible
+to go round the palace in less than a day. In
+the upper part of it are four halls where the ministers
+go to speak to the King; one is ornamented
+with metal, both the pavement and the walls; another
+is all of silver, another all of gold, and the
+other is set with pearls and precious stones. The
+gold and other valuable things which are brought as
+tribute to the King are placed in these rooms; and
+when they are there deposited, they say, 'Let this be
+for the honor and glory of our Santoa Raja.' All
+these things and many others relating to this King,
+were narrated to us by a Moor, who said that he had
+seen them."</p>
+
+<p>A palace of seven walls, seventy-nine halls,
+and ten thousand men on guard! A hall of silver,
+another of gold, and one of precious stones! It took
+a day to encompass it. We may well wonder how
+much of truth there was in this brief Oriental story!</p>
+
+<p>When the adventurers came to Java they heard
+some tales that were marvelous, and that quite
+equaled those which Queen Scheherezade of the
+Arabian Nights told of Sinbad the Sailor.</p>
+
+<p>One of these fabulous stories, told them by a
+pilot, had an Oriental charm and coloring. It was
+of a giant bird, like the roc of the Arabian Nights.</p>
+
+<p>According to this fanciful legend which we give
+with some freedom, there was a land called Java
+Major on the north of the Gulf of China, where grew
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span>
+an enormous tree, seemingly as big as a mountain&mdash;one
+of the greatest trees in all the world. In this
+tree, which might have shaded a hill, lived a colony
+of birds, with wings like clouds, so broad and powerful
+that they could lift an elephant or a buffalo into
+the air and bear him away to the mountainous tree.
+The fruit of this tree was larger than the largest
+melons.</p>
+
+<p>There were Moors on the ship where this story of
+the great tree and the great bird was told. One of
+them said:</p>
+
+<p>"I have <i>seen</i> the great bird with my own
+eyes!"</p>
+
+<p>Another Moor said:</p>
+
+<p>"One of the birds was once captured, and sent
+as a present to the King of Siam!"</p>
+
+<p>An account of the capture of such a bird would
+have been very interesting!</p>
+
+<p>There were great whirlpools around the mountainous
+tree. So that no ship could approach within
+three or four leagues of it.</p>
+
+<p>But once, according to the legend, some adventurous
+sailors sailed near the great tree. They had
+a little boy on board their boat, and he must have
+surveyed the giant of the forest with wonder.</p>
+
+<p>They sailed too near, for presently their boat
+began to go round and round, and they found themselves
+in the power of the whirlpool.</p>
+
+<p>Round and round went the junk until it struck
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span>
+against a rock, and all on board perished, except the
+little boy, who was supple.</p>
+
+<p>This child caught a plank and held on to it. He
+was carried hither and thither among the eddies and
+breakers, but he found himself drawing nearer and
+nearer the great tree. At last he was cast on shore
+at the foot of the tree.</p>
+
+<p>"Here must be my home," said he, for he thought
+he never could get away again. No boat could come
+to him, and <i>he</i> could not fly.</p>
+
+<p>The tree had great masses of bark, so that he
+could climb up into it. He mounted up to its high
+limbs. He could not starve, for the fruit of such a
+tree must have been sufficient to have supplied a
+colony.</p>
+
+<p>So cast away on the tree, he here expected to live
+and to die.</p>
+
+<p>Toward sunset great wings like clouds darkened
+the shining air. The birds were coming home to-night
+in the tree. Their nests were there as big as
+houses.</p>
+
+<p>They settled down, causing a great wind, and put
+their great heads under their wings and went to
+sleep.</p>
+
+<p>The boy was bright, and a plan of getting away
+from the tree came to him. He reasoned that if he
+could not fly the bird could, and what would be the
+weight of a little boy to a bird who could carry
+away an elephant?
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[170]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>So he marked the largest and most powerful bird
+with his eye, and crept up to it and got under his
+wing, and into his great feathers.</p>
+
+<p>The bird was asleep and did not wake!</p>
+
+<p>Morning came, and with the first red dawn, as
+we may fancy, the bird threw up his head and
+begun to stir. He lifted himself up and shook
+himself, but he did not shake off the boy, who
+was safely nestled among the little forest of its
+feathers.</p>
+
+<p>The sun was brightening the islands, and the
+bird mounted up and flew away in search of food,
+carrying the little boy under his wing.</p>
+
+<p>After traversing the sunrise air for a long time,
+the bird flew over a land of buffaloes.</p>
+
+<p>He here descended to capture a buffalo, to bear
+him away to the mountainous tree for food. As he
+alighted on the back of the buffalo with a wild
+scream of delight, the little boy dropped out from
+under his wing, and so found his way to his own
+island.</p>
+
+<p>It was the little boy that told this large story,
+quite like Sinbad's.</p>
+
+<p>There were found mysterious fruits floating on
+the sea, which were supposed to have fallen from
+the tree.</p>
+
+<p>"I have seen the bird myself," said a third Moorish
+pilot, and with the testimony of the little boy,
+and the three pilots and the floating fruit, this story
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span>
+ought to be as trustworthy as the one of Sinbad the
+Sailor.</p>
+
+<p>The voyage back to the Cape of Good Hope and
+thence to the Cape Verde Islands was one for strange
+reflections. Del Cano now was the leader of the
+returning mariners. The expedition had gone out
+from the port of Seville amid shouting quays and
+towers, with some two hundred and seventy men.
+Only one ship was returning and she was bringing
+home hardly as many men as composed her own
+crew.</p>
+
+<p>We can imagine Del Cano on deck, with the lantern
+of Magellan still swinging above him, talking
+with his officers on a tropical night off the African
+coast.</p>
+
+<p>"Magellan has found an unknown grave," we
+may hear him say.</p>
+
+<p>"But humanity will mourn for him, and honor
+him, and the grave matters not," answers a padre.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall never see Mesquita again," continues
+Del Cano.</p>
+
+<p>"We can not be sure," replies the padre. "We
+can know nothing that we do not see."</p>
+
+<p>"We surely shall never meet Carthagena again.
+I can see in my memory those last biscuits and
+bottles of wine. He needs none of them now."</p>
+
+<p>"He may have them all," answers the padre.</p>
+
+<p>"We are yet rich in spices. We shall surprise
+the world when we drop anchor at Seville."
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"And Seville may have surprises for us," says
+the hopeful padre.</p>
+
+<p>They drifted on under favoring airs. The soul of
+Del Cano was lost to common events in the wonderful
+revelations of the sea. Should he reach Seville,
+he would be the living hero of the most marvelous
+voyage ever made by any mariner.</p>
+
+<p>Such were the scenes and tales that crowded
+upon the mind of Pigafetta, who wished "to see
+the wonders of the world." The story of the Emperor
+of China's palace is associated with objects
+so marvelous that the meaning of their names is
+lost to-day.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[173]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap24" id="chap24"></a>CHAPTER XXIV.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE LOST DAY.</h4>
+
+
+<p>When they reached the Cape Verde Islands, the
+sailors found that a very strange thing had happened.</p>
+
+<p>They had lost a day&mdash;or, the islanders had
+gained a day!</p>
+
+<p>They met the ships from Seville there, and doubtless
+disputed with the traders in regard to what
+day of the week it was.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the 6th of September," they said; "a day
+that we shall ever have occasion to celebrate."</p>
+
+<p>"It is the 7th of September," said their joyous
+friends.</p>
+
+<p>The sailors consulted with each other. All
+agreed that it was the 6th of September. Nowhere
+had they failed to make a daily memorandum. The
+people of Seville must have lost a day.</p>
+
+<p>The solar year consists of three hundred and
+sixty-five days and six hours, and if one sails West
+three years one will gain a day, and if one sails East,
+one will lose a day.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[174]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>If the reader will note the following dates of this
+wonderful voyage, he will solve the mystery of the
+"lost day:"</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>CHRONOLOGY OF THE FIRST VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD.</h4>
+
+
+
+
+<p><a name="noteE"></a>
+<a name="noteF"></a></p>
+
+<table style="margin-left: 15%; font-size: 10pt; " summary="Voyage Chronology">
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan arrives at Seville</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">October 20, 1518.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan's fleet sails from Seville, Monday<a href="#foot">[E]</a></td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">August 10, 1519.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan sails from San Lucar de Barrameda,<br />&nbsp; &nbsp; Tuesday</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">September 20, 1519.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan arrives at Teneriffe</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">September 26, 1519.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan sails from Teneriffe, Monday</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">October 3, 1519.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan arrives at Rio Janeiro</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">December 13, 1519.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan sails from Rio</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">December 26, 1519.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan sails from Rio de la Plata</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">February 2, 1520.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan arrives at Port St. Julian</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">March 31, 1520.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Eclipse of sun</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">April 17, 1520.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Loss of Santiago.</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan sails from Port St. Julian</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">August 24, 1520.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan sails from river of Santa Cruz</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">October 18, 1520.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan makes Cape of the Virgins, entrance<br />&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; of straits</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">October 21, 1520.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Desertion of San Antonio</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">November, 1520.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan issues from straits into the Pacific,<br />&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;Wednesday</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">November 28, 1520.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan fetches San Pablo Island</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">January 24, 1521.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan fetches Tiburones Island</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">February 4, 1521.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan reaches the Ladrone Islands, Wednesday</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">March 6, 1521.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan reaches Samar Island of the Philippines,<br />&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Saturday</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">March 16, 1521.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan reaches Mazzava Island, Thursday</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">March 28, 1521.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Magellan arrives at Zebu Island</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">April 7, 1521.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Death of Magellan at Matan, Saturday</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">April 27, 1521.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Arrival of San Antonio at Seville</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">May 6, 1521.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Arrival of Victoria and Trinity at Tidore,<br />&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Friday</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">November 8, 1521.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Victoria sails from Tidore</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">December 21, 1521.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Victoria discovers Amsterdam Island, Tuesday</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">March 18, 1552.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Victoria doubles the Cape of Good Hope</td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">May 18, 1552.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Victoria arrives at San Lucar, Wednesday<a href="#foot">[F]</a></td>
+<td style="padding-left: 20pt; ">September 6, 1552.</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+
+
+
+<p>They sought provisions of the Portuguese colony
+at Cape Verde.</p>
+
+<p>The Portuguese persecution of the expedition,
+which Magellan had made for Spain, did not cease
+even here. The Victoria sent out boats for rice.
+One of the sailors could not restrain his joy, and told
+the Portuguese who he was and whence he came.</p>
+
+<p>The jealousy of the Portuguese was aroused
+again.</p>
+
+<p>"The expedition carries glory to Spain," said
+they. "Did not the King tear the arms from Magellan's
+door?"</p>
+
+<p>One of the boats sent out for rice did not return.
+The Victoria knew why they were detained, and
+sailed away while she could, to bear the glorious
+news of the discovery to Seville.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[176]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chap25" id="chap25"></a>CHAPTER XXV.</h3>
+
+<h4>IN THE CHURCH OF OUR LADY OF VICTORY.&mdash;PIGAFETTA.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The Victoria cast anchor in the Port of Seville
+on September 8, 1522. Joy filled the city on
+that day, and heralds went forth to proclaim the
+news.</p>
+
+<p>What news it was!</p>
+
+<p>That Magellan had found a new way to the
+Pacific.</p>
+
+<p>That he had discovered the Pacific to be a mighty
+ocean.</p>
+
+<p>That he had sailed over it and found a new ocean
+world.</p>
+
+<p>That he was dead.</p>
+
+<p>That he had made immortal discoveries, and that
+one of his ships had sailed around the world.</p>
+
+<p>The hero of the day was Del Cano, the commander
+of the Victoria.</p>
+
+<p>There was a most beautiful church in Seville,
+called Our Lady of Victory. To that the returning
+mariners were summoned to give thanks for their
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[177]</a></span>
+discovery on the day after their arrival, September
+9, 1522.</p>
+
+<p>Bells rang out on the shining air. The remnant
+of the happy crews entered the church amid the
+joyous music to hear the songs of thanksgiving for
+victory:</p>
+
+
+<p style="margin-left: 18%; ">
+"We praise thee, O God!<br />
+We believe thee to be<br />
+The Father everlasting!"
+</p>
+
+
+<p>They had returned in the Victoria, and the service
+had to them a special significance in the church
+of that name.</p>
+
+<p>Mesquita must have heard the acclaiming city.</p>
+
+<p>To the prisoner who had waited in hope, the
+trumpets of the heralds must have been sweet after
+his release! Juana, the demented Queen, was yet
+watching by the tomb in view of her window, hoping
+at each dawn of the morning that she would find
+that the dust had awakened to life again. Charles
+was mapping Europe; his fire of ambition was
+glowing, and the news of the new fields of the
+ocean that these discoveries had brought to him
+filled him with pride and exultation.</p>
+
+<p>He resolved on giving Del Cano and his mariners
+a splendid reception, after the manner that Isabella
+had received Columbus.</p>
+
+<p>Del Cano was now the living representative of
+Magellan. In publicly receiving him with heralds,
+music, and festival he would do honor to Magellan,
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[178]</a></span>
+whose name was now immortal. So Charles spread
+his tables of silver and gold to those who had lived
+on the open sea on scraps of leather, and magnanimously
+welcomed as knights of the sea those who
+had followed the sun around the world.</p>
+
+<p>Spain opened the prison doors of Mesquita.</p>
+
+<p>How must Del Cano have welcomed Mesquita as
+he came forth from his prison, vindicated on these
+festal days!</p>
+
+<p>Mesquita was a hero now, and a hero among
+heroes, for he had been a martyr to the cause. The
+people's hearts overflowed toward him.</p>
+
+<p>So the islands of the new ocean world came to
+be the possessions of Spain, and from Philip, who
+succeeded Charles, were called the Philippines.
+They were to be governed, robbed, taxed, and, in
+part, reduced to slavery for the enrichment of Spain
+for nearly four hundred years. Then Spain was to
+vanish from their history in the smoke of Admiral
+Dewey's guns, and over them was to float the flag
+of the republic of the West.</p>
+
+<p>It is a strange allotment of events that these
+islands should introduce the republic of the West
+into the Asiatic world. A half century ago the subject
+of Europe in Asia excited the attention of mankind,
+but no one ever dreamed that a like topic of<a name="ill202"></a>
+America in Asia would ever become one of the
+political problems of the world.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[179]</a></span></p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_202.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Pigafetta presenting the history of<br />the voyage to the
+King of Spain.</span></p>
+
+<p>The future of these islands must be one of civilization,
+
+education, and development, and we may
+hope that these will be brought about under the
+divine law of American institutions, that "all governments
+derive their just powers from the consent
+of the governed." Justice alone is the true sword
+of power, perpetuity, and peace. To lead the natives
+of these islands to desire to receive all that is best
+in civilized life, is one of the great missions of the
+republic of the West; and that republic, governed by
+the conscience of the people, will be true to the
+cause of human rights.</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p><b>Pigafetta?</b> We must let him tell the story of his
+life on his return. "Leaving Seville I repaired to
+Valladolid, where I presented his sacred Majesty,
+Don Carlos, neither gold nor silver, but other things
+far more precious in the eyes of so great a sovereign.
+For I brought to him, among other things, a book
+written in my own hand, giving an account of all
+the things which had happened day by day on the
+voyage.</p>
+
+<p>"Then I went to Portugal, where I related to
+King John the things that I had seen.</p>
+
+<p>"Returning by the way of Spain, I came to
+France, where I presented treasures that I had
+brought home to the regent mother of the most
+Christian King Don Francis.</p>
+
+<p>"Then I turned my face toward Italy, where I
+gave myself to the service of the illustrious Philip
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[180]</a></span>
+de Villiers l'Isle Adams, the Grand Master of
+Rhodes."</p>
+
+<p>The scene of the presentation of the parchment
+story of Magellan to Charles V is most interesting.
+That manuscript was like the return of Magellan
+himself; it told what the hero of the sea had been
+and what he had done. It was in itself a work
+of genius, and the world has never ceased to
+read it in the spirit of sympathy in which it was
+written.</p>
+
+<p>We may fancy the scene: the young King surrounded
+by his court, in his happiest days; the
+Italian Knight amid the splendors of the audience
+room, placing in the hands of the new Cæsar the roll
+of the narrative of the voyage around the world!
+Such a story no pen had ever traced before. That
+must have been one of the proudest moments in the
+life of Charles as he took from the Knight the map
+of the round world.</p>
+
+<p>To the last Pigafetta was true to the Admiral;
+and one of the best things that can be said of any
+man is, "He is true hearted."</p>
+
+<p>A wooden statue of Del Cano was found at Cavite
+on the surrender of that port to Commodore Dewey.
+It was sent to Washington. It should be replaced
+by some worthy work of art.</p>
+
+<p>The island of Guam, of the Ladrones, which broke
+the long voyage of Magellan over the Pacific, and
+which is some fifteen hundred miles from Luzon, was
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[181]</a></span>
+captured by Captain Glass, of the United States
+cruiser Charleston, July 21, 1898. It is a connecting
+link between the West and the Orient. A memorial
+of Magellan, Del Cano, and Pigafetta might be suitably
+placed there.</p>
+
+<p>The author of the Songs of the Sierras has
+described the spirit of Columbus in a poem which
+has been highly commended. The interpretation
+applies as well to Magellan. We quote two verses:
+genius must overcome obstacles, and all obstacles, to
+be made divine.</p>
+
+
+<p class="center">THE PORT.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-left: 27%; ">
+Behind him lay the gray Azores,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Behind, the gates of Hercules.</span><br />
+Before him not the ghosts of shores,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Before him only shoreless seas.</span><br />
+The good mate said: "Now must we pray,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">For, lo! the very stars are gone.</span><br />
+Brave Admiral, speak&mdash;what shall I say?"<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">"Why say&mdash;Sail on, sail on, sail on!"</span><br />
+<br />
+They sailed, they sailed. Then spoke the mate:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">"This mad sea shows her teeth to-night;</span><br />
+She curls her lip and lies in wait<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">With lifted teeth as if to bite.</span><br />
+Brave Admiral, say but one good word,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">What shall we do when hope is gone?"</span><br />
+The words leaped as a leaping sword&mdash;<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">"Sail on, sail on, sail on and on!"</span><br />
+</p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[182]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3><a name="chapsupp" id="chapsupp"></a>SUPPLEMENTAL.</h3>
+
+<h4>THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.&mdash;LAGASPI.&mdash;THE STRUGGLE OF
+THE NATIVES WITH SPAIN.&mdash;STORY OF THE PATRIOT
+RIZAL.&mdash;AGUINALDO.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The Philippine Islands, which promise to become
+a republic of the seas, and the first republic in
+Asiatic waters, were for generations held by Spain.
+These one thousand and more sea gardens, some
+eleven thousand miles from New York, number
+about as few islands of importance as there are
+American States. The government of the more
+populous islands has been so restrictive that, before
+the boom of Dewey's guns in the China Sea, little
+was known about them to the world.</p>
+
+<p>The archipelago consists of some six hundred
+islands that might find marking on an ordinary map
+of the world.</p>
+
+<p>Twenty-five of these have gained a commercial
+standing, from which are collected products for foreign
+trade. The chief of these is Luzon, and the principal
+ports of the larger islands are Iloilo, on the
+island of Panay; Zebu and Zamboango.</p>
+
+<p>Luzon and the northern islands are inhabited by
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[183]</a></span>
+a partly civilized race, called the Tagals, who are
+supposed to be descended from immigrants from
+the Malay peninsula. They have had the reputation
+of a mild-mannered people, as they have long
+received, directly or indirectly, European influences.
+There are two thousand one hundred schools in
+Luzon and some six millions of the natives of the
+islands are claimed as Catholics.</p>
+
+<p>A sultanate was formed on the Sulu archipelago
+nearly eight hundred years ago, and the Mohammedan
+populations are called Moros or Moors. The
+Visayas people are a lower race. Colonies of Chinese
+are to be found in many of the larger islands, and
+these constitute the centers of thrift and industry.</p>
+
+<p>The official language of the islands is Spanish, but
+the natives speak in twenty or more dialects. The
+islands are supposed to contain about ten million
+people, but there are no correct censuses by
+which to compute the number. Even the islands
+themselves seem not to have been correctly counted.</p>
+
+<p>The history of the islands since their discovery
+has been one of the most silent in the world. They
+have been governed by Spain in such a manner as to
+enrich the Crown of Spain. When the Pope apportioned
+the newly discovered world among the Kings
+of the Church, the Western Hemisphere was given
+to Spain, and by an error of division Spain received
+the Moluccas or Spice Islands. Magellan declared
+the King of Spain suzerain of the islands, and after
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[184]</a></span>
+many years Spain sent an expedition from one of her
+colonies to Zebu to begin the occupation of the
+Spicery. The leader of this expedition, Miguel de
+Legaspi, caused his men to marry native women,
+hoping thereby more easily to subdue a wild and untrained
+race.</p>
+
+<p>In 1571 this colonizer brought Manila under his
+influence, and induced the native King to accept the
+suzerainty of the Spanish King. He proclaimed
+Manila the seat of Government, and made it an
+episcopal city.</p>
+
+<p>Legaspi came to learn a very strange thing. It
+was that the Chinese had made themselves masters
+of navigation <i>by monsoons</i>. They came down from
+their coasts to Manila Bay on northwest monsoons,
+and when the monsoons changed they were carried
+back again. This power was akin to steam. Their
+boats were junks, but they filled the marts of Manila
+with silks and other Oriental luxuries.</p>
+
+<p>Legaspi encouraged this trade. He was the
+founder of trade in the ports of the China Sea. He
+caused a market place to be built for the Chinese
+traders in Manila, in the form of a circus, and afterward
+opened a quarter for them within the walls.
+The Chinese still hold a large part of the retail trade
+of the port. Before the late Spanish war, they numbered
+about sixty thousand, and one hundred thousand
+in the port and provinces.</p>
+
+<p>The monks came and sought to convert the
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[185]</a></span>
+people; their efforts were partly successful, but
+sometimes ended in tragedies.</p>
+
+<p>The trade between Spain and the Philippines was
+for a long time carried on by the way of Mexico.
+The intercourse between the Crown and her dependencies
+here was infrequent. The Mohammedans
+waged frequent wars against the Catholic missionaries,
+whom they sought to exterminate.</p>
+
+<p>The friars became the real rulers of the civilized
+parts of the islands. The will of the Spanish priest
+was absolute. He was independent of State authority.
+The rule of the Church was so severe that it
+brought religion into disfavor, and when the power
+of Aguinaldo arose, that chief insisted upon the expulsion
+of certain monastic orders, as detrimental to
+liberty, and demanded the restoration of the estates
+of the Church to the people.</p>
+
+<p>Such is, in brief, the simple history of the islands
+discovered by Magellan before the archipelago was
+ceded by the treaty of Paris to the United States.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>MANILA.</h4>
+
+
+<p>Beautiful Manila, shining over the China Sea&mdash;so
+seductive to the white man when seen from a distance,
+so withering to all his energies when the same
+white man becomes a resident there!</p>
+
+<p>A two days' voyage from Hong Kong brings
+the traveler to Luzon to the river Pasig, where
+the grim old fortresses of Manila, earthquake rent,
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[186]</a></span>
+like a haze of green vegetation, break the view.
+Palms lift their green cool shadows in the burning
+air.</p>
+
+<p>Manila is a walled city. The entrance is by drawbridges,
+which are raised at night.</p>
+
+<p>The mediæval atmosphere does not disappear
+when one finds one's self within the walls. Exhaustion
+and decay are everywhere.
+The large open bay
+lies in the splendors of the
+sunlight when the day is
+calm, and the visitor would
+never dream of its turbulent
+condition when it is
+lashed by the typhoon.</p>
+
+<p class="figleft"><img src="images/illus_210.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Admiral Dewey.</span></p>
+
+<p>Across the bay stands
+Cavite, the naval station,
+the scene of Dewey's victory
+over the Spanish fleet.</p>
+
+<p>The city has some two hundred and seventy thousand
+inhabitants. The merchants, as we have said,
+are largely Chinese, and their quarters are picturesque
+with gay bazaars.</p>
+
+<p>In the shadow land of trees and open dry
+marshes outside of the city are beautiful estates, and
+along the roadsides people go waving their fans
+slowly and listlessly. Here are the parks, the bull
+ring, and the lovely botanical gardens.</p>
+
+<p>Commercial Manila is a city of coolies, who bare
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[187]</a></span>
+their backs to the sun, though little work can be
+done here in the noonday heat.</p>
+
+<p>Some years ago a terrible cold came to Manila.
+It was on a late December night, near morning. The
+thermometer went down to 74°. Think of that, and
+of the poor coolies, and of the negritos, or the little
+black dwarfs, and of those who lived in the thousands
+of huts of bamboo or reeds! True, 74° would
+indicate a hot day in our American June or July,<a name="ill212"></a>
+but in Manila it was a cold morning, and the people
+came shivering into the streets, to tell each other
+of their sufferings.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_212.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">PHILIPPINE ISLANDS</span></p>
+
+
+
+<p>The best description of Manila before the war
+that we have seen was written by Crozet, and is contained
+in an English translated book entitled
+Crozet's Voyage to Tasmania, New Zealand, the
+Ladrone Islands, and the Philippines. From this
+beautifully illustrated work we present a view of the
+city and the surrounding island as it appeared seven
+years or more ago:</p>
+
+<p>"The city of Manila is one of the most beautiful
+that Europeans have built in the East Indies; its
+houses are all of stone, with tile roofs and they are
+big, comfortable and well ventilated. The streets
+of Manila are broad and perfectly straight; there
+are five principal streets, which divide the city
+lengthwise, and about ten which divide it broadways.
+The form of the city is that of an oblong,
+surrounded by walls and ditches, and defended on
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[188]</a></span>
+the side of the river by a badly planned citadel,
+which is about to be pulled down and rebuilt. The
+city walls are flanked by a bastion at every one of
+the four angles. There are at Manila eight principal
+churches, with an open place in front of every one;
+they are all beautiful, large and very richly decorated.<a name="noteG"></a>
+The Cathedral is a building which would
+grace any of our European cities, and has just been
+rebuilt by an Italian Theatin,<a href="#foot">[G]</a> who is an able architect.
+The two rows of columns which support the
+vaults of the nave and of the aisles are of magnificent
+marble; so also are the columns of the portal,
+the altars, the steps, and the pavement. These marbles
+are obtained from local quarries, are of great
+variety, and are of the greatest beauty. The space in
+front of the Cathedral is very large, and is the finest
+in the city.</p>
+
+<p>"On one side the palace of the Governor is
+flanked by the Cathedral, on the other by the Town
+Hall. The Town Hall is very beautiful. At the
+extremity of the place in front of the Cathedral a
+large barracks is being constructed, which is to be
+capable of lodging eight thousand troops.</p>
+
+<p>"Private houses, as well as public buildings, are
+all one story high. Spaniards never live on the
+ground floor, on account of the dampness, but they
+occupy the first floor instead. The heat of the climate
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[189]</a></span>has induced them to build very large apartments,
+with verandas running right round the outside,
+so as to keep out of the sun; the windows form
+part of the verandas, and the daylight only enters
+the rooms by means of the doors which open out on
+to these verandas. The ground floor serves as a
+storehouse, and to prevent the rising of moisture
+from the soil its surface is raised a foot, by means
+of a bed of charcoal; then sand or gravel is placed
+on top of this bed, which is finally paved with stone
+or brick laid with mortar.</p>
+
+<p>"As the country is very subject to earthquakes,
+the houses, although built of stone, are strengthened
+with large posts of wood or iron fixed perpendicularly
+in the ground, rising to the top of the wall-plates,
+and built within the walls, so that they can not be
+seen, and then crossed on every floor by master girders,
+strongly bound together and bolted by wooden
+keys, which so consolidate the whole building.</p>
+
+<p>"Manila is built on the mouth of a beautiful
+river, which flows from a lake, called by the Spaniards
+<i>Lagonne-de-bay</i>, and which is situated five
+leagues inland. Forty streams flow into this lake,
+which is twenty leagues in circumference, and
+around which there are as many villages as streams.
+The Manila River is the only one which flows out
+of the lake. It is covered with boats, bringing to
+the city every sort of provision from the forty agricultural
+tribes established on the lake shores.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[190]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"The suburbs are bigger and more thickly populated
+than the city itself; they are separated from it
+by a river, across which a beautiful bridge has been
+thrown. The Minondo suburb is more especially inhabited
+by half-breeds, Chinese, and Indians, who
+are for the most part goldsmiths and silversmiths,
+and all of them work people.</p>
+
+<p>"The Saint Croix suburb is inhabited by Spanish
+merchants, by foreigners of all nations, and by Chinese
+half-breeds. This quarter is the most agreeable
+one in the country, because the houses, which are
+quite as fine as those of the city, are built on the
+river bank, and thereby they enjoy all the conveniences
+and pleasantness due to such a position.</p>
+
+<p>"In spite of such advantages, the city is badly
+situated, being placed between two intercommunicating
+volcanoes, and of which the interiors, being
+always active, are evidently preparing its ruin. The
+two volcanoes are those of the Lagonne-ed-Taal and
+of Monte Albay. When one burns, the other smokes.<a name="ill217"></a>
+I shall speak later on of the former of these volcanoes,
+which, to me at least, appeared a most singular
+one.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_217.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Native houses in Manila</span></p>
+
+<p>"Until the shocks of the volcanoes shall decide
+its fate, Manila remains the capital of the Spanish
+establishments in the Philippines. Here reside the
+Governor, who is called the Captain General and
+President of the Royal Audience. Don Simon de
+Auda filled this office when I arrived at Manila.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[191]</a></span>
+This Governor had previously been a member of the
+Royal Audience, and when the English, at the end
+of the last war, took Manila, he escaped from the
+city before the surrender, placed himself at the head
+of the Indians of the province of Pampague, and,
+without regard to the capitulation of the city, he is
+said to have succeeded in confining the English
+within their conquest, starving equally the conquerors
+and the conquered. Noticing that the Chinese
+established outside the city walls were furnishing
+provisions to English and Spaniards alike, he
+butchered them, putting more than ten thousand to
+the sword. It seemed to me, however, that the Spaniards
+in general considered the efforts of this councillor
+to be more harmful than advantageous to the
+welfare of the Spanish colony. The English, harassed
+by the Indians under Don Simon de Auda, had
+on their part armed and raised other provinces of
+Luzon, so as to oppose Indian to Indian, and this
+sort of civil war did more harm to the colony than
+even the capture of Manila by the English.</p>
+
+<p>"However this may be, Don Simon de Auda returned
+to Spain after the peace, was rewarded for
+his zeal by being made Privy Councillor of Castile,
+and was sent back to Manila as Governor General of
+the Philippines. Since his arrival in his province
+he has started a number of important projects, but
+difficult to be carried out at one and the same time.
+He has started considerable fortifications in various
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[192]</a></span>
+parts of the city, very large barracks, dykes at
+the mouth of the river, a powder-mill, smelting furnaces
+and forges to work the iron mines, and a number
+of other useful works, which might have succeeded
+better had they been started in due succession.</p>
+
+<p>"The Philippine Archipelago contains fourteen
+principal islands, the Government of which is
+divided into twenty-seven provinces, which are governed
+by <i>alcaldes</i> under the orders of the Governor
+Captain General. All these islands are thickly populated,
+being about three million. These islands extend
+from the tenth to the twenty-third degree north
+latitude, and vary in breadth from about forty
+leagues at the north end of Luzon up to two hundred
+leagues from the south of the southeast point
+of Mindanao to the southwest point of Paragoa.</p>
+
+<p>"They are all fertile and rich in natural products.
+But although the Spaniards have been established
+here for more than two hundred years, they have
+not yet succeeded in making themselves masters of
+the islands. They have no foothold on Paragoa,
+which is almost eighty leagues long, nor on the
+adjacent small islands; they only possess a few acres
+on the big island of Mindanao, which is two hundred
+leagues in circumference, nor are they yet fully
+acquainted with the interior of the island of Luzon,
+where they have their chief settlement, namely, the
+city of Manila. Luzon is the largest of these islands,
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[193]</a></span>
+being a hundred and forty leagues long from Cape
+Bojador to Bulusan Point, which is the most northerly
+point, and about forty leagues broad. In the
+northern part of Luzon, near the province of Ilocos,
+there are some aborigines with whom the Spaniards
+have never been able to establish communication.
+It is believed that these people are the descendants
+of Chinese, who, having been shipwrecked on these
+shores, have established themselves in the mountains
+of this part of the island. It is said that some
+Indians know the routes by which access is gained
+to this people, and that they have been well received
+by them; but it is in the interest of these Indians
+to withhold the knowledge from the Spaniards, on
+account of their great trade profits with those people,
+who lack many things and have only provisions and
+gold."</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>THE STORY OF THE PATRIOT RIZAL.</h4>
+
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Dr. José Rizal</span>, a virtuous Catholic reformer,
+was the Samuel Adams of the awakening of moral
+feeling against the tyranny of Spain. He sought to
+reform the Government and to correct corruption in
+the Church.</p>
+
+<p>He belonged to the province of Cavite. He was
+a small man, of a clear, sensitive conscience, and
+great intellectual penetration and force. It became
+the one purpose of his life to free his countrymen.
+"He organized the Revolution," says a monument to
+Samuel Adams, and Dr. Rizal sought to organize a
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[194]</a></span>
+revolution in a like manner as the "last of the Puritans"
+in New England, by the collecting of facts for
+correspondence with patriots at Manila and Hong
+Kong.</p>
+
+<p>In his school life he beheld the universal corruption
+going on around him. His heart was moved
+to pity the people.</p>
+
+<p>He wrote a letter in which he urged reform by
+the expulsion of corrupt officers of the Government
+and of certain immoral priests. This awakened the
+Government and made him secret enemies. He was
+accused by the Government of treason and by the
+decadent priests of the Church of blasphemy. He
+held to his convictions against all opposition, knowing
+that right was right and truth was truth.</p>
+
+<p>He sought to unite the worthy representatives of
+the State and Church in an effort to bring about a
+change which should honor morals and give justice
+to the people. Among men of conscience his influence
+secretly grew. He hoped to gain such force
+as to make an appeal to the court at Madrid.</p>
+
+<p>He organized a moral revolution.</p>
+
+<p>Conscience is power, but its progress is slow.</p>
+
+<p>In 1890 Dr. Rizal published a pamphlet that
+stirred the island world. He pictured the sufferings
+of the natives under the Spanish rule. He appealed
+to the enlightened Church, conscience and humanity.</p>
+
+<p>The patriot's friends saw that the reform movement
+was about to be crushed, and said to Rizal:
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[195]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Escape to Hong Kong!"</p>
+
+<p>There was a patriotic club in Hong Kong that
+sought the emancipation of the natives of Luzon and
+the Philippines from the extortions of Spain. It
+would be well for him now to go there.</p>
+
+<p>"How shall I leave the city?" was the one question
+that suddenly haunted his mind.</p>
+
+<p>He must go by sea. He could not go on board a
+ship without being detected and detained.</p>
+
+<p>"Get into a perforated box," said a fellow patriot,
+"and I will ship you with the merchandise."</p>
+
+<p>Dr. Rizal secreted himself in the perforated box,
+and was shipped from Luzon to Hong Kong.</p>
+
+<p>He was received with great enthusiasm by the
+Philippine patriots in Hong Kong.</p>
+
+<p>But he was more dangerous to the officials of
+Luzon in Hong Kong than at Cavite. It became a
+problem with the latter how to get him once more
+in their power.</p>
+
+<p>The Governor General Weyler caused a dispatch
+to be sent to him which stated that he "was too
+valuable a man for the State to lose his services,"
+that his past conduct would be overlooked, and that
+he could safely return to his own island.</p>
+
+<p>Honest himself, he could not believe that the dispatch
+was insincere.</p>
+
+<p>He went back to Manila. His foes were bent on
+his destruction.</p>
+
+<p>He was one day absent from his rooms attending
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[196]</a></span>
+probably to his medical duties, when some soldiers
+led by a spy entered his apartments and searched
+his trunks and pretended to find there seditious
+books.</p>
+
+<p>Dr. Rizal was arrested. His enemies formed the
+court to try him for treason.</p>
+
+<p>The books were put out as evidence against
+him.</p>
+
+<p>"I imported no books," said he.</p>
+
+<p>"But the books are here."</p>
+
+<p>"The customhouse officers found no books in my
+trunks," said Dr. Rizal.</p>
+
+<p>"But here are the books that witness against
+you."</p>
+
+<p>"There were no books in my room when I left it,"
+said he.</p>
+
+<p>"But we found them there."</p>
+
+<p>"Let me call the customhouse officers."</p>
+
+<p>The court refused the request.</p>
+
+<p>"Let me summon the owner of my room."</p>
+
+<p>The court refused the request.</p>
+
+<p>"The witness against me is a convict, a spy, and
+a perjurer."</p>
+
+<p>The court found him guilty.</p>
+
+<p>He was sent into exile. The injustice of the trial
+was a flame of liberty; the British consul protested
+against it, and riots broke out in Cavite against the
+officials that countenanced such a mockery of justice.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[197]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>He went again to Hong Kong. Weyler had left
+Luzon, and had been succeeded by Despajol.</p>
+
+<p>His case aroused the Patriot Club. The patriots
+resolved to go to Spain and lay their cause before
+the throne. They were mobbed in Spain and sent
+to Manila for trial.</p>
+
+<p>The trial was a farce; Dr. Rizal was again condemned.</p>
+
+<p>On December 6, 1896, he was led out of the
+Manila prison into the courtyard. A file of soldiers
+awaited the coming. A sharp volley of shots broke
+the stillness of the air; and that heart, so true to liberty,
+was broken and lay bleeding on the earth. So
+perished one of the noblest patriots of the islands of
+the China Sea.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>AGUINALDO.</h4>
+
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Aguinaldo</span>, called "the greatest of the Malays,"
+in that he rose against Spanish tyranny, is one of
+the interesting characters of the closing century.
+His true character can hardly be determined at the
+present time. Future events must reveal it. He
+is of mixed blood, and is said to more resemble a
+European than a Malay.</p>
+
+<p>He was born in the province of Cavite, and is
+supposed to have European blood in his veins. He
+was brought up as a house boy in the apartments
+of a Jesuit priest&mdash;a house boy being an errand boy;
+a boy handy for all common work.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[198]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It has been the policy of Spain for centuries to
+keep her subjects on the Pacific islands in partial
+ignorance; but this bright boy had an impulse to
+learn, to acquire knowledge, to grasp the truth of
+life. He had a remarkable memory, and he became
+such an apt scholar as to excite wonder. When he
+was fourteen years old
+he entered the medical
+school at Manila. He
+lost the favor of the
+Church by joining the
+Masonic order.</p>
+
+<p class="figleft"><img src="images/illus_226.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 10pt; font-weight: bolder; ">Aguinaldo.</span></p>
+
+<p>In 1888 he went to
+Hong Kong, where was a
+Philippine colony. Here
+he sought and obtained a
+military education, and
+studied military works,
+and the historical campaigns
+of the world's greatest heroes. He learned
+Latin, English, French, and Chinese.</p>
+
+<p>At the breaking out of the insurrection of the
+Philippines against Spain in 1896, Aguinaldo
+espoused the cause of liberty, and was made an
+officer and became a leader. The revolution grew
+and affected the native troops, and its spirit filled
+the archipelago. It became the purpose of the more
+fiery patriots to "drive the Spaniards into the sea."</p>
+
+<p>Aguinaldo advocated the acceptance of concessions
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[199]</a></span>
+by the Spanish Government, by which the
+rights of the native races should be recognized and
+protected. His policy was accepted, and the insurgents
+disbanded. He received Spanish gold to
+abandon the war for independence, and fell under
+the suspicion that his patriotism was purchasable.
+This suspicion has shadowed his fame. He went to
+Hong Kong.</p>
+
+<p>The island Hong Kong, which is English, is a
+school of good government. Here Aguinaldo seems
+to have conceived an ambition to free the native
+races of the archipelago, and form a republic of the
+confederated islands. The Spanish-American War
+revealed to him an opportunity to strike for liberty.
+He said to the Filipinos: "The hour has come."</p>
+
+<p>The Filipinos looked upon him as the man for
+the crisis.</p>
+
+<p>An article in the Review of Reviews represents
+the chief as saying to an American naval officer:</p>
+
+<p>"There will be war between your country and
+Spain, and in that war you can do the greatest deed
+in history by putting an end to Castilian tyranny in
+my native land. We are not ferocious savages. On
+the contrary, we are unspeakably patient and docile.
+That we have risen from time to time is no sign of
+bloodthirstiness on our part, but merely of manhood
+resenting wrongs which it is no longer able to endure.
+You Americans revolted for nothing at all
+compared with what we have suffered. Mexico and
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[200]</a></span>
+the Spanish republics rose in rebellion and swept
+the Spaniard into the sea, and all their sufferings
+together would not equal that which occurs every
+day in the Philippines. We are supposed to be living
+under the laws and civilization of the nineteenth
+century, but we are really living under the practices
+of the Middle Ages.</p>
+
+<p>"A man can be arrested in Manila, plunged into
+jail, and kept there twenty years without ever having
+a hearing or even knowing the complaint upon
+which he was arrested. There is no means in the
+legal system there of having a prompt hearing or of
+finding out what the charge is. The right to obtain
+evidence by torture is exercised by military, civil,
+and ecclesiastical tribunals. To this right there is
+no limitation, nor is the luckless witness or defendant
+permitted to have a surgeon, a counsel, a friend,
+or even a bystander to be present during the operation.
+As administered in the Philippines one man in
+every ten dies under the torture, and nothing is ever
+heard of him again. Everything is taxed, so that it
+is impossible for the thriftiest peasant farmer or
+shopkeeper to ever get ahead in life.</p>
+
+<p>"The Spanish policy is to keep all trade in the
+hands of the Spanish merchants, who come out
+here from the peninsula and return with a fortune.
+The Government budget for education is no
+larger than the sum paid by the Hong Kong authorities
+for the support of Victoria College here.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[201]</a></span>
+What little education is had in the Philippines is
+obtained from the good Jesuits, who, in spite of their
+being forbidden to practice their priestly calling in
+Luzon, nevertheless devote their lives to teaching
+their fellow-countrymen. They carry the same principle
+into the Church, and no matter how devout,
+able, or learned a Filipino or even a half-breed may
+be, he is not permitted to enter a religious order or
+ever to be more than an acolyte, sexton, or an insignificant
+assistant priest. The State taxes the people
+for the lands which it says they own, and which
+as a matter of fact they have owned from time immemorial,
+and the Church collects rent for the same
+land upon the pretext that it belongs to them under
+an ancient charter of which there is no record. Neither
+life nor limb, liberty nor property have any security
+whatever under the Spanish administration."</p>
+
+<p>Such was his indictment of Spain.</p>
+
+<p>He began a war for independence from Spain
+in the provinces of Luzon. He was an inspiring general
+and practically made prisoners of some fifteen
+thousand of the Spanish forces. He organized a
+Government at least nominally Republican, although
+it has been called a dictatorship. The purchase of
+the Philippines by the United States, in accordance
+with the Treaty of Paris, has been opposed by Aguinaldo
+and his followers in a most distressing war.
+He has claimed the absolute independence of all the
+Philippines, although, so far as our knowledge goes,
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[202]</a></span>
+his authority does not extend far beyond certain districts
+of the Island of Luzon. Without anticipating
+the verdict of history upon our relations to the Philippines,
+it is enough to add that the bloodshed and
+suffering caused by this war are most deplorable.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>HONG KONG.</h4>
+
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Hong Kong</span> and the China Sea have come to
+stand not only for Europe in Asia, but for America
+in Asia, though of the latter, Manila is the port. The
+center of the world's forces changes, and it is a
+strange current of events that has made the China
+Sea, with its English port of Hong Kong, and the Luzon
+port of Manila, facing each other across the blue
+ocean way, the pivotal point of not only England in
+China, but of America in the East. The Anglo-Chinese
+community in Hong Kong represents the union
+of Europe and Asia in the family of nations, and
+America joins the world of the higher civilization
+at Manila, the scene of Dewey's victory.</p>
+
+<p>The civilizing history of Hong Kong is largely
+associated with Sir John Bowring, whom a large
+part of the world recalls merely as a writer of popular
+hymns; as, "In the Cross of Christ I Glory."</p>
+
+<p>The British free traders secured Hong Kong as a
+market for the East, and added it to the British<a name="ill231"></a>
+Empire in the middle of the century. The Suez
+Canal increased the importance of Hong Kong.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_231.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Hong Kong</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[203]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Hong Kong, not being an integral part of Asia,
+became a place of refugees before its union with
+the British Empire. It lay in the route of the British
+possessions in Africa, India, and North America.
+Its Urasian destiny was seen in the alliance between
+Europe and Asia concluded at Canton (1634) between
+the East India Company and the Chinese Government.
+It then became the vantage ground of the
+Anglo-Saxon race. The early English Governors of
+Hong Kong made the port the cradle of liberty and
+free trade, and a civilizing influence in the East.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[204]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The island is some nine miles long and from two
+to six miles broad, with a population of more than
+one hundred and twenty thousand, most of whom
+are Chinese. It was ceded in perpetuity to the British
+by the treaty of Nankin in 1843, when its Government
+began to be administered by Colonial Governors,
+under whom it grew commercially.</p>
+
+<p>The East India Trade Company had prepared the
+way for this little Britain in the East. The United
+States in the middle of the century began to trade
+at Canton from the ports of Boston and Salem. It
+is a very curious and almost forgotten fact that the
+first cargoes from New England to Canton consisted
+largely of ginseng, a plant now little esteemed, but
+which at that time had acquired such a medical reputation
+in China as to be almost worth its weight in
+gold. The plant was held to be a magical cure for
+nearly all diseases and to possess the gift of immortal
+youth.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[205]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Boston and Salem are still adorned with the tall
+and stately mansions of these old merchants, whose
+wooden vessels went to the China Sea, at first carrying
+ginseng and returning with tea. A writer in
+a Boston paper thus pictures this period:</p>
+
+<p>"The generation that would not have had to look
+at a map to find out where Manila was when George
+Dewey arrived there, is almost passed away. These
+were the great sailors of their time; men who met
+emergencies with nerve and overcame tempest and
+adversity with equal complacency, who knew the
+merchants of Canton and Calcutta as well as the
+merchants of Salem and Boston, and whose tempers
+were never ruffled if even stress of circumstance compelled
+them to put up with a paltry profit of one
+hundred per cent. They lived at a time when there
+might easily be a fortune in a single freight, and
+when one turn round the world might represent
+more than a million of money. Most of them lived
+before the day of the bill of exchange, and when the
+solid old method of carrying specie in the hold was
+the familiar business practice. They knew the
+pirate of the China Sea and he of Barbary, too, for
+it was this old-fashioned system of carrying your
+capital with you that made the pirates' life worth
+living. They lived before the cable as well, and
+from the moment that a ship cleared from Canton
+or Manila or Singapore there was no way in the
+world for the consignee or the merchant in Boston
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[206]</a></span>
+to know what she had on board until she arrived
+here to speak for herself. Be it silks or teas or what-not,
+the merchant must move quickly to bid or buy,
+for the nature and value of the cargo could not have
+been discounted in advance, while the ship was skimming
+the oceans. Each vessel made her own market,
+and the wharf was the market place. It was good
+news, indeed, when a captain with a cargo of teas
+was informed by his owners, who may have met him
+upon the completion of a two years' cruise, that the
+price of tea had advanced the day before his arrival.
+It was pretty apt to be something in the captain's
+own pocket, too, for in those days he was allowed
+to carry twenty-five tons of freight for his own private
+speculation, and a salary of three hundred dollars
+a month in addition was not uncommon. There
+are retired captains on Cape Cod and in Salem and
+in the suburbs of Boston to-day who earned a competence
+in those times of Boston's water-front prosperity.
+They became masters sometimes before they
+were of age, and occasionally there would be one,
+like the late R. B. Forbes, who would become a great
+merchant, the head of a famous, wealthy house,
+known the world over, almost before he realized how
+great was the fortune that had overtaken him. And
+there was another very nice thing about those old
+days of plenty. If a man came home from China
+rich, invested his wealth in a railroad or some
+manufacturing or mining project that would be
+pretty apt to ruin him, all he would have to do<a name="ill235"></a>
+would be to exile himself, under the right auspices,
+for another year or two in China, and then return
+to his home and friends with his fortunes quite
+mended."</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_235.jpg" alt="" title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Iloilo.</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[207]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The great merchant at Canton at the time of the
+Boston commercial period was Honqua. He was
+as noble as he was rich, and Mr. Forbes, the famous
+old Boston merchant, relates the following story
+of him:</p>
+
+<p>"A New England trader had gone to Canton, and
+had been unsuccessful, and owed Honqua one hundred
+thousand dollars. He desired to return home,
+but could not do so if he discharged the debt. Honqua
+heard of his condition, pitied him, and sent for
+him.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[208]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"'I shall be sorry to part from you,' he said, 'but
+I wish you to return as you so desire, happy and
+free. Here are all your notes canceled.'"</p>
+
+<p>Here was superb commercialism.</p>
+
+<p>The American sovereignty over the Philippine
+Islands opens the way to China by the China Sea.
+In the progress of events the achievements of Magellan
+have led the ships of the West to the East
+again, and it is possible that there may yet be great
+Mongol emigrations to the western shores of the
+southern continent. The lantern or farol of Magellan
+was never more prophetic than now. So suggestion
+lives.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[209]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>TRAVELERS' TALES OF THE PHILIPPINES.</h4>
+
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Hong Kong</span> is the market place of the Eastern
+world. Here the East and West meet in the airy
+bazaars, and from it, it is easy to find one's way to
+Luzon, over the bright sea mirrors, the sleepy,
+dreamy splendors of the China Sea.</p>
+
+<p>But few travelers have written books on Luzon,
+and those have usually published them in French or
+in Spanish. Travelers from the East have, as a rule,
+not remained long on the island, where earthquakes,
+typhoons, malarial fevers, and the plague itself have
+been not unfrequent visitors, and where one welcomes
+gratefully the shadows of the night in the
+seasons of fervid heat. The rain storms are downpours
+and deluges that are blinding, but they leave
+behind their inky tracts a paradise of beauty and
+bloom.</p>
+
+<p>The morning on the China Sea in serene weather
+is a royal glory. It has the odors of Araby and the
+freshness of an Eden. The earth seems waiting. The
+sails hang listlessly on the glassy, breathless straits,
+and the sun sheds its splendor through the pale blue
+air as powerfully as the clouded heavens poured
+down the rain.</p>
+
+<p>The Filipinos are a sensitive race, and many of
+them have a keen sense of injustice. Great numbers
+of them have a church education, and their views
+of the world are bounded by what they have learned
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[210]</a></span>
+of India, China, and Malaysia and Iberian peninsula
+from the priests of Spain.</p>
+
+<p>A recent traveler from Manila said to me:</p>
+
+<p>"The Filipinos have hot blood and are revengeful,
+but they are quick to discern justice. A boy who
+attended me at the hotel came to me one day
+bleeding.</p>
+
+<p>"'My master has beaten me,' he said, 'with a
+rawhide.'</p>
+
+<p>"'He has abused you,' I said. 'Why?'</p>
+
+<p>"'He took me into the storeroom and lashed me,
+and the rawhide cut me. I bleed.'</p>
+
+<p>"'Why did he punish you?'</p>
+
+<p>"'The porter told him he found me neglecting
+my work by hiding away and fighting cocks. It was
+not true. The porter lied; he hates me.'</p>
+
+<p>"'Go to the marshal and make a complaint
+against the landlord. Go now, before the blood
+dries. A master has no right to beat one like that.
+It is inhuman. Justice ought to be done.'</p>
+
+<p>"'But I do not blame <i>him</i>; he is not to blame.
+The porter is to blame. The porter lied.'</p>
+
+<p>"'But the marshal would hardly take up your
+case against the porter; he would hold him to be
+a person of slight consequence.'</p>
+
+<p>"'But wrong is wrong whether it be done by a
+landlord or his porter. The porter should go to
+prison for twenty years!'"</p>
+
+<p>The case then dropped, but the boy carried a case
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[211]</a></span>
+for revenge against the porter in his heart. He was
+quick to discern justice.</p>
+
+<p>Cockfighting is a favorite diversion among the
+Filipinos. A traveler says that he has seen Filipinos
+going to mass carrying gamecocks under their
+arms to set fighting in the cemetery after the
+service.</p>
+
+<p>The brutal sport is a passion, and is to be seen
+going on almost everywhere on festal days, and in
+the evenings in the cool shadows of awnings and
+palms.</p>
+
+<p>Alfred Marché published a book in Paris in 1887
+entitled Luxon and Palaveran; Six Annes de Voyages
+aux Philippines. It contains some vivid pictures
+of the natives, of the habits and customs of
+the country, of the earthquakes and storms. He describes
+the earthquake seasons when the earth trembled,
+and the people rushed wildly into the open
+courts at the first tremor. As great as the terror
+was the Chinese did not leave their merchandise unprotected
+for fear of thieves, showing that the trembling
+earth did not overcome the nature of the merchant
+or the native thief. The one would face death
+for his goods and the other for his chance of getting
+plunder.</p>
+
+<p>Monsieur Marché gives some views of the tropic
+jungles, one of which is illustrated by a very curious
+anecdote and pictorial illustration.</p>
+
+<p>One day one of his native servants told him that
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[212]</a></span>
+he had seen in the woods an immense python, which
+seemed to have been gorged with some animal that
+he had swallowed, and so rendered sluggish and resistless.</p>
+
+<p>"I should like to see so large a serpent," said the
+traveler.</p>
+
+<p>An hour afterward, while he was sitting in the
+shadow of his bungalow, an extraordinary sight met
+his eyes. The native had gone into the wood and
+had put a cord about the neck of the great serpent
+and attached it to the horns of a buffalo, and the
+buffalo was dragging the python toward the bungalow.
+The python was seven meters long (thirty-nine
+inches to a meter), a distended mass of folds and
+flesh (page 356, Alfred Marché's Luzon).</p>
+
+<p>What had he swallowed? What creature was
+there inside of him that was about to be digested,
+and that so distorted his folds?</p>
+
+<p>The serpent was harmless in the noose and from
+the weight of his meal.</p>
+
+<p>The traveler severed the python's vertebræ, rendering
+it inoffensive, and then made an incision into
+its abdomen.</p>
+
+<p>A surprise followed. Out of the abdomen came a
+calf of some months' growth. The animal's legs were
+so doubled under its body as to make the latter horizontal.
+The serpent was prepared for the museum
+of the traveler.</p>
+
+<p>The same traveler describes earthquakes, after
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[213]</a></span>
+which victims were fed by tubes let down under the
+ponderous débris.</p>
+
+<p>One of the most interesting books of travel in
+Luzon that we have ever read is entitled Aventures
+d'un Gentilhomme Breton aux iles Philippines, par
+P. de la Gironière (Paris, 1855). A part of the
+work has been translated into English by Frederick
+Hardman, and from this translation in part we
+select material for a view of the life of the French
+savant in Jala-Jala, a very interesting district of the
+island. The original French work is very vividly
+illustrated. The English abridgment is without
+illustrations. (French edition, Boston Public Library,
+No. 3040a, 182. English abridgment, 5049a, 69.)</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>
+THE ADVENTURES OF DR. DE LA GIRONIÈRE IN LUZON.<br />
+(After Hardman.)<br />
+CHANGING THE HEART OF A BRIGAND.<br />
+</h4>
+
+
+<p>"<span class="smcap">Jala-Jala</span> is a long peninsula, stretching from
+north to south into the middle of Bay Lake. The
+peninsula is divided longitudinally by a chain of
+mountains, which gradually diminish in elevation,
+until, for the last three leagues, they dwindle into
+mere hills. These mountains, of easy access, are
+covered partly with wood and partly with beautiful
+pastures, where the grass attains a height of between
+one and two yards, and, when waving in the wind,
+resembles the waves of the ocean. Finer vegetation
+can nowhere be found; it is refreshed by limpid
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[214]</a></span>
+springs, flowing from the higher slopes of the mountain
+down into the lake. Owing to these pastures,
+Jala-Jala is richer in game than any other part of
+the island of Luzon. Deer, wild boar, and buffalo,
+quails, hens, snipes, pigeons of fifteen or twenty
+kinds, parrots; in short, all manner of birds, there
+abound. The lake teems with water-fowl, and especially
+with wild ducks. Notwithstanding its extent,
+the island contains no dangerous or carnivorous
+beasts; the worst things to be feared in that way is
+the civet, a little animal about the size of a cat,
+which attacks only birds; and the monkeys, which
+issue from the forest by troops, and lay waste the
+maize and sugar fields.</p>
+
+<p>"The lake, which yields excellent fish, is less
+favored than the land; for it contains a great many
+caymans, a creature of such enormous size that
+in a few minutes it divides a horse piecemeal and
+absorbs it into its huge stomach. The accidents
+occasioned by these caymans are frequent and terrible,
+and I have seen more than one Indian fall
+victims to them.</p>
+
+<p>"At the period of my purchase the only human
+inhabitants of Jala-Jala were a few Indians, of
+Malay extraction, who lived in the woods and tilled
+some nooks of land. At night they were pirates
+upon the lake, and they afforded shelter to all the
+banditti of the surrounding provinces. The people
+at Manila had given me the most dismal account of
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[215]</a></span>
+the district; according to them, I should soon be
+murdered: my turn for adventure was such, that all
+their stories, instead of alarming me, only increased
+my desire to visit men who were living almost in a
+savage state.</p>
+
+<p>"As soon as I had bought Jala-Jala, I traced for
+myself a plan of conduct, having for its object to
+attract the banditti to me; to this end, I felt that I
+must not appear among them in the character of an
+exacting and sordid owner, but in that of a father.
+All depended upon the first impressions I should
+make upon these Indians, now my vassals. On landing,
+I went straight to a little hamlet, composed of
+a few cabins.</p>
+
+<p>"My faithful coachman was with me; we were
+each of us armed with a good double-barreled gun,
+a brace of pistols, and a saber. I had already ascertained,
+from some fishermen, to which Indian I ought
+to address myself. This man, who was much respected
+by his countrymen, was called, in the Tagal
+tongue, <i>Mabutin-Tajo</i>, translatable as <i>The brave and
+valiant</i>.</p>
+
+<p>"He was quite capable of committing, without
+the slightest remorse, five or six murders in the
+course of a single expedition; but he was brave; and
+courage is a virtue before which all primitive races
+respectfully bow. My conversation with <i>Mabutin-Tajo</i>
+was not long; a few words sufficed to win his
+good will, and to convert him into a faithful servant
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[216]</a></span>
+for the whole time I dwelt at Jala-Jala. This is how
+I spoke to him:</p>
+
+<p>"'You are a great rascal,' I said; 'I am the lord
+of Jala-Jala; it is my will that you amend your conduct;
+if you refuse, you shall expiate all your misdeeds.
+I want a guard; give me your word of honor
+to turn honest man, and I will make you my lieutenant.'</p>
+
+<p>"When I completed this brief harangue, Alila
+(that was the brigand's name) remained for a moment
+silent, his countenance indicating deep reflection.
+I waited for him to speak; not without a certain
+degree of anxiety as to what his answer
+would be.</p>
+
+<p>"'Master!' he at last exclaimed, offering me his
+hand and putting one knee to the ground, 'I will be
+faithful to you until death!'</p>
+
+<p>"I was very well pleased with this reply, but I
+concealed my satisfaction.</p>
+
+<p>"''Tis good,' I said; 'to show you that I have
+confidence in you, take this weapon, and use it only
+against enemies.'</p>
+
+<p>"I presented him with a Tagal sabre, on which
+was inscribed in Spanish: 'Draw me not without
+cause, nor sheath me without honor.'</p>
+
+<p>"This legend I translated into Tagal; Alila
+thought it sublime, and swore ever to observe it.</p>
+
+<p>"'When I go to Manila,' I added, 'I will bring you
+epaulets and a handsome uniform; but you must
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[217]</a></span>
+lose no time in getting together the soldiers you are
+to command, and who will compose my guard. Take
+me at once to him among your comrades whom you
+think most capable of acting as sergeant.'</p>
+
+<p>"We walked a short distance to the habitation of
+a friend of Alila's, who usually accompanied him
+on his piratical expeditions. A few words, in the
+same strain as those I had spoken to my future lieutenant,
+produced the same effect on his comrade, and
+decided him to accept the rank I offered him. We
+passed the day recruiting in the various huts, and
+before night we had got together, in cavalry, a guard
+of ten men, a number I did not wish to exceed. I
+took the command as captain.</p>
+
+<p>"The next day I mustered the population of the
+peninsula, and, surrounded by my new guards, I
+selected a site for a village, and one for a house for
+myself. I gave orders to the fathers of families to
+build their cabins upon a line which I marked out,
+and I desired my lieutenant to employ all the hands
+he could procure in extracting stone, cutting timber,
+and preparing everything for my dwelling. My
+orders given, I set out for Manila, promising soon
+to return. On reaching home, I found my friends
+uneasy on my account; for, not having heard from
+me, they feared I had fallen victim to the caymans
+or the pirates. The narrative of my voyage, my description
+of Jala-Jala, far from making my wife
+averse to my project of living there, rendered her
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[218]</a></span>
+on the contrary impatient to visit our property, and
+to settle upon it."</p>
+
+<p>Dr. de la Gironière lived many years at Jala-Jala
+in the peninsula country. He relates many adventures
+in the primitive forests, one of which is as
+follows:</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>A BUFFALO HUNT IN JALA-JALA.</h4>
+
+
+<p>"<span class="smcap">The</span> Indians consider the pursuit of the buffalo
+the most dangerous of all hunts; and my guards
+told me they would rather place their naked breast
+at twenty paces from a rifle's muzzle than find
+themselves at the same distance from a wild buffalo.
+The difference is, they say, that a rifle bullet
+may only wound, whereas a buffalo's horn is sure
+to kill.</p>
+
+<p>"Taking advantage of their fear of the buffalo,
+I one day informed them, with all the coolness I
+could assume, of my intention to hunt that animal.
+Thereupon they exerted all their eloquence to dissuade
+me from my project; they drew a most picturesque
+and intimidating sketch of the dangers
+and difficulties I should encounter; I, especially, as
+one unaccustomed to that sort of fight&mdash;for such a
+chase is in fact a life or death contest. I would<a name="ill247"></a>
+not listen to them. I had declared my will; I would
+not discuss the subject, or attend to their advice.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><img src="images/illus_247.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span class="caption">Boats on the River Pasig.</span></p>
+
+<p>"It was fortunate that I did not; for these affectionate
+counsels, these alarming pictures of the
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[219]</a></span>
+dangers I was about to run, were given and drawn
+by way of snare; they had agreed among themselves
+to estimate my courage accordingly as I accepted
+or avoided the combat. My only reply was
+an order to get everything in readiness for the
+hunt. I took care that my wife should know nothing
+of the expedition, and I set out, accompanied
+by a dozen Indians, almost all armed with guns.</p>
+
+<p>"The buffalo is hunted differently in the plain
+and in the mountains. In the plain, all that is
+needed is a good horse, agility, and skill in throwing
+the lasso. In the mountains, an extraordinary
+degree of coolness is requisite. This is how the
+thing is done: The hunter takes a gun, upon which
+he is sure he can depend, and so places himself that
+the buffalo, on issuing from the forest, must perceive
+him. The very instant the brute sees you, he
+rushes upon you with his very utmost speed, breaking,
+crushing, trampling under foot, everything that
+impedes his progress. He thunders down upon you
+as though he would annihilate you; at a few paces
+distance, he pauses for a moment, and presents his
+sharp and menacing horns.</p>
+
+<p>"It is during that brief pause that the hunter
+must take his shot, and send a bullet into the center
+of his enemy's brow. If unfortunately the gun
+misses fire, or if his hand trembles and his ball
+goes askew, he is lost&mdash;Providence alone can save
+him! Such, perhaps, was the fate that awaited me;
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[220]</a></span>
+but I was determined to run the chance. We
+reached the edge of a large wood, in which we felt
+sure that buffaloes were; and there we halted. I
+was sure of my gun; I thought myself tolerably sure
+of my coolness, and I desired that the hunt should
+take place as if I had been a common Indian. I
+stationed myself on a spot over which everything
+made it probable that the animal would pass, and
+I suffered no one to remain near me. I sent every
+man to his post, and remained alone on the open
+ground, two hundred paces from the edge of the
+forest, awaiting a foe who would assuredly show
+me no mercy if I missed him.</p>
+
+<p>"That is certainly a solemn moment in which
+one finds himself placed thus between life and
+death, all depending on the goodness of a gun, and
+on the steadiness of the hand that grasps it. I
+quietly waited. When all had taken up their positions,
+two men entered the forest, having previously
+stripped off a part of their clothes, the better to
+climb the trees in case of need. They were armed
+only with cutlasses, and accompanied by dogs. For
+more than half an hour a mournful silence reigned.
+We listened with all our ears, but no sound was
+heard.</p>
+
+<p>"The buffalo is often very long before giving
+sign of life. At last the reiterated barking of the
+dogs, and the cries of the prickers, warned us that
+the beast was afoot. Soon I heard the cracking of
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[221]</a></span>
+the branches and young trees, which broke before
+him as he threaded the forest with frightful rapidity.
+The noise of his headlong career was to be
+compared only to the gallop of several horses, or to
+the rush of some monstrous and fantastical creature;
+it was like the approach of an avalanche. At
+that moment, I confess, my emotion was so great
+that my heart beat with extraordinary rapidity.
+Was it death, a terrible death, that thus approached
+me? Suddenly the buffalo appeared. He stood for
+a moment, glared wildly about him, snuffed the air
+of the plain, and then, his nostrils elevated, his
+horns thrown back upon his shoulders, charged down
+upon me with terrible fury.</p>
+
+<p>"The decisive moment had come. A victim
+there must be&mdash;either the buffalo or myself&mdash;and
+we were both disposed to defend ourselves stoutly.
+I should be puzzled to describe what passed within
+me during the short time the animal took to traverse
+the interval between us. My heart, which had
+beat so violently when I heard him tearing through
+the forest, no longer throbbed. My eyes were fixed
+upon his forehead with such intensity that I saw
+nothing else. There was a sort of deep silence
+within me. I was too much absorbed to hear anything&mdash;even
+the baying of the dogs as they followed
+their prey at a short distance.</p>
+
+<p>"At last the buffalo stopped, lowered his head,
+and presented his horns; just as he gave a spring I
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[222]</a></span>
+fired. My bullet pierced his skull&mdash;I was half
+saved. He fell to the ground, just a pace in
+front of me, with the ponderous noise of a mass
+of rock. I put my foot between his horns and was
+about to fire my second barrel, when a hollow and
+prolonged roar informed me that my victory
+was complete. The buffalo was dead. My Indians
+came up. Their joy turned to admiration; they
+were delighted; I was all that they wished me
+to be.</p>
+
+<p>"Their doubts had been dissipated with the
+smoke of my gun; I was brave, I had proved it, and
+they had now entire confidence in me. My victim
+was cut up, and carried in triumph to the village.
+In right of conquest I took his horns; they were six
+feet in length; I have since deposited them in the
+Nantes museum. The Indians, those lovers of
+metaphor, those givers of surnames, thenceforward
+called me <i>Malamit Oulou</i>&mdash;Tagal words, signifying
+'cool head.'"</p>
+
+<p>The traveler describes the cayman, which is of
+enormous size&mdash;the whale of the oozy lagoon. He
+relates the following adventure with a boa:</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>THE BOA OF LUZON.</h4>
+
+
+<p>"<span class="smcap">The</span> other monster of which I have promised
+a description, the boa, is common in the Philippines,
+but it is rare to meet with a very large
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[223]</a></span>
+specimen. It is possible, even probable, that centuries (?) are
+necessary for this reptile to attain its
+largest size; and to such an age the various accidents
+to which animals are exposed rarely suffer it
+to attain. Full-sized boas are met with only in the
+gloomiest, most remote, and most solitary forests.</p>
+
+<p class="figright"><img src="images/illus_253.jpg" alt=" " title=" " /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 10pt; font-weight: bolder; ">A boa</span></p>
+
+<p>"I have seen
+many boas of ordinary
+size, such
+as are found in
+our European collections.
+There
+were some, indeed,
+that inhabited my
+house; and one
+night I found one,
+two yards long, in
+possession of my
+bed.</p>
+
+
+<p>"Several times,
+passing through
+the woods with my Indians, I heard the piercing
+cries of a wild boar. On approaching the spot
+whence they proceeded we almost invariably found
+a wild boar, about whose body a boa had twisted its
+folds, and was gradually hoisting him up into the
+tree round which it had coiled itself. (See book for
+illustration.)</p>
+
+<p>"When the wild boar had reached a certain
+height the snake pressed him against the tree with
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[224]</a></span>
+a force that crushed his bones and stifled him.
+Then the boa let its prey fall, descended the tree,
+and prepared to swallow what it had slain. This
+last operation was much too lengthy for us to await
+its end.</p>
+
+<p>"To simplify matters, I sent a ball into the boa's
+head. Then my Indian took the flesh to dry (bucanier)
+it, and the skin for dagger sheaths. It is
+unnecessary to say that the wild boar was not
+forgotten. It was a prey that had cost us little
+pains.</p>
+
+<p>"One day an Indian surprised one of these reptiles
+asleep, after it had swallowed an enormous
+doe deer. Its size was such that a buffalo cart
+would have been required to transport it to the village.</p>
+
+<p>"The Indian cut it in pieces, and contented himself
+with as much as he could carry off. I sent for
+the remainder. They brought me a piece about
+eight feet long, and so large that the skin, when
+dried, enveloped the tallest man like a cloak. I
+gave it to my friend Lindsay.</p>
+
+<p>"I had not yet seen one of the full-grown reptiles,
+of which the Indians spoke to me so much
+(always with some exaggeration), when one afternoon,
+crossing the mountains with two shepherds,
+our attention was attracted by the sustained barking
+of my dogs, who seemed assailing some animal
+that stood upon its defense. We at first thought
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[225]</a></span>
+it was a buffalo which they had brought to bay, and
+approached the spot with precaution.</p>
+
+<p>"My dogs were dispersed along the brink of a
+deep ravine, in which was an enormous boa. The
+monster raised his head to a height, of five or six
+feet, directing it from one edge to the other of the
+ravine, and menacing his assailants with his forked
+tongue; but the dogs, more active than he was, easily
+avoided his attacks. My first impulse was to
+shoot him, but then it occurred to me to take him
+alive and send him to France. Assuredly he would
+have been the most monstrous boa that had ever
+been seen there. To carry out my design, we manufactured
+nooses of cane, strong enough to resist the
+most powerful wild buffalo. With great precaution
+we succeeded in passing one of our nooses
+round the boa's neck; then we tied him tightly to a
+tree, in such a manner as to keep its head at its
+usual height&mdash;about six feet from the ground.</p>
+
+<p>"This done, we crossed to the other side of the
+ravine and threw another noose over him, which
+we secured like the first. When he felt himself
+thus fixed at both ends, he coiled and writhed, and
+grappled several little trees which grew within his
+reach along the edge of the ravine. Unluckily for
+him, everything yielded to his efforts; he tore up
+the young trees by the roots, broke off the branches,
+and dislodged enormous stones, round which he
+sought in vain to obtain the hold or point of resistance
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[226]</a></span>
+he needed. The nooses were strong, and withstood
+his most furious efforts. To convey an animal
+like this several buffaloes and a whole system
+of cordage was necessary. Night approached; confident
+in our nooses we left the place, proposing to
+return next morning and complete the capture&mdash;but
+we reckoned without our host. In the night
+the boa changed his tactics, got his body round
+some huge blocks of basalt, and finally succeeded
+in breaking his bonds and getting clear off. I was
+greatly disappointed, for I doubted whether I
+should ever have another chance.</p>
+
+<p>"Human beings rarely fall victims to these huge
+reptiles. I was able to verify but one instance. A
+criminal hid from justice in a cavern. His father,
+who alone knew of his hiding place, went sometimes
+to see him and to take him rice. One day he found,
+instead of his son, an enormous boa asleep. He
+killed it, and found his son's body in its stomach.
+The priest of the village, who went to give the body
+Christian burial, and who saw the remains of the
+boa, described it to me as of almost incredible size."</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>AN ADVENTURE WITH A MONSTER CAYMAN.</h4>
+
+
+<p>"At the period at which I first occupied my habitation
+and began to colonize the village of Jala-Jala,
+caymans abounded upon that side of the lake.
+From my windows I daily saw them gamboling in
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[227]</a></span>
+the water, and waylaying and snapping at the dogs
+that ventured too near the brink. One day a female
+servant of my wife's having been so imprudent
+as to bathe at the edge of the lake was surprised
+by one of them, a monster of enormous size. One
+of my guards came up at the very moment she was
+being carried off; he fired his carbine at the brute
+and hit it under the fore-leg (the armpit), which is
+the only vulnerable place. But the wound was insufficient
+to check the cayman's progress, and it disappeared
+with its prey. Nevertheless, this little
+bullet-hole was the cause of its death; and here it
+is to be noted that the slightest wound received
+by the cayman is incurable. The shrimps, which
+abound in the lake, get into the hurt; little by little
+their number increases, until at last they penetrate
+deep into the solid flesh and into the very interior
+of the body. This is what happened to the one
+which devoured my wife's maid. A month after the
+accident the monster was found dead upon the bank
+five or six leagues from my house. Indians brought
+me back the unfortunate woman's earrings, which
+they had found in its stomach.</p>
+
+<p>"Upon another occasion a Chinese was riding
+with me. We reached a river, and I let him go on
+alone in order to ascertain whether the river was
+very deep or not. On a sudden three or four caymans,
+which lay in waiting under the water, threw
+themselves upon him; horse and Chinese disappeared,
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[228]</a></span>
+and for some minutes the water was tinged
+with blood.</p>
+
+<p>"I was very curious to obtain a near sight of one
+of these voracious monsters. At the time that they
+frequented the vicinity of my house I made several
+attempts to attain that end. One night I baited a
+huge hook, secured by a chain and strong cord, with
+an entire sheep. Next morning sheep and chain
+had disappeared. I lay in wait for the creatures
+with my gun, but the bullets rebounded from their
+scales. A large dog, of a race peculiar to the Philippines
+and exceeding any European dog in size,
+happening to die, I had his carcase dragged to the
+shore of the lake; I then hid myself in a little thicket
+and waited, with my gun in readiness, the coming
+of a cayman. But presently I fell asleep, and when
+I awoke the dog had disappeared. It was fortunate
+the cayman had not taken the wrong prey.</p>
+
+<p>"When the colony of Jala-Jala had been a few
+years founded, the caymans disappeared from its
+neighborhood. I was out one morning with my
+shepherds, at a few leagues from my house, when
+we came to a river which must be swum across.
+One of them advised me to ascend it to a narrower
+place, for that it was full of caymans, and I was
+about to do so when another Indian, more imprudent
+than his companions, spurred his horse into
+the stream. 'I do not fear the caymans!' he exclaimed.
+But he was scarcely halfway cross when
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[229]</a></span>
+we saw a cayman of monstrous size advancing toward
+him. We uttered a shout of warning; he at
+once perceived the danger, and, to avoid it, got off
+his horse at the opposite side to that upon which
+the cayman was approaching, and swam with all
+his strength toward the bank. On reaching it, he
+paused behind a fallen tree trunk, where he had
+water to his knees, and where, believing himself in
+perfect safety, he drew his cutlass and waited.
+Meanwhile the cayman reared his enormous head
+out of the water, threw himself upon the horse, and
+seized him by the saddle. The horse made an effort,
+the girths broke, and, while the cayman crunched
+the leather, the steed reached dry land. Perceiving
+that the saddle was not what he wanted, the cayman
+dropped it and advanced upon the Indian. We
+shouted to him to run. The poor fellow would not
+stir, but waited calmly, cutlass in hand, and, on the
+alligator's near approach, dealt him a blow upon the
+head. He might as well have tapped upon an anvil.
+The next instant he was writhing in the monster's
+jaws. For more than a minute we beheld him
+dragged in the direction of the lake, his body erect
+above the surface of the water (the cayman had
+seized him by the thigh), his hands joined, his eyes
+turned to heaven, in the attitude of a man imploring
+divine mercy. Soon he disappeared. The
+drama was over, the cayman's stomach was his
+tomb.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[230]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"During this agonizing moment we had all remained
+silent, but no sooner had my poor shepherd
+disappeared than we vowed we would avenge his
+death.</p>
+
+<p>"I had three nets made of strong cord, each net
+large enough to form a complete barrier across the
+river. I also had a hut built, and put an Indian to
+live in it, whose duty was to keep constant watch
+and to let me know as soon as the cayman returned
+to the river. He watched in vain for upward of two
+months; but at the end of that time he came and
+told me that the monster had seized a horse and
+dragged it into the river to devour it at leisure. I
+immediately repaired to the spot, accompanied by
+my guards, by my priest, who positively would see
+a cayman hunt, and by an American friend of mine,
+Mr. Russell, of the house of Russell and Sturgis,
+who was then staying with me. I had the nets
+spread at intervals, so that the cayman could not
+escape back into the lake. This operation was not
+effected without some acts of imprudence; thus, for
+instance, when the nets were arranged, an Indian
+dived to make sure that they reached the bottom,
+and that our enemy could not escape by passing
+below them. But it might very well have happened
+that the cayman was in the interval between the
+nets, and so have gobbled up my Indian. Fortunately
+everything passed as we wished. When all
+was ready, I launched three pirogues, strongly fastened
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[231]</a></span>
+together side by side, with some Indians in
+the center, armed with lances, and with tall bamboos
+with which they could touch bottom. At last,
+all measures having been taken to attain my end
+without any risk or accident, my Indians began to
+explore the river with their long bamboos.</p>
+
+<p>"An animal of such formidable size as the one
+we sought can not very easily hide himself, and soon
+we beheld him upon the surface of the river, lashing
+the water with his long tail, snapping and clattering
+with his jaws, and endeavoring to get at
+those who dared disturb him in his retreat. A universal
+shout of joy greeted his appearance; the Indians
+in the pirogues hurled their lances at him,
+while we, upon either shore of the river, fired a volley.
+The bullets rebounded from the monster's
+scales, which they were unable to penetrate; the
+keener lances made their way between the scales
+and entered the cayman's body some eight or ten
+inches. Thereupon he disappeared, swimming with
+incredible rapidity, and reached the first net.</p>
+
+<p>"The resistance it opposed turned him; he reascended
+the river, and again appeared on the top
+of the water. This violent movement broke the
+staves of the lances which the Indians had stuck
+into him, and the iron alone remained in the
+wounds. Each time that he reappeared the firing
+recommenced, and fresh lances were plunged into
+his enormous body. Perceiving, however, how ineffectual
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[232]</a></span>
+firearms were to pierce his cuirass of invulnerable
+scales, I excited him by my shouts and
+gestures; and when he came to the edge of the
+water, opening his enormous jaws all ready to devour
+me, I approached the muzzle of my gun to
+within a few inches and fired both barrels, in the
+hope that the bullets would find something softer
+than scales in the interior of that formidable cavern,
+and that they would penetrate to his brain.
+All was in vain. The jaws closed with a terrible
+noise, seizing only the fire and smoke that issued
+from my gun, and the balls flattened against his
+bones without injuring them. The animal, which
+had now become furious, made inconceivable efforts
+to seize one of his enemies; his strength seemed to
+increase instead of diminishing, while our resources
+were nearly exhausted. Almost all our lances were
+sticking in his body, and our ammunition drew to
+an end. The fight had lasted more than six hours,
+without any result that could make us hope its
+speedy termination, when an Indian struck the cayman,
+while at the bottom of the water, with a lance
+of unusual strength and size.</p>
+
+<p>"Another Indian struck two vigorous blows with
+a mace upon the butt end of the lance; the iron
+entered deep into the animal's body, and immediately,
+with a movement as swift as lightning, he
+darted toward the nets and disappeared. The
+lance-pole, detached from the iron head, returned
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[233]</a></span>
+to the surface of the water; for some minutes we
+waited in vain for the monster's reappearance; we
+thought that his last effort had enabled him to
+reach the lake, and that our chase was perfectly
+fruitless. We hauled in the first net, a large hole in
+which convinced us that our supposition was correct.
+The second net was in the same condition as
+the first. Disheartened by our failure, we were
+hauling in the third when we felt a strong resistance.
+Several Indians began to drag it toward
+the bank, and presently, to our great joy, we
+saw the cayman upon the surface of the water, expiring.</p>
+
+<p>"We threw over him several lassos of strong
+cords, and when he was well secured we drew him
+to land. It was no easy matter to haul him up on
+the bank; the strength of forty Indians hardly sufficed.
+When at last we had got him completely out
+of the water, and had him before our eyes, we stood
+stupefied with astonishment; for a very different
+thing was it to see his body thus, and to see him
+swimming when he was fighting against us. Mr.
+Russell, a very competent person, was charged with
+his measurement. From the extremity of the nostrils
+to the tip of the tail he was found to be <i>twenty-seven
+feet</i> long, and his circumference was eleven feet,
+measured under the armpits. His belly was much
+more voluminous, but we thought it useless to measure
+him there, judging that the horse upon which
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[234]</a></span>
+he had breakfasted must considerably have increased
+his bulk."</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h4>SWIFTS.</h4>
+
+
+<p>The edible swallows' nests are found in most of
+the islands of the Eastern archipelago.</p>
+
+<p>A traveler, Mr. H. Pryer, who made a visit to one
+of the swifts' caves in Borneo, thus describes the
+coming and the going of the dusky birds:</p>
+
+<p>"At a quarter past six in the evening the swifts
+began to return to the caves of their nests; a few
+had been flying in and out all day long, but now
+they began to pour in, at first in tens and then in
+hundreds, until the sound of their wings was like
+a strong gale of wind whistling through the rigging
+of a ship.</p>
+
+<p>"They continued flying until after midnight. As
+long as it remained light I found it impossible to
+catch any with my butterfly net, but after dark I
+found it only necessary to wave my net to secure
+as many as I wanted.</p>
+
+<p>"They must possess wonderful powers of sight
+to fly about in the dark of the recesses of their caves
+and to return to their nests, which are often built
+in places where no light penetrates."</p>
+
+<p>The edible nests are a luxury in China, where
+they are used in soups. The bird makes her nest
+of saliva, and plasters it on to the rocks inside of
+caves. The nests are collected by means of boats,
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[235]</a></span>
+ropes, and ladders, and bring in the Chinese market
+from £2 to £7 per pound. There have been imported
+to Canton more than eight million nests in a single
+year.</p>
+
+<p>Such are some views of life inside of the vast
+possession of the sea which Magellan discovered for
+Spain, but which has fallen under the folds of the
+flag of the Republic of the West.</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p class="center">THE END.</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;<a name="foot"></a>&nbsp;</p>
+
+
+
+
+<h3>FOOTNOTES</h3>
+
+
+<p>[A] Vasco da Gama.<a href="#noteA">(Return)</a></p>
+
+<p>[B] Donna Juana and Don Carlos, her son, by the grace of God, Queen
+and King of Castile, Leon, Aragon, the two Sicilies, and Jerusalem, of Navarra,
+Granada, Toledo, Valencia, Galicia, the Mallorcas, Seville, Sardinia,
+Cordova, Corsica, Murcia, Jaen, the Algarves, of Aljazira, Gibraltar, of the
+Canary Isles, of the Indies, isles and mainland of the Ocean-sea, Counts of
+Barcelona, Lords of Biscay and Molina, Dukes of Athens and Neopatria,
+Counts of Roussillon and Cerdana, Marquises of Euristan and Gociano,
+Archdukes of Austria, Dukes of Bergona and Brabant, Counts of Flanders
+and Tirol, etc.<a href="#noteB">(Return)</a></p>
+
+<p>[C] This statement there is every reason to believe was
+a pure fiction of Da Costa.<a href="#noteC">(Return)</a></p>
+
+<p>[D] The number was larger, about 270.<a href="#noteD">(Return)</a></p>
+
+<p>[E] The 10th of August was Wednesday, and Monday was the 8th of<br />
+August: all the other dates of the week and month agree and are<br />
+consistent with each other.<a href="#noteE">(Return)</a></p>
+
+<p>[F] According to ship's time.<a href="#noteF">(Return)</a></p>
+
+<p>[G] A regular order of clergy established at Rome in 1524, but which
+does not appear to have spread much beyond Italy and France.<a href="#noteG">(Return)</a></p>
+
+<hr style="width: 100%" />
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p class="center">D. APPLETON AND COMPANY'S PUBLICATIONS.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 70%" />
+
+<p class="center" style="font-size: 10pt">BOOKS BY WILLIAM O. STODDARD.</p>
+
+<p class="center" style="font-size: 8pt">UNIFORM EDITION. EACH, 12MO, CLOTH, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>WITH THE BLACK PRINCE.</i></span> A Story of
+Adventure in the Fourteenth Century. Illustrated by B.
+West Clinedinst.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">This is a story of adventure and of battle, but it is also an informing presentation
+of life in England and some phases of life in France in the fourteenth century. The
+hero is associated with the Black Prince at Crécy and elsewhere. Mr. Stoddard has
+done his best work in this story, and the absorbing interest of his stirring historical romance
+will appeal to all young readers.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>SUCCESS AGAINST ODDS;</i></span><i> or, How an American
+Boy made his Way.</i> Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">In this spirited and interesting story Mr. Stoddard tells the adventures of a plucky
+boy who fought his own battles, and made his way upward from poverty in a Long
+Island seashore town. It is a tale of pluck and self-reliance capitally told. The seashore
+life is vividly described, and there are plenty of exciting incidents.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>THE RED PATRIOT.</i></span> A Story of the American
+Revolution. Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>THE WINDFALL;</i></span><i> or, After the Flood.</i> Illustrated
+by B. West Clinedinst.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>CHRIS, THE MODEL-MAKER.</i></span> A Story of New
+York. With 6 full-page Illustrations by B. West Clinedinst.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>ON THE OLD FRONTIER.</i></span> With 10 full-page
+Illustrations.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>THE BATTLE OF NEW YORK.</i></span> With 11 full-page
+Illustrations and colored Frontispiece.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>LITTLE SMOKE.</i></span> A Story of the Sioux Indians.
+With 12 full-page Illustrations by F. S. Dellenbaugh, portraits
+of Sitting Bull, Red Cloud, and other chiefs, and 72 head and
+tail pieces representing the various implements and surroundings
+of Indian life.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>CROWDED OUT O' CROFIELD.</i></span> The story of
+a country boy who fought his way to success in the great metropolis.
+With 23 Illustrations by C. T. Hill.</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p class="center">D. APPLETON AND COMPANY'S PUBLICATIONS.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 70%" />
+
+<p class="center" style="font-size: 10pt">GOOD BOOKS FOR YOUNG READERS.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>THE EXPLOITS OF MYLES STANDISH.</i></span> By
+<span class="smcap">Henry Johnson</span> (Muirhead Robertson), author of "From
+Scrooby to Plymouth Rock," etc. Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth,
+$1.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"A vivid picture, keen and penetrating in its interests, and familiarizing young
+people in a popular way with the hardships endured by the early settlers of New England"&mdash;<i>Boston
+Herald.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"All that concerns the settlement at New Plymouth is told with fine skill and vividness
+of description.... A book that must be read from cover to cover with unfaltering
+interest."&mdash;<i>Boston Saturday Evening Gazette.</i></p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>CHRISTINE'S CAREER.</i></span> A Story for Girls. By
+<span class="smcap">Pauline King</span>. Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth, specially bound.
+$1.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">The story is fresh and modern, relieved by incidents and constant humor, and the
+lessons which are suggested are most beneficial.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>JOHN BOYD'S ADVENTURES.</i></span> By <span class="smcap">Thomas
+W. Knox</span>, author of "The Boy Travelers," etc. With 12 full-page
+Illustrations. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>ALONG THE FLORIDA REEF.</i></span> By <span class="smcap">Charles
+F. Holder</span>, joint author of "Elements of Zoölogy." With
+numerous Illustrations. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>ENGLISHMAN'S HAVEN.</i></span> By <span class="smcap">W. J. Gordon</span>,
+author of "The Captain-General," etc. With 8 full-page Illustrations.
+12mo. Cloth, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>WE ALL.</i></span> A Story of Outdoor Life and Adventure
+in Arkansas. By <span class="smcap">Octave Thanet</span>. With 12 full-page Illustrations
+by E. J. Austen and Others, 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>KING TOM AND THE RUNAWAYS.</i></span> By
+<span class="smcap">Louis Pendleton</span>. The experiences of two boys in the forests
+of Georgia. With 6 Illustrations by E. W. Kemble. 12mo.
+Cloth, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p class="center">D. APPLETON AND CO'S PUBLICATIONS.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 70%" />
+
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>BOYS IN THE MOUNTAINS AND ON THE
+PLAINS;</i></span><i> or, The Western Adventures of Tom Smart, Bob
+Edge, and Peter Small.</i> By <span class="smcap">W. H. Rideing</span>, Member of the
+Geographical Surveys under Lieutenant Wheeler. With 101
+Illustrations. Square 8vo. Cloth, gilt side and back, $2.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"A handsome gift-book relating to travel, adventure, and field sports in the West."&mdash;<i>New
+York Times.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"Mr. Rideing's book is intended for the edification of advanced young readers. It
+narrates the adventures of Tom Smart, Bob Edge, and Peter Small, in their travels
+through the mountainous region of the West, principally in Colorado. The author was
+a member of the Wheeler expedition, engaged in surveying the Territories, and his
+descriptions of scenery, mining life, the Indians, games, etc., are in a great measure
+derived from personal observation and experience. The volume is handsomely illustrated,
+and can not but prove attractive to young readers."&mdash;<i>Chicago Journal.</i></p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>BOYS COASTWISE;</i></span><i> or, All Along the Shore.</i> By
+<span class="smcap">W. H. Rideing</span>, Uniform with "Boys in the Mountains."
+With numerous Illustrations. Illuminated boards, $1.75.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"Fully equal to the best of the year's holiday books for boys.... In his present trip
+the author takes them among scenes of the greatest interest to all boys, whether residents
+on the coast or inland&mdash;along the wharves of the metropolis, aboard the pilot-boats
+for a cruise, with a look at the great ocean steamers, among the life-saving men,
+coast wreckers and divers, and finally on a tour of inspection of lighthouses and lightships,
+and other interesting phases of nautical and coast life."&mdash;<i>Christian Union.</i></p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>THE CRYSTAL HUNTERS.</i></span> A Boy's Adventures
+in the Higher Alps. By <span class="smcap">George Manville Fenn</span>, author
+of "In the King's Name," "Dick o' the Fens," etc. 12mo,
+Cloth, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"This is the boys' favorite author, and of the many books Mr. Fenn has written
+for them this will please them the best. While it will not come under the head of
+sensational, it is yet full of life and of those stirring adventures which boys always delight
+in."&mdash;<i>Christian at Work.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"English pluck and Swiss coolness are tested to the utmost in these perilous explorations
+among the higher Alps, and quite as thrilling as any of the narrow escapes
+is the account of the first breathless ascent of a real mountain-peak. It matters little to
+the reader whether the search for crystals is rewarded or not, so concerned does he become
+for the fate of the hunters."&mdash;<i>Literary World.</i></p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>SYD BELTON:</i></span><i> The Boy who would not go to Sea.</i>
+By <span class="smcap">George Manville Fenn</span>. With 6 full-page Illustrations.
+12mo. Cloth, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"Who among the young story-reading public will not rejoice at the sight of the old
+combination, so often proved admirable&mdash;a story by Manville Fenn, illustrated by
+Gordon Browne! The story, too, is one of the good old sort, full of life and vigor,
+breeziness and fun. It begins well and goes on better, and from the time Syd joins
+his ship, exciting incidents follow each other in such rapid and brilliant succession that
+nothing short of absolute compulsion would induce the reader to lay it down."&mdash;<i>London
+Journal of Education.</i></p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p class="center">D. APPLETON AND COMPANY'S PUBLICATIONS.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 70%" />
+
+<p class="center" style="font-size: 10pt">YOUNG HEROES OF OUR NAVY.<br />
+
+Uniform Edition. Each, 12mo, Cloth, $1.00.</p>
+
+<p><b>Dewey on the Mississippi.</b></p>
+
+<p>The Story of the Admiral's Younger Years. By <span class="smcap">Rossiter
+Johnson</span>. A New Book in the Young Heroes of our Navy
+Series. Illustrated.</p>
+
+<p><b>The Hero of Erie (Commodore Perry).</b></p>
+
+<p>By <span class="smcap">James Barnes</span>, author of "Midshipman Farragut," "Commodore
+Bainbridge," etc. With 10 full-page Illustrations.</p>
+
+<p><b>Commodore Bainbridge.</b></p>
+
+<p>From the Gunroom to the Quarter-deck. By <span class="smcap">James Barnes</span>,
+author of "Midshipman Farragut." Illustrated by George
+Gibbs and Others.</p>
+
+<p><b>Midshipman Farragut.</b></p>
+
+<p>By <span class="smcap">James Barnes</span>, author of "For King or Country," etc.
+Illustrated by Carlton T. Chapman.</p>
+
+<p><b>Decatur and Somers.</b></p>
+
+<p>By <span class="smcap">Molly Elliot Seawell</span>, author of "Paul Jones," "Little
+Jarvis," etc. With 6 full-page Illustrations by J. O. Davidson
+and Others.</p>
+
+<p><b>Paul Jones.</b></p>
+
+<p>By <span class="smcap">Molly Elliot Seawell</span>. With 8 full-page Illustrations.</p>
+
+<p><b>Midshipman Paulding.</b></p>
+
+<p>A True Story of the War of 1812. By <span class="smcap">Molly Elliot Seawell</span>.
+With 6 full-page Illustrations.</p>
+
+<p><b>Little Jarvis.</b></p>
+
+<p>The story of the heroic midshipman of the frigate Constellation. By
+<span class="smcap"> Molly Elliot Seawell</span>. With 6 full-page Illustrations.</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 40%" />
+
+<p class="center">D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.</p>
+
+<p class="center">D. APPLETON AND CO'S PUBLICATIONS.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 70%" />
+
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>PAUL AND VIRGINIA.</i></span> By <span class="smcap">Bernardin de Saint-Pierre</span>.
+With a Biographical Sketch, and numerous Illustrations
+by Maurice Leloir. 8vo. Cloth, gilt top, uniform with
+"Picciola," "The Story of Colette," and "An Attic Philosopher
+in Paris." $1.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">It is believed that this standard edition of "Paul and Virginia" with Leloir's charming
+illustrations will prove a most acceptable addition to the series of illustrated foreign
+classics in which D. Appleton and Co. have published "The Story of Colette," "An
+Attic Philosopher in Paris," and "Picciola." No more sympathetic illustrator than
+Leloir could be found, and his treatment of this masterpiece of French literature invests
+it with a peculiar value.</p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>PICCIOLA.</i></span> By <span class="smcap">X. B. Saintine</span>. With 130 Illustrations
+by <span class="smcap">J. F. Gueldry</span>. 8vo. Cloth, gilt top, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"Saintine's 'Picciola,' the pathetic tale of the prisoner who raised a flower between
+the cracks of the flagging of his dungeon, has passed definitely into the list of classic
+books.... It has never been more beautifully housed than in this edition, with its fine
+typography, binding, and sympathetic illustrations."&mdash;<i>Philadelphia Telegraph.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"The binding is both unique and tasteful, and the book commends itself strongly as
+one that should meet with general favor in the season of gift-making."&mdash;<i>Boston Saturday
+Evening Gazette.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"Most beautiful in its clear type, cream-laid paper, many attractive illustrations,
+and holiday binding."&mdash;<i>New York Observer.</i></p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>AN ATTIC PHILOSOPHER IN PARIS;</i></span><i> or, A
+Peep at the World from a Garret.</i> Being the Journal of a
+Happy Man. By <span class="smcap">Émile Souvestre</span>. With numerous Illustrations.
+8vo. Cloth, gilt top, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"A suitable holiday gift for a friend who appreciates refined literature."&mdash;<i>Boston
+Times.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"The influence of the book is wholly good. The volume is a particularly handsome
+one."&mdash;<i>Philadelphia Telegraph.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"It is a classic. It has found an appropriate reliquary. Faithfully translated,
+charmingly illustrated by Jean Claude with full-page pictures, vignettes in the text, and
+head and tail pieces, printed in graceful type on handsome paper, and bound with an
+art worthy of Matthews, in half-cloth, ornamented on the cover, it is an exemplary book,
+fit to be 'a treasure for aye.'"&mdash;<i>New York Times.</i></p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>THE STORY OF COLETTE.</i></span> A new large-paper
+edition. With 36 Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, gilt top, $1.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"One of the handsomest of the books of fiction for the holiday season."&mdash;<i>Philadelphia
+Bulletin.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"One of the gems of the season.... It is the story of the life of young womanhood
+in France, dramatically told, with the light and shade and coloring of the genuine
+artist, and is utterly free from that which mars too many French novels. In its literary
+finish it is well-nigh perfect, indicating the hand of the master."&mdash;<i>Boston Traveller.</i></p>
+
+<hr style="width: 40%" />
+
+<p class="center">New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p class="center">D. APPLETON AND CO'S PUBLICATIONS.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 70%" />
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>THE FARMER'S BOY.</i></span> By <span class="smcap">Clifton Johnson</span>,
+author of "The Country School in New England," etc. With
+64 Illustrations by the Author. 8vo. Cloth, $2.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"One of the handsomest and most elaborate juvenile works lately published."&mdash;<i>Philadelphia
+Item.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"Mr. Johnson's style is almost rhythmical, and one lays down the book with the
+sensation of having read a poem and that saddest of all longings, the longing for
+vanished youth."&mdash;<i>Boston Commercial Bulletin.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"As a triumph of the realistic photographer's art it deserves warm praise quite
+aside from its worth as a sterling book on the subjects its title indicates.... It is a
+most praiseworthy book, and the more such that are published the better."&mdash;<i>New York
+Mail and Express.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"The book is beautiful and amusing, well studied, well written, redolent of the
+wood, the field, and the stream, and full of those delightful reminders of a boy's
+country home which touch the heart."&mdash;<i>New York Independent.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"One of the finest books of the kind that have ever been put out."&mdash;<i>Cleveland
+World.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"A book on whose pages many a gray-haired man would dwell with retrospective
+enjoyment."&mdash;<i>St. Paul Pioneer Press.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"The illustrations are admirable, and the book will appeal to every one who has
+had a taste of life on a New England farm."&mdash;<i>Boston Transcript.</i></p>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>THE COUNTRY SCHOOL IN NEW ENGLAND.</i></span>
+By <span class="smcap">Clifton Johnson</span>. With 60 Illustrations from
+Photographs and Drawings made by the Author. Square 8vo.
+Cloth, gilt edges, $2.50.</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"An admirable undertaking, carried out in an admirable way.... Mr. Johnson's
+descriptions are vivid and lifelike and are full of humor, and the illustrations, mostly
+after photographs, give a solid effect of realism to the whole work, and are superbly
+reproduced.... The definitions at the close of this volume are very, very funny, and
+yet they are not stupid; they are usually the result of deficient logic."&mdash;<i>Boston Beacon.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"A charmingly written account of the rural schools in this section of the country.
+It speaks of the old-fashioned school days of the early quarter of this century, of the
+mid-century schools, of the country school of to-day, and of how scholars think and
+write. The style is animated and picturesque.... It is handsomely printed, and is
+interesting from its pretty cover to its very last page."&mdash;<i>Boston Saturday Evening
+Gazette.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"A unique piece of book-making that deserves to be popular.... Prettily and
+serviceably bound, and well illustrated."&mdash;<i>The Churchman.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"The readers who turn the leaves of this handsome book will unite in saying the
+author has 'been there.' It is no fancy sketch, but text and illustrations are both a
+reality."&mdash;<i>Chicago Inter-Ocean.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"No one who is familiar with the little red schoolhouse can look at these pictures
+and read these chapters without having the mind recall the boyhood experiences, and
+the memory is pretty sure to be a pleasant one."&mdash;<i>Chicago Times.</i></p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 8pt">"A superbly prepared volume, which by its reading matter and its beautiful illustrations,
+so natural and finished, pleasantly and profitably recalls memories and associations
+connected with the very foundations of our national greatness."&mdash;<i>N. Y. Observer.</i></p>
+
+<hr style="width: 40%" />
+
+<p class="center">New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p class="center">D. APPLETON AND CO'S PUBLICATIONS.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 70%" />
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>UNCLE REMUS.</i></span><i> His Songs and his Sayings.</i> By
+<span class="smcap">Joel Chandler Harris</span>. With new Preface and Revisions,
+and 112 Illustrations by A. B. Frost. Library Edition. 12mo.
+Buckram, gilt top, uncut, $2.00. Also, <i>Edition de luxe</i> of the
+above, limited to 250 copies, each signed by the author, with
+the full-page cuts mounted on India paper. 8vo. White vellum,
+gilt top, $10.00.</p>
+
+<div style="font-size: 8pt">
+
+<p>"The old tales of the plantation have never been told as Mr. Harris has told them.
+Each narrative is to the point, and so swift in its action upon the risibilities of the
+reader that one almost loses consciousness of the printed page, and fancies it is the
+voice of the lovable old darky himself that steals across the senses and brings mirth
+inextinguishable as it comes; ... and Mr. Frost's drawings are so superlatively good,
+so inexpressibly funny, that they promise to make this the standard edition of a standard
+book."&mdash;<i>New York Tribune.</i></p>
+
+<p>"An exquisite volume, full of good illustrations, and if there is anybody in this
+country who doesn't know Mr. Harris, here is an opportunity to make his acquaintance
+and have many a good laugh."&mdash;<i>New York Herald.</i></p>
+
+<p>"There is but one 'Uncle Remus,' and he will never grow old.... It was a
+happy thought, that of marrying the work of Harris and Frost."&mdash;<i>New York Mail
+and Express.</i></p>
+
+<p>"Nobody could possibly have done this work better than Mr. Frost, whose appreciation
+of negro life fitted him especially to be the interpreter of 'Uncle Remus,' and
+whose sense of the humor in animal life makes these drawings really illustrations in the
+fullest sense. Mr. Harris's well-known work has become in a sense a classic, and this
+may be accepted as the standard edition."&mdash;<i>Philadelphia Times.</i></p>
+
+<p>"A book which became a classic almost as soon as it was published.... Mr. Frost
+has never done anything better in the way of illustration, if indeed he has done anything
+as good."&mdash;<i>Boston Advertiser.</i></p>
+
+<p>"We pity the reader who has not yet made the acquaintance of 'Uncle Remus'
+and his charming story.... Mr. Harris has made a real addition to literature purely
+and strikingly American, and Mr. Frost has aided in fixing the work indelibly on the
+consciousness of the American reader."&mdash;<i>The Churchman.</i></p>
+
+<p>"The old fancies of the old negro, dear as they may have been to us these many
+years, seem to gain new life when they appear through the medium of Mr. Frost's
+imagination."&mdash;<i>New York Home Journal.</i></p>
+
+<p>"In his own peculiar field 'Uncle Remus' has no rival. The book has become a
+classic, but the latest edition is the choice one. It is rarely riven to an author to see
+his work accompanied by pictures so closely in sympathy with his text."&mdash;<i>San Francisco
+Argonaut.</i></p>
+
+<p>"We say it with the utmost faith that there is not an artist who works in illustration
+that can catch the attitude and expression, the slyness, the innate depravity, the
+eye of surprise, obstinacy, the hang of the head or the kick of the heels of the mute and
+the brute creation as Mr. Frost has shown to us here."&mdash;<i>Baltimore Sun.</i></p>
+</div>
+
+<hr style="width: 40%" />
+
+<p class="center">New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.</p>
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<p class="center">D. APPLETON AND COMPANY'S PUBLICATIONS.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 70%" />
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>THE STORY OF WASHINGTON.</i></span> By <span class="smcap">Elizabeth
+Eggleston Seelye</span>. Edited by Dr. Edward Eggleston.
+With over 100 Illustrations by Allegra Eggleston. A new volume
+in the "Delights of History" Series, uniform with "The
+Story of Columbus." 12mo. Cloth, $1.75.</p>
+
+<div style="font-size: 8pt">
+
+<p>"One of the best accounts of the incidents of Washington's life for young people."&mdash;<i>New
+York Observer.</i></p>
+
+<p>"The Washington described is not that of the demigod or hero of the first half of
+this century, but the man Washington, with his defects as well as his virtues, his unattractive
+traits as well as his pleasing ones.... There is greater freedom from errors
+than in more pretentious lives."&mdash;<i>Chicago Tribune.</i></p>
+
+<p>"The illustrations are numerous, and actually illustrate, including portraits and
+views, with an occasional map and minor pictures suggestive of the habits and customs
+of the period. It is altogether an attractive and useful book, and one that should find
+many readers among American boys and girls."&mdash;<i>Philadelphia Times.</i></p>
+
+<p>"A good piece of literary work presented in an attractive shape."&mdash;<i>New York
+Tribune.</i></p>
+
+<p>"Will be read with interest by young and old. It is told with good taste and accuracy,
+and if the first President loses some of his mythical goodness in this story, the
+real greatness of his natural character stands out distinctly, and his example will be all
+the more helpful to the boys and girls of this generation."&mdash;<i>New York Churchman.</i></p>
+
+<p>"The book is just what has been needed, the story of the life of Washington, as
+well as of his public career, written in a manner so interesting that one who begins
+it will finish, and so told that it will leave not the memory of a few trivial anecdotes by
+which to measure the man, but a just and complete estimate of him. The illustrations
+are so excellent as to double the value of the book as it would be without them."&mdash;<i>Chicago
+Times.</i></p>
+
+</div>
+
+<p><span style="font-size:14pt"><i>THE STORY OF COLUMBUS.</i></span> By <span class="smcap">Elizabeth
+Eggleston Seelye</span>. Edited by Dr. Edward Eggleston. With
+100 Illustrations by Allegra Eggleston. "Delights of History"
+Series. 12mo. Cloth, $1.75.</p>
+
+<div style="font-size: 8pt">
+
+<p>"A brief, popular, interesting, and yet critical volume, just such as we should wish
+to place in the hands of a young reader. The authors of this volume have done their
+best to keep it on a high plane of accuracy and conscientious work without losing sight
+of their readers."&mdash;<i>New York Independent.</i></p>
+
+<p>"In some respects altogether the best book that the Columbus year has brought
+out."&mdash;<i>Rochester Post-Express.</i></p>
+
+<p>"A simple story told in a natural fashion, and will be found far more interesting
+than many of the more ambitions works on a similar theme."&mdash;<i>New York Journal of
+Commerce.</i></p>
+
+<p>"This is no ordinary work. It is pre-eminently a work of the present time and of
+the future as well."&mdash;<i>Boston Traveller.</i></p>
+
+<p>"Mrs. Seelye's book is pleasing in its general effect, and reveals the results of
+painstaking and conscientious study."&mdash;<i>New York Tribune.</i></p>
+
+<p>"A very just account is given of Columbus, his failings being neither concealed nor
+magnified, but his real greatness being made plain."&mdash;<i>New York Examiner.</i></p>
+
+<p>"The illustrations are particularly well chosen and neatly executed, and they add
+to the general excellence of the volume."&mdash;<i>New York Times.</i></p>
+
+</div>
+
+<hr style="40%" />
+<p class="center">New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.</p>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Story of Magellan and The
+Discovery of the Philippines, by Hezekiah Butterworth
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE STORY OF MAGELLAN ***
+
+***** This file should be named 37814-h.htm or 37814-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/8/1/37814/
+
+Produced by Charlene Taylor, Eric Skeet, Marilynda
+Fraser-Cunliffe and the Online Distributed Proofreading
+Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was made using scans
+of public domain works from the University of Michigan
+Digital Libraries.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_004.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_004.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f3c562
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_004.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_005.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_005.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bef6e85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_005.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_019.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_019.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f64875
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_019.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_021.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_021.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a91fa54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_021.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_026.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_026.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3612dc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_026.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_031.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_031.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b570ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_031.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_032.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_032.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2df8f08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_032.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_033.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_033.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95d16e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_033.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_037.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_037.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a46f5f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_037.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_038.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_038.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91a0004
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_038.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_042.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_042.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8cb382
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_042.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_045.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_045.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..60f194c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_045.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_047.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_047.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fedb695
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_047.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_051.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_051.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4823aa8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_051.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_055.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_055.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..455a30d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_055.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_061.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_061.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43b4335
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_061.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_072.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_072.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71ed411
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_072.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_076.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_076.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..455d300
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_076.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_079.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_079.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91323cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_079.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_097.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_097.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eec932d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_097.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_099.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_099.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8dee4fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_099.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_144.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_144.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..361e93d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_144.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_163.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_163.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cacc5b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_163.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_202.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_202.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..740f968
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_202.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_210.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_210.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4696b8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_210.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_212.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_212.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ac2964
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_212.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_217.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_217.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3743920
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_217.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_226.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_226.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f499441
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_226.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_231.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_231.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43396b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_231.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_235.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_235.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7db302
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_235.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_247.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_247.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20f337a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_247.jpg
diff --git a/37814-h/images/illus_253.jpg b/37814-h/images/illus_253.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a08c60f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814-h/images/illus_253.jpg
diff --git a/37814.txt b/37814.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..172f263
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6973 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Story of Magellan and The Discovery of
+the Philippines, by Hezekiah Butterworth
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Story of Magellan and The Discovery of the Philippines
+
+Author: Hezekiah Butterworth
+
+Illustrator: Frank T. Merrill
+
+Release Date: October 21, 2011 [EBook #37814]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE STORY OF MAGELLAN ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Charlene Taylor, Eric Skeet, Marilynda
+Fraser-Cunliffe and the Online Distributed Proofreading
+Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was made using scans
+of public domain works from the University of Michigan
+Digital Libraries.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Transcriber's Notes:
+(1) Typos, punctuation, and spelling errors have been corrected.
+(2) Footnotes are marked [A], and placed at the end of the paragraph.
+
+
+
+
+THE STORY OF MAGELLAN AND THE DISCOVERY OF THE PHILIPPINES
+
+BY HEZEKIAH BUTTERWORTH.
+
+Uniform edition. Each, 12mo, cloth, $1.50.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+=The Story of Magellan.= A Tale of the Discovery of the Philippines.
+Illustrated by F. T. Merrill and Others.
+
+=The Treasure Ship.= A Story of Sir William Phipps and the Inter-Charter
+Period in Massachusetts. Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst and Others.
+
+=The Pilot of the Mayflower.= Illustrated by H. Winthrop Peirce and
+Others.
+
+=True to his Home.= A Tale of the Boyhood of Franklin. Illustrated by H.
+Winthrop Peirce.
+
+=The Wampum Belt:= _or, The Fairest Page of History._ A Tale of William
+Penn's Treaty with the Indians. With 6 full-page Illustrations.
+
+=The Knight of Liberty.= A Tale of the Fortunes of Lafayette. With 6
+full-page Illustrations.
+
+=The Patriot Schoolmaster.= A Tale of the Minutemen and the Sons of
+Liberty. With 6 full-page Illustrations by H. Winthrop Peirce.
+
+=In the Boyhood of Lincoln.= A Story of the Black Hawk War and the
+Tunker Schoolmaster. With 12 Illustrations and colored Frontispiece.
+
+=The Boys of Greenway Court.= A Story of the Early Years of Washington.
+With 10 full-page Illustrations.
+
+=The Log School-House on the Columbia.= With 13 full-page Illustrations
+by J. Carter Beard, E. J. Austen, and Others.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.
+
+
+[Illustration: Magellan planting the Cross in the Philippine Islands.]
+
+
+
+
+      THE STORY OF MAGELLAN
+               AND
+ THE DISCOVERY OF THE PHILIPPINES
+
+               BY
+
+      HEZEKIAH BUTTERWORTH
+
+    AUTHOR OF
+    THE TREASURE SHIP, THE PILOT OF THE MAYFLOWER,
+    TRUE TO HIS HOME, THE WAMPUM BELT,
+    IN THE BOYHOOD OF LINCOLN, ETC.
+
+    _ILLUSTRATED BY FRANK T. MERRILL
+    AND OTHERS_
+
+    [Illustration: Publishers' logo]
+
+    NEW YORK
+    D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
+    1899
+
+   COPYRIGHT, 1899,
+
+   BY D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.
+
+
+      "Fired by thy fame,[A] and with his King in ire
+      To match thy deed, shall Magalhaes aspire.
+
+      "Along the regions of the burning zone,
+      To deepest South he dares the course unknown.
+
+      "A land of giants shall his eyes behold,
+      Of camel strength, surpassing human mould.
+
+      "Beneath the Southern star's gold gleam he braves
+      And stems the whirl of land-surrounded waves.
+
+      "Forever moved to the hero's fame,
+      Those foaming straits shall bear his deathless name."
+                                                CAMOENS.
+
+          [A] Vasco da Gama.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+I have been asked to write a story of Ferdinand Magellan, the value of
+whose discoveries has received a new interpretation in the development
+of the South Temperate Zone of America, and in the ceding of the
+Philippine Islands to the United States. The works of Lord Stanley and
+of Guillemard furnish comprehensive histories of the intrepid discoverer
+of the South Pacific Ocean and the Philippine Islands; but there would
+seem to be room for a short, picturesque story of Magellan's adventures,
+such as might be read by family lamps and in schools.
+
+To attempt to write such a story is more than a pleasure, for the study
+of Magellan reveals a character high above his age; a man unselfish and
+true, who was filled with a passion for discovery, and who sought the
+welfare of humanity and the glory of the Cross rather than wealth or
+fame. Among great discoverers he has left a character well-nigh ideal.
+The incidents of his life are not only honorable, but usually have the
+color of chivalry.
+
+His voyages, as pictured by his companion Pigafetta, the historian, give
+us our first view of the interesting native inhabitants of the South
+Temperate Zone and of the Pacific archipelagoes, and his adventures with
+the giants of Patagonia and with the natives of the Ladrone Islands,
+read almost like stories of Sinbad the Sailor. The simple record of his
+adventures is in itself a storybook.
+
+Magellan, from his usually high and unselfish character, as well as for
+the lasting influence of what he did as shown in the new developments of
+civilization, merits a place among household heroes; and it is in this
+purpose and spirit I have undertaken a simple sympathetic interpretation
+of his most noble and fruitful life. I have tried to put into the form
+of a story the events whose harvests now appear after nearly four
+hundred years, and to picture truthfully a beautiful and inspiring
+character. To the narrative of his lone lantern I have added some tales
+of the Philippines.
+
+                                                      H. BUTTERWORTH.
+
+    28 WORCESTER STREET, BOSTON, MASS.
+
+
+
+
+                              CONTENTS.
+
+
+    CHAPTER                                                  PAGE
+
+    I.--A STRANGE ROYAL ORDER                                   1
+
+    II.--FRIENDS WITH A PURPOSE                                 9
+
+    III.--PRINCE HENRY THE NAVIGATOR AND VASCO DA GAMA         15
+
+    IV.--THE ENTHUSIASTS CARRY THEIR PLANS TO THE KING         24
+
+    V.--ABOUT THE HAPPY ITALIAN WHO WISHED TO SEE THE
+    WORLD.--BEAUTIFUL SEVILLE!                                 38
+
+    VI.--ENEMIES.--ESTEBAN GORMEZ                              43
+
+    VII.--"MAROONED"                                           52
+
+    VIII.--"THE WONDERS OF NEW LANDS."--PIGAFETTA'S TALES OF
+    HIS ADVENTURES WITH MAGELLAN.--THE STORY OF "THE
+    FOUNTAIN TREE."--"ST ELMO'S FIRE"                          60
+
+    IX.--PINEAPPLES, POTATOES, VERY OLD PEOPLE                 70
+
+    X.--THE FIRST GIANT.--THE ISLANDS OF GEESE AND
+    GOSLINGS.--THE DANCING GIANTS                              76
+
+    XI.--CAPTURING A GIANT.--MAGELLAN'S DECISION               84
+
+    XII.--THE MUTINY AT PORT JULIAN.--THE STRAITS.--1519       91
+
+    XIII.--"THE ADMIRAL WAS MAD!"                              99
+
+    XIV.--THE PACIFIC.--THE DEATH OF THE GIANTS               103
+
+    XV.--WELCOME TO THE PHILIPPINES!                          108
+
+    XVI.--THE VISIT OF THE KING.--PIGAFETTA VISITS THE KING   116
+
+    XVII.--EASTER SUNDAY.--MAGELLAN PLANTS THE CROSS          122
+
+    XVIII.--CHRISTIANITY AND TRADE ESTABLISHED.--THE
+    BAPTISM OF THE QUEEN                                      129
+
+    XIX.--HALCYON DAYS                                        136
+
+    XX.--THE DEATH OF MAGELLAN                                139
+
+    XXI.--THE SPICE ISLANDS.--WONDERFUL BIRDS.--CLOVES,
+    CINNAMON, NUTMEGS, GINGER.--THE SHIPS OVERLOADED          144
+
+    XXII.--MESQUITA IN PRISON                                 157
+
+    XXIII.--STRANGE STORIES.--THE WISE OLD WOMEN.--THE
+    WALKING LEAVES.--THE HAUNTED SANDALWOOD TREES.--THE
+    EMPEROR OF CHINA.--THE LITTLE BOY AND THE GIANT BIRD      161
+
+    XXIV.--THE LOST DAY                                       173
+
+    XXV.--IN THE CHURCH OF OUR LADY OF VICTORY.--PIGAFETTA    176
+
+    SUPPLEMENTAL                                              182
+
+
+
+
+                LIST OF FULL-PAGE ILLUSTRATIONS.
+
+
+                                                            FACING
+                                                             PAGE
+
+    Magellan planting the Cross in the Philippine Islands _Frontispiece_
+
+    Lisbon, from the south bank of the Tagus                    4
+
+    Ferdinand Magellan                                          6
+
+    "He is a renegade. His arms must come down!"               18
+
+    Barcelona                                                  34
+
+    Night after night the ships followed Magellan's lantern    55
+
+    Interior of the Alcazar of Seville                         60
+
+    The dancing giant                                          80
+
+    Mount Mayon, on the Island of Luzon                       125
+
+    The death of Magellan                                     142
+
+    Pigafetta presenting the history of the voyage to the
+    King of Spain                                             179
+
+    Map of the Philippine Islands                             187
+
+    Native houses in Manila                                   190
+
+    Hong Kong                                                 202
+
+    Iloilo                                                    206
+
+    Boats on the River Pasig                                  218
+
+
+
+
+               THE STORY OF MAGELLAN.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+A STRANGE ROYAL ORDER.
+
+
+I am to tell the story of a man who had faith in himself.
+
+The clouds and the ocean bear his name. Lord Stanley has called him "the
+greatest of ancient and modern navigators."
+
+That was a strange royal order, indeed, which Dom Manoel, King of
+Portugal, issued in the early part of the fifteenth century. It was in
+effect: "Go to the house of Hernando de Magallanes, in Sabrosa, and tear
+from it the coat of arms. Hernando de Magallanes (Ferdinand Magellan)
+has transferred his allegiance to the King of Spain."
+
+The people of the mountain district must have been very much astonished
+when the cavaliers, if such they were, appeared to execute this order.
+
+As the arms were torn away from the ancient house, we may imagine the
+alcalde of the place inquiring:
+
+"What has our townsman done? Did he not serve our country well in the
+East?"
+
+"He is a renegade!" answers the commander.
+
+"But he carried his plans for discovery to our own King first before he
+went to the court of Spain."
+
+"Say no more! Spain is reaping the fruits of his brain, and under his
+lead is planting her colonies in the new seas, to the detriment of our
+country and the shame of the throne. His arms must come down. Portugal
+rejects his name forever!"
+
+The officers of the King tore down the arms. They thought they had
+consigned the name for which the arms stood to oblivion. As the Jewish
+hierarchy said of Spinoza: "Let his name be cast out under the whole
+heavens!" That name rose again.
+
+Years passed and a nephew of Magellan inherited one of the family
+estates. He was stoned in the streets on account of his name. This man
+fled in exile from Portugal to Brazil. He died there, and said: "Let no
+heir or descendant of mine ever restore the arms of my family."
+
+In his will he wrote:
+
+"I desire that the arms of my family (Magellan) should remain forever
+obliterated, as was done by order of my Lord and King, _as a punishment
+for the crime_ of Ferdinand Magellan, because he entered the service of
+Castile to the injury of our kingdom."
+
+It is the history of this same Ferdinand Magellan, whom Portugal and
+his own family sought to crush out from the world, that we are now about
+to trace.
+
+Following his highest inspiration, he shut his eyes to the present, and
+followed the light of the star of destiny in his soul. His discovery
+seems to open to the West the doors of China.
+
+He was filled from boyhood with a passion for finding unknown lands and
+waters; he was haunted by ideals and visions of noble exploits for the
+good of mankind. His own country, Portugal, would not listen to his
+projects at the time that he offered them to the court; so, like
+Columbus, Vespucci, and Cabot, he sought the favor of another country.
+Nothing could stand before the high purpose of his soul. "If not by
+Portugal, then by Spain," he said to an intimate friend; meaning that,
+if his own country denied him the favor of giving him an opportunity for
+exploration, he would present his cause to the court of Spain, which he
+did.
+
+This man, whose real name was Fernao de Magalhaes, was born about the
+year 1480, at Sabrosa, in Portugal, a wintry district where the hardy
+soil and the "gloomy grandeur" of the mountain scenery produced men of
+strong bodies and lofty spirit. He belonged to a noble family, "one of
+the noblest in the kingdom." His boyhood was passed in the sierras. He
+had a love of works of geography and travel, and he dreamed even then
+of sunny zones, undiscovered waters, and unknown regions of the world.
+Henry the Navigator and his school of pilots, astronomers, and
+explorers, had left the country full of the spirit of new discoveries
+which yet lived.
+
+He went to the capital of Portugal to be educated, and was made a page
+to the Queen. He was yet a boy when Columbus returned, bringing the
+enthralling news of a new world. Spain was filled with excitement at the
+event; her cities rang with jubilees by day and flared with torches at
+night. Portugal caught the new spirit of her late King, Henry the
+Navigator, and was ambitious to rival the discoveries of Spain. She had
+already established herself in the glowing realms of India.
+
+In 1509 Magellan went to the West Indies in the service of the
+Portuguese Government. He joined the expedition that discovered the
+Spice Islands of Banda, and it became his conviction that these islands
+could be reached by a new ocean way.
+
+A great vision arose in his mind. It was a suggestion that never left
+him until he saw its fulfillment in an unexpected way on seas of which
+he never had dreamed.
+
+This view was that he could sail around the world and reach the Spice
+Islands by the way of the West.
+
+[Illustration: Lisbon, from the south bank of the Tagus.]
+
+In the service of the King against the Moors in one of the Portuguese
+wars, he received a wound which healed, but left him lame for life. He,
+like other officers, sent in his claim for the pension due to such
+service. He received answer from the parsimonious King (Dom Manoel):
+
+"Your claim is not good. Your wound has healed."
+
+He was wounded more deeply by this insult than he could have been by any
+poisoned dart from the Moors. That he should have been refused the
+recognition of those who had shed blood in his country's cause rankled
+in his heart, especially as he saw his comrades paraded in honor and
+pensioned for lesser disabilities. He left Portugal, as an exile, and
+went to Spain.
+
+Here the high aspirations of the lame soldier met with recognition, and
+it was this service that caused the Portuguese King to issue the strange
+order which has introduced the young and high-spirited grandee to the
+readers of this story.
+
+If he had faults--as far as history records he had no vices--his high
+aim overcame them. He had caught the spirit of Portuguese Henry the
+Navigator, and his soul had glowed when the fame of Columbus first
+thrilled Spain. He had learned the history of Vasco da Gama, whose name
+was the glory of Portugal. He had educated himself for action.
+
+[Illustration: Ferdinand Magellan. After a painting by Velasquez.]
+
+It was the age of opportunity. He saw it; he could not know the way,
+but he knew the guide that was in him. As a son of the Church, which he
+then was, he consecrated all he had to her glory. What was fame, what
+was wealth, what was anything to becoming a benefactor of the world, and
+living forever in the heart of all mankind?
+
+So his deserted house crumbed in Sabrosa, and his coat of arms did not
+there reappear until centuries had followed the course of his genius,
+and the whole world came to know his worth.
+
+In view of recent events his character becomes one of the most
+interesting of past history.
+
+After nearly four hundred years that cast-out name rises like a star!
+
+Why, in the view of to-day, was that name cast out?
+
+Because Magellan saw his duty in a larger life than in the restrictions
+of a provincial court. The lesson has its significance. He who sinks
+self and policy, and follows his highest duty and enters the widest
+field, will in the final judgment of man receive the noblest and best
+reward.
+
+We love a lover of mankind, and it strengthens faith and hope to follow
+the keel of such a sailor on any sea.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+FRIENDS WITH A PURPOSE.
+
+
+Souls kindle kindred souls, and the inspirations of friendship commonly
+form a part of the early history of beneficent lives.
+
+One of Magellan's early friends was Francisco Serrao, who sailed with
+him for Malacca, a great mart of merchandise in the East. It was to him
+that Magellan wrote that he would meet him again in the East, "if not by
+the way of Portugal, by that of Spain;" words of signal import, which we
+have already quoted.
+
+Serrao had a very curious, romantic, and pathetic history. He lived in
+the times of the Portuguese Viceroys of India. He was made captain of a
+ship which sought to explore the Spice Islands, which were then held to
+be the paradise of the East. Cloves and nutmegs then were luxuries, and
+when brought to Portugal bore the flavor of the sun lands of the far-off
+mysterious seas.
+
+At Banda ships were loaded with spices. On sailing there Serrao suffered
+shipwreck and was cast upon a reef and found refuge on a deserted
+island. The place was a resort of pirates or wreckers. Some pirates
+sighted the wreck of the ship and sought to plunder the wreckage.
+
+"We have no ship, and the island is without food or water," said Serrao
+to his men. "Hide under the rock and obey me, and we will soon have a
+ship and water and food."
+
+The men hid among the caverns of the reef. The pirates landed, and left
+their ship for the wreckage.
+
+Serrao rushed through the surf, followed by his men, and boarded the
+pirates' vessel.
+
+The wreckers were filled with terror when they saw what would be their
+fate if left there, and they begged to be taken on board, and were
+received by Serrao as prisoners.
+
+Serrao traded for many years among the Spice Islands and was advanced to
+high positions, but was poisoned at last, as is supposed, by an intrigue
+of the King of Tidor.
+
+One of the most inspiring of Magellan's friends was Ruy Faleiro, who had
+wonderful instincts and a wide vision, but who became a madman. Faleiro
+was a Portuguese who, like Magellan, was out of favor with the court. He
+was an astronomer, a geographer, and an astrologer. He had a fiery and
+impulsive temper, but with it a passion for discovery, and so was drawn
+into Magellan's heart by gravitation. The two journeyed together,
+studied together, and started at about the same time for Spain. At
+Seville they met in a club of famous discoverers, students, and
+refugees.
+
+They had one vision in common, that there was a short route to the
+Moluccas by the way of the West. The route was not what they dreamed it
+to be; but there was a new way to the Spice Islands by the West and
+East, a way that probably no voyager from Europe had ever seen, and
+their vision was decisive of one of the greatest events--the
+circumnavigation of the world. The angle of vision was not true in their
+private meetings, nor had Magellan's been before they met; but another
+angle leading from it was true, and would cause a change of the
+conception of the world when poor Ruy Faleiro's brain was losing its
+hold on such entrancing hopes.
+
+"We can reach Molucca by a short voyage to the West," said Ruy Faleiro.
+
+"I am sure that I can do this, if I can have an expedition such as the
+King of Spain can give me," said Magellan.
+
+"You must never communicate this secret to any man," said Ruy.
+
+"I will never mention the subject to any but you," said Magellan, "until
+we can act together."
+
+The vision of finding the East by a short passage to the West, involved
+so great a prospect of human progress and glory that it would not let
+Magellan rest at any time. It haunted him wherever he went. He began to
+talk about it under restraint, and friends came to see what was on his
+mind and to take advantage of it.
+
+[Illustration: The earliest map of the world. By Hecataeus of Miletus
+(sixth century B.C.). Probably copied in part from Anaximander, inventor
+of map drawing.]
+
+The fiery Ruy Faleiro, when he found that his friend had opened their
+confidential secret, partly broke friendship with him. Magellan could
+only acknowledge his error, and say that he never meant in his heart to
+betray the secrets of his friend, the cosmographer.
+
+Faleiro dreamed on, but his mind weakened.
+
+The popular legend about this unhappy man was, that being an astrologer
+he cast his own horoscope, and found that the expedition that he hoped
+to command would be lost, and so feigned madness. This is only a story.
+
+Faleiro died in Seville about 1523.
+
+It would be interesting to know if he lived to hear of the great
+discovery of his old friend Magellan, and if he joined in the general
+rejoicing over it. It is probable that he lived to see the strange ways
+by which his countryman had been led, not over a short passage, but over
+far-distant seas. His was a pitiable fate; but his name merits honorable
+mention among men, who, like Miranda in South America, have inspired
+great deeds which they themselves could not accomplish.
+
+Men of vision and men of action are essential to each other; for many
+men can see what only a few others can perform.
+
+Magellan married Beatriz Barbosa about the year 1518. He was the father
+of one son. His wife died shortly after hearing the news of his great
+discovery of the Pacific and the new way to the East.
+
+He was now prepared to go to Charles V, King of Spain, son of the
+demented Queen Joanna, the daughter of Isabella, and to lay before him a
+plan of opening a short way to the East by sailing West. This purpose
+more and more absorbed his soul--he himself was nothing, discovery was
+everything. The frown of Portugal no longer cast any deep shadow over
+his life; it was his mission to _find_. He heard in the acclaim of
+Columbus a prophecy of what his own name would one day be.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+PRINCE HENRY THE NAVIGATOR AND VASCO DA GAMA.
+
+
+All things follow suggestion and inspiration, and the discovery of the
+Western World owes much to the heart and brain of Prince Henry, called
+the Navigator. Although the son of a King, he felt that he was more than
+that--a son of Humanity. He took up his residence far from the pomp of
+courts on the bleak, bare, solitary promontory of Sagres, the sharp
+angle of Western Europe. Here he could see the sun go down on the
+western sea, day by day. Some inward genius like a haunting spirit
+seemed to beckon his thoughts toward the West.
+
+In view of his abode on a tall headland were the ruins of a Druidical
+temple, where Strabo tells us the gods used to assemble at night under
+the moon and stars. So the place was called the Sacrum Promontorium, and
+it was in this region that Prince Henry schooled his soul in navigation
+and sought to inspire all adventurers upon the sea. "Farther" was his
+motto, and "Farther yet!" In his solitude he called to him a company of
+restless spirits with a passion for discovery, and said to them all,
+"Farther," and "Farther yet!"
+
+The night of the dark ages was passing, and in the new dawn of
+civilization, Prince Henry had visions of new ways to India, the
+magnificent; the land of gold, gems, and spices, where the sun shone on
+gardens of palms and seas of glory.
+
+There were no lighthouses then on the African coast; there were no sea
+charts, and the compass was but little known. But there were eternal
+stars, and under them were the living instincts that awaken genius.
+
+Prince Henry the Navigator was the fourth son of King Joao I, or John
+the Great, and of Queen Philippa, of the Roses. He was a great-grandson
+of Edward III, of England.
+
+Prince Henry's motto was "_Talent de bien faire_"--"talent of good
+faculty." The motto furnishes in brief a history of his life.
+
+The first fruit of Prince Henry's geographical studies was the discovery
+of the islands of Madeira; but there were islands beyond Madeira, and
+his restless spirit cried out in the night: "Farther!" and "Farther
+yet!"
+
+Cape Bojador, farther "than the farthest point of the earth," rose just
+before the supposed regions of sea monsters, fire, and darkness. Prince
+John sent a navigator there, and found serene seas.
+
+[Illustration: PROGRESS OF PORTUGUESE DISCOVERY]
+
+"Farther!"
+
+In 1446 the Prince obtained a charter of the Canary Islands. His ships
+next discovered the Azores. But there were lands and islands and seas
+"farther yet."
+
+[Illustration: Prince Henry the Navigator. From a drawing by Allegra
+Eggleston, in The Story of Columbus.]
+
+Prince Henry died in 1463, about thirty years before the triumph of
+Columbus.
+
+He was the father of modern discovery, the spirit of which rested not
+until the map of the whole world could be drawn. He was buried in a
+splendid tomb, and the pupils of his school of cosmography and
+navigation continued to penetrate the ocean farther and farther to the
+South and West. Vasco da Gama opened the ocean ways to India, and the
+two great navigators, Columbus and Magellan, owed much to the spirit of
+the Prince who left courts that he might found a school amid the sea
+desolations of St. Vincent, in order to inspire young sailors to venture
+always "Farther!" and "Farther yet!"
+
+[Illustration: "He is a renegade. His arms must come down!" (See page
+2.)]
+
+We must here tell you something of Vasco da Gama, in order that you may
+better understand the plan and purpose of Magellan.
+
+Take your map of the world. Before the passage to India was discovered
+by sailing around the Cape of Good Hope, Africa, the trade between Asia
+and Europe was carried on in this manner: There was a great commercial
+city on the southern coast of Arabia (Arabia Felix) called Alda, or Port
+Alda. It was a city of merchants. To this port came the ships from the
+East--China, Japan, India--laden with gold, silk, and spices. The
+merchants of Alda carried these goods to the Port of Suez on the Red
+Sea. Thence the merchandise was conveyed on camels to the Nile and to
+Alexandria, Egypt, and thence by ships to the ports of the
+Mediterranean.
+
+Vasco da Gama discovered a new way to India by doubling the Cape of Good
+Hope, and when he returned from that voyage all Europe rang with his
+praise. His discovery of the way to India from the Mediterranean by
+rounding Africa was one of the most momentous ever made. Vasco da Gama
+holds rank with Columbus in the unveiling of the mysteries of the ocean
+world.
+
+King John the Navigator had heard such wonderful tales of India that he
+wished to find a way there by water. He accordingly sent one Bartholomeu
+Diaz on an expedition with this end in view. Diaz did not find India,
+but he found a cape on the southernmost point of Africa, which he
+doubled.
+
+So fearful were the tempests there that he called it the Cape of Storms.
+
+But King John saw that the islands of India lay in that direction, and
+he exclaimed in delight on hearing Diaz's narrative of the tempestuous
+place:
+
+"'Tis the Cape of Good Hope!" This gave the cape its name.
+
+A Jewish astrologer told Dom Manoel, King of Portugal, that the riches
+of India could yet be found by way of the sea. Of such a discovery the
+new King dreamed. Who should he get to undertake a voyage with such a
+purpose?
+
+One day, as he sat in his halls among his courtiers and grandees
+studying maps, a man of about thirty years, who had a noble bearing,
+entered an outer apartment. A sword hung by his side.
+
+The King, who had been thinking of his great mariners, lifted his face
+and said:
+
+"Thank God! I have found my man. Bring to me Vasco da Gama."
+
+He it was that stood in the outer hall.
+
+"Vasco," said the King, "I know your soul. For the glory of Portugal you
+must find India by the way of the sea!"
+
+"I am at your service, sire, while life shall last."
+
+"Depart in all haste."
+
+It was March, 1497. Vasco da Gama raised his sails and departed from
+Lisbon.
+
+[Illustration: Vasco da Gama.]
+
+He passed the "Cape of Good Hope," and met with many adventures, the
+narratives of which would fill a book.
+
+He crossed the India Ocean, blown pleasantly on by the trade winds.
+
+One day a loud cry arose:
+
+"Land! land!"
+
+The pilot came running to Vasco da Gama, and fell at his feet.
+
+"Captain, behold India!"
+
+The shores of India rose in the burning light of the tropic seas. Vasco
+da Gama saw them and fell upon his knees.
+
+Mountain rose above mountain, and hill over hill; then green palms and
+shining beaches came into view like scenes of enchantment.
+
+"That is Cananor," said the Moorish pilot; "the great city of Calicat is
+twelve leagues distant."
+
+They sailed over those twelve leagues of clear resplendent waters and
+came to Calicat, or Malabar. That day of discovery was Portugal's
+glory.
+
+[Illustration: PORTUGUESE INDIES]
+
+Calicat was a merchant city of the East, and one of the most famous of
+India. Here came Arabian and Egyptian merchants. It was a Mohammedan
+city, and the princes of Calicat encouraged trade between the Arabs and
+Hindoos. The city was now to become an emporium for the Western World.
+
+After many adventures in Malabar, Vasco da Gama cruised along the coast
+of India. Everything was wonderful, and the wonders grew.
+
+In September, 1499, he returned, and was received like a sovereign by
+the Portuguese King. His arrival was a holiday, the glory of which has
+lived in all Portuguese holidays until now.
+
+He was given titles of distinction. He was made a Viceroy of India.
+
+Twenty years after these events Magellan was destined to discover
+_another_ way to India.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+THE ENTHUSIASTS CARRY THEIR PLANS TO THE KING.
+
+
+Magellan, full of his project of finding a short way to the rich spicery
+by sailing West, now sought the favor of the Spanish court. Gold has
+ever been the royal want, and nobles have always had open ears to
+schemes that promised to fill the public treasury.
+
+Magellan's interesting friend Francisco Serrao, who had remained in the
+Indian possessions of the Portuguese, after Magellan's return, had
+discovered resources of the tropical seas of the Orient that were almost
+boundless. He had written to Magellan:
+
+"If you would become rich return to the Moluccas."
+
+This letter would be a sufficient passport to the nobles who had the ear
+of the King. He showed the letter to the King's ministers.
+
+He thought that the point of South America turned _westward_, as the
+Cape of Good Hope toward the East. He had an imaginary map in his mind
+of an ocean world whose shape had no real existence, but that answered
+well as a theory.
+
+Magellan had brought a globe from Portugal on which he had drawn the
+undiscovered world as he thought it existed. The strait which he had
+hoped to find was omitted on this globe in his drawings that no
+navigator might anticipate his discovery.
+
+Some of the ministers listened to the project with indifference, a few
+with ridicule; but as a rule Magellan appealed to willing ears. The
+ministers as a body agreed to commend the enterprise to the King. The
+Haros of Antwerp, the Rothschilds of the time, favored the expedition.
+So Magellan and Faleiro made out a petition of formal proposals which
+they desired to present to the King, and awaited the opportunity.
+
+That opportunity soon came. Charles V, son of Joanna, who was passing
+her days in solitude and grief on account of the loss of her husband,
+was on his way to Aragon. He was Emperor of Germany and King of Spain.
+He was a youth now; having been born in Ghent, February 24, 1500. He
+came to the throne of Spain in 1516, as the disordered intellect of his
+mother made her incapable of reigning. He was elected German Emperor in
+1519.
+
+[Illustration: Charles V. After a painting by Titian.]
+
+In his youth he had been dissolute. Seeing the responsibilities that he
+owed to the world and the age, he suddenly received new moral impulses
+and conquered himself, and his moral life was followed by a religious
+disposition. He received from the Pope the title of Roman Emperor. His
+powerful intellect subdued a great part of continental Europe to his
+will; but he became weary of the cares of state, retired from the
+world, and ended his life as a religious recluse.
+
+The young King entered Spain in triumph, but amid the glare of
+receptions his ears were not dull to projects for acquiring gold.
+
+Magellan and Faleiro, under the commendation of the ministry, were soon
+able to lay their project before the young grandson of the great
+Isabella. He received them in the spirit that Isabella had met Columbus.
+He approved their plans, and charged them to make preparations for the
+expedition.
+
+Charles entered Zaragoza in May, 1518, a youth of eighteen, and Magellan
+and Faleiro followed the royal train on its triumphal march in the
+blooming days of the year. They were happy men, and their glowing
+visions added to the joy of the court on its journey amid singing
+nightingales and pealing bells.
+
+The royal name signed to Magellan's commission was "Juana," who had been
+the favorite daughter of Queen Isabella, who had signed the commission
+of Columbus.[A] This royal daughter of Aragon and Castile was born at
+Toledo, November 6, 1479. She was in the bloom of her girlhood when the
+news of the return of Columbus thrilled Spain.
+
+    [A] Donna Juana and Don Carlos, her son, by the grace of God, Queen
+    and King of Castile, Leon, Aragon, the two Sicilies, and Jerusalem, of
+    Navarra, Granada, Toledo, Valencia, Galicia, the Mallorcas, Seville,
+    Sardinia, Cordova, Corsica, Murcia, Jaen, the Algarves, of Aljazira,
+    Gibraltar, of the Canary Isles, of the Indies, isles and mainland of
+    the Ocean-sea, Counts of Barcelona, Lords of Biscay and Molina, Dukes
+    of Athens and Neopatria, Counts of Roussillon and Cerdana, Marquises
+    of Euristan and Gociano, Archdukes of Austria, Dukes of Bergona and
+    Brabant, Counts of Flanders and Tirol, etc.
+
+She was a girl of ardent affections; a lover of music; not beautiful,
+but charming in manner; and at the age of eighteen was betrothed to
+Philip of the Low Countries, called Philip the Handsome.
+
+The wedding of this daughter of Isabella was to be celebrated in
+Flanders by fetes of unusual splendor. A fleet of one hundred and thirty
+vessels prepared to bear the bride to her handsome Prince. The ships
+were under the command of the chivalrous admiral of Castile.
+
+Juana took leave of her mother at the end of August, 1496, and embarked
+at the port of Laredo. A more interesting bride under more joyous
+circumstances had seldom gone forth to meet a bridegroom.
+
+The sails covered the sea under the flags of the glory of Spain. They
+drifted away amid music and shoutings, but the salvos of the guns had
+hardly died away before terrible storms arose. The fleet was shattered,
+and many of the vessels were lost.
+
+The young bride herself arrived in Flanders safely, and her marriage
+with the archduke followed at Lille.
+
+When Queen Isabella heard of the birth of Charles, she recalled that it
+fell on the day of Matthias, and exclaimed, "_Sors cecidit super
+Mathiam_"--"the lot fell upon Matthias."
+
+She predicted that the infant would become the King of Spain.
+
+[Illustration: Ferdinand and Isabella. From a coin.]
+
+Philip and Juana were summoned to Spain to meet the people over whom it
+then seemed probable that they would soon be called to reign. They
+entered France in 1501, attended by Flemish nobles, and wherever they
+went was a holiday. There were weeks of splendid fetes in honor of the
+progress.
+
+When Ferdinand and Isabella heard of the arrival of Philip and Juana in
+Spain they hastened to Toledo to meet them. Here Philip and his Queen
+received the allegiance of the Cortes.
+
+But Philip was a gay Prince, and he loved the dissipations of Flanders
+more than his wife or the interests of his prospective Spanish
+possessions. So he left his wife, and returned to Flanders.
+
+The conduct of the handsome Prince drove Juana mad. She loved him so
+fondly that she thought only of him, and sat in silence day after day
+with her eyes fixed on the ground, as an historian says, "equally
+regardless of herself, her future subjects, and her afflicted parents."
+
+She subsequently joined Philip at Burgos. Here Philip died of fever
+after overexertion at a game of ball. Juana never left his bedside, or
+shed a tear. Her grief obliterated nearly all things in life, and she
+was dumb. Her only happiness now, except in music, was to be with his
+dead body.
+
+She removed her husband's remains to Santa Clara.
+
+The body was placed on a magnificent car, and was accompanied in the
+long way to the tomb by a train of nobles and priests. Juana never left
+it. She would not allow it to be moved by day. She said:
+
+"A widow who has lost the sun of her soul should never expose herself to
+the light of day!"
+
+Wherever the procession halted, she ordered new funeral ceremonies. She
+forbade nuns to approach the body. Finding the coffin had been carried
+to a nunnery at a stage of the journey, she had it removed to the open
+fields, where she watched by it, and caused the embalmed body to be
+revealed to her by torches. She had a tomb made for the remains in sight
+of her palace windows in Santa Clara, and she watched over it in silence
+for forty-seven years, taking little interest in any other thing.
+
+But as she survived Ferdinand and Isabella, her name for a time was
+affixed to royal commissions, and so Magellan sailed in the service of
+Charles under the signature of Juana, who was silently watching over her
+husband's tomb, in the hope that the Prince would one day rise again.
+
+We relate this narrative to give a view of the events of the period, and
+for the same reason we must speak of another eminent person who acted in
+the place of the Queen in her unhappy state of mind.
+
+[Illustration: Cardinal Ximenes. After a painting by Velasquez.]
+
+This was the great political genius of the time, the virtuous and
+benevolent Cardinal Ximenes, statesman, archbishop, the heart of the
+people and the conscience of the Church. He was born of a humble family
+in Castile in 1487. He was educated in Rome. His character and learning
+were such that Queen Isabella chose him for her confessor, and made him
+Archbishop of Toledo, with the approval of the Pope.
+
+On the death of Philip in 1505, he was made regent for Juana. Ferdinand
+named Ximenes regent of Spain on his deathbed, until Charles V should
+return from Flanders to Spain.
+
+The regency of Ximenes was one of honor and glory. He himself lived
+humbly and simply amid all his associations of pomp and power.
+
+He maintained thirty poor persons daily at his own cost, and gave half
+of his income to charity. He excited the jealousy of Charles V at last,
+and lost his power in consequence. He lived to extreme age, and left a
+character that Spain has ever loved to hold in honor.
+
+Such was the political condition of Spain in the early days of
+Magellan.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+ABOUT THE HAPPY ITALIAN WHO WISHED TO SEE THE WORLD.--BEAUTIFUL SEVILLE!
+
+
+We should have known but little of the adventures of Magellan, but for
+Antonia Pigafetta, Chevalier, and Knight of Rhodes.
+
+He was a young Italian of a susceptible heart and happy imagination.
+
+He came wandering to Barcelona, Spain, in the generation that remembered
+Columbus, and the splendid scenes that welcomed the return of Columbus
+on the field of Sante Fe. He must have heard the enthralling description
+of those golden days--he could not be a Columbus; but, if he could win
+the good will of Magellan, he might go after Columbus and see what no
+Europeans had seen.
+
+So he wandered the streets of Barcelona and heard the tales of the
+events that occurred when the "Viceroy of the Isles" was received there
+by Isabella.
+
+What days those had been! The march of Columbus through Spain to meet
+Isabella at Sante Fe, was such as had a demigod appeared on earth.
+Spain was thrilled. The world knew no night. The trumpets of heralds
+rent the air, and men's hearts swelled high at the tales of the golden
+empires that Colon had added to Aragon and Castile. Alas! they did not
+know that there are riches which do not enrich, and that it is only the
+gold that does good that ennobles.
+
+As Columbus approached with his glittering cavaliers songs rent the air,
+whose words have been interpreted--
+
+      "Thy name, O Fernando!
+        Through all earth shall be sounded,
+      Columbus has triumphed,
+        His foes are confounded!"
+
+or
+
+      "Thy name, Isabella,
+        Through all earth shall be sounded,
+      Columbus has triumphed,
+        His foes are confounded!"
+
+To Aragon and Castile Columbus had "given a new world." Peals of golden
+horns shook the delighted cities, where balconies overflowed with
+flowers.
+
+[Illustration: Barcelona.]
+
+His reception at Barcelona by the King and Queen had been made
+inconceivably splendid:
+
+                          "That was a glorious day
+      That dawned on Barcelona. Banners filled
+      The thronging towers, the old bells rung, and blasts
+      Of lordly trumpets seemed to reach the sky
+      Cerulean. All Spain had gathered there,
+      And waited there his coming; Castilian knights,
+      Gay cavaliers, hidalgos young, and e'en the old
+      Puissant grandees of far Aragon,
+      With glittering mail and waving plumes and all
+      The peasant multitude with bannerets
+      And charms and flowers.
+                          "Beneath pavilions
+      Of brocades of gold, the Court had met.
+      The dual crowns of Leon old and proud Castile
+      There waited him, the peasant mariner.
+                          "The heralds waited
+      Near the open gates; the minstrels young and fair
+      Upon the tapestries and arrased walls,
+      And everywhere from all the happy provinces
+      The wandering troubadours.
+                          "Afar was heard
+      A cry, a long acclaim. Afar was seen
+      A proud and stately steed with nodding plumes,
+      Bridled with gold, whose rider stately rode,
+      And still afar a long and sinuous train
+      Of silvery cavaliers. A shout arose,
+      And all the city, all the vales and hills,
+      With acclamations rung.
+                          "He came, the Genoese,
+      With reverent look and calm and lofty mien,
+      And saw the wondering eyes and heard the cries,
+      And trumpet peals, as one who followed still
+      Some Guide unseen.
+                          "Before his steed
+      Crowned Indians marched with lowly faces,
+      And wondered at the new world that they saw;
+      Gay parrots screamed from their gold-circled arms,
+      And from their crests swept airy plumes. The sun
+      Shone full in splendor on the scene, and here
+      The old and new world met!"
+
+The young Italian Chevalier, Pigafetta, Knight of Rhodes, visited the
+scenes that his own countryman had made immortal by his voyage.
+
+He thought of the plumed Indians and of the birds of splendid plumage
+that Columbus had brought back.
+
+He heard much of Magellan, the "new Columbus." Why might he not go out
+upon unknown seas with him and discover new races, and bring back with
+him tropic spices, birds, and flowers?
+
+He journeyed to Seville and there met Magellan. He entered into the
+dreams of the new navigator. He asked Magellan to let him sail with him.
+
+"Why do you wish to enter upon such a hazardous undertaking?"
+
+"I am desirous of seeing the wonderful things of the ocean!"
+
+Magellan saw it was so. The Spaniards might distrust him, the Portuguese
+be jealous of him, but here was a man who would have no race
+prejudices--a man after his own heart, whom he could trust.
+
+"You wish to see the wonders of the ocean world?" he asked.
+
+"Yes, and I can write, and whatever I may do, and wherever I may go, I
+will always be true to you--the heart of Pigafetta will always be loyal
+to the Admiral!"
+
+"My Italian Chevalier, you may embark with me to see the wonders of the
+ocean world. You shall follow my lantern."
+
+From that hour the young Italian lived in anticipation. What new lands
+would he see, what palm islands, what gigantic men and strange birds,
+and inhabitants of the sea?
+
+The young Knight of Rhodes had spoken truly, whatever light might fail,
+his heart would ever be true to the Admiral.
+
+So the Knight embarked with the rude crew to follow, in the silences of
+uncharted seas, the lantern of Magellan.
+
+He composed on the voyage a narrative for Villiers de l'Isle Adams,
+Grand Master of Rhodes. By this narrative we are still able to follow in
+fancy the lantern of Magellan through the straits that now bear the name
+of Magellan, to the newly discovered Pacific, and around the world.
+
+His character was as spirited as Magellan's was noble.
+
+We will sail with him in our voyage around the world, for _he_ went all
+the way and bore the news of Magellan's triumphs to Seville again.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Beautiful Seville! We must glance at the city here. She was the pride of
+Spain in those times when Spain dazzled the world. The Hispal of the
+Phoenicians, the Hispales of the Roman conquest, and the Seville of the
+Moors! Her glory had arisen in the twilight of history, and had grown
+with the advancement of the race.
+
+She was indeed beautiful at the time when Magellan was preparing for the
+sea. The Moorish period had passed leaving her rich in arts and
+treasures, and splendid architecture.
+
+Situated on the banks of the Guadalquivir, circular in shape and
+surrounded with more than a hundred Moorish towers, and about ten miles
+in circumference, she rivaled the cities of Europe and of the Orient.
+
+The great cathedral was being completed at that time, a mountain of art,
+arising from its plain of marble. It was four hundred and thirty-one
+feet long, and three hundred and fifteen feet wide, with solemn and
+grand arches lighted by the finest windows in Spain, perhaps the most
+enchanting lights through which the sun ever shone. The altars were
+enriched by the wealth of discovery.
+
+[Illustration: The Giralda.]
+
+Over this mountain of gold, marbles, and gems gleamed the Giralda, or
+weather vane, in the form of a statue, three hundred and fifty feet
+high.
+
+Seville at this time was a city of churches. To these, sailors resorted
+while waiting for an expedition to complete its preparations for the
+sea, for most of them were good Catholics, and such as hoped for God's
+favor in the enterprise upon which they were about to enter.
+
+Here, too, was the old Moorish palace, the Alcazar, with its delicate
+lacework like the walls of the Alhambra, but richer in color. In this
+palace was the Hall of the Ambassadors, one of the most enchanting
+apartments ever created by the genius of man.
+
+In the latter dream of Moorish fancy have passed aching hearts, as well
+as those filled with wonder and delight. Here Pedro the Cruel received
+one of the kings of Granada, and murdered him with his own hand, to rob
+him of the jewels that adorned his person.
+
+The tales of Pedro the Cruel haunted the city at this time.
+
+We are told that this monarch used to go about the city in disguise.
+
+One night he went out thus to serenade a beautiful lady. As he
+approached the balcony with his guitar where the lady lived, he saw
+another man there, who had come for the same purpose. The rival musician
+filled him with rage, and the King rushed upon him and struck him down
+and killed him.
+
+He fled away. He reasoned that as he was in disguise no one could know
+him.
+
+There was an old woman who kept a bakery across the way from the house
+where the noble lady lived. She was looking out of her window at the
+time of the murder. She saw the act, and got a view of the terrible face
+of the royal musician as he was fleeing away.
+
+"That was the King himself," said the old bake woman. "By my soul, that
+was the King!"
+
+The next day the news of the murder filled the city. The murdered man
+was a person of rank and importance. The people were alarmed and
+indignant.
+
+"Who did the deed?" was a question that arose to every lip.
+
+The King, cruel as he was, did not wish to be suspected of being a
+street assassin. So he issued a proclamation in this form:
+
+"Unless the alcalde (judge) of Seville shall discover the murderer of
+the gallant musician within three days, the alcalde shall lose his
+head."
+
+The city judge began to make great exertions to discover the murderer.
+
+The old bake woman came to him and said:
+
+"I know who did the deed. But silence, silence! I saw it with my own
+eyes, but we must be still. It was the King himself!"
+
+The alcalde dared not accuse the King, and yet he must save his own
+head. What was he to do?
+
+He made an image of the King. He then went to the palace.
+
+"O King! I have found the murderer. I have brought him here to receive
+sentence."
+
+The King was glad that a suspected person had been found, so that the
+public thought might be directed to the suspect.
+
+"What shall be done with him?" asked the alcalde.
+
+"What! He who would slay a musician about to serenade a noble lady?"
+
+"Yes, your Majesty."
+
+"What shall be done with him? I condemn him to death. Bring him before
+me."
+
+The alcalde brought in the image of the King, and uncovered it.
+
+The King beheld himself.
+
+"I will save _your_ head," said the King, and the alcalde went
+thoughtfully away.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+ENEMIES.--ESTEBAN GORMEZ.
+
+
+No man living could better know what he needed for such a stupendous and
+unprecedented undertaking than Magellan, who had already been to the
+spicery of the Orient in the service of Albuquerque, the Portuguese
+Viceroy. Under the royal sanction, the dockyards of Seville were at his
+command. He repaired to Seville, and was there looked upon as one
+destined to harvest the wealth of the Indies.
+
+But as soon as it became known in Portugal that Magellan was to lead a
+new expedition of discovery, the mistake that the King had made in
+rejecting the proposal of the lame soldier, to whom he had refused
+pension honors, became apparent. The court saw what this rejected man of
+positive purpose and invaluable knowledge of navigation might
+accomplish. Should his dreams be prophetic and his projects prove
+successful, the glory would go to Spain, and the King would be held
+responsible for another mistake like that which his predecessor had made
+in the case of Columbus.
+
+What must the court of Portugal do? The hammers were flying in Seville
+on the ships loading for the voyage. Magellan was making up his crews.
+Spain had faith in him, and he had faith in himself; never a man had
+more.
+
+Portugal must prevent the expedition. The Crown must appeal to Magellan
+to withdraw from it. The King must ask young King Charles to dismiss
+Magellan as an act of royal courtesy. If these efforts were not
+successful, it was argued that the expedition must be arrested by force,
+or Magellan must be murdered by secret spies of the court.
+
+The fleet preparing was to consist of five ships with ample equipment.
+These were named the Trinidad, the San Antonio, of one hundred and
+twenty Spanish tons each; the Concepcion, of ninety Spanish tons; the
+Victoria, of eighty-five tons; and the Santiago, of seventy-five. The
+Victoria, the ship of destiny, was to circumnavigate the globe.
+
+And now while the hammers were at work, the dull King of Portugal began
+to arouse himself to arrest the plan, and the court, seeing his spirit,
+acted with him.
+
+In the bright days in Zaragoza Magellan had been warned that he was in
+danger of being assassinated. But he did not take alarm. As his project
+rose into public view at Seville he must have known that he was
+surrounded by spies, but he did not heed them; he kept right on,
+marching forward as it were after the inspiration that had taken
+possession of his soul.
+
+[Illustration: BEHAIM'S GLOBE. 1492.]
+
+There was an India House in Seville, composed of merchants, and these
+were favorable to the expedition. In Spain everything favored Magellan.
+
+Aluaro da Costa was the Portuguese minister to the court of Spain. He
+plotted against Magellan, and sought an interview with young Charles in
+order to induce him to eliminate the Portuguese from the expedition.
+Charles was about to become a brother-in-law to Dom Manoel, and Aluaro
+da Costa could appeal to the King in this cause in many ways.
+
+Full of diplomacy and craft, he met the King who had to weigh the
+prospect of gold and glory against this personal argument. Gold
+outweighed the family considerations, for Charles in his young days was
+a man of powerful ambitions.
+
+Aluaro da Costa wrote to Dom Manoel a graphic account of this interview.
+It shows how politic ministers of state were in those days. We can not
+give the reader a clearer view of some of the obstacles against which
+Magellan had to contend in those perilous days in Spain than by citing
+Aluaro's account to Dom Manoel of his interview with young Charles V in
+his intrigue against Magellan:
+
+"SIRE: Concerning Ferdinand Magellan's affair, how much I have done and
+how I have labored, God knows, as I have written you at length; and now
+I have spoken upon the subject very strongly to the King, putting
+before him all the inconveniences that in this case may arise, and also
+representing to him what an ugly matter it was, and how unusual for one
+King to receive the subjects of another King, his friend, contrary to
+his wish, a thing unheard of among cavaliers, and accounted both
+ill-judged and ill-seeming. Yet I had just put your Highness and your
+Highness's possessions at his service in Valladolid at the moment that,
+he was harboring these persons against your will. I begged him to
+consider that this was not the time to offend your Highness, the more so
+in an affair which was of so little importance and so uncertain; and
+that he would have plenty of subjects of his own and men to make
+discoveries when the time came, without availing himself of those
+malcontents of your Highness, whom your Highness could not fail to
+believe likely to labor more for your disservice than for anything else;
+also that his Highness had had until now so much to do in discovering
+his own kingdoms and dominions, and in settling them, that he ought not
+to turn his attention to these new affairs, from which dissensions and
+other matters, which may well be dispensed with, may result.
+
+"I also presented to him the bad appearance that this would have at the
+very moment of the marriage--the ratification of friendship and
+affection. And also that it seemed to me that your Highness would much
+regret to learn that these men asked leave of him to return,[A] and that
+he did not grant it, the which are two faults--the receiving them
+contrary to your desire, and the retaining them contrary to their own.
+And I begged of him, both for his own and for your Highness's sake, that
+he would do one of two things: either permit them to go, or put off the
+affair for this year, by which he would not lose much; and means might
+be taken whereby he might be obliged, and your Highness might not be
+offended, as you would be were this scheme carried out.
+
+    [A] This statement there is every reason to believe was a pure
+    fiction of Da Costa.
+
+"He was so surprised, sire, at what I told him, that I also was
+surprised; but he replied to me with the best words in the world, saying
+that on no account did he wish to offend your Highness, and many other
+good words; and he suggested that I should speak to the Cardinal, and
+confide the whole matter to him.
+
+"May the Lord increase the life and dominions of your Highness to his
+holy service. From Saragoca, Tuesday night, the 28th day of September.
+
+          "I kiss the hands of your Highness,
+                                              "ALUARO DA COSTA."
+
+Court intrigue against Magellan did not avail. There was one thing
+statecraft could do. It could set spies on Magellan on board his own
+ships. This it succeeded in doing.
+
+There was in Spain at this time a Portuguese adventurer and navigator by
+the name of Estevan or Esteban Gormez--Stephen Gormez.
+
+He was a student of navigation, and was restless to follow the examples
+of Columbus and Vasco da Gama. He had applied to the court of
+Spain--probably to Cardinal Ximenes, for a commission to go on a voyage
+of discovery and he had received a favorable answer, and was preparing
+to embark, when Magellan appeared at court and promised to find the
+Spice Islands by way of South America.
+
+Magellan's scheme was so much larger and definite than that of Gormez
+that the court canceled its favors to the lesser plans, and Gormez had
+to abandon his prospects of sailing under the royal favors of Spain.
+
+The eyes of Spain were now fixed on Magellan.
+
+"I will find a way to the Spice Islands by South America or by the
+West," said Magellan to the ministers of the King, "or you may have my
+head."
+
+These were bold words. Magellan had not only been to the Spice Islands,
+but he had gone out on the very voyage that discovered some of them. He
+had behaved heroically on the voyage. So his application to the court
+superseded the plan of Gormez and the latter sunk out of sight.
+
+In his despondency at the failure of his plans, Gormez came to Magellan.
+
+"My countryman," said Gormez, "your schemes have supplanted mine and
+turned my ships into air. I was the first to plan a voyage to the
+Moluccas out of the wake of hurricanes and monsoons. I do not feel that
+I have been treated rightly. Something surely is due to me."
+
+Magellan was a man of generous impulses. He saw that Gormez had a case
+for moral appeal.
+
+"My friend," said he, "you shall have a place in my expedition."
+
+He could but think that the inspiration and knowledge of navigation of
+his countryman would be useful to him, and he pitied him for his
+disappointment, knowing how he himself would feel were his plans to be
+set aside.
+
+So Gormez, the Portuguese, was made the pilot of the Antonio.
+
+Magellan, had he reflected, must have seen that this man would carry
+with him envy and jealousy, passions that are poisons. But Estefano, or
+Esteban, or Stephen Gormez, took his place at the pilot house of the
+Antonio to follow the lantern of Magellan, but the hurt in his heart at
+being superseded never healed.
+
+On the ships also was one Juan de Carthagena, captain of the Concepcion,
+a spy, and one of the "malapots" of the expedition. He was called the
+_veedor_, or inspector. He inspected Magellan, and Magellan inspected
+him, as we shall see.
+
+And now the flags arose in the clear air, and the joyful fleet cleared
+the Guadalquivir and leaped into the arms of the open sea, amid the
+acclamations of gay grandees and a happy people.
+
+It was September 20th when the anchors were lifted, of which probably
+one was destined to come back in triumph after an immortal voyage that
+encompassed the earth, and gave to Spain a new ocean.
+
+And the King of Portugal ordered the coat of arms to be torn down from
+the house of Magellan, as we have pictured at the beginning of our
+narrative.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+"MAROONED."
+
+
+The expedition moved down its western way, over the track of Columbus.
+It had left poor Ruy Faleiro behind--he who had seen the progress of it
+all in the fitful light of a disordered vision. He had not relinquished
+his own high aims. He hoped to follow Magellan with an expedition of his
+own.
+
+The ships were furnished with "castles," fore and aft; they carried gay
+pennons and were richly stored. The artillery comprised sixty-two
+culverins and smaller ordnance. Five thousand or more pounds of powder
+were shut up in the magazines, and a large provision was made for
+trading with the natives--looking glasses for women, velvets, knives,
+and ivory ornaments, and twenty thousand bells.
+
+Magellan's ship bore a lantern, swung high in the air amid the thickly
+corded rigging, which the other ships were to keep in view in the night.
+What a history had this lantern! It gleamed out on the night track of a
+new world, a pillar of fire that encompassed the earth as in the orbit
+of a star.
+
+The fleet had fifteen days of good weather and passed Cape Verde
+Islands, running along the African coast.
+
+But the fleet carried with it disloyal hearts. The Portuguese prejudice
+against Magellan sailed with it. The Spanish sailors distrusted the
+loyalty of Magellan to Spain.
+
+The commander was a man of great heart, chivalrous, and noble, but he
+could be firm when there arose an occasion for it.
+
+After leaving Teneriffe Magellan altered his course.
+
+Juan de Carthagena, captain of the San Antonio, "the inspector" and a
+spy, demanded of Magellan why he had done so.
+
+"Sir," said Magellan, "you are to follow my flag by day and my lantern
+by night, and to ask me no further questions."
+
+Carthagena demanded that Magellan should report his plans to him.
+Finding that the Admiral was bent on conducting his own expedition, he
+began to act sullenly, and to disobey orders.
+
+Again the captain of the San Antonio demanded of Magellan that he should
+communicate his orders in regard to the course of steerage to him. He
+did this by virtue of his office as inspector. He showed a very haughty
+and disloyal spirit, and if this were not to be checked, the success of
+the expedition would be imperilled. He was abetted by Pedro Sanches, a
+priest. Magellan saw treason already brewing, and he determined to stamp
+it out at once.
+
+He went to Carthagena, and laid his hands on him.
+
+"Captain, you are my prisoner."
+
+The astonished captain cried out to his men:
+
+"Unhand me--seize Magellan!"
+
+Carthagena had been a priest, and he had great personal influence, but
+the men did not obey him.
+
+"Lead him to the stocks and secure him there," ordered Magellan.
+
+The order was obeyed. The fallen inspector was committed to the charge
+of the Captain of the Victoria, and another officer was given charge of
+the San Antonio.
+
+"When we reach land Juan de Carthagena shall be marooned," was the
+sentence imposed upon the inspector. A like sentence was imposed upon
+Sanches.
+
+It touched the hearts of the crews to hear this sentence. What would
+become of the two priests, were it to be executed? Would they fall prey
+to the natives, or perhaps win the hearts of the people and be made
+chiefs among them?
+
+There was a pilot on board the ship who sympathized with the mutineers,
+but who had close lips, Esteban Gormez, of whom we have spoken. Were the
+two mutineers to be marooned he would be glad to rescue them.
+
+[Illustration: Night after night the ships followed Magellan's
+lantern.]
+
+He had been discontented since the day that his own plans for an
+expedition had been superseded by those of Magellan.
+
+His discontentment had grown. He became critical as the fleet sailed on.
+Every day reminded him of what he might have done, if he could have only
+secured the opportunity.
+
+A disloyal heart in any enterprise is a very perilous influence. A
+wooden horse in Troy is more dangerous than an army outside.
+
+Magellan in Gormez had a subtle foe, and that foe was his own
+countryman.
+
+This man probably could not brook to see his rival add the domains of
+the sea to the crowns of Juana and of Charles, though he himself had
+sought to do the same thing. Magnanimous he could not be. Discovery for
+the sake of discovery had little meaning for him, but only discovery for
+his own advancement and glory.
+
+He became jealous of Mesquita, Magellan's cousin, now master of the
+Antonio, who is thought to have advised severe measures to suppress
+conspiracy.
+
+Night after night he sat down under the moon and stars, and brooded over
+his fancied neglect, and dreamed. Night after night the ships followed
+the lantern of Magellan, and the wonders of the sea grew; but to him it
+were better that no discoveries should be made than that such
+achievements were to go to the glory of Spain through the pilotage of
+Magellan.
+
+Discontent grows; jealousy grows as one broods over fancied wrongs, and
+sees the prospects of a rival's success. So it was with Gormez. In his
+heart he did not wish the expedition to succeed. He was ambitious to
+lead such an enterprise himself, which he also did, at last, sailing
+along Massachusetts Bay and giving it its first name.
+
+When Gormez had heard that the two disloyal men were to be marooned, his
+feelings rose against Magellan. That they deserved their sentence he
+well knew, but they were opposed to Magellan, as was his own heart. He
+would have been glad to have saved them from the execution of their
+sentence, but he did not know how to do it.
+
+"I will rescue them if ever I can," he thought. "This expedition is not
+for the glory of Portugal."
+
+The ships sailed on, bearing the two conspirators to some place where
+they could be marooned.
+
+Let us turn from this dark scene to one of a more hopeful spirit.
+
+One day, as we may picture the scene, the sea lay unruffled like a
+mirror. The ships drifted near each other, and night came on after a
+sudden twilight, and the stars seemed like liquid lights shot forth or
+let down from some ethereal fountain. The Southern Cross shone so
+clearly as to uplift the eyes of the sailors. The ships were becalmed.
+
+Boats began to ply between the ships, and the officers of the Trinity,
+Santiago, Victoria, and Concepcion assembled under the awning of the San
+Antonio, Mesquita's ship, of one hundred and twenty tons.
+
+Mesquita, as we have said, was a cousin of Magellan, and so the Antonio
+seemed a friendly ship.
+
+Magellan sat down by his cousin. The lantern was going out; its force
+was spent.
+
+"We must get a new kind of lantern," said Magellan to his cousin, "and a
+code of signal lights. We need a lantern that is something more steady
+and durable than a faggot of wood."
+
+"I have here a new farol," he continued, the men listening with intent
+ears. "Here it is, and I wonder, my sailors, how far your eyes will
+follow it."
+
+"All loyal hearts will follow it," said Mesquita, "wherever it may go."
+
+Gormez frowned. His heart was bitter.
+
+There rose up an officer named Del Cano, and stood hat in hand. All eyes
+were fixed upon him.
+
+"May it please you, Admiral," he said, "to receive a word from me. I
+will follow the new farol wherever it may lead me. I have ceased to
+count my own life in this cause."
+
+Gormez frowned again.
+
+"Del Cano," said the Admiral, "I believe in you. You have a true heart.
+If I should fall see that this farol goes back to Spain!"
+
+Del Cano bowed.
+
+[Illustration: Arms granted to Sebastian Del Cano, Captain of the
+Victoria, the first vessel that circumnavigated the globe.]
+
+Magellan showed the new lantern to the officers. It was made of beaten
+reeds that had been soaked in water, and dried in the sun. It would hold
+light long, and carry it strongly and steadily.
+
+"All the ships must have these new farols," said he, "and I must teach
+you how to signal by them."
+
+He stood up. The moon was rising, and the dusky, purple air became
+luminous.
+
+He held the farol in his hand.
+
+"Two lights," he said, "shall mean for the ship to tack.
+
+"Three lights that the sails shall be lowered. Four, that they shall
+stop.
+
+"Five lights, or more, that we have discovered land, when the flagship
+shall discharge a bombard. Follow my lantern always; you can trust it
+wherever it may fare. My farol shall be my star!"
+
+The men sat there long. There sprung up a breeze at last, and the sea
+began to ripple in the moon.
+
+Most expeditions that have made successful achievements have carried men
+of great hope. Such a man was Del Cano. He was loyal to the heart of
+Magellan; and happy is any leader who has such a companion, whose steel
+rings true.
+
+Magellan hung out the farol. The sails were spread, and the fleet passed
+on over the solitary ocean.
+
+Whither?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+"THE WONDERS OF NEW LANDS."--PIGAFETTA'S TALES OF HIS ADVENTURES WITH
+MAGELLAN.--THE STORY OF "THE FOUNTAIN TREE."--"ST. ELMO'S FIRE."
+
+
+The ships moved on, bearing the hopeful Del Cano, the frowning Gormez,
+the two prisoners, and the happy Italian Pigafetta.
+
+Our next chapters will be a series of wonder tales which reveal the
+South Temperate Zone and its inhabitants as they appeared to the young
+and susceptible Italian, Pigafetta, nearly four hundred years ago.
+
+Pigafetta, as we have shown, desired to accompany Magellan that he might
+"see the wonders of the new lands." He saw them indeed, and he painted
+them with his pen so vividly that they will always live. We get our
+first views of the strange inhabitants of the Southern regions of the
+New World from him. We are to follow his narratives, as printed for the
+Hakluyt Society, London, making some omissions, and changing its form in
+part, hoping thereby to render the text more clear. We closely follow
+the spirit of events. Pigafetta addresses his narrative "To the very
+illustrious and very excellent Lord Philip de Villiers Lisleaden, Grand
+Master of Rhodes," of whom we have spoken.
+
+[Illustration: Interior of the Alcazar of Seville.]
+
+He says, by way of introduction:
+
+"Finding myself in Spain in the year of the nativity of our Lord, 1519,
+at the court of the most serene King of the Romans (Charles V), and
+learning there of the great and awful things of the ocean world, I
+desired to make a voyage to unknown seas, and to see with my own eyes
+some of the wonderful things of which I had heard.
+
+"I heard that there was in the city of Seville an armada (armade) of
+five ships, which were ready to perform a long voyage in order to find
+the shortest way to the Islands of Moluco (Molucca) from whence came the
+spices. The Captain General of this armada was Ferdinand de Magagleanes
+(Magellan), a Portuguese gentleman, who had made several voyages on the
+ocean. He was an honorable man. So I set out from Barcelona, where the
+Emperor was, and traveled by land to the said city of Seville, and
+secured a place in the expedition.
+
+"The Captain General published ordinances for the guidance of the
+voyage.
+
+"He willed that the vessel on which he himself was should go before the
+other vessels, and that the others should keep in sight of it. Therefore
+he hung by night over the deck a torch or faggot of burning wood which
+he called a farol (lantern), which burned all night, so that the ships
+might not lose sight of his own.
+
+"He arranged to set other lights as signals in the night. When he wished
+to make a tack on account of a change of weather he set two lights.
+Three lights signified "faster." Four lights signified to stop and turn.
+When he discovered a rock or land, it was to be signalled by other
+lights.
+
+"He ordered that three watches should be kept at night.
+
+"On Monday, St. Lawrence Day, August 10th, the five ships with the crews
+to the number of two hundred and thirty-seven[A] set sail from the noble
+city of Seville, amid the firing of artillery and came to the end of the
+river Guadalcavir (Guadalquivir). We stopped near the Cape St. Vinconet
+to make further provisions for the voyage.
+
+    [A] The number was larger, about 270.
+
+"We went to hear mass on shore. There the Captain commanded that all the
+men should confess before going any further.
+
+"On Tuesday, September 20th, we set sail from St. Lucar.
+
+"We came to Canaria (Canaries)."
+
+This account repeats in a different way a part of the facts we have
+given.
+
+Here the young Italian relates his first story, which is substantially
+as follows:
+
+
+THE FOUNTAIN TREE.
+
+"Among the isles of the Canaria there is one which is very wonderful.
+There is not to be found a single drop of water which flows from any
+fountain or river.
+
+"But in this rainless land at the hour of midday, every day, there
+descends a cloud from the sky which envelops a large tree which grows on
+this island.
+
+"The cloud falls upon the leaves of the tree, when a great abundance of
+water distills from the leaves. The tree flows, and soon at the foot of
+it there gathers a fountain.
+
+"The people of the island come to drink of the water. The animals and
+the birds refresh themselves there."
+
+The story is true so far as relates to the fountain tree. But that a
+cloud comes down from Heaven at midday to refresh it, is not an exact
+statement of the manner in which this tree furnishes water to the
+sterile island. The young Italian writer describes the tree as he saw
+it, and as it seemed to be. The tree that supplies water as from a
+natural fountain may still be found.
+
+With such a tree to begin his researches on the sea, Pigafetta must have
+been impatient to proceed along the marvelous ocean way. All the world
+was to him as he saw it; he seldom stopped to inquire if appearances
+were true.
+
+With men like Del Cano on board, who had ears for a marvelous story, his
+life in the early part of the voyage must have been a very happy one.
+Wonder followed wonder....
+
+"Monday, the 3d of October," says the interesting Italian, "we set sail
+making the course auster, which the Levantine mariners call siroc
+(southeast) entering into the ocean sea. We passed Cape Verde and
+navigated by the coast of Guinea of Ethiopia, where there is a mountain
+called Sierra Leona. A rain fell, and the storm lasted sixty days."
+
+They came to waters full of sharks, which had terrible teeth, and which
+ate all the people whom they found in the sea, alive or dead. These were
+caught by a hook of iron.
+
+
+ST. ELMO'S FIRE.
+
+Here good St. Anseline met the ships; in the fancy of the mariners of
+the time, this airy saint appeared to favored ships in the night, and
+fair weather always followed the saintly apparition. He came in a robe
+of fire, and stood and shone on the top of the high masts or on the
+spars. The sailors hailed him with joy, as one sent from Heaven. Happy
+was the ship on the tropic sea upon whose rigging the form of good St.
+Anseline appeared in the night, and especially in the night of cloud
+and storm!
+
+To the joy of all the ships good St. Anseline came down one night to the
+fleet of Magellan. The poetical Italian tells the story in this way:
+
+"During these storms, the body of St. Anseline appeared to us several
+times.
+
+"One night among others he came when it was very dark on account of bad
+weather. He came in the form of a fire lighted at the summit of the main
+mast, and remained there near two hours and a half.
+
+"This comforted us greatly, for we were in tears, looking for the hour
+when we should perish.
+
+"When the holy light was going away from us it shed forth so great a
+brilliancy in our eyes that we were like people blinded for near a
+quarter of an hour. We called out for mercy.
+
+"Nobody expected to escape from the storm.
+
+"It is to be noted that all and as many times as the light which
+represents St. Anseline shows itself upon a vessel which is in a storm
+at sea, that vessel never is lost.
+
+"As soon as this light had departed the sea grew calmer and the wings of
+divers kinds of birds appeared."
+
+Beneficent St. Anseline who manifested his presence by illuminations in
+the mast and spars in equatorial waters! The beautiful illusion has long
+been explained and dispelled. It is but an electric fire at the end of
+atmospheric disturbances. But it is usually a correct prophecy of fair
+skies and smooth seas. It is now called St. Elmo's Fire.
+
+If ever there was an expedition that the saint of the mariners might
+favor it would seem to be this.
+
+One can almost envy the pious Italian his imagination in the clearing
+tropic night.
+
+His next wonders were the sea birds, of which there were flocks and
+clouds, and with them appeared flying fish.
+
+The ships were now off the coasts of Brazil and stopped at Verzim.
+
+The people of the Brazilian Verzim were accustomed to paint themselves
+"by fire." We do not clearly understand how this painting "by fire" was
+done. The art of scorching has perished with them. But besides these
+indelible marks, the men had three holes in their lower lips, and hung
+in them, after the manner of earrings, small round ornamental stones,
+about a finger in length. The men did not shave, for they _plucked out_
+their beard.
+
+Their only clothing was a circle of parrot feathers. How _terribly_ gay
+they must have looked! And yet such customs were hardly more ridiculous
+than those of later times, and more civilized countries--earrings,
+beauty patches, plume, and snuffboxes.
+
+It was the land of parrots. The most beautiful and intelligent parrots
+still come from Brazil. Columbus saw parrots in "clouds" over the
+islands of the Antilles.
+
+Parrots were not expensive in these equatorial forests at this time.
+"The natives," says Pigafetta, "give eight or ten parrots for a looking
+glass," and as a looking glass would multiply the picture of parrots
+indefinitely the Verzimans must have thought the exchange a marvelous
+bargain.
+
+If Brazilian parrots were cheap and so charming as likely to become an
+embarrassment of riches, so were the little cat monkeys which delighted
+the men. These little creatures, which looked like miniature lions,
+still delight the visitors to the coast of Brazil, but they shiver up
+when brought to the northern atmospheres and piteously cry for the home
+lands of the sun again.
+
+Very curious birds began to excite the surprise of the voyagers, among
+such as had a "beak like a spoon," and "no tongue."
+
+The markets of the new land displayed another commodity far more
+surprising than birds or animals, young slaves, which were offered for
+sale by their own families. So a family who had many children was rich.
+It cost a hatchet to buy one of these, and for a hatchet and a knife one
+might buy _two_.
+
+The people made bread of the "marrow of trees," and carried victuals in
+baskets on their heads.
+
+Masses were said for the crews on shore, and the natives knelt down with
+the men.
+
+The people were so pleased with their visitors that they built a common
+house for them.
+
+A pleasing illusion had made the sailors most welcome here.
+
+It had not rained in Verzim for two months when the expedition landed.
+The people were looking to the heavens for mercy day by day. But the
+copper sun rose as often in a clear sky.
+
+At last Magellan's sails appeared in the burning air. The sight of the
+sails was followed by that of clouds.
+
+The people thought that the fleet had brought the clouds with them.
+
+"They come from Heaven," said they of the adventurers.
+
+So when they were exhorted to accept Christianity, they at once fell
+down before the uplifted crosses and believed the teachings of the sea
+heroes who could command the clouds and bring rain to the parched land.
+
+They thought the ships were gods and the small boats the children of
+such beings, and when the latter approached the ships they imagined that
+they were children come home to their fathers or mothers.
+
+The ships remained in this delightful country of Verzim thirteen weeks.
+Pigafetta and Del Cano must have thought that life here was ideal. What
+scenes would follow?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+PINEAPPLES, POTATOES, VERY OLD PEOPLE.
+
+
+Other things were there on the wonderful Brazilian coast. There the
+mariners traded in them and were refreshed with a delicious fruit,
+called pique--pineapples.
+
+They came to the knowledge here of a nutritious ground fruit called
+battate. "This," says our Italian, "has the taste of a chestnut and is
+the length of a shuttle." These ground fruits were potatoes.
+
+The people here seem to have been very liberal in trading.
+
+They would give six fowls for a knife--well they might do so, as they
+used stone implements.
+
+They gave _two_ geese for a comb--here they were both generous and wise.
+
+They gave as great a quantity of fish as ten men could eat for a pair of
+scissors.
+
+And for a bell, they gave a whole basket full of potatoes (battate).
+
+Marvelous indeed as was this same country of Verzim, it also abounded
+in the conditions and atmospheres of long life.
+
+"Some of these people," says our Italian chronicler, "live to be a
+hundred or a hundred and twenty, or a hundred and forty or more. They
+wear little clothing."
+
+Which speaks well for pineapples, potatoes, and easy dress.
+
+"They sleep on cotton nets, which are fastened on large timbers, and
+stretch from one end of the house to another."
+
+It is good to sleep in ample ventilation. We do not wonder that many of
+the people passed a hundred years.
+
+The boats of these people were as simple as their open houses.
+
+"These are not made with iron instruments, for there are none, but with
+stones."
+
+The canoes were dug out of one long tree--some giant growth of the
+forest which would convey from thirty to forty men. The paddles for
+these canoes resembled shovels. The rowers were usually black men.
+
+The people ate human flesh, but only at feasts of triumph. They then
+served up their enemies.
+
+Pigafetta draws the following grewsome picture:
+
+"They do not eat up the whole body of a man whom they take prisoner;
+they eat him bit by bit, and for fear that he should be spoiled, they
+cut him up into pieces, which they set to dry before the chimney. They
+eat this day by day, so as to keep in mind the memory of their enemy."
+
+This was indeed the sweet food of revenge, and as barbarous as it seems,
+the spirit of revenge secretly cherished is hardly less unworthy when it
+finds expression in words that are bitter, if not carnal.
+
+The region abounded with bright birds, yet with all these delights, and
+pineapples and potatoes, there fell great rains. So there were shadows
+in the sunlands.
+
+We can fancy Pigafetta relating his discoveries on the shore to a
+susceptible spirit, like Del Cano, and writing an account of them day by
+day in his immortal journal.
+
+These strange adventures by sea and on land which so greatly interested
+the Italian Knight Pigafetta, our historian, do not seem to have greatly
+impressed the mind of Magellan. The lands had been sighted before. His
+whole soul was bent on one purpose--not on rediscovery, but on
+discovery. He was sailing now where other keels had been. It was his
+purpose to find new ways for the world to follow over unknown seas. His
+heart could find no full satisfaction but in water courses that sails
+had never swept; a new way to the Moluccas that no ship had ever broken.
+
+Notwithstanding the friendly spirit and liberal patronage of the
+Emperor, he still stood against the world. He represented a cast-out
+name. His own countrymen, on his own ships in the long delays on the
+voyage to unknown seas, were plotting against him.
+
+Let us recall in fancy a night scene as the ships lay on the waters of
+the meridional world. Magellan sits alone in one of the castles of the
+ship and looks out on the phosphorescent sea. The stars above him shine
+in a clear splendor, and are reflected in the sea. The sky seems to be
+in the waters; the waters are a mirror of the sky. Among the clear stars
+the Southern Cross, always vivid, here rises high. Magellan lifts to it
+his eye, and feels the religious inspiration of the suggestion. He is a
+son of the Church, and he holds that all discoveries are to be made for
+the glory of the Cross.
+
+On the distant shores palms rise in armies in the dusky air. The shores
+are silent. When arose the tall people that inhabited them?
+
+Magellan dreams: he wonders at himself, at his inward commission; at his
+cast-out name and great opportunity.
+
+One of his trusty friends comes to him; he is a Spaniard and his
+disquieting words break the serenity of the scene.
+
+"Captain General, it hurts my soul to say it, but there is disloyalty on
+the ships--it is everywhere."
+
+"I seem to feel the atmospheres of it," said Magellan. "Why should it
+be? The sea and the sky promise us success. Who are disloyal?"
+
+"Captain General, they are your own countrymen!"
+
+"And why do they plot treason under the Cross of discovery?"
+
+"Captain General, if the ocean open new ways before you, and you should
+achieve all of which you dream, they will have little share in the
+glory; you are facing stormy waters and perils unknown, not for
+Portugal, but for Spain."
+
+"Not for Spain alone, nor for Portugal, but for the glory of the Cross,
+and the good of all the world. A divine will leads me, and sustains me,
+and directs me. I am not seeking gold or fame or any personal advantage;
+my soul goes forth to reveal the wonders and the benevolence of
+Providence to the heart of the whole world. I go alone, and feel the
+loneliness of my lot. I left all that I had to make this expedition. It
+is my purpose to discover unknown seas. Joy, rapture, and recompense
+would come to me, beyond wealth or fame, could my eyes be the first to
+see a new ocean world, and to carry back the knowledge of it to all
+nations. What happiness would it be to me to ride on uncharted tides! My
+friend, you are loyal to me?"
+
+"Captain General, I am loyal, and the Spanish sailors are loyal; it is
+your own men who plot in dark corners to bring your plans to naught."
+
+In the shadow of one of the tall castles of another ship sit a band of
+idle men. They are Portuguese.
+
+One of them, who seems to lead the minds of the others, is whittling,
+and after a long silence says:
+
+"We do not know where we are going, and wherever we are going, we are
+Portuguese and are slaves to Spain."
+
+"Ay, ay," returned an old Portuguese sailor, "and when we go back again,
+should that ever be, the profit to us will be little at the India
+House."
+
+"Right," answered a number of voices, and one ventured to say:
+
+"Magellan, after all, may be mad, like his old companion, the
+astronomer. Both came from the same place in Portugal."
+
+Some of the officers had schemes of their own.
+
+But the ships crept on and on, along the Brazilian coast, where the flag
+of Spain and the farol guided them in the track of the Admiral they
+followed. Night after night the lantern of the flagship gleamed in the
+air, moving toward cooler waters under the Southern Cross.
+
+And in Magellan's heart was a single purpose, and he anticipated the joy
+of a great discovery, as a revelation that would answer the prophetic
+light that shone like a star in his own spiritual vision. On, and on!
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+THE FIRST GIANT.--THE ISLANDS OF GEESE AND GOSLINGS.--THE DANCING
+GIANTS.
+
+
+The narrative of Pigafetta, the Knight of Rhodes, has much curious lore
+in regard to giants. At a place on the coast, formerly called Cape St.
+Mary, the first of these giants appeared.
+
+He was a leader of a tribe "who ate human flesh." The lively Knight of
+Rhodes informs us that this man, who towered above his fellows, "had a
+voice like a bull."
+
+He came to one of the captains' ships and asked--of course in sign
+language; for a man may have a "voice like a bull" and yet fail to be
+understood in cannibal tongues--if he might come on board the ship and
+bring his fellows with him.
+
+He left a quantity of goods on the shore. While he was negotiating at
+the ships, his people on the shore, who seem to have been unusually wise
+and prudent, began to remove the stores of goods from exposure to danger
+to a kind of castle at some distance.
+
+The officers of the ships grew inpatient when they saw the tempting
+goods being thus removed. So they landed a hundred men to recover the
+goods, which they seemed to have deemed theirs after the "right of
+discovery."
+
+The men began to run after the provident natives, when they became
+greatly surprised. The natives seemed to _fly_ over the ground, and
+leave them behind at a humiliating distance.
+
+"They did more in one step than we could do at a bound," says Pigafetta,
+Knight of Rhodes.
+
+The giant people here showed that there was need to approach them with
+caution. Some time before, these "Canibali" had captured a Spanish sea
+captain and sixty men, who had landed and pastured inland to make
+discoveries. They ate them all--a fearful feast!
+
+Our voyagers probably had no desire to go too far inland in view of such
+a warning; so they returned and proceeded on their course toward the
+antarctic pole.
+
+They discovered two small islands, which had more agreeable inhabitants
+than the land of Cape St. Mary. "These islands," says our good Knight
+Pigafetta, "were full of geese and goslings and sea wolves." He adds:
+"We loaded five ships with them for an hour."
+
+The Knight has also left us the following curious picture of the birds,
+which must have been very much surprised at being so rudely disturbed:
+
+"The geese are black, and have feathers all over the body of the same
+size and shape; and they do not fly but live on fish, and they were so
+fat that we did not pluck them, but skinned them. They have beaks like
+that of a crow.
+
+"The sea wolves of these islands are of many colors and of the size and
+thickness of a calf, and have a head like a calf, and ears small and
+round. They have teeth but no legs, but feet joining close to the body,
+which resemble a human hand. They have small nails to their feet, and
+skin between the fingers like geese.
+
+"If these animals could run they would be very bad and cruel, but they
+do not stir from the waters, and swim and live upon fish."
+
+This seems to be a very admirable description of a sea wolf, O Knight of
+Rhodes!
+
+A great storm came down upon the ships here. But, marvelous to relate,
+the fiery body of good St. Anselmo or Anseline "appeared to us, and
+immediately the storm ceased."
+
+The fleet sailed away again and came to Port St. Julian, the true land
+of the giants, of which place our Knight has some very interesting
+stories to tell.
+
+[Illustration: The world according to the Ptolemy of 1548.]
+
+The fleet entered the Port of St. Julian. It was winter, and for a long
+time no human beings appeared.
+
+Suddenly one day a most extraordinary sight met the eyes of some of the
+adventurers. Our Knight's description of this being is very vivid. He
+says:
+
+"One day, without any one's expecting it, we saw a giant who was on the
+shore of the sea, quite naked, and was dancing and leaping and singing,
+and, while singing, he put sand and dust on his head." The Captain of
+one of the ships, who first saw this extraordinary creature, said to one
+of the sailors:
+
+"Go and meet him. He dances and sings as a sign of friendship. You must
+do the same. Beckon him to me."
+
+The Captain himself was on a little island.
+
+The scene that followed must have been comical indeed.
+
+The giant danced and sung and sprinkled his head with sand. The sailor
+did the same, danced and sang, and the two approached each other.
+
+So the giant was made to think that he was among friends. The sailor led
+him on to the island, where he met the Captain.
+
+But the lively giant now began to be afraid in the presence of a new
+people. He seemed to wish to ask them who they were and whence they
+came. Then an answer to this question came to him. He looked up to the
+sky and pointed upward with one finger, saying by signs:
+
+"Did you come down from Heaven?"
+
+"He was so tall," says our descriptive Knight, "that the tallest of us
+only came up to his waist." He was probably hardly taller than many of
+his race. Falkner, in his account of Patagonia (1774), says that he saw
+men there seven feet and a half high.
+
+Of this dancing giant our historian gives a further description in
+lively and interesting colors:
+
+"He had a large face painted red all around, and around his eyes were
+rings of yellow, and he had two hearts painted on his cheeks. He had but
+little hair on the top of his head, which was painted white.
+
+"When he was brought before the Captain, he had thrown over him the
+skin of a certain beast, which skin was very carefully sewed."
+
+[Illustration: The dancing giant.]
+
+The skin was that of a guanaco, a kind of llama.
+
+Our historian thus describes the guanaco:
+
+"This beast has its head and ears of the size of a mule, and the neck
+and body of the fashion of a camel, the legs of a deer, and the tail of
+a horse, and it neighs like a horse. There are great numbers of these
+animals in the same place."
+
+Patagonia is the land of these strange animals, which are still found
+there, and are hunted by Indians who lie upon the ground with drawn
+bows. The animal has great curiosity, and he draws near this living
+snare and is killed. When tame he is an interesting companion, but if
+angered he suddenly emits a great quantity of offensive liquid from his
+nose, like a half bucket of water, which he throws upon the offender. He
+is the South American camel.
+
+This giant when he made himself ready to meet the adventurers had shoes
+of leather or skins, and carried a bow made of the "gut of a beast" and
+a bundle of cane arrows feathered, at the end of which were small white
+stones.
+
+"The Captain caused food and drink to be given to him.
+
+"Then the crew began to show him some of the presents they had brought,
+among them a looking-glass."
+
+When the giant saw himself in the glass he was filled with wonder. It
+was as though his own ghost had appeared to him. There were men behind
+him curious to see how he would be affected. He leaped back with such
+force as to tumble them over. They were but pigmies to him.
+
+The Captain now gave the giant two bells, a mirror, a comb, and beads,
+and sent him back to the shore.
+
+One of the giants of the country saw him coming back, ran to the
+habitation of the giants, and summoned the giant people to the shore to
+meet him. They came, almost naked, leaping and singing, and pointing
+upward to Heaven. What a sight it must have been!
+
+The women were laden with goods. The sailors beckoned them to the ships
+to trade.
+
+Queerly enough, the women brought with them a baby or little guanaco,
+which they led by a string. Our historian learned that when these giants
+wished to capture the old guanacos or camels they fastened one of the
+little guanacos to a bush, and the old ones came to the bush to play
+with it, and so became an easy prey.
+
+"Six days afterward, our people going to cut wood," writes the Knight,
+"saw another giant, who raised his hands toward Heaven.
+
+"When the Captain General came to know of it, he sent to fetch him with
+his ship's boat, and brought him to one of the little islands in the
+port. This giant was of a better disposition than the other, and was a
+gracious and amiable person, he loved to dance and leap. When he leaped,
+he caused the earth to sink to a palm's depth at the place where his
+feet touched."
+
+The good giant remained for a time with the adventurers. They gave him
+the name of John. They learned him to pronounce the name of Jesus.
+
+"Say Pater Noster," said they.
+
+"Pater Noster," said the giant.
+
+"Say Ave Maria," said the men.
+
+"Ave Maria," said the susceptible giant.
+
+They made him presents when he went away, among them some of the many
+tinkling bells.
+
+"We must capture some of these people," said the Captain, "and take them
+to Spain for wonders."
+
+So the explorers began to study how to secure some interesting specimens
+of these tall people, to excite the wonder of the people of Spain.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+CAPTURING A GIANT.--MAGELLAN'S DECISION.
+
+
+The attempts to capture wild giants greatly interested Pigafetta.
+
+Our historian says that it was "done by gentle and cunning means, for
+otherwise they would have done a hurt to some of our men."
+
+One day some sailors saw four giants hidden in some bushes, and they
+were unarmed. They brought these into the power of the Captain. Two of
+them were young, and such as would excite admiration anywhere for their
+noble development.
+
+They gave these two lusty young Herculeses as many knives, mirrors,
+bells, and trinkets as they could hold in their hands, and while the
+delighted youths were thus abounding in riches, the Captain said:
+
+"Now show them the iron fetters."
+
+The two youths could but wonder at these when they were brought.
+
+The Captain ordered that the fetters be presented to them.
+
+But their hands were already full. What could they do with them? Where
+could they put them?
+
+The Captain signified to them that he would ornament their feet with the
+fetters. To this they consented.
+
+So the fetters were put on the feet of each of them, like necklaces or
+rings, but when the young giants saw a blacksmith bring a hammer and
+rivet the fetters, they began to be distrustful and presently greatly
+agitated. They tried to walk, but they could not move.
+
+Our historian thus describes their fury when they saw that they were
+helplessly bound:
+
+"Nevertheless when they saw the trick which had been played on them they
+began to be enraged, and to foam like bulls, crying out to the _devil_
+to help them." We do not see why our Knight should have taken this view
+of the case; we would think that two human beings who had been so
+treacherously deceived, might have been regarded as appealing to the
+Deity of justice.
+
+"The hands of the other two giants were bound," says the original
+narrative, "but it was with great difficulty; then the Captain sent them
+back on shore, with nine of his men to conduct them, and to bring the
+wife of one of those who had remained in irons, because he regretted her
+greatly." This last touch gives us a very favorable view of this young
+giant.
+
+But on being conducted away, one of the two giants who were to be
+liberated, untied his hands and escaped. As soon as he found that he was
+free, his feet were picked up nimbly indeed. He flew, as it were, his
+long strides leaving his late captors far behind him. He had no heart to
+trust Europeans again. He rushed to his native town, but he found only
+the women there, who must have been greatly alarmed; the men had gone to
+hunt.
+
+He rushed after the hunters to tell them how his companions had been
+betrayed.
+
+What became of the other giant whose hands were bound? He struggled,
+too, to break the cords, seeing which, one of the men struck him on the
+head. He became quiet when he saw that he was helpless, and led the men
+to the giant's town where the women and children were.
+
+The men concluded to pass the night there, as it was near night and
+everything there looked harmless and inviting.
+
+But during the night the other giant who had gone to meet the hunters
+returned with his companions. These saw the bruised head of the giant
+who had also been bound, and warned the women who began to run. We are
+told that the youngest "ran faster than the biggest" and that the men
+"ran faster than horses," at which we can not wonder. The fleeing giant
+shot one of the men from the ships, and he was buried there on shore.
+The poor giant in irons who had lamented for his wife probably never
+saw the giantess again.
+
+The methods of treating sickness in the town of the giants were curious.
+For an emetic one ran a stick down his throat. For a headache, one cut a
+gash on the forehead, not unlike the old method of bleeding. The
+philosophy of this latter treatment was interesting--blood did not
+remain with pain, and pain departed with blood--quite true; white people
+have advanced theories as conclusive.
+
+"When one of them dies," says our Knight, "ten devils appear and dance
+around the dead man." One of the poor giants who was forced to remain on
+board said he had seen devils with horns, and hair that fell to their
+feet, who spouted fire. There seems to be the color of the European
+imagination in this statement.
+
+The giants lived on raw meat, thistles, and sweet root, and one of them
+drank a "bucket of water" at a time.
+
+The expedition remained at St. Julian five months, and acquired much
+information about the country from the captive giants with whom they
+learned to talk by sign language.
+
+They here set up a cross on a mountain and took possession of the
+country in the name of the King of Spain. They called the signal
+elevation where they planted the cross the Mount of Christ.
+
+The primitive people of the shores of Brazil and Patagonia delighted in
+exciting the wonder of their visitors. Many of these people who thought
+that the Europeans had come down from the sky, where they conceived all
+life must be wonderful indeed, liked to show them some of the feats that
+the people of the earth could do. The people who came down from the sky
+they reasoned had great wisdom in sailing the seas, but they were not
+giants. They could trail a lantern along the sea in the night air in
+some unaccountable way, but they did not know how to run with flying
+feet on the land or how to wing arrows with unerring aim into the sky
+and sea.
+
+One day there came from a company of the primitive people, a champion in
+an art of which the Europeans could have never heard. They had seen
+these people run, leap, and vault with almost magic power, but they had
+never seen one who could make a tube of himself.
+
+This new champion approached the men in the usual way, inviting
+attention. He carried in his hand an arrow which was a cubit and a half
+long.
+
+He tilted it, opened his great mouth to receive it, dropped it into his
+throat, when, amid muscular contortions, it began to descend. The
+sailors watched him with amazement as it went down. It disappeared at
+last, having, as we are told, descended to the "bottom of his stomach."
+It seemed to cause him no pain.
+
+Presently the quiver began to appear again. The long arrow slowly rose
+out of the human tube which the man had made of himself, and dropped
+into his hand at last, the whole being performed by muscular movement.
+
+He must have been delighted at the sensation which this mental control
+over the muscles of digestion had produced. It was less strange that the
+arrow should have gone down than that it should have come up again.
+
+Such feats as these entertained the sailors from time to time when they
+were on shore. Pigafetta was now seeing the "wonders of the world"
+indeed.
+
+Magellan's mind was given to the more serious problems of the voyage.
+
+The Antarctic pole star now rose to his view. It was cold. Magellan saw
+that the voyage would be likely to last long.
+
+Not only the Portuguese came to distrust him, but some of the Spanish
+sailors caught the infection of the deleterious atmosphere. They
+reasoned differently from the Portuguese.
+
+"The Admiral is a native of Portugal," said they, "and though the
+Portuguese court rejected him, he will be sure in the end to be true to
+his own people and King. He will never allow the glory of his
+discoveries to go to Spain."
+
+Some of them came to him to say that the wind blew cold, that the sea
+was full of perils, that nothing but disaster could come by pushing on
+into the sea where they were tending.
+
+"Turn south," said they.
+
+The answer of Magellan was royal and loyal. We give it in what, from
+what was reported of it, must be in his own thought, and very nearly his
+own words.
+
+"Comrades, my course was laid down by Caesar (the King) himself.
+I--will--not--depart--from--it--in--any--degree. I will open to Caesar an
+unknown world."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+THE MUTINY AT PORT JULIAN.--THE STRAITS.--1519.
+
+
+Days of mutiny came in the cold waters.
+
+The spirit of disloyalty that had found expression in the inspector
+broke out anew at Port St. Julian. It spread through the officers and
+crews of three of the ships. These caused to be published the resolution
+that they would sail no farther.
+
+"You are leading us to destruction," said the mutineers.
+
+Luis de Mendoza, Captain of the Victoria, the treasurer of the
+expedition, was a leader of the mutiny. Another disturbing spirit was
+Gasper de Queixada, Captain of the Concepcion.
+
+Magellan, of the kind heart, had, as we have seen, the resolution to
+meet emergencies. This expedition was his life. It must not be opposed,
+hindered, or thwarted. He lived in his purpose. He must stamp out the
+mutiny. He no more used gentle and courteous words. He thundered his
+will.
+
+One day Ambrosia Fernandez, his constable, came to him, and said:
+
+"Three crews are ready to mutiny, to force you to go back."
+
+Magellan saw that he must make the leaders of these ships his prisoners,
+or that he would become theirs.
+
+"Constable," he said, "pick out sixty trusty men and arm them well. Go
+with them on board the treasurer's ship, and arrest Mendoza and lay him
+dead on the deck."
+
+The fleet was moored in line. It was flood tide, and Mendoza's ship rode
+astern of Magellan's, and the ship of Queixada, ahead.
+
+Magellan prepared his own crew to face the consequences of a tragedy
+should one occur. He ordered his hawser to be attached to the cable, and
+called his crew to arms.
+
+When the flood tide was at its height, Fernandez, the constable,
+prepared to execute his order.
+
+He appeared before the ship of the mutinous Mendoza, and asked to be
+received on board.
+
+"Back to your own ship," said the mutineer. "I command the Victoria."
+
+"But we are few against many," said the constable, "and I have a message
+from the Admiral which I must deliver."
+
+He was helped on board the Victoria.
+
+His feet had no sooner touched the deck than he seized Mendoza.
+
+"I arrest you in the name of the Emperor."
+
+The armed men that the constable had left on the boat rushed on board.
+
+The crew of the Victoria, stood aghast. They saw the power of the
+Admiral's mind.
+
+Magellan brought his ship alongside the Victoria.
+
+He led his armed crew on board the Victoria, and halted before a
+terrible scene. Mendoza had been stabbed by the constable, and the crew
+of the Victoria plead for mercy, and promised to be loyal to the
+Admiral.
+
+In this hour of tragedy and terror Magellan bore his ship around to
+Queixada's, and made the officers and crew of the Concepcion his
+prisoners. The leaders of the mutiny were executed. It was a necessity.
+
+Magellan caused also the sentence he had imposed on the inspector and
+his accomplice to be carried out here.
+
+Carthagena and Sanches were led from their prison to the shore.
+
+As the sails were being lifted to depart, they were marooned--left with
+some provisions, among which were some bottles of wine, on the desert
+shore.
+
+There were hearts that pitied them as the ships sailed away. There was
+_one_ who plotted to rescue them. It was Gormez.
+
+They left them some biscuits with the bottles of wine.
+
+"It is the last bread they will ever eat," said their companions.
+
+"And the last wine that they will ever drink," said a loyal priest on
+board.
+
+But there was one on board that shook his head.
+
+If he could have his will the two would eat bread and drink wine again
+in the convents of beautiful Seville.
+
+The execution of the disloyal Spaniards again awakened the jealousy of
+Gormez. He probably began to plan about this time to separate the
+Antonio from the expedition, and lead her back to Spain. His heart was
+with the inspector and friar far away on the desolate shore.
+
+The ships sailed away, and the marooned priests saw them disappear.
+
+"They were cast aside for opposing a madman," reasoned Gormez. "Magellan
+is no fit leader of an expedition. If I had full command of the Antonio,
+I would rescue the inspector, if I were to find him alive."
+
+But he could not take the Antonio back while Mesquita, Magellan's loyal
+cousin, was in command. Had he breathed a breath of disloyalty in the
+presence of this Portuguese, he might have himself been deposed from his
+position and marooned, as had been the inspector and the friar.
+
+A dark plot began to form in the pilot's mind. If he could incite the
+crew against Mesquita in some hour of peril, he might cause him to be
+imprisoned on his own ship, and then he could succeed to the command,
+and take the Antonio back to Spain.
+
+And he would also endeavor to rescue the inspector and the friend of the
+inspector who had been marooned. If he could rescue them and take them
+back with him to Spain, they would be powerful witnesses for him against
+Magellan.
+
+Gormez now waited his opportunity. A jealous man seeks for a principle
+of life to ease his conscience and justify evil deeds. Gormez had two
+principles to sustain him in his disloyalty. The one was that he could
+lead a better expedition, and the other the merciful rescue of his two
+companions who had been marooned for the same opinions that he had from
+the first carried in his heart. So calling treachery, loyalty and
+sympathy, he awaited an hour favorable to his plan.
+
+If he could return to Spain he would offer his services to Portugal or
+to Spain to lead an expedition to the Spice Islands that should be
+conducted in some more promising way than by the winter seas.
+
+As the ships sailed on into the clouds and cold, the sailors were filled
+with apprehension. But the farol still shone at night like a star in the
+changing atmosphere. They had expected that the extremity of South
+America would point West, but this was not the case. Whither were they
+tending?
+
+It was the middle of October. The water grew colder and the land became
+more desolate. Suddenly a bay appeared and the continent seemed to part.
+The sea poured its tides to the East amid towering mountains, and a
+strait appeared, which now bears the name of Magellan.
+
+The soul of the Admiral thrilled. It was the fulfillment of his visions.
+He called the opening to the swift channel Cape Virgins, as he
+discovered it on the day on which the Church commemorated the martyrdom
+of the "eleven thousand virgins."
+
+His lone lantern entered the straits. The way was toward the East.
+
+Magellan sent the ship Antonio, which was commanded by his cousin Alvaro
+de Mesquita, to explore the bay, of which ship Gormez still held the
+position of pilot. The mutineer's hour had come.
+
+The pilot entered the bay, but presently a powerful tide carried the
+ship back, and beyond the sight of the flag and the lantern of Magellan.
+
+The jealous Portuguese had seen enough to know that great perils were
+before the fleet or that a glory like to that of Columbus was now likely
+to fall to the lot of Magellan. He determined to be revenged upon the
+Admiral for supplanting him in accepting the favors of the King.
+
+He called the crew secretly about him.
+
+"You are rushing on to ruin," he said. "I can take you back to Spain.
+Put Mesquita in irons, and let us return. Mesquita advised Magellan to
+execute our comrades!"
+
+The crew, overcome by the perils of the situation, obeyed the pilot.
+
+Mesquita was placed in irons, and the pilot bore the Antonio away from
+the wintry seas, and turned her prow toward Spain.
+
+But untrue as the sailors were to Magellan, he was true to them. He
+delayed the expedition for their return, and sent out the Victoria in
+search of them. The Victoria's crew planted signal standards, under
+which were letters.
+
+Now perhaps for the first time Magellan was master of the expedition. He
+supposed at first that the Antonio had become lost in the terrible
+tides, but he still suspected treachery.
+
+As the fleet entered the straits, the hills at night blazed with fires.
+The explorers thought these fires were volcanoes. They were signal fires
+kindled by the natives. Magellan gave the place the name of "Tierra del
+Fuego"--the "Land of Fire," a name that it still bears.
+
+The water ran icy cold. Peaks of crystal towered above the straits, and
+the sublimities of mountain desolations everywhere appeared. So amid
+awful chasms of the sea, now white with snows, now dark with shadows,
+the little fleet glided on, the farol in the air at night, and all eyes
+strained with wonder to see what new disclosure this strait would
+bring.
+
+What must have been the reflection of Magellan as the mysteries of the
+new world lifted before his eyes?
+
+Joy is the compensation of suffering, and if his happiness was as great
+as his trials had been, he must have indeed known thrilling moments. He
+had dared, and he had achieved.
+
+He wondered at the fate of the Antonio, as the days went by. He indeed
+thought her lost, but yet hoped that she might appear.
+
+"She has deserted us," ventured a loyal officer.
+
+"No," reasoned the Admiral. "Mesquita would never desert me."
+
+He was right. There were many true hearts that made the voyage like Del
+Cano's, but no heart was truer to Magellan than Mesquita's; and true
+hearts know and love each other.
+
+The ships glided on slowly, without the Antonio. They had two new
+passengers in the giants whose lives must have been filled with wonder
+on ship-board.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+"THE ADMIRAL WAS MAD!"
+
+
+Grave as was the act of treachery that the jealousy of Gormez led him to
+commit, he was true to the two marooned priests who had opposed the
+daring schemes of Magellan.
+
+"We must not leave them to perish," he said.
+
+So with Mesquita in irons he steered his ship toward the lonely islands
+where the crew had passed the winter.
+
+They found Carthagena and his brother monk still living, and never could
+two men have been more glad to escape from exile. To live among naked
+giants, whom they could not civilize, must have become a horror to them.
+But their lives had been spared, though their biscuits and wine, we
+fancy, were gone.
+
+"The Admiral has gone mad," said the men who had come to rescue them.
+"He knows not the way to the Moluccas, nor to anywhere."
+
+The marooned men asked them where they were now going.
+
+"To Spain," was the answer. "We have come to rescue you. Our Captain has
+never forgotten you. He will need you as witnesses. You must testify
+that the Admiral is mad."
+
+They were ready to testify that.
+
+The ship sailed back to Spain.
+
+The tales that they carried back to beautiful Seville caused a great
+disappointment in Spain. They must have stricken the heart of the wife
+of Magellan.
+
+Gormez related there that the Admiral had become mad; that he had
+marooned the two priests whom they had brought back as witnesses of the
+truth of what he asserted; that Magellan had sailed into winter seas,
+and quite lost his reason, and knew not where he was going.
+
+Then he told a terrible story of the execution of the mutinous
+Spaniards, friends of the King, at St. Julian. He said:
+
+"His cousin, Mesquita, our captain, advised these crimes, and so we put
+him in irons, and have brought him back to receive justice in Spain."
+
+Mesquita protested his innocence and tried to gain credence for his
+case. But no one cared to listen to him. The court and the popular
+feeling were against him. He was consigned to a prison. It was useless
+for him to protest, and to say that Magellan had made a great discovery;
+that he had found straits which were leading to the South Sea, and which
+were likely to prove that the ocean that Balboa had beheld was
+continuous.
+
+He was placed in a lonely dungeon, and there brooded over his wrongs and
+dreamed.
+
+He had one hope; it was that Magellan would return triumphant, a second
+Columbus or Vasco da Gama. If that day were to come, he would be
+released, and the court would honor him, and he would be hailed as a
+hero.
+
+"I have been made a prisoner by treachery," he said to a few men. "I
+believe that the day of my vindication will one day dawn."
+
+Cardinal Ximenes died. Juana still watched by the tomb of her husband,
+and took no interest in the world. Charles V was entering upon his
+career as a conqueror who was to subdue the Roman world to his will.
+
+As for Magellan in Spain he was to be but little more remembered now.
+Spain believed the story of the jealous Gormez, and the mariners of
+Seville said:
+
+"The Admiral was mad!"
+
+In the common view the mad Admiral had gone down in Antarctic seas. Like
+Faleiro, his friend, who had been sent to the mad house, it was thought
+that his brain had become unsettled, and that his bright visions had
+failed.
+
+The two mutineers ate bread and drank wine again in the convent bowers
+of Seville.
+
+Gormez had schemes of his own. He desired the authority of the throne to
+make an expedition to the Spice Islands, which he believed he could find
+by sailing West. Strangely enough, as we have said, this jealous,
+treacherous man was afterward made a pilot in an expedition that visited
+Florida, Cape Cod, and Massachusetts Bay. But he did not find the way to
+the Spice Islands on the voyage.
+
+Mesquita, still believing in the success of the expedition of Magellan,
+said to a few whom he could reach:
+
+"Magellan is not mad. He executed those who had planned to murder him.
+He had to put to death these men for the sake of the expedition. He will
+return again!"
+
+Few believed his story, and fewer his prophecy.
+
+Still there were some who hoped that the prisoner's prophecy might prove
+true. Columbus was deemed mad, and quelled a mutiny, but he returned
+again. Vasco da Gama faced doubt and destruction, but he returned again.
+There were not wanting some who asked, "Will Magellan ever return
+again?" Such usually received the answer, "The Admiral was mad!"
+
+The poor wife of Magellan, who had hoped much from him for the sake of
+her child, as well as for Spain, heard these reports in an agony of
+grief. But she still hoped. She must have believed in her husband's
+destiny.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+THE PACIFIC.--THE DEATH OF THE GIANTS.
+
+
+The four ships glided along the wonderful straits which Magellan named
+the "Virgins," but which will always bear his own name. The scenery
+continued wild and fierce, and in some places overawing and sublime;
+they sailed amid domes of crystal and almost under the roofs of a broken
+world. They still moved slowly--the scenery growing more and more
+wonderful.
+
+The air grew bright again. The ships were in the sea. They had entered a
+sea broad and glorious, but which Magellan could have hardly dreamed to
+be nearly ten thousand miles long, and more than that wide! Its waters
+were placid--an ocean plain. Columbus had heard of this vast sea, and
+Balboa had seen it from the peak of Darien.
+
+All the joy that Magellan had anticipated in his visions of years now
+burst upon him.
+
+"The Pacific!"
+
+This was the name that came to him as he surveyed the new ocean world.
+He was the discoverer of the South Pacific, which was continuous with
+the ocean discovered by Balboa. What did it contain? Whither might he
+sail over the new serenity of waters?
+
+His soul had stood against his own country; his name had been cast out
+by his countrymen. But in the splendors of the sunset sea he had found
+his faith to be reality. It is said that the sailors wept when they
+beheld the Pacific.
+
+We may fancy the joy of Del Cano.
+
+We may imagine how the heart of Pigafetta, the young Italian, which had
+always been true to the Admiral, must have overflowed with delight when
+the Pacific opened before his eyes! There is a strong heart beat in the
+happiness of one who has been true to a successful man in the hour of
+his need.
+
+He may have sung the song that cheered Columbus and his men--the
+mariners' hymn to the Virgin:
+
+    "Gentle Star of Ocean!
+      Portal of the sky!
+    Ever Virgin Mother
+      Of the Lord most high!"
+
+"Wednesday, the 20th of November, 1520," says the original narrative,
+"we came forth out of the same strait, and entered the Pacific Sea."
+
+The ships sailed on into the calm mystery of the ocean, the soul of
+Magellan glowing. But though the Admiral had risen superior to so many
+obstacles, there were others to be met. The sea was indeed placid and
+full of promise, but starvation now stared him in the face, and after
+the spectre of Treason had departed that of Famine appeared.
+
+Day after day the sun arose on the same serenity of sea. One month
+passed, and still there spread before the ships the same infinite ocean.
+Another month passed, and another, and twenty days more.
+
+How did the crews live on this long voyage of silence and calms?
+
+The narrative says: "We only ate old biscuit reduced to powder, and full
+of grubs, and we drank water that had turned yellow and smelled."
+
+But a more perilous diet had to be followed.
+
+They ate the "ox hides that were under the main yard." To eat these
+hides they had to soak them for some days in the sea, and then cook them
+on embers.
+
+They ate sawdust; then the vermin on the ships.
+
+A worse condition came. The gums of the men swelled from such food, so
+that many of them could not eat at all, and nineteen died. Beside those
+who died, twenty-five fell ill of "divers sicknesses."
+
+Kind-hearted Pigafetta, who was always true to the Portuguese Admiral,
+formed an intimacy with the poor young giant, presumably with the giant
+whose wife had been left behind. This giant was imprisoned on the
+flagship of Magellan.
+
+One day the giant said to him, helplessly:
+
+"Capac."
+
+Our Italian understood that this must be the Patagonian word for bread.
+So he wrote it down, and the giant saw that he was interested in the
+meaning of his native words.
+
+So the young giant began to teach the young Italian.
+
+"Her-dem" meant a chief.
+
+"Holi" meant water.
+
+"Ohone," a storm.
+
+"Setebos," the Unseen Power.
+
+They studied together for a time, and shared each other's good will.
+
+One day the Italian drew a cross on paper. The young giant raised it to
+his lips and kissed it, as he had seen Pigafetta kiss the sign of the
+Cross.
+
+But he said by signs: "Do not make the Cross again, else Setebos will
+enter into you and kill you."
+
+The meaning of the cross was explained to him.
+
+The poor giant fell ill at last, amid all the misery.
+
+"Bring me the Cross," he said by signs.
+
+He kissed it again.
+
+He knew that he would soon die.
+
+"Make me a Christian," he said.
+
+They named him "Paul," and baptized him.
+
+One day found him dead, and they cast his great frame into the sea. He
+was probably the first convert to the faith among Patagonians, and his
+so-called conversion was the heart's cry in helplessness.
+
+The other giant may have lived to see the days of famine, when men
+shrank and death threatened all. Then he, too, famished and died, and
+found a grave in the sea. Another account, makes this giant die on the
+Antonio before that ship went back to St. Julian.
+
+Two islands only appeared in the months of steady sailing. They were
+uninhabited except by birds. The sky in all this time brought no storm.
+
+In these days of ocean solitude, hunger, and death, Magellan was sure
+always of the faith of two true hearts--the susceptible Italian and Del
+Cano.
+
+Magellan dreamed of the fate of Mesquita in these strange experiences,
+and Mesquita in his lonely prison thought continually of him. Would
+Magellan ever return? the latter must have asked daily.
+
+If so, his prison doors might swing open. He had no other hope, but this
+hope was a star. Magellan's wife must have shared this hope with the
+prisoner.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+WELCOME TO THE PHILIPPINES!
+
+
+On Wednesday, March 6th, Magellan sighted islands. His lantern had
+crossed the Pacific Ocean. Here he hoped to find food. He approached the
+shores eagerly. So hungry were the crews that one of the sick men begged
+that if any of the natives were killed human flesh might be brought him.
+
+But the natives here were not only wild men, they were robbers; they
+sought to kill the voyagers and to steal everything. Hence, Magellan
+called the islands the Ladrones (robbers).
+
+The robbers threw stones at the famishing mariners as the ships turned
+away in search of more hospitable shores. The women were dressed in
+bark.
+
+The ships moved on into unknown seas.
+
+On Saturday, March 16, 1521, a notable sight appeared in the dawn of the
+morning. It was a high bluff, some three hundred leagues distant from
+the Thieves' Islands. The island was named Zamal, now called Samar.
+
+Magellan saw another island near. It was inhabited by a friendly
+people. He determined to land there for the sake of security, as he
+could there gather sea food and care for the sick. He planted his tents
+there, and provided the sick with fresh meat.
+
+Where was he?
+
+Here surely was a new archipelago which had found no place on a map.
+March 16, 1521, was to be a notable date of the world.
+
+He had discovered the Philippine Islands, though they were not then
+known by that name. They were the door to China from the West--this he
+could hardly have known.
+
+The islands as now known consist of Luzon, fifty-one thousand three
+hundred square miles in extent; and Mendanao, more than twenty-five
+thousand miles in extent. The islands lying between Luzon and Mendanao
+are called the Bissayas, of which Samar has an area of thirteen thousand
+and twenty miles. Magellan visited Mendanao and then sailed for Zebu, a
+small island where the first Spanish settlement was made, before Manila,
+which was founded in 1581.
+
+This archipelago was a new world of wonder. The small islands are now
+computed to number fourteen hundred. Magellan never knew the extent of
+his discovery.
+
+Here he was to find the happiest days of his life, after the serene but
+famishing voyage.
+
+The people here were to receive him with open arms; to feast him; to
+raise his expectations and to bow down before the Cross. We must
+describe in detail--thanks to the Italian who was true to the heart of
+the Admiral--this golden age of the troubled life of Magellan.
+
+After all the struggle for so many years against many overwhelming
+oppositions, Magellan now rose into the vantage ground of success, and
+fulfilled the vision which had illumined his soul in his darkest hours.
+
+Every man has a right to his record, and whatever might happen now, his
+record no power could destroy; he had discovered the Pacific Ocean, and
+a new way around the world. Whatever might be his fate, the world must
+follow his lantern.
+
+On the 18th of March, 1521, after dinner on shore, the Admiral saw a
+boat coming out from a near island toward his ship. There were men in
+it.
+
+"Let no one move or speak," said Magellan.
+
+The crews awaited the coming of the strangers in the blazing sunlight of
+the tropic sea. The Indians landed, led by a chief.
+
+They were friends. They signified by signs their joy at seeing them.
+Magellan feasted the Indians and gave them presents.
+
+When these people saw the good disposition of the Captain, they gave him
+palm wine and figs "more than a foot long." On leaving they promised to
+return with fruits.
+
+Pigafetta, our Italian Chevalier, vividly describes the scenes that
+followed between Magellan and the friendly people of the
+newly-discovered islands, which we call the Philippines, but which were
+not so named at that time.
+
+He tells us in a wonderfully interesting narrative a translation of
+which we closely follow:
+
+"That people became very familiar and friendly, and explained many
+things in their language, and told the names of some islands which they
+beheld. The island where they dwelt was called Zuluam, and it was not
+large. As they were sufficiently agreeable and conversible the crews had
+great pleasure with them. The Captain seeing that they were of this good
+spirit, conducted them to the ship and showed them specimens of all his
+goods--that he most desired--cloves, cinnamon, pepper, ginger, nutmeg,
+mace, and gold.
+
+"He also had shots fired with his artillery, at which they were so much
+afraid that they wished to jump from the ship into the sea. They made
+signs that the things which the Captain had shown them grew there.
+
+"When they wished to go they took leave of the Captain and of the crew
+with very good manners and gracefulness, promising to come back.
+
+"The island where the ships had moored was named Humunu; but because
+the men found there two springs of very fresh water it was named the
+Watering Place of Good Signs. There was much white coral there, and
+large trees which bear fruit smaller than an almond, and which are like
+pines. There were also many palm trees both good and bad. In this place
+there were many circumjacent islands, on which account the archipelago
+was named St. Lazarus. This region and archipelago is in ten degrees
+north latitude, and a hundred and sixty-one degrees longitude from the
+line of demarcation.
+
+"Friday, the 22d of March, the above-mentioned people, who had promised
+to return, came about midday with two boats laden with the said fruit,
+cochi, sweet oranges, a vessel of palm wine, and a cock, to give us to
+understand that they had poultry in their country." The Italian thus
+describes the habits of the people:
+
+"The lord of these people was old, and had his face painted, and had
+gold rings suspended to his ears, which they name 'schione,' and the
+others had many bracelets and rings of gold on their arms, with a
+wrapper of linen round their head. We remained at this place eight days;
+the Captain went there every day to see his sick men, whom he had placed
+on this island to refresh them; and he gave them himself every day the
+water of this said fruit, the cocho, which comforted them much."
+
+Pigafetta tells us that near this isle is another where there is a kind
+of people "who wear holes in their ears so large that they can pass
+their arms through them"--a very remarkable statement--"and these people
+go naked, except that round their middles they wear cloth made of the
+bark of trees. But there are some of the more remarkable of them who
+wear cotton stuff, and at the end of it there is some work of silk done
+with a needle. These people are tawny, fat, and painted, and they anoint
+themselves with the oil of cocoanuts and sesame to preserve them from
+the sun and the wind. Their hair is very black and long, reaching to the
+waist, and they carry small daggers and knives, ornamented with gold."
+
+Pigafetta fell into the sea here, and he gives a vivid account of the
+personal accident:
+
+"The Monday of Passion week, the 25th of March, and feast of our Lady,
+in the afternoon, and being ready to depart from this place, I went to
+the side of our ship to fish, and putting my feet on a spar to go down
+to the storeroom, my feet slipped, because it had rained, and I fell
+into the sea, without any one seeing me; and being near drowning, by
+luck I found at my left hand the sheet of the large sail which was in
+the sea, I caught hold of it and began to cry out till some came to help
+and pick me up with the boat. I was assisted not by my merits, but by
+the mercy and grace of the Fountain of Pity. That same day we took the
+course between west and southwest, and passed amid four small islands;
+that it to say, Cenalo, Huinanghar, Ibusson, and Abarien."
+
+The Italian describes in an interesting way the visit of the King of one
+of the islands to the ships. He says of this first visit of a Philippine
+King to the Europeans:
+
+"Thursday, the 28th of March, having seen the night before fire upon an
+island, at the morning we came to anchor at this island, where we saw a
+small boat which they call boloto, with eight men inside, which
+approached the ship of the Captain General. Then a slave of the
+Captain's, who was from Sumatra, otherwise named Traprobana, spoke from
+afar to these people, who understood his talk, and came near to the side
+of the ship, but they withdrew immediately, and would not enter the ship
+from fear of us.
+
+"So the Captain, seeing that they would not trust to us, showed them a
+red cap and other things, which he had tied and placed on a little
+plank, and the people in the boat took them immediately and joyously,
+and then returned to advise their King. Two hours afterward, or
+thereabout, we saw come two long boats, which they call ballanghai, full
+of men.
+
+"In the largest of them was their King sitting under an awning of mats;
+when they were near the ship of the Captain General, the said slave
+spoke to the King, who understood him well, because in these countries
+the kings know more languages than the common people. Then the King
+ordered some of his people to go to the Captain's ship, while he would
+not move from his boat, which was near enough to us.
+
+"This was done, and when his people returned to the boat, he went away
+at once. The Captain made a good entertainment to the men who came to
+his ship, and gave them all sorts of things, on which account the King
+wished to give the Captain a rather large bar of solid gold, and a chest
+full of ginger. However, the Captain thanked him very much, but would
+not accept the present. After that, when it was late, he went with the
+ships near to the houses and abode of the King."
+
+The Captain in refusing the offer of gold and ginger from his guest,
+showed indeed a true sense of hospitality. The incident pictures the
+life of Magellan. He obeyed his moral sense and his heart was true. He
+was a Portuguese gentleman of the old type, and presented an example
+worthy of imitation in any age.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+THE VISIT OF THE KING.--PIGAFETTA VISITS THE KING.
+
+
+They were ready to meet the King now, when all was so friendly and
+promising. The good soul of Pigafetta felt that these islands of fruits
+and spiceries were indeed an earthly paradise. He alone had not been
+sick in all of the long monotonous voyage across the Pacific. His
+strength had never abated and his faith in the Admiral had never
+faltered.
+
+Night after night he had watched the lantern swinging in the unknown
+air, and had said his prayers. He had had ever a cheering word to say to
+the Admiral on all occasions. His heart was true to the lantern, the
+stars, the Admiral, and the Divine Power which he believed was leading
+him.
+
+He was now in the sea gardens of palms and spices. He thus continues his
+narrative (we follow in part the translation of the Hakluyt Society in
+the work of Lord Stanley Alderley).
+
+He tells us that on "the next day, which was Good Friday, the Captain
+sent on shore a slave, who was an interpreter, to the King to beg him to
+give him for money some provisions for his ships, sending him word that
+he had not come to his country as an enemy, but as a friend. The King on
+hearing this came with seven or eight men in a boat, and entered the
+ship, and embraced the Captain, and gave him three China dishes covered
+with leaves full of rice, and two _dorades_, which are rather large
+fish. The Captain gave this King a robe of red and yellow cloth, made in
+the Turkish fashion, and a very fine red cap, and to his people he gave
+knives and mirrors. After that refreshments were served up to them. The
+Captain told the King, through the interpreter, that he wished to be
+with him, as _cassi cassi_; that is to say, brothers. To which the King
+answered that he desired to be the same toward him. After that the
+Captain showed him cloths of different colors, linen, coral, and much
+other merchandise, and all the artillery, of which he had some pieces
+fired before him, at which the King was much astonished; after that the
+Captain had one of his soldiers armed with white armor, and placed him
+in the midst of three comrades, who struck him with swords and daggers.
+
+"The King thought this very strange, and the Captain told him, through
+the interpreter, that a man thus in white armor was worth many common
+men; he answered that it was true; he was further informed that there
+were in each ship two hundred like that man.
+
+"After that the Captain showed him a great number of swords, cuirasses,
+and helmets, and made two of the men play with their swords before the
+King; he then showed him the sea chart and the ship compass, and
+informed him how he had found a strait, and of the time which he had
+spent on the voyage; also of the time he had been without seeing any
+land, at which the King was astonished. At the end the Captain asked if
+he would be pleased that two of his people should go with him to the
+places where they lived to see some of the things of his country. This
+the King granted, and I went with another."
+
+The Italian was again in his element, and he gives a graphic account of
+his visit to the natives:
+
+"When I had landed, the King raised his hands to the sky, and turned to
+us two, and we did the same as he did; after that he took me by the
+hand, and one of his principal people took my companion, and led us
+under a place covered with canes, where there was a ballanghai; that is
+to say, a boat, eighty feet long or thereabouts, resembling a fusta. We
+sat with the King upon its stern, always conversing with him by signs,
+and his people stood up around us, with their swords, spears, and
+bucklers. Then the King ordered to be brought a dish of pig's flesh and
+wine. Their fashion of drinking is in this wise: they first raise their
+hands to Heaven, then take the drinking vessel in their right hand, and
+extend the left hand closed toward the people. This the King did, and
+presented to me his fist, so that I thought that he wanted to strike me;
+I did the same thing toward him; so with this ceremony, and other signs
+of friendship, we banqueted, and afterward supped with him."
+
+The Italian was a pious man, but he says:
+
+"I ate flesh on Good Friday, not being able to do otherwise, and before
+the hour of supper, I gave several things to the King, which I had
+brought. There I wrote down several things as they name them in their
+language, and when the King and the others saw me write, and I told them
+their manner of speech, they were all astonished.
+
+"When the hour for supper had come, they brought two large China dishes,
+one of which was full of rice, and the other of pig's flesh, with its
+broth and sauce. We supped with the same signs and ceremonies, and then
+went to the King's palace, which was made and built like a hay grange,
+covered with fig and palm leaves."
+
+Here the two found delightful hospitality; the house was "built on great
+timbers high above the ground, and it was necessary to go up steps and
+ladders to it. Then the King made us sit on a cane mat, with our legs
+doubled as was the custom; after half an hour there was brought a dish
+of fish roast in pieces, and ginger fresh gathered that moment and some
+wine. The eldest son of the King, who was a Prince, came where we were,
+and the King told him to sit down near us, which he did; then two dishes
+were brought, one of fish, with its sauce, and the other of rice, and
+this was done for us to eat with the Prince. My companion enjoyed the
+food and drank so much that he got drunk. They use for candles or
+torches the gum of a tree which is named anime, wrapped up in leaves of
+palms or fig trees. The King made a sign that he wished to go to rest,
+and left us with the Prince, with whom we slept on a cane mat, with some
+cushions and pillows of leaves. Next morning the King came and took me
+by the hand, and so we went to the place where we had supped, to
+breakfast, but the boat came to fetch us. The King, before we went away,
+was very gay, and kissed our hands, and we kissed his. There came with
+us a brother of his, the King of another island, accompanied by three
+men. The Captain General detained him to dine with us, and we gave him
+several things."
+
+"The King abounded in gold, and was a grand figure. In the island
+belonging to the King who came to the ship there are mines of gold,
+which they find in pieces as big as a walnut or an egg, by seeking in
+the ground. All the vessels which he makes use of are made of it, and
+also some parts of his house, which was well fitted up according to the
+custom of the country, and he was the handsomest man that we saw among
+these nations. He had very black hair coming down to his shoulders, with
+a silk cloth on his head, and two large gold rings hanging from his
+ears; he had a cloth of cotton worked with silk, which covered him from
+the waist to the knees; at his side he wore a dagger, with a long handle
+which was all of gold, his sheath was of carved wood. Besides he carried
+upon him scents of storax and benzoin. He was tawny and painted all
+over."
+
+An island where nuggets of gold as big as eggs could be found must have
+offered a tempting place of residence.
+
+But Magellan's first thought was for the good of the souls of this
+hospitable people.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+EASTER SUNDAY.--MAGELLAN PLANTS THE CROSS.
+
+
+Now begins the dawn of Christianity in the Philippines. Magellan was a
+deeply religious man, and Pigafetta was a Christian Knight. Magellan saw
+the significance of his marvelous voyage, and his soul glowed with
+gratitude to Heaven.
+
+Easter Sunday approached. Magellan had made preparations to plant a
+cross on a mountain overlooking the sea.
+
+Easter Sunday fell on the last day of March. "The Captain," to follow
+the Italian's narrative in part, "sent the Chaplain ashore early to say
+mass, and the interpreter went with him to tell the King that they were
+not coming on shore to dine with him, but only to hear the mass.
+
+"When it was time for saying mass the Captain went ashore with fifty
+men, not with their arms, but only with their swords, and dressed as
+well as each one was able to dress, and before the boats reached the
+shore our ships fired six cannon shots as a sign of peace.
+
+"At our landing the two Kings of the islands were there, and received
+the Captain in a friendly manner, and placed him between them, and then
+we went to the place prepared for saying mass, which was not far from
+the shore."
+
+The ceremonies that followed were dramatic. "Before the mass began the
+Captain threw a quantity of musk-rose water on those two Kings," is the
+picture drawn by the Italian, "and when the offertory of the mass came,
+the two Kings went to kiss the Cross like us, but they offered nothing,
+and at the elevation of the body of our Lord they were kneeling like us,
+and adored our Lord with joined hands. The ships fired all their
+artillery at the elevation of the body of our Lord."
+
+The scene that followed discloses the religious nature of Magellan and
+his joy in what was ennobling.
+
+He caused a great cross to be lifted, "with the nails and crown, to
+which the Kings made reverence." He told the Kings that he wished to
+place it in their country for their profit, "because if there came
+afterward any ships from Spain to those islands, on seeing this cross,
+they would know that we had been there, and therefore they would not
+cause them any displeasure to their persons nor their goods; and if they
+took any of their people, on showing them this sign, they would at once
+let them go."
+
+[Illustration: Mount Mayon, on the Island of Luzun.]
+
+The Captain continued his address to the Kings in the same spirit. He
+told them that it was necessary that this cross "should be placed on the
+summit of the highest mountain in their country, so that seeing it every
+day and night they might adore it." He further told them that if they
+did thus, "neither thunder, lightning, nor the tempest could do them
+hurt." This he believed to be true. The Kings "thanked the Captain, and
+said they would do it willingly." The Captain asked them how they
+worshiped. They answered that "they did not perform any other adoration,
+but only joined their hands, looking up to Heaven, and that they called
+their God Aba. Hearing this, the Captain was very joyful; on seeing
+that, the first King raised his hands to the sky and said that he wished
+it were possible for him to be able to show the affection which he felt
+toward him."
+
+The elevation of the Cross followed.
+
+"After dinner we all returned in our dress coats, and we went together
+with the two Kings to the middle of the highest mountain we could find,
+and there the Cross was planted."
+
+Important information followed.
+
+"After the two Kings and the Captain rested themselves, and, while
+conversing, I asked where was the best port for obtaining victuals. They
+replied that there were three; that is to say, Ceylon, Zubu, and
+Calaghan; but that Zubu was the largest and of the most traffic. Then
+the Kings offered to give him pilots to go to those ports, for which he
+thanked them, and deliberated to go there, for his ill-fortune would
+have it so. After the cross had been planted on the mountain, each one
+said the Paternoster and Ave Maria, and adored it, and the Kings did the
+like. Then he went down below to where their boats were. There the kings
+had brought some of the fruit called cocos and other things to make a
+collation and to refresh us."
+
+The fleet sailed away soon after Easter Monday, the Captain having
+secured native pilots from the Kings. One of the Kings volunteered to
+act himself as pilot, and this service was accepted.
+
+Pigafetta describes the use of betel:
+
+"This kind of people are gentle, and go naked, and are painted. They
+wear a piece of cloth made from a tree, like a linen cloth, round their
+body to cover their natural parts; they are great drinkers. The women
+are dressed in tree cloth from their waists downward; their hair is
+black, and reaches down to the ground; they wear certain gold rings in
+their ears. These people chew most of their time a fruit which they call
+areca (betel), which is something of the shape of a pear; they cut it in
+four quarters, and after they have chewed it for a long time they spit
+it out, from which afterward they have their mouths very red. They find
+themselves the better from the use of this fruit because it refreshes
+them much, for this country is very hot, so that they could not live
+without it."
+
+The use of the areca, or betel nut, is still common in all the
+Philippine Islands.
+
+The fleet next went to Maestral, "passing through five islands--Ceylon,
+Bohol, Canighan, Baibai, and Satighan. In the Island of Satighan was a
+kind of bird called barbarstigly, which was as large as an eagle. Of
+these we killed only one," says our narrator, "because it was late. We
+ate it, and it had the taste of a fowl. There were also in this island
+doves, tortoises, parrots, and certain black birds as large as a fowl,
+with a long tail. They lay eggs as large as those of a goose. These they
+put a good length under the sand in the sun, where they were hatched by
+the great heat, which the heated sand gives out; and when these birds
+were hatched they pushed up the sand and came out. These eggs are good
+to eat.
+
+"From this island of Mazzubua to that of Satighan there are twenty
+leagues, and on leaving Satighan we went by the west; but the King of
+Mazzubua could not follow us; therefore we waited for him near three
+islands; that is to say, Polo, Ticobon, and Pozzon. When the King
+arrived he was much astonished at our navigation; the Captain General
+bade him come on board his ship with some of his principal people, at
+which they were much pleased. Thus we went to Zubu, which is fifteen
+leagues off from Satighan."
+
+The story of the Italian here, which we so freely use, leaves in the
+mind a picture of the first voyage among the Philippines. The habits of
+the people in these same islands are not greatly changed, but we hardly
+find there now as tractable kings as were those to whom Magellan left
+the Cross.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+CHRISTIANITY AND TRADE ESTABLISHED.--THE BAPTISM OF THE QUEEN.
+
+
+On April 9th they entered the Port of Zubu, on approaching which they
+saw houses in the trees. The Captain hung out his flags in the clear
+sunny air. He caused his artillery to be fired, which greatly alarmed
+the natives. He then sent an interpreter to the King.
+
+The interpreter found the people in terror at the thunder of the guns.
+He assured the King that the salute had been made in his honor. Then the
+interpreter said:
+
+"My master is the greatest King in all the world. We are sailing at his
+command to discover the Spice Islands. But we have heard of your fame,
+and the fame of your country, and have come to visit you."
+
+"You are welcome," said the King, "but you must pay me tribute."
+
+"My master," said the interpreter, "is the greatest of all Kings, and we
+can pay tribute to no one."
+
+The King feasted them, and they entered into negotiations of peace with
+the King of Zubu.
+
+At Zubu Magellan turned missionary with no common zeal.
+
+He told the native princes that his visit was for the sake of peace.
+
+We are told that the "Captain General sat in a chair of red velvet, and
+near him were the principal men of the ships sitting in leather chairs,
+and the others sat on the ground on mats.
+
+"The Captain," says the narrative, "spoke at length on the subject of
+peace, and prayed God to confirm it in Heaven. These people replied that
+they had never heard such words as these which the Captain had spoken to
+them, and they took great pleasure in hearing them. The Captain, seeing
+then that those people listened willingly to what was said to them, and
+that they gave good answers, began to say a great many good things to
+induce them to become Christians.
+
+"He told them how God had made Heaven and earth and all other things in
+the world, and that he had commanded that every one should render honor
+and obedience to his father and mother, and that whoever did otherwise
+was condemned to eternal fire."
+
+His teaching bore immediate fruit.
+
+"The people heard these things willingly, and besought the Captain to
+leave them two men to teach and show them the Christian faith, and they
+would entertain them well with great honor. To this the Captain answered
+that for the moment he could not leave any of his people, but that if
+they wished to be Christians that his priest would baptize them, and
+that another time he would bring priests and teachers to teach them the
+faith."
+
+His manner of teaching reveals his heart:
+
+"The people told him that they wished to consult their King in regard to
+becoming Christians." The friends of the Captain "wept for the joy which
+they felt at the good-will of these people, and the Captain told them
+not to become Christians 'from fear of us, or to please us, but that if
+they wished to become Christian they must do it willingly, and for the
+love of God, for even though they should not become Christian, no
+displeasure would be done them, but those who became Christian would be
+more loved and better treated than the others.' Then they all cried out
+with one voice that they did not wish to become Christians from fear,
+nor from complaisance, but of their free will."
+
+Here the true character of the man again appears--few Christian
+explorers ever made so noble a record. His sincerity won the hearts of
+the natives:
+
+"At last they said they did not know what more to answer to so many good
+and beautiful words which he spoke to them, but that they placed
+themselves in his hands, and that he should do with them as with his
+own servants."
+
+The next scene is ideal:
+
+"Then the Captain, with tears in his eyes, embraced them, and, taking
+the hand of the Prince and that of the King, said to him that by the
+faith he had in God, and to his master the Emperor, and by the habit of
+St. James which he wore, he promised them to cause them to have
+perpetual peace with the King of Spain, at which the Prince and the
+others promised him the same."
+
+It is a pleasure to follow such a narrative as Pigafetta here writes in
+illustration of the character of a true Christian Knight. Compare this
+narrative with the history of Pizarro, Cortes, and De Soto. Magellan was
+a Las Casas, a Marquette, a La Salle.
+
+The next incident told by Pigafetta has as fine a touch as a portrayal
+of character. It relates to a message which Magellan sent to the King,
+with a present.
+
+"When we came to the town we found the King of Zubu at his palace,
+sitting on the ground on a mat made of palm, with many people about him.
+
+"He had a very heavy chain around his neck, and two gold rings hung in
+his ears with precious stones.
+
+"He was eating tortoise eggs in two china dishes, and he had four
+vessels full of palm wine, which he drank with a cane pipe. We made our
+obeisance, and presented to him what the Captain had sent him, and told
+him, through the interpreter that the present _was not as a return for
+his present which he had sent to the Captain, but for the affection
+which he bore him_. This done, his people told him all the good words
+and explanations of peace and religion which he had spoken to them."
+
+We now behold Magellan in a new attitude, as a missionary teacher, a
+John the Baptist in the wilderness. Pigafetta thus describes the scene:
+
+"On Sunday morning, the fourteenth day of April, we went on shore, forty
+men, of whom two were armed, who marched before us, following the
+standard of our King Emperor. When we landed the ships discharged all
+their artillery, and from fear of it the people ran away in all
+directions.
+
+"Magellan and the King embraced one another, and then joyously we went
+near the scaffolding, where the Captain General and the King sat on two
+chairs, one covered with red, the other with violet velvet. The
+principal men sat on cushions, and others on mats, after the fashion of
+the country.
+
+"Then the Captain began to speak to the King through the interpreter to
+incite him to the faith of Jesus Christ, and told him that if he wished
+to be a good Christian, as he had said the day before, that he must burn
+all the idols of his country, and, instead of them, place a cross, and
+that every one should worship it every day on their knees, and their
+hands joined to Heaven; and he showed him how he ought every day to make
+the sign of the Cross.
+
+"To that the King and all his people answered that they would obey the
+commands of the Captain and do all that he told them. The Captain took
+the King by the hand, and they walked about on the scaffolding, and when
+he was baptized he said that he would name him Don Charles, as the
+Emperor his sovereign was named; and he named the Prince Don Fernand,
+after the brother of the Emperor, and the King of Mazzava, Jehan; to the
+Moor he gave the name of Christopher, and to the others each a name of
+his fancy. Thus, before mass, there were fifty men baptized."
+
+The baptism of the Queen followed.
+
+"Our Chaplain and some of us went on shore to baptize the Queen. She
+came with forty ladies, and we conducted them onto the scaffolding; then
+made her sit down on a cushion, and her women around her, until the
+priest was ready. During that time they showed her an image of our Lady,
+of wood, holding her little child, which was very well made, and a
+cross. When she saw it, she had a greater desire to be a Christian, and,
+asking for baptism, she was baptized and named Jehanne, like the mother
+of the Emperor. The wife of the Prince, daughter of this Queen, had the
+name of Catherine, the Queen of Mazzava Isabella, and to the others each
+their name.
+
+"That day we baptised eight hundred persons of men, women, and
+children. The Queen was young and handsome, covered with a black and
+white sheet; she had the mouth and nails very red, and wore on her head
+a large hat made of leaves of palm, with a crown over it made of the
+same leaves, like that of the Pope. After that she begged us to give her
+the little wooden boy to put in the place of the idols. This we did, and
+she went away. In the evening the King and Queen, with several of their
+people, came to the sea beach, where the Captain had some of the large
+artillery fired, in which they took great pleasure. The Captain and the
+King called one another brother."
+
+The "little boy" spoken of was an image of the infant Christ. The figure
+was preserved until the year 1598, when the Spaniards sent missionaries
+to the place who gave it a place in a shrine and named a city for it.
+
+The naming of the Queen at her baptism for poor Juana, or "Crazy Jane,"
+the incapable mother of Charles V, who was watching beside her dead
+husband in Granada, and who had signed the commission of Magellan by
+proxy, completes a tale of missionary work in a somewhat ideal way. If
+these people did not maintain their faith, the work reveals the
+intention of Magellan, and shows the nobility of character of the
+Christian Knight.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+HALCYON DAYS.
+
+
+These were indeed days of joy. The glory of them grew. All the
+inhabitants of the island came to be baptized. Magellan went on shore
+daily to hear mass.
+
+It was Pigafetta who gave to the Queen the image of the infant Christ,
+which became historical.
+
+On one of the occasions that Magellan went on shore to hear mass he met
+the Queen, who appeared in a veil of silk and gold. He sprinkled over
+her some rose water and musk, and noticed that she cherished the image
+of the infant Christ.
+
+"You do well," said he. "Put it in the place where your idols were; it
+will keep in your mind the Son of God."
+
+"I will cherish it forever," said the veiled Queen.
+
+She seems to have kept her word.
+
+The joy of these scenes reached their height, when the King of Seba
+swore fealty to the King of Spain.
+
+The scene of the conclusion of this ceremony was knightly indeed, and
+again reveals the heart of Magellan.
+
+He, seeing a good spirit, of the King of Seba, resolved to swear fealty
+of eternal friendship to him. Only a Christian Knight would have dreamed
+of such a thing.
+
+"I swear," he said, "by the image of our Lady, the Virgin, by the love
+of my Emperor, and by the insignia, on my heart, that I will ever be
+faithful to you, O King of Seba!"
+
+Here the true character of the statesman as well as teacher appeared.
+History records few acts more noble. Magellan sought the good of
+mankind.
+
+There was one officer on the ships whose soul, like that of Pigafetta's,
+must have been in all these benevolent efforts.
+
+The expedition was tarrying long, seeking the glory of the Cross rather
+than the gold and spices. There were impatient hearts in Seville.
+
+Mesquita in his still prison, with the world against him, dreamed of
+Magellan, Del Cano, and the Italian historian. The half world separated
+them now.
+
+In his dreams Mesquita saw the fleet coming back again, and he heard the
+shouting of the people and the ringing of the bells. The star of hope in
+his heart did not fail.
+
+"Padre," he said, "the day of my vindication will come."
+
+But the seasons came and went, and the light changed color in the window
+of his cell, and the birds sang their notes in the trees in spring and
+left their empty nests to silence in the retreating summer. The great
+Cathedral grew, and the achievement of Charles had begun to excite the
+world.
+
+We now come to the tragedy of this wonderful expedition; to the tempest
+that rose out of the calm. The transition from these ideal scenes to
+what is to follow is sudden indeed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+THE DEATH OF MAGELLAN.
+
+
+Magellan, as we have shown, had sought not wealth, nor glory, but the
+good of the world in his life. He was ever ready to put his own interest
+aside in the service of that which was best for others. He had sought
+welfare and not wealth, service and not self, and his life was about to
+end in the unselfish spirit in which it had lived.
+
+On Friday, April 26, 1520, Zula, one of the great chiefs of the Island
+of Matan, sent to Magellan one of his sons and two goats as a present.
+He had promised his service to the King of Spain, but this surrender of
+royalty had been opposed by another chief named Silapalapa. This chief
+had declared with native spirit that Matan would never submit to the
+Spanish King.
+
+"But I can overthrow Silapalapa," ran the Matan chief's message, "if I
+can have your help. Send me a boatload of men. Let them come to-morrow
+night."
+
+Magellan received the message and the presents in a friendly feeling,
+and resolved to follow the chief's lead.
+
+"I will not send another on this expedition so full of peril," he
+thought. "I will lead it myself."
+
+So he set out from Zubu to Matan at midnight, with sixty men, in
+corselets and helmets. He took with him the Christian King, and the
+chief men of his new adherents.
+
+The boats moved silently over the tropic waters under the moon and
+stars. Magellan had become a happy man. He could not doubt that he was
+on his way to new victories. Pigafetta, the Italian, always true to the
+Admiral, was with him.
+
+The expedition arrived at Matan just before the dawn of the morning.
+
+The mellow nature of Magellan came back to him on this short night
+journey. He had no wish to slaughter men.
+
+So he spoke to a Moorish merchant.
+
+"Go to the natives," he said, "and tell them if they will recognize a
+Christian King as their sovereign I will become their friend. If not,
+that they must feel our lances."
+
+The Moorish ambassador was landed, and met the chiefs.
+
+"Go tell your master," they said, "that if he has lances, so have we,
+and our lances are hardened by fire."
+
+At the red dawn of the morning, the Admiral gave the order to
+disembark, and forty-nine men leaped into the water. They faced a fierce
+army, some fifteen hundred in number.
+
+Magellan divided his followers into two bands. The musketeers and cross
+bowmen began the attack. But the firing was not effective. The black
+army moved down upon them like a cloud, throwing javelins and spears
+hardened with fire. Some of them singled out Magellan. They threw at him
+lances pointed with iron.
+
+Magellan, seeing that the odds were against him in such a contest,
+sought to break their lines by firing their houses. Some thirty houses
+burst into flame.
+
+The sight of the fire maddened the natives and rendered them furious.
+They discovered that the legs of the invaders were exposed, and that
+they could be wounded there with poisoned arrows.
+
+A poisoned arrow was aimed at Magellan. It pierced him in the leg. He
+felt the wound, and knew its import.
+
+He gave orders to retreat. A panic ensued, and his men took to flight.
+
+The air was filled with arrows, spears, stones, and mud.
+
+The Spaniards tried to escape to the boat. The islanders followed them
+and directed their fury to Magellan. They struck him twice on his
+helmet.
+
+Magellan's thought now was not for himself, but for the safety of his
+men.
+
+He stood at his own post fighting that they might make safe their
+retreat.
+
+He thus broke the assault for nearly an hour, until he was almost left
+alone.
+
+An Indian suddenly rushed down toward him having a cane lance. He thrust
+this into his face. Magellan wounded the Indian, and attempted to draw
+his sword. But he had received a javelin wound in his arm, and his
+strength failed.
+
+Seeing him falter, the Indian rushed upon him and brought him down to
+the earth with a rude sword.
+
+The Indians now fell upon him and ran him through with lances.
+
+He tried to rise up, to see if his men were safe. He did not call for
+assistance, but to the last sought to secure the safety of his men. In
+fact, he never seemed to so much as think of himself in the whole
+contest. It was thus that his life went out, and his heart ceased to
+beat. He was left dead on the sand, on April 27, 1521. The natives
+refused to surrender his body. Eight of his own men and four Indians,
+who had become Christians, perished with him.
+
+[Illustration: The death of Magellan.]
+
+There was one man who was true to the Admiral to the end. He was wounded
+with him, but survived. He it was that saw that the Admiral had
+forgotten himself at the hour of the final conflict. It was Pigafetta,
+the Italian, whose narrative we are following.
+
+This hero of the pen says of him to whom he gave his heart:
+
+"One of his principal virtues was constancy in the most adverse
+fortune."
+
+"It was God who made me the messenger of the new heavens and new earth,
+and told me where to find them," said Columbus. "Maps, charts, and
+mathematical knowledge had nothing to do with the case."
+
+As sublime an inspiration is seen in the words of Pigafetta in regard to
+Magellan:
+
+"_No one gave to him the example how to encompass the globe._" His sight
+was the inner eye, the pure vision of a consecrated purpose in life.
+
+No hero of the sea has ever been more noble! His purpose in life was
+everything; he had the faith of a Christian Knight; he was as nothing to
+himself, but to others all, and he died giving his own body for a shield
+to his men. His name will always be associated with what is glorious in
+the history of the Philippines.
+
+Magellan was dead, but a good purpose lives in others. Magellan dead,
+Del Cano yet lives, and the Italian historian has other scenes to
+record.
+
+The farol of Magellan will go on; it will never cease to shine, and the
+cast-out name of the Christian Knight will become a fixed star amid the
+lights that have inspired the world.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI.
+
+THE SPICE ISLANDS.--WONDERFUL BIRDS.--CLOVES, CINNAMON, NUTMEGS,
+GINGER.--THE SHIPS OVERLOADED.
+
+
+The massacre at Matan caused the Spaniards to lose credit in the eyes of
+the natives. The King of Seba turned against them, thus throwing a
+shadow on the glory of Magellan's missionary work. The Spaniards were,
+however, much to blame for the change that took place in the King's
+heart.
+
+Their ships were becoming unseaworthy.
+
+They were reduced to two ships, the Victoria and the Trinidad, and these
+shaped their course for the Moluccas, or Spice Islands, by the way of
+Borneo. Del Cano began to represent the spirit of Magellan among the
+crews.
+
+They came to the Bornean city, Brunei, "a collection of houses built on
+piles over the water, where were twenty-five thousand fires or
+families." On the shore was the palace of a voluptuous Sultan, its walls
+hung with brocades of silk. Here was also one of the most curious
+markets in all the world, carried on at high tide, when there gathered
+a great army of canoes.
+
+On November 8, 1521, the two ships anchored off Tidor on the Spice
+Islands, saluting the King of the place with a broadside.
+
+They concluded a treaty of peace with the King, and began to load the
+two ships with spice, and especially with cloves, a kind of spice at
+that time regarded as a great luxury in Spain.
+
+If Pigafetta had desired above all things to see the wonders of the
+ocean world, he must again have been gratified here at some of the
+presents sent to the ships by the natives. Columbus had brought to Spain
+gorgeous parrots or macaws. But the King of Batchian sent to him a bird
+whose plumage surpassed anything that he had ever seen.
+
+"It is the bird of Paradise," said the agent of the royal almoner.
+
+The Italian did not doubt it. He wished to learn the history of this
+superb inhabitant of the air.
+
+He did in a way that excited his wonder beyond measure.
+
+The bird, after the Mohammedan account, was born in Paradise. It came
+down from Heaven where dwelt departed souls, who had died true to the
+Moslem faith.
+
+These birds were found dead, and they had no feet. If Pigafetta inquired
+the cause of this, he doubtless was answered:
+
+"They do not need feet; they never alight on the ground."
+
+But as greatly as the Chevalier must have wondered, he was not induced
+to accept the Moslem faith.
+
+They overcrowded the ships while receiving the favors of the Sultan of
+Tidor.
+
+An account of their voyage about the Spice Islands, "most delightful to
+read," as we are told in the title, was written by one Maximilianus
+Transylvanus, from which we gather the following incidents (Hakluyt
+Society) of great pearls and strange men:
+
+"They came to the shores of the Island of Solo, where they heard that
+there were pearls as big as dove's eggs, and sometimes as hen's eggs,
+but which can only be fished up from the very deepest sea. Our men
+brought no large pearl, because the season of the year did not allow of
+the fishery. But they testify that they had taken an oyster in that
+region, the flesh of which weighed forty-seven pounds. For which reason
+I could easily believe that pearls of that great size are found there;
+for it is clearly proved that pearls are the product of shellfish. And
+to omit nothing, our men constantly affirm that the islanders of Porne
+told him that the King wore in his crown two pearls of the size of a
+goose's egg.
+
+"Hence they went to the Island of Gilo, where they saw men with ears so
+long and pendulous that they reached to their shoulders. When our men
+were mightily astonished at this, they learnt from the natives that
+there was another island not far off where the men had ears not only
+pendulous, but so long and broad that one of them would cover the whole
+head if they wanted it (_cum exusu esset_). But our men, who sought not
+monsters but spices, neglecting this nonsense, went straight to the
+Moluccas, and they discovered them eight months after their Admiral,
+Magellan, had fallen in Matan. The islands are five in number, and are
+called Tarante, Muthil, Thidore, Mare, and Matthien; some on this side
+some on the other, and some upon the equinoctial line.
+
+"One produces cloves, another nutmegs, and another cinnamon. All are
+near to each other, but small and rather narrow."
+
+The world to-day thinks little of spices, for commerce has made common
+the luxuries of the Indian Ocean. Cloves, nutmegs, allspice, cinnamon,
+ginger are found in every home in all civilized lands, and even children
+make few inquiries about them.
+
+This was not so in the early days of the Viceroys of India. Spices which
+were gathered and sold by Arabian merchants, were held in Europe as a
+gift of Arabia, and esteemed to be the greatest, or among the greatest
+of luxuries. A ship laden with spices was hailed in the ports of the
+Iberian peninsula as next to a ship freighted with gold, as the Golden
+Hynde was welcomed in the days of Sir Francis Drake. It used to be said
+that the odors of the spice ships from the East Indies could be breathed
+through the breezes that wafted them toward the land.
+
+The principal Spice Islands were the Moluccas, or the islands of the
+East India Archipelago between Celebes on the west and New Guinea on the
+east, Timor on the south and the open Pacific Sea on the north. They are
+distributed over a wide ocean area. Of these the Moluccas form the
+principal group. Here are the paradises of the seas.
+
+It was to these islands where could be procured the products of "Araby
+the Blessed" that Magellan had hoped to find a new way. There were
+brighter shores than Spain, and to these he sought the shortest routes
+over which ships could travel.
+
+The Peruvian adventurers wished to find gold; the voyagers to the
+Antilles, magical waters and new productions of the earth; but
+Magellan's dream was of the spiceries of the Indian seas. They all found
+what they sought, except Ponce de Leon, who hoped to find the Fountain
+of Eternal Youth.
+
+Transylvanus speaks of another wonderful bird that only alighted at
+death, and whose feathers were believed to possess magic powers.
+
+"The kings of Marmin began to believe that souls were immortal a few
+years ago, induced by no other argument than that they saw that a
+certain most beautiful small bird never rested upon the ground nor upon
+anything that grew upon it; but they sometimes saw it fall dead upon the
+ground from the sky. And as the Mohammedans, who traveled to those parts
+for commercial purposes, told them that this bird was born in Paradise,
+and that Paradise was the abode of the souls of those who had died,
+these kings (reguli) embraced the sect of Mohammed, because it promised
+wonderful things concerning this abode of souls. But they call the bird
+Mamuco Diata, and they hold it in such reverence and religious esteem
+that they believe that by it their kings are safe in war, even though
+they, according to custom, are placed in the forefront of battle."
+
+He continues his narrative:
+
+"But, our men having carefully inspected the position of the Moluccas
+and of each separate island, and also having inquired about the habits
+of the kings, went to Thedori, because they learnt, that in that island
+the supply of cloves was far above that of the others, and that its King
+also surpassed the other kings in wisdom and humanity. So, having
+prepared their gifts they land, and salute the King, and they offer the
+presents as if they had been sent by Caesar. He, having received the
+presents kindly, looks up to Heaven, and says:
+
+"'I have known now for two years from the course of the stars, that you
+were coming to seek these lands, sent by the most mighty King of Kings.
+Wherefore your coming is the more pleasant and grateful to me, as I had
+been forewarned of it by the signification of the stars.
+
+"'And, as I know that nothing ever happens to any man which has not been
+fixed long before by the decree of fate and the stars, I will not be the
+one to attempt to withstand either the fates or the signification of the
+stars, but willingly and of good cheer, will henceforth lay aside the
+royal pomp and will consider myself as managing the administration of
+this island only in the name of your King. Wherefore draw your ships
+into port, and order the rest of your comrades to land; so that now at
+last, after such a long tossing upon the seas, and so many dangers, you
+may enjoy the pleasures of the land and refresh your bodies. And think
+not but that you have arrived at your King's kingdom.'
+
+"Having said this, the King, laying aside his crown, embraced them one
+by one, and ordered whatever food that land afforded to be brought. Our
+men being overjoyed at this, returned to their comrades, and told them
+what had happened. They, pleased above measure with the friendly
+behavior and kindness of the King, take possession of the island. And
+when their health was completely restored, in a few days, by the King's
+munificence, they sent envoys to the other kings, to examine the wealth
+of the islands, and to conciliate the other kings."
+
+His description of the clove trees is very pleasing:
+
+"Tirante was the nearest, and also the smallest, of the islands; for it
+has a circumference of a little more than six Italian miles. Matthien is
+next to it, and it, too, is small. These three produce a great quantity
+of cloves, but more every fourth year than the other three. These trees
+only grow on steep rocks, and that so thickly as frequently to form a
+grove. This tree is very like a laurel (or bay tree) in leaf, closeness
+of growth, and height; and the gariophile, which they call clove from
+its likeness to a nail (clavus), grows on the tip of each separate twig.
+First a bud, and then a flower, just like the orange flower is produced.
+
+"The pointed part of the clove is fixed at the extreme end of the
+branch, and then growing slightly longer, it forms a spike. It is at
+first red, but soon gets black by the heat of the sun. The natives keep
+the plantations of these trees separate, as we do our vines. They bury
+the cloves in pits till they are taken away by the traders."
+
+He also describes the cinnamon tree:
+
+"Muthil, the fourth island, is not larger than the rest, and it produces
+cinnamon. The tree is full of shoots, and in other respects barren; it
+delights in dryness, and is very like the tree which bears pomegranates.
+The bark of this splits under the influence of the sun's heat, and is
+stripped off the wood; and, after drying a little in the sun, it is
+cinnamon."
+
+Also the nutmeg tree:
+
+"Near to this is another island, called Bada, larger and more ample than
+the Moluccas. In this grows the nutmeg, the tree of which is tall and
+spreading, and is rather like the walnut tree, and its nut, too, grows
+like the walnut; for it is protected by a double husk, at first like a
+furry calix, and under this a thin membrane, which embraces the nutlike
+network. This is called the Muscat flower with us, but by the Spaniards
+mace, and is a noble and wholesome spice. The other covering is a woody
+shell, like that of a hazelnut, and in that, as we have already said, is
+the nutmeg."
+
+And ginger:
+
+"Ginger grows here and there in each of the islands of the archipelago.
+It sometimes grows by sowing, and sometimes spontaneously; but that
+which is sown is the more valuable. Its grass is like that of the
+saffron, and its root is almost the same too, and that is ginger."
+
+While sailing among these bowery ocean gardens, and gathering their
+odorous products, the poetic Maximilianus was presented with one of the
+immortal birds that protected a hero in battle, "the bird of God."
+
+He thus speaks of the rare present:
+
+"Our men were kindly treated by the chiefs in turn, and they, too,
+submitted freely to the rule of Caesar, like the King of Thidori. But the
+Spaniards, who had but two ships, resolved to bring some of each
+(spice) home, but to load the ships with cloves, because the crop of
+that was the most abundant that year, and our ships could contain a
+greater quantity of this kind of spice. Having, therefore, loaded the
+ships with cloves, and having received letters and presents for Caesar
+from the Kings, they make ready for their departure. The letters were
+full of submission and respect. The gifts were Indian swords, and things
+of that sort. But, best of all, the Mamuco Diata; that is, the bird of
+God, by which they believe themselves to be safe and invincible in
+battle. Of which five were sent, and one I obtained from the Captain
+(_congran prieghi_), which I send to your reverence, not that your
+reverence may think yourself safe from treachery and the sword by means
+of it, as they profess to do, but that you may be pleased with its
+rareness and beauty. I send also some cinnamon and nutmeg and cloves, to
+show that our spices are not only not worse, but more valuable than
+those which the Venetians and Portuguese bring, because they are
+fresher."
+
+He also relates the disasters which fell to one of the overloaded ships:
+
+"When our men had set sail from Thedori, one of the ships, and that the
+larger one, having sprung a leak, began to make water, so that it became
+necessary to put back to Thedori. When the Spaniards saw that this
+mischief could not be remedied without great labor and much time, they
+agreed that the other ship should sail to the Cape of Cattigara, and
+afterward through the deep as far as possible from the coast of India,
+lest it should be seen by the Portuguese, and until they saw the
+promontory of Africa which projects beyond the tropic of Capricorn, and
+to which the Portuguese have given the name of Good Hope; and from that
+point the passage to Spain would be easy.
+
+"But as soon as the other ship was refitted it should direct its course
+through the archipelago, and that vast ocean toward the shores of the
+continent which we mentioned before, till it found that coast which was
+in the neighborhood of Darien, and where the southern sea was separated
+from the western, in which are the Spanish Islands, by a very narrow
+piece of land. So the ship sailed again from Thedori, and, having gone
+twelve degrees on the other side of the equinoctial line, they did not
+find the Cape of Cattigara, which Ptolemy supposed to extend even beyond
+the equinoctial line; and when they had traversed an immense space of
+sea, they came to the Cape of Good Hope and afterward to the Islands of
+the Hesperides.
+
+"And, as this ship let in water, being much knocked about by this long
+voyage, the sailors, many of whom had died by hardships by land and by
+sea, could not clear the ship of water. Wherefore they landed upon one
+of the islands, which is named after Saint James, to buy slaves.
+
+"But as our men had no money, they offered, sailor fashion, cloves for
+the slaves. This matter having come to the ears of the Portuguese who
+were in command of the island, thirteen of our men were thrown into
+prison. The rest were eighteen in number.
+
+"Frightened by the strangeness of this behavior, they started straight
+for Spain, leaving their shipmates behind them. And so, in the sixteenth
+month after leaving Thedori, they arrived safe and sound on the 6th of
+September, at the port near Hispalis (Seville). Worthier, indeed, are
+our sailors of eternal fame than the Argonauts who sailed with Jason to
+Colchis. And much more worthy was their ship of being placed among the
+stars than that old Argo; for that only sailed from Greece through
+Pontus, but ours from Hispalis to the South; and after that, through the
+whole West and the Southern hemisphere, penetrating into the East, and
+again returned to the West."
+
+His subscription is interesting:
+
+
+"I commend myself most humbly to your reverence. Given at Vallisoleti,
+on the 23d of October, 1522.
+
+    "Your most reverend and illustrious lordship's
+        "Most humble and constant servant,
+                "MAXIMILIANUS TRANSYLVANUS."
+
+When the spice ship began to fill with water, the officers sent for
+native divers. But these, although very skillful, could not find the
+place or the cause of the leak.
+
+Let us change our view to a different scene, across the wide tropical
+world.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII.
+
+MESQUITA IN PRISON.
+
+
+While the little ship Victoria, which had sought for Mesquita in vain,
+was sailing around the world, and was returning laden with spice,
+Mesquita himself remained shut out from the sun by the shadows of prison
+walls. His lite became more and more silent and neglected.
+
+We know not by what authority he was held in a dungeon for advising the
+supposed crimes of his cousin Magellan. It could not have been that of
+Juana, who was still watching over the tomb from which she expected her
+husband to rise, nor by good Cardinal Ximenes, and possibly not by
+Charles V himself, but perhaps by one of his ministers. It may have been
+by the direction of Charles, for his imprisonment implies doubt;
+otherwise with such an array of testimony against him, we might expect
+he would have been executed.
+
+Two years had passed over beautiful Seville, and the India House there
+must have began to doubt the story of Gormez as not one of the other
+ships returned. These ships might have been cast away in the wintry
+seas that Gormez and his crew described, or the flag of Spain that the
+daring Portuguese had set toward the Spice Islands of the East by the
+way of the South might be seen again some day, rising over the
+Guadalquivir.
+
+Mesquita believed in his cousin Magellan; not only in him as a true man,
+but as one who had a divine calling to fulfill; as one whom destiny had
+allotted to lead the decisive events of mankind. He still felt that he
+would prove another Columbus or Vasco da Gama.
+
+The two priests whom Magellan had marooned had honestly thought Magellan
+mad. But Mesquita had his own confessor, and we can easily fancy how the
+prisoner must have opened his heart to him.
+
+"Padre, I am misunderstood," we can hear him say. "Time tells the truth
+about all men. Time vindicates all.
+
+"Padre, some messenger from Magellan will come back again. Time weighs
+all events, and life is self revealing. The heralds will blow their
+trumpets then, and the bells will ring.
+
+"Padre, they do well to prolong my life. Some day my prison doors will
+open wide, and I shall ride through the streets of Seville, and those
+who doubt me now will hail me as a heart that, was always true to a
+Knight whose heart will be found true to the Emperor!"
+
+The lamp of his faith burned clear and odorous oil. He had a quiet
+conscience. But how must the conspirators have felt during these
+uncertain months? The ships did not return. That seemed to favor one
+view of the madness of Magellan, and yet it did not leave them at ease.
+There were some who reasoned: If Magellan were indeed mad on his own
+ship, why might not one or more of the other ships have returned? If the
+other ships had been loyal to the lantern of Magellan, and had kept
+together, might the fleet not return again? Should it return what a
+stigma would be cast on the characters of the cowardly mutineers! In
+such a case Mesquita would become a hero, and the latter would have to
+flee from their own names.
+
+Charles V was in his promise of glory now. In 1519, as we have before
+stated, he had been elected Emperor of Germany; and in 1520 he had been
+crowned at Aix la Chapelle, amid great rejoicings, and the Pope had
+bestowed upon him the title of Caesar or Emperor of the Roman world. He
+was called "Caesar" in the chronicles of the times.
+
+Poor Juana took no interest in any of these pomps of her son, as they
+shook the world. Her ears were deaf to them, her heart was dead to them
+all. The mother of "Caesar" was almost the only person in Spain who
+hailed not the glory of Caesar.
+
+Amid all the splendors of his court the dream of Magellan must still
+have haunted the mind of the new Caesar. He had accepted the story
+brought by the returned ship; but Magellan the madman might come back
+again. Madmen had returned before.
+
+The period was a wonderful one. Printing, the art of which had been but
+recently developed after the discovery of Gutenberg, was revealing its
+great possibilities. These were the times of Francis in France, and of
+Henry VIII in England. The Reformation was overturning Germany. The
+whole world seemed to be changing.
+
+If the ships of Magellan were to find a new way to the East, and were to
+sail around the world, what surprising events might follow!
+
+So, night after night, Mesquita could but hope and ask:
+
+"Where is the lantern of Magellan now?"
+
+Seville was full of maritime prosperity. The tuneful bells in her many
+churches had frequent occasions to ring out for national festivals. The
+sailors loved these services, and especially those that celebrated the
+triumphs of the Virgin whose dominion had become, as was supposed, the
+sea, and who was hailed as the "Star of the Deep."
+
+The happy crowds on their way to the rejoicing churches must have passed
+the prison walls where Mesquita was detained. Life indeed must have been
+mysterious to him. The world in which he deserved so much honor and
+happiness was shut out from him--even the sun and stars.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII.
+
+STRANGE STORIES.--THE WISE OLD WOMEN.--THE WALKING LEAVES.--THE HAUNTED
+SANDALWOOD TREES.--THE EMPEROR OF CHINA.--THE LITTLE BOY AND THE GIANT
+BIRD.
+
+
+Pigafetta was no Munchausen, but he had a love of marvelous stories, and
+there never was a voyage that offered to a European a greater number of
+curious events and superstitions. Some of the incidents that excited our
+Chevalier's wonder were natural events which have been since explained.
+The superstitious legends of the people were, however, for the most part
+but the growth of folklore through the imagination.
+
+One of these accounts relates to the wise old women who prepared the
+sacrifices of the wild boar as offerings to the sun. It shows how small
+may be the real meaning of pompous and pretentious ceremonies. The rites
+took place in the Philippines.
+
+Says Pigafetta in his narrative prepared for the Grand Master of the
+Knight of Rhodes:
+
+"Since I have spoken of the idols, it may please your illustrious
+Highness to have an account of the ceremony with which, in this island,
+they bless the pig. They begin by sounding some great drums (tamburi);
+they then bring three large dishes; two are filled with cakes of rice
+and cooked millet rolled up in leaves, with roast fish; in the third are
+Cambay cloths and two strips of palm cloth. A cloth of Cambay is spread
+out on the ground; then two old women come, each of whom has in her hand
+a reed trumpet. They step upon the cloth and make an obeisance to the
+sun; they then clothe themselves with the above-mentioned cloths. The
+first of these puts on her head a handkerchief which she ties on her
+forehead so as to make two horns, and taking another handkerchief in her
+hand, dances and sounds her trumpet and invokes the sun.
+
+"The second old woman takes one of the strips of palm cloth and dances,
+and also sounds her trumpet; thus they dance and sound their trumpets
+for a short space of time, saying several things to the sun. The first
+old woman then drops the handkerchief she has in her hand and takes the
+other strip of cloth, and both together sounding their trumpets, dance
+for a long time round the pig which is bound on the ground. The first
+one always speaks in a low tone to the sun, and the second answers her.
+So the sun and the two old women had a luminous partnership.
+
+"The second old woman then presents a cup of wine to the first, who,
+while they both continue their address to the sun, brings the cup four
+or five times near the mouth as though going to drink, and meanwhile
+sprinkles the wine on the heart of the pig. She then gives up the cup,
+and receives a lance which she brandishes, while still dancing and
+reciting, and four or five times directs the lance at the pig's heart;
+at last, with a sudden and well-aimed blow, she pierces it through and
+through. She withdraws the lance from the wound, which is then closed
+and dressed with herbs.
+
+"During the ceremony a torch is always burning, and the old woman who
+pierced the pig takes and puts it out with her mouth; the other old
+woman dips the end of her trumpet in the pig's blood, and with it marks
+with blood the forehead of her husband and of her companion, and then of
+the rest of the people. But they did not come and do this to us.
+
+"That done the old women took off their robes and ate what was in the
+two dishes, inviting only women to join them. After that they get the
+hair off the pig with fire. Only old women are able to consecrate the
+boar, and this animal is never eaten unless it is killed in this
+manner."
+
+Pigafetta saw wonderful things in Borneo, among them a wild boar whose
+head was two and a half spans long, and oysters as large as turtles. He
+says that the flesh of one of these oysters weighed forty-five pounds.
+
+But the thing there which probably must have most greatly excited his
+curiosity was the _walking leaves_. There were certain trees on the
+islands that had very animated leaves. When one of these leaves fell
+from the tree, it did not lie where it fell, to rot or to be shuffled by
+the winds, but it lifted itself up and walked away.
+
+Here was a sight indeed to make the young Italian fly to his memoranda
+book, which he did.
+
+Other travelers later saw the same curious thing, but they examined the
+miracle more closely than the credulous Chevalier. They found that the
+leaves were moved by an insect that lived inside of them, like the
+Mexican bean, which is used as a toy, and will jump about a table.
+
+The islands of the Indian Ocean abound in sandalwood. Of the sandal
+trees Pigafetta heard other curious legends. One of them tells us that
+when the people of the Timor went out to cut sandalwood, the devil
+appeared to them, and demanded them to bargain with him for the wood.
+This they did, for those who cut the wood are otherwise likely to fall
+sick; a poisonous miasma is exhaled from the wounded wood.
+
+Pigafetta heard also marvelous tales of the Emperor of China, who seemed
+to live amid human walls. There may be some truths in these incidents;
+if so, what a remarkable condition must have been that of the Chinese
+court four hundred years ago!
+
+He says:
+
+"The kingdom of Cocchi lies next; its sovereign is named Raja Seri
+Bummipala. After that follows Great China, the king of which is the
+greatest sovereign of the world, and is called Santoa Raja. He has
+seventy crowned kings under his dependence; and some of these kings have
+ten or fifteen lesser kings dependent on them. The port of this kingdom
+is named Guantan, and among the many cities of this Empire, two are the
+most important, namely, Nankin and Comlaha, where the King usually
+resides.
+
+"He has four of his principal ministers close to his palace, at the four
+sides looking to the four cardinal winds; that is, one to the west, one
+to the east, to the south, and to the north. Each of these gives
+audience to those that come from his quarter. All the kings and lords of
+India major and superior obey this King, and in token of their
+vassalage, each is obliged to have in the middle of the principal palace
+of his city the marble figure of a certain animal named Chinga, an
+animal more valuable than the lion; the figure of this animal is also
+engraved on the King's seal, and all who wish to enter his port must
+carry the same emblem in wax or ivory.
+
+"If any lord is disobedient to him, he is flayed, and his skin, dried in
+the sun, salted, and stuffed, is placed in an eminent part of the public
+place, with the head inclined and the hands on the head in the attitude
+of doing zongu; that is obeisance to the King.
+
+"He is never visible to anybody; and if he wishes to see his people he
+is carried about the palace on a peacock most skillfully manufactured
+and very richly adorned, with six ladies dressed exactly like himself,
+so that he can not be distinguished from them. He afterward passes into
+a richly adorned figure of a serpent called Naga, which has a large
+glass in the breast, through which he and the ladies are seen, but it is
+not possible to distinguish which is the King. He marries his sisters in
+order that his blood should not mix with that of others.
+
+"His palace has seven walls around it, and in each circle there are
+daily ten thousand men on guard, who are changed every twelve hours at
+the sound of a bell. Each wall has its gate, with a guard at each gate.
+At the first stands a man with a great scourge in his hand, named
+Satuhoran with satubagan; at the second, a dog called Satuhain; at the
+third, a man with an iron mace, called Satuhoran with pocumbecin; at the
+fourth, a man with a bow in his hand, called Saturhoran with anatpanan;
+at the fifth, a man with a lance, called Satuhoran with tumach; at the
+sixth, a lion, called Saturhorimau; at the seventh, two white elephants,
+called Gagiapute.
+
+"The palace contains seventy-nine halls, in which dwell only the ladies
+destined to serve the King; there are always torches burning there. It
+is not possible to go round the palace in less than a day. In the upper
+part of it are four halls where the ministers go to speak to the King;
+one is ornamented with metal, both the pavement and the walls; another
+is all of silver, another all of gold, and the other is set with pearls
+and precious stones. The gold and other valuable things which are
+brought as tribute to the King are placed in these rooms; and when they
+are there deposited, they say, 'Let this be for the honor and glory of
+our Santoa Raja.' All these things and many others relating to this
+King, were narrated to us by a Moor, who said that he had seen them."
+
+A palace of seven walls, seventy-nine halls, and ten thousand men on
+guard! A hall of silver, another of gold, and one of precious stones! It
+took a day to encompass it. We may well wonder how much of truth there
+was in this brief Oriental story!
+
+When the adventurers came to Java they heard some tales that were
+marvelous, and that quite equaled those which Queen Scheherezade of the
+Arabian Nights told of Sinbad the Sailor.
+
+One of these fabulous stories, told them by a pilot, had an Oriental
+charm and coloring. It was of a giant bird, like the roc of the Arabian
+Nights.
+
+According to this fanciful legend which we give with some freedom, there
+was a land called Java Major on the north of the Gulf of China, where
+grew an enormous tree, seemingly as big as a mountain--one of the
+greatest trees in all the world. In this tree, which might have shaded a
+hill, lived a colony of birds, with wings like clouds, so broad and
+powerful that they could lift an elephant or a buffalo into the air and
+bear him away to the mountainous tree. The fruit of this tree was larger
+than the largest melons.
+
+There were Moors on the ship where this story of the great tree and the
+great bird was told. One of them said:
+
+"I have _seen_ the great bird with my own eyes!"
+
+Another Moor said:
+
+"One of the birds was once captured, and sent as a present to the King
+of Siam!"
+
+An account of the capture of such a bird would have been very
+interesting!
+
+There were great whirlpools around the mountainous tree. So that no ship
+could approach within three or four leagues of it.
+
+But once, according to the legend, some adventurous sailors sailed near
+the great tree. They had a little boy on board their boat, and he must
+have surveyed the giant of the forest with wonder.
+
+They sailed too near, for presently their boat began to go round and
+round, and they found themselves in the power of the whirlpool.
+
+Round and round went the junk until it struck against a rock, and all
+on board perished, except the little boy, who was supple.
+
+This child caught a plank and held on to it. He was carried hither and
+thither among the eddies and breakers, but he found himself drawing
+nearer and nearer the great tree. At last he was cast on shore at the
+foot of the tree.
+
+"Here must be my home," said he, for he thought he never could get away
+again. No boat could come to him, and _he_ could not fly.
+
+The tree had great masses of bark, so that he could climb up into it. He
+mounted up to its high limbs. He could not starve, for the fruit of such
+a tree must have been sufficient to have supplied a colony.
+
+So cast away on the tree, he here expected to live and to die.
+
+Toward sunset great wings like clouds darkened the shining air. The
+birds were coming home to-night in the tree. Their nests were there as
+big as houses.
+
+They settled down, causing a great wind, and put their great heads under
+their wings and went to sleep.
+
+The boy was bright, and a plan of getting away from the tree came to
+him. He reasoned that if he could not fly the bird could, and what would
+be the weight of a little boy to a bird who could carry away an
+elephant?
+
+So he marked the largest and most powerful bird with his eye, and crept
+up to it and got under his wing, and into his great feathers.
+
+The bird was asleep and did not wake!
+
+Morning came, and with the first red dawn, as we may fancy, the bird
+threw up his head and begun to stir. He lifted himself up and shook
+himself, but he did not shake off the boy, who was safely nestled among
+the little forest of its feathers.
+
+The sun was brightening the islands, and the bird mounted up and flew
+away in search of food, carrying the little boy under his wing.
+
+After traversing the sunrise air for a long time, the bird flew over a
+land of buffaloes.
+
+He here descended to capture a buffalo, to bear him away to the
+mountainous tree for food. As he alighted on the back of the buffalo
+with a wild scream of delight, the little boy dropped out from under his
+wing, and so found his way to his own island.
+
+It was the little boy that told this large story, quite like Sinbad's.
+
+There were found mysterious fruits floating on the sea, which were
+supposed to have fallen from the tree.
+
+"I have seen the bird myself," said a third Moorish pilot, and with the
+testimony of the little boy, and the three pilots and the floating
+fruit, this story ought to be as trustworthy as the one of Sinbad the
+Sailor.
+
+The voyage back to the Cape of Good Hope and thence to the Cape Verde
+Islands was one for strange reflections. Del Cano now was the leader of
+the returning mariners. The expedition had gone out from the port of
+Seville amid shouting quays and towers, with some two hundred and
+seventy men. Only one ship was returning and she was bringing home
+hardly as many men as composed her own crew.
+
+We can imagine Del Cano on deck, with the lantern of Magellan still
+swinging above him, talking with his officers on a tropical night off
+the African coast.
+
+"Magellan has found an unknown grave," we may hear him say.
+
+"But humanity will mourn for him, and honor him, and the grave matters
+not," answers a padre.
+
+"We shall never see Mesquita again," continues Del Cano.
+
+"We can not be sure," replies the padre. "We can know nothing that we do
+not see."
+
+"We surely shall never meet Carthagena again. I can see in my memory
+those last biscuits and bottles of wine. He needs none of them now."
+
+"He may have them all," answers the padre.
+
+"We are yet rich in spices. We shall surprise the world when we drop
+anchor at Seville."
+
+"And Seville may have surprises for us," says the hopeful padre.
+
+They drifted on under favoring airs. The soul of Del Cano was lost to
+common events in the wonderful revelations of the sea. Should he reach
+Seville, he would be the living hero of the most marvelous voyage ever
+made by any mariner.
+
+Such were the scenes and tales that crowded upon the mind of Pigafetta,
+who wished "to see the wonders of the world." The story of the Emperor
+of China's palace is associated with objects so marvelous that the
+meaning of their names is lost to-day.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV.
+
+THE LOST DAY.
+
+
+When they reached the Cape Verde Islands, the sailors found that a very
+strange thing had happened.
+
+They had lost a day--or, the islanders had gained a day!
+
+They met the ships from Seville there, and doubtless disputed with the
+traders in regard to what day of the week it was.
+
+"This is the 6th of September," they said; "a day that we shall ever
+have occasion to celebrate."
+
+"It is the 7th of September," said their joyous friends.
+
+The sailors consulted with each other. All agreed that it was the 6th of
+September. Nowhere had they failed to make a daily memorandum. The
+people of Seville must have lost a day.
+
+The solar year consists of three hundred and sixty-five days and six
+hours, and if one sails West three years one will gain a day, and if one
+sails East, one will lose a day.
+
+If the reader will note the following dates of this wonderful voyage, he
+will solve the mystery of the "lost day:"
+
+
+    CHRONOLOGY OF THE FIRST VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD.
+
+    Magellan arrives at Seville                          October 20, 1518.
+
+    Magellan's fleet sails from Seville, Monday[A]       August 10, 1519.
+
+        [A] The 10th of August was Wednesday, and Monday
+        was the 8th of August: all the other dates of the
+        week and month agree and are consistent with each
+        other.
+
+    Magellan sails from San Lucar de Barrameda,
+      Tuesday                                            September 20, 1519.
+
+    Magellan arrives at Teneriffe                        September 26, 1519.
+
+    Magellan sails from Teneriffe, Monday                October 3, 1519.
+
+    Magellan arrives at Rio Janeiro                      December 13, 1519.
+
+    Magellan sails from Rio                              December 26, 1519.
+
+    Magellan sails from Rio de la Plata                  February 2, 1520.
+
+    Magellan arrives at Port St. Julian                  March 31, 1520.
+
+    Eclipse of sun                                       April 17, 1520.
+
+    Loss of Santiago.
+
+    Magellan sails from Port St. Julian                  August 24, 1520.
+
+    Magellan sails from river of Santa Cruz              October 18, 1520.
+
+    Magellan makes Cape of the Virgins, entrance
+      of straits                                         October 21, 1520.
+
+    Desertion of San Antonio                             November, 1520.
+
+    Magellan issues from straits into the Pacific,
+      Wednesday                                          November 28, 1520.
+
+    Magellan fetches San Pablo Island                    January 24, 1521.
+
+    Magellan fetches Tiburones Island                    February 4, 1521.
+
+    Magellan reaches the Ladrone Islands, Wednesday      March 6, 1521.
+
+    Magellan reaches Samar Island of the Philippines,
+      Saturday                                           March 16, 1521.
+
+    Magellan reaches Mazzava Island, Thursday            March 28, 1521.
+
+    Magellan arrives at Zebu Island                      April 7, 1521.
+
+    Death of Magellan at Matan, Saturday                 April 27, 1521.
+
+    Arrival of San Antonio at Seville                    May 6, 1521.
+
+    Arrival of Victoria and Trinity at Tidore,
+      Friday                                             November 8, 1521.
+
+    Victoria sails from Tidore                           December 21, 1521.
+
+    Victoria discovers Amsterdam Island, Tuesday         March 18, 1522.
+
+    Victoria doubles the Cape of Good Hope               May 18, 1522.
+
+    Victoria arrives at San Lucar, Wednesday[A]          September 6, 1522.
+
+        [A] According to ship's time.
+
+They sought provisions of the Portuguese colony at Cape Verde.
+
+The Portuguese persecution of the expedition, which Magellan had made
+for Spain, did not cease even here. The Victoria sent out boats for
+rice. One of the sailors could not restrain his joy, and told the
+Portuguese who he was and whence he came.
+
+The jealousy of the Portuguese was aroused again.
+
+"The expedition carries glory to Spain," said they. "Did not the King
+tear the arms from Magellan's door?"
+
+One of the boats sent out for rice did not return. The Victoria knew why
+they were detained, and sailed away while she could, to bear the
+glorious news of the discovery to Seville.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV.
+
+IN THE CHURCH OF OUR LADY OF VICTORY.--PIGAFETTA.
+
+
+The Victoria cast anchor in the Port of Seville on September 8, 1522.
+Joy filled the city on that day, and heralds went forth to proclaim the
+news.
+
+What news it was!
+
+That Magellan had found a new way to the Pacific.
+
+That he had discovered the Pacific to be a mighty ocean.
+
+That he had sailed over it and found a new ocean world.
+
+That he was dead.
+
+That he had made immortal discoveries, and that one of his ships had
+sailed around the world.
+
+The hero of the day was Del Cano, the commander of the Victoria.
+
+There was a most beautiful church in Seville, called Our Lady of
+Victory. To that the returning mariners were summoned to give thanks for
+their discovery on the day after their arrival, September 9, 1522.
+
+Bells rang out on the shining air. The remnant of the happy crews
+entered the church amid the joyous music to hear the songs of
+thanksgiving for victory:
+
+    "We praise thee, O God!
+    We believe thee to be
+    The Father everlasting!"
+
+They had returned in the Victoria, and the service had to them a special
+significance in the church of that name.
+
+Mesquita must have heard the acclaiming city.
+
+To the prisoner who had waited in hope, the trumpets of the heralds must
+have been sweet after his release! Juana, the demented Queen, was yet
+watching by the tomb in view of her window, hoping at each dawn of the
+morning that she would find that the dust had awakened to life again.
+Charles was mapping Europe; his fire of ambition was glowing, and the
+news of the new fields of the ocean that these discoveries had brought
+to him filled him with pride and exultation.
+
+He resolved on giving Del Cano and his mariners a splendid reception,
+after the manner that Isabella had received Columbus.
+
+Del Cano was now the living representative of Magellan. In publicly
+receiving him with heralds, music, and festival he would do honor to
+Magellan, whose name was now immortal. So Charles spread his tables of
+silver and gold to those who had lived on the open sea on scraps of
+leather, and magnanimously welcomed as knights of the sea those who had
+followed the sun around the world.
+
+Spain opened the prison doors of Mesquita.
+
+How must Del Cano have welcomed Mesquita as he came forth from his
+prison, vindicated on these festal days!
+
+Mesquita was a hero now, and a hero among heroes, for he had been a
+martyr to the cause. The people's hearts overflowed toward him.
+
+So the islands of the new ocean world came to be the possessions of
+Spain, and from Philip, who succeeded Charles, were called the
+Philippines. They were to be governed, robbed, taxed, and, in part,
+reduced to slavery for the enrichment of Spain for nearly four hundred
+years. Then Spain was to vanish from their history in the smoke of
+Admiral Dewey's guns, and over them was to float the flag of the
+republic of the West.
+
+It is a strange allotment of events that these islands should introduce
+the republic of the West into the Asiatic world. A half century ago the
+subject of Europe in Asia excited the attention of mankind, but no one
+ever dreamed that a like topic of America in Asia would ever become one
+of the political problems of the world.
+
+[Illustration: Pigafetta presenting the history of the voyage to the
+King of Spain.]
+
+The future of these islands must be one of civilization, education,
+and development, and we may hope that these will be brought about under
+the divine law of American institutions, that "all governments derive
+their just powers from the consent of the governed." Justice alone is
+the true sword of power, perpetuity, and peace. To lead the natives of
+these islands to desire to receive all that is best in civilized life,
+is one of the great missions of the republic of the West; and that
+republic, governed by the conscience of the people, will be true to the
+cause of human rights.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Pigafetta? We must let him tell the story of his life on his return.
+"Leaving Seville I repaired to Valladolid, where I presented his sacred
+Majesty, Don Carlos, neither gold nor silver, but other things far more
+precious in the eyes of so great a sovereign. For I brought to him,
+among other things, a book written in my own hand, giving an account of
+all the things which had happened day by day on the voyage.
+
+"Then I went to Portugal, where I related to King John the things that I
+had seen.
+
+"Returning by the way of Spain, I came to France, where I presented
+treasures that I had brought home to the regent mother of the most
+Christian King Don Francis.
+
+"Then I turned my face toward Italy, where I gave myself to the service
+of the illustrious Philip de Villiers l'Isle Adams, the Grand Master of
+Rhodes."
+
+The scene of the presentation of the parchment story of Magellan to
+Charles V is most interesting. That manuscript was like the return of
+Magellan himself; it told what the hero of the sea had been and what he
+had done. It was in itself a work of genius, and the world has never
+ceased to read it in the spirit of sympathy in which it was written.
+
+We may fancy the scene: the young King surrounded by his court, in his
+happiest days; the Italian Knight amid the splendors of the audience
+room, placing in the hands of the new Caesar the roll of the narrative of
+the voyage around the world! Such a story no pen had ever traced before.
+That must have been one of the proudest moments in the life of Charles
+as he took from the Knight the map of the round world.
+
+To the last Pigafetta was true to the Admiral; and one of the best
+things that can be said of any man is, "He is true hearted."
+
+A wooden statue of Del Cano was found at Cavite on the surrender of that
+port to Commodore Dewey. It was sent to Washington. It should be
+replaced by some worthy work of art.
+
+The island of Guam, of the Ladrones, which broke the long voyage of
+Magellan over the Pacific, and which is some fifteen hundred miles from
+Luzon, was captured by Captain Glass, of the United States cruiser
+Charleston, July 21, 1898. It is a connecting link between the West and
+the Orient. A memorial of Magellan, Del Cano, and Pigafetta might be
+suitably placed there.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The author of the Songs of the Sierras has described the spirit of
+Columbus in a poem which has been highly commended. The interpretation
+applies as well to Magellan. We quote two verses: genius must overcome
+obstacles, and all obstacles, to be made divine.
+
+
+THE PORT.
+
+    Behind him lay the gray Azores,
+      Behind, the gates of Hercules.
+    Before him not the ghosts of shores,
+      Before him only shoreless seas.
+    The good mate said: "Now must we pray,
+      For, lo! the very stars are gone.
+    Brave Admiral, speak--what shall I say?"
+      "Why say--Sail on, sail on, sail on!"
+
+    They sailed, they sailed. Then spoke the mate:
+      "This mad sea shows her teeth to-night;
+    She curls her lip and lies in wait
+      With lifted teeth as if to bite.
+    Brave Admiral, say but one good word,
+      What shall we do when hope is gone?"
+    The words leaped as a leaping sword--
+      "Sail on, sail on, sail on and on!"
+
+
+
+
+SUPPLEMENTAL.
+
+THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.--LAGASPI.--THE STRUGGLE OF THE NATIVES WITH
+SPAIN.--STORY OF THE PATRIOT RIZAL.--AGUINALDO.
+
+
+The Philippine Islands, which promise to become a republic of the seas,
+and the first republic in Asiatic waters, were for generations held by
+Spain. These one thousand and more sea gardens, some eleven thousand
+miles from New York, number about as few islands of importance as there
+are American States. The government of the more populous islands has
+been so restrictive that, before the boom of Dewey's guns in the China
+Sea, little was known about them to the world.
+
+The archipelago consists of some six hundred islands that might find
+marking on an ordinary map of the world.
+
+Twenty-five of these have gained a commercial standing, from which are
+collected products for foreign trade. The chief of these is Luzon, and
+the principal ports of the larger islands are Iloilo, on the island of
+Panay; Zebu and Zamboango.
+
+Luzon and the northern islands are inhabited by a partly civilized
+race, called the Tagals, who are supposed to be descended from
+immigrants from the Malay peninsula. They have had the reputation of a
+mild-mannered people, as they have long received, directly or
+indirectly, European influences. There are two thousand one hundred
+schools in Luzon and some six millions of the natives of the islands are
+claimed as Catholics.
+
+A sultanate was formed on the Sulu archipelago nearly eight hundred
+years ago, and the Mohammedan populations are called Moros or Moors. The
+Visayas people are a lower race. Colonies of Chinese are to be found in
+many of the larger islands, and these constitute the centers of thrift
+and industry.
+
+The official language of the islands is Spanish, but the natives speak
+in twenty or more dialects. The islands are supposed to contain about
+ten million people, but there are no correct censuses by which to
+compute the number. Even the islands themselves seem not to have been
+correctly counted.
+
+The history of the islands since their discovery has been one of the
+most silent in the world. They have been governed by Spain in such a
+manner as to enrich the Crown of Spain. When the Pope apportioned the
+newly discovered world among the Kings of the Church, the Western
+Hemisphere was given to Spain, and by an error of division Spain
+received the Moluccas or Spice Islands. Magellan declared the King of
+Spain suzerain of the islands, and after many years Spain sent an
+expedition from one of her colonies to Zebu to begin the occupation of
+the Spicery. The leader of this expedition, Miguel de Legaspi, caused
+his men to marry native women, hoping thereby more easily to subdue a
+wild and untrained race.
+
+In 1571 this colonizer brought Manila under his influence, and induced
+the native King to accept the suzerainty of the Spanish King. He
+proclaimed Manila the seat of Government, and made it an episcopal city.
+
+Legaspi came to learn a very strange thing. It was that the Chinese had
+made themselves masters of navigation _by monsoons_. They came down from
+their coasts to Manila Bay on northwest monsoons, and when the monsoons
+changed they were carried back again. This power was akin to steam.
+Their boats were junks, but they filled the marts of Manila with silks
+and other Oriental luxuries.
+
+Legaspi encouraged this trade. He was the founder of trade in the ports
+of the China Sea. He caused a market place to be built for the Chinese
+traders in Manila, in the form of a circus, and afterward opened a
+quarter for them within the walls. The Chinese still hold a large part
+of the retail trade of the port. Before the late Spanish war, they
+numbered about sixty thousand, and one hundred thousand in the port and
+provinces.
+
+The monks came and sought to convert the people; their efforts were
+partly successful, but sometimes ended in tragedies.
+
+The trade between Spain and the Philippines was for a long time carried
+on by the way of Mexico. The intercourse between the Crown and her
+dependencies here was infrequent. The Mohammedans waged frequent wars
+against the Catholic missionaries, whom they sought to exterminate.
+
+The friars became the real rulers of the civilized parts of the islands.
+The will of the Spanish priest was absolute. He was independent of State
+authority. The rule of the Church was so severe that it brought religion
+into disfavor, and when the power of Aguinaldo arose, that chief
+insisted upon the expulsion of certain monastic orders, as detrimental
+to liberty, and demanded the restoration of the estates of the Church to
+the people.
+
+Such is, in brief, the simple history of the islands discovered by
+Magellan before the archipelago was ceded by the treaty of Paris to the
+United States.
+
+
+MANILA.
+
+Beautiful Manila, shining over the China Sea--so seductive to the white
+man when seen from a distance, so withering to all his energies when the
+same white man becomes a resident there!
+
+A two days' voyage from Hong Kong brings the traveler to Luzon to the
+river Pasig, where the grim old fortresses of Manila, earthquake rent,
+like a haze of green vegetation, break the view. Palms lift their green
+cool shadows in the burning air.
+
+Manila is a walled city. The entrance is by drawbridges, which are
+raised at night.
+
+The mediaeval atmosphere does not disappear when one finds one's self
+within the walls. Exhaustion and decay are everywhere. The large open
+bay lies in the splendors of the sunlight when the day is calm, and the
+visitor would never dream of its turbulent condition when it is lashed
+by the typhoon.
+
+[Illustration: Admiral Dewey.]
+
+Across the bay stands Cavite, the naval station, the scene of Dewey's
+victory over the Spanish fleet.
+
+The city has some two hundred and seventy thousand inhabitants. The
+merchants, as we have said, are largely Chinese, and their quarters are
+picturesque with gay bazaars.
+
+In the shadow land of trees and open dry marshes outside of the city are
+beautiful estates, and along the roadsides people go waving their fans
+slowly and listlessly. Here are the parks, the bull ring, and the lovely
+botanical gardens.
+
+Commercial Manila is a city of coolies, who bare their backs to the
+sun, though little work can be done here in the noonday heat.
+
+[Illustration: PHILIPPINE ISLANDS]
+
+Some years ago a terrible cold came to Manila. It was on a late December
+night, near morning. The thermometer went down to 74 deg. Think of that,
+and of the poor coolies, and of the negritos, or the little black
+dwarfs, and of those who lived in the thousands of huts of bamboo or
+reeds! True, 74 deg. would indicate a hot day in our American June or July,
+but in Manila it was a cold morning, and the people came shivering into
+the streets, to tell each other of their sufferings.
+
+The best description of Manila before the war that we have seen was
+written by Crozet, and is contained in an English translated book
+entitled Crozet's Voyage to Tasmania, New Zealand, the Ladrone Islands,
+and the Philippines. From this beautifully illustrated work we present a
+view of the city and the surrounding island as it appeared seven years
+or more ago:
+
+"The city of Manila is one of the most beautiful that Europeans have
+built in the East Indies; its houses are all of stone, with tile roofs
+and they are big, comfortable and well ventilated. The streets of Manila
+are broad and perfectly straight; there are five principal streets,
+which divide the city lengthwise, and about ten which divide it
+broadways. The form of the city is that of an oblong, surrounded by
+walls and ditches, and defended on the side of the river by a badly
+planned citadel, which is about to be pulled down and rebuilt. The city
+walls are flanked by a bastion at every one of the four angles. There
+are at Manila eight principal churches, with an open place in front of
+every one; they are all beautiful, large and very richly decorated. The
+Cathedral is a building which would grace any of our European cities,
+and has just been rebuilt by an Italian Theatin,[A] who is an able
+architect. The two rows of columns which support the vaults of the nave
+and of the aisles are of magnificent marble; so also are the columns of
+the portal, the altars, the steps, and the pavement. These marbles are
+obtained from local quarries, are of great variety, and are of the
+greatest beauty. The space in front of the Cathedral is very large, and
+is the finest in the city.
+
+    [A] A regular order of clergy established at Rome in 1524, but which
+    does not appear to have spread much beyond Italy and France.
+
+"On one side the palace of the Governor is flanked by the Cathedral, on
+the other by the Town Hall. The Town Hall is very beautiful. At the
+extremity of the place in front of the Cathedral a large barracks is
+being constructed, which is to be capable of lodging eight thousand
+troops.
+
+"Private houses, as well as public buildings, are all one story high.
+Spaniards never live on the ground floor, on account of the dampness,
+but they occupy the first floor instead. The heat of the climate
+has induced them to build very large apartments, with verandas running
+right round the outside, so as to keep out of the sun; the windows form
+part of the verandas, and the daylight only enters the rooms by means of
+the doors which open out on to these verandas. The ground floor serves
+as a storehouse, and to prevent the rising of moisture from the soil its
+surface is raised a foot, by means of a bed of charcoal; then sand or
+gravel is placed on top of this bed, which is finally paved with stone
+or brick laid with mortar.
+
+"As the country is very subject to earthquakes, the houses, although
+built of stone, are strengthened with large posts of wood or iron fixed
+perpendicularly in the ground, rising to the top of the wall-plates, and
+built within the walls, so that they can not be seen, and then crossed
+on every floor by master girders, strongly bound together and bolted by
+wooden keys, which so consolidate the whole building.
+
+"Manila is built on the mouth of a beautiful river, which flows from a
+lake, called by the Spaniards _Lagonne-de-bay_, and which is situated
+five leagues inland. Forty streams flow into this lake, which is twenty
+leagues in circumference, and around which there are as many villages as
+streams. The Manila River is the only one which flows out of the lake.
+It is covered with boats, bringing to the city every sort of provision
+from the forty agricultural tribes established on the lake shores.
+
+"The suburbs are bigger and more thickly populated than the city itself;
+they are separated from it by a river, across which a beautiful bridge
+has been thrown. The Minondo suburb is more especially inhabited by
+half-breeds, Chinese, and Indians, who are for the most part goldsmiths
+and silversmiths, and all of them work people.
+
+"The Saint Croix suburb is inhabited by Spanish merchants, by foreigners
+of all nations, and by Chinese half-breeds. This quarter is the most
+agreeable one in the country, because the houses, which are quite as
+fine as those of the city, are built on the river bank, and thereby they
+enjoy all the conveniences and pleasantness due to such a position.
+
+"In spite of such advantages, the city is badly situated, being placed
+between two intercommunicating volcanoes, and of which the interiors,
+being always active, are evidently preparing its ruin. The two volcanoes
+are those of the Lagonne-ed-Taal and of Monte Albay. When one burns, the
+other smokes. I shall speak later on of the former of these volcanoes,
+which, to me at least, appeared a most singular one.
+
+[Illustration: Native Houses in Manila.]
+
+"Until the shocks of the volcanoes shall decide its fate, Manila remains
+the capital of the Spanish establishments in the Philippines. Here
+reside the Governor, who is called the Captain General and President of
+the Royal Audience. Don Simon de Auda filled this office when I arrived
+at Manila. This Governor had previously been a member of the Royal
+Audience, and when the English, at the end of the last war, took Manila,
+he escaped from the city before the surrender, placed himself at the
+head of the Indians of the province of Pampague, and, without regard to
+the capitulation of the city, he is said to have succeeded in confining
+the English within their conquest, starving equally the conquerors and
+the conquered. Noticing that the Chinese established outside the city
+walls were furnishing provisions to English and Spaniards alike, he
+butchered them, putting more than ten thousand to the sword. It seemed
+to me, however, that the Spaniards in general considered the efforts of
+this councillor to be more harmful than advantageous to the welfare of
+the Spanish colony. The English, harassed by the Indians under Don Simon
+de Auda, had on their part armed and raised other provinces of Luzon, so
+as to oppose Indian to Indian, and this sort of civil war did more harm
+to the colony than even the capture of Manila by the English.
+
+"However this may be, Don Simon de Auda returned to Spain after the
+peace, was rewarded for his zeal by being made Privy Councillor of
+Castile, and was sent back to Manila as Governor General of the
+Philippines. Since his arrival in his province he has started a number
+of important projects, but difficult to be carried out at one and the
+same time. He has started considerable fortifications in various parts
+of the city, very large barracks, dykes at the mouth of the river, a
+powder-mill, smelting furnaces and forges to work the iron mines, and a
+number of other useful works, which might have succeeded better had they
+been started in due succession.
+
+"The Philippine Archipelago contains fourteen principal islands, the
+Government of which is divided into twenty-seven provinces, which are
+governed by _alcaldes_ under the orders of the Governor Captain General.
+All these islands are thickly populated, being about three million.
+These islands extend from the tenth to the twenty-third degree north
+latitude, and vary in breadth from about forty leagues at the north end
+of Luzon up to two hundred leagues from the south of the southeast point
+of Mindanao to the southwest point of Paragoa.
+
+"They are all fertile and rich in natural products. But although the
+Spaniards have been established here for more than two hundred years,
+they have not yet succeeded in making themselves masters of the islands.
+They have no foothold on Paragoa, which is almost eighty leagues long,
+nor on the adjacent small islands; they only possess a few acres on the
+big island of Mindanao, which is two hundred leagues in circumference,
+nor are they yet fully acquainted with the interior of the island of
+Luzon, where they have their chief settlement, namely, the city of
+Manila. Luzon is the largest of these islands, being a hundred and
+forty leagues long from Cape Bojador to Bulusan Point, which is the most
+northerly point, and about forty leagues broad. In the northern part of
+Luzon, near the province of Ilocos, there are some aborigines with whom
+the Spaniards have never been able to establish communication. It is
+believed that these people are the descendants of Chinese, who, having
+been shipwrecked on these shores, have established themselves in the
+mountains of this part of the island. It is said that some Indians know
+the routes by which access is gained to this people, and that they have
+been well received by them; but it is in the interest of these Indians
+to withhold the knowledge from the Spaniards, on account of their great
+trade profits with those people, who lack many things and have only
+provisions and gold."
+
+
+THE STORY OF THE PATRIOT RIZAL.
+
+DR. JOSE RIZAL, a virtuous Catholic reformer, was the Samuel Adams of
+the awakening of moral feeling against the tyranny of Spain. He sought
+to reform the Government and to correct corruption in the Church.
+
+He belonged to the province of Cavite. He was a small man, of a clear,
+sensitive conscience, and great intellectual penetration and force. It
+became the one purpose of his life to free his countrymen. "He organized
+the Revolution," says a monument to Samuel Adams, and Dr. Rizal sought
+to organize a revolution in a like manner as the "last of the Puritans"
+in New England, by the collecting of facts for correspondence with
+patriots at Manila and Hong Kong.
+
+In his school life he beheld the universal corruption going on around
+him. His heart was moved to pity the people.
+
+He wrote a letter in which he urged reform by the expulsion of corrupt
+officers of the Government and of certain immoral priests. This awakened
+the Government and made him secret enemies. He was accused by the
+Government of treason and by the decadent priests of the Church of
+blasphemy. He held to his convictions against all opposition, knowing
+that right was right and truth was truth.
+
+He sought to unite the worthy representatives of the State and Church in
+an effort to bring about a change which should honor morals and give
+justice to the people. Among men of conscience his influence secretly
+grew. He hoped to gain such force as to make an appeal to the court at
+Madrid.
+
+He organized a moral revolution.
+
+Conscience is power, but its progress is slow.
+
+In 1890 Dr. Rizal published a pamphlet that stirred the island world. He
+pictured the sufferings of the natives under the Spanish rule. He
+appealed to the enlightened Church, conscience and humanity.
+
+The patriot's friends saw that the reform movement was about to be
+crushed, and said to Rizal:
+
+"Escape to Hong Kong!"
+
+There was a patriotic club in Hong Kong that sought the emancipation of
+the natives of Luzon and the Philippines from the extortions of Spain.
+It would be well for him now to go there.
+
+"How shall I leave the city?" was the one question that suddenly haunted
+his mind.
+
+He must go by sea. He could not go on board a ship without being
+detected and detained.
+
+"Get into a perforated box," said a fellow patriot, "and I will ship you
+with the merchandise."
+
+Dr. Rizal secreted himself in the perforated box, and was shipped from
+Luzon to Hong Kong.
+
+He was received with great enthusiasm by the Philippine patriots in Hong
+Kong.
+
+But he was more dangerous to the officials of Luzon in Hong Kong than at
+Cavite. It became a problem with the latter how to get him once more in
+their power.
+
+The Governor General Weyler caused a dispatch to be sent to him which
+stated that he "was too valuable a man for the State to lose his
+services," that his past conduct would be overlooked, and that he could
+safely return to his own island.
+
+Honest himself, he could not believe that the dispatch was insincere.
+
+He went back to Manila. His foes were bent on his destruction.
+
+He was one day absent from his rooms attending probably to his medical
+duties, when some soldiers led by a spy entered his apartments and
+searched his trunks and pretended to find there seditious books.
+
+Dr. Rizal was arrested. His enemies formed the court to try him for
+treason.
+
+The books were put out as evidence against him.
+
+"I imported no books," said he.
+
+"But the books are here."
+
+"The customhouse officers found no books in my trunks," said Dr. Rizal.
+
+"But here are the books that witness against you."
+
+"There were no books in my room when I left it," said he.
+
+"But we found them there."
+
+"Let me call the customhouse officers."
+
+The court refused the request.
+
+"Let me summon the owner of my room."
+
+The court refused the request.
+
+"The witness against me is a convict, a spy, and a perjurer."
+
+The court found him guilty.
+
+He was sent into exile. The injustice of the trial was a flame of
+liberty; the British consul protested against it, and riots broke out in
+Cavite against the officials that countenanced such a mockery of
+justice.
+
+He went again to Hong Kong. Weyler had left Luzon, and had been
+succeeded by Despajol.
+
+His case aroused the Patriot Club. The patriots resolved to go to Spain
+and lay their cause before the throne. They were mobbed in Spain and
+sent to Manila for trial.
+
+The trial was a farce; Dr. Rizal was again condemned.
+
+On December 6, 1896, he was led out of the Manila prison into the
+courtyard. A file of soldiers awaited the coming. A sharp volley of
+shots broke the stillness of the air; and that heart, so true to
+liberty, was broken and lay bleeding on the earth. So perished one of
+the noblest patriots of the islands of the China Sea.
+
+
+AGUINALDO.
+
+AGUINALDO, called "the greatest of the Malays," in that he rose against
+Spanish tyranny, is one of the interesting characters of the closing
+century. His true character can hardly be determined at the present
+time. Future events must reveal it. He is of mixed blood, and is said to
+more resemble a European than a Malay.
+
+He was born in the province of Cavite, and is supposed to have European
+blood in his veins. He was brought up as a house boy in the apartments
+of a Jesuit priest--a house boy being an errand boy; a boy handy for all
+common work.
+
+It has been the policy of Spain for centuries to keep her subjects on
+the Pacific islands in partial ignorance; but this bright boy had an
+impulse to learn, to acquire knowledge, to grasp the truth of life. He
+had a remarkable memory, and he became such an apt scholar as to excite
+wonder. When he was fourteen years old he entered the medical school at
+Manila. He lost the favor of the Church by joining the Masonic order.
+
+[Illustration: Aguinaldo.]
+
+In 1888 he went to Hong Kong, where was a Philippine colony. Here he
+sought and obtained a military education, and studied military works,
+and the historical campaigns of the world's greatest heroes. He learned
+Latin, English, French, and Chinese.
+
+At the breaking out of the insurrection of the Philippines against Spain
+in 1896, Aguinaldo espoused the cause of liberty, and was made an
+officer and became a leader. The revolution grew and affected the native
+troops, and its spirit filled the archipelago. It became the purpose of
+the more fiery patriots to "drive the Spaniards into the sea."
+
+Aguinaldo advocated the acceptance of concessions by the Spanish
+Government, by which the rights of the native races should be recognized
+and protected. His policy was accepted, and the insurgents disbanded. He
+received Spanish gold to abandon the war for independence, and fell
+under the suspicion that his patriotism was purchasable. This suspicion
+has shadowed his fame. He went to Hong Kong.
+
+The island Hong Kong, which is English, is a school of good government.
+Here Aguinaldo seems to have conceived an ambition to free the native
+races of the archipelago, and form a republic of the confederated
+islands. The Spanish-American War revealed to him an opportunity to
+strike for liberty. He said to the Filipinos: "The hour has come."
+
+The Filipinos looked upon him as the man for the crisis.
+
+An article in the Review of Reviews represents the chief as saying to an
+American naval officer:
+
+"There will be war between your country and Spain, and in that war you
+can do the greatest deed in history by putting an end to Castilian
+tyranny in my native land. We are not ferocious savages. On the
+contrary, we are unspeakably patient and docile. That we have risen from
+time to time is no sign of bloodthirstiness on our part, but merely of
+manhood resenting wrongs which it is no longer able to endure. You
+Americans revolted for nothing at all compared with what we have
+suffered. Mexico and the Spanish republics rose in rebellion and swept
+the Spaniard into the sea, and all their sufferings together would not
+equal that which occurs every day in the Philippines. We are supposed to
+be living under the laws and civilization of the nineteenth century, but
+we are really living under the practices of the Middle Ages.
+
+"A man can be arrested in Manila, plunged into jail, and kept there
+twenty years without ever having a hearing or even knowing the complaint
+upon which he was arrested. There is no means in the legal system there
+of having a prompt hearing or of finding out what the charge is. The
+right to obtain evidence by torture is exercised by military, civil, and
+ecclesiastical tribunals. To this right there is no limitation, nor is
+the luckless witness or defendant permitted to have a surgeon, a
+counsel, a friend, or even a bystander to be present during the
+operation. As administered in the Philippines one man in every ten dies
+under the torture, and nothing is ever heard of him again. Everything is
+taxed, so that it is impossible for the thriftiest peasant farmer or
+shopkeeper to ever get ahead in life.
+
+"The Spanish policy is to keep all trade in the hands of the Spanish
+merchants, who come out here from the peninsula and return with a
+fortune. The Government budget for education is no larger than the sum
+paid by the Hong Kong authorities for the support of Victoria College
+here. What little education is had in the Philippines is obtained from
+the good Jesuits, who, in spite of their being forbidden to practice
+their priestly calling in Luzon, nevertheless devote their lives to
+teaching their fellow-countrymen. They carry the same principle into the
+Church, and no matter how devout, able, or learned a Filipino or even a
+half-breed may be, he is not permitted to enter a religious order or
+ever to be more than an acolyte, sexton, or an insignificant assistant
+priest. The State taxes the people for the lands which it says they own,
+and which as a matter of fact they have owned from time immemorial, and
+the Church collects rent for the same land upon the pretext that it
+belongs to them under an ancient charter of which there is no record.
+Neither life nor limb, liberty nor property have any security whatever
+under the Spanish administration."
+
+Such was his indictment of Spain.
+
+He began a war for independence from Spain in the provinces of Luzon. He
+was an inspiring general and practically made prisoners of some fifteen
+thousand of the Spanish forces. He organized a Government at least
+nominally Republican, although it has been called a dictatorship. The
+purchase of the Philippines by the United States, in accordance with the
+Treaty of Paris, has been opposed by Aguinaldo and his followers in a
+most distressing war. He has claimed the absolute independence of all
+the Philippines, although, so far as our knowledge goes, his authority
+does not extend far beyond certain districts of the Island of Luzon.
+Without anticipating the verdict of history upon our relations to the
+Philippines, it is enough to add that the bloodshed and suffering caused
+by this war are most deplorable.
+
+
+HONG KONG.
+
+HONG KONG and the China Sea have come to stand not only for Europe in
+Asia, but for America in Asia, though of the latter, Manila is the port.
+The center of the world's forces changes, and it is a strange current of
+events that has made the China Sea, with its English port of Hong Kong,
+and the Luzon port of Manila, facing each other across the blue ocean
+way, the pivotal point of not only England in China, but of America in
+the East. The Anglo-Chinese community in Hong Kong represents the union
+of Europe and Asia in the family of nations, and America joins the world
+of the higher civilization at Manila, the scene of Dewey's victory.
+
+The civilizing history of Hong Kong is largely associated with Sir John
+Bowring, whom a large part of the world recalls merely as a writer of
+popular hymns; as, "In the Cross of Christ I Glory."
+
+The British free traders secured Hong Kong as a market for the East, and
+added it to the British Empire in the middle of the century. The Suez
+Canal increased the importance of Hong Kong.
+
+[Illustration: Hong Kong]
+
+Hong Kong, not being an integral part of Asia, became a place of
+refugees before its union with the British Empire. It lay in the route
+of the British possessions in Africa, India, and North America. Its
+Urasian destiny was seen in the alliance between Europe and Asia
+concluded at Canton (1634) between the East India Company and the
+Chinese Government. It then became the vantage ground of the Anglo-Saxon
+race. The early English Governors of Hong Kong made the port the cradle
+of liberty and free trade, and a civilizing influence in the East.
+
+The island is some nine miles long and from two to six miles broad, with
+a population of more than one hundred and twenty thousand, most of whom
+are Chinese. It was ceded in perpetuity to the British by the treaty of
+Nankin in 1843, when its Government began to be administered by Colonial
+Governors, under whom it grew commercially.
+
+The East India Trade Company had prepared the way for this little
+Britain in the East. The United States in the middle of the century
+began to trade at Canton from the ports of Boston and Salem. It is a
+very curious and almost forgotten fact that the first cargoes from New
+England to Canton consisted largely of ginseng, a plant now little
+esteemed, but which at that time had acquired such a medical reputation
+in China as to be almost worth its weight in gold. The plant was held to
+be a magical cure for nearly all diseases and to possess the gift of
+immortal youth.
+
+Boston and Salem are still adorned with the tall and stately mansions of
+these old merchants, whose wooden vessels went to the China Sea, at
+first carrying ginseng and returning with tea. A writer in a Boston
+paper thus pictures this period:
+
+"The generation that would not have had to look at a map to find out
+where Manila was when George Dewey arrived there, is almost passed away.
+These were the great sailors of their time; men who met emergencies with
+nerve and overcame tempest and adversity with equal complacency, who
+knew the merchants of Canton and Calcutta as well as the merchants of
+Salem and Boston, and whose tempers were never ruffled if even stress of
+circumstance compelled them to put up with a paltry profit of one
+hundred per cent. They lived at a time when there might easily be a
+fortune in a single freight, and when one turn round the world might
+represent more than a million of money. Most of them lived before the
+day of the bill of exchange, and when the solid old method of carrying
+specie in the hold was the familiar business practice. They knew the
+pirate of the China Sea and he of Barbary, too, for it was this
+old-fashioned system of carrying your capital with you that made the
+pirates' life worth living. They lived before the cable as well, and
+from the moment that a ship cleared from Canton or Manila or Singapore
+there was no way in the world for the consignee or the merchant in
+Boston to know what she had on board until she arrived here to speak
+for herself. Be it silks or teas or what-not, the merchant must move
+quickly to bid or buy, for the nature and value of the cargo could not
+have been discounted in advance, while the ship was skimming the oceans.
+Each vessel made her own market, and the wharf was the market place. It
+was good news, indeed, when a captain with a cargo of teas was informed
+by his owners, who may have met him upon the completion of a two years'
+cruise, that the price of tea had advanced the day before his arrival.
+It was pretty apt to be something in the captain's own pocket, too, for
+in those days he was allowed to carry twenty-five tons of freight for
+his own private speculation, and a salary of three hundred dollars a
+month in addition was not uncommon. There are retired captains on Cape
+Cod and in Salem and in the suburbs of Boston to-day who earned a
+competence in those times of Boston's water-front prosperity. They
+became masters sometimes before they were of age, and occasionally there
+would be one, like the late R. B. Forbes, who would become a great
+merchant, the head of a famous, wealthy house, known the world over,
+almost before he realized how great was the fortune that had overtaken
+him. And there was another very nice thing about those old days of
+plenty. If a man came home from China rich, invested his wealth in a
+railroad or some manufacturing or mining project that would be pretty
+apt to ruin him, all he would have to do would be to exile himself,
+under the right auspices, for another year or two in China, and then
+return to his home and friends with his fortunes quite mended."
+
+[Illustration: Iloilo.]
+
+The great merchant at Canton at the time of the Boston commercial period
+was Honqua. He was as noble as he was rich, and Mr. Forbes, the famous
+old Boston merchant, relates the following story of him:
+
+"A New England trader had gone to Canton, and had been unsuccessful, and
+owed Honqua one hundred thousand dollars. He desired to return home, but
+could not do so if he discharged the debt. Honqua heard of his
+condition, pitied him, and sent for him.
+
+"'I shall be sorry to part from you,' he said, 'but I wish you to return
+as you so desire, happy and free. Here are all your notes canceled.'"
+
+Here was superb commercialism.
+
+The American sovereignty over the Philippine Islands opens the way to
+China by the China Sea. In the progress of events the achievements of
+Magellan have led the ships of the West to the East again, and it is
+possible that there may yet be great Mongol emigrations to the western
+shores of the southern continent. The lantern or farol of Magellan was
+never more prophetic than now. So suggestion lives.
+
+
+TRAVELERS' TALES OF THE PHILIPPINES.
+
+HONG KONG is the market place of the Eastern world. Here the East and
+West meet in the airy bazaars, and from it, it is easy to find one's way
+to Luzon, over the bright sea mirrors, the sleepy, dreamy splendors of
+the China Sea.
+
+But few travelers have written books on Luzon, and those have usually
+published them in French or in Spanish. Travelers from the East have, as
+a rule, not remained long on the island, where earthquakes, typhoons,
+malarial fevers, and the plague itself have been not unfrequent
+visitors, and where one welcomes gratefully the shadows of the night in
+the seasons of fervid heat. The rain storms are downpours and deluges
+that are blinding, but they leave behind their inky tracts a paradise of
+beauty and bloom.
+
+The morning on the China Sea in serene weather is a royal glory. It has
+the odors of Araby and the freshness of an Eden. The earth seems
+waiting. The sails hang listlessly on the glassy, breathless straits,
+and the sun sheds its splendor through the pale blue air as powerfully
+as the clouded heavens poured down the rain.
+
+The Filipinos are a sensitive race, and many of them have a keen sense
+of injustice. Great numbers of them have a church education, and their
+views of the world are bounded by what they have learned of India,
+China, and Malaysia and Iberian peninsula from the priests of Spain.
+
+A recent traveler from Manila said to me:
+
+"The Filipinos have hot blood and are revengeful, but they are quick to
+discern justice. A boy who attended me at the hotel came to me one day
+bleeding.
+
+"'My master has beaten me,' he said, 'with a rawhide.'
+
+"'He has abused you,' I said. 'Why?'
+
+"'He took me into the storeroom and lashed me, and the rawhide cut me. I
+bleed.'
+
+"'Why did he punish you?'
+
+"'The porter told him he found me neglecting my work by hiding away and
+fighting cocks. It was not true. The porter lied; he hates me.'
+
+"'Go to the marshal and make a complaint against the landlord. Go now,
+before the blood dries. A master has no right to beat one like that. It
+is inhuman. Justice ought to be done.'
+
+"'But I do not blame _him_; he is not to blame. The porter is to blame.
+The porter lied.'
+
+"'But the marshal would hardly take up your case against the porter; he
+would hold him to be a person of slight consequence.'
+
+"'But wrong is wrong whether it be done by a landlord or his porter. The
+porter should go to prison for twenty years!'"
+
+The case then dropped, but the boy carried a case for revenge against
+the porter in his heart. He was quick to discern justice.
+
+Cockfighting is a favorite diversion among the Filipinos. A traveler
+says that he has seen Filipinos going to mass carrying gamecocks under
+their arms to set fighting in the cemetery after the service.
+
+The brutal sport is a passion, and is to be seen going on almost
+everywhere on festal days, and in the evenings in the cool shadows of
+awnings and palms.
+
+Alfred Marche published a book in Paris in 1887 entitled Luxon and
+Palaveran; Six Annes de Voyages aux Philippines. It contains some vivid
+pictures of the natives, of the habits and customs of the country, of
+the earthquakes and storms. He describes the earthquake seasons when the
+earth trembled, and the people rushed wildly into the open courts at the
+first tremor. As great as the terror was the Chinese did not leave their
+merchandise unprotected for fear of thieves, showing that the trembling
+earth did not overcome the nature of the merchant or the native thief.
+The one would face death for his goods and the other for his chance of
+getting plunder.
+
+Monsieur Marche gives some views of the tropic jungles, one of which is
+illustrated by a very curious anecdote and pictorial illustration.
+
+One day one of his native servants told him that he had seen in the
+woods an immense python, which seemed to have been gorged with some
+animal that he had swallowed, and so rendered sluggish and resistless.
+
+"I should like to see so large a serpent," said the traveler.
+
+An hour afterward, while he was sitting in the shadow of his bungalow,
+an extraordinary sight met his eyes. The native had gone into the wood
+and had put a cord about the neck of the great serpent and attached it
+to the horns of a buffalo, and the buffalo was dragging the python
+toward the bungalow. The python was seven meters long (thirty-nine
+inches to a meter), a distended mass of folds and flesh (page 356,
+Alfred Marche's Luzon).
+
+What had he swallowed? What creature was there inside of him that was
+about to be digested, and that so distorted his folds?
+
+The serpent was harmless in the noose and from the weight of his meal.
+
+The traveler severed the python's vertebrae, rendering it inoffensive,
+and then made an incision into its abdomen.
+
+A surprise followed. Out of the abdomen came a calf of some months'
+growth. The animal's legs were so doubled under its body as to make the
+latter horizontal. The serpent was prepared for the museum of the
+traveler.
+
+The same traveler describes earthquakes, after which victims were fed
+by tubes let down under the ponderous debris.
+
+One of the most interesting books of travel in Luzon that we have ever
+read is entitled Aventures d'un Gentilhomme Breton aux iles Philippines,
+par P. de la Gironiere (Paris, 1855). A part of the work has been
+translated into English by Frederick Hardman, and from this translation
+in part we select material for a view of the life of the French savant
+in Jala-Jala, a very interesting district of the island. The original
+French work is very vividly illustrated. The English abridgment is
+without illustrations. (French edition, Boston Public Library, No.
+3040a, 182. English abridgment, 5049a, 69.)
+
+THE ADVENTURES OF DR. DE LA GIRONIERE IN LUZON.
+            (After Hardman.)
+
+    CHANGING THE HEART OF A BRIGAND.
+
+"JALA-JALA is a long peninsula, stretching from north to south into the
+middle of Bay Lake. The peninsula is divided longitudinally by a chain
+of mountains, which gradually diminish in elevation, until, for the last
+three leagues, they dwindle into mere hills. These mountains, of easy
+access, are covered partly with wood and partly with beautiful pastures,
+where the grass attains a height of between one and two yards, and, when
+waving in the wind, resembles the waves of the ocean. Finer vegetation
+can nowhere be found; it is refreshed by limpid springs, flowing from
+the higher slopes of the mountain down into the lake. Owing to these
+pastures, Jala-Jala is richer in game than any other part of the island
+of Luzon. Deer, wild boar, and buffalo, quails, hens, snipes, pigeons of
+fifteen or twenty kinds, parrots; in short, all manner of birds, there
+abound. The lake teems with water-fowl, and especially with wild ducks.
+Notwithstanding its extent, the island contains no dangerous or
+carnivorous beasts; the worst things to be feared in that way is the
+civet, a little animal about the size of a cat, which attacks only
+birds; and the monkeys, which issue from the forest by troops, and lay
+waste the maize and sugar fields.
+
+"The lake, which yields excellent fish, is less favored than the land;
+for it contains a great many caymans, a creature of such enormous size
+that in a few minutes it divides a horse piecemeal and absorbs it into
+its huge stomach. The accidents occasioned by these caymans are frequent
+and terrible, and I have seen more than one Indian fall victims to them.
+
+"At the period of my purchase the only human inhabitants of Jala-Jala
+were a few Indians, of Malay extraction, who lived in the woods and
+tilled some nooks of land. At night they were pirates upon the lake, and
+they afforded shelter to all the banditti of the surrounding provinces.
+The people at Manila had given me the most dismal account of the
+district; according to them, I should soon be murdered: my turn for
+adventure was such, that all their stories, instead of alarming me, only
+increased my desire to visit men who were living almost in a savage
+state.
+
+"As soon as I had bought Jala-Jala, I traced for myself a plan of
+conduct, having for its object to attract the banditti to me; to this
+end, I felt that I must not appear among them in the character of an
+exacting and sordid owner, but in that of a father. All depended upon
+the first impressions I should make upon these Indians, now my vassals.
+On landing, I went straight to a little hamlet, composed of a few
+cabins.
+
+"My faithful coachman was with me; we were each of us armed with a good
+double-barreled gun, a brace of pistols, and a saber. I had already
+ascertained, from some fishermen, to which Indian I ought to address
+myself. This man, who was much respected by his countrymen, was called,
+in the Tagal tongue, _Mabutin-Tajo_, translatable as _The brave and
+valiant_.
+
+"He was quite capable of committing, without the slightest remorse, five
+or six murders in the course of a single expedition; but he was brave;
+and courage is a virtue before which all primitive races respectfully
+bow. My conversation with _Mabutin-Tajo_ was not long; a few words
+sufficed to win his good will, and to convert him into a faithful
+servant for the whole time I dwelt at Jala-Jala. This is how I spoke to
+him:
+
+"'You are a great rascal,' I said; 'I am the lord of Jala-Jala; it is my
+will that you amend your conduct; if you refuse, you shall expiate all
+your misdeeds. I want a guard; give me your word of honor to turn honest
+man, and I will make you my lieutenant.'
+
+"When I completed this brief harangue, Alila (that was the brigand's
+name) remained for a moment silent, his countenance indicating deep
+reflection. I waited for him to speak; not without a certain degree of
+anxiety as to what his answer would be.
+
+"'Master!' he at last exclaimed, offering me his hand and putting one
+knee to the ground, 'I will be faithful to you until death!'
+
+"I was very well pleased with this reply, but I concealed my
+satisfaction.
+
+"''Tis good,' I said; 'to show you that I have confidence in you, take
+this weapon, and use it only against enemies.'
+
+"I presented him with a Tagal sabre, on which was inscribed in Spanish:
+'Draw me not without cause, nor sheath me without honor.'
+
+"This legend I translated into Tagal; Alila thought it sublime, and
+swore ever to observe it.
+
+"'When I go to Manila,' I added, 'I will bring you epaulets and a
+handsome uniform; but you must lose no time in getting together the
+soldiers you are to command, and who will compose my guard. Take me at
+once to him among your comrades whom you think most capable of acting as
+sergeant.'
+
+"We walked a short distance to the habitation of a friend of Alila's,
+who usually accompanied him on his piratical expeditions. A few words,
+in the same strain as those I had spoken to my future lieutenant,
+produced the same effect on his comrade, and decided him to accept the
+rank I offered him. We passed the day recruiting in the various huts,
+and before night we had got together, in cavalry, a guard of ten men, a
+number I did not wish to exceed. I took the command as captain.
+
+"The next day I mustered the population of the peninsula, and,
+surrounded by my new guards, I selected a site for a village, and one
+for a house for myself. I gave orders to the fathers of families to
+build their cabins upon a line which I marked out, and I desired my
+lieutenant to employ all the hands he could procure in extracting stone,
+cutting timber, and preparing everything for my dwelling. My orders
+given, I set out for Manila, promising soon to return. On reaching home,
+I found my friends uneasy on my account; for, not having heard from me,
+they feared I had fallen victim to the caymans or the pirates. The
+narrative of my voyage, my description of Jala-Jala, far from making my
+wife averse to my project of living there, rendered her on the contrary
+impatient to visit our property, and to settle upon it."
+
+Dr. de la Gironiere lived many years at Jala-Jala in the peninsula
+country. He relates many adventures in the primitive forests, one of
+which is as follows:
+
+
+A BUFFALO HUNT IN JALA-JALA.
+
+"THE Indians consider the pursuit of the buffalo the most dangerous of
+all hunts; and my guards told me they would rather place their naked
+breast at twenty paces from a rifle's muzzle than find themselves at the
+same distance from a wild buffalo. The difference is, they say, that a
+rifle bullet may only wound, whereas a buffalo's horn is sure to kill.
+
+"Taking advantage of their fear of the buffalo, I one day informed them,
+with all the coolness I could assume, of my intention to hunt that
+animal. Thereupon they exerted all their eloquence to dissuade me from
+my project; they drew a most picturesque and intimidating sketch of the
+dangers and difficulties I should encounter; I, especially, as one
+unaccustomed to that sort of fight--for such a chase is in fact a life
+or death contest. I would not listen to them. I had declared my will; I
+would not discuss the subject, or attend to their advice.
+
+[Illustration: Boats on the River Pasig.]
+
+"It was fortunate that I did not; for these affectionate counsels, these
+alarming pictures of the dangers I was about to run, were given and
+drawn by way of snare; they had agreed among themselves to estimate my
+courage accordingly as I accepted or avoided the combat. My only reply
+was an order to get everything in readiness for the hunt. I took care
+that my wife should know nothing of the expedition, and I set out,
+accompanied by a dozen Indians, almost all armed with guns.
+
+"The buffalo is hunted differently in the plain and in the mountains. In
+the plain, all that is needed is a good horse, agility, and skill in
+throwing the lasso. In the mountains, an extraordinary degree of
+coolness is requisite. This is how the thing is done: The hunter takes a
+gun, upon which he is sure he can depend, and so places himself that the
+buffalo, on issuing from the forest, must perceive him. The very instant
+the brute sees you, he rushes upon you with his very utmost speed,
+breaking, crushing, trampling under foot, everything that impedes his
+progress. He thunders down upon you as though he would annihilate you;
+at a few paces distance, he pauses for a moment, and presents his sharp
+and menacing horns.
+
+"It is during that brief pause that the hunter must take his shot, and
+send a bullet into the center of his enemy's brow. If unfortunately the
+gun misses fire, or if his hand trembles and his ball goes askew, he is
+lost--Providence alone can save him! Such, perhaps, was the fate that
+awaited me; but I was determined to run the chance. We reached the edge
+of a large wood, in which we felt sure that buffaloes were; and there we
+halted. I was sure of my gun; I thought myself tolerably sure of my
+coolness, and I desired that the hunt should take place as if I had been
+a common Indian. I stationed myself on a spot over which everything made
+it probable that the animal would pass, and I suffered no one to remain
+near me. I sent every man to his post, and remained alone on the open
+ground, two hundred paces from the edge of the forest, awaiting a foe
+who would assuredly show me no mercy if I missed him.
+
+"That is certainly a solemn moment in which one finds himself placed
+thus between life and death, all depending on the goodness of a gun, and
+on the steadiness of the hand that grasps it. I quietly waited. When all
+had taken up their positions, two men entered the forest, having
+previously stripped off a part of their clothes, the better to climb the
+trees in case of need. They were armed only with cutlasses, and
+accompanied by dogs. For more than half an hour a mournful silence
+reigned. We listened with all our ears, but no sound was heard.
+
+"The buffalo is often very long before giving sign of life. At last the
+reiterated barking of the dogs, and the cries of the prickers, warned us
+that the beast was afoot. Soon I heard the cracking of the branches and
+young trees, which broke before him as he threaded the forest with
+frightful rapidity. The noise of his headlong career was to be compared
+only to the gallop of several horses, or to the rush of some monstrous
+and fantastical creature; it was like the approach of an avalanche. At
+that moment, I confess, my emotion was so great that my heart beat with
+extraordinary rapidity. Was it death, a terrible death, that thus
+approached me? Suddenly the buffalo appeared. He stood for a moment,
+glared wildly about him, snuffed the air of the plain, and then, his
+nostrils elevated, his horns thrown back upon his shoulders, charged
+down upon me with terrible fury.
+
+"The decisive moment had come. A victim there must be--either the
+buffalo or myself--and we were both disposed to defend ourselves
+stoutly. I should be puzzled to describe what passed within me during
+the short time the animal took to traverse the interval between us. My
+heart, which had beat so violently when I heard him tearing through the
+forest, no longer throbbed. My eyes were fixed upon his forehead with
+such intensity that I saw nothing else. There was a sort of deep silence
+within me. I was too much absorbed to hear anything--even the baying of
+the dogs as they followed their prey at a short distance.
+
+"At last the buffalo stopped, lowered his head, and presented his horns;
+just as he gave a spring I fired. My bullet pierced his skull--I was
+half saved. He fell to the ground, just a pace in front of me, with the
+ponderous noise of a mass of rock. I put my foot between his horns and
+was about to fire my second barrel, when a hollow and prolonged roar
+informed me that my victory was complete. The buffalo was dead. My
+Indians came up. Their joy turned to admiration; they were delighted; I
+was all that they wished me to be.
+
+"Their doubts had been dissipated with the smoke of my gun; I was brave,
+I had proved it, and they had now entire confidence in me. My victim was
+cut up, and carried in triumph to the village. In right of conquest I
+took his horns; they were six feet in length; I have since deposited
+them in the Nantes museum. The Indians, those lovers of metaphor, those
+givers of surnames, thenceforward called me _Malamit Oulou_--Tagal
+words, signifying 'cool head.'"
+
+The traveler describes the cayman, which is of enormous size--the whale
+of the oozy lagoon. He relates the following adventure with a boa:
+
+
+THE BOA OF LUZON.
+
+"THE other monster of which I have promised a description, the boa, is
+common in the Philippines, but it is rare to meet with a very large
+specimen. It is possible, even probable, that centuries (?) are
+necessary for this reptile to attain its largest size; and to such an
+age the various accidents to which animals are exposed rarely suffer it
+to attain. Full-sized boas are met with only in the gloomiest, most
+remote, and most solitary forests.
+
+[Illustration: A boa.]
+
+"I have seen many boas of ordinary size, such as are found in our
+European collections. There were some, indeed, that inhabited my house;
+and one night I found one, two yards long, in possession of my bed.
+
+"Several times, passing through the woods with my Indians, I heard the
+piercing cries of a wild boar. On approaching the spot whence they
+proceeded we almost invariably found a wild boar, about whose body a boa
+had twisted its folds, and was gradually hoisting him up into the tree
+round which it had coiled itself. (See book for illustration.)
+
+"When the wild boar had reached a certain height the snake pressed him
+against the tree with a force that crushed his bones and stifled him.
+Then the boa let its prey fall, descended the tree, and prepared to
+swallow what it had slain. This last operation was much too lengthy for
+us to await its end.
+
+"To simplify matters, I sent a ball into the boa's head. Then my Indian
+took the flesh to dry (bucanier) it, and the skin for dagger sheaths. It
+is unnecessary to say that the wild boar was not forgotten. It was a
+prey that had cost us little pains.
+
+"One day an Indian surprised one of these reptiles asleep, after it had
+swallowed an enormous doe deer. Its size was such that a buffalo cart
+would have been required to transport it to the village.
+
+"The Indian cut it in pieces, and contented himself with as much as he
+could carry off. I sent for the remainder. They brought me a piece about
+eight feet long, and so large that the skin, when dried, enveloped the
+tallest man like a cloak. I gave it to my friend Lindsay.
+
+"I had not yet seen one of the full-grown reptiles, of which the Indians
+spoke to me so much (always with some exaggeration), when one afternoon,
+crossing the mountains with two shepherds, our attention was attracted
+by the sustained barking of my dogs, who seemed assailing some animal
+that stood upon its defense. We at first thought it was a buffalo which
+they had brought to bay, and approached the spot with precaution.
+
+"My dogs were dispersed along the brink of a deep ravine, in which was
+an enormous boa. The monster raised his head to a height, of five or six
+feet, directing it from one edge to the other of the ravine, and
+menacing his assailants with his forked tongue; but the dogs, more
+active than he was, easily avoided his attacks. My first impulse was to
+shoot him, but then it occurred to me to take him alive and send him to
+France. Assuredly he would have been the most monstrous boa that had
+ever been seen there. To carry out my design, we manufactured nooses of
+cane, strong enough to resist the most powerful wild buffalo. With great
+precaution we succeeded in passing one of our nooses round the boa's
+neck; then we tied him tightly to a tree, in such a manner as to keep
+its head at its usual height--about six feet from the ground.
+
+"This done, we crossed to the other side of the ravine and threw another
+noose over him, which we secured like the first. When he felt himself
+thus fixed at both ends, he coiled and writhed, and grappled several
+little trees which grew within his reach along the edge of the ravine.
+Unluckily for him, everything yielded to his efforts; he tore up the
+young trees by the roots, broke off the branches, and dislodged enormous
+stones, round which he sought in vain to obtain the hold or point of
+resistance he needed. The nooses were strong, and withstood his most
+furious efforts. To convey an animal like this several buffaloes and a
+whole system of cordage was necessary. Night approached; confident in
+our nooses we left the place, proposing to return next morning and
+complete the capture--but we reckoned without our host. In the night the
+boa changed his tactics, got his body round some huge blocks of basalt,
+and finally succeeded in breaking his bonds and getting clear off. I was
+greatly disappointed, for I doubted whether I should ever have another
+chance.
+
+"Human beings rarely fall victims to these huge reptiles. I was able to
+verify but one instance. A criminal hid from justice in a cavern. His
+father, who alone knew of his hiding place, went sometimes to see him
+and to take him rice. One day he found, instead of his son, an enormous
+boa asleep. He killed it, and found his son's body in its stomach. The
+priest of the village, who went to give the body Christian burial, and
+who saw the remains of the boa, described it to me as of almost
+incredible size."
+
+
+AN ADVENTURE WITH A MONSTER CAYMAN.
+
+"At the period at which I first occupied my habitation and began to
+colonize the village of Jala-Jala, caymans abounded upon that side of
+the lake. From my windows I daily saw them gamboling in the water, and
+waylaying and snapping at the dogs that ventured too near the brink. One
+day a female servant of my wife's having been so imprudent as to bathe
+at the edge of the lake was surprised by one of them, a monster of
+enormous size. One of my guards came up at the very moment she was being
+carried off; he fired his carbine at the brute and hit it under the
+fore-leg (the armpit), which is the only vulnerable place. But the wound
+was insufficient to check the cayman's progress, and it disappeared with
+its prey. Nevertheless, this little bullet-hole was the cause of its
+death; and here it is to be noted that the slightest wound received by
+the cayman is incurable. The shrimps, which abound in the lake, get into
+the hurt; little by little their number increases, until at last they
+penetrate deep into the solid flesh and into the very interior of the
+body. This is what happened to the one which devoured my wife's maid. A
+month after the accident the monster was found dead upon the bank five
+or six leagues from my house. Indians brought me back the unfortunate
+woman's earrings, which they had found in its stomach.
+
+"Upon another occasion a Chinese was riding with me. We reached a river,
+and I let him go on alone in order to ascertain whether the river was
+very deep or not. On a sudden three or four caymans, which lay in
+waiting under the water, threw themselves upon him; horse and Chinese
+disappeared, and for some minutes the water was tinged with blood.
+
+"I was very curious to obtain a near sight of one of these voracious
+monsters. At the time that they frequented the vicinity of my house I
+made several attempts to attain that end. One night I baited a huge
+hook, secured by a chain and strong cord, with an entire sheep. Next
+morning sheep and chain had disappeared. I lay in wait for the creatures
+with my gun, but the bullets rebounded from their scales. A large dog,
+of a race peculiar to the Philippines and exceeding any European dog in
+size, happening to die, I had his carcase dragged to the shore of the
+lake; I then hid myself in a little thicket and waited, with my gun in
+readiness, the coming of a cayman. But presently I fell asleep, and when
+I awoke the dog had disappeared. It was fortunate the cayman had not
+taken the wrong prey.
+
+"When the colony of Jala-Jala had been a few years founded, the caymans
+disappeared from its neighborhood. I was out one morning with my
+shepherds, at a few leagues from my house, when we came to a river which
+must be swum across. One of them advised me to ascend it to a narrower
+place, for that it was full of caymans, and I was about to do so when
+another Indian, more imprudent than his companions, spurred his horse
+into the stream. 'I do not fear the caymans!' he exclaimed. But he was
+scarcely halfway cross when we saw a cayman of monstrous size advancing
+toward him. We uttered a shout of warning; he at once perceived the
+danger, and, to avoid it, got off his horse at the opposite side to that
+upon which the cayman was approaching, and swam with all his strength
+toward the bank. On reaching it, he paused behind a fallen tree trunk,
+where he had water to his knees, and where, believing himself in perfect
+safety, he drew his cutlass and waited. Meanwhile the cayman reared his
+enormous head out of the water, threw himself upon the horse, and seized
+him by the saddle. The horse made an effort, the girths broke, and,
+while the cayman crunched the leather, the steed reached dry land.
+Perceiving that the saddle was not what he wanted, the cayman dropped it
+and advanced upon the Indian. We shouted to him to run. The poor fellow
+would not stir, but waited calmly, cutlass in hand, and, on the
+alligator's near approach, dealt him a blow upon the head. He might as
+well have tapped upon an anvil. The next instant he was writhing in the
+monster's jaws. For more than a minute we beheld him dragged in the
+direction of the lake, his body erect above the surface of the water
+(the cayman had seized him by the thigh), his hands joined, his eyes
+turned to heaven, in the attitude of a man imploring divine mercy. Soon
+he disappeared. The drama was over, the cayman's stomach was his tomb.
+
+"During this agonizing moment we had all remained silent, but no sooner
+had my poor shepherd disappeared than we vowed we would avenge his
+death.
+
+"I had three nets made of strong cord, each net large enough to form a
+complete barrier across the river. I also had a hut built, and put an
+Indian to live in it, whose duty was to keep constant watch and to let
+me know as soon as the cayman returned to the river. He watched in vain
+for upward of two months; but at the end of that time he came and told
+me that the monster had seized a horse and dragged it into the river to
+devour it at leisure. I immediately repaired to the spot, accompanied by
+my guards, by my priest, who positively would see a cayman hunt, and by
+an American friend of mine, Mr. Russell, of the house of Russell and
+Sturgis, who was then staying with me. I had the nets spread at
+intervals, so that the cayman could not escape back into the lake. This
+operation was not effected without some acts of imprudence; thus, for
+instance, when the nets were arranged, an Indian dived to make sure that
+they reached the bottom, and that our enemy could not escape by passing
+below them. But it might very well have happened that the cayman was in
+the interval between the nets, and so have gobbled up my Indian.
+Fortunately everything passed as we wished. When all was ready, I
+launched three pirogues, strongly fastened together side by side, with
+some Indians in the center, armed with lances, and with tall bamboos
+with which they could touch bottom. At last, all measures having been
+taken to attain my end without any risk or accident, my Indians began to
+explore the river with their long bamboos.
+
+"An animal of such formidable size as the one we sought can not very
+easily hide himself, and soon we beheld him upon the surface of the
+river, lashing the water with his long tail, snapping and clattering
+with his jaws, and endeavoring to get at those who dared disturb him in
+his retreat. A universal shout of joy greeted his appearance; the
+Indians in the pirogues hurled their lances at him, while we, upon
+either shore of the river, fired a volley. The bullets rebounded from
+the monster's scales, which they were unable to penetrate; the keener
+lances made their way between the scales and entered the cayman's body
+some eight or ten inches. Thereupon he disappeared, swimming with
+incredible rapidity, and reached the first net.
+
+"The resistance it opposed turned him; he reascended the river, and
+again appeared on the top of the water. This violent movement broke the
+staves of the lances which the Indians had stuck into him, and the iron
+alone remained in the wounds. Each time that he reappeared the firing
+recommenced, and fresh lances were plunged into his enormous body.
+Perceiving, however, how ineffectual firearms were to pierce his
+cuirass of invulnerable scales, I excited him by my shouts and gestures;
+and when he came to the edge of the water, opening his enormous jaws all
+ready to devour me, I approached the muzzle of my gun to within a few
+inches and fired both barrels, in the hope that the bullets would find
+something softer than scales in the interior of that formidable cavern,
+and that they would penetrate to his brain. All was in vain. The jaws
+closed with a terrible noise, seizing only the fire and smoke that
+issued from my gun, and the balls flattened against his bones without
+injuring them. The animal, which had now become furious, made
+inconceivable efforts to seize one of his enemies; his strength seemed
+to increase instead of diminishing, while our resources were nearly
+exhausted. Almost all our lances were sticking in his body, and our
+ammunition drew to an end. The fight had lasted more than six hours,
+without any result that could make us hope its speedy termination, when
+an Indian struck the cayman, while at the bottom of the water, with a
+lance of unusual strength and size.
+
+"Another Indian struck two vigorous blows with a mace upon the butt end
+of the lance; the iron entered deep into the animal's body, and
+immediately, with a movement as swift as lightning, he darted toward the
+nets and disappeared. The lance-pole, detached from the iron head,
+returned to the surface of the water; for some minutes we waited in
+vain for the monster's reappearance; we thought that his last effort had
+enabled him to reach the lake, and that our chase was perfectly
+fruitless. We hauled in the first net, a large hole in which convinced
+us that our supposition was correct. The second net was in the same
+condition as the first. Disheartened by our failure, we were hauling in
+the third when we felt a strong resistance. Several Indians began to
+drag it toward the bank, and presently, to our great joy, we saw the
+cayman upon the surface of the water, expiring.
+
+"We threw over him several lassos of strong cords, and when he was well
+secured we drew him to land. It was no easy matter to haul him up on the
+bank; the strength of forty Indians hardly sufficed. When at last we had
+got him completely out of the water, and had him before our eyes, we
+stood stupefied with astonishment; for a very different thing was it to
+see his body thus, and to see him swimming when he was fighting against
+us. Mr. Russell, a very competent person, was charged with his
+measurement. From the extremity of the nostrils to the tip of the tail
+he was found to be _twenty-seven feet_ long, and his circumference was
+eleven feet, measured under the armpits. His belly was much more
+voluminous, but we thought it useless to measure him there, judging that
+the horse upon which he had breakfasted must considerably have
+increased his bulk."
+
+
+SWIFTS.
+
+The edible swallows' nests are found in most of the islands of the
+Eastern archipelago.
+
+A traveler, Mr. H. Pryer, who made a visit to one of the swifts' caves
+in Borneo, thus describes the coming and the going of the dusky birds:
+
+"At a quarter past six in the evening the swifts began to return to the
+caves of their nests; a few had been flying in and out all day long, but
+now they began to pour in, at first in tens and then in hundreds, until
+the sound of their wings was like a strong gale of wind whistling
+through the rigging of a ship.
+
+"They continued flying until after midnight. As long as it remained
+light I found it impossible to catch any with my butterfly net, but
+after dark I found it only necessary to wave my net to secure as many as
+I wanted.
+
+"They must possess wonderful powers of sight to fly about in the dark of
+the recesses of their caves and to return to their nests, which are
+often built in places where no light penetrates."
+
+The edible nests are a luxury in China, where they are used in soups.
+The bird makes her nest of saliva, and plasters it on to the rocks
+inside of caves. The nests are collected by means of boats, ropes, and
+ladders, and bring in the Chinese market from L2 to L7 per pound. There
+have been imported to Canton more than eight million nests in a single
+year.
+
+Such are some views of life inside of the vast possession of the sea
+which Magellan discovered for Spain, but which has fallen under the
+folds of the flag of the Republic of the West.
+
+                            THE END.
+
+
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+      D. APPLETON AND COMPANY'S PUBLICATIONS.
+      --------------------------------------
+
+      BOOKS BY WILLIAM O. STODDARD.
+
+      UNIFORM EDITION. EACH, 12MO, CLOTH, $1.50.
+
+      _WITH THE BLACK PRINCE._ A Story of Adventure in the Fourteenth
+      Century. Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst.
+
+      This is a story of adventure and of battle, but it is also an
+      informing presentation of life in England and some phases of life
+      in France in the fourteenth century. The hero is associated with
+      the Black Prince at Crecy and elsewhere. Mr. Stoddard has done his
+      best work in this story, and the absorbing interest of his stirring
+      historical romance will appeal to all young readers.
+
+      _SUCCESS AGAINST ODDS; or, How an American Boy made his Way._
+      Illustrated by B. West Clinedinst.
+
+      In this spirited and interesting story Mr. Stoddard tells the
+      adventures of a plucky boy who fought his own battles, and made his
+      way upward from poverty in a Long Island seashore town. It is a
+      tale of pluck and self-reliance capitally told. The seashore life
+      is vividly described, and there are plenty of exciting incidents.
+
+      _THE RED PATRIOT._ A Story of the American Revolution. Illustrated
+      by B. West Clinedinst.
+
+      _THE WINDFALL; or, After the Flood._ Illustrated by B. West
+      Clinedinst.
+
+      _CHRIS, THE MODEL-MAKER._ A Story of New York. With 6 full-page
+      Illustrations by B. West Clinedinst.
+
+      _ON THE OLD FRONTIER._ With 10 full-page Illustrations.
+
+      _THE BATTLE OF NEW YORK._ With 11 full-page Illustrations and
+      colored Frontispiece.
+
+      _LITTLE SMOKE._ A Story of the Sioux Indians. With 12 full-page
+      Illustrations by F. S. Dellenbaugh, portraits of Sitting Bull, Red
+      Cloud, and other chiefs, and 72 head and tail pieces representing
+      the various implements and surroundings of Indian life.
+
+      _CROWDED OUT O' CROFIELD._ The story of a country boy who fought
+      his way to success in the great metropolis. With 23 Illustrations
+      by C. T. Hill.
+
+      D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.
+
+      ----------------------------------
+
+      D. APPLETON AND COMPANY'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+      GOOD BOOKS FOR YOUNG READERS.
+
+      _THE EXPLOITS OF MYLES STANDISH._ By HENRY JOHNSON (Muirhead
+      Robertson), author of "From Scrooby to Plymouth Rock," etc.
+      Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+      "A vivid picture, keen and penetrating in its interests, and
+      familiarizing young people in a popular way with the hardships
+      endured by the early settlers of New England"--_Boston Herald._
+
+      "All that concerns the settlement at New Plymouth is told with fine
+      skill and vividness of description.... A book that must be read
+      from cover to cover with unfaltering interest."--_Boston Saturday
+      Evening Gazette._
+
+      _CHRISTINE'S CAREER._ A Story for Girls. By PAULINE KING.
+      Illustrated. 12mo. Cloth, specially bound. $1.50.
+
+      The story is fresh and modern, relieved by incidents and constant
+      humor, and the lessons which are suggested are most beneficial.
+
+      _JOHN BOYD'S ADVENTURES._ By THOMAS W. KNOX, author of "The Boy
+      Travelers," etc. With 12 full-page Illustrations. 12mo. Cloth,
+      $1.50.
+
+      _ALONG THE FLORIDA REEF._ By CHARLES F. HOLDER, joint author of
+      "Elements of Zoology." With numerous Illustrations. 12mo. Cloth,
+      $1.50.
+
+      _ENGLISHMAN'S HAVEN._ By W. J. GORDON, author of "The
+      Captain-General," etc. With 8 full-page Illustrations. 12mo. Cloth,
+      $1.50.
+
+      _WE ALL._ A Story of Outdoor Life and Adventure in Arkansas. By
+      OCTAVE THANET. With 12 full-page Illustrations by E. J. Austen and
+      Others, 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+      _KING TOM AND THE RUNAWAYS._ By LOUIS PENDLETON. The experiences of
+      two boys in the forests of Georgia. With 6 Illustrations by E. W.
+      Kemble. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+      D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.
+
+      ---------------------------------
+
+
+      _BOYS IN THE MOUNTAINS AND ON THE PLAINS; or, The Western
+      Adventures of Tom Smart, Bob Edge, and Peter Small._ By W. H.
+      RIDEING, Member of the Geographical Surveys under Lieutenant
+      Wheeler. With 101 Illustrations. Square 8vo. Cloth, gilt side and
+      back, $2.50.
+
+      "A handsome gift-book relating to travel, adventure, and field
+      sports in the West."--_New York Times._
+
+      "Mr. Rideing's book is intended for the edification of advanced
+      young readers. It narrates the adventures of Tom Smart, Bob Edge,
+      and Peter Small, in their travels through the mountainous region of
+      the West, principally in Colorado. The author was a member of the
+      Wheeler expedition, engaged in surveying the Territories, and his
+      descriptions of scenery, mining life, the Indians, games, etc., are
+      in a great measure derived from personal observation and
+      experience. The volume is handsomely illustrated, and can not but
+      prove attractive to young readers."--_Chicago Journal._
+
+      _BOYS COASTWISE; or, All Along the Shore._ By W. H. RIDEING,
+      Uniform with "Boys in the Mountains." With numerous Illustrations.
+      Illuminated boards, $1.75.
+
+      "Fully equal to the best of the year's holiday books for boys....
+      In his present trip the author takes them among scenes of the
+      greatest interest to all boys, whether residents on the coast or
+      inland--along the wharves of the metropolis, aboard the pilot-boats
+      for a cruise, with a look at the great ocean steamers, among the
+      life-saving men, coast wreckers and divers, and finally on a tour
+      of inspection of lighthouses and lightships, and other interesting
+      phases of nautical and coast life."--_Christian Union._
+
+      _THE CRYSTAL HUNTERS._ A Boy's Adventures in the Higher Alps. By
+      GEORGE MANVILLE FENN, author of "In the King's Name," "Dick o' the
+      Fens," etc. 12mo, Cloth, $1.50.
+
+      "This is the boys' favorite author, and of the many books Mr. Fenn
+      has written for them this will please them the best. While it will
+      not come under the head of sensational, it is yet full of life and
+      of those stirring adventures which boys always delight
+      in."--_Christian at Work._
+
+      "English pluck and Swiss coolness are tested to the utmost in these
+      perilous explorations among the higher Alps, and quite as thrilling
+      as any of the narrow escapes is the account of the first breathless
+      ascent of a real mountain-peak. It matters little to the reader
+      whether the search for crystals is rewarded or not, so concerned
+      does he become for the fate of the hunters."--_Literary World._
+
+      _SYD BELTON: The Boy who would not go to Sea._ By GEORGE MANVILLE
+      FENN. With 6 full-page Illustrations. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
+
+      "Who among the young story-reading public will not rejoice at the
+      sight of the old combination, so often proved admirable--a story by
+      Manville Fenn, illustrated by Gordon Browne! The story, too, is one
+      of the good old sort, full of life and vigor, breeziness and fun.
+      It begins well and goes on better, and from the time Syd joins his
+      ship, exciting incidents follow each other in such rapid and
+      brilliant succession that nothing short of absolute compulsion
+      would induce the reader to lay it down."--_London Journal of
+      Education._
+
+      D. APPELTON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.
+
+      ----------------------------------
+
+      YOUNG HEROES OF OUR NAVY.
+
+      Uniform Edition. Each, 12mo, Cloth, $1.00.
+
+=Dewey on the Mississippi.=
+
+      The Story of the Admiral's Younger Years. By ROSSITER JOHNSON. A
+      New Book in the Young Heroes of our Navy Series. Illustrated.
+
+=The Hero of Erie (Commodore Perry).=
+
+      By JAMES BARNES, author of "Midshipman Farragut," "Commodore
+      Bainbridge," etc. With 10 full-page Illustrations.
+
+=Commodore Bainbridge.=
+
+      From the Gunroom to the Quarter-deck. By JAMES BARNES, author of
+      "Midshipman Farragut." Illustrated by George Gibbs and Others.
+
+=Midshipman Farragut.=
+
+      By JAMES BARNES, author of "For King or Country," etc. Illustrated
+      by Carlton T. Chapman.
+
+=Decatur and Somers.=
+
+      By MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL, author of "Paul Jones," "Little Jarvis,"
+      etc. With 6 full-page Illustrations by J. O. Davidson and Others.
+
+=Paul Jones.=
+
+      By MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL. With 8 full-page Illustrations.
+
+=Midshipman Paulding.=
+
+      A True Story of the War of 1812. By MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL. With 6
+     full-page Illustrations.
+
+=Little Jarvis.=
+
+      The story of the heroic midshipman of the frigate Constellation. By
+      MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL. With 6 full-page Illustrations.
+
+      D. APPELTON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.
+
+      ----------------------------------
+
+      D. APPELTON AND CO'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+      _PAUL AND VIRGINIA._ By BERNARDIN DE SAINT-PIERRE. With a
+      Biographical Sketch, and numerous Illustrations by Maurice Leloir.
+      8vo. Cloth, gilt top, uniform with "Picciola," "The Story of
+      Colette," and "An Attic Philosopher in Paris." $1.50.
+
+      It is believed that this standard edition of "Paul and Virginia"
+      with Leloir's charming illustrations will prove a most acceptable
+      addition to the series of illustrated foreign classics in which D.
+      Appleton and Co. have published "The Story of Colette," "An Attic
+      Philosopher in Paris," and "Picciola." No more sympathetic
+      illustrator than Leloir could be found, and his treatment of this
+      masterpiece of French literature invests it with a peculiar value.
+
+      _PICCIOLA._ By X. B. SAINTINE. With 130 Illustrations by J. F.
+      GUELDRY. 8vo. Cloth, gilt top, $1.50.
+
+      "Saintine's 'Picciola,' the pathetic tale of the prisoner who
+      raised a flower between the cracks of the flagging of his dungeon,
+      has passed definitely into the list of classic books.... It has
+      never been more beautifully housed than in this edition, with its
+      fine typography, binding, and sympathetic
+      illustrations."--_Philadelphia Telegraph._
+
+      "The binding is both unique and tasteful, and the book commends
+      itself strongly as one that should meet with general favor in the
+      season of gift-making."--_Boston Saturday Evening Gazette._
+
+      "Most beautiful in its clear type, cream-laid paper, many
+      attractive illustrations, and holiday binding."--_New York
+      Observer._
+
+      _AN ATTIC PHILOSOPHER IN PARIS; or, A Peep at the World from a
+      Garret._ Being the Journal of a Happy Man. By EMILE SOUVESTRE. With
+      numerous Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, gilt top, $1.50.
+
+      "A suitable holiday gift for a friend who appreciates refined
+      literature."--_Boston Times._
+
+      "The influence of the book is wholly good. The volume is a
+      particularly handsome one."--_Philadelphia Telegraph._
+
+      "It is a classic. It has found an appropriate reliquary. Faithfully
+      translated, charmingly illustrated by Jean Claude with full-page
+      pictures, vignettes in the text, and head and tail pieces, printed
+      in graceful type on handsome paper, and bound with an art worthy of
+      Matthews, in half-cloth, ornamented on the cover, it is an
+      exemplary book, fit to be 'a treasure for aye.'"--_New York Times._
+
+      _THE STORY OF COLETTE._ A new large-paper edition. With 36
+      Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, gilt top, $1.50.
+
+      "One of the handsomest of the books of fiction for the holiday
+      season."--_Philadelphia Bulletin._
+
+      "One of the gems of the season.... It is the story of the life of
+      young womanhood in France, dramatically told, with the light and
+      shade and coloring of the genuine artist, and is utterly free from
+      that which mars too many French novels. In its literary finish it
+      is well-nigh perfect, indicating the hand of the master."--_Boston
+      Traveller._
+
+      New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.
+
+      ----------------------------------------------
+
+      D. APPLETON AND CO.'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+      _THE FARMER'S BOY._ By CLIFTON JOHNSON, author of "The Country
+      School in New England," etc. With 64 Illustrations by the Author.
+      8vo. Cloth, $2.50.
+
+      "One of the handsomest and most elaborate juvenile works lately
+      published."--_Philadelphia Item._
+
+      "Mr. Johnson's style is almost rhythmical, and one lays down the
+      book with the sensation of having read a poem and that saddest of
+      all longings, the longing for vanished youth."--_Boston Commercial
+      Bulletin._
+
+      "As a triumph of the realistic photographer's art it deserves warm
+      praise quite aside from its worth as a sterling book on the
+      subjects its title indicates.... It is a most praiseworthy book,
+      and the more such that are published the better."--_New York Mail
+      and Express._
+
+      "The book is beautiful and amusing, well studied, well written,
+      redolent of the wood, the field, and the stream, and full of those
+      delightful reminders of a boy's country home which touch the
+      heart."--_New York Independent._
+
+      "One of the finest books of the kind that have ever been put
+      out."--_Cleveland World._
+
+      "A book on whose pages many a gray-haired man would dwell with
+      retrospective enjoyment."--_St. Paul Pioneer Press._
+
+      "The illustrations are admirable, and the book will appeal to every
+      one who has had a taste of life on a New England farm."--_Boston
+      Transcript._
+
+      _THE COUNTRY SCHOOL IN NEW ENGLAND._ By CLIFTON JOHNSON. With 60
+      Illustrations from Photographs and Drawings made by the Author.
+      Square 8vo. Cloth, gilt edges, $2.50.
+
+      "An admirable undertaking, carried out in an admirable way.... Mr.
+      Johnson's descriptions are vivid and lifelike and are full of
+      humor, and the illustrations, mostly after photographs, give a
+      solid effect of realism to the whole work, and are superbly
+      reproduced.... The definitions at the close of this volume are
+      very, very funny, and yet they are not stupid; they are usually the
+      result of deficient logic."--_Boston Beacon._
+
+      "A charmingly written account of the rural schools in this section
+      of the country. It speaks of the old-fashioned school days of the
+      early quarter of this century, of the mid-century schools, of the
+      country school of to-day, and of how scholars think and write. The
+      style is animated and picturesque.... It is handsomely printed, and
+      is interesting from its pretty cover to its very last
+      page."--_Boston Saturday Evening Gazette._
+
+      "A unique piece of book-making that deserves to be popular....
+      Prettily and serviceably bound, and well illustrated."--_The
+      Churchman._
+
+      "The readers who turn the leaves of this handsome book will unite
+      in saying the author has 'been there.' It is no fancy sketch, but
+      text and illustrations are both a reality."--_Chicago Inter-Ocean._
+
+      "No one who is familiar with the little red schoolhouse can look at
+      these pictures and read these chapters without having the mind
+      recall the boyhood experiences, and the memory is pretty sure to be
+      a pleasant one."--_Chicago Times._
+
+      "A superbly prepared volume, which by its reading matter and its
+      beautiful illustrations, so natural and finished, pleasantly and
+      profitably recalls memories and associations connected with the
+      very foundations of our national greatness."--_N. Y. Observer._
+
+      New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.
+
+      -----------------------------------------------
+
+      D. APPLETON AND CO.'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+      _UNCLE REMUS. His Songs and his Sayings._ By JOEL CHANDLER HARRIS.
+      With new Preface and Revisions, and 112 Illustrations by A. B.
+      Frost. Library Edition. 12mo. Buckram, gilt top, uncut, $2.00.
+      Also, _Edition de luxe_ of the above, limited to 250 copies, each
+      signed by the author, with the full-page cuts mounted on India
+      paper. 8vo. White vellum, gilt top, $10.00.
+
+      "The old tales of the plantation have never been told as Mr. Harris
+      has told them. Each narrative is to the point, and so swift in its
+      action upon the risibilities of the reader that one almost loses
+      consciousness of the printed page, and fancies it is the voice of
+      the lovable old darky himself that steals across the senses and
+      brings mirth inextinguishable as it comes; ... and Mr. Frost's
+      drawings are so superlatively good, so inexpressibly funny, that
+      they promise to make this the standard edition of a standard
+      book."--_New York Tribune._
+
+      "An exquisite volume, full of good illustrations, and if there is
+      anybody in this country who doesn't know Mr. Harris, here is an
+      opportunity to make his acquaintance and have many a good
+      laugh."--_New York Herald._
+
+      "There is but one 'Uncle Remus,' and he will never grow old.... It
+      was a happy thought, that of marrying the work of Harris and
+      Frost."--_New York Mail and Express._
+
+      "Nobody could possibly have done this work better than Mr. Frost,
+      whose appreciation of negro life fitted him especially to be the
+      interpreter of 'Uncle Remus,' and whose sense of the humor in
+      animal life makes these drawings really illustrations in the
+      fullest sense. Mr. Harris's well-known work has become in a sense a
+      classic, and this may be accepted as the standard
+      edition."--_Philadelphia Times._
+
+      "A book which became a classic almost as soon as it was
+      published.... Mr. Frost has never done anything better in the way
+      of illustration, if indeed he has done anything as good."--_Boston
+      Advertiser._
+
+      "We pity the reader who has not yet made the acquaintance of 'Uncle
+      Remus' and his charming story.... Mr. Harris has made a real
+      addition to literature purely and strikingly American, and Mr.
+      Frost has aided in fixing the work indelibly on the consciousness
+      of the American reader."--_The Churchman._
+
+      "The old fancies of the old negro, dear as they may have been to us
+      these many years, seem to gain new life when they appear through
+      the medium of Mr. Frost's imagination."--_New York Home Journal._
+
+      "In his own peculiar field 'Uncle Remus' has no rival. The book has
+      become a classic, but the latest edition is the choice one. It is
+      rarely riven to an author to see his work accompanied by pictures
+      so closely in sympathy with his text."--_San Francisco Argonaut._
+
+      "We say it with the utmost faith that there is not an artist who
+      works in illustration that can catch the attitude and expression,
+      the slyness, the innate depravity, the eye of surprise, obstinacy,
+      the hang of the head or the kick of the heels of the mute and the
+      brute creation as Mr. Frost has shown to us here."--_Baltimore
+      Sun._
+
+      New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.
+
+      -----------------------------------------------
+
+      D. APPLETON AND CO'S PUBLICATIONS.
+
+      _THE STORY OF WASHINGTON._ By ELIZABETH EGGLESTON SEELYE. Edited by
+      Dr. Edward Eggleston. With over 100 Illustrations by Allegra
+      Eggleston. A new volume in the "Delights of History" Series,
+      uniform with "The Story of Columbus." 12mo. Cloth, $1.75.
+
+      "One of the best accounts of the incidents of Washington's life for
+      young people."--_New York Observer._
+
+      "The Washington described is not that of the demigod or hero of the
+      first half of this century, but the man Washington, with his
+      defects as well as his virtues, his unattractive traits as well as
+      his pleasing ones.... There is greater freedom from errors than in
+      more pretentious lives."--_Chicago Tribune._
+
+      "The illustrations are numerous, and actually illustrate, including
+      portraits and views, with an occasional map and minor pictures
+      suggestive of the habits and customs of the period. It is
+      altogether an attractive and useful book, and one that should find
+      many readers among American boys and girls."--_Philadelphia Times._
+
+      "A good piece of literary work presented in an attractive
+      shape."--_New York Tribune._
+
+      "Will be read with interest by young and old. It is told with good
+      taste and accuracy, and if the first President loses some of his
+      mythical goodness in this story, the real greatness of his natural
+      character stands out distinctly, and his example will be all the
+      more helpful to the boys and girls of this generation."--_New York
+      Churchman._
+
+      "The book is just what has been needed, the story of the life of
+      Washington, as well as of his public career, written in a manner so
+      interesting that one who begins it will finish, and so told that it
+      will leave not the memory of a few trivial anecdotes by which to
+      measure the man, but a just and complete estimate of him. The
+      illustrations are so excellent as to double the value of the book
+      as it would be without them."--_Chicago Times._
+
+      _THE STORY OF COLUMBUS._ By ELIZABETH EGGLESTON SEELYE. Edited by
+      Dr. Edward Eggleston. With 100 Illustrations by Allegra Eggleston.
+      "Delights of History" Series. 12mo. Cloth, $1.75.
+
+      "A brief, popular, interesting, and yet critical volume, just such
+      as we should wish to place in the hands of a young reader. The
+      authors of this volume have done their best to keep it on a high
+      plane of accuracy and conscientious work without losing sight of
+      their readers."--_New York Independent._
+
+      "In some respects altogether the best book that the Columbus year
+      has brought out."--_Rochester Post-Express._
+
+      "A simple story told in a natural fashion, and will be found far
+      more interesting than many of the more ambitions works on a similar
+      theme."--_New York Journal of Commerce._
+
+      "This is no ordinary work. It is pre-eminently a work of the
+      present time and of the future as well."--_Boston Traveller._
+
+      "Mrs. Seelye's book is pleasing in its general effect, and reveals
+      the results of painstaking and conscientious study."--_New York
+      Tribune._
+
+      "A very just account is given of Columbus, his failings being
+      neither concealed nor magnified, but his real greatness being made
+      plain."--_New York Examiner._
+
+      "The illustrations are particularly well chosen and neatly
+      executed, and they add to the general excellence of the
+      volume."--_New York Times._
+
+      New York: D. APPELTON AND CO., 72, Fifth Avenue.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Story of Magellan and The
+Discovery of the Philippines, by Hezekiah Butterworth
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE STORY OF MAGELLAN ***
+
+***** This file should be named 37814.txt or 37814.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/8/1/37814/
+
+Produced by Charlene Taylor, Eric Skeet, Marilynda
+Fraser-Cunliffe and the Online Distributed Proofreading
+Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was made using scans
+of public domain works from the University of Michigan
+Digital Libraries.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/37814.zip b/37814.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a95fa26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37814.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e66ca09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #37814 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/37814)